Sharp MX 5141n SM

3 ‘14/Jun
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX5141/S4E
DIGITAL FULL COLOR

MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MX-4140N/5140N
MX-4141N/5141N
MX-4140N A 3
MODEL MX-5141N A
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7] TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[13] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
[14] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
[15] TOOL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING 3. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 4. Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i [10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii 1. Disassembly of Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
2. Disassembly and assembly of each unit . . . . . . . . . 10-34
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the transfer unit,
[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING
the developing unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
1. HDD/SD card memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
2. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB . . . . . . . . 11-3
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
3. Necessary works and notes for replacement of the mirror-
1. System diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
ing kit HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
2. Main Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
4. Note for installing and repairing the mirroring kit . . . 11-11
3. Option list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. Details and operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
2. Copy functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
3. Printer function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 [13] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
4. Image send function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 1. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
5. Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2. DSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
6. Dimensions and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 3. RSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
7. Ambient conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 4. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS 5. Manual paper feed section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
6. Tray paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
7. Paper transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
3. Definition the developer/drum life end . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 8. Paper exit section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
5. Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 9. ADU section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 10. LSU section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
A. Identification of each section and functions . . . . . . . . . 4-1 11. OPC Drum section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29
B. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 12. Toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
C. Internal operation parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 13. Developing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
D. I/F Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 14. Transfer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
E. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 15. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
F. DSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 16. Fan and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
G. RSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 17. Operations and specifications of counters . . . . . . . . 13-46
H. Sensor, Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 [14] ELECTRICAL SECTION
I. Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
J. Clutches and solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 2. Power line diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
3. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
K. Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4. Signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
L. Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
[15] TOOL LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
M. Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
N. Fans and filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
O. PWB/Memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
P. Fuses and Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
[6] SIMULATION
1. General and purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
2. Starting the simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
3. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
4. Details of simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
[7] TROUBLE CODE
1. Trouble code and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
2. JAM and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE
1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9] MAINTENANCE
1. Works necessary when executing the maintenance . . . 9-1
2. Display of maintenance execution timing. . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
MX-5141N
NOTE FOR SERVICING Service
4) Manualthe grounding wire, never connect it to the
When connecting
following points.
Gas tube
1. Precautions for servicing
Lightning conductor
1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, grounding object by the authorities.
except when performing the communication test, etc.
Grounding wire for telephone line
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use
5) Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord.
extreme care when servicing.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not stress,
It may cause a burn. forcibly bend, or pull the power cord.
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
7) Do not place liquids or foreign metallic objects inside the
5) When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to
machine.
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other
driving sections. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. 8) Do not touch the power cord, insert the phone jack, operate
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch the machine, or perform service on the machine with wet or
oily hands.
inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or
an injury. It may cause an electric shock.
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink
excessively. Do not get them in the eyes. 3. Note for installing site
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with Do not install the machine at the following sites.
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary. 1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low tempera-
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to ture, low humidity, place under an extreme change in tem-
damage fingers when servicing. perature and humidity.
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, Paper may get damp and form condensation inside the
toner may ignite and burn you. machine, causing paper jam or copy dirt.
10) When replacing a lithium battery on a PWB, only use the spec- For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
ified replacement battery. described later.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may cause a
machine malfunction or breakdown.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may otherwise cause a machine breakdown or malfunction.
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING 2) Place of extreme vibrations
(200V series only) It may cause a breakdown.
2. Warning for servicing

1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
shock.
2) If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
3) Poorly ventilated place
An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone.
3) Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage
The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may
as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of
result.
such a machine may produce an ozone smell. Install the
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening, machine in a well ventilated place.
grounding must be made.
MX-5141N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

4) Place of direct sunlight. 4. Note for handling PWB and electronic
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may parts
undergo qualitative change.
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
It may cause a breakdown or output quality problems.
observe the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-
age by static electricity.
1) When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or
an anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.
5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier and blue
print machine may result in poor quality output.
* There was a trouble in a place where silicon-series gas or 2) When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag
volatile components are generated. Use great care for (case), use an earth band as shown below:
avoiding this. * Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the
machine.
6) Place of much dust

When dust or contaminants enters the machine, it may cause
a breakdown or poor quality output.
7) Place near a wall

The machine will require ventilation.
If ventilation is not proper, poor output or machine failure may * When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the
result. procedure on an anti-static mat.
11-13/16"
(30cm)
11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)
8) Unstable or irregular surface

If the machine is dropped or tips over, it may cause injury or
machine malfunction.
Use an optional desk or an exclusive-use desk.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and
lock the casters.
MX-5141N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU 7. Screw tightening torque
When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following The screws used in this machine are largely classified into three
items. types.
1) When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect These types are classified according to the shape of the screw
the power plug from the power outlet. grooves and use positions.
2) When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures The table below shows the types of the screws and the tightening
described in this Service Manual. torques depending on the use position.
3) When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to the
the parts including the cover installed and perform the operatable.
tion check. However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than speci-
4) Do not modify the LSU. fied on this table, or under special circumstances, the details are
5) When visually checking the inside of the machine for the oper- described on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on such
ation check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the an exception.
eyes. Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is an electrode
If the above precaution is neglected or the LSU is modified, ones or a current flows, use enough care to tighten securely to avoid
safety may be at risk. loosening.
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the Screw kinds and tightening torques
transfer unit, the developing unit Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
When handling the OPC drum unit, the transfer unit, and the devel- Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
oping unit, strictly observe the following items. diameter fixed
torque torque torque
(Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the
M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7
copy and print image quality.
M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
Drum unit
M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
1) Avoid working at a place with strong lights.
2) Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights Tapping screws (for iron)
for a long time. Tightening Tightening Tightening
3) When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it torque torque torque
diameter fixed
with light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
sheets of paper to cover it.) M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
(Plate thickness
4) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for-
0.8mm or above)
eign material on the OPC drum surface.
M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
Transfer unit (Plate thickness
1) Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign 0.8mm or above)
material on the transfer roller, primary transfer belt, and the M3 Steel plate 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
secondary transfer belt. (Plate thickness
less than 0.8mm)
Developing unit
M4 Steel plate 1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
1) Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign (Plate thickness
material on the developing unit. less than 0.8mm)
Tapping screw (for plastic)

Tightening Tightening Tightening
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
(Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
M3 Plastic resin 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
M4 Plastic resin 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
MX-5141N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

MX-5141N
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE Service Manual
1. System diagram
MX-PNX5A/B/C/D MX-FNX9 MX-PNX1A/B/C/D

PUNCH MODULE FINISHER PUNCH MODULE
MX-PC12
PLASMACLUSTER ION
GENERATOR
MX-XB16
MOUNTING KIT
MX-4140N MX-4141N
MX-5140N MX-5141N
DIGI TAL FULL COLOR DIGI TAL FULL COLOR
MU LTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM MU LTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MX-TRX2
EXIT TR AY UNIT
MX-FN10 MX-LT10
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER LONG PAPER FEEDING
MX-FN11 MX-RB20 TRAY
FINISHER PAPER PASS UNIT
MX-TU13
EXIT TR AY CABINET
MX-LC11
LARGE CA PACITY TR AY
MX-PNX6A/B/C/D
PUNCH MODULE MX-DE21 MX-DE22 MX-DE23 MX-DS18
MX-FN18 STAND/2000 SHEET S TAND/1x500 SHEET S TAND/2x500 SHEET S TAND
PAPER DR AWER PAPER DR AWER PAPER DR AWER
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
MX-PUX1 MX-PF10 MX-FX11 AR-SU1 MX-FWX1 MX-EB11 MX-FR42

XPS EX PANSION KIT BARCODE FONT KIT FACSIMILE EX PANSION KIT S TAMP UNIT INTERNET FAX EX PANSION ENHANCED COMPRESSION DATA SECURITY KIT
KIT KIT
MX-FR42U MX-EC50 MX-EB12 N MX-USX1 MX-USX5 MX-US10 MX-US50

DATA SECURITY KIT CARD SOLUTION KIT MIR R ORING KIT SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE
KIT KIT
MX-USA0 MX-UN01A MX-UN05A MX-UN10A MX-UN50A MX-UN1HA MX-AM10

SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE Sha rp OSA Net work Scanner Sha rp OSA Net work Scanner Sha rp OSA Net work Scanner Sha rp OSA Net work Scanner Sha rp OSA Net work Scanner WEB B R OWSING EX PANSION
KIT Tool 1 License Kit Tool 5 License Kit Tool 10 License Kit Tool 50 License Kit Tool 100 License Kit KIT
MX-AMX1 MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-KB11 N

APPLIC ATION APPLIC ATION EXTERNAL ACCOUNT KEYB OARD
INTEGR ATION MODULE COMMUNIC ATION MODULE MODULE
MX-5141N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

1 ‘13/Oct 3 ‘14/Jun
2. Main Function
MX-4140N MX-5140N MX-4141N MX-5141N
3
MX-4140N A MX-5141N A
Copy STD
Print PCL STD
PS STD
Scan STD
Fax OPT *1
Document Feeder STD RSPF STD DSPF
Exit Tray Cabinet STD/OPT *2
Sharp OSA STD/OPT *2
Key Board OPT STD/OPT *2
Web Browsing OPT STD/OPT *2
Wireless LAN STD *1
Compression PDF OPT STD
Panel (Inch) 10.1
HDD(GB) 320
*1: No support in some region

*2: Option in some region
3. Option list
MX-4140N MX-4141N
Model name Description MX-5140N MX-5141N Remarks
3 MX-4140N A MX-5141N A
― REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER STD ―
Document Feed System
― DUPREX SINGLE PASS FEEDER ― STD
MX-DE22 STAND/500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT
MX-DE23 STAND/2x500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT
MX-DE21 STAND/2000 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT
Paper Feed System
MX-DS18 STAND OPT OPT
MX-LC11 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY OPT OPT
MX-LT10 LONG PAPER FEEDING TRAY OPT OPT
MX-TRX2 EXIT TRAY UNIT OPT OPT
MX-TU13 EXIT TRAY CABINET STD/OPT STD/OPT *1
MX-FNX9 FINISHER OPT OPT
MX-PNX1A PUNCH MODULE OPT OPT
MX-PNX1B OPT OPT
For MX-FNX9
MX-PNX1C OPT OPT
MX-PNX1D OPT OPT
MX-FN10 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (1K) OPT OPT
MX-FN11 FINISHER (4K) OPT OPT
Paper Exit System MX-FN18 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (4K) OPT OPT
MX-RB20 PAPER PASS UNIT OPT OPT
MX-PNX5B OPT OPT
For MX-FN10
MX-PNX5C OPT OPT
MX-PNX5D OPT OPT
MX-PNX6B OPT OPT For MX-FN11
MX-PNX6C OPT OPT MX-FN18
MX-PNX6D OPT OPT
― PS3 EXPANSION KIT STD STD
Printer Expansion MX-PF10 BARCODE FONT KIT OPT OPT
MX-PUX1 XPS EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT
MX-FX11 FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT *2
Image Send Expansion AR-SU1 STAMP UNIT OPT OPT
MX-FWX1 INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT
MX-EB11 ENHANCED COMPRESSION KIT OPT STD
MX-FR42U DATA SECURITY KIT OPT OPT
MX-FR42 DATA SECURITY KIT OPT OPT
Authentication / Security
MX-EC50 CARD SOLUTION KIT OPT OPT *2
MX-EB12 N MIRRORING KIT OPT OPT
1

MX-USX1 SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-USX5 SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-US10 SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-US50 SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-USA0 SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-AMX1 APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE OPT OPT
MX-UN01A SHARP OSA NETWORK SCANNER TOOL 1 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
Application / Solution
MX-UN1HA SHARP OSA NETWORK SCANNER TOOL 100 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-AMX2 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE STD/OPT STD/OPT *1
MX-AMX3 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE STD/OPT STD/OPT *1
MX-AM10 WEB BROWSING EXPANSION KIT OPT STD/OPT *1
MX-KB11 N KEYBOARD OPT STD/OPT *1
Other MX-PC12 PLASMACLUSTER ION GENERATOR OPT OPT *2
MX-XB16 PLASMACLUSTER ION GENERATOR MOUNTING KIT OPT OPT *2
STD: Standard equipment

OPT: Installable option
*1: Option in some area
*2: No support in some area

MX-5141N
[2] SPECIFICATIONS Service Manual
1.Basic specifications
A. Engine Specification 41cpm machine 51cpm machine
Paper size Monochr Monochr
Color Color
Photo-conductor OPC (Diameter: Black: 30mm Color (Y/M/C): ome ome
kind 30mm x3 lines) Heavy paper (B4, 8.5" x 9 8 9 8
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser) 14", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 13.4",
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development 8.5" x 13.5")
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method Heavy paper (A4, 8.5" x 16 15 16 15
Transfer system Intermediate/secondary transfer belt 11", 16K, B5)
Separation system Natural separation method Heavy paper (A4R, 16KR, 12 11 12 11
* Sub separation claw is equipped. 8.5" x 11"R, B5R, 7.25" x
10.5"R)
Cleaning system Counter blade
Heavy paper (A5R, 5.5" x 16 15 16 15
Fusing system Belt method
8.5"R)
Waste toner No toner recycling system / Waste toner bottle
Heavy paper (A3W, 12 x 9 8 9 8
disposal system
18) *1
Toner supply during N/A
Heavy paper (Extra) 9 8 9 8
operation
Heavy paper (Post Card 16 15 16 15
Outer Color Pastel white, natural wave design
HIGH) *2
Heavy paper (Post Card 9 9 9 9
B. Engine speed (ppm) LOW) *2
Tray 1 - 4, LCC
*1: ppm when exiting to the finisher (A3W/12" x 18" cannot exit to
41cpm machine 51cpm machine the center tray)
Paper size Mono- Monochr *2: Switched by the service simulation setting. Postcard is set Low
Color Color
chrome ome
before shipment.
A3, 11" x 17", 8K 19 19 23 23
B4, 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 22 22 26 26
8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13.5"
C. Printable area
A4, B5, 8.5" x 11", 16K 41 41 51 51
A4R, 16KR, 8.5" x 11"R, 26 26 31 31 A3 Wide * 297 x 420mm 12" x 18" * 279 x 432mm
B5R, 7.25" x10.5"R A3 293 x 413mm 11" x 17" 275 x 425mm
A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 29 29 32 32 B4 253 x 357mm 8.5" x 14" 212 x 349mm
Extra 18 18 22 22 A4 206 x 290mm 8.5" x 13.5" 212 x 336mm
Heavy paper (A3, 11" x 17", 10 10 10 10 B5 178 x 250mm 8.5" x 13.4" 212 x 333mm
8K) A5 144 x 203mm 8.5" x 13" 212 x 323mm
Heavy paper (B4, 8.5" x 10 10 10 10 Postcard 96 x 141mm Executive 180 x 260mm
14", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 13.4", 8K 266 x 383mm 8.5" x 11" 212 x 272mm
8.5" x 13.5") 16K 191 x 263mm 5.5" x 8.5" 136 x 209mm
Heavy paper (A4, B5, 8.5" x 17 17 17 17 Custom Min: 86mm x 133mm
11", 16K) Max: 297mm x 432mm (Long paper : 1192mm)
Heavy paper (A4R, B5R, 13 13 13 13
8.5" x 11"R, 7.25" x 10.5"R, * The printable area for A3W/12" x 18" must be as large as the
16KR) A3/11" x 17" page dimension (299 x 450mm) by PCL/PS driver.
Heavy paper (A5R, 5.5" x 17 17 17 17
8.5"R) Void area Lead edge: 4mm or less
Image loss Rear edge: 2 mm or more, and 5 mm or less
Heavy paper (Extra) 10 10 10 10
Total of the lead edge and the rear edge: 8mm or less
FR total: 4mm +/- 2mm or less
Manual paper feed
41cpm machine 51cpm machine D. Engine resolution
Paper size Monochr Monochr
Color Color
ome ome
Resolution*1 Copy Writing
A3, 11" x 17", 8K 18 17 21 21 600 x 600dpi 4bit
B4, 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 21 19 25 23 9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi
8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13.5" Print Writing
A4, 8.5" x 11", 16K 41 31 51 39 600 x 600dpi
B5 41 34 51 42 9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi
A4R, 16KR, 8.5" x 11"R 24 21 30 27 1,200 x 1,200dpi
B5R, 7.25" x 10.5"R 24 23 30 28
A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 29 29 32 32
A3W, 12" x 18" *1 17 16 21 20
OHP (A4, 8.5" x 11") 16 15 16 15
OHP (A4R, 8.5" x 11"R) 12 11 12 11
Extra 17 16 21 20
Envelope (Monarch, Com- 11 10 11 10
10, DL, C5, Chokei-3,
Chokei-4,Youkei-2,Youkei-
4,
Kakugata-2,Kakugata-3)
Heavy paper (A3, 11 x 17, 9 8 9 8
8K)
MX-5141N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1
Gradation *2 Copy Writing Scanner Single: 75-sheet/min. Single: 75-sheet/min.
(256 levels) 600 x 600dpi 4bit (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit)
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi Double: 75-page/min. Double: 75-page/min.
Print Writing (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit)
PCL: Original setup Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard)
600 x 600dpi 1bit direction
600 x 600dpi 4bit Original standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi position random feeding)
1,200 x 1,200dpi 1bit Original transport Sheet-through method
PS: method
600 x 600dpi 1bit Original size Standard size
600 x 600dpi 4bit Inch-1:
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
1,200 x 1,200dpi 1bit 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-2:
*1: Resolution: 600dpi (default)
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x11"R, 5.5" x
*2: The Dither and Error Diffusion methods using 8 bit input will be 8.5", A3, A4
performed. Inch-3:
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x
8.5", A3, A4
E. Scanner section AB-1:
11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R,
(1) Resolution/Gradation B5, B5R, A5
AB-2:
Scanning Monochrome Color 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R,
Resolution (dpi) Platen 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi B5, B5R, A5
600 x 400dpi (default) AB-3:
DSPF 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R,
600 x 400dpi (default) A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
RSPF 600 x 600dpi (default) 600 x 600dpi AB-4:
Exposure lamp White LED 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R,
B5, B5R, A5
Reading gradation 10bit
AB-5:
Output gradation BW: 1bit
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R,
Gray scale: 8bit
B5, B5R, A5
Full Color: each color RGB 8bit
Long paper 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
(2) Document table Mix paper feed Enabled
(Same series,
same width paper)
Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed)
Random feeding Enabled
Scanning area 297 x 432mm
(feeding of different Only the following combinations of 2 size types are
Original standard Left top reference types / different allowed:
position widths) A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5; B5 and A5; and
Detection Yes 11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS available.
Detection size Automatic detection (One type of detection unit to Original copy Single:
be switched for software destination) weight Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2)
Dehumidifying Supplied as a service parts Plain paper: 13 - 34 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
heater (Scanner * Thin paper mode (monochrome: 71
section) pages/minute / color: 46 pages/minute
(A4, 8.5" x 11") is set up for the thin paper.
F. Document feeder Duplex: 13 - 34 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
Max. loading Max. 150 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max.
(1) DSPF capacity of height: 50/64 inch, 19.5mm or less
documents
Type DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder) Un-acceptable OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon
Scan speed Monochrome Color (A4/8.5" x 11") originals for paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or
(A4/8.5" x 11") feeding. breakage, pasted paper, cutout document,
Copy Single: Single: document printed with ink ribbon, documents with
75-sheet/min. 51-sheet/min. perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated
(600 x 400dpi, 4bit) (600 x 600dpi, 4bit) document by punch unit is allowed.)
51-sheet/min. Double: Detection Yes
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit) 51-page/min. Paper detection Auto detection (Refer to “Original size“)
Double: (600 x 600dpi, 4bit) size
75-page/min. Paper feeding Right hand feeding
(600 x 400dpi, 4bit) direction
51-page/min. Finish stamp Option
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
FAX Single: 75-sheet/min. NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Double: 75-page/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Internet FAX Single: 75-sheet/min. NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(2) RSPF Un-acceptable OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon
originals for paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or
feeding. breakage, pasted paper, cutout document,
Type RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder) document printed with ink ribbon, documents with
Scan speed Monochrome Color (A4/8.5" x 11") perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated
(A4/8.5" x 11") document by punch unit is allowed.)
Copy Single: Single: Detection Yes
51-sheet/min. 51-sheet/min. Paper detection Auto detection (Refer to “Original size“)
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit) (600 x 600dpi, 4bit) size
Double: Double: Paper feeding Right hand feeding
20-page/min. 20-page/min. direction
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit) (600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
Finish stamp Option
FAX Single: 51-sheet/min. NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
G. Paper feed section
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(1) Basic specifications
Internet FAX Single: 51-sheet/min. NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Double: 20-page/min. Type Standard 2-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) tray
Scanner Single: 51-sheet/min. Single: 51-sheet/min. Full option 2-stage paper feed tray (Standard) + large capacity
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit) desk + multi manual paper feed tray + large
Double: 20-page/min. Double: 20-page/min. capacity tray
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit) Dehumidifying Service parts (Supported by kit)
Original setup Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard) heater
direction
Original standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for Manual paper
position random feeding) Tray Tray 1 Tray 2
feed tray
Original transport Sheet-through method Paper capacity 500 sheets 500 sheets 100 sheets
method Plain paper (80g/m2)
Original size Standard size Paper size Refer to “Size of paper which can be fed“.
Inch-1: Paper size detection Yes
11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
Paper type settings Yes
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Changing of paper Auto detection
Inch-2:
size
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4 Default Paper Size A4 (8.5" x 11") A3 (11” x 17”) -
Inch-3: Setting
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x Paper remaining Paper empty and 3 steps Only detection
8.5", A3, A4 quantity detection (100%, 67%, 33%, and paper of paper empty
AB-1: empty)
11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R,
B5, B5R, A5 (2) Extra paper capacity
AB-2:
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, Paper type Paper feed tray Manual feed tray
B5, B5R, A5 Postcard NA 20 sheets
AB-3: Envelope NA 20 sheets
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, OHP NA 20 sheets
A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
106-256g/m2:40 sheets
AB-4: Heavy paper 200 sheets
257-300g/m2:20 sheets
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R,
Tab paper NA 20 sheets
B5, B5R, A5
AB-5: Glossy paper NA 1 sheet
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, Others NA 1 sheet
B5, B5R, A5
Long paper 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
Mix paper feed Enabled
(Same series,
same width paper)
Random feeding Enabled
(feeding of different Only the following combinations of 2 size types are
types / different allowed:
widths) A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5; B5 and A5; and
11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS available. 2-sided
scanning is disabled during random feeding.
Original copy Single:
weight Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2)
Plain paper: 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
* Thin paper mode (29 pages/minute (A4,
8.5" x 11") is set up for the thin paper.
Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 105 g/m2)
Max. loading Max. 100 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max.
capacity of height: 1/2 inch, 13mm or less
documents
(3) Size of paper which can be fed
Paper feed section Main unit Drawer Multi

Bypass
Tray1 Tray2 Tray3 Tray4 Tandem Tandem LCC
left right
Min.paper weight 60g/m2 60g/m2 60g/m2 60g/m2 60g/m2 60g/m2 60g/m2 55g/m2
Max.paper weight 220g/m2 220g/m2 220g/m2 220g/m2 105g/m2 105g/m2 105g/m2 300g/m2
12x18 (A3W) 305x457 - - - - - Yes
Ledger(11x17) 297x432 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
Legal(8.5x14) 216x356 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
Asian Legal (8.5x13.5) 216x343 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
Mexican Legal (8.5x13.4) 216x340 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
Foolscap(8.5x13) 216x330 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
Letter(8.5x11) 297x216 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter-R(8.5x11R) 216x279 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
Exective-R (7.25x10.5R) 184x266 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
Incoice-R (5.5x8.5R) 140x216 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
A3 297x420 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
B4 257x364 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
A4 297x210 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4R 210x297 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
B5 257x182 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes*1 Yes
B5R 182x257 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
A5R 148x210 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
8K 270x390 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
16K 270x195 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
16KR 195x270 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
Postcard *1 100x148 - - - - - Yes
Monarch 98x191 - - - - - Yes
Paper
COM10 105x241 Yes
size
DL 110x220 Yes
C5 229x162 Yes
JP Chokei-3 120x235 Yes
JP Chokei-4 90x205 Yes
JP Yokei-2 114x162 Yes
JP Kaku-2 240x332 Yes
Custom*2 Yes Yes - - - Yes
140mm/
Min X 182mm / 7_1/4inch 5_1/
2inch*3
1200mm/
Max X 432mm / 17inch 47_15/
Custom range
64inch*4
90mm/
Min Y 132mm / 5_1/4inch
3_5/8inch
297mm/
Max Y 297mm / 11_5/8inch
11_5/8inch
Width:90 to
297mm
Long paper - - - - - - - Yes
ength:433 to
1200mm
Thin Paper 55-59g/m2 13-16 lb. bond - - - - - - - Yes
Plain Paper 60-105g/m2 16-28 lb. bond Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recycled Paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color Paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter head Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre printed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre Punched Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy Paper 106-220g/m2, 28 lb. bond - 80 lb.
Yes Yes Yes Yes - - - Yes
cover
Paper
Heavy Paper 221-256g/m2, 80 lb.cover-140
type - - - - - - - Yes
lb.index
Heavy Paper 257-300g/m2, ,140 lb.index-110
Yes
lb.cover
Envelope - - - - - - - Yes
OHP Transparency - - - - - - - Yes
Label - - - - - - - Yes
Tab Paper *5 - - - - - - - Yes
Glossy Paper - - - - - - - Yes
User setting 1-7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
*1: Japan only Paper exit section Duple Main unit center Right
*2:JCustom size to be set by software switch. (Default: not effec- x tray exit tray
tive) Exit Offset
Tray
*3: 148mm/5_7/8inch when output to inner finisher.
*4: Long Paper (from Manual Bypass): Max.1200mm by simulation
setting.
Custom*2 Yes Yes Yes
*5: Tab width : A4 (12-20mm), 8.5x11(6.1-17mm) 182m
140mm/ 140mm/
m/
Min X 5_1/ - 5_1/
H. Paper exit section 7_1/
2inch 2inch
4inch
(1) Exit Capacity 432m
m/ 457mm/ 432mm /
Max X
17inc 18inch 17inch
Exit location Center Right side (option)
Pa Custom h
Exit Capacity 400 sheets (A4/8.5" x 100 sheets (A4/8.5" x 11": per range 132m
11": 80g/m3) 80g/m3) siz 90mm/ 90mm/
m/
e Min Y 3_5/ 3_5/
(2) Size of paper which can be discharged 5_1/
8inch 8inch
4inch
297m
Paper exit section Duple Main unit center Right 297mm/ 297mm/
m/
x tray exit tray Max Y 11_5/ 11_5/
11_5/
Exit Offset 8inch 8inch
8inch
Tray
width:90
12x18 to 297mm
305x457 - Yes - Yes Long
(A3W) length:43 - Yes - -
Ledger(11 Paper*3
297x432 Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 to
x17) 1200mm
Legal(8.5x 13-16 lb.
216x356 Yes Yes Yes Yes
14) Thin Paper bond(55- - Yes Yes Yes
Asian 59g/m2)
Legal 216x343 Yes Yes Yes Yes 16-28 lb.
(8.5x13.5) bond(60- Yes Yes Yes Yes
Mexican 105g/m2)
Legal 216x340 Yes Yes Yes Yes Recycled
(8.5x13.4) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Paper
Foolscap( Color
216x330 Yes Yes Yes Yes Plain Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5x13) Paper
Letter(8.5x Paper
297x216 Yes Yes Yes Yes Letter
11) Yes Yes Yes Yes
head
Letter- Pre
R(8.5x11R 216x279 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
printed
) Pre
Exective-R Yes Yes Yes Yes
Punched
(7.25x10.5 184x266 - Yes Yes Yes 28 lb.
R) bond - 80
Pa Pa
Incoice-R lb. Yes Yes Yes Yes
per 140x216 Yes Yes Yes Yes per
(5.5x8.5R) cover(106
siz typ
A3 297x420 Yes Yes Yes Yes -220g/m2)
e e
B4 257x364 Yes Yes Yes Yes 80
A4 297x210 Yes Yes Yes Yes lb.cover-
A4R 210x297 Yes Yes Yes Yes 140
Heavy - Yes Yes Yes
B5 257x182 Yes Yes Yes Yes lb.index(2
Paper
B5R 182x257 Yes Yes Yes Yes 21-256g/
m2)
A5R 148x210 Yes Yes Yes Yes
140
8K 270x390 Yes Yes Yes Yes
lb.index -
16K 270x195 Yes Yes Yes Yes
110
16KR 195x270 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes Yes -
lb.cover(2
Postcard 57-300g/
100x148 - Yes Yes Yes
*1 m2)
Monarch 98x191 Yes Envelope - Yes - -
COM10 105x241 Yes OHP Transparency - Yes - Yes
DL 110x220 Yes Label - Yes - Yes
C5 229x162 Yes Tab Paper *4 - Yes - -
JP Chokei- Glossy Paper - Yes Yes -
120x235 Yes
3 User setting 1-7 Yes Yes Yes Yes
JP Chokei-
90x205 Yes
4 *1: Japan only
*2: Custom size to be set by software switch. (Default: not effective)
*3: Long Paper (from Manual Bypass): Max.1200mm by simulation
setting.
*4: Tab width : A4 (12-20mm), 8.5x11(6.1-17mm)
1 ‘13/Oct
I. Operation panel Compliant regulation IEEE802.11 n/g/b

Center frequency / 11b 2412 to 2484 Ch.1 to
Channel MHz Ch.14
Size 10.1 inch 11g 2412 to 2472 Ch.1 to
Type Dot matrix LCD, touch panel JP : ch1 to ch14 Ch.13
MHz
Display dot number 1,024 x 600 dots (WSVGA) 11ng HT20 2412 to 2472
US : ch1 to ch11
LCD back-light LED lamp back-light system MHz
Angle/position adjustment Yes (tiltable) EU : ch1 to ch13 11ng HT40 2422 to 2462 Ch. to
Touch Panel Method Resisitive touch display (effective 2-point MHz Ch.11
touch) Channel spacing 11b/11g/11ng HT20/HT40 5 MHz
J. Controller board 2. Copy functions

CPU ARM11: 600MHz A. First copy time
ARM9: 400MHz/during 1W energy save mode: 75MHz
SOC Intel Atom D525 1.8GHz 41cpm machine 51cpm machine
Interface Engine Mono- Mono-
Color Color
Ethernet 1port chrome chrome
Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T Platen 4.7 sec. 5.7 sec. 4.1 sec. 5.7 sec.
or less or less or less or less
Support TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, EtherTalk
Protocol DSPF 7.4 sec. 9.8 sec. 6.7sec. 9.2 sec.
or less or less or less or less 1
USB 2.0 (high 2port
speed) (host) (Simultaneous use of the front/rear ports is enable.) RSPF 7.7 sec. 10.3 sec. 7.0 sec. 8.8 sec.
or less or less or less or less
USB 2.0 (high 1port
speed) (device)
USB-HUB (host) Internal: 4port
• For Front USB Port B. Job Speed
• For Rear USB Port
• For IC card reader 41cpm machine 51cpm machine
• For Keyboard Engine Mono- Mono-
Color Color
Serial I/F 1port chrome chrome
S to S 41cpm 41cpm 51cpm 51cpm
K. Memory/Hard disk (100%) (100%) (100%) (100%)
SD Compact MFP PWB HDD*1

Card Flash On board SOC
(CF) On board Slot
4GB 8GB 1GB (STD) 2GB(STD) 1GB(STD) 320GB
*1: HDD capacity depends on procurement and sourcing status.
Memory area Boot/Program area

(SD card) FAX data storage area
1GB
L. Warm-up time
Main power SW Sub power SW

41cpm machine: 30sec. or less
Warm-up time*1
51cpm machine: 34sec. or less
Pre heat Yes
Jam recovery time*2 25sec. or less
*1: Result may change depending on conditions.

*2: Conditions: Leave the machine for 60 sec. after door open,
standard condition, Polygon stops.
M. Wireless LAN specification
Compliant regulation IEEE802.11 n/g/b

Transmission method IEEE802.11n OFDM method
IEEE802.11b DS-SS method
HOST I/F USB 2.0 TypeA -
DEVICE I/F IEEE802.11b/g/n
Access mode Infrastructure mode, Software AP mode
Security WEP, WPA Personal, WPA Enterprise*, WPA2
Personal, WPA2 Enterprise* *Not applicable
to Software AP mode
Chipset AR9271L (Qualcomm Atheros)
3. Printer function
A. Printer driver supported OS
OS Custom PCL6 Custom PCL5c Custom PS PPD PC-FAX
Windows 98/Me No No No No No
NT 4.0 SP5 or later No No No No No
2000 No No No No No
XP CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
XP (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2003 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2003 (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Vista CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Vista (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8 (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Mac 9.0-9.2.2 No No No No No
X 10.2 No No No No No
X 10.3 No No No No No
X 10.4 No No No CD-ROM No
B. PDL emulation/Font
PDL (Command) Installed font Option font

PCL6 compatibility STD European outline font = 80 styles Barcode font = 28 styles
Line printer font (BMP) = 1 style
Genuine Postscript3 STD European outline font = 136 styles -
Scalable font for List Print STD Arphic mobile font -
[4] Image send function 5. Power consumption
A. Mode A. Power consumption
100 V 200 V
Mode Sub mode
Maximum rated power 1.92 kW 1.84 kW
Scanner E-mail Consumption*1
FTP server Network/Fax waiting 1W -
Shared folder (SMB) power consumption Condition:
Desktop - No USB port
Data input (metadata) E-mail - The network protocol is
FTP server TCP/IP only.
Shared folder (SMB) - The Ethernet connection
Desktop partner supports 10M/
100MBASE or 10M/100M/
1000MBASE and auto
2. Support system negotiation setting.
* Exclude the case of use
Fax and Network at once
Mode Corresponding server / Protocol
Moving time to pre-heat 1 minute (default)
SMTP/SMTP-SSL
mode
FTP (TCP/IP)/FTPS
Recovery time from pre- 10 sec.
Scanner SMB heat mode
HTTP/HTTPS (Supported protocol of Moving time to sleep 1 minutes (default)/16 minute (Europe)
Sharp OSA) mode * Printer mode: 10sec.(default)
POP3 server Recovery time from 41cpm machine: 28 sec. or less
Internet Fax/ Direct SMTP SMTP server sleep mode 51cpm machine: 30 sec. or less
ESMTP server
*1: Power switch ON, dehumidity heater OFF
C. Support image
6. Dimensions and Weight
Mode Format / Compression Item
method DSPF model RSPF model
TIFF/XPS Outer dimension W648 x D764 x W648 x D764 x
File format (Mono 2
PDF/PDF/A (Included operation H960mm H954mm
gradation)
Encrypted PDF panel) W972 x D764 x H966 W972 x D764 x
Color TIFF/JPEG (When the right paper H952mm
PDF/PDF/A exit tray is extended.) (When the right paper
File format (Color/ Encrypted PDF exit tray is extended.)
Grayscale) High compression PDF (with Dimension occupied W987 x D761mm W982 x D761mm
ACRE installed) by the machine
(When the bypass
Scanner XPS
tray is extended)
Non-compression
Weight Approx.125kg (41cpm) Approx.119kg
Compression method G3 (1-dimentional)= MH
Main Unit (including Approx.126kg (51cpm)
(Mono 2 gradation) (Modified Huffman)
photoreceptor / not
G4= MMR (Modified MR) including
JPEG (High/Middle/Low) consumables)
Compression method High compression PDF (with
(Color/ Grayscale) ACRE installed)
Black Letter Emphasis
7. Ambient conditions
Internet File format (Monochrome) TIFF-FX(TIFF-F / TIFF-S)
Fax G3 (1-dimentional)= MH (Humidity)
Direct (Modified Huffman)
Compression method 85%
SMTP
(Monochrome)
G4 = MMR (Modified MR)
60%
Compression method
Fax MH/ MR/ MMR/JBIG AREA 1
(Monochrome)
File per page (Setting of the number of pages available)
D.Address registration 20%
Item Contents
Total: 2000 keys *It’s available to
10 °C 30 °C 35 °C (T
Max. number of registrations register 2,000 items about the address
scan to FTP / Desktop/ SMB.
Number of addresses can be
Max. 500 addresses
registered in one Group key
Number of addresses can be
6000 addresses (included in the 2000
registered by inputting directly
keys)
in Group keys
Address book registration in
Yes
the sending history screen
2 ‘13/Nov
MX-5141N
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS Service Manual
1. Supply system table

A. USA/Canada/South and Central America
Item Content Life Product Name Remarks
Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 40K MX-51NT-BA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 33.3K for A4/Letter 6%)
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51NT-CA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51NT-MA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51NT-YA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 840K MX-51NV-BA * Standard Printable number
Developer Developer x1 Rotation MX-51NV-SA BK: 170K
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (3 colors / set)) CL: 140K
(3 colors/set))
Drum OPC Drum x1 MX-31NRSA Maximum Printable number
Drum Unit OPC Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum) x1 MX-51NU-SA BK: 200K
Color identification seal (B/C/M/Y) x 1 each x1 CL: 160K
Charger cleaner rubber x1
B. Brazil
Item Content Life Model Name Remarks
Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 40K MX-51BT-BA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51BT-CA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51BT-MA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51BT-YA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 840K MX-51NV-BA * Standard Printable number
Developer Developer x1 Rotation MX-51NV-SA BK: 170K
(3 colors/set))
Drum OPC Drum x1 MX-31NRSA Maximum Printable number
Drum Unit OPC Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum) x1 MX-51NU-SA BK: 200K
C. Europe/East Europe/Russia/Australia/New Zealand/Korea

Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 40K MX-51GT-BA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51GT-CA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51GT-MA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51GT-YA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 840K MX-51GV-BA * Standard Printable number
Developer Developer x1 Rotation MX-51GV-SA BK: 170K
(3 colors/set))
Drum OPC Drum x1 MX-31GRSA Maximum Printable number
Drum Unit OPC Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum) x1 MX-51GU-SA BK: 200K
MX-5141N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

2 ‘13/Nov
D. Asia/Hong Kong
Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 40K MX-51AT-BA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51AT-CA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51AT-MA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51AT-YA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 840K MX-51AV-BA * Standard Printable number
Developer Developer x1 Rotation MX-51AV-SA BK: 170K
(3 colors/set))
Drum OPC Drum x1 MX-31ARSA Maximum Printable number
Drum Unit OPC Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum) x1 MX-51AU-SA BK: 200K
E. Middle East/Taiwan/Africa/Israel/Philippines
Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 40K MX-51FT-BA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51FT-CA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51FT-MA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51FT-YA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 840K MX-51FV-BA * Standard Printable number
Developer Developer x1 Rotation MX-51FV-SA BK: 170K
(3 colors/set))
Drum OPC Drum x1 MX-31FRSA Maximum Printable number
Drum Unit OPC Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum) x1 MX-51FU-SA BK: 200K
2. Maintenance parts list

A. U.S.A/Canada/South and Central America
Quantity in
Model
Item Content Life collective Remarks
name
package
Fusing belt kit MX-361FB Fusing belt x1 300K 10
2
Meandering suppress collar x2
Pressure roller kit MX-510LH Fusing roller x1 300K 10
Pressure roller x1
Web cleaning kit MX-510WB Web roller x1 300K 10
Web guide shaft x2
Web pressure roller x1
Web pressure roller bearing x2
Primary transfer belt kit MX-510B1 Primary transfer belt x1 300K 10
Primary transfer blade kit MX-510TL Primary transfer blade x1 300K 10
PTC kit MX-510CU PTC unit x1 300K 10
Secondary transfer belt kit MX-510B2 Secondary transfer belt x1 300K 10
Filter kit MX-C31FL Ozone filter x1 300K 10
Toner collection container MX-510HB Toner collection container x1 50K 5 5% coverage for each
(with LSU cleaner x 3) color; 25% color ratio
and 50K life time
Main charger kit MX-510MK Main charger unit x1 Drum 840K 10
Drum cleaning blade x1 rotation
Cleaning gum P2 x1
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20 For MX-FN11/FN18
x3
x3

2 ‘13/Nov
Quantity in
Model
name
package
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20 For MX-FNX9/FN10
x3
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge x2 --- 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-510U1 Primary transfer belt unit (For servicing rotation) x1 --- 1
Secondary transfer belt unit MX-410U2 Secondary transfer belt unit (For servicing rotation) x1 --- 1
Fusing unit (41/51cpm MX-511FU1 Fusing unit (For servicing rotation) x1 --- 1
machine)
B. Europe/UK/Australia/New Zealand/Korea
Quantity in
Model
name
package
2 Fusing belt kit MX-361FB Fusing belt x1 300K 10
Pressure roller x1
Web guide shaft x2
Toner collection container MX-510HB Toner collection container (with LSU cleaner x 3) x1 50K 5 5% coverage for each
color; 25% color ratio
and 50K life time
Cleaning gum P2 x1
x3
x3
x3
Fusing unit (41/51cpm MX-511FU Fusing unit (For servicing rotation) x1 --- 1
machine)

2 ‘13/Nov
C. Asia/Middle East/Agency
Quantity in
Model
name
package
2 Fusing belt kit MX-361FB Fusing belt x1 300K 10
Pressure roller x1
Web guide shaft x2
and 50K life time
Cleaning gum P2 x1
x3
x3
x3
machine)
D. Hong Kong
Quantity in
Model
name
package
Fusing belt kit MX-361FB Fusing belt x1 300K 10
2
Pressure roller x1
Web guide shaft x2
and 50K life time
Cleaning gum P2 x1
x3
x3
x3
machine)

3. Definition the developer/drum life end * Standard printable quantity means the printing quantity under the
specified developer/drum count by using the specified test data
When the developer/drum counter reaches the maximum printable with the color ratio of 30% under the following intermitment sheet.
count.
When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified count.
Developer/drum Developer/drum rota-
When either of the above reach the specified count, it is judged as counter tion
life end. Standard printable Maximum printable Mono- Color
quantity quantity chrome
In an actual case, the ratio of monochrome output and color output Mono- Color Mono- Color 840K 840K
chrome chrome Rotation Rotation
may differ greatly.
170K 140K 200K 160K
When data of mixed documents (monochrome and color) are out-
put, monochrome document data may be output in the color mode
in order to prevent against fall in the job efficiency. (ACS auto color
selection).
In addition, when correction or warm-up operation is performed as
well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates.
Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be deter-
mined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm
reaches the specified amount, it is judged as life end.
To check the developer/drum life, use SIM22-13.
However, when the copy/print quantity is large and the developer/

drum counter reaches the maximum printable quantity even if the
rpm does not reach the specified amount, it is judged as life end.
The table which shows the relation between the standard printable
quantity and the maximum printable quantity in the specified rpm
amount is as follows.
㻽㼡㼍㼚㼠㼕㼠㼥
Average
Xa'
Volume(K) at 840K Rotation
㻽㼡㼍㼚㼠㼕㼠㼥
Standard printable quantity
Maximum printable quantity
Xa Xb
Volume(K) at 840K Rotation

4. Production number identification C. Toner cartridge
The label indicating the management number is attached to the
A. Drum cartridge side of the toner cartridge.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The lot number is of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the content as
follows.
The number is printed on the flange on the front side.
1: Number
: Unit code/Model name
For this model, this digit is 2.
2: Alphabet : Color code (Black: BK /Cyan: CY /Magenta: MA /Yellow: YE)
Indicates the model conformity code. : Destination
3: Number : Skating
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
: Production place
4: Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month. : Production date (YYYYMMDD)
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. : Serial number
5/6: Number : Version number
Indicates the day of the production date.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
7: Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing. 5. Environmental conditions
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
8/9: Number
Indicates the day of the packing date. (UMIDITY2(
10: Alphabet

Indicates the production factory.

B. Developer
BK

C. M .Y
# # #
4EMPERATURE
Standard environmental Temperature 20 - 25 °C

conditions Humidity 65 +/- 5 %RH
Usage environmental Temperature 10 - 35 °C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 conditions Humidity 20 - 85 %RH
Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as fol- manufactured month (Production lot) under
lows. unsealed state
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of Drum: 36 months from the manufactured month
the developer bag. under unsealed state
1: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
2: Number
Indicates the production year.
3/4: Number
Indicates the production month.
5/6: Number
Indicates the production day.
7: Hyphen
8: Number
Indicates the production lot.

2 ‘13/Nov
MX-5141N
[4] Service Manual
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
A.External view
Keyboard*1
Automatic
document feeder
Output tray Finisher*2

(center tray)*2
Saddle finisher USB port (A type)
(large stacker)*2
Right Tray*2
Punch module*2
Bypass tray
Front cover
Paper pass unit*2
Tray 5 (when a large capacity
tray is installed)*2
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 (when a stand/1x500/2x500
sheet paper drawer is installed)*2
Tray 4 (when a stand/2x500 sheet
paper drawer is installed)*2
Tray 4
(when a stand/2000 sheet paper drawer is installed)*2
Main power switch

Tray 3
(when a stand/2000 sheet paper drawer is installed)*2
*1 It is optional
*2 Optional
Finisher (large stacker)*2 Saddle finisher*2
MX-5141N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 1

B.Automatic document feeder and document glass

No. Name function/Operation

1 Paper feed roller This roller rotates to automatically feed the original.
2 Document feeding area cover Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean the paper feed roller.
3 Original guides These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly. Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
4 Document feeder tray Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.
5 Original exit tray Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
6 Scanning area Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
7 Original size detector This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
8 Document glass Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.
C.Internal operation parts
0OWERBUTTON -AINPOWERINDICATOR
-AINPOWERSWITCH

D.I/F Connectors
When the fax expansion kit is installed
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
No. Name function/Operation

1 Extension phone socket When the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be connected to this socket.
2 Telephone line socket When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to this socket.
3 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine. This connector
is not initially available for use. If you wish to use the connector, contact your service technician.
4 USB connector (B type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer. For the USB
cable, use a shielded cable.
5 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. For the LAN cable, use a shielded type
cable.
6 Service-only connector CAUTION: This connector is for use only by service technicians. Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the
machine to malfunction.
Important note for service technicians: The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 118" (3 m) in length.
7 Power plug

E.Operation panel
(1)
(3) (4) (2)
(5)
No. Name Function/Operation

1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display.
Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you
perform an operation.
2 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
3 [POWER] key ( ) Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
4 [POWER SAVE] key ( ) / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key ( ) blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
5 [Home Screen] button Touch this key to display the home screen.
Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to enable quick and easy operation of the
machine.

F.DSPF
(1)Roller

No. Name Function/ Operation

1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the document feed roller.
2 Document feed roller Performs the document feed operation of documents.
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double-feed.
4 No. 1 registration roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport.
5 No. 1 registration roller (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the registration roller, and provides transport power of the registration roller to
document.
6 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from No. 1 registration roller to No. 2 registration roller.
7 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides the transport power of the transport roller to
document.
8 No. 2 registration roller (Drive) Make synchronization between the lead edge of a document and the scan start position.
9 No. 2 registration roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the registration roller, and provides transport power of the registration roller to
document.
10 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document from the No. 1 scan section to the transport roller 3.
11 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to document.
12 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 2 to the document exit roller.
13 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to document.
14 Document exit roller (Drive) Discharges document.
15 Document exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the document exit roller and provides transport power of the document exit roller to
document.
(2)Detector
3#/6
30%$
30,3
300$
300$ 302$-$ 345$
30,3
34,$
3073
30/$
300$ 30%$
3/#$ 300$
3,#/6
300$
Signal name Name Function/Operation Type

SCOV DSPF upper door open/close detector Detects open/close of the upper door. Transmission type
SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close detector Detects open/close of the lower door. Micro switch
SOCD DSPF open/close detector Detects open/close of the DSPF unit. Transmission type
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit detector Detects the upper limit of the DSPF document. Transmission type
SPED2 DSPF document empty detector Detects document empty in the document feed tray. Transmission type
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short detector Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper. Transmission type
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long detector Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper. Transmission type
SPOD DSPF document exit detector Detects document exit of the document. Transmission type
SPPD1 DSPF document pass detector 1 Detects pass of the document. Transmission type
SPRDMD DSPF document random detector Detects the document size in random document feed. Transmission type
SPWS DSPF document width detector Detects the document width of the document feed tray upper. Volume resistor
STLD DSPF document feed tray lower limit detector Detects the lower limit of the document feed tray. Transmission type

Signal name Name Function/Operation Type
STUD DSPF document feed tray upper limit detector Detects the upper limit of the document feed tray. Transmission type
(3)Motors, clutches, PWB and lamps
SPFFAN
SPFM
STRC
SPFC SPUM
STRRC SPOM
SRRC SLUM
3
1
2
DSPF COPY LAMP
LUMP
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF copy lamp LED lamp Radiates light onto a document to allow the CCD to scan document
images.
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor PM step motor Lifts up or moves down the document feed tray.
SPFC DSPF document feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the rollers in the document feed section.
SPFFAN DSPF cooling fan motor DC brush-less motor Cools the motors and the clutches.
SPFM DSPF transport motor Hybrid step motor Drives the transport roller.
SPOM DSPF document exit motor PM step motor Drives the document exit roller.
SPUM DSPF document feed motor Hybrid step motor Drives the rollers and transport rollers in the document feed section.
SRRC DSPF No.2 registration roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 2 registration roller.
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 1.
STRRC DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 1 registration roller.

1 DSPF control PWB Control PWB for DSPF
2 DSPF driver PWB Driver PWB for DSPF
3 DSPF CCD PWB Scans document images.

G.RSPF
(1)Roller, Gate
5 4 14 2 3 1
15 7 6 8 9 10 11 12 13

1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller Performs the paper feed operation of documents.
4 Registration roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport.
5 Registration roller (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the registration roller, and provides transport power of the registration roller to
document.
6 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from registration roller to transport roller 2.
7 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides the transport power of the transport roller to document.
8 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document to the transport 3 roller.
10 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 2 to the paper exit roller. / Transports document to the registration roller when
reversing the document.
12 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges document.
13 Paper exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the paper exit roller and provides transport power of the paper exit roller to document.
14 Transport auxiliary roller Helps to transport document smoothly.
15 Reverse gate Reverses a document to scan the back surface of the document.
(2)Detector
SCOV
SPPD2 SPPD1 SPLS2
SPED SPWS SPLS1
SOCD
SPPD3 SPPD4

SCOV RSPF upper cover open/close detector Micro switch Detects open/close of the RSPF upper cover.
SOCD RSPF open/close detector Transmission type Detects open/close of the RSPF unit.
SPED RSPF document detector Transmission type Detects document empty in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS1 RSPF document length detector (short) Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS2 RSPF document length detector (long) Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPPD1 RSPF document pass detector 1 Transmission type Detects pass of the document.
SPWS RSPF document width detector Volume resistor Detects the document width in the RSPF paper feed tray.

(3)Motors, clutches, PWB, lamps
SPFM
SPM
SRRC
STMPS SRVC
SPRS

SPFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drives the transport roller.
SPM Paper feed motor Stepping motor Drives the roller in the paper feed section.
SPRS Pressure release solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Releases the pressure of the transport roller 3 when reversing a document and
transporting it to the registration roller.
SRRC PS clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of registration roller.
SRVC Reverse clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the transport roller 3 and the paper exit
roller when discharging a document and reversing it to transport to the registration
roller.
STMPS Stamp solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Drives the stamp.

1 RSPF driver PWB Drives the motor and the clutch in the RSPF section.

H.Sensor, Detector
OCSW
MHPS
TFD3
TFD2
HPOS
POD3
POD2
POD1
APPD1 PRTPD
HLPCD
TH_US_IN
WEBEND
TH_UM_IN
TH_LM_IN DSW_ADU
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
DHPD_CL REGS_F
DHPD_Y DHPD_M DHPD_C DHPD_K REGS_R
APPD2
TCS_Y TCS_M TCS_C TCS_K MPED MPLD
PPD2
MTOP1
MPWD MTOP2
PPD1 MPFD
TH_M/HUD_M
CLUD1 CPFD1
CPED1
CSS1
CSS11 DSW_C
CSS12
CSS13 CSPD1
CSS14
CLUD2 CPFD2
CSS2 CPED2
CSS21
CSS22
CSS23 CSPD2
CSS24
Signal name Name Function/Operation Type NOTE

1TUD_CL Transfer belt separation CL detection Detects the transfer belt separation CL.
1TUD_K Transfer belt separation BK detection Detects the transfer belt separation BK.
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass. Transmission type
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream paper Transmission type
pass.
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 1 upper limit. Transmission type
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 2 upper limit. Transmission type
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects the tray 1 paper empty. Transmission type
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects the tray 2 paper empty. Transmission type
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Detects tray 1 paper pass. Reflection type
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Detects tray 2 paper pass. Reflection type
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Detects the tray 1 paper remaining quantity.
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection Detects the tray 2 paper remaining quantity.
CSS1 Tray 1 installation detection Detects the tray 1.
CSS2 Tray 2 installation detection Detects the tray 2.
CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting Duct switch
CSS12 Tray 1 rear edge detection 2 either of tray 1 rear edge detection 1 ? 4. Duct switch
CSS13 Tray 1 rear edge detection 3 The paper size of tray 1 is detected. Duct switch
CSS14 Tray 1 rear edge detection 4 Duct switch
CSS21 Tray 2 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting Duct switch
CSS22 Tray 2 rear edge detection 2 either of tray 2 rear edge detection 1 ? 4. Duct switch
CSS23 Tray 2 rear edge detection 3 The paper size of tray 2 is detected. Duct switch
CSS24 Tray 2 rear edge detection 4 Duct switch
DHPD_CL CL phase detection Detects the CL phase. 41cpm machine
DHPD_C C phase detection Detects the C phase. 51cpm machine
DHPD_M M phase detection Detects the M phase. 51cpm machine
DHPD_Y Y phase detection Detects the Y phase. 51cpm machine

Signal name Name Function/Operation Type NOTE
DHPD_K BK phase detection Detects the BK phase.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/close. Transmission type
DSW_C Tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close detection Detects the tray 1 and 2 transport cover Transmission type
open/close.
HLPCD Fusing pressure release sensor Detects pressure release of the fusing roller. Transmission type
HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home position. Transmission type
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Detects the manual feed paper empty. Transmission type
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Detects the manual feed paper entry. Transmission type
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper Manual paper
length. feed unit
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width. Volume resistor
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper Transmission type Manual paper
pull-out position (storing position). feed unit
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper Transmission type Manual paper
pull-out position (pull-out position). feed unit
OCSW Original cover SW Detects the trigger for document size. Transmission type
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper exit from fusing. Transmission type
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the paper from paper exit. Transmission type
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit to right tray.
PPD1 Registration pre-pre-detection Detects the paper in front of transport roller 8. Transmission type
PPD2 Registration pre-detection Detects the paper in front of registration roller.
PRTPD Paper exit tray paper detector Detects paper empty in the paper exit tray Transmission type
(Right paper exit tray) (Right paper exit tray).
REGS_F Pro-reg sensor F Detects the registration shift of the machine Reflection type
front (F) side and detects color toner patch.
REGS_R Pro-reg sensor R Detects the registration shift of the machine Reflection type
rear (R) side and detects black toner patch.
TCS_C Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (C). Magnetic sensor
TCS_K Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (K). Magnetic sensor
TCS_M Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (M). Magnetic sensor
TCS_Y Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (Y). Magnetic sensor
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face down paper exit tray full. Transmission type
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection Detects the right tray paper exit full.
TH_LM_IN Fusing temperature sensor Detects the surface temperature of the fusing Thermistor Analog detection
roller (B).
TH_M/HUD_M Temperature/humidity detection Detects temperature and humidity.
TH_UM_IN Fusing temperature sensor (Main) Detects the surface temperature at the center of Non-contact Analog detection
the fusing belt. thermistor
TH_US_IN Fusing temperature sensor (Sub) Detects the suffered temperature at the edge Thermistor Analog detection
section of the fusing belt.
WEBEND Web end detection Detects web end of the fusing unit. Transmission type

I.Switch
PWRSW
DSW-R
MSW
DSW-F
1TNFD

1TNFD Waste toner full detection switch Mechanical switch Detects the waste toner full.
DSW-F Front door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the front door, and turns ON/OFF the power line of the
fusing, motor and the LSU laser.
DSW-R Right door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the right door, and turns ON/OFF the power line of the
fusing, motor and the LSU laser.
MSW Main switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the main DC power source.
PWRSW Operation panel power supply switch Push switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.

J.Clutches and solenoids
!$5'3
-05#
0#33
-0&3
-0'3
,3533?"
452#?2
452#
#05#
#0,#
#0&#
#05#
#0,#

1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls the primary transfer separation mode.
1TURC_R Primary transfer separation reverse clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls the primary transfer separation mode.
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls the ADU gate.
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper feed tray
section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 1 section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 2 section.
LSUSS_B LSU shutter solenoid 1 Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the LSU shutter.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
(Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls the manual paper feed gate Open/Close.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF.
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the registration
sensor.

K.Motors
02-
/3-
!$5-?5
0/-
0'- &5-
7%"-
74.-
-)-
4.-?9
0&- 4.-?-
(0&- 4.-?#
4.-?+
#,5- $-?9
$6-?+
$6-?#,
!$5-?, #0&- $-?# $-?-
#,5- $-?+
"4- 22-
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation NOTE

ADUM_U ADU motor upper Stepping motor Drives the transport roller 13.
ADUM_L ADU motor lower Stepping motor Drives the right door section.
BTM Transfer belt motor Stepping motor Drives the transfer belt.
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
(Paper feed tray 1)
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
(Paper feed tray 2)
CPFM Paper feed motor Brush-less motor Drives the paper feed section.
DM_C C drum motor Stepping motor Drives the C drum. 51cpm machine
DM_K BK drum motor Stepping motor Drives the BK drum.
DM_M CL drum motor Stepping motor Drives the CL drum. 41cpm machine
M drum motor Drives the M drum. 51cpm machine
DM_Y Y drum motor Stepping motor Drives the Y drum. 51cpm machine
DVM_CL Developing drive motor (CL) Brush-less motor Drives the developing section (CL).
DVM_K Developing drive motor (K) Brush-less motor Drives the OPC drum/developing section/transfer section (K).
FUM Fusing drive motor Stepping motor Drives the fusing unit.
HPFM Horizontal transport motor Stepping motor Transports paper from the paper feed section to the transport motor
drive system.
Transports paper from the right door section to the transport motor
drive system.
MIM Scanner motor Stepping motor Scanner (reading) section
OSM Shifter motor Stepping motor Performs offset of paper.
PFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drives transport between the registration roller and the paper feed
section, transport between the registration roller and the right door
section.
PGM Polygon motor DC brush-less motor Scans the laser beam.
POM Paper exit drive motor Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller.
PRM Fusing pressure release motor Stepping motor Adjusts the fusing roller pressure.

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation NOTE
RRM Resist motor Stepping motor Drives the registration roller and controls ON/OFF.
TNM_C Toner motor C Stepping motor Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the development unit.
TNM_K Toner motor K Stepping motor Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the development unit.
TNM_M Toner motor M Stepping motor Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the development unit.
TNM_Y Toner motor Y Stepping motor Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the development unit.
WEBM Fusing web cleaning motor Synchronous motor Drives the fusing web cleaning paper.
WTNM Waste toner drive motor Synchronous motor Stirs waste toner.

L.Rollers
35 34 32 33
36
37
25
24
26
27
39
40
38
11
10
28
29
1
3
2
20
22
21
23 31
30
5 19
17
4 18
6
15
16
8 14
41
7 42
12
13
9

1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
4 Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
5 Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
6 Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
8 Paper pickup roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
10 Registration roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the paper transport timing to adjust relative relations
between images and paper.
11 Registration roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the registration roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to
the paper.
12 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to
the paper.
13 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from No. 3 and No. 4 paper feed tray to the transport roller 4.
14 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
the paper.
16 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) to the transport
roller 7.
17 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
the paper.
19 Transport roller 6 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
the paper.
21 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the transport roller 8.
the paper.
23 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports the paper to registration roller.
the paper.
25 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper from the fusing roller to the transport roller 13.
the paper.
27 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
the paper.
29 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
the paper.
31 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. / Transports the paper from the
manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 8.
32 Transport roller 13 (Drive) Transports paper to the duplex (ADU) section. /
Transports paper to the paper exit roller 2.
the paper.
34 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to give the transport power of the paper exit roller to
the paper.
35 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper. Transports paper to the right paper exit tray. Transport paper to the duplex (ADU)
section.
36 Paper exit roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to give the transport power of the paper exit roller to
the paper.
37 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper.
38 Fusing roller Heats the fusing belt.
39 Fusing roller The cushion layer of the roller forms a wide nip between the fusing belt and fusing roller.
40 Fusing roller Heats the back surface of paper to fuse toner on the paper.
41 Transport roller 14 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 2 to the transport roller 4.
the paper.

M.Lamps
CL
CCFT
2 1
HL_UM/US/UW
HL_LM
DL_Y DL_M DL_C DL_K

CCFT LCD backlight LED Backlight for LCD
CL Scanner lamp LED lamp Radiates lights onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
DL_C Discharge lamp C LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_K Discharge lamp K LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_M Discharge lamp M LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
HL_LM Heater lamp Halogen lamp Heats the fusing roller (B).
HL_UM/US/UW Heater lamp Halogen lamp Heats the fusing roller (F1) and the fusing belt.
No. Name Type Function/Operation

1 Right paper exit gate Selects the paper path to transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section or to
discharge paper to the right tray.
2 ADU reverse gate Switches the transport route by switchback when paper is transported to
the duplex (ADU) section.

N.Fans and filters

0/&-?
0/&-?
0#3&-
0#3&- 2#&-
&5&-
0#3&-

##&-
-&0&-
03&-
03&-
,35&-
-&0&- /:&-
Signal name Name Function/Operation

CCFM Process air inlet fan motor Cools charger section of the process.
MFPFM MFP cooling fan motor Cools the controller PWB.
FUFM Fusing fan motor Cools the fusing unit and peripheral area.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor Cools the LSU section.
OZFM Ozone fan motor Exhausts ozone.
PCSFM1 Toner cooling fan motor 1 Cools the toner bottle.
PCSFM2 Toner cooling fan motor 2 Cools the toner bottle.
POFM_1 Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Cools the fusing unit.
POFM_2 Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side) Cools the fusing unit.
PSFM Power cooling fan motor Cools the power unit.
PSFM2 Power cooling fan motor2 Cools the power unit.
RCFM Rear section cooling fan motor Cools rear section of the main unit.

1 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
2 Toner filter Prevents dispersing of toner.
3 Left cabinet filter Removes foreign materials from sucked air.
4 TN suction filter Removes foreign materials from sucked air.

O.PWB / Memory device


1 RD I/F PWB Detects each sensor in the right door unit.
2 Tray installation detection PWB Detects the tray.
3 DC power PWB Outputs the secondary side voltage.
4 Driver main PWB Drives the transport motor and related sections.
5 High voltage MC PWB Generates the high voltage for the main charger and the developing bias voltage.
6 High voltage 1TC PWB Generates the primary transfer voltage.
7 AC power PWB Controls the primary side power source.
8 Scanner control PWB Controls the scanner section.
9 CCD PWB Scans document images.

2 ‘13/Nov

Document detection light collector
10 Outputs the document size detection signal.
PWB
Document detection light emitting
11 Emits light for document size detection.
PWB
12 USB I/F PWB USB I/F
13 KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
14 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal. Controls the touch panel.
15 HL PWB Controls the heater lamp.
Generates the secondary transfer voltage, the transfer belt cleaning voltage and the pre-trans-
16 High voltage 2TC PWB
fer voltage.
17 WH PWB Controls ON/OFF of the humidity heater.
18 MFP control PWB Controls the image-related items and controls all over the machine.
19 Mother PWB Interfaces the MFP cnt PWB and other PWB.
20 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
21 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal.
22 LSU PWB Controls the LSU.
23 LSU thermistor Measures the temperature in LSU.
24 DL PWB Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
25 LD PWB Controls laser lighting.
26 SD card memory Stores the MFP PWB program data, the FAX image data, and the font data.
27 CF card Stores the printer program data.
2 28 Flash DIMM Stores the DSK program data.
29 Driver sub PWB Drives the process motor and related sections.
30 LED DRIVER PWB Drives the scanner lamp.
31 PCI AC interface PWB Interfaces the AC PWB of the PCI.
32 USB CONV PWB Convert to the USB connection.
33 Wireless LAN PWB Connect the network by the wireless LAN.
34 Scanner expansion PWB Generate the data for high compression PDF.

P.Fuses/Thermostats
TS US
TS UM
TS LM
10
13
15
11
16
8 6
7
1 12 9
2
3 14
4
5
Signal name Name Specifications Section

TS LM Thermostat Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
TS UM Thermostat Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
TS US Thermostat Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
Signal name Name Specifications Section

No.
1 F401/F601 Fuse T6.3AH 250V DC power PWB

6 F1 Fuse 20A 250V For 100V series AC power PWB
F1 Fuse T10AH 250V For 200V series AC power PWB
7 F2 Fuse 20A 250V Not mount for 100V series AC power PWB
8 F3 Fuse T2AH 250V AC power PWB
9 F4 Fuse T2AH 250V Not mount for 100V series AC power PWB
10 F101 Fuse 15A250V For 100V series 51cpm machine DC power PWB
F101 Fuse T6AH 250V For 200V series 51cpm machine DC power PWB
11 F102 Fuse T2AH 250V For 51cpm machine DC power PWB
12 F301 Fuse T5AH 250V For 51cpm machine DC power PWB
13 F301 Fuse T3.15AH 250V For 41cpm machine DC power PWB

F401 Fuse T3.15AH 250V For 51cpm machine DC power PWB
14 F201 Fuse T6.3AH 250V For 200V series 41cpm machine DC power PWB
15 F001 Fuse 15A 250V For 100V series 41cpm machine DC power PWB
16 F501 Fuse T2AH 250V For 100V series 41cpm machine DC power PWB

MX-5141N
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS Service Manual
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per- If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list
Job No Adjustment item list Simulation

ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit 1A Adjust the developing doctor gap
1B Adjust the developing roller main pole position
1C Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values 2A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 8-2
2B Adjust the developing bias voltage 8-1
2C Transfer voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 3 Image density sensor adjustment 3A Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F), black image density sensor 44-2
(image registration sensor R) adjustment
ADJ 4 Image lead edge position, image loss, 4A Print image main scanning direction automatic magnification ratio adjustment (Print 50-28
void area, image off-center, image engine)
magnification ratio adjustment 4B Print image off-center automatic adjustment (Print engine) (Each paper feed tray) 50-28
(Automatic adjustment) 4C Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub 50-28
scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (Document
table mode)
4D Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub 50-28
scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (RSPF
mode)
4E DSPF mode image off-center, image lead edge position, sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio auto adjustment
ADJ 5 Print engine image distortion 5A Image skew adjustment (LSU unit) 50-20 (61-4)
adjustment / OPC drum phase 5B Print engine image distortion adjustment (Manual adjustment) / OPC drum phase 50-22
adjustment / Color registration adjustment (Automatic adjustment) / Color registration adjustment (Automatic
adjustment (Print engine section) adjustment)
5C Color registration offset adjustment (No need to adjust normally) 50-20
ADJ 6 Scan image distortion adjustment 6A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
(Document table mode) 6B Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment
6C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
6D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner unit)
ADJ 7 Scanner image skew adjustment 7A RSPF height adjustment 64-2
(DSPF/RSPF mode) 7B RSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)
7C DSPF parallelism adjustment
7D DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)
7E DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode)
ADJ 8 Scan image focus adjustment (CCD 8A Document table mode image focus adjustment 48-1
unit position adjustment) 8B DSPF mode image focus adjustment
ADJ 9 Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode) 50-5
ADJ 10 FR density variation correction 10A FR density unevenness automatic correction: all 32-point adjustment (Correction by OC 61-11
scan)
10B FR density unevenness visual inspection correction: 4-point adjustment for each of 61-12
CMYK (with the center fixed) or 31-point adjustment (with the center fixed)
ADJ 11/ Color balance/density adjustment Note before execution of the image quality adjustment
SET1 Copy image quality check
Printer image quality check
11A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) 63-3 (63-5)
SET Color balance 1A Copy color balance adjustment target setup 63-7/8/11
1 adjustment target setup 1B Printer color balance adjustment target setup 67-26/27/28
11B Copy/Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) 46-74
(Basic adjustment)
11C Copy quality 11 Copy color balance and density adjustment 46-24
adjustment (Basic C (Automatic adjustment)
adjustment) (1)
11 Copy color balance and density adjustment 46-21
C (Manual adjustment)
(2)
MX-5141N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 1

ADJ 11/ Color balance/density adjustment 11D Copy / Image send / 11 Color copy density adjustment (for each color copy 46-1
SET1 FAX image quality D mode) (separately for the low-density area and the
adjustment (Individual (1) high-density area) (No need to adjust normally)
adjustment) 11 Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each 46-2
D monochrome copy mode) (separately for the low-
(2) density area and the high-density area) (No need to
adjust normally)
11 Color copy color balance, gamma adjustment (for each 46-10
D color copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
(3)
11 Monochrome copy density, gamma adjustment (for 46-16
D each monochrome copy mode) (No need to adjust
(4) normally)
11 Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode 46-19
D document density scanning operation (exposure
(5) operation) conditions setting (Normally no need to set)
11 Document low density image density reproduction 46-32
D adjustment in the automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/
(6) FAX) mode (No need to adjust normally)
(Background density adjustment in the scanning
section)
11 Copy/Scan low density image density adjustment 46-63
D (for each mode) (No need to adjust normally)
(7)
11 Color copy, text, line image reproduction adjustment 46-27
D (edge gamma, density adjustment) (Text, Map mode)
(8) (No need to adjust normally)
11 Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document 46-37
D reproduction adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
(9)
11 Color copy mode dark area gradation (black 46-38
D component quantity) adjustment (No need to adjust
(10 normally)
)
11 Color (Copy/Scan) mode sharpness adjustment 46-60
D (No need to adjust normally)
(11)
11 Copy high density image density reproduction setting 46-23
D (Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
(12
)
11 Copy color balance adjustment (Single color copy 46-25
D mode) (No need to adjust normally)
(13
)
11 DSPF/RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density 46-9
D adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
(14
)
11 Automatic color balance adjustment by the user 26-53
D (Copy color balance automatic adjustment ENABLE
(15 setting and adjustment)
)
11 Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for each dither 46-54
D (Automatic adjustment)
(16
)
11 Dropout color adjustment (Normally not required) 46-55
D
(17
)
11 Watermark adjustment (Normally not required) 46-66
D
(18
)
11E Printer image quality 11E Printer color balance adjustment (Automatic 67-24
adjustment (1) adjustment)
(Basic adjustment) 11E Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 67-25
(2)

ADJ 11/ Color balance/density adjustment 11F Printer image quality 11F Printer density adjustment (Low density section density 67-36
SET1 adjustment (1) adjustment) (No need to adjust normally)
(Individual adjustment) 11F Printer high density image density reproduction setting 67-34
(2) (Supporting the high density section tone gap)
(No need to adjust normally)
11F Printer gamma adjustment for each dither 67-54
(3) (Automatic adjustment) (No need to adjust normally)
10F Automatic color balance adjustment by the user 26-53
(4) (Printer color balance automatic adjustment ENABLE
setting and adjustment)
(Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
ADJ 12 Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 40-2
ADJ 13 DSPF/RSPF tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 53-6
ADJ 14 Document size detection adjustment 14A Document size sensor detection point adjustment 41-1
14B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor 41-2
ADJ 15 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
ADJ 16 Fusing paper guide position adjustment
ADJ 17 Print image position, image 17A Print image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Print engine) 50-10
magnification ratio, void area, off- (Manual adjustment)
center adjustment (Print engine) 17B Print image print area adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment) 50-10 / 50-1
(Manual adjustment) 17C Print image off-center adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment) 50-10
ADJ 18 Scan image magnification ratio 18A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual 48-1
adjustment (Manual adjustment) adjustment) (Document table mode)
18B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1 / 48-5
(Document table mode)
18C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual 48-1
adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode)
18D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
(DSPF/RSPF mode)
ADJ 19 Scan image off-center adjustment 19A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode) 50-12
(Manual adjustment) 19B Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode) 50-12 / 50-6
ADJ 20 Copy image position and image loss 20A Copy image position, image loss, and void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) 50-1
adjustment (Document table mode)
(Manual adjustment) 20B Image scanning position adjustment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode) 53-8
20C Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) 50-6
(DSPF/RSPF mode)
ADJ 21 Finisher and punch unit adjustments (alignment, punch hole position, staple position) 3-10
3. Details of adjustment 2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit

1-A Adjust the developing doctor gap
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
the developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor
cover.

3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.60mm in between 40mm - 70mm * Marked point (A) on the follower side (right side) of the MG roller.
from the edge of the developing doctor.
MM
A
MM
MM
MM
1-B Adjust the developing roller main pole

position
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.) * The toner is excessively dispersed.
1) Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the develop-
ing unit on a flat surface.
2) Attach a piece of string to a sewing needle or pin.
3) Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because too heavy. It will not
provide a correct position.)
4) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the
needle with the needle at 2 - 3mm from the developing roller
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.)
2㨪3mm
5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 40mm - 70mm

from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
0.625 +/- 0.05mm.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the developing roller.
MM
5) Measure the distance between the marking position and posi-
MM
tion A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 37.8 +/-
0.5mm.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the devel-
oping roller main pole position in the following procedures.
MM
MM
37.8 + 0.5mm 37.8 + 0.5mm
Note for use of a thickness gauge

- Do not insert the gauge diagonally.
- The gauge must pass freely.
- The advisable point of measurement is the MIN point of the MG
roller oscillation.

6) Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing
screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and 1-C Toner density control reference value
move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust. setting
* When developer is replaced.
NOTE: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is
replaced. Never execute it in the other cases.
1) With the front cabinet open, enter SIM25-2.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
$7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9(92B0B0
$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the developing roller main pole $7'(9(92B/B.

$7'(9(92B/B&
position comes to the specified range. $7'(9(92B/B0
7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller $7'(9(92B/B<

. & 0 < (;(&87(
main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjust-
ment plate with the fixing screw. K
EXECUTE

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
$7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9(92B0B0
$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
$7'(9(92B/B.
$7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
. & 0 < (;(&87(
Abnormal end Adjustment completed

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
$7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9(92B0B0
$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
$7'(9(92B/B.
$7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
. & 0 < (;(&87(

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&'B.(((/
7&'B&
7&'B0(((/
7&'B<
7&9B.(((/
7&9B&(((/
7&9B0(((/
7&9B<(((/
. & 0 < (;(&87(

2) Close the front cabinet.
3) Select a developing unit to be adjusted.
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted. The devel-
oping roller rotates, and the toner density sensor detects toner
density, and the output value is displayed.
The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the aver-
age value of the toner density sensor detection level is set
(saved) as the reference toner density control value.
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation
is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to normal from highlight.
This makes known about whether the adjustment operation is
completed or not.
The above operation is executed each of the lower speed
mode and the middle speed mode, and the reference toner
density control value is set for each of them.
NOTE:
If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the adjustment
result is not reflected.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the opera-
tion is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal dis-
play.
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EG] is displayed, setting of the ref-
erence toner density control value is not completed normally.
Error
Error name Detail of error
display
EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level: 1.5V or below. If not,
Control voltage: 8.0V or above.
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level: 3.45V or above. If not,
Control voltage: 2.0V or below.
EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level: other than 2.5V +/- 0.2V
NOTE:
1) When replacing developer, always replace all the three colors
of Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan.
If only one color is replaced, color balance may be adversely
affected. Black developer can be replaced individually.
2) When not replacing the developer, do not execute SIM25-2.
NOTE: During execution of this adjustment, do not insert the toner
cartridge.

1) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.
ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
2-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387

$˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: $˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B&
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B0

* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
'˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B<
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B.
$˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B&
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B0

'˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B<
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
2) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed mode and press [OK] key.
Adjustment Actual voltage

Item/Display (Mode) Content
range 41cpm machine 51cpm machine
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED GB_K Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) K 150 - 850 -630V -640V
B MIDDLE SPEED GB_C Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) C 150 - 850 -630V -640V
C MIDDLE SPEED GB_M Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) M 150 - 850 -630V -640V
D MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) Y 150 - 850 -630V -640V
LOW A LOW SPEED GB_K Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) K 150 - 850 -620V -620V
B LOW SPEED GB_C Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) C 150 - 850 -600V -600V
C LOW SPEED GB_M Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) M 150 - 850 -600V -600V
D LOW SPEED GB_Y Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) Y 150 - 850 -600V -600V
Remark: When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the proce-
Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is out- dure 3) is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is saved.
putted. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value. Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the MC/DV
high voltage power PWB.
Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC/DV high
voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to check the
adjustment value.
This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advisable to write
down the adjustment value in advance.
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed

mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
tain relationship.
Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a digital multi
meter in this model, a judgment of the output must be made by
GBK:XXX GBC:XXX GBM:XXX GBY:XXX checking the print image quality.

2-B Adjust the developing bias voltage
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced. '96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B.
* U2 trouble has occurred. $˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B&
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B0
'˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B<
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
㩷 after 30 sec.
or

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B.
$˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B&
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B0

'˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B<
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
2) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed mode and press [OK] key.
Adjustment Actual voltage

MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K Developing bias voltage (Middle speed mode) K 0 - 600 -450V -450V
B MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C Developing bias voltage (Middle speed mode) C 0 - 600 -450V -450V
C MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M Developing bias voltage (Middle speed mode) M 0 - 600 -450V -450V
D MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y Developing bias voltage (Middle speed mode) Y 0 - 600 -450V -450V
LOW A LOW SPEED DVB_K Developing bias voltage (Low speed mode) K 0 - 600 -450V -450V
B LOW SPEED DVB_C Developing bias voltage (Low speed mode) C 0 - 600 -430V -430V
C LOW SPEED DVB_M Developing bias voltage (Low speed mode) M 0 - 600 -430V -430V
D LOW SPEED DVB_Y Developing bias voltage (Low speed mode) Y 0 - 600 -430V -430V
Remark: When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the proce-
Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is out- dure 3) is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is saved.
putted. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value. Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the MC/DV
high voltage power PWB.
Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC/DV high
voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to check the
adjustment value.
This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advisable to write
down the adjustment value in advance.
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed

mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
tain relationship.
Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a digital multi
meter in this model, a judgment of the output must be made by
DVK:XXX DVC:XXX DVM:XXX DVY:XXX checking the print image quality.

2-C Transfer voltage adjustment

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* When the primary transfer high voltage power PWB or Second- 7+96(77,1*$1'287387
ary transfer high voltage power PWB is replaced. $˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/.

$˖ %˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/.
* U2 trouble has occurred. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/&
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. '˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/&
(˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/0
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. )˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/0
*˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/<
+˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/<
,˖ ˖7&/2:63(('%:.
-˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('%:.
.˖ ˖7&3/$,1&/63;
/˖ ˖7&3/$,1&/'3;
(;(&87( 2.
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE or after 30 sec.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/.
$˖ %˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/&

'˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/&
(˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/0
)˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/0
*˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/<
+˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/<
,˖ ˖7&/2:63(('%:.
-˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('%:.
.˖ ˖7&3/$,1&/63;
/˖ ˖7&3/$,1&/'3;
(;(&87( 2.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK] key.
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified voltage is outputted.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer voltage is outputted.
41cpm machine 51cpm machine

Setting Actual Actual
Item/Display Content Default Default
range output output
value value
value value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transfer bias Color K Low speed 51 - 255 95 8A 95 8A
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K reference value Middle speed 51 - 255 146 15A 182 20A
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C C Low speed 51 - 255 95 8A 95 8A
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C Middle speed 51 - 255 146 15A 146 15A
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M Low speed 51 - 255 95 8A 95 8A
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M Middle speed 51 - 255 146 15A 146 15A
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y Low speed 51 - 255 95 8A 95 8A
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y Middle speed 51 - 255 146 15A 146 15A
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Black/ K Low speed 51 - 255 95 8A 95 8A
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K White Middle speed 51 - 255 146 15A 182 20A
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer Color Standard Front surface 51 - 255 103 40A 117 50A
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX bias reference value paper Back surface 51 - 255 96 35A 103 40A
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Black/ Front surface 51 - 255 96 30A 103 40A
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX White Back surface 51 - 255 83 25A 90 30A
O TC2 HEAVY CL SPX Color Heavy Front surface 51 - 255 76 20A 76 20A
P TC2 HEAVY CL DPX paper Back surface 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
Q TC2 HEAVY BW SPX Black/ Front surface 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
R TC2 HEAVY BW DPX White Back surface 51 - 255 62 10A 62 10A
S TC2 HEAVY2 CL Color Heavy paper 2 51 - 255 76 20A 76 20A
T TC2 HEAVY2 BW Black/ 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
White
U TC2 GLOSSY CL Gloss paper Color 51 - 255 76 20A 76 20A
V TC2 GLOSSY BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
W TC2 OHP CL OHP Color 51 - 255 76 20A 76 20A
X TC2 OHP BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
Y TC2 ENVELOPE CL Envelope Color 51 - 255 69 15A 76 15A
Z TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
AA TC2 THIN CL Thin paper Color 51 - 255 103 40A 117 50A
AB TC2 THIN BW Black/White 51 - 255 90 30A 103 40A
AC TC2 CLEANING Cleaning process 51 - 255 59 8A 59 8A

range output output
value value
value value
AD TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary transfer In low speed print 0 - 255 0 0V 0 0V
AE TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD cleaning In middle speed print 0 - 255 0 0V 0 0V
AF TC2 CLEAN CLEANING Cleaning 0 - 255 85 -500V 85 -500V
AG VPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied voltage Color Low speed 60 - 255 *1 60 2.07KV 60 2.07KV
AH VPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL control (AC constant Middle speed 60 - 255 *1 60 2.07KV 60 2.07KV
AI VPTC LOW SPEED BK voltage setting) Black/ Low speed 60 - 255 *1 60 2.07KV 60 2.07KV
AJ VPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK White Middle speed 60 - 255 *1 60 2.07KV 60 2.07KV
AK FPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied voltage Color Low speed 92 - 192 *2 192 0.5KHz 192 0.5KHz
AL FPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL control (frequency Middle speed 92 - 192 *2 192 0.5KHz 192 0.5KHz
AM FPTC LOW SPEED BK setting value) Black/ Low speed 92 - 192 *2 192 0.5KHz 192 0.5KHz
AN FPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK White Middle speed 92 - 192 *2 136 0.7KHz 136 0.7KHz
AO DCPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied voltage Color Low speed 100 - 255 *3 123 1.22KV 123 1.22KV
AP DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL control (DC constant Middle speed 100 - 255 *3 179 1.62KV 179 1.62KV
AQ DCPTC LOW SPEED BK voltage setting value) Black/ Low speed 100 - 255 *3 179 1.62KV 179 1.62KV
AR DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK White Middle speed 100 - 255 *3 179 1.62KV 179 1.62KV
AS PTC_HT PTC heater operating 0: OFF 0-6 1 1 1 1
environment setting 1-6: Environment conditions
(TC environment table 6 steps)
AT HT_DUTY Setting of the supply 0: OFF 0 - 10 5 5 5 5
power in PTC heater 10: Lighting-up fully
constant operation (10 steps)
(Duty ratio setting)
*1: AG- AJ: Input disable for less than 60

*2: AK - AN: Input disable for less than 95 and 193 or above
*3: AO - AR: Input disable for less than 100
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified output is provided.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.

ADJ 3 Image density sensor The color image density sensor (image registration sensor F),
adjustment the black image density sensor (image registration sensor R)
are automatically adjusted.
Before executing this adjustment, check to confirm the following After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is
items. displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
* Check to confirm that the color image density sensor (image reg- If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis-
istration sensor F) and the black image density sensor (image played.
registration sensor R) are clean.
* Check to confirm that the transfer belt is clean and free from Mode Error display Error content
scratches. Adjustment BK_SEN_ADJ Black image PCS_K LED ADJ error
value for _ERR density (The target value is not
process sensor obtained after retried
3-A Color image density sensor (image control adjustment three times.)
registration sensor F), black image density operation abnormality
sensor (image registration sensor R) mode CL_SEN_ADJ Color image PCS_CL LED ADJ
_ERR sensor error (The target value
adjustment
adjustment is not obtained after
NOTE: This adjustment executes automatically at the outset of abnormality retried three times.)
registration adjustment operation and process control oper- BELT_READ Transfer belt PCS_K GRND error
ation as well as SIM44-2. _ERR surface (The surface detection
reading level is maximum or
1) Enter SIM44-2 mode.
abnormality the minimum value
difference is outside a
reference range.)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
352&21*$,1$'-8670(17
3&6B&//('$'- 5(*B)*51'
3&6B./('$'- 5(*B5*51'
3&6B&/'$5. 5(*B)%(/70$;
3&6B.'$5. 5(*B)%(/70,1
3&6B.*51' 5(*B)%(/7',)
3&6B.%(/70$; 5(*B5%(/70$;
3&6B.%(/70,1 5(*B5%(/70,1
3&6B.%(/7',) 5(*B5%(/7',)
5(*B)/('$'- 5(*B)3$7&+.

5(*B5/('$'- 5(*B)3$7&+&
5(*B)'$5. 5(*B)3$7&+0
5(*B5'$5. 5(*B)3$7&+<

(;(&87(

Mode Error display Error content
4-A Print image main scanning direction
Adjustment REG_SEN_F Registration REG_F LED ADJ error
value for _ADJ_ERR sensor F (The target value is not automatic magnification ratio adjustment
image adjustment obtained after retried (Print engine)
registration abnormality three times.)
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
operation REG_SEN_R Registration REG_R LED ADJ error
mode _ADJ_ERR sensor R (The target value is not

adjustment obtained after retried ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
abnormality three times.) $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
REG_BELT_F F side REG_F GRND error
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
_READ_ERR transfer belt (The surface detection 5(68/7 '$7$
surface level is maximum or
reading the minimum value
abnormality difference is outside a
reference range.)
REG_BELT_R R side REG_R GRND error
_READ_ERR transfer belt (The surface detection
surface level is maximum or
reading the minimum value
abnormality difference is outside a
reference range.)
2) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the key.
When an error occurs, check the following sections for any
abnormality. 3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key.
(Any paper size will do.)
- Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F)
- Black image density sensor (image registration sensor R)

- PCU PWB ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
- Transfer belt (dirt, scratch) 0)7 &6 &6
- Transfer belt cleaner

If any abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
ADJ 4 Image lead edge position,

image loss, void area, image (;(&87(
off-center, image magnification

ratio adjustment The adjustment pattern is printed out.
(Automatic adjustment) 5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
SIM50-28. guide.
* ADJ 16 In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
Print image position, image magnification ratio, void area, off- adjustment pattern.
center adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 17
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 18
Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 19
Copy image position and image loss adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
Menu in SIM50-28 mode
Display/Item Content
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
adjustment
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
SETUP/ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each paper
PRINT ADJ feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result display
DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is executed

NOTE:

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] key, the following items can
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( be executed individually.
12:(;(&87,1*
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are
executed simultaneously.
4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6 $'8
(;(&87(
&6 &6 /&&
The following item is automatically adjustment.

* Print image main scanning direction image magnification
ratio.
7) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( (;(&87(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
%.0$*

The adjustment pattern is printed out.
6) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.
In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
adjustment pattern.
5(35,17 5(6&$1 5(75< '$7$ 2.
4-B Print image off-center automatic

adjustment (Print engine)
(Each paper feed tray)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$

* Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* Print image off-center adjustment
8) Press [OK] key.

Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.
2) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] with the key.
3) Select [ALL] with the key.
4-C Copy mode image lead edge position,

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
&/26( image loss, void area, image off-center, sub
/($' 2))6(7 scanning direction image magnification
$//
ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner)



ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
automatic adjustment
5(68/7 '$7$ 7) Press [OK] key.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,08/$7,21&203/(7(
3/($6(386+&$.(<

2) Select [OC ADJ] with the key.

3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key.
(Any paper size will do.)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6
4-D Copy mode image lead edge position,

image loss, void area, image off-center, sub
scanning direction image magnification
ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner)
(RSPF mode)
(;(&87(

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(

2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
The adjustment pattern is printed out. 63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Either
direction will do.)
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.
In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
adjustment pattern.

2) Press the [SPF ADJ] key.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,'( 6,'(
$//

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
&/26(
3) Proceed to one of the three screens for selecting the cassette
3/($6(:$,7 used to print RSPF adjustment patterns by selecting the corre-
sponding button:
12:(;(&87,1*
SIDE1: RSPF adjustment for the front side
SIDE2: RSPF adjustment for the back side
ALL: RSPF adjustment for both the front and back sides
4) Select one of the cassettes that can be used to print RSPF
adjustment patterns. (Multiple selection is not allowed.)
5) Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts self-print of
RSPF adjustment patterns.
5(35,17 (;(&87(

* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is <Adjustment Item List>
self-printing RSPF adjustment patterns.
- RSPF original leading edge adjustment (back side)
When self-print finishes, the next screen appears where you
- RSPF original off-center adjustment (back side)
can start RSPF adjustments.
- RSPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment
6) RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the RSPF.
(back side)
(Set so that the pattern surface faces up.)
10) The adjustment result screen appears.
This screen shows the current values along with the previous
values in parentheses.
* By pressing the [REPRINT] key, you can return to the cas-
sette selection screen and have the machine self-print
RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front and back sides)
again.
* To have the machine start re-reading the RSPF adjustment
patterns (front and back sides), press the [RESCAN] key.
* To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment val-
ues into EEPROM and RAM, press the [RETRY] key.
* To display the data used for adjustment, press the [DATA]
key.
11) To save the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM and
* By pressing the [REPRINT] key, you can return to the cas- return to the top menu, press the [OK] key.
sette selection screen and have the machine self-print * To return to the result screen, press the [BACK] key.
RSPF adjustment patterns again.
7) Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts reading
RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front side). 4-E DSPF mode image off-center, image lead
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is edge position, sub scanning direction
reading and calculating RSPF adjustment patterns (for the image magnification ratio auto adjustment
front side). This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for * The scan control PWB has been replaced.
the front side) after it has read the patterns for the front side.
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced.
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment
* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled.
amount for the front side, the next screen appears where
you can have the machine start reading RSPF adjustment * The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced.
patterns (for the back side). * When a U2 trouble occurs.
Adjustment Item List * The PF section has been disassembled.
- RSPF original leading edge adjustment (front side) * The DSPF unit has been replaced.
- RSPF original off-center adjustment (front side) This adjustment is used to adjust the DSPF (front/back) document
lead edge, off-center, sub operation magnification ratio.
- RSPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment
(front side) 1) Enter the simulation mode 50-28 to select [SPF ADJ].
8) RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the RSPF.

(Set so that the pattern surface faces down.) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$

2) Select an adjustment item (front, back, both).

<List of adjustment items>
* By pressing the [REPRINT] key, you can return to the cas-
Menu display item Content
sette selection screen and have the machine self-print
SIDE1 DSPF adjustment front surface
RSPF adjustment patterns again.
SIDE2 DSPF adjustment back surface
9) Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts loading
ALL DSPF adjustment front/back surface
RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
reading RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for
the back side) after it has read the patterns for the back side.
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment
amount for the back side, the next screen appears where
you can view the results of the adjustments.

6) Load the DSPF adjustment pattern on the DSPF.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,'( 6,'(
$//

3) The display shows the tray select screen for printing the DSPF
adjustment pattern. Select a tray for DSPF adjustment printing.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key, and scanning of the DSPF adjustment

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( pattern selected in step 2) is started.
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(:$,7
12:(;8&87,1*
(;(&87(
4) Self-print of the DSPF adjustment pattern is performed.

5(35,17 (;(&87(

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 8) When [ALL] is selected, load the DSPF adjustment pattern on
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
12:(;(&87,1*
the DSPF again, and perform the adjustment of the back sur-
face in the similar procedures.
9) The adjustment result screen is displayed.
The value of this time is displayed, and the value of the last
time is displayed in the parenthesis ( ).

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
63)6,'(/($' 2))6(7 68%
63)6,'(/($' 2))6(7 68%
(;(&87(
5) After completion of printing, the DSPF adjustment start screen

is displayed.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(6(77+(35,17(53$77(513$3(5217+(63)
7+(135(66>(;(&87(@7267$57 5(35,17 5(6&$1 5(75< '$7$ 2.
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to

the cassette select screen to allow self-print of the DSPF
adjustment pattern (front, back) again.
* When [RESCAN] button is pressed, the DSPF adjustment
pattern (front, back) is scanned again.
* When [RETRY] button is pressed, the adjustment value is
not saved in EEPROM and RAM and shifted to the top menu
5(35,17 (;(&87( screen.
* When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used in execution
of the adjustment are displayed.

10) When [OK] button is pressed, the adjustment value is saved in NOTE: This adjustment can be executed efficiently by executing
EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the end the following procedures in advance.
screen. The K (black) image skew, however, must be properly
adjusted for that.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
1) Press [REGIST] button in SIM50-22 mode to execute the auto-
7(67
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( matic image registration adjustment.
6,08/$7,21&203/(7(
2) The current skew level is displayed on the SKEW display
3/($6(386+&$.(<
menu.
3) Put down the displayed skew level value.
Meaning of the skew level value
* When "R" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the
skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the number of the
value.
* When "L" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the
skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the number
of the value.
At that time, the fractional part after the decimal point is rounded.
NOTE: The K (black) image skew level cannot be checked with
this adjustment.
ADJ 5 Print engine image distortion To check and adjust the K (black) image skew, follow the
adjustment / OPC drum phase procedures below and execute the adjustment.
adjustment / Color registration 1) Enter SIM61-4 mode.
adjustment

(Print engine section) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
/68326,7,21$'-8670(176(/)35,17
&/26(
$˖ ˖08/7,&2817
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: $˖ %˖ ˖3$3(5&6
* When the color shift occurs. ˷̚˹
* When the LSU is replaced.

* When the LSU is removed from the main unit.
* When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed.
* When maintenance work is performed. (Replacement of the
OPC drum, the OPC cartridge, the transfer unit, the transfer belt,
etc.)
(;(&87( 2.
* When [ADJ 4A] / [ADJ 16A] Print engine image magnification
ratio adjustment (BK) (main scanning direction) is performed. 㪈㪇 key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
* When the PCU PWB is replaced. or end of print
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
* When the color phase is not proper even after execution of the 7(67 &/26(
/68326,7,21$'-8670(176(/)35,17
color balance adjustment. $˖ ˖08/7,&2817
$˖ %˖ ˖3$3(5&6
* When the OPC drum drive section is disassembled.
˷̚˹
* When the primary transfer unit is replaced. (when it is removed
from the machine)
* When the developing unit or the OPC drum unit is removed from
the machine.
5-A Image skew adjustment

(LSU unit)
(;(&87( 2.
* When the color shift occurs. 2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11" x 17") paper in it by
* When the LSU unit is replaced. changing the value of set item B.
* When the LSU unit is removed from the main unit. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* When a color image registration mistake occurs. The check pattern is printed out.
* When the unit is installed or when the installing site is changed. 4) Check the printed black image for any skew.
(Required depending on the cases.) Measure the right angle level by using the six cross patterns
* When there is an uneven density area or a difference in color printed in black.
balance in the main scanning direction (back and forth). There are following two methods of checking the black image
* When the color phase is not matched by the color balance for any skew (right angle).
adjustment. Method 1:
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced. Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle print
* When the primary transfer unit is replaced. pattern. Check the difference in the length of the diagonal lines
for judgment of good or no good

Method 2:
Compare the right angle of vertical side/horizontal side of the
rectangle print pattern and the right angle sides of A3 or 11 x
8.5 paper for judgment of good or no good.
NOTE: In the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be used
may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of paper
Y X
to be used in advance.
(Method 1)
a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle
print pattern.
A B
7) Install the waste toner box, and close the front cabinet.
Diagonal Diagonal 8) Execute procedures 3) - 4).
line C line D
(Repeat procedures 5) - 8) until a satisfactory result is
About 220mm
obtained.)
9) If the adjustment result reaches the satisfactory level, tighten
the adjustment screw.
(The black image skew adjustment is completed with the
above.)
10) In the above black image skew adjustment, check the color
image skew pattern printed when completion of the adjust-
ment.
About 300mm If the difference between the shift amounts on the F and R
sides is within +/- 1 scale of the fine adjustment check scale,
b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C there is no need to perform the adjustment.
and D of the diagonal lines. Measure the skew amount from the print patterns on the front
c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in and rear sides of each color.
the following range.
C - D = +/-0.8mm
R side
If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there
is no need to adjust.
(Method 2)
a) Fit the side of A3 or 11" x 17" paper to the long side of the
rectangle print pattern.
b) Measure the shift distance between vertical side of paper
and side of the rectangle print pattern.
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
adjust.
If not, execute the following procedures.
5) Open the front cabinet, and remove the waste toner box. F side
(For U.S.A. 51cpm machine only)

Remove the power switch cover.
6) Loosen the LSU unit fixing screw (1 pc.) and shift the skew
Color image shift check C (Image shift fine adjustment
adjustment screw in the arrow direction to adjust the LSU (writ- scale (Fine adjustment) reference frame)
ing) unit skew. B-sub
(When Method 1 is used to check the black image for any
skew (right angle) in procedure 4 in advance)
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C > D, shift the
adjustment screw in the direction of Y.
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C < D, shift the
adjustment screw in the direction of X.
B-main A-main
(When Method 2 is used to check the black image for any
skew (right angle) in procedure 4 in advance)
If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of A, shift the
adjustment screw to X direction. If the image is skewed in the
arrow direction of B, shift the adjustment screw to Y direction.
A-sub Color image shift

A-main: Main scan rough adjustment pattern check section
A-sub: Sub scan rough adjustment pattern (Rough adjustment)
B-main: Main scan fine adjustment scale
B-sub: Sub scan fine adjustment scale
C: Main scan sub scan fine adjustment pattern

In each Y/M/C color print pattern printed separately in the F
side and in the R side, note the same print color pattern and 5-B Print engine image distortion adjustment
check to confirm that the F side and the R side are in the same (Manual adjustment) / OPC drum phase
condition. adjustment (Automatic adjustment) /
Rough adjustment pattern check: Color registration adjustment
Check the sub scan rough adjustment color image shift check (Automatic adjustment)
section on the R side and the F side of each color, use the cen- This adjustment performs the print engine image distortion adjust-
ter position of the black scale as the reference, and check the ment, the OPC drum phase adjustment, and the color registration
balance in shifts of the color image line positions in the positive adjustment simultaneously.
and the negative directions. The balance in the R side must be
1) Enter SIM50-22 mode.
the same as that in the F side.
Fine adjustment pattern check:
Check the square frames on the R side and the F side of each ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
color. (Normally five sections of high density can be seen.) 0$,1)0$,1568%6.(:
Check the sub scanning direction position of the center area of &/1*
0/1*

high density (one of the above five sections). These must be </1*
on the same position on the R side and the F side. 3+$6(
&
In this case, use the sub scan direction color image shift check 0
scale (fine adjustment) as the reference. <
Visually check the color density and make the darkest section
as the center, and use it as the read value of the shift amount.
Check that the difference in the center position of the dark den- 5(*,67 '580326 $// (;(&87(
sity section is within +/- 1 step.

EXECUTE
The positional relations of the front and the rear frame of the Adjustment completed
print color patterns of a same color are compared. There is no

need that all the colors are in the same state. Compare only
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
the positional relations of color patterns of a same color. $872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
12:(;(&87,1*
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedure.
11) Turn the LSU skew adjustment screw of the adjustment target
color to adjust.
(Skew adjustment screw rotation direction)
When the F side is skewed to the right side for R side: Turn the
screw clockwise.
When the F side is skewed to the left side for the R side: Turn (;(&87(
the screw counterclockwise.

Abnormal end
(Reference of the rotation amount of the skew adjustment
screw)

Skew of difference by one step between F and R sides (Differ- ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ence by one scale of the fine adjustment check scale) / Turn $872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
35(66>(&(;87(@7267$57
for about double clicks. (55257211(5(037<
Repeat the procedures 10) to 11) until a satisfactory result is

obtained.
Y M C
(;(&87(

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the image registration auto-
matic adjustment is started. (It takes about 15 sec to complete
the adjustment.)
3) When the adjustment is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
the normal display, and the value of the adjustment result is
displayed.
The current skew level for each color is displayed on the
SKEW display section.

Display/
Content Display Default NOTE
Item
MAIN F C Registration adjustment value main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 200
direction (Cyan laser writing position F side)
M Registration adjustment value main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 200
direction (Magenta laser writing position F side)
Y Registration adjustment value main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 200
direction (Yellow laser writing position F side)
MAIN R C Registration adjustment value main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 200
direction (Cyan laser writing position R side)
M Registration adjustment value main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 200
direction (Magenta laser writing position R side)
Y Registration adjustment value main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 200
direction (Yellow laser writing position R side)
SUB C Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction 1.0 - 399.0 200
(Cyan drum -> Black drum)
M Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction 1.0 - 399.0 200
(Magenta drum -> Black drum)
Y Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction 1.0 - 399.0 200
(Yellow drum -> Black drum)
SKEW C Print skew amount calculation result (Cyan) -99.9 - 99.9 0 If the value is positive (+), "L" is displayed at the head of the
M Print skew amount calculation result (Magenta) -99.9 - 99.9 0 value. If negative (-), "R" is displayed.
Y Print skew amount calculation result (Yellow) -99.9 - 99.9 0 If the value is in the range of -2.1 - +2.1, "(OK)" is displayed at
the bottom of the value. In the other cases, "(NG)" is displayed.
ALL_ Print skew amount calculation result (Overall) -99.9 - 99.9 0 If the value is positive (+), "L" is displayed at the head of the
ROTATE value. If negative (-), "R" is displayed.
If the value is in the range of -1.6 - +1.6, "(OK)" is displayed at
the bottom of the value. In the other cases, "(NG)" is displayed.
PHASE OPC drum phase adjustment value 1-8 1
4) Write down the displayed skew level. 5) If "C, M, Y" is NG, go to the procedure 6).
Meaning of the skew level value and the adjustment pro- For the adjustment, remove the front cover and the waste
cedure toner box, and turn the skew adjustment screw.
* If "OK" is displayed for all items of C, M, and Y, there is no 6) Repeat the procedures 2) to 4) again, and check to confirm
need to perform the adjustment. that C, M, and Y (SKEW) are OK.
* When "R" is displayed at the head of the value, turn the LSU If any of them is NG, turn the LSU skew adjustment screw of
skew adjustment screw clockwise. the corresponding color to adjust.
* When "L" is displayed at the head of the value, turn the LSU
skew adjustment screw counterclockwise.
* The turning amount of the adjustment screw corresponds to
each adjustment value. "C, M, and Y" indicate numbers of Y M C
clicks. The display value is rounded at the decimal point.
* "C, M, and Y (SKEW)" shows the number of adjustment click
steps for each adjustment screw of C, M, and Y.
Contents in ( )
MIAN, SUB: Difference from the previous adjustment value of
image registration.
Example:
If 105 for this time and 103 for the previous time,
it is displayed as 105.0 (+2.0).
SKEW: Judgment of the LSU skew adjustment result. OK or NOTE: When an abnormality occurs, "ERROR" is displayed.
NG. In this case, check each drive section and the process sec-
PHASE: OPC drum phase adjustment value of the previous tion.
time

The adjustment result can be checked by the following manual 4) Check the color image registration.
adjustment mode. There are 6 color image registration patterns in total; two on
* ADJ 5B each of the F side, the R side, and the center. Check all the
Image skew adjustment (Manual adjustment) (SIM50-20) patterns to confirm that they are within the specified range.
* ADJ 5C Also check to confirm that there is not much shift in each color
image registration check pattern.
Color registration offset adjustment (SIM50-20)
NOTE:
NOTE:
There are two kinds of adjustment: one in the main scanning direc-
If color shift in an actual print image differs in the center, the front
tion and the other in the sub scanning direction. The vertical direc-
side, and the rear side, the color shift offset adjustment can
tion in the above figure is that in the main scanning direction, and
improve it. (Refer to ADJ 5C.)
the horizontal direction is that in the sub scanning direction.
Normally there is a difference in color shift in several dots. Perform
There are also two kinds of adjustments: the rough adjustment and
the adjustment only when the adjustment is required.
the fine adjustment. Perform the rough adjustment then perform the
fine adjustment deliberately.
5-C Color registration offset adjustment For the main scan direction image registration, the offset on the F
(No need to adjust normally) side, the R side, and at the center is independently adjusted.
This adjustment is used to set the offset value for the automatic If there is a difference in the sub scanning direction image registra-
color registration adjustment (ADJ 5B). tion between the F and R sides, perform the skew adjustment (ADJ
If there is any difference in color phase at the center and the four 5A).
corners of an actual print image, this adjustment may improve it.
X2 X1
Especially when there is any color shift at the center area, this
adjustment may improve it effectively. Color image shift check C (Image shift fine adjustment
scale (Fine adjustment) reference frame)
This adjustment cannot eliminate color shifts in all the areas, but B-sub
average the overall color shifts.
After the automatic adjustment, use this color registration offset
adjustment to correct color shift partially, performing the adjustment
efficiently.
Y2
NOTE:
Before execution of this adjustment, check to confirm that the fol-
lowing adjustment has been properly made. B-main A-main
* ADJ 5A image skew adjustment (LSU unit)
Y1
[Kinds of adjustment values]

There are following two kinds of registration adjustment values.
- Base registration adjustment value: XXX(FRONT)/XXX(REAR)
They are manual adjustment values and automatic adjustment A-sub Color image shift
A-main: Main scan rough adjustment pattern check section
values, and reflected when the automatic registration adjustment (Rough adjustment)
A-sub: Sub scan rough adjustment pattern
is executed. It varies for every operation of the automatic regis- B-main: Main scan fine adjustment scale
tration adjustment. B-sub: Sub scan fine adjustment scale
C: Main scan sub scan fine adjustment pattern
- Offset adjustment values: OFFSETXXF/OFFSETXXR
They are the offset adjustment values added to the above base Check the print patterns of the rough adjustment and the fine
registration adjustment values, and are not changed unless adjustment of 18 check patterns.
SIM50-20 is executed to change. How to check the rough adjustment pattern and input of the
1) Enter SIM50-20 mode. adjustment value:
2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11" x 17") paper in it. Visually check the color image registration check section, use the
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. center position of the black scale as the reference, and check the
shift balance in the positive and negative directions at the color
The color image registration check pattern is printed.
image line position.
Use the center position of the black scale as the reference, and
check that the color image line is symmetrical in the positive side
Rear pattern and the negative side.
If shift is in the arrow mark X1 and Y1, increase the adjustment
value. If shift is in the arrow mark X2 and Y2, decrease the adjust-
ment value.
The reference arrow on the check pattern faces the positive direc-
Center pattern
tion.
(Reference adjustment value)
1 scale/10 (When the set value is changed by 10, shift is made by 1
scale.)
Front pattern
Reference arrow mark

How to check the fine adjustment pattern and input of the
Adjustment Default
adjustment value: Display/Item Content
value range value
Check to confirm that the darkest spot (one of 5 spots seen nor- A CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
mally) is within the center area of the image registration adjustment (FRONT) value (Main scanning
reference frame in the square frame. direction) (Cyan) (F side)
At that time, use the color image registration check scale (fine B CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
adjustment) as the reference. (REAR) value (Main scanning
direction) (Cyan) (R side)
Visually check and consider the darkest section of color density as
C MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
the center, and measure the shift from it.
(FRONT) value (Main scanning
Check to confirm that the center of the dark density section is within direction) (Magenta) (F side)
+/- 1 step. D MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is in the range of 0 +/- 1 for the (REAR) value (Main scanning
fine adjustment reference pattern scale, there is no need to adjust.) direction) (Magenta) (R side)
E YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
If shift is in the arrow mark X1 and Y1, increase the adjustment
(FRONT) value (Main scanning
value. If shift is in the arrow mark X2 and Y2, decrease the adjust- direction) (Yellow) (F side)
ment value. F YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
(Reference adjustment value) (REAR) value (Main scanning
1 scale/1 (When the set value is changed by 1, shift is made by 1 direction) (Yellow) (R side)
scale.) G CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
(SUB) value (Sub scanning
direction) (Cyan)
If there is a considerable difference in color shift in the square and H MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
at the center area, perform the adjustment. (SUB) value (Sub scanning
Select an adjustment item (OFF SET X F / OFF SET X R / OFF direction) (Magenta)
SET X S), and change the adjustment value to adjust. I YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
(SUB) value (Sub scanning
OFF SET X F: direction) (Yellow)
F side main scanning direction registration offset set value (The J OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
color shift on the F side and at the center area is changed.) CF adjustment value (Main
OFF SET X D: scanning direction) (Cyan)
(F side)
R side main scanning direction registration offset set value (The
K OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
color shift on the R side and at the center area is changed.) CR adjustment value (Main
OFF SET X S: scanning direction) (Cyan)
Sub scanning direction registration offset set value (Color is shifted (R side)
to the sub scanning direction overall.) L OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
MF adjustment value (Main
NOTE: When the adjustment value of OFF SET X F and OFF SET scanning direction) (Magenta)
X R are changed, the color at the center area will be (F side)
affected. Consider this when executing the adjustment. M OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
(Adjustment conditions and method) MR adjustment value (Main
scanning direction) (Magenta)
To adjust evenly overall, adjust so that the color shifts on the F side, (R side)
the R aide and at the center are of the same level. N OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
To adjust with the center area most focused, adjust so that the color YF adjustment value (Main
shift at the center becomes smaller than that on the F side and the scanning direction) (Yellow)
R side. (F side)
O OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
YR adjustment value (Main
When the offset adjustment value is 0, if the color registration scanning direction) (Yellow)
adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed, the color shift on (R side)
the F side and that on the R side are automatically adjusted to be P OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
smaller than that on the center area. CS adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction) (Cyan)
Q OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
MS adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction) (Magenta)
R OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
YS adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction) (Yellow)

3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
ADJ 6 Scan image distortion side of the scanner unit B.
adjustment
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the copy image is distorted.
6-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism

adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass.
1) Remove the lamp unit, and then loosen the screws which are
fixing the scanner unit A and the drive wire. Release the scan-
ner unit A from the drive wire.
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.
5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce-
dures, perform the following procedures.
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which
is not in contact.
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on
the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.

6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the 3) Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and If La = Lb, there is no distortion.
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
La Lb
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform

the following procedures.
4) Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will
do.)
6-B Scan image (sub scanning direction)

distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
L L
L = 10mm 5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan-
L
ner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu- 6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
ment table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference
Repeat the procedures 2) - 6) until the condition of the procedure 3)
position as shown below.) With the document cover open,
is satisfied.
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform ADJ 6D Scan image distortion
adjustment (Whole scanner unit).
30mm

5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front
6-C Scan image (main scanning direction) frame side.
distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
L L
L = 10mm
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the
L scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
right and the left heights of the scanner rail.
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu- Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until the difference between the
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction. 6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
If the four angles of the rectangle of the copy image are right frame side, change the overall height.
angles, it is judged that there is no distortion. (The work is 7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
completed.) ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check
that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the
specified range.
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform ADJ 6D Scan image distortion
adjustment (whole scanner unit).
6-D Scan image distortion adjustment

(Whole scanner unit)
This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform adjusted with ADJ 6A, ADJ 6B, and ADJ 6C related to the scan
the following procedure. image distortion adjustment.
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion
and right-hand side images distortions. adjustment plate on the right edge of the scanner unit so that the
scan image distortion is minimized. By adjusting the distortion of
Lc Lc the whole scanner unit, the scan image distortion is adjusted.
1) Loosen the fixing screw (A).
2) Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate.
Copy A Copy B
Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld Lc Ld
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.

(The distortions are balanced.)
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
If not, perform the following procedures.
A A A
A

ADJ 7 Scanner image skew 7-A RSPF height adjustment
1) Make an RSPF height adjustment sheet
adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) Cut copy paper in the longitudinal direction.
20mm
A4/Letter size
2) Perform the adjustment according to the flowchart below.
<Flow chart> <Work procedure>

a) Check section A.
Start of the
adjustment Place the RSPF height adjustment sheet between section A
and the SPF glass height adjustment resin surface (a), and
close the RSPF unit.
Slowly pull out the RSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check to insure that a slight resistance is felt when pulling out
the RSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check section A.
* Be careful not to cover the convex section of the glass
holding resin surface with the height adjustment sheet.
Is No The section
there a resist- A is lowered
ance? too much.
Yes
Adjust hinge D
until there is a
resistance in
section A.
(Counter- b) If it cannot be pulled out, turn the section D clockwise and
clockwise)
adjust in order to lift the RSPF unit.
If it can be pulled out without resistance, turn the section D
counterclockwise and adjust in order to move down the RSPF
unit.
Turn the hinge
D to lift the
RSPF so that
there is a
resistance in
the section A.
(Clockwise)
D

c) Adjust the section F.
Use a clearance gauge to check to confirm that the clearance
in the section F is 4.3mm - 5.0mm.
If not, turn the section E to adjust.
Adjust the
* Insert a clearance gauge in the range of 20mm from the
section F so that
the clearance is
edge (a) of the right lower cover of the base.
4.3mm - 5.0mm.
F 4.3 - 5.0mm
No
Is there a
resistance in the
section B?
Yes a
Increase the 20mm

clearance in
the section F
until there is a
resistance in
the section B.
However, the
max. is 5.0mm.
* Turn section E clockwise to lift the RSPF unit. Turn it

counterclockwise to move down the RSPF unit.

d) Check section B.
Place the RSPF height adjustment sheet between section B
and the SPF glass height adjustment resin surface (a), and
close the RSPF unit.
Slowly pull out the RSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check section B. Check to insure that a slight resistance is felt when pulling out
the RSPF height adjustment sheet. (If the boss in section B is
in contact, it is O.K.)
* Be careful not to put the book sensor (b) on the height
adjustment sheet.
B
b
Is
there a re- No
sistance?
Yes
e) If it can be pulled out without resistance, turn the hinge in

section E clockwise to adjust.
Adjust hinge f) Check section C.

E until the
separation in
section C is
Check section C. deleted.
(Counter-
clockwise) b
C
* The bosses in section A
Is there No and B are excessively
a separating pressed. (The right
section.
side is separating.)
Yes
C
b
End of the
adjustment

[Check Method 2]
7-B RSPF skew adjustment
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
(Front surface mode) print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: 1.0mm.
* The RSPF section has been disassembled.
* When replacing the RSPF unit.
0 - 1.0mm
* The RSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2.
SIM 64-2 set values A
A = 1, B = 1, C = 254, D = 255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.
A Paper pass direction If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side,
then do step 3).
3) Remove the hex nut cover in the RSPF diagonal adjustment
screw section.
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in RSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the RSPF feed tray so that the mark on the 4) Raise the RSPF unit upright, and loosen the fixing screw of the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
hinge.
- Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm
A B
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm
C D
c d

5) Close the RSPF unit, and loosen the hex nut of the RSPF 6) Make a copy again and measure (a) and (b) on the copied test
diagonal adjustment screw section. chart. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition ((a) - (b) =
Turn the hex wrench of the RSPF diagonal adjustment screw +/- 1mm or less) is satisfied.
to adjust the alignment. 7) Tighten the hinge section fixing screw which was loosened in
the procedure 4) to tighten the hinge section.
* In the case of (A), turn the RSPF diagonal adjustment screw

counterclockwise.
In the case of (B), turn the RSPF diagonal adjustment screw
clockwise. 7-C DSPF parallelism adjustment
* The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced.
* When a DSPF JAM is generated.
* When a skew is generated in the document feed operation.
* When there is a distortion (skew) in the scan image in the DSPF
unit.
1) Close the DSPF unit and check the clearance between the
projections in the front side and the rear side and the SPF
glass holding resin surface.
A B
2) Visually check to insure that the clearance A is 1mm or less

and the clearance B is 0mm (in contact).
If the above requirement is not met, do step 3).
1mm
0mm

3) Turn the height adjustment screw to adjust the DSPF front/rear
frame horizontal level.
A Paper pass direction
R B
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
When the front frame side is higher (there is a clearance in B): [Check Method 1]
Turn the height adjustment screw R of the DSPF rear frame
clockwise. (Front side)
When the rear frame side is higher (clearance A is more than
1mm): Turn the height adjustment screw L of the DSPF rear
frame counterclockwise.
Repeat steps 2) to 3) until an acceptable result is obtained.
A B
4) After adjustments of A and B, check to insure that the projec-
tion on the front right side is in contact with the glass surface of
the main unit. a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm
C D
c d
[Check Method 2]
7-D DSPF skew adjustment Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
(Front surface mode) print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: 1.0mm.
* When replacing the DSPF unit. 0 - 1.0mm
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Make an adjustment chart.
Print the self print pattern (grid pattern) of SIM64-2 in the
duplex print mode. A
SIM64-2 set value
A=1, B=1, C=254, D=255
If the front surface copy image is as shown above and the

back surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
of "ADJ 7E DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode)."
If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side,
then do step 3).

3) Loosen the hinge screws and lower the two attachments.
7-E DSPF skew adjustment
(Back surface mode)
2
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1 1) Make an adjustment chart.
Print the self print pattern (grid pattern) of SIM64-2 in the
duplex print mode.
SIM64-2 set value
A=1, B=1, C=254, D=255
4) Open the DSPF and loosen the screw.
A Paper pass direction
5) Adjust by turning the DSPF skew adjusting screw on the right

side of the DSPF rear frame. 2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")
paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
A B
a b
(Back side)
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm
left]
If a < b, then turn counterclockwise the DSPF skew
adjusting screw.
C D
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
right]
If a > b, then turn clockwise the DSPF skew adjusting screw. c d

[Check Method 2] [When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction left]
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within If c < d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A
1.0mm. counterclockwise, or turn the adjustment screw B clockwise.
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
right]
0 - 1.0mm
If c > d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A clockwise,
or turn the adjustment screw B counterclockwise.
* The adjustment screws A and B must be turned in proper
balance. For example, if the trouble is not removed by turn-
A ing the adjustment screw A 180 degrees clockwise, do not
turn the adjustment screw A furthermore, but turn the adjust-
ment screw B 180 degrees counterclockwise.
ADJ 8 Scan image focus adjustment

(CCD unit position adjustment)
If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the
front surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3) 8-A Document table mode image focus
of "ADJ 7D DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)."
adjustment
If the back surface copy is not as shown above, perform the
procedures of step 3) or later.
* The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
3) Open the upper door, and remove the adjustment cover.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
$˖ %˖ ˖&&'68%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
'˖ ˖63)68%
(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
)˖ ˖63)%68%
2.
2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).

Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
4) Turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw on the CCD unit to 3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.
adjust.
A B

4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper. 10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale
length in terms of length.
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main
scanning direction from the following formula.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
(Example)
Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the
copy image.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1
NOTE: Never loosen the screws marked with X.

100mm scale
(Orignal)
10 20 90 100 110 If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.
1.0mm
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
Copy image
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
(1mm (1%)
10 20 90 100 110 CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
shorter than
the original) than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
following procedures. * Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
7) Remove the document table glass. in procedure 9).
8) Remove the dark box cover.
9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 +/- 1%,
repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
NOTE: This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 +/- 1.0%)
is replaced.
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.

6) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
8-B DSPF mode image focus adjustment direction) to change the installing position.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced. CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced. than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
* When the COPY/SCAN/FAX image focus is not properly One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
adjusted. At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
* When the DSPF unit is removed. scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced. * Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
1) Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode. in procedure 4).
2) Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper
is satisfactorily focused.
If the image is not satisfactorily focused, do the following
steps.
3) Open the door. Remove the screws, and remove the transport
PG upper.
7) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.

If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 +/- 1%,
4) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the repeat the procedures of 4) - 6) until the condition is satisfied.
CCD unit base as shown below.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 +/- 1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.
ADJ 9 Print lead edge image position

5) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws (4 pcs.). adjustment (Printer mode)
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
NOTE: This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the
lead edge void area to greater than the standard value
(3mm) in the printer mode.
* Never loosen the screws marked with ✕.

Loosening these screws could possibly change the CCD
unit base optical axis. Once the optical axis has been
changed, it cannot be corrected through on-site adjust-
ments. Solving such a problem requires the replacement of
the entire scanner unit.

1) Enter the SIM 50-5 mode. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment pattern is printed.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5 pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
$˖ ˖'(1&
$˖ in the standard adjustment value range.
%˖ ˖'(1%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)52175($5 Standard adjustment value: 4.0 +/- 1.0mm

'˖ ˖'(1%0)7
(˖ ˖'(1%&6
)˖ ˖'(1%&6
*˖ ˖'(1%&6
+˖ ˖'(1%&6
,˖ ˖'(1%/&&
-˖ ˖'(1%$'8
.˖ ˖'(1%+9
/˖ ˖ 08/7,&2817
(;(&87( 2.
4.0 1.0mm
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE End of print

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
$˖ ˖'(1&
$˖ %˖ ˖'(1%
&˖ ˖)52175($5
˷̚˹
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
'˖ ˖'(1%0)7
(˖ ˖'(1%&6 5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust-
)˖ ˖'(1%&6 ment item DENC with the scroll key.
*˖ ˖'(1%&6
+˖ ˖'(1%&6
6) Change the adjustment value.
,˖ ˖'(1%/&& Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
-˖ ˖'(1%$'8
.˖ ˖'(1%+9
[EXECUTE] key.
/˖ ˖08/7,&2817 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
(;(&87( 2.
printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
2) Select the set item L with the scroll key, and enter the value paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased.
in it.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed
Setting by about 0.1mm.
Display/Item Content Default
range Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.
A DEN-C Printer lead edge image 1 - 99 30
position adjustment
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
C FRONT/REAR
adjustment
FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 20
ADJ 10 FR density variation correction
adjustment Before executing this adjustment, be sure to check the following
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void 1 - 99 50 items.
area adjustment correction
* Executed SIM61-3 when replaced Developper, Drum, LSU unit.
value
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 * There must be no unevenness in charging.
adjustment correction value * There must be a tray with A4 (LT) paper in it.
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 * When this adjustment (FR density unevenness automatic adjust-
adjustment correction value
ment) is executed after execution of ADJ10-B (FR density
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
unevenness manual correction), the value of the manual correc-
tion will be cleared. In order to keep the value of manual correc-
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
tion, do not execute this automatic correction.
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value 10-A FR density unevenness automatic
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void area 1 - 99 55 correction: all 32-point adjustment
K DENB-HV Heavy paper correction 1 - 99 50
value * When unevenness occurs in the main scanning direction:
L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 1) Enter the SIM 61-11 mode.
M PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 (CS1) 2) Press the [AUTO CORRECTION] key.
selection paper feed
When [DATA] key is pressed, the current correction value of
CS1 Tray 1 2
"FR density unevenness automatic correction" can be
CS2 Tray 2 3
checked.
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
N DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1

5) Set the printed sample for scanning on the OC in the A4R
(LTR) direction, and press [EXECUTE] key to start scanning.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/$6(532:(5$872&255(&7,21
During execution, [EXECUTE] is highlighted.
$872&255(&7,21 '$7$ .(<
(;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5
.(<
.(<
.(<

.(<
.(<
.(<

.(<
.(<
.(<

.(<
.(<
.(<

.(<
0212 &2/25
3) Press the key of the density to be checked and press [EXE-

CUTE] key. The shading manual correction data are cleared,
the high density process control is started, and self printing of
the adjustment patch is started.
Set the document so that the arrow direction is fit with the left
edge section for scanning.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6) After completion of scanning the patch, the shading data are
/$6(532:(5$872&255(&7,21 revised and the half tone process control is forcibly executed.
3/($6(6(/(&7'(16,7<02'( (;(&87(72 .(<
352&21$1'35,177(673$7&+
Then, self print of the adjustment result patch is automatically
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3($25;6,=(
(;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5
started.
3$3(5)257+,6&255(&7,21
.(<
.(<
.(<

7) After completion of self printing, the following screen is dis-
.(<
.(<
.(<

played.
.(<
.(<
.(<

The FR density unevenness can be improved by pressing
.(<
.(<
.(<
[RETRY] key and repeating procedures 3) - 7).
.(<
0212 &2/25
/,*+7 0,''/( '$5. (;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
4) After completion of self printing, the machine enters the /$6(532:(5$872&255(&7,2102'(0,''/(
&203/(7('7+,6352&('85( .(<
standby state for output patch scan start. (;,7 .(<

%$&. &/($5
3/($6(48,77+,602'(
.(<
.(<
.(<

.(<
.(<
.(<

.(<
.(<
.(<

.(<
.(<
.(<

.(<
0212 &2/25
5(75<
8) To reset the adjustment values to the default (factory setting),

use SIM61-13 to clear the automatic and manual correction
values.
9) After completion of all adjustments, be sure to execute SIM46-
74 (Copy color balance adjustment).

10-B FR density unevenness visual inspection
correction: 4-point adjustment for each of
CMYK (with the center fixed)
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When unevenness occurs in the main scanning direction:
Press [VISUAL INSPECTION] key to go to the density selec-
tion menu.
When [DATA] key is pressed, the current correction value of
"FR density unevenness manual correction" can be checked.
4) The screen for entry of the visual inspection measurement

result is displayed.
Enter an adjustment value based on the adjustment patch and
press [EXECUTE] key, and the shading data are revised and
the half tone process control is forcibly executed.
When the value is increased, the density is increased. When
the value is decreased, the density is decreased.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/$6(532:(50$18$/&255(&7,2102'(0,''/(
$˖ ˖326,7,21 .(<
$
%˖ ˖326,7,21
˷̚˹ (;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5
&˖ ˖326,7,21
'˖ ˖326,7,21
2) Press the key of the density to be checked and press [EXE- (˖ ˖326,7,21 .(<
.(<
.(<

CUTE] key. The high density process control is started, and )˖ ˖326,7,21
.(<
.(<
.(<

*˖ ˖326,7,21
self printing of the adjustment patch is started. +˖ ˖326,7,21
.(<
.(<
.(<

During execution, [EXECUTE] is highlighted. ,˖ ˖326,7,21
-˖ ˖326,7,21
.(<
.(<
.(<

.˖ ˖326,7,21
/˖ ˖326,7,21
ǂǂǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( .(<
0212 &2/25
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
/$6(532:(50$18$/&255(&7,21
3/($6(6(/(&7'(16,7<02'( (;(&87(72 .(<
352&21$1'35,177(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3($25;6,=(
(;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5 5) After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result patch
3$3(5)257+,6&255(&7,21 is automatically outputted and the current correction value is
.(<
.(<
.(<

displayed.
.(<
.(<
.(<
The FR density unevenness can be improved by pressing
.(<
.(<
.(<

[RETRY] key and repeating procedures 3) - 5).
.(<
.(<
.(<

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
.(<
0212 &2/25 /$6(532:(50$18$/&255(&7,2102'(0,''/(
/,*+7 0,''/( '$5. (;(&87( &203/(7('7+,6352&('85( .(<
(;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5
3/($6(48,77+,602'(
3) Select [4POINT CORRECTION]] key or [31POINT CORREC-
TION] key. .(<
.(<
.(<

To make the adjustment more deliberately, select [31 POINT

.(<
.(<
.(<

CORRECTION].
.(<
.(<
.(<

.(<
.(<
.(<

ǂǂǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/$6(532:(50$18$/&255(&7,2102'(0,''/(
32,17&255(&7,21 32,17&255(&7,21 .(< .(<
0212 &2/25
. & 0 < 5(75<
(;(&87(
(;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5
6) To reset the adjustment values to the default (factory setting),

.(<
.(<
.(<

use SIM61-13 to clear the automatic and manual correction
.(<
.(<
.(<

values.
7) After completion of all adjustments, be sure to execute SIM46-
.(<
.(<
.(<

74 (Copy color balance adjustment).
.(<
.(<
.(<

.(<
0212 &2/25

ADJ 11 Color balance/density (3) Copy color balance and density check
adjustment NOTE: Before checking the copy color balance and density, be
sure to execute the following jobs.
(1) Note before execution of the color balance/density
adjustment * Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* Requisite conditions before execution of the color balance/den-
sity adjustment * Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
Before execution of the color balance/density adjustment, check Method 1
to insure that the adjustments which affect the color balance/den- Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy
sity have been completed properly. of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
The importance levels of them are shown below. 0326FC11), and check that they are proper.
(Since the following items affect the color balance/density a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check
directly, they must be adjusted or set before execution of the in the color copy mode
image quality adjustments.) To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test
1) The following adjustment items must be adjusted properly. chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart
(UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11). Set the copy density
Job level to "3" in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual), and make
Adjustment item Simulation
No a copy.
ADJ Print engine image distortion adjustment / OPC drum 50-20/22 At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user
5 phase adjustment / Color registration adjustment adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
(Print engine section)
In addition, be sure to use the specified paper for color.
(Though the following items affect the color balance/density, b. Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density
there is no need to adjust them frequently. When, however, a To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-
trouble occurs, they must be checked and adjusted.) 0162FCZZ). Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/
1) The following items must be adjusted properly. Printed Photo mode (Manual).
In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user
Job
Adjustment item Simulation adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
No
ADJ Adjust the ADJ Adjust the developing Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
1 developing unit 1A doctor gap In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
ADJ Adjust the developing the following conditions.
1B roller main pole position
NOTE: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test
ADJ Toner density control 25-2
1C reference value setting chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to check.
ADJ Adjusting high ADJ Adjust the main charger 8-2 (Color copy)
2 voltage values 2A grid voltage Patch 1 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
ADJ Adjust the developing 8-1 SHARP GRAY CHART
2B bias voltage 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
ADJ Transfer voltage 8-6

2C adjustment
ADJ Scan image focus adjustment 48-1
8
Patch 2 is copied.
Note for the color balance/density check and adjustments
- For the color balance adjustments, be sure to use the paper (Black-and-white copy)
Patch 2 is
specified for color (recommended paper). slightly copied.
SHARP gray chart
SHARP GRAY CHART

Note that, if another kind of paper is used for the color balance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
adjustment, proper image qualities (color balance, density) may
not be obtained.
- When setting the adjustment pattern on the document table in
the automatic color balance adjustment procedures, place 5
sheets of white paper on the adjustment pattern in order to pre- Patch 3 is copied.
Patch 1 is not copied.

vent back copying and adverse effects of paper wrinkles as far
as possible. Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/
UKOG-0326FC11)
(2) Relationship between the servicing job contents and the In the copy color balance check with the servicing color test chart,
color balance/density check and adjustment check to insure the following conditions.
Note that the jobs before and after execution of the color balance/ (Color copy)
density check and adjustment depend on the machine status and
the servicing conditions. Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
Follow the flowchart of the color balance/density adjustment proce-

dures depending on the actual conditions.
There are following four, major cases.
1) When installing (When a printer option is installed)
2) When a periodic maintenance is performed.
3) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
(When a consumable part is replaced.) The densities of patches 1 - 6 of Patch 7 is slightly
each color are properly balanced. copied or not copied.
4) When an installation, a repair, or inspection is performed.
(Without replacement of a consumable part)

Color copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)
1) There are 12 void areas. 4) The color difference in gray balance between the F and the R
2) Registrations (one point for the main scanning, and one point sides is not so great.
for the sub scanning) are not shifted. 5) There are no white and black streaks.
3) The resolution of 5.0 (5 points) can be seen. 6) Color texts are clearly reproduced.
7) The background density is not so light.

Monochrome copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)
1) There are 12 void areas. 4) There are no white and black streaks.
2) The resolution of 4.0 (5 points) can be seen. 5) The background density is not so light.
3) The density difference between the F and the R sides is not so 6) The black low-density gradation is copied slightly.
great.

Method 2 The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance adjustment sheet, and to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
check each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the black reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the
patch in order to confirm that the color balance adjustment is same level.
proper or not more precisely.
Method 2
When the PCL or the PS printer function is not provided (GDI
model), use this method for check.
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and
compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the
Low High black patch to check the color balance.
density density
Y
M PRINTER CALIBRATION
Bk Low density High density

Y
CMY
blend M
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
C
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied. Bk
CMY
blend
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
The patch density is changed gradually.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed 2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied.
color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is
proper. If the color balance of the adjustment pattern printed in this
mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is converted into the natural
gray color balance by the color table in an actual copy mode. The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
(When the color balance target is DEF 1.) The patch density is changed gradually.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
(4) Printer color balance/density check to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
NOTE: Before checking the copy color balance and the density, be reversed.
sure to execute the following procedures in advance. The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) Patch B may not be copied.
forcibly. (SIM 44-6) Patch A must not be copied.
* The half-tone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26) If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed
Method 1 color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern. proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted into the natural gray
color balance by the color table. (When the color balance target is
NOTE: When the PCL or the PS printer function is not provided
DEF 1.)
(GDI model), this method cannot be used for check.
11-A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)

Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
print test pattern is printed.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble is occurred.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
(1) Note before adjustment
- Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens sur-
face are free from dirt and dust.
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
- Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of the
SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are free from
dirt and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.

(2) Adjustment procedures SET 1 Color balance adjustment target setup
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to a. General
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer-
ment table.
tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
There are following three kinds of the target.
the left side.
- Factory color balance (gamma) target
- Service color balance (gamma) target
- User color balance (gamma) target
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.
This setting is required in the following cases.
* When the color balance and density adjustments are executed
manually (SIM46-21) (SIM67-25)
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
improper.
SET 1A Copy color balance adjustment target setup

Each color balance target for the copy color balance adjust-
ment
Type Descriptions
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance target,
balance (gamma) and each of them is specified according to the
target machine design. Use SIM 63-11 to select one of
them as the factory target. The default setting
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust- which emphasizes color reproduction.
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment B Service color This target is used when the user requests to
method using the SIT chart. balance (gamma) customize the color balance to user's desired
NOTE: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or target level. In advance, the user's unique color
balance must be registered as the service color
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document
balance target. The above registration (setting)
table. is made by the serviceman with SIM 46-21 to
NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1. adjust the color balance and with SIM 63-7 to
register it.
2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
This color balance target is used when the user
The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment, executes the color balance adjustment. When,
[EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment, therefore, the service color balance target is
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display. changed, the color balance target of the user's
color balance adjustment is also changed.
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( balance is set to the factory color balance target
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17 set with SIM 63-11. The default setting (factory
6(77+(&+$5721'63)$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
setting) of the color balance is same as the
factory color balance target. (Emphasized on
color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the
color balance to the factory color balance target.
C User color Same color balance as the service color balance
balance (gamma) (gamma) target When the service color balance
target target is changed, this color balance target is
also changed accordingly.
(;(&87(
NOTE: Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FC

Z1) is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet
rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag (such
as a dark file) and store in a dark place of low temperature
and low humidity.

Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in
the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/46-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Factory color balance

Use SIM 63-11 to select one of the three target (DEF1) = Service color balance
target Factory setting
kinds of color balance targets.
target (DEF1) Factory color balance Service color balance Use SIM 46-21 to adjust the optional color
target (one of DEF1 - 3) target (Unique) balance, and use SIM 63-7 to register it.
target (DEF2)
target (DEF3) Factory color balance Execute SIM 63-8.
target
(one of DEF1 - 3)
= Service color balance
target (The service color balance target is the
same as the factory color balance target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for Service color balance

the user color balance
adjustment
= target
Factory target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-74/46-24)

By use of SIM 63-11, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF2) target for the user color balance adjustment
+b* Direction of Yellow SIM63-8

Factory color balance target
Factory color balance target (DEF1) = Service color balance
Hue (DEF1) target/Color balance target for the
user color balance adjustment
Direction
of Green
Item Content Default

DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance DEF1
(A) operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction
of Red DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target
is selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue

SIM63-8
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust- Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and
ment ((Automatic adjustment) SIM 46-74/46-24). the purpose of registration
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance can This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7. When, customized with SIM 46-21.
however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to the If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
same balance as the factory color balance target set with SIM 63- required.
11.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment ual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in to register the service color balance target data by using adjust-
the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM ment pattern that was printed in this mode.
46-74/46-24). When, therefore, the service color balance target is NOTE: In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for print-
changed, this target is also changed accordingly.
ing the adjustment pattern by SIM 46-21.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is
revised.

It is recommended to keep the printed adjustment pattern created 3) Press [SETUP] key.
with SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the 4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly
same color balance target to another machine. adjusted and printed in the copy color balance adjustment
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. (Manual adjustment) (SIM 46-21) (ADJ 11C (2)) on the docu-
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it ment table.
from discoloration and dirt. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed with SIM
The service color balance target data is registered immediately 64-7 can be used instead. In this case, however, check that the
after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21. printed pattern is normal.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal- (When the color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed by
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the SIM 64-7, set the item B (PROC ADJ) to "0 (YES)" and press
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color [EXECUTE] key to print.)
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time. A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment. machine can be used.
The accuracy of the service color balance target data can be Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
judges as follows. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting (adjustment pattern).
the service color balance target in SIM 46-74/46-24 is unsatisfac- If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with
tory or abnormal. SIM 46-21 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not exe-
In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance cute SIM 63-7 to register the service color balance target data.
adjustment (Auto) may be improper. 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7. 6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was 6(77+(&+$57213/$7(1$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with

SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously
a. Setting procedure
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
the service color balance target)
1) Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
(;(&87(
(adjustment pattern).
NOTE: In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for print- The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
ing the adjustment pattern by SIM 46-21. 6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment

is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an 6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
12:&+$573$7&+5($',1*
adjustment.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%&'()
*+,-.
㩺㪣012
(;(&87(
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color

(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - Q
(MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is
. & 0 < 6(783
judged as abnormal.
In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again.
7) Press [OK] key.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
get.

(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the 1) Enter the SIM 63-8 mode.
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
the same color balance as the factory color balance target)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
NOTE: This procedure must not be executed when the copy color 67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(77,1*6(59,&(
balance was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique color bal-

ance requested by the user and it was registered as the
service color balance target with SIM 63-7.
When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM
63-11, be sure to execute this procedure.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

3) Press [YES] key.
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
ance as the factory color balance target.
SET 1B Printer color balance adjustment target setup

Color balance target for the printer color balance adjustment
Type Descriptions
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance targets, and each of them is specified according to the machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to
balance (gamma) select one of them as the factory target. The default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1) which emphasizes color
target reproduction.
B Service color This target is used when the user requests to customize the color balance to user's desired level. In advance, the user's unique color
balance (gamma) balance must be registered as the service color balance target. The above registration (setting) is made by the serviceman with SIM
target 67-25 to adjust the color balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user executes the color balance adjustment. When, therefore, the service color balance
target is changed, the color balance target of the user's color balance adjustment is also changed. When, however, SIM 67-28 is
executed, the color balance is set to the factory color balance target set with SIM 67-26. The default setting (factory setting) of the color
balance is same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set the color balance to the factory color
balance target.
C User color balance Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma) target When the service color balance target is changed, this color balance
(gamma) target target is also changed accordingly.
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in
the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/76-24)
Color balance target in the printer color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Use SIM 67-26 to select one of the three

target (DEF1)
= Service color balance
target
Factory setting
kinds of color balance targets.
target (DEF1) Factory color balance Service color balance Use SIM 67-25 to adjust the optional color
target (one of DEF1 - 3) target (Unique) balance, and use SIM 67-27 to register it.
target (DEF2)
Execute SIM 67-28.
target (DEF3) Factory color balance
target (one of DEF1 - 3) = Service color balance
target
(The service color balance target is
the same as the factory color balance
target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for Service color balance

the user color balance
adjustment
= target

Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24)
By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM67-28
+b* Direction of Yellow SIM67-28 Factory color balance target (DEF1)

Factory color balance target = Service color balance target/Color
(DEF1) balance target for theuser color
Hue balance adjustment
Direction
of Green
Item Content Default

DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance DEF1
ĩłĪ operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color
table in an actual printer mode and print is made. (Factory setting)
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target
is selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color table
Direction in an actual copy mode and print is made.
of Red
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue

(DEF3) SIM67-28 target for the user color balance adjustment
Service color balance target in the printer color balance If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal-
adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24). ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance can adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27. When, balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set to the Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
same balance as the factory color balance target set with SIM 67- The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
26. judged as follows.
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in the service color balance target in SIM 67-24 is unsatisfactory or
the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM abnormal.
46-74/67-24). When, therefore, the service color balance target is In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance
changed, this target is also changed accordingly. adjustment (Auto) may be improper.
Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
the purpose of registration adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27.
customized with SIM 67-25. The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
required. SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
ual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27 a. Setting procedure
to register the service color balance target data by use of the (Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
printed adjustment pattern. the service color balance target)
NOTE: In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for print- 1) Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual
ing the adjustment pattern by SIM 67-25. adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised. (adjustment pattern).
It is recommended to keep the printed adjustment pattern created NOTE: In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for print-
with SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the ing the adjustment pattern by SIM 67-25.
same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. Do If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it from is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
discoloration and dirt. optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
The service color balance target data is basically registered imme- adjustment.
diately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25.

2) Enter the SIM 67-27 mode. (Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to

the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&( NOTE: This procedure must not be executed when the copy color
%&'()
*+,-. balance was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color bal-
/012 ance requested by the user and it was registered as the
service color balance target with SIM 67-27.
When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM
67-26, be sure to execute this procedure.
. & 0 < 6(783

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/25&$/,%6(59,&(
3) Press [SETUP] key.

4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly
adjusted and printed in the printer color balance adjustment
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 11E (2)) on the docu-
ment table.
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
machine can be used.
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color bal-
ance (manual) was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color
balance requested by the user and it was registered as the 3) Press [YES] key.
service color balance target with SIM 67-27. The service color balance target and the color balance target for
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
ance as the factory color balance target.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
12:&+$573$7&+5($',1*
11-B Copy/Printer color balance and density
adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
(Basic adjustment)
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
(;(&87(
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read. * U2 trouble has occurred.
6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%$6( a. General
%&'()
*+,-.
SIM46-74 is used to perform the automatic copy color balance and
/012 density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the automatic printer color bal-
ance and density adjustment (SIM67-24) continuously.
Since it is desirable to perform the copy color balance adjustment
(automatic adjustment) before the automatic printer color balance
and density adjustment, it is advisable to perform the adjustment in
this mode.
This mode is also advisable to effectively perform both of the auto-
. & 0 < 5(3($7 2.
matic copy color balance and density adjustment (SIM46-24) and
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color (K, C, the automatic printer color balance and density adjustment (SIM67-
M and Y) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys. 24). It saves considerable time when compared with performing
each of the auto copy/printer color balance and the density adjust-
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - Q
ment individually.
(MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is
judged as abnormal. The color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density of each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again.
Black automatically.
7) Press [OK] key.
When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust- of all the copy/printer modes are revised.
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
get.

b. Adjustment procedures
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
#OPYPRINTERCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYADJUSTMENT!UTOMATICADJUSTMENT
3)- PROCEDUREFLOWCHART
3TART
%XECUTE!$*"#OPYCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITY0RINTERCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITY
ADJUSTMENTAUTOMATICADJUSTMENT 3)-
#OPYCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYADJUSTMENTAUTOMATICADJUSTMENT
%NTERTHE3)- MODEANDSELECT!X PAPER!UTOMATICSELECTION
0RESS;%8%#54%=KEY4HEADJUSTMENTPATTERNISPRINTED
3ETTHEADJUSTMENTPATTERNONTHEDOCUMENTTABLE3ELECTTHE&!#4/29TARGETORTHE
3%26)#%TARGETANDPRESS;%8%#54%=KEY
4HEADJUSTMENTPATTERNISSCANNEDANDTHEADJUSTMENTISAUTOMATICALLYPERFORMEDTO
PRINTTHECHECKPATTERN

#HECKTHEPRINTEDCHECKPATTERNFORANYSTREAKSORUNCLEARCOPY

0RINTERCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYADJUSTMENT!UTOMATICADJUSTMENT
3ETTHEADJUSTMENTPATTERNONTHEDOCUMENTTABLE3ELECTTHE&!#4/29TARGETORTHE
3%26)#%TARGETANDPRESS;%8%#54%=KEY
4HEADJUSTMENTPATTERNISSCANNEDANDTHEADJUSTMENTISAUTOMATICALLYPERFORMEDTO
PRINTTHECHECKPATTERN
!UTOMATICADJUSTMENTCOLORBALANCETARGETCHANGE
#HANGETHECOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYTARGET
3)-
0RESS;/+=KEY4HEINITIALSETTINGOFTHEHALFTONEIMAGECORRECTIONISAUTOMATICALLY
PERFORMED
./
0RESS;%8%#54%=KEY%XECUTETHEHALFTONEIMAGECORRECTION
4HOUGHTHE&!#4/29COLOR
BALANCEANDDENSITYTARGET
#ANCEL3)-
AVAILABLEINKINDS IS
CHANGEDSATISFACTORYCOLOR
#HECKTHECOPYCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYADJUSTMENTRESULT BALANCEANDDENSITYARENOT
OBTAINED3)- ORTHE
3%26)#%TARGETISSELECTED
5SETHETESTCHART5+/' &#::5+/' &# TOMAKEACOPYINTHE4EXT
0RINTED0HOTOMODEANDCHECKTHECOPYCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITY
5SE3)- TOPRINTTHECOLORBALANCECHECKPATTERNANDCHECKTHEPATCHCOLOR 9%3

BALANCEANDDENSITYINTHEPROCESSGRAY)FTHECOLORBALANCEISSLIGHTLYSHIFTEDTO
-AGENTAITISPROPERLYADJUSTED
%XECUTE!$*# #OPYCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITY
ADJUSTMENT -ANUALADJUSTMENT 3)-
!RETHECOLORBALANCEANDDENSITY ./

ATTHESPECIFIEDLEVEL

7HENTHECOLORBALANCEAND
9%3 DENSITYARECUSTOMIZEDAND
%XECUTE!$*% 0RINTERCOLORBALANCEAND REGISTEREDASTHE3%26)#%
DENSITYADJUSTMENT !UTOMATICADJUSTMENT TARGETSELECTTHE3%26)#%
3)- TARGET

./ )STHE0#,PRINTER )FTHEINITIALSETTINGOFTHE
FUNCTIONPROVIDED !UTOMATICCOLORBALANCETARGETCHANGE
HALFTONEIMAGECORRECTIONIS
NOTPROPERLYADJUSTED
SATISFACTORYCOLORBALANCEAND
3)-
9%3 DENSITYCANNOTBEOBTAINED)N
./ THISCASECHECKTHEPRINT
ENGINEFORANYPROBLEMS
#HECKTHEPRINTERCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYADJUSTMENTRESULTWITHTHESELFPRINT

CHECKPATTERN 4HOUGHTHE&!#4/29 )FSATISFACTORYCOLORBALANCEAND
COLORBALANCEANDDENSITY DENSITYARENOTOBTAINEDWITH
5SE3)- TOPRINTTHESELFPRINT 5SE3)- TOPRINTTHESELFPRINT TARGETAVAILABLEIN !$*# #OPYCOLORBALANCE
CHECKPATTERNANDCHECKTHEPRINTER CHECKPATTERNANDCHECKTHEPRINTER KINDS ISCHANGED ANDDENSITYADJUSTMENT -ANUAL
COLORBALANCEANDDENSITY COLORBALANCEANDDENSITY SATISFACTORYCOLORBALANCE ADJUSTMENT 3)-
ANDDENSITYARENOT CHECKTHEPRINTENGINEFORANY
OBTAINED3)- OR
PROBLEMS
THE3%26)#%TARGETIS
SELECTED

!RETHECOLORBALANCE ./ )FTHEREISANYSTREAKORUNCLEAR
ANDDENSITYATTHE COPYONTHEPRINTEDCHECK
SPECIFIEDLEVEL 9%3 PATTERNCHECKTHEPRINTENGINE
FORANYPROBLEMS
9%3
%XECUTE!$*% 0RINTERCOLOR
%ND BALANCEANDDENSITYADJUSTMENT
-ANUALADJUSTMENT 3)-

1) Enter the SIM46-74 mode. 4) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
When the color balance is customized by the manual color bal-
ance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's request,
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&( and the color balance is registered with SIM63-7 as the service
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
target, if the color balance is required to be adjusted, select the

3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$$25;;6,=(3$3(5
[SERVICE] target.
)257+,6$'-8670(17

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
(;(&87(

The high density process control is performed, and the copy
color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(
(A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.)

The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( and prints the color balance check patch image.
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
352&21(;(&87,1* If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
tern, check the print engine for any problems.
Low High
density density
(;(&87(
Y
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in M

procedure 2) on the document table.
C
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch
Bk
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time,
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q

The printer color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed
out. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically
selected.)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
&21),507+($'-3$7&+$1'35(66>(;(&87(@72$'-2)5(*,675$7,21(;(
$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
(;(&87(

6) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the The printer color balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically
procedure 5) on the document table. performed and the color balance check patch image is printed
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the out.
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time, tern, check the print engine for any problems.
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image
PRINTER CALIBRATION
PRINTER CALIBRATION
Low density High density

;
$M
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied.

The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
8) The initial setting menu of the halftone image correction is dis-

played. Press [OK] key.
7) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key. The initial setting of the halftone image correction is per-
When the color balance is customized with the manual color formed.
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color (1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
balance, select the [SERVICE] target. &21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
2.
9) Wait until [EXECUTE] key is displayed. When it is displayed,

press it.
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(
The halftone image correction is performed.

10) When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the
adjustment operation is completed. 11-C Copy quality adjustment (Basic adjustment)
Cancel SIM46-74. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
&203/(7(7+,6352&('85(
3/($6(48,77+,602'(
2. * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
5(68/7 5(75<
11-C (1)
Copy color balance and density adjustment
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes valid only when the both
(Automatic adjustment)
adjustments in the copy mode and in the printer mode are
completed. a. General
For example, if the copy color balance adjustment (auto- The color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
matic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is can- adjust the copy density of each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
celed, the adjustment result is invalid. Black automatically.
of all the copy modes are revised.
11) Check the copy color balance and density.
(Refer to the item of the copy color balance and density
check.) There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
ment.
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in 1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM is used.)
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1). 2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce- mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 11C The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
(2)). reduce the number of service calls.
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe- If the copy color balance is lost for some reason, the user can
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
11C (2)). machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
12) Check the printer color balance and density. work effectively.
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density If the machine condition is dramatically changed, a fatal prob-
check.) lem occurs, or the normal color targets cannot be obtained,
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained service must recalibrate the machine to specification.
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
procedure 7), change the factory color balance target with SIM understood.
67-26 and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man-
ual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 11E (2)).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 7) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
11E (2)).
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even
after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.

b. Adjustment procedure
#OPYCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYADJUSTMENT!UTOMATICADJUSTMENT
3)- PROCEDUREFLOWCHART
3TART
%XECUTE!$*# #OPYCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYADJUSTMENT
AUTOMATICADJUSTMENT
%NTERTHE3)- MODEANDSELECT!X PAPER

!UTOMATICSELECTION
3ETTHEADJUSTMENTPATTERNONTHEDOCUMENTTABLE3ELECTTHE
&!#4/29TARGETORTHE3%26)#%TARGETANDPRESS;%8%#54%=KEY
4HEADJUSTMENTPATTERNISSCANNEDANDTHEADJUSTMENTIS
AUTOMATICALLYPERFORMEDTOPRINTTHECHECKPATTERN


0RESS;/+=KEYANDTHEINITIALSETTINGOFTHEHALFTONEIMAGECORRECTION
ISAUTOMATICALLYPERFORMED
!UTOMATICCOLORBALANCETARGETCHANGE
#ANCEL3)- #HANGETHECOLORBALANCEAND
DENSITYTARGET3)-
#HECKTHECOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYADJUSTMENTRESULT ./
5SETHETESTCHART5+/' &#::5+/' &# TOMAKEA

COPYINTHE4EXT0RINTED0HOTOMODEANDCHECKTHECOPYCOLORBAL 4HOUGHTHE
ANCEANDDENSITY &!#4/29COLOR
BALANCEANDDENSITY
TARGETAVAILABLEINKINDS
5SE3)- TOPRINTTHECOLORBALANCECHECKPATTERNANDCHECKTHE ISCHANGEDSATISFACTORYCOLOR
PATCHCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYINTHEPROCESSGRAY)FTHECOLORBAL BALANCEANDDENSITYARENOT
ANCEISSLIGHTLYSHIFTEDTO-AGENTAITISPROPERLYADJUSTED OBTAINED3)-
ORTHE3%26)#%
TARGETISSELECTED
!RETHECOLORBALANCEANDDEN ./ 9%3
SITYATTHESATISFACTORYLEVEL
%XECUTE!$*# -ANUALCOPYCOLOR
9%3 BALANCEANDDENSITYADJUSTMENT
3)-

#HECKTHATTHEINITIALSETTINGOFTHEHALFTONEIMAGECORRECTIONWASPROPERLY
PERFORMED

7HENTHECOPYCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYARE
CUSTOMIZEDANDREGISTEREDASTHE3%26)#%
%XECUTETHEINITIALSETTINGOFTHEHALFTONEIMAGECORRECTION TARGETSELECTTHE3%26)#%TARGET
3)-

)FSATISFACTORYCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYARE
NOTOBTAINEDWITH!$*# -ANUALCOPY
%XECUTETHEHALFTONEIMAGECORRECTION3)- COLORBALANCEANDDENSITYADJUSTMENT
3)- CHECKTHEPRINTENGINEFOR
5SETHETESTCHART5+/' &#::5+/' &# ANYPROBLEMS
TOMAKEACOPYINTHE4EXT0RINTED0HOTOMODEANDCHECK

THECOLORBALANCEANDDENSITY )FTHEINITIALSETTINGOFTHEHALFTONEIMAGE
CORRECTIONISNOTPROPERLYMADESATISFACTORY
COLORBALANCEANDDENSITYCANNOTBE
OBTAINED)NTHISCASECHECKTHEPRINTENGINE
./ FORANYPROBLEMS
!RETHECOLORBALANCEANDDEN

SITYATTHESATISFACTORYLEVEL
)FTHEREISANYSTREAKORUNCLEARCOPYONTHE
PRINTEDCHECKPATTERNCHECKTHEPRINTENGINE
9%3 FORANYPROBLEMS
%ND

1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode. The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed
to print the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
Low High
density density
Y
M
(;(&87(
C
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is
automatically selected.) Bk
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in

Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper.
5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.

According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the
halftone image correction is performed.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
&21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
2.
NOTE:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
played. This operation takes several minutes.
4) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
MODE" is displayed.
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar- Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
get with SIM 63-7, if the color balance is adjusted to that color MODE" is displayed.
balance, select the service target.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(

(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( &203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
3/($6(48,77+,602'(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(

6) Check the color balance and density. 11) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-
(Refer to the item of the copy color balance and density 0317FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check
check.) the copy color balance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy
7) Use SIM44-26 to execute the halftone image correction. color balance and density check.)
(Forcible execution) Though the above procedures 9) - 11) are performed, the copy
Enter the SIM44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. color balance and density are not in the specified range, there may
be another cause.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained from
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57 the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in proce-
dure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM 63-11 and
repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is not
obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual
adjustment (SIM 46-21) (ADJ 11C (2)).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 7) to execute
the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not obtained,
perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 11C(2)).
(;(&87(
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even

It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com- after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed. may be another cause.
(Normal end (Auto transition)) repeat the adjustment from the beginning.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 11-C (2)
5(68/7
Copy color balance and density adjustment
&203/(7( (Manual adjustment)
a. General
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density of CMYK. This is used at the following situ-
ation. When the result of auto adjustment described above is not
existing within the range of reference. When a fine adjustment is
required. When there is request from the user for changing (cus-
5(68/7 (;(&87(
tomizing) the color balance.
This manual adjustment is executed only for the color patch which
(Abnormal end (Auto transition)) could not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-

ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
efficiency.
(55256(1625$'-8670(17
(;(&87(
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.

8) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
0326FC11) in the Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy
color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color
balance and density check.)
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, per-
form the following procedures.
9) Execute the initial setting of the halftone image correction.
(SIM 44-21)
10) Execute the halftone image correction. (Forcible execution)
(SIM44-26)

#OPY COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY ADJUSTMENT -ANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

FLOWCHART 3)-
3TART
%XECUTE!$*# #OPYCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYADJUSTMENT
-ANUAL ADJUSTMENT

%NTERTHE3)- MODEANDSELECT!X PAPER
!UTOMATICSELECTION
0RESS ;%8%#54%= KEY

4HE ADJUSTMENT CHECK PATTERN IS PRINTED
2EFER TO THE PRINTED ADJUSTMENT CHECK PATTERN AND SELECT A

TARGET ADJUSTMENT COLOR WITH THE COLOR KEYS # - 9 +
3ELECT A TARGET ADJUSTMENT LEVEL WITH THE SCROLL KEY
%NTERTHEADJUSTMENTVALUEWITH KEY
0RESS ;%8%#54%= KEY

4HE ADJUSTMENT CHECK PATTERN IS PRINTED
#HECK THE PATCH COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY IN THE PROCESS

GRAY OF THE COLOR BALANCE CHECK PATTERN )F THE GRAY COLOR IS
SLIGHTLY SHIFTED TO -AGENTA THE COLOR BALANCE IS PROPERLY
ADJUSTED
!RE THE COLOR BALANCE ./

AND DENSITY AT THE SATI
SFACTORY LEVEL
9%3
#ANCEL THE 3)- MODE
0ERFORM THE INITIAL SETTING OF THE HALFTONEIMAGECORRECTION

3)-
#HECK THE COPY COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY ADJUSTMENT RESULT WITH THE
TEST CHART

5SE THE TEST CHART 5+/' &#::5+/' &#
TO MAKE A COPY IN THE 4EXT0RINTED 0HOTO MODE AND CHECK
THE COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY
!RE THE COLOR BALANCE ./

AND DENSITY AT THE SATI
SFACTORY LEVEL
9%3
#HECK TO CONFIRM THAT THE INITIAL SETTING OF THE HALFTONEIMAGECORRECTIONIS

PROPERLY SET

0ERFORM THE INITIAL SETTING OF THE HALFTONEIMAGECORRECTION

3)-
0ERFORM THE HALFTONEIMAGECORRECTION3)-
5SE THE TEST CHART 5+/' &#::5+/' &#

TO MAKE A COPY IN THE 4EXT0RINTED 0HOTO MODE AND CHECK
THE COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY

)F SATISFACTORY COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY ARE NOT
OBTAINED WITH THE ADJUSTMENT CHECK THE PRINT
ENGINE FOR ANY PROBLEMS
./ !RE THE COLOR BALANCE

AND DENSITY AT THE SATI )FTHEINITIALSETTINGOFTHEHALFTONEIMAGE
SFACTORY LEVEL CORRECTION IS NOT PROPERLY ADJUSTED SATISFACTORY
COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY CANNOT BE OBTAINED )N
9%3 THIS CASE CHECK THE PRINT ENGINE FOR ANY PROBLEMS
3ETTHE3%26)#%TARGETFORTHEAUTOMATICCOPYCOLOR
BALANCEADJUSTMENT3)-
%ND

1) Enter the SIM46-21 mode. Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//&2/25@ request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ color balance stated above.
%˖ ˖32,17
˷ ̚ ˹ &˖ ˖32,17 If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
'˖ ˖32,17
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
*˖ ˖32,17 pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is
+˖ ˖32,17 converted into the natural gray color balance by the color cor-
,˖ ˖32,17
rection table in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
target is DEF 1.)
/˖ ˖32,17
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
C 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
10-key EXECUTE
SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and
EXECUTE End of print density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To

decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//&2/25@
$˖ ˖32,17
fied.
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
˷ ̚ ˹ &˖ ˖32,17
'˖ ˖32,17
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
(˖ ˖32,17 adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
)˖ ˖32,17
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
way of adjustment.
,˖ ˖32,17 Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each pro-
-˖ ˖32,17
cess (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2. 6) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) and a user's document accord-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is ing to necessity in the normal copy mode, the text/Printed
automatically selected.) Photo mode (Manual) to check the adjustment result.
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density check.)
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color 7) Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the halftone
balance is satisfactory. image correction.)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
Low High
density density
;
(;(&87(
%
$M
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
CMY
blend
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3

The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter

level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
level.

(Normal end (Auto transition)) (Normal end (Auto transition))

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
5(68/7 5(68/7
&203/(7( &203/(7(
5(68/7 (;(&87( 5(68/7 (;(&87(
(Abnormal end (Auto transition)) (Abnormal end (Auto transition))

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
5(68/7 (55256(1625$'-8670(17
(5525.&0<
5(68/7 (;(&87( (;(&87(
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
NOTE:
This procedure is to save the copy color balance adjustment 9) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
data as the reference data for the halftone correction. 0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) and a user's document accord-
Immediately after execution of ADJ 11C (2) (Color balance ing to necessity in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and
adjustment, Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the item of the
procedure. copy color balance/density check.)
When ADJ 11C (1) (Color balance adjustment, Auto) is exe- If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the
cuted with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically exe- specified level, there may be another cause.
cuted. Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treat-
8) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the halftone image correction. ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
(Forcible execution) from the beginning.
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. NOTE:
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started. If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register the
color balance as the service target.

If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
required.
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar-
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
the next color balance adjustment.
(;(&87(
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-

pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.

11-D Copy / Image send / FAX image quality
adjustment (Individual adjustment)
a. General
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the basic adjust-
ments ADJ 11B and ADJ 11C or there is a request from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this adjustment.
In this adjustment, the adjustment result may be applied to the image send mode and the FAX mode as well as the copy mode.
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.
Copy MODE IMAGE SEND(SCAN) MODE

Monochrome Monochrome
Color mode Color mode
mode mode
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer
46-01 Color copy density adjustment (for each O O - - - - - - - -
color copy mode) (separately for the low-
density area and the high-density area)
46-02 Monochrome copy density adjustment (for - - O O - - - - - -
each monochrome copy mode) (separately
for the low-density area and the high-density
area) (No need to adjust normally)
46-04 Color image send mode image density - - - - O O - - - -
adjustment (for each mode)
46-05 Monochrome image send mode image - - - - - - O O - -
density adjustment (for each mode)
46-08 Image send mode RGB color balance - - - - O O - - - -
adjustment (separately for the low-density
area and the high-density area)
46-09 RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density O O O O O O O O O -
adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
46-10 Color copy color balance, gamma O O - - - - - - - -
adjustment (for each color copy mode)
46-16 Monochrome copy density, gamma - - O O - - - - - -
adjustment (for each monochrome copy
mode) (No need to adjust normally)
46-19 Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) - - O - - - O - O -
mode document density scanning operation
(exposure operation) conditions setting
(Normally no need to set)
46-21 Copy color balance and density adjustment O O O O - - - - - -
(Manual adjustment)
46-23 Copy high density image density O O O O - - - - - -
reproduction setting (Normally unnecessary
to the setting change)
46-24 Copy color balance and density adjustment O O O O - - - - - -
46-25 Copy color balance adjustment (Single color - O - - - - - - - -
copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
46-26 Single color copy mode color balance - O - - - - - - - -
default setting
46-27 Color copy, text, line image reproduction O O - - - - - - - -
adjustment (edge gamma, density
adjustment) (Text, Map mode)
46-30 Copy mode sub scanning direction O O - - - - - - - -
resolution setting
46-32 Document low density image density - - O - - - O - O -
reproduction adjustment in the automatic
monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
46-36 2-color (red, black) copy mode fine color - O - - - - - - - -
46-37 Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color - - O O - - O O O O
document reproduction adjustment
46-38 Color copy mode dark area gradation (black O O - - - - - - - -
component quantity) adjustment
46-39 FAX send image sharpness adjustment - - - - - - - - O -
46-40 FAX send image density adjustment - - - - - - - - O -
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)

Copy MODE IMAGE SEND(SCAN) MODE
Monochrome Monochrome
Color mode Color mode
mode mode
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer
(Normal text mode)
(Fine text mode)
(Super fine mode)
(Ultra fine mode)
(600dpi mode)
(RGB_RIP)
46-47 Copy image, image send image, FAX send O O O O O O O O O O
image (JPEG) compression ratio setting
(Normally unnecessary to the setting
change)
46-51 Gamma manual adjustment for the copy O O O O - - - - - -
mode heavy paper and the image process
mode (dither) (No need to adjust normally)
46-52 Gamma default setting for the copy mode O O O O - - - - - O
heavy paper and the image process mode
(dither)
46-54 Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for O O O O - - - - - O
each dither (Automatic adjustment) (No
need to adjust normally)
46-55 Dropout color setting - - - - - - - O - -
46-58 Pseudo resolution UP function setting O O O O - - - - - -
46-59 Pseudo resolution UP function adjustment O O O O - - - - - O
46-60 Color (Copy/Scan) mode sharpness O O - - O - - - - O
46-61 Area separation recognition level O O O O O O O O - -
46-62 ACS, area separation, background image O O O O O O O O - -
process, automatic exposure mode
operation conditions setting (Normally
unnecessary to the setting change)
46-63 Copy/Scan low density image density O O O O O O O O - -
adjustment (for each mode)
46-65 Color correction table setting O O - - - - - - - O
46-66 Watermark adjustment O O O O - - - - - -
46-74 Printer/Copy color balance and density O O O O - - - - - O
adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
(Basic adjustment)
46-90 High-compression PDF image process - - - - O O - - - -
operation setting (Normally unnecessary to
the setting change)
46-91 Black text emphasis fine adjustment - - - - O O - - - -

2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
11-D (1)
Color copy density adjustment (for each Item/Display Content
Setting Default
color copy mode) (separately for the low- range value
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50
density area and the high-density area)
HIGH 1 - 99 50
(No need to adjust normally) B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. HIGH 1 - 99 50
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
density and high density part at each copy density individually.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
copy by each the copy mode individually.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
copy mode individually. HIGH 1 - 99 50
* When there is request from the user. G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
1) Enter the SIM 46-1 mode. HIGH 1 - 99 50
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50

HIGH 1 - 99 50
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( I TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
㩷(;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>&23<@ (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
$˖ ˖$872
$˖ %˖ ˖7(;7
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;735,17('ǂ3+272 PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
'˖ ˖7(;73+272 (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document)
(˖ ˖35,17('ǂ3+272 K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
)˖ ˖3+272*5$3+ (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
*˖ ˖0$3
L TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
+˖ ˖/,*+7
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
,˖ ˖7(;7&23<ǂ72ǂ&23<
-˖ ˖7(;735,17('ǂ3+272&23<ǂ72ǂ&23<
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
.˖ ˖35,17('ǂ3+272&23<ǂ72ǂ&23< M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
/˖ ˖7(;7&2/25ǂ721(ǂ(1+$1&(0(17 PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
/2: +,*+ 2. (COLOR TONE (Color tone
㪈㪇㪄㫂㪼㫐 N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
OK ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
(;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>&23<@
$˖ ˖$872 (COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
$˖ %˖ ˖7(;7 ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;735,17('ǂ3+272 Q MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
'˖ ˖7(;73+272 (COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
(˖ ˖35,17('ǂ3+272 ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
)˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
R LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
*˖ ˖0$3
+˖ ˖/,*+7
,˖ ˖7(;7&23<ǂ72ǂ&23<
-˖ ˖7(;735,17('ǂ3+272&23<ǂ72ǂ&23< S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
.˖ ˖35,17('ǂ3+272&23<ǂ72ǂ&23< HIGH 1 - 99 50
/˖ ˖7(;7&2/25ǂ721(ǂ(1+$1&(0(17 T SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
/2: +,*+ 2. (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
U TWO COLOR 2-color LOW 1 - 99 50
(red/black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
V TWO COLOR 2-color LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (red/black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
(copy document)
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
mode and change the adjustment value.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
density is decreased.
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.

2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
11-D (2)
Monochrome copy density adjustment Display/Item Content
Setting
Default
(for each monochrome copy mode) range
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
(separately for the low-density area and the
HIGH 1 - 99 50
high-density area) B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
(No need to adjust normally) HIGH 1 - 99 50
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
density and high density part at each copy density individually.
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the HIGH 1 - 99 50
copy by each the copy mode individually. F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the HIGH 1 - 99 50
copy mode individually. G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
* When there is request from the user. HIGH 1 - 99 50
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50

I TEXT Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( (COPY TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
$˖ ˖$872
$˖ %˖ ˖$872
PHOTO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;7
(COPY TO COPY) document)
'˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272 K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
(˖ ˖7(;73+272 (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
)˖ ˖35,17('3+272
*˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
L LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
+˖ ˖0$3 HIGH 1 - 99 50
,˖ ˖7(;7&23<72&23<
-˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23< 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
.˖ ˖35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
/˖ ˖/,*+7
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
/2: +,*+ 2.
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
㪈㪇㪄㫂㪼㫐 mode and change the adjustment value.
OK increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
density is decreased.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
$˖ ˖$872 mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
$˖ %˖ ˖$872
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;7

'˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272 mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
(˖ ˖7(;73+272 ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
)˖ ˖35,17('3+272
*˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
+˖ ˖0$3
,˖ ˖7(;7&23<72&23<

-˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
.˖ ˖35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
/˖ ˖/,*+7
/2: +,*+ 2.

2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key.
11-D (3)
3) Select a color to change the adjustment value with the color
Color copy color balance, gamma key.
adjustment (for each color copy mode) 4) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
(No need to adjust normally) key.
This adjustment is used to execute the color balance adjustment
for each density level in each color copy mode. Density level Adjustment
Item/Display Default
(Point) value range
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
* When there is necessity to change the color balance and gamma B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
by each the copy mode individually. C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
* When there is request from the user. D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
1) Enter the SIM 46-10 mode. E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
7(;7 7(;7357ǂ3+272 35,17('ǂ3+272 3+272ˇ7(;73+272 I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
0$3 /,*+7 &23<ǂ25* J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
(;(&87( Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
TEXT
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@
sity is decreased.
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17 When the arrow key is pressed, the color densities selected
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17
'˖ ˖32,17
with the color keys are collectively adjusted.
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
*˖ ˖32,17 to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
-˖ ˖32,17 printed out.
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17 This adjustment pattern can be used to check the color bal-
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2. ance and the density for each density level (point).
C 6) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
10-key Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
OK
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@ ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17

'˖ ˖32,17
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
[SYSTEM
SETTINGS] key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or end of print

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17

'˖ ˖32,17
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.

11-D (4)
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
Monochrome copy density, gamma increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
adjustment (for each monochrome copy sity is decreased.
mode) (No need to adjust normally) When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively
This adjustment is used to execute the density adjustment for each adjusted.
density level in each monochrome copy mode. That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
* When it is required to change the gamma in each copy mode. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
* When there is request from the user. printed out.
1) Enter the SIM 46-16 mode. The density at each density level (point) can be checked by
referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more

practical to make a copy and check it.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
This adjustment pattern can be used to check the color bal-
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*
$˖ ˖32,17 ance and the density for each density level (point).
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17
'˖ ˖32,17 Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
(˖ ˖32,17 mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17 Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the normal
+˖ ˖32,17 copy mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the
,˖ ˖32,17
copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
(;(&87( 2. 11-D (5)

10-key Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX)
EXECUTE
mode document density scanning
EXECUTE or end of print
operation (exposure operation) conditions

setting (Normally no need to set)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*
$˖ ˖32,17
ment density in monochrome auto copy mode.
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu-
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17
'˖ ˖32,17
ment, change the setting.
(˖ ˖32,17 This setting is required in the following cases.
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
* When a proper density copy is not obtained in the monochrome
+˖ ˖32,17 automatic copy mode.
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17
* When a document with images near its lead edge is copied.
.˖ ˖32,17 * When a document with colored background is copied.
/˖ ˖32,17
(;(&87( 2.

2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
key. (;32685(02'(6(783%:$(

$(B02'( ˖ 02'( 02'(
$(B6723B&23< ˖ 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
Density level Adjustment
Item/Display Default $(B6723B)$; ˖ 2)) 21
(Point) value range $(B6723B6&$1 ˖ 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500 $(B),/7(5 ˖ 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53

$(B:,'7+ ˖ )8// 3$57
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500

2) Set REALTIME, STOP or PRE-SCAN to adjustment item AE Operation in monochrome auto copy mode:
STOP COPY. For contents of each setting item, refer to below. When the density of the document of the read area is light, output
Change the setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or image density is increased by control. When the density of the doc-
"PART", in some cases. ument of the read area is dark, output image density is decreased
by control.
Display/Item Content Set value Default
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 MODE1 Document table/DSPF mode
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Stop (for copy) STOP/PRESCAN 3 to 7mm
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON
ON/OFF
Stop (for FAX)
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Stop (for scanner) STOP/PRESCAN
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting NORMAL
SHARP
AE WIDTH = FULL
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL FULL
PART
NOTE:
MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
MODE2: Normal gamma
STOP:
Document table mode
Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of document,
decides the output image density according to the density of that
part. (The output image density is constant at whole area.) 3 to 7mm
REALTIME:
Reads the density of width of the document one by one, decides
the output image density according to the density of each part of 100mm
the document. (The output image density may be not constant at
whole area.)
PRESCAN: AE WIDTH = PART
Once the densities on the document surface are scanned, the out-
put image density is determined according to the average of the
scanned densities. (The output image density is even for all the
surface.)
AE WIDTH FULL:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7
mm (leading edge of document) x Document width. No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE DSPF mode
AE WIDTH PART:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7 3 to 7mm
mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width). No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE
100mm AE WIDTH = PART
Document density detection area

Setting Default
11-D (6) Item/Display Content
range value
Document low density image density G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
reproduction adjustment in the automatic H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode (SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
(No need to adjust normally) (Background (SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
density adjustment in the scanning section)
RSPF
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background
density in monochrome auto copy mode. Display/Item Content Set value Default
This adjustment is required in the following cases. A COPY : OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
image of the document.
E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
* When there is request from the user.
F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
㩷/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1* 11-D (7)
$˖ ˖&23<˖2&
$˖ %˖ ˖&23<˖563)
Copy/Scan low density image density
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖6&$1˖2& adjustment (for each mode)
'˖ ˖6&$1˖563)
(˖ ˖)$;˖2&
)˖ ˖)$;˖563) This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den-
sity area in the copy/scanner mode.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
2. image of the document.
10-key 1) Enter the SIM 46-63 mode.
OK

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%*5(029($'-8670(17

$˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( $˖ %˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272
$˖ ˖&23<˖2&
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
$˖ %˖ ˖&23<˖563)
(˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;73+272
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖6&$1˖2&
)˖ ˖&2/25&23<0$3
'˖ ˖6&$1˖563)
*˖ ˖&2/25&23</,*+7
(˖ ˖)$;˖2&
+˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
)˖ ˖)$;˖563)
,˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23<
-˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
.˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
/˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;7
2.
2. 10-key
OK
2) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key.

When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
background and the low density image is increased. When the %*5(029($'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back- $˖ %˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7
ground and the low density image is decreased. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
DSPF (˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;73+272
)˖ ˖&2/25&23<0$3
Setting Default
Item/Display Content *˖ ˖&2/25&23</,*+7
range value +˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 ,˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23<
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196 -˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
.˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
/˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;7
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
2.
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)

2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode.
Set

Display/Item Content Default ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
value 7(67 &/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
A COLOR COPY : Text print (color copy) 1-9 3 $˖ ˖%/$&.7(;76/23(
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO $˖ %˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/257(;76/23(
'˖ ˖&2/257(;7,17(5&(37
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
(˖ ˖('7(;76/23(
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
)˖ ˖('7(;7,17(5&(37
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6 2.
(color copy)
H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5 10-key
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text print (color copy)
(COPY TO COPY) OK
I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, Text 1-9 5
(COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo &2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
(COPY TO COPY) (color copy) $˖ ˖%/$&.7(;76/23(
$˖ %˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37
K COLOR PUSH:TEXT/ Text print 1-9 3
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/257(;76/23(
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
'˖ ˖&2/257(;7,17(5&(37
L COLOR PUSH:TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3 (˖ ˖('7(;76/23(
M COLOR PUSH: Printed photo 1-9 5 )˖ ˖('7(;7,17(5&(37
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)

N COLOR PUSH: Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
O COLOR PUSH: Text/Photograph 1-9 3
TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
P COLOR PUSH: MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5 2.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the Adjust-
Display/Item
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back- Content ment Default
(Copy mode)
ground and the low density image is decreased. range
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge gamma 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) skew adjustment
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge density 1 - 99 50
11-D (8) (INTERCEPT) adjustment
Color copy, text, line image reproduction C COLOR TEXT Color character edge gamma 1 - 99 50
adjustment (edge gamma, density (SLOPE) skew adjustment
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50
adjustment) (Text, Map mode) (INTERCEPT) adjustment
(No need to adjust normally) E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma 1 - 99 50
Adjustment 1 (SLOPE) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
By changing Text/Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, automatic copy F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
mode Text, line image edge section gamma and the density, the
reproducibility of text and line profile can be varied optionally. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
With this adjustment, the density and the thickness of fine text and When the adjustment values of item A and C are changed, the
lines can be varied. gamma at the line edge section is changed.
Check the result of this adjustment by text/printed photo copy mode When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
(manual). character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjust-
This adjustment is required in the following cases. ment value is decreased, the image contrast of character and
* When the reproducibility of text and line copy image is to be line edge is decreased.
changed. When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B and D are
* When there is request from the user. increased, the image density at the line edge section is
increased, and vice versa.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode
(manual), check the copy.
When checking, use a copy of the document with a thin char-
acter and line image.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

Adjustment 2
11-D (9)
This adjustment is used to change the gamma and the density in
the Text/Map copy mode. Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color
This adjustment is required in the following cases. document reproduction adjustment
* To change the contrast and the density of the Text/Map copy (No need to adjust normally)
mode images. Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow
* When there is request from the user. image when printing color document that included the red/yellow
image in monochrome copy mode.

* When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
image in case of making a color copy of the color document in
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
$˖ ˖%/$&.7(;76/23( monochrome copy mode.
$˖ %˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/257(;76/23(
'˖ ˖&2/257(;7,17(5&(37 1) Enter the SIM 46-37 mode.
(˖ ˖('7(;76/23(
)˖ ˖('7(;7,17(5&(37

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
$˖ ˖5*
$˖ %˖ ˖%*
˷̚˹
2.
10-key
OK
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

10-key
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783 DEFAULT
$˖ ˖%/$&.7(;76/23( OK
$˖ %˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/257(;76/23(

'˖ ˖&2/257(;7,17(5&(37 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
(˖ ˖('7(;76/23(
$˖ ˖5*
)˖ ˖('7(;7,17(5&(37 $˖ %˖ ˖%*
˷̚˹
2.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. '()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Adjust- EXECUTE NO
Display/Item
Content ment Default
(Copy mode)
range

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge gamma 1 - 99 50 7(67
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
(SLOPE) skew adjustment $˖ ˖5*
$˖ %˖ ˖%*
˷̚˹
(INTERCEPT) adjustment
C COLOR TEXT Color character edge gamma 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) skew adjustment
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50
E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode) YES
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.

When the adjustment value of the adjustment item E is ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
changed, the gamma (contrast) is changed. % :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17

$˖ ˖5*
$˖
When the adjustment value is increased, the contrast is %˖ ˖%*
˷̚˹
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item F is
increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy in the Text/Map copy mode (manual), and check
the output print.
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, use SIM46-27 to change the
adjustment value.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.

2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 2) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode
key.
Display/Item Adjustment
Content Default 3) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
(Copy mode) range
A R/G Gray making setting (R/G) 0 - 99 21 Display/Item (Copy mode) Select button Content Default
B B/G Gray making setting (B/G) 0 - 99 0 MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text print NORMAL
(-) LUT1 (Manual)
NOMAL
When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased,
(+) LUT1
copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment
(+) LUT2
value is decreased, copy density of red image is increased.
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) NORMAL
When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased, (-) LUT1
copy density of red image is increased. When the adjustment NOMAL
value is decreased, copy density of red image is decreased. (+) LUT1
4) Press [OK] key. (+) LUT2
5) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo NORMAL
(manual), check the copy. PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
NOMAL
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photograph/ NORMAL
obtained. Text
(-) LUT1
NOMAL photograph
(+) LUT1 (Manual)
11-D (10) (+) LUT2
Color copy mode dark area gradation (black TEXT PHOTO (-) LUT2 Text/ NORMAL
component quantity) adjustment (-) LUT1 Photograph
NOMAL (Manual)
(+) LUT1
Use to adjust the black ingredient amount in the color copy mode. (+) LUT2
(except character and line image) MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) NORMAL
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part (-) LUT1
changes. NOMAL
This adjustment is required in the following cases. (+) LUT1
* When reproduction as solid of black image is required. (+) LUT2
CP ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
* To make the black background and the dark area darker
TEXT PRT (-) LUT1 document/
* When change of gradation of the shade part is required. NOMAL Text printed
* When there is request from the user. (+) LUT1 (Manual)
1) Enter the SIM 46-38 mode. (+) LUT2
COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
TEXT (-) LUT1 document/
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
NOMAL Text (Manual)
%/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
7(;7ǂ357 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/ (+) LUT1
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 (+) LUT2
7(;7 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
35,17('ǂ3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
PHOTO (-) LUT1 document/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 NOMAL Printed photo
3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
(+) LUT1 (Manual)
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
7(;7ǂ3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
(+) LUT2
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 LIGHT (-) LUT2 Light NORMAL
0$3 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/ ORIGINAL (-) LUT1 document
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
NOMAL (Manual)
0$18$/ $872
(+) LUT1
(-)LUT2 (+) LUT2

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
7(;7ǂ357 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
7(;7 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
35,17('ǂ3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
7(;7ǂ3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
0$3 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
0$18$/ $872

Display/Item (Copy mode) Select button Content Default
11-D (11)
AUTO AUTO0 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(-) LUT1 judgment 0 Color (Copy/Scan) mode sharpness
NOMAL adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
(+) LUT1 Use for sharpness adjustment of the high density image in color
(+) LUT2 copy mode.
AUTO1 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL This adjustment changes smoothness (asperity) in the image
(-) LUT1 judgment 1
shade part.
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2 * When changing the sharpness of copy image in copy mode.
AUTO2 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL (obtain crispy image) (decreases moire)
(-) LUT1 judgment 2 * When there is desire to improving smoothness in the image
NOMAL shade part (for decrease of asperity)
(+) LUT1 * To make the black background and the dark area darker.
(+) LUT2 * To reproduce the gradation change in the dark area.
AUTO3 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(-) LUT1 judgment 3
NOMAL 1) Enter the SIM 46-60 mode.
(+) LUT1

(+) LUT2 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
AUTO4 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL &2/25$87202'(ǂ),/7(5ǂ$'-8670(17
judgment 4 $˖ ˖6&5((1),/7(5/(9(/$872

(-) LUT1 $˖ %˖ ˖$87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5
NOMAL ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<&0<21
(+) LUT1 '˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
(+) LUT2 (˖ ˖6,1*/(&2/25&0<21
)˖ ˖&2/25&23<&0<21
*˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
(-) LUT1 judgment 5 +˖ ˖%:&23<21
NOMAL ,˖ ˖&2/25386+5*%21
-˖ ˖%:386+21
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
AUTO6 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL 2.
(-) LUT1 judgment 6

NOMAL 10-key
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2 OK
4) Press the black ingredient amount select button.

When reproduction as solid of black image is required:

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Selects + button &2/25$87202'(ǂ),/7(5ǂ$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖6&5((1),/7(5/(9(//
When there is desire to darken copy of black image: $˖ %˖ ˖$87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5
Selects + button ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<&0<21
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
When a dark color image is reproduced in the black:
(˖ ˖6,1*/(&2/25&0<21
Selects - button )˖ ˖&2/25&23<&0<21
5) Make a copy in color copy mode and check the copy. *˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
+˖ ˖%:&23<21
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-38 mode ,˖ ˖&2/25386+5*%21
and change the adjustment value. -˖ ˖%:386+21

2.

2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
Display/Item Content Setting range Default NOTE

A SCREEN FILTER H Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern Strong emphasis 1 3 (Auto) Apply to auto copy mode
LEVEL L image in auto copy mode Soft emphasis 2 only
AUTO Auto 3
B AUTOMODE SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the auto SOFT 1 2
FILTER LEVEL CENTER copy mode CENTER 2 (CENTER)
HIGH HIGH 3
C COLOR COPY: OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) Available for the high
CMY ON in color copy mode ON 1 density image except
D COLOR COPY:K OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in OFF 0 1 (ON) text and line image
ON color copy mode ON 1
E SINGLE COLOD: OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) When setting ON,
CMY ON in single color copy mode ON 1 smoothness in the image
F 2 COLOR COPY: OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) shade part improves by
CMY ON in 2-color copy mode ON 1 applying soft filter.
(asperity decreases)
G 2 COLOR COPY: OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in OFF 0 1 (ON)
K ON color copy mode ON 1
H B/W COPY OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON copy mode ON 1
I COLOR PUSH: OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1 (ON)
RGB ON scan color mode ON 1
J B/W PUSH OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1(ON)
ON scan monochrome mode ON 1
3) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter a. Adjustment procedure

process mode). 1) Enter the SIM 46-23 mode.
- Adjustment item A:
When selecting AUTO, filter is selected according to dot pat-

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
tern state automatically and adjusts sharpness. (1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(
$˖ ˖&0<˄(1$%/(ǂ˖',6$%/(˅
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large $˖ %˖ ˖.˄(1$%/(ǂ˖',6$%/(˅
numeric value to decrease moire. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&<$1ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
- Adjustment item B: '˖ ˖0$*(17$ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
(˖ ˖<(//2:ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
Select HIGH to obtain clear images. Select SOFT to reduce )˖ ˖%/$&.ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
moire.
- Adjustment item C - J:
When setting ON, smoothness in the image shade part
improves by applying soft filter. (asperity decreases)
4) Press [OK] key. 2.
5) Make a copy and check the copy image.

If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-60 mode 10-key
and change the adjustment value.
OK

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
11-D (12) (1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(
$˖ ˖&0<˄(1$%/(ǂ˖',6$%/(˅
Copy high density image density $˖ %˖ ˖.˄(1$%/(ǂ˖',6$%/(˅
reproduction setting (Normally ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&<$1ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7

'˖ ˖0$*(17$ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
unnecessary to the setting change) (˖ ˖<(//2:ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
)˖ ˖%/$&.ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
If a tone gap occurs on part of high density in copy mode, or if there
is necessity to increase the density of the part of high density,
change the setting.
This setting is normally not required. When, however, there are
case of following, change the setting.
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density. 2.
* When there is a necessity to increase the density of the part of

high density.

2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key.
11-D (13)
Display/Item Content
Setting
Default
Copy color balance adjustment
range (Single color copy mode)
A CMY 0 CMY engine maximum 0-1 0
(0:ENABLE density correction mode
1:DISABLE) Enable This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in
1 CMY engine maximum the single color copy mode to the user's request.
density correction mode The adjustment is made by changing Y, M, C components of each
Disable
color.
B K 0 K engine maximum density 0-1 1
(0: ENABLE correction mode Enable This adjustment is not required normally, but executed when there
1: DISABLE) 1 K engine maximum density is a request from the user.
correction mode DIsable When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for CYAN 0 - 999 500 required in the following cases.
TARGET maximum density correction * When it is required to change the color balance in the single
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 color copy mode.
MAX TARGET MAGENTA maximum density
correction * When there is request from the user.
E YELLOW Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 a. Adjustment procedure
MAX TARGET YELLOW maximum density 1) Enter the SIM 46-25 mode.
correction
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500

TARGET BLACK maximum density ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
correction 6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783
$˖ ˖5('
$˖ %˖ ˖*5((1
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖%/8(
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone '˖ ˖&<$1
(˖ ˖0$*(17$
gap is better.
)˖ ˖<(//2:
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1
to item A and B.
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
NOTE: Do not change the setting values of item C, D, E and F. If
these values are changed, density of the high density part & 0 < 2.
is changed.
If these values are changed, be sure to execute the copy 10-key
color balance density adjustment. (Auto adjustment)
OK

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783
$˖ ˖5('
$˖ %˖ ˖*5((1
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖%/8(

'˖ ˖&<$1
(˖ ˖0$*(17$
)˖ ˖<(//2:
& 0 < 2.
2) Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key.

3) Select the color (YMC) to be adjusted with the color key.
Default
Display/Item Adjustment range
C M Y
A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200
B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
C BLUE 0 - 255 255 200 0
D YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255
E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
F CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0
5) Press [OK] key.

6) Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the
copy.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25 mode
and change the adjustment value.

Setting Default
11-D (14) Item Button Display Content
range value
DSPF/RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density E OC SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52
adjustment (No need to adjust normally) SIDEA: exposure adjustment
HIGH (High density side)
This setting is normally not required, however, in the following
F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
cases, make changes to the setting:
HIGH exposure adjustment
* When copy in DSPF/RSPF mode differs from copy in document (High density)
table mode. A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
* When copy density in DSPF/RSPF mode is low or too high. SIDEB: exposure adjustment
LOW (Low density side)
* When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced.
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
* When the DSPF/RSPF unit is disassembled. SIDEB: exposure adjustment
* The CCD unit has been replaced. LOW (Low density side)
* U2 trouble has occurred. C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
LOW exposure adjustment
(Low density side)
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50
a. Adjustment procedure SIDEB: exposure adjustment
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: exposure adjustment

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763) F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
$˖ ˖&23<˖/2:
$˖ HIGH exposure adjustment
%˖ ˖6&$1˖/2:
˷̚˹ C˖ ˖)$;˖/2:

(High density)
D˖ ˖&23<˖+,*+ G BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
(˖ ˖6&$1˖+,*+ SIDEB: R R
F˖ ˖)$;˖+,*+
H BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: G G
I BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: B B
RSPF
2.
Setting
Item/Display Content Default
range
10-key A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side)
OK
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48
C FAX : LOW PSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763) D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53
$˖ ˖&23<˖/2:
$˖ adjustment (High density side)
%˖ ˖6&$1˖/2:
˷̚˹ C˖ ˖)$;˖/2:

E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 53
D˖ ˖&23<˖+,*+ adjustment (Low density side)
(˖ ˖6&$1˖+,*+ F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53
F˖ ˖)$;˖+,*+
adjustment (High density side)

In case of increase of image density, input large numeric
value. Or in case of diluting the image density, input small
2.
numeric value.
4) Press [OK] key.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 5) Make a copy in the DSPF/RSPF mode and check the copy.
When adjusting density on low density part, select "A (COPY If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-9 mode
LOW)". When adjusting density on high density part, select "D and change the adjustment value.
(COPY HIGH)". Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
DSPF
Setting Default
Item Button Display Content
range value
11-D (15)
A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47 Automatic color balance adjustment by the
SIDEA: exposure adjustment user (Copy color balance automatic
adjustment ENABLE setting and
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEA: exposure adjustment adjustment)
LOW (Low density side) a. General
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47 In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal-
LOW exposure adjustment
ibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density).
(Low density side)
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52 This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
SIDEA: exposure adjustment tion with SIM 26-53.

NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's 5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro-
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy cedure 4) on the document table.
color balance and density and the user's operational ability Set the patch image so that the thin line is on the left side as
are judged adequate enough to execute the adjustment. shown in the figure.
When set to enable, operation procedures must be fully At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
explained to the user. patch image (adjustment pattern).
b. Setting procedure
Thin line

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&$/,%5$7,21
$˖ ˖&23<<(612
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5<(612
˷̚˹
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment

is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
the display returns to the original operation screen.
The message, "Will you go on to the printer color balance
adjustment?" is displayed.
To execute the printer color balance adjustment successively,
perform the procedures same as the above.
2.
10-key
11-D (16)
OK Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for
each dither (Automatic adjustment)
a. General

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( This simulation is used to improve the image quality in a certain
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&$/,%5$7,21 mode. (Refer to the list in procedure 6.)
$˖ ˖&23<<(612
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5<(612 b. Adjustment procedures
˷̚˹ 1) Enter the SIM46-54 mode.
A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed.
3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
dure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
2.
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.

When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1"
(Yes).
3) Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration
(automatic adjustment of copy color balance and density) is not dis-
played in the user program mode.
(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjust-

ment))
NOTE: This adjustment is based on the service target color bal-
ance set with SIM 63-7 and SIM 63-8. If, therefore, the
above settings are not properly performed, this adjustment
cannot be made properly.
1) Enter the system setting mode.

2) Enter the copy setting mode.
3) Press the auto color calibration key.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.

4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The color balance and the density are automatically adjusted. The color balance and the density are automatically adjusted,
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor- and the machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
mality. To complete the adjustment and enable the adjustment result,
5) Press [OK] key. press [OK] key.
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed. 10) Make a copy, and check the copy image quality.
6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither). (Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density
check.)
Select item
Content NOTE: Use SIM46-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default
(Mode/Image)
values.
Heavy Paper *1 Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
heavy paper mode
Black Edge Adjustment item (K) to improve the reproduction of lines,
text density, and thickness
Color Edge Adjustment item (Color) to improve the reproduction of
lines, text density, and thickness
B/W Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
the monochrome text mode and the map mode.
Color Ed Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the text
mode and the map mode.
B/W 600dpi Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
the monochrome printed photo mode and the
photography mode.
WOVEN1 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark density
in the watermark mode 1
*1: When performing adjustments in the heavy paper mode,

load paper in the manual paper feed tray.
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
In the monochrome mode, only the monochrome pattern is
printed.
8) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
dure 7) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image

11-D (17)
Dropout color adjustment
(Normally not required)
a. General
This adjustment is used to adjust the range of reproduction of color
document images as monochrome images in the image send mode
(monochrome manual text mode).
In other words, it is used to adjust the level of chroma of color
images which are reproduced as monochrome images.
When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout
becomes easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the
adjustment value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult
to widen the reproduction range.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3
3) Scan the document in the image send mode (monochrome

manual text mode) and check the adjustment result.
When black characters When the color section is not

are fainted, Document dropped out,
Decrease the adjustment value. Color dropout Increase the value.
Reproduced
image
SIM value 0 SIM value 6

SIM value 3
(Minimum value) (Maximum value)
(Default)
The reproduction range is widened. The reproduction range is narrowed.
Effect and adverse effect when decreasing the value Effect and adverse effect when increasing the value
[Effect] [Effect]
When black characters are fainted by color shift, etc, the black area Colors (of low chroma) which are difficult to be dropped out can be
is outputted clearly. dropped out.
[Adverse effect] [Adverse effect]
Dropout of color sections becomes difficult. Black characters are fainted or cracked.

11-D (18)
Watermark adjustment
(Normally not required)
a. General
* When there is request from the user. (When a satisfactory result
This adjustment is used to adjust the reproduction capability of the is not obtained from the adjustment in the system setting mode.)
watermark in the copy/printer mode.
* When there is request from the user. (When a satisfactory result
This adjustment is used for watermark documents (primary output). is not obtained from the adjustment with the printer driver.)
The result of this adjustment affects the result of watermark print
(secondary output).
In the printer mode, the watermark density can be adjusted by the
printer driver. That adjustment is based on the result of this adjust- 2) Select the PATTERN mode, then select an adjustment item in
ment. the following list according to the situation.
NOTE: Normally there is no need to adjust the PATTERN mode
(items K and L), the COPY MODE, and the POSITION
mode.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Description NOTE
range value
A WOVEN DEN BK LOW Watermark density level 0 - 255 15 The adjustment value is changed to increase or
(Color: Black / Adjustment for light decrease the density of the watermark of
images) background documents (primary output).
B WOVEN DEN BK MIDDLE Watermark density level 0 - 255 19 To increase the watermark density, increase the
(Color: Black, Density: Standard) adjustment value.
C WOVEN DEN BK HIGH Watermark density level 0 - 255 23 To decrease the watermark density, decrease the
(Color: Black, Density: Dark) adjustment value.
D WOVEN DEN C LOW Watermark density level 0 - 255 19
(Color: Cyan / Adjustment for light NOTE: When the adjustment value is increased,
images) the watermark area which is originally not
E WOVEN DEN C MIDDLE Watermark density level 0 - 255 23 reproduced becomes difficult to disappear.
(Color: Cyan, Density: Standard) When the adjustment value is decreased,
F WOVEN DEN C HIGH Watermark density level 0 - 255 27 the watermark area which is originally
(Color: Cyan, Density: Dark) reproduced becomes easy to disappear.
G WOVEN DEN M LOW Watermark density level 0 - 255 15
(Color: Magenta / Adjustment for
light images)
H WOVEN DEN M MIDDLE Watermark density level 0 - 255 18
(Color: Magenta, Density:
Standard)
I WOVEN DEN M HIGH Watermark density level 0 - 255 21
(Color: Magenta, Density: Dark)
J CONTRAST Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2 This is used to adjust the variation in the watermark
density when the adjustment value of the watermark
print/contrast adjustment in the system setting is
changed by 1.
When this value is increased, the variation is also
increased. When the value is decreased, the
variation is also decreased.
When the adjustment value is 0, the result of the
contrast adjustment is not reflected.
(* The adjustment value must be set to 1 or greater.)
K HT TYPE (POSI) For half-tone index watermark type 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing characters of watermark Normally
positive copy (secondary output) more clearly, set to 43. set to the
In that case, however, the containing characters of default.
the watermark document (primary output) can be
easily reproduced.
L HT TYPE (NEGA) For half-tone index watermark type 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing characters of watermark
negative copy (secondary output) more clearly, set to 43.
In that case, however, the containing characters of
the watermark document (primary output) can be
easily reproduced.

Changing adjustment values of adjustment items A - I and
Watermark The watermark color is available in Cyan, Magenta, and
trade off
color Black.
Kinds of Containing Characters embedded in a watermark, such as "COPY
watermarks Adjustment characters INHIBITED," are called containing characters.
(Mode Density values of Kinds of There are two kinds: "Character appearing" and
Effect watermarks "Background appearing."
selected in value adjustment
the watermark items A - I When a watermark of "Character appearing" is copied, the
copy mode) background disappears and the containing characters
Characters Decrease. The adjustment The watermark images appear.
appearing. value is become easy to When a watermark of "Background appearing" is copied,
decreased. disappear. the watermark of the character area disappears and the
The containing containing characters become outline characters.
characters become Principle of A watermark is composed of two dots: fine dots and rough
lighter. watermarks dots.
Increase. The adjustment The containing Since fine dots disappear when copied, they are called
value is characters become disappearing patterns.
increased. darker. Since rough dots remain when copied, they are called
The watermark images remaining patterns.
become difficult to In a watermark of "Character appearing," the background is
disappear. a disappearing pattern and the containing characters are
remaining patterns.
Background Decrease. The adjustment The containing
In a watermark of "Background appearing," the background
appearing. value is characters become easy
is a remaining pattern and the containing characters are
decreased. to disappear.
disappearing patterns.
The watermark images
become easy to NOTE: Watermarks have the following characteristics:
disappear. Note for - A watermark is presumed to be synthesized with text
watermarks documents. If it is used with photos or images, the
Increase. The adjustment The watermark images
containing characters may be seen in the watermark
value is become darker.
document (primary output) or the containing characters
increased. The containing
may not appear properly in the watermark copy
characters become
(secondary output).
difficult to disappear.
- When a watermark is synthesized with newspapers or
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. other dark-background documents, the containing
characters may not appear in the watermark copy
4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result. (secondary output).
Descriptions on the watermark - Containing characters may not appear in the watermark
copy (secondary output) depending on the kind of the
Containing copier which makes the watermark copy (secondary
characters output) and the copy mode.
Copy / Print Copy
- Containing characters may not appear clearly in the
watermark copy (secondary output) depending on the
copy mode in which the watermark document (primary
COPY INHIBITED
output) is made.
- When the print engine status changes, the containing
COPY INHIBITED
characters may not be concealed properly in the
watermark document (primary output). In this case,
COPY INHIBITED
follow the procedures below to conceal the containing
characters.
Document Watermark document Watermark copy * Use SIM46-24 to execute the color balance
(Copy document or (Primary output) (Secondary output) adjustment.
Print data) (Copy or Printer output) (This machine or other * Use SIM46-54 to execute the color balance
(This machine) company's machine) adjustment for each dither.
* Adjust the watermark print contrast in the system
setting.
- Though the watermark of cyan or magenta is selected in
the black and white mode, the black watermark is
synthesized.
- For a document which is judged as monochrome with
ACS selected, though the watermark color is specified as
cyan or magenta, the black watermark is synthesized.
- The preview screen of the watermark only indicates the
setting of the watermark color, and does not indicate an
actual copy image.
- When the document control (printer mode) is used
together, it is advisable to use "Characters appearing"
setting. If "Background appearing" setting is used
together, the detection accuracy of document control
may be reduced.
- In the printer mode watermark, setting of 1200dpi and a
watermark cannot be used together.

Watermark adjustment in the system setting
11-E Printer image quality adjustment
System setting -> Security setting -> Watermark print ->
Contrast tab (Basic adjustment)
Requisite condition before execution of the printer color bal-
Watermark kind
Density Adjustment
ance/density adjustment
mode selection
Before execution of the printer color balance/density adjustment,
Character To increase the Decrease the contrast value.
the copy color balance/density adjustment must have been com-
appearing text density (Default: 5)
pleted properly.
To decrease the Increase the contrast value.
text density (Default value: 5)
Background To increase the Increase the contrast value. This adjustment is required in the following cases.
appearing text density (Default value: 5) * Basically same as when the copy color balance/density adjust-
To decrease the Decrease the contrast value. ment is required.
text density (Default: 5)
* After the copy color balance/density adjustment.
NOTE:
Note for adjusting the watermark with SIM46-54 11-E (1)
When the color balance automatic adjustment is executed with Printer color balance adjustment
SIM46-74 or SIM46-24 but the containing characters are (Automatic adjustment)
reproduced, use SIM46-54 to execute the color balance auto-
a. General
matic adjustment for each dither.
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
However, note the following items. the print density of each color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) auto-
- When either of item K or L of the PATTERN mode is 42, the matically with SIM 67-24 or the user program.
adjustment must be executed for the both modes of
WOVEN1 and WOVEN2 of SIM46-54.
of all the print modes are revised.
- When either of item K or L of the PATTERN mode is 43, the
adjustment must be executed for the both modes of
WOVEN3 and WOVEN4 of SIM46-54. There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
ment.
- WOVEN1 and WOVEN2 must be adjusted in a pair as well
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 67-24
as WOVEN3 and WOVEN4.
is used.)
If it is ignored, the containing characters remain reproduced.
2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the print color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine condition is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.

0RINTERCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYADJUSTMENT!UTOMATICADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
FLOWCHART3)-
3TART
%XECUTE!$*% 0RINTERCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITY
ADJUSTMENT !UTOMATICADJUSTMENT
%NTERTHE3)- MODEANDSELECT!

X PAPER
0RESS;%8%#54%=KEY
4HEADJUSTMENTPATTERNISPRINTED
3ETTHEADJUSTMENTPATTERNONTHEDOCUMENTTABLE
3ELECTTHE&!#4/29TARGETORTHE3%26)#%TARGET
ANDPRESS;%8%#54%=KEY4HEADJUSTMENTPATTERN
ISSCANNEDANDTHEADJUSTMENTISAUTOMATICALLY
!UTOMATICADJUSTMENTCOLORBALANCETARGETCHANGE
PERFORMEDTOPRINTTHECHECKPATTERN

3)-
#HECKTHEPRINTEDCHECKPATTERNFORANYSTREAKSOR
UNCLEARCOPY
./
0RESS;/+=KEY4HEINITIALSETTINGOFTHEHALFTONE
IMAGECORRECTIONISAUTOMATICALLYPERFORMED
4HOUGHTHE&!#4/29
COLORBALANCEANDDENSITY
TARGETAVAILABLEINKINDS IS
#ANCEL3)- CHANGEDSATISFACTORYCOLOR
BALANCEANDDENSITYARENOT
OBTAINED3)- ORTHE
3%26)#%TARGETIS
SELECTED
./ )STHE0#,PRINTER
FUNCTIONPROVIDED
9%3
9%3
%XECUTE!$*% 0RINTERCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITY
ADJUSTMENT -ANUALADJUSTMENT 3)-

#HECKTHESELFPRINTCHECKPATTERNTOCHECKTHEPRINTERCOLORBALANCEAND

DENSITYADJUSTMENT
7HENTHECOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYARECUSTOMIZEDAND
REGISTEREDASTHE3%26)#%TARGETSELECTTHE3%26)#%
5SE3)- TOPRINTTHESELFPRINT 5SE3)- TOPRINTTHESELFPRINT TARGET
CHECKPATTERNANDCHECKTHE CHECKPATTERNANDCHECKTHE

PRINTERCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITY PRINTERCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITY )FTHEINITIALSETTINGOFTHEHALFTONEIMAGECORRECTIONISNOT
PROPERLYADJUSTEDSATISFACTORYCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITY
CANNOTBEOBTAINED)NTHISCASECHECKTHEPRINTENGINEFOR
ANYPROBLEMS

!RETHECOLORBALANCEAND )FSATISFACTORYCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYARENOTOBTAINED
./
DENSITYATTHESATISFACTORY WITH!$*% 0RINTERCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITY
LEVEL ADJUSTMENT -ANUALADJUSTMENT 3)- CHECKTHE
PRINTENGINEFORANYPROBLEMS

)FTHEREISANYSTREAKORUNCLEARCOPYONTHEPRINTEDCHECK
9%3
PATTERNCHECKTHEPRINTENGINEFORANYPROBLEMS
%ND

1) Enter the SIM 67-24 mode. The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed
and prints the color balance check patch image. Wait until the

operation panel shown in the procedure 5) is displayed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17 PRINTER CALIBRATION
(;(&87(
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is

automatically selected.)
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper.
5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
PRINTER CALIBRATION

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
&21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
2.
NOTE:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This
operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
4) Select [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key.
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
MODE" is displayed.
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-

get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
balance, select the service target. 35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5

&203/(7('7+,6352&('85(

3/($6(48,77+,602'(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
7(6735,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(

6) Check the color balance and density. b. Adjustment procedure
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density
check.)
0RINTERCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYADJUSTMENT-ANUALADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained FLOWCHART3)-
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM 3TART
67-26 and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man- %XECUTE!$*% 0RINTERCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITY
ual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 11E (2)). ADJUSTMENT-ANUALADJUSTMENT

Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe- %NTERTHE3)- MODEANDSELECT!
X PAPER!UTOMATICSELECTION
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 0RESS;%8%#54%=KEY
4HEADJUSTMENTPATTERNISPRINTED
11E (2)).
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even #HECKTHEPRINTEDADJUSTMENTCHECKPATTERN
ANDSELECTATARGETADJUSTMENTCOLORWITHTHE
after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there COLORKEYS#-9+
may be another cause.
3ELECTATARGETADJUSTMENTDENSITYLEVELWITHTHE
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and SCROLLKEY
%NTERTHEADJUSTMENTVALUEWITH KEY
0RESS;%8%#54%=KEY
11-E (2) 4HEADJUSTMENTPATTERNISPRINTED
Printer color balance adjustment

#HECKTHEPATCHCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYINTHE
(Manual adjustment) PROCESSGRAYOFTHECOLORBALANCECHECKPATTERN
)FTHEGRAYCOLORISSLIGHTLYSHIFTEDTO-AGENTA
a. General THECOLORBALANCEISPROPERLYADJUSTED
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
adjust the printer density of C, M, Y and K. This is used at the fol-
lowing situation. When the result of auto adjustment described !RETHECOLORBALANCE
./
above is not existing within the range of reference. When a fine ANDDENSITYATTHESATI
SFACTORYLEVEL
adjustment is required. When there is request from the user for
changing (customizing) the color balance.
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could 9%3
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment. #ANCELTHE3)- MODE
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-
ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency. ./ )STHE0#,PRINTER
FUNCTIONPROVIDED
9%3
#HECKTHESELFPRINTCHECKPATTERNTOCHECKTHEPRINTERCOLORBALANCEAND
DENSITYADJUSTMENT
5SE3)- TOPRINTTHESELFPRINT 5SE3)- TOPRINTTHESELFPRINT

CHECKPATTERNANDCHECKTHE CHECKPATTERNANDCHECKTHE
PRINTERCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITY PRINTERCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITY
./
!RETHECOLORBALANCEAND
DENSITYATTHESATISFACTORY
LEVEL
9%3
3ETTHE3%26)#%TARGETFORTHE
AUTOMATICPRINTERCOLORBALANCE
ADJUSTMENT3)-
%ND

)FSATISFACTORYCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYARENOT
OBTAINEDWITHTHEADJUSTMENTCHECKTHEPRINT
ENGINEFORANYPROBLEMS

1) Enter the SIM 67-25 mode. 3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color
balance is satisfactory.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17 PRINTER CALIBRATION

'˖ ˖32,17
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
Low density High density
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
;
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17 /
/˖ ˖32,17
(;(&87( 2.
. & 0 < %
10-key $M
OK CMY
blend
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17

'˖ ˖32,17 3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
,˖ ˖32,17 level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
-˖ ˖32,17 not be reversed.
.˖ ˖32,17
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
/˖ ˖32,17
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.

level.
Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
or end of print
color balance stated above.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173* adjustment is proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted
$˖ ˖32,17 into the natural gray color balance by the color table. (When
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
the color balance target is DEF 1.)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17
'˖ ˖32,17
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
(˖ ˖32,17 select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17 The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
,˖ ˖32,17 SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and
-˖ ˖32,17 density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is fied.
automatically selected.)
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed. When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each pro-
cess (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.

6) Check the color balance and density. 2) Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key.
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density In case of increase of the image density on low density part,
check.) increase the adjustment value. For diluting the image density
NOTE: on low density part, decrease the adjustment value.
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register
the color balance as the service target.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not 11-F (2)
required. Printer high density image density
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar- reproduction setting (Supporting the high
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in density section tone gap)
the next color balance adjustment. (No need to adjust normally)
When a tone gap is generated in the high density section in the
printer mode, the setting is changed to lower the density in the high
11-F Printer image quality adjustment density section.
(Individual adjustment) This setting is normally not required, however, in the following
a. General cases, a change of setting must be made.
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each * When a tone gap occurs on part of high density.
mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the * To lower the density in the high density section.
basic adjustments ADJ 11E (1) and ADJ 11E (2) or there is a a. Adjustment procedure
request from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this
adjustment.
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
11-F (1) $˖2 ˖&0<(1$%/(',6$%/(
$˖ 2
Printer density adjustment %˖ ˖.(1$%/(',6$%/(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&<$10$;7$5*(7

(Low density section density adjustment) '˖ ˖0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
(˖ ˖<(//2:0$;7$5*(7
(No need to adjust normally) )˖ ˖%/$&.0$;7$5*(7
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den-
sity area in the printer mode.
Adjust to reproduction setting of the low density image.
* When it is required not to reproduce images in the low density 2.
section, or to reproduce low-density images.

* When there is request from the user. 10-key
1) Enter the SIM 67-36 mode. OK

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖$3$7&+,1387 (1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
$˖ $˖ ˖&0<(1$%/(',6$%/(

$˖ %˖ ˖.(1$%/(',6$%/(
˷̚˹
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&<$10$;7$5*(7
'˖ ˖0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
(˖ ˖<(//2:0$;7$5*(7
)˖ ˖%/$&.0$;7$5*(7
2.
2.
10-key
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key.
OK
Setting
range
A CMY 0 CMY engine maximum 0-1 0

(0: ENABLE density correction mode
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 1:DISABLE) Enable
35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17
1 CMY engine maximum
$˖ ˖$3$7&+,1387
$˖ density correction mode
˷̚˹ Disable
B K 0 K engine maximum 0-1 1
(0:ENABLE density correction mode
1: DISABLE) Enable
1 K engine maximum
density correction mode
Disable
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET CYAN maximum density
2.
correction

Setting 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
range The color balance adjustment is automatically performed.
D MAGENTA MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
TARGET MAGENTA maximum density
mality.
correction
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 5) Press [OK] key.
TARGET YELLOW maximum density The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
correction 6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
TARGET BLACK maximum density Select item
correction Content
(Mode/Image)
Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
heavy paper mode
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone B/W Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
gap is better. the monochrome mode
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1 Gloss Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
to item A and B. gloss paper mode
The tone gap may occur in high density part. 1200dpi 1bit Adjustment item to improve the color balance in 1200dpi
mode
NOTE: If the setting values of item C, D, E and F are changed,
density of the high density part is changed. 7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When these values are changed, be sure to perform the A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
printer color balance and density adjustment. (Automatic The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
adjustment) 8) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 7) on the document table so that the thin lines on
the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
11-F (3) left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
Printer gamma adjustment for each dither patch image (adjustment pattern).
a. General PRINTER CALIBRATION
This adjustment is used to adjust the color balance and the density
in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode, and the gloss
paper mode.
This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images.
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
patch image (adjustment pattern).
PRINTER CALIBRATION 9) Press [EXECUTE] key.

The color balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
the machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
10) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
press [EXECUTE] key.
After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
tered.
11) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density
check.)
NOTE: Use SIM67-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default
values.

(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjust-
11-F (4) ment))
Automatic color balance adjustment by the
NOTE: This adjustment is based on the service target color bal-
user (Printer color balance automatic ance set with SIM 67-27 or SIM 67-28. If, therefore, the
adjustment ENABLE setting and above settings are not properly performed, this adjustment
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to the cannot be made properly.
setting change)
a. General 1) Enter the system setting mode.
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal- 2) Enter the printer setting mode.
ibration (auto adjustment of the printer color balance and density). 3) Press the auto color calibration key.
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera- 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
tion with SIM 26-53. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's 5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro-
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy cedure 4) on the document table.
color balance and density and the user's operational ability Set the patch image so that the thin line is on the left side as
are judged enough to execute the adjustment. shown in the figure.
When set to enable, operation procedures must be fully At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
explained to the user. patch image (adjustment pattern).
b. Setting procedure
Thin line

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&$/,%5$7,21
$˖ ˖&23<<(612
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5<(612
˷̚˹
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust-

ment is executed automatically.
The message, "Will you go on to the copy color balance
adjustment?" is displayed.
To execute the copy color balance adjustment successively,
perform the procedures same as the above.
2.
10-key
ADJ 12 Manual paper feed tray paper
OK size (width) sensor adjustment
* The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&$/,%5$7,21 * The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
$˖ ˖&23<<(612
$˖
%˖ ˖35,17(5<(612
˷̚˹
2.
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.

When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1"
(Yes).
3) Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration
(automatic adjustment of printer color balance and density) is not
displayed in the user program mode.

1) Enter the SIM 40-2 mode. 2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
display.
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
(;(&87,1*
paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
display.
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper
feed guide is recognized.
(;(&87( 6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( display.
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
3$326,7,21$'-8670(17 Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
display.
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is
(;(&87(
displayed.
EXECUTE When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
Repeat the above procedure to adjust
the A4R width and the minimum
position width.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
&203/(7(
(;(&87(

ADJ 13 DSPF/RSPF tray paper size ADJ 14 Document size detection
(width) sensor adjustment adjustment
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* The DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray section has been disassem- * When the original size sensor section has been disassembled.
bled. * When the original size sensor section has been replaced.
* The DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced. * When U2 trouble has occurred.
* When a U2 trouble occurs. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* The scanner PWB has been replaced. * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced.
1) Enter the SIM 53-6 mode. 14-A Document size sensor detection point
adjustment

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)75$<$'-8670(17
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17

35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3'6(1625&+(&.
2&6: 3' 3' 3'
3' 3' 3' 3'
(;(&87(

2) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width
position. Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment screw
and slide the actuator position so that the display OCSW is
returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit
top from the table glass is 20.2 +/- 0.25mm by slowly tilting the
document detection arm unit in the arrow direction and adjust.
(If the ON timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the doc-
ument detection function may malfunction.)

The maximum width detection level is recognized.
4) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the
A4R size.
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
32+
-0.5mm
6) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the
A5R size.
8) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width
position.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
* When each of the above operations has been completed, the
"COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations
has failed, the "ERROR" message appears.

14-B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size ADJ 15 Touch panel coordinate setting
sensor
* The operation panel has been replaced.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
:,7+7+(25,*,1$/&29(523(1'7851217+((;(&87( * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
.(<:,7+7+(25,*,1$/217+(25,*,1$/7$%/(
(;(&87(
EXECUTE

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).
6(7$1$6,=(h&23<3$3(5217+(25,*,1$/7$%/(
$1':,7+7+(2&23(1'7851217+((;(&87(.(<
When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
again.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
(;(&87( frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
pressed.
Adjustment
failed
Adjustment completed EXECUTE * When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(1625/(9(/,6$'-867('
ADJ 16 Fusing paper guide position
adjustment
Normally there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
ing cases, perform this adjustment.
* When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
* When wrinkles are made on paper in the fusing section.
* When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in the
(;(&87(
paper rear edge section.
1) Loosen the fusing paper guide fixing screws on the two posi-
tions in the front/rear frame direction.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783 2) Use the fusing paper guide position scale as the reference to
3+2726(1625(5525326,7,21
3'3'3'3'3'3'3'
shift the paper guide in the arrow direction A or B.
A
(;(&87(
2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.

With the document cover open, without placing a document on B
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
[EXECUTE] key.
The standard fixing position is at two scales in direction B from
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT SIZE
the marking scale center. However, the position may be varied
PHOTO SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.
depending on the situation.
* When a wrinkle is made on paper, change the position in the
error direction A.
* When an image deflection or unclear image is generated in
the lead edge area of paper, change the position in the
arrow direction B.

2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray.
ADJ 17 Print image position, image 3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll
magnification ratio, void area, key.
off-center adjustment (Print
The check pattern is printed out.
engine) (Manual adjustment) 5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed halftone is 240
NOTE: +/- 0.5mm.
Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 4 (automatic adjust-
ment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.
Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjust-
ment.
In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a satis-
factory result is not obtained from the automatic adjustment (ADJ
4).
240 0.5mm
17-A Print image magnification ratio adjustment
(main scanning direction) (Print engine)
(Manual adjustment)
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode. 6) Change the set value of set item A.
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed
by 0.1mm.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification
$˖
$˖ ˖%.0$* ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
main scanning direction is decreased.
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6 Repeat procedures 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7 17-B Print image print area adjustment
-˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
(Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
/˖ ˖68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* When a paper tray is replaced.
EXECUTE EXECUTE
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
End of print * When the manual feed tray is replaced.
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.

7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26( * When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled.
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 * U2 trouble has occurred.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6 * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
*˖ ˖0$,1/&& NOTE: Before execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute the
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
print image magnification ratio adjustment (ADJ 16A) (main
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6
scanning direction) (print engine) (manual adjustment).
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.

1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode. 5) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖%.0$* $˖ ˖55&$
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 $˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6 '˖ ˖55&%/&&
(˖ ˖0$,1&6 (˖ ˖55&%0)7
)˖ ˖0$,1&6 )˖ ˖55&%$'8
*˖ ˖0$,1/&& *˖ ˖/($'
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8 +˖ ˖6,'(

,˖ ˖68%0)7 ,˖ ˖'(1$
-˖ ˖68%&6 -˖ ˖'(1%
.˖ ˖68%&6 .˖ ˖)52175($5
/˖ ˖68%/&& /˖ ˖2))6(7B2&

(;(&87( 2. 2.
10-key
EXECUTE EXECUTE
OK
End of print

7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖%.0$* $˖ ˖55&$
$˖ $˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 %˖ ˖55&%&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6 '˖ ˖55&%/&&
(˖ ˖0$,1&6 (˖ ˖55&%0)7
)˖ ˖0$,1&6 )˖ ˖55&%$'8
*˖ ˖0$,1/&& *˖ ˖/($'
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8 +˖ ˖6,'(
,˖ ˖68%0)7 ,˖ ˖'(1$
-˖ ˖68%&6 -˖ ˖'(1%
.˖ ˖68%&6 .˖ ˖)52175($5
/˖ ˖68%/&& /˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
(;(&87( 2. 2.
2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper to all the paper feed trays. Select an 6) Select an adjustment item (DENA, DENB, FRONT/REAR) with
adjustment item of the target paper feed tray among items B - the scroll key, enter the adjustment value, and press [OK] key.
N and enter the adjustment value. Then select item "O" to
select the paper feed tray which is to be used for executing Setting Default
test printing. range value
Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 40
adjustment adjustment
The adjustment pattern is printed. DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below adjustment
are in the range of the standard values. FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
REAR area adjustment
Content Standard adjustment value Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
X Lead edge void area 4.0 +/- 1.0mm scanning correction value
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction value 1 - 99 50
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0 +/- 2.0mm print area DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction value 1 - 99 50
correction DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction value 1 - 99 50
value
Z1 DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction value 1 - 99 50
2.0 2.0mm DENB-LCC LCC correction value 1 - 99 50
DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 55
DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
correction value
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
area is decreased.
X
4.0 1.0mm Y When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
2.0 - 5.0mm changed by 0.1mm.
NOTE:
The adjustment value and the actual void area are related as
follows:
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
NOTE:
When the amount of the rear edge void is different between
each paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item
Z2 (DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust.
2.0 2.0mm The adjustment item (DENB) have a effect on the paper of all
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired paper feed tray.
condition, execute the simulation 50-1. That is, adjustment value of item (DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to
NOTE: Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm. adjustment item (DENB) for each paper tray.

After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) to 2) Select the target paper feed tray (MAIN-XX) with the scroll key.
check that the void area is within the specified range.
Display/Item Content Setting range
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if
NO Not select 1
the lead edge void area is not within the specified range,
change the adjustment value of item (RRCB-XXX) in SIM 50-1. 3) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained. cedure 2).
The adjustment pattern is printed.
17-C Print image off-center adjustment 5) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
(Print engine) (Manual adjustment) rect position.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
* When the LSU is replaced or removed. rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
* When a paper tray is replaced. all the following conditions are satisfied.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled. RV
* When ADJ 3A Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment 2.0mm 2.0mm
(Main scanning direction) is performed.
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
* When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled.
NOTE: Before execution of this adjustment, check to insure the fol-
lowing item.
* The print image magnification ration adjustment (ADJ 16A) (main
scanning direction) (Print engine) (Manual adjustment) has been
properly adjusted.
1) Enter SIM 50-10 mode.
FV

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
2.0mm 2.0mm
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖
$˖ ˖%.0$* RV: REAR VOID AREA
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
FV: FRONT VOID AREA
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6 RV + FV +/- 4.0mm
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
RV = 2.0 +/- 2.0mm
*˖ ˖0$,1/&& FV = 2.0 +/- 2.0mm
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
-˖ ˖68%&6 6) Change the adjustment value.
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
(;(&87( 2. [EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
EXECUTE printed.
EXECUTE
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat-
End of print tern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.

7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26( When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
changed by about 0.1mm.
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the conditions of procedure 5)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6 are satisfied.
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating
)˖ ˖0$,1&6 the above procedures, perform the following procedure.
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.

7) Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2
pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray, 18-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
and change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame direc- (main scanning direction) (Manual
tion. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4). adjustment) (Document table mode)
NOTE: If the default adjustment value of the scan image magnifi-
cation ration adjustment (main scanning direction) of SIM
48-1, copy image quality may be degraded. Therefore, this
adjustment must be executed only when there is a special
necessity.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted.
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
position adjustment) must have been completed.
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
NOTE:
Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjust-
ment.
factory result is not obtained from the automatic adjustment (ADJ 2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
4).

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
$˖ %˖ ˖&&'68%
ADJ 18 Scan image magnification ratio ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1

'˖ ˖63)68%
adjustment (˖ ˖63)%0$,1
(Manual adjustment) )˖ ˖63)%68%
NOTE:
Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjust- 2.
ment.
In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a satis- 3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
factory result is not obtained from the automatic adjustment (ADJ Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
4). copy mode, and make a copy.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 +/- 1.0%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
+/- 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnifica-
tion ratio is not within the specified range, perform the follow-
ing procedure.
5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.02%.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio
is within the specified range (100 +/- 1.0%).

4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
18-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment range (100 +/- 1.0%).
(sub scanning direction) (Manual If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
adjustment) (Document table mode) +/- 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnifica-
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: tion ratio is not within the specified range, perform the follow-
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image sub scan- ing procedure.
ning direction is not properly adjusted. 5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
* When the scanner motor is replaced. When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
* U2 trouble has occurred. tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
* When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is replaced.
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below. Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is
within the specified range (100 +/- 1.0%).
18-C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(main scanning direction)
(Manual adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode)
* When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the copy magnification ratio of the DSPF/RSPF mode
copy image in the main scanning direction is not proper.
* When the DSPF/RSPF is disassembled.
a. Adjustment procedures
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-
ment tray of the DSPF/RSPF.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1 Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and
$˖ %˖ ˖&&'68%
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
'˖ ˖63)68%
(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
Paper pass direction
A4 size
)˖ ˖63)%68%
2.
(Both the front surface
and the back surface)
10mm 10mm
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.
Copy magnifi- (Original dimension - Copy dimension) 3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
cation ratio 100% images.
Original dimension
(Example 1)
Copy A
original
10 20 90 100 110
(Shorter than
the original)
copy
10 50 100 150 200 250
Scale
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110
10 50 100 150 200 250
(Example 2)
Copy B
10 20 90 100 110
(Longer than
the original)

4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following 7) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
formula: When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100 tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed
(%) by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.02%.
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%) 8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is
(100 +/- 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment. obtained.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures.
5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode. 18-D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(sub scanning direction)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
$˖ %˖ ˖&&'68% * When the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replaced.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
'˖ ˖63)68%
* When the EEPROM on the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replaced.
(˖ ˖63)%0$,1 * When U2 trouble occurs.
)˖ ˖63)%68%
* When the copy magnification ratio of the DSPF/RSPF mode
copy image in the sub scanning direction is not proper.
* When the DSPF/RSPF is disassembled.
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-
ment tray.
2.
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and
DSPF
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.
Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value 10mm
A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio Paper pass direction
B CCD(SUB)
adjustment (CCD)
SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
A4 size
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
C SPF(MAIN) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
D SPF(SUB) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio 10mm
adjustment (Sub scan)
E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back 1 - 99 50 2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.
surface magnification ratio 3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
adjustment (Main scan) images.
RSPF
10
Setting Default
range value
50
A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50

magnification ratio
100
10
adjustment (CCD)
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
original
150
50
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
200
100
C SPF(MAIN) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50

magnification ratio
copy
150

D SPF(SUB) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
200
magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan)
E SPFB(MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50 4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following
surface magnification ratio formula:
F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
surface magnification ratio (%)
adjustment (Sub scan) Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with
(100 +/- 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
the scroll key.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
SPF (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio cedures.
(Front surface)
SPFB (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Back surface)

5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode. 2) Check the copy image center position.
6) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key. If A - B = +/- 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
SPF (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio

(Front surface)
SPFB (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Back surface)
A'
7) Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10-
key, and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
tion ratio is increased.
A' - B' = 1.0mm
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magni-
fication ratio is changed by 0.1%. (100%)
8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is B'
obtained.
ADJ 19 Scan image off-center If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedures.
adjustment 3) Enter the SIM 50-12 mode.
(Manual adjustment)

NOTE: ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 4 (automatic adjust- $˖ ˖2&
ment), there is no need to execute this adjustment. $˖ %˖ ˖63)6,'(
&˖ ˖63)6,'(

Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjust- ˷̚˹
ment.
4).
19-A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual 2.
adjustment) (Document table mode)

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: 4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. The entered value is set.
* When a U2 trouble occurs. When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi-
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. 6) Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the Repeat the procedures of 1) - 6) until the above condition is satis-
adjustment mode (document table). fied.
19-B Scan image off-center adjustment

A This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
A=B
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled.
B
* When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced.
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, it is required that the ADJ 18A
Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode)
must have been properly adjusted.

1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
(SIM50-6)
Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back sur-
face of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
direction. /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
$˖ ˖6,'(
$˖
Paper transport direction %˖ ˖6,'(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
Front surface Back surface '˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(
(˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(

)˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
*˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(
+˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(
,˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
-˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
.˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
2.
SIM50-12
Setting Default
range value
Draw a line at the center of the
front surface and the back surface A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
of paper in parallel with the paper center adjustment
transport direction. B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
2) Set the adjustment chart to the RSPF.
center adjustment
3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the
manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the A - C: When the adjustment value is increased, the image
front surface and the back surface of the copy paper. position is shifted to the rear frame side.
1step = 0.1mm
original copy SIM50-6
DSPF
a
Setting Default
range value
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position adjustment
b (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position adjustment
(CCD)
If the difference is within the range of 0 +/- 2.7mmm there is no C Image loss LEAD_ Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
need to perform the adjustment. amount EDGE edge image loss
If the adjustment is required, perform the following procedures. setting (SIDE1) amount setting
D SIDE1 FRONT_ Front surface side 0 - 99 20
4) Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode.
REAR image loss amount
(SIM50-12) (SIDE1) setting
E TRAIL_ Front surface rear 0 - 99 40

EDGE edge image loss
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
(SIDE1) amount setting
$˖ ˖2& F Image loss LEAD_ Back surface lead 0 - 99 40
$˖ %˖ ˖63)6,'( amount EDGE edge image loss
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)6,'(
setting (SIDE2) amount setting
G SIDE2 FRONT_ Back surface side 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) setting
H TRAIL_ Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 20
EDGE image loss amount
(SIDE2) setting
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
2. document off-center
adjustment
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification
ratio (Sub scan)

RSPF
Setting Default ADJ 20 Copy image position and image
range value loss adjustment
document scan (Manual adjustment)
position adjustment
NOTE:
(CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50 Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 4 (automatic adjust-
document scan ment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.
position adjustment Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjust-
(CCD) ment.
C Image loss LEAD_ Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
amount EDGE edge image loss
SIDE1 4).
D FRONT_ Front surface side 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) setting 20-A Copy image position, image loss, and void
E TRAIL_ Front surface rear 0 - 99 40 area adjustment (Manual adjustment)
F Image loss LEAD_ Back surface lead 0 - 99 20 This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
amount EDGE edge image loss * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
G SIDE2 FRONT_ Back surface side 0 - 99 20
REAR image loss amount * When the LSU is replaced or removed.
(SIDE2) setting * When the registration roller section is disassembled.
H TRAIL_ Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 40 * U2 trouble has occurred.
(SIDE2) setting * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 - 99 50 * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
document off-center * The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
adjustment
J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that
adjustment the ADJ 4/ADJ 5 Print engine image skew, image position,
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document front 1 - 99 50 image magnification ratio, void area adjustments has been
surface magnification completed normally.
ratio adjustment (Sub
scan)
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document back 1 - 99 50 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
surface magnification below.
ratio adjustment (Sub Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction
scan) and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide
plate.
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
timing is delayed. Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead
edge can be seen.
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
image loss is increased.
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
* The DSPF/RSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided
for countermeasures against the case when shades are
produced.
5) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.
(SIM50-12)
SPF(SIDE1) Front surface mode
SPF(SIDE2) Back surface mode
(SIM50-6)
OFFSET SPF1 Front surface mode
OFFSET SPF2 Back surface mode
6) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
(When the adjustment value is increased, the print image is
shifted to the rear.)
Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

2) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode. Setting Default
range value
R Sub DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
scanning value
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖55&$ S direction DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50
$˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6 print area value
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
T correction DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 55
'˖ ˖55&%/&& value value
(˖ ˖55&%0)7
)˖ ˖55&%$'8 U DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
*˖ ˖/($' correction value
+˖ ˖6,'(
,˖ ˖'(1$ 4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.
-˖ ˖'(1%
Shift to the copy mode, and make a copy at each of 100% and
.˖ ˖)52175($5
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
200% in the document table mode.
2. When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge
image from 4.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200%
10-key copy scale.
OK If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 4.0mm is not copied
in either of different copy magnification ratios.)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖55&$
obtained.
$˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6

Scale image 4.0mm position
'˖ ˖55&%/&&
Paper lead
(˖ ˖55&%0)7
edge
)˖ ˖55&%$'8
*˖ ˖/($'
+˖ ˖6,'(

,˖ ˖'(1$
-˖ ˖'(1%
.˖ ˖)52175($5
100%
5mm
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
2.
3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values. 200%

5mm 10mm
Setting Default
range value
A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
edge edge reference
adjust- position (OC) 5) Image loss adjustment
B ment RRCB-CS12 Regis- Standard 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the
value tration Tray default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in
C RRCB-CS34 motor Desk 1 - 99 50 the below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value,
D RRCB-LCC ON LCC 1 - 99 50 change these adjustment items.
E RRCB-MFT timing Manual 1 - 99 50
adjust- paper feed Paper lead edge
ment
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
loss area loss area setting Copy area
H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20 Maginification ratio : 400%
value area adjustment
I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 40
adjust- area adjustment 1 2 3 4
J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30 5mm 10mm
adjustment
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
Void area: 4.0mm, Image loss: 4.0mm
L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjust- OC center adjustment De- Standard
ment Item/ Adjustment
Content fault adjustment
M Magnifi- SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50 Display range
value value
cation SPEED_OC magnification ratio LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 - 99 40 4.0
ratio adjustment (CCD) adjustment image loss +/- 1.0mm
correction adjustment
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50 SIDE Side image 0 - 99 20 2.0
scanning correction value loss +/- 1.0mm
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50 adjustment
print area value
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is
value value increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50 image loss is decreased.
value
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.

20-B Image scanning position adjustment 20-C Copy image position, image loss, void area
(Manual adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode) adjustment (Manual adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: (DSPF/RSPF mode)
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. * When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When U2 trouble occurs. * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled. * When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced. * When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled.
This simulation is to adjust the scanning position when scanning in * When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced.
the DSPF/RSPF mode.
a. Adjustment procedures
If this adjustment is made improperly, the scanner stop position is
1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
shifted from the specified position and a shade of the document
table may be reflected on the lead edge section of the scan image The adjustment chart can be made by the following proce-
in the DSPF/RSPF mode. dures.
1) Make a copy in the DSPF/RSPF mode, and check for any Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper and draw arrow marks vertically and
shade on the lead edge section of the copy image. horizontally on the front and the back surfaces.
At the same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge,
the front end, and the rear end as well as the identification
marks of the front surface and the back surface.
Papar lead edge
R Front surface
FACE
Image area
L T
Shadow image of RSPF

Put the position
marks.
If there is any shade of the document table on the lead edge F
section of the copy image, perform the following procedures.

Draw arrows.
2) Enter the SIM 53-8 mode, and press [MANUAL] key.
R Back surface
BACK
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17
$872 0$18$/
L T
Put the position

marks.

Draw arrows.
3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. 2) Enter the SIM 50-6 mode.
When the set value is increased, the distance from the home

position to the RSPF scanning position is increased. When the ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
set value is changed by 1, the scanning position is changed by /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
$˖ ˖6,'(
0.1mm. $˖
%˖ ˖6,'(
Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
'˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(

obtained.
(˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(
NOTE: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ )˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
*˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(

19C Copy image position, image loss, void area adjust-
+˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(
ment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode). ,˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
-˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
.˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
2.

DSPF Setting Default
range value
Setting Default
Item/Display Content K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
range value
document scan
scan)
position adjustment
(CCD) L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
document scan
scan)
position adjustment
(CCD) * Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
C Image loss LEAD_ Front surface lead 0 - 99 20 timing is delayed.
amount EDGE edge image loss
setting (SIDE1) amount setting * Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
D SIDE1 FRONT_ Front surface side 0 - 99 20 image loss is increased.
REAR image loss amount * Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
(SIDE1) setting * The DSPF/RSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided
E TRAIL_ Front surface rear 0 - 99 40 for countermeasures against the case when shades are pro-
duced.
F Image loss LEAD_ Back surface lead 0 - 99 40
amount EDGE edge image loss (Lead edge image loss adjustment)
G SIDE2 FRONT_ Back surface side 0 - 99 20 1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE
REAR image loss amount (SIDE1/SIDE2) on the front surface and the back surface to
(SIDE2) setting the following values.
H TRAIL_ Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 20 (Standard set value)
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1):
(SIDE2) setting
40 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface)
document off-center TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2):
adjustment 40 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface)
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 - 99 50 (When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is
document off-center increased.)
adjustment
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification 2) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check to
ratio (Sub scan) confirm that the lead edge image loss is within 4.0 +/- 1.0mm
on the front surface and the back surface. The paper lead
RSPF edge must be aligned with the presumed image lead edge.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Paper lead edge The paper lead edge must be aligned with
range value
the image lead edge.
document scan
position adjustment
(CCD)
document scan
position adjustment
(CCD)
amount EDGE edge image loss Copy image
(SIDE1) setting
E TRAIL_ Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
EDGE edge image loss Image loss
(SIDE1) amount setting 4.0 1.0mm
F Image loss LEAD_ Back surface lead 0 - 99 20

amount EDGE edge image loss If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
setting (SIDE2) amount setting procedure.
G SIDE2 FRONT_ Back surface side 0 - 99 20 3) Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, and
REAR image loss amount press [OK] key.
(SIDE2) setting
Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the pre-
H TRAIL_ Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 40
sumed image lead edge.
(SIDE2) setting SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment
I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 - 99 50 SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment
document off-center
(When the adjustment value is increased, the print image posi-
adjustment
tion is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.)
J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center (Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
adjustment Perform the procedures of 2) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

(Rear edge image loss adjustment) 2) Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) /
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode. Check FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2), and press [OK] key.
to confirm that the rear edge image loss is 2.0 - 5.0mm on the FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1):
front surface and the back surface. Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2):
Paper rear edge Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
(When the adjustment value is increased, the front/rear image
loss is increased.)
(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
Copy image
ADJ 21 Finisher and punch unit
adjustments (alignment, punch
hole position, staple position)
Image loss 2.0 - 5.0mm
* When the finisher is disassembled.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following * When the finisher control PWB is replaced.
procedure. * When the punch unit is disassembled.
2) Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2) * When the punch control PWB is replaced.
with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
* When the alignment is improper.
* When the punch hole position is shifted.
Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
* When the staple position is shifted.
Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Back surface) 1) Enter the SIM 3-10 mode.
(When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge image

loss is increased.) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step) ),1,6+(5$'-8670(17

$˖ ˖)5217$'-867
Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is $˖ %˖ ˖5($5$'-867
obtained. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖67$3/(5($5
'˖ ˖67$3/()5217
(˖ ˖67$3/(%27+
(Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment) )˖ ˖67$3/(3,7&+
*˖ ˖381&+&(17(5
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode. Check +˖ ˖381&++2/(
to confirm that the image losses on the front frame side and
the rear frame side are 2.0 +/- 2.0mm on the front surface and
the back surface.
Paper F Image loss 2.
side edge 2.0 2.0mm

2) Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key.
Copy image
Copy image
Paper R Image loss

side edge 2.0 2.0mm
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedure.

Inner finisher (MX-FNX9)
Change
when the
Setting Default Purpose (Case where the Change when the adjustment value is
Item/Display Content adjustment
range value adjustment is required) increased or decreased
value is
changed by 1
A FRONT Alignment position 2 - 18 10 This adjustment is used to F side paper When the adjustment value is 0.3665mm
ADJUST adjustment (front) adjust the paper alignment alignment increased, the alignment plate stop
width when the paper stop position position is shifted to the R side.
alignment is improper. (F/R When the adjustment value is
Alignment is determined by direction) decreased, the alignment plate stop
the combination of the both position is shifted to the F side.
adjustment values of FRONT
ADJUST and REAR ADJUST.
B REAR Alignment position 2 - 18 10 When changing the R side paper When the adjustment value is 0.3665mm
ADJUST adjustment (Rear) adjustment values of FRONT alignment increased, the alignment plate stop
ADJUST and REAR ADJUST stop position position is shifted to the F side.
from the default values, be (F/R When the adjustment value is
sure to change them by the direction) decreased, the alignment plate stop
same variation. position is shifted to the R side.
C STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple position on Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
REAR adjustment (one the R side is shifted, perform position increased, the staple position is
position at the the adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
rear) position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple position is
direction) shifted to the front side.
D STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple position on Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
FRONT adjustment (one the F side is shifted, perform position increased, the staple position is
position in front) the adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
position) When the adjustment value is
E STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple off-center is Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
BOTH adjustment (Two shifted, perform the position increased, the staple position is
positions, center) adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
F STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When it is required to change Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
PITCH adjustment (Two the staple interval, perform position increased, the staple interval is
positions, pitch) the adjustment. (Stapler stop increased.
(F/R decreased, the staple interval is
direction) decreased.
G PUNCH Punch center 37 - 63 50 When the punch off-center is Punch When the adjustment value is 0.1441mm
CENTER adjustment shifted, perform the position decreased, the punch position is
adjustment. (F/R shifted to the front side.
direction) When the adjustment value is
increased, the punch position is
shifted to the rear side.
H PUNCH Punch hole 42 - 58 50 When the punch hole position Punch When the adjustment value is 0.2584mm
HOLE position is shifted in the transport position increased, the punch position is
adjustment direction, perform the (Paper shifted to the paper lead edge side.
adjustment. transport When the adjustment value is
direction) decreased, the punch position is
shifted to the paper rear edge side.
1K saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN10)
Purpose Change when

Setting Default (Case where the Change when the adjustment value is increased the adjustment
range value adjustment is or decreased value is
required) changed by 1
A SADDLE Saddle stitch 25 - 75 50 The adjustment is Saddle paper lead When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
POSITION position executed when the edge striking plate increased, the stapling
adjustment saddle staple stop position (Up- position is shifted to the lead
position is shifted. down direction) edge of transported paper.
When the adjustment value is
decreased, the stapling
position is shifted to the rear
edge of transported paper.
B FOLDING Saddle folding 25 - 75 50 The adjustment is Saddle paper lead When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
POSITION position executed when the edge striking plate increased, the folding position
adjustment saddle folding stop position (Up- is shifted to the lead edge of
position is shifted. down direction) transported paper.
decreased, the folding

Purpose Change when
C FRONT Alignment position 35 - 65 50 When the paper F side paper When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
ADJUST adjustment (front) alignment capability alignment plate stop increased, the alignment
in the stacker position position is shifted to the
section is improper, (F/R direction) center.
the paper alignment When the adjustment value is
width is adjusted. decreased, the alignment
position is shifted to the
outside.
D REAR Alignment position 35 - 65 50 R side paper When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
ADJUST adjustment (Rear) alignment plate stop increased, the alignment
position position is shifted to the
(F/R direction) center.
decreased, the alignment
outside.
E STAPLE REAR Stapling position 25 - 75 50 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
adjustment (Rear, position on the R (stapler stop increased, the distance
one position) side is shifted, the position) between the stapling position
adjustment is (F/R direction) and the paper edge becomes
executed. longer.
decreased, the distance
between the stapling position
and the paper edge becomes
shorter.
F STAPLE REAR Stapling position 45 - 75 50 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
R adjustment (Rear, position on the R (stapler stop increased, the distance
one position /R side is shifted with R position) between the stapling position
series) series paper, the (F/R direction) and the paper edge becomes
adjustment is longer.
executed. When the adjustment value is
shorter.
G STAPLE Stapling position 25 - 75 50 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
FRONT adjustment (one position on the F (stapler stop decreased, the distance
position in front) side is shifted, the position) between the stapling position
executed. shorter.
increased, the distance
longer.
H STAPLE Stapling position 25 - 55 50 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
FRONT R adjustment (Front, position on the F (stapler stop decreased, the distance
one position / R side is shifted with R position) between the stapling position
adjustment is shorter.
longer.
I STAPLE BOTH Stapling position 45 - 55 50 When the staple off- Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
adjustment (Two center is shifted, the (stapler stop increased, the stapling
positions, center) adjustment is position) position is shifted to the front.
executed. (F/R direction) When the adjustment value is
position is shifted to the rear.
J STAPLE Stapling position 35 - 62 50 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
PITCH adjustment (Two interval is to be (stapler stop increased, the pitch of two
positions, pitch) changed, the position) points is widened.
adjustment is (F/R direction) When the adjustment value is
executed. decreased, the pitch of two
points is narrowed.
K PUNCH Punch center 35 - 65 50 When the punch off- Punching position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
CENTER adjustment center is shifted, the (F/R direction) increased, the hole position is
adjustment is shifted to the front.
decreased, the hole position
is shifted to the rear.

Purpose Change when
L PUNCH HOLE Punch hole 30 - 60 50 When the punch Punch position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
position hole position is (paper transport increased, the punch hole
adjustment shifted in the direction) position is shifted to the rear
transport direction, edge of paper.
the adjustment is When the adjustment value is
executed. decreased, the punch hole
position is shifted to the lead
edge of paper.
M SADDLE_ Saddle alignment 35 - 65 50 When the paper Saddle paper When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
ADJUST_POS position alignment capability alignment plate stop increased, the alignment plate
adjustment in the saddle position position is shifted to the
plate position is shifted to the
outside.
N GRIPPER_ Gripper exit 35 - 65 50 When the gripper Gripper discharge When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
POS position discharge position is position (Gripper increased, the gripper
adjustment shifted, the stop position) discharge position is shifted to
adjustment is (F/R direction) the front.
executed. (When a When the adjustment value is
JAM or trouble decreased, the gripper
occurs, the discharge position is shifted to
adjustment is the rear.
executed.)
4K finisher (MX-FN11)
Purpose Change when

A FRONT Alignment position 0 - 20 10 When the paper F side paper When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
outside.
B STAPLE REAR Stapling position 94 - 100 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
adjustment (Rear, 106 position on the R (stapler stop increased, the distance
executed. longer.
shorter.
C STAPLE Stapling position 94 - 100 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
FRONT adjustment (one 106 position on the F (stapler stop decreased, the distance
executed. shorter.
longer.
D PUNCH Punch center 30 - 70 50 When the punch off- Punching position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
E PUNCH HOLE Punch hole 46 - 52 50 When the punch Punch position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
edge of paper.

Purpose Change when

A SADDLE Saddle stitch 197 - 200 The adjustment is Saddle paper lead When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
POSITION position 203 executed when the edge striking plate increased, the stapling
adjustment saddle staple stop position position is shifted to the lead
position is shifted. (Up-down direction) edge of transported paper.
B FOLDING Saddle folding 192 - 200 The adjustment is Saddle paper lead When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
POSITION position 208 executed when the edge striking plate increased, the folding position
adjustment saddle folding stop position is shifted to the lead edge of
position is shifted. (Up-down direction) transported paper.
outside.
D STAPLE REAR Stapling position 94 - 100 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
executed. longer.
shorter.
E STAPLE Stapling position 94 - 100 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
executed. shorter.
longer.
F PUNCH Punch center 30 - 70 50 When the punch off- Punching position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
G PUNCH HOLE Punch hole 46 - 52 50 When the punch Punch position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
edge of paper.
3) Enter an adjustment value and press [OK] key.

4) Cancel the simulation, make a copy in the mode including the adjustment target, and check the adjustment result.

2 ‘13/Nov
MX-5141N
[6] SIMULATION Service Manual
1. General and purpose 2. Starting the simulation

The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the Entering the simulation mode
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes 1) Double-click the [HOME] key. (Total use quantity/Toner
in an earlier stage, and to efficiently setup and adjust the machine remaining quantity display mode screen)
for improved serviceability.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting, clear VER display section
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data
check, clear.
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
transport.
Touch the VER display section. Touch the [BACK] key.
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of
the operation panel of the machine.
(10-key mode input mode screen)
[BACK] key
2) Touch the VER display section. (10-key mode input mode

screen)
3) Touch the (#) key -> Asterisk (*) key -> Clear key ->
Asterisk (*) key -> Ready for input of main code of simulation.
4) Enter a main SIM code with the 10-key pad then touch the
START key or select a main code from the SIM key list on the
touch panel.
5) Enter a sub code with the 10-key pad, then touch the START
key or select a sub code from the code list on the touch panel.
6) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
7) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simu-
lation operation.
To cancel the current simulation mode and change the main
code and the sub code, press [BACK] key.
Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode

1) Press [EXIT] key.
NOTE: Do not turn OFF the power when the machine is in the sim-
ulation mode.
If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simulation
mode, a malfunction may be resulted. In this case, turn
OFF/ON the main power source.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 1
START (Copy mode)
Double-click the HOME key.
Touch the VER display section.
Press the sharp (#) key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the Program key.
Standby for entry of Press the BACK key

SIM code.
Enter the main code of

SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIM

is displayed.
NO
Press the
COLOR/MONO key. YES Is it the same
simulation main
code?
YES
In the power OFF/ON type
Standby for entry of SIM <Exclusion type> simulation, OFF/ON
Is there a sub code ?
sub code You have to exit message is
simulation mode Press the BACK key displayed by the
NO before entering into SYSTEM
Enter SIM sub code with this mode for self SETTINGS key.
the 10-key. YES
printing type.
Select the mode and the Do you want
Press the NO
item with the scroll key to perform another
COLOR/MONO key. and the item key. simulation ? The simulation mode
is canceled.
NO
If there is no item. YES Press the EXECUTE key
Operation check ?
and OK key.
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the EXIT key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?
YES Press the EXECUTE key

Operating conditions
check ? and OK key.
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
YES Press the EXECUTE key

Data clear ?
and OK key.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
YES Adjustments NO Operation is made according

or setting (counter data to the selected mode and the item.
change) ? (Other modes)
The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you NO
want to change the
content ?
The changed content
YES
is stored.
Enter the new setting and Press the EXECUTE key

adjustment values. and OK key.
3. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner (reading)
5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. DSPF/RSPF
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the automatic document feeder section DSPF/RSPF
and the control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. DSPF/RSPF
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and the Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
control circuit of those.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
those.
5 Used to check the operations of the paper feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC) and the LCC paper Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
transport clutch (LTRC).
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation panel
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit. Process
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the Paper transport/Paper exit section
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Others
3 Used to check the operations of the transport unit and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
6 Used to perform fusing pressure release and applying, and to check the operations of the control circuits. Fusing
90 Used to reset the machine to the factory setting. (The scanner is set to the lock enable position) Scanner
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Others
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time.
9 Color setting in the color copy test mode (Used to check the copy operation and the image quality for
each color).
12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) DSPF/RSPF
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control Process (Developing)
circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the Process (Charging)
control circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse section (duplex section) Duplex
and its control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control Duplex
circuit.
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit. Process (Developing)
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
14 - Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5 troubles.
15 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U6" trouble. LCC
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
17 - Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the
maintenance timing.)
2 Used to check the total number of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
3 Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position.
* Presumption of the faulty point by this data is possible.
4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Firmware
6 Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version,
and the counter list.
8 Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the DSPF/RSPF, and the scan
(reading) unit.
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, ADU, LCC
10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
11 Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX
12 Used to check the DSPF/RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position. (When the DSPF/RSPF
number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
13 Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge) and the Process
fusing unit
14 Used to display the use status of the toner cartridge. Process
18 Used to display the user data delete history.
19 Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.
22 40 Used to display the error code list and the contents.
42 Used to check the JAM/trouble data.
43 JAM data details display
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of troubles of misfeed is
considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)
80 Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper Paper feed, Paper transport
transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the
paper feed section and the paper transport section.
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the
counters.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
3 Used to clear the finisher, DSPF/RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
5 Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the counter.)
6 Used to clear the copy counter.
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)
12 Used to clear the document filing counter.
15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
35 Used to clear the toner cartridge use status data.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Process (Developing section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
4 Used to display the operation data of the toner supply quantity. (Not used in the market.) Process
5 Used to display the toner density correction data. (Not used in the market.) Process
26 1 Used to set Yes/No of installation of the right paper exit tray. Paper exit
2 Used to set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size is changed, this Paper feed
simulation must be executed to change the paper size in software.)
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. Auditor
(Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.)
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size)
6 Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
7 Used to set the machine ID.
8 Counter mode setting (Long scale).
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards). (For slow start
to drive the fusing heater lamp)
32 Used to set the specifications of the fusing cleaning operation. Fusing
35 Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There
are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.
38 Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the center
binding mode.
49 Used to set the print speed of postcards mode.
50 Used to set functions.
51 Used to set the specifications of the serial port operation. (For PCI)
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
53 User auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting.
65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
71 Used to set the trial mode of the web browsing function.
73 Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.
79 Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display of user data delete result.
27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) Communication (RIC/MODEM)
(FSS function)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Used to set of the enable, alert call out. (FSS function)
9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment
retry number. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number
history. (FSS function)
12 Used to check the high density, halftone process control and the automatic registration adjustment error
history. (FSS Function)
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
15 Used to display the FSS connection status.
16 Used to set the FSS alert send.
17 Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
18 Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry counter.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and
the control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control
circuits.
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.
2 Used to set the fusing operation and preheating.
20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
24 Operation setting 2
31 Used to check the operation of the fusing web cleaning. Fusing
32 Used to set various items related to the forcible operation of web cleaning when job end. Fusing
35 Fusing nip operation check. Fusing
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Image process (Photoconductor/
2 Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor (registration sensor). Process
4 Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Process
6 Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. Process
9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Image process (Photoconductor/
12 Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density sensor Image process (Photoconductor/
(registration sensor). Developing)
14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Process (OPC drum, development)/
Fusing/LSU
15 Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation. Process
17 Process refresh execution. Process
21 Used to set the halftone process control target. Process
22 Used to display the toner patch density level in the halftone process control operation. Process
24 Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the halftone process control operation. Process
25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the halftone process control. Process
26 Used to execute the halftone process control compulsory. Process
27 Used to clear the correction data of the halftone process control. Process
28 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
29 Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Process
31 Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Manual adjustment) Process
37 Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation.
43 Used to display the identification information of the developing unit. Developing system
61 Used to adjust the color image density sensor. (The adjustment is made according to the input of SIM44-
13 to set the target value of the color sensor gain adjustment.)
62 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
46 1 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
9 Used to adjust the scan image density.
10 Used to adjust the copy color balance and the gamma (for each color copy mode).
16 Used to adjust the monochrome copy density and the gamma (for each monochrome copy mode).
19 Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode
documents.
21 Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
23 Used to set the density correction of copy high density section (High density tone gap supported).
24 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
25 Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Single color copy mode)
26 Used to reset the single color mode color balance set value to the default.
27 Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy images, texts, and line image edges.
30 Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode.
32 Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.
36 Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color copy mode.
37 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of monochrome mode color.
38 Used to adjust the black component amount in the color copy mode.
39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)
42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
46 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (RGB RIP)
47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
51 Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process mode.
52 Used to set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode.
(After execution of either SIM46-54 or SIM46-51, the adjustment value is reset to the initial value.)
54 Used to perform the engine halftone automatic density adjustment (dither).
55 Used to adjust the drop out color in the image send mode (monochrome manual text mode).
58 Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolution. (Smoothing process)
59 Used to perform the copy mode pseudo resolution image process adjustment.
60 Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.
61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.
62 Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and
the auto exposure mode.
63 Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.
65 Used to set the color correction table.
66 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of watermarks in the copy/printer mode.
74 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)/Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
90 Used to set the process operation of high-compression PDF images.
91 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of black text.
48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning
direction).
5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Scanner section
6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.
5 Used to perform the watermark update.
10 ACU Firmware upgrade.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (DSPF/RSPF mode) DSPF/RSPF
10 Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
20 Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction)
22 Used to adjust the image registration. (Main scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto adjustment)/OPC
drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment)
24 Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2, 50-20, 21 and 22.
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.
28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio.
51 1 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the secondary transport voltage.
2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the DSPF/RSPF
registration roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image
position on the paper or when paper jams frequently occur.)
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the DSPF/RSPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the DSPF/RSPF document size width sensor.
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the DSPF/RSPF mode document scan position.
9 SPF dirt detection setting.
10 SPF dirt detection execution.
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
10 Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan only)
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SD Card, and HDD (including user authentication data and
address data) to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.)
3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
5 Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB memory in the TEXT format.
6 Used to output the JAM/trouble data.
7 System log backup.
60 1 Used to check the memory operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB.
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Used to set the laser power
4 Used to print the print image skew adjustment pattern. (LSU unit)
11 Used to correct the laser power automatically.
12 Laser power manual correction LSU. LSU
13 Used to clear the laser power correction value.
62 1 Used to format the hard disk/SD Card. (HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and the watermark data)
(SD Card: User data)
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.
8 Used to format the hard disk/SD Card. (HDD: Excluding the Operation Manual, the watermark data, and
the system area) (SD Card: User data)
10 Used to clear the job completion list data.
11 Used to delete the document filing data.
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.
13 Used to format the hard disk. (Operation Manual, watermark data only)
14 Used to delete the document filing management data. HDD
20 Used to check the operation of the mirroring hard disk. Mirroring hard disk
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading.
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting.
6 Used to display the scan level and the density level of the copy color balance adjustment patch.
7 Used to register the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
8 Used to set the default of the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
11 Used to set the target color balance of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
64 1 Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print)
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
7 Used to print the adjustment pattern of the test print. (Self print). (The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is
printed.)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation panel section
2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
5 Used to check the operation panel key input.
66 1 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2 - 150) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while FAX
checking with the LCD.
2 Used to enter a country code and set the default value for the country code. FAX
3 Used to check read/write of the EEPROM and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller and display the FAX
result.
4 Used to send the selected signals to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: max.) FAX
5 Used to send the selected signal to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
(For the kinds of send signals, refer to SIM66-04.)
6 Used to print the confidential registration check table (BOX NO., BOX name, passcode. (If there is no FAX
confidential registration, no print is made.)
7 Used to output all image data saved in the image memory. (Confidential data are also outputted.) FAX
8 Used to send the selected sound messages to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
9 Used to send the selected sound message to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For details of sound messages, refer to the sound message table of SIM66-08.
10 Used to clear the FAX and image send image data. (The confidential data are also cleared.) FAX
11 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
12 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps, refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal table.
13 Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be registered.) FAX
14 Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
15 Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
16 Used to execute the DTFM signal send test and to adjust the send level. FAX
17 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
18 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
21 Used to print the selected items (system error, protocol monitor). FAX
22 Used to set the handset sound volume. (This simulation can be executed even though the handset setting FAX
is set to NO. When, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume cannot be checked.)
(Japan model only)
24 Used to clear the FAST save data. FAX
29 Used to initialize the telephone book data (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/Desktop expansion FAX
table, the group expansion table, the program registration table, the interface memory box table, the meta
data, InboundRouting, and the DocumentAdmin table).
30 Used to display the TEL/LIU status change, The display is highlighted by status change. FAX
31 Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to TEL/LIU. FAX
32 Used to check the fixed data received from the line and to display the result. FAX
33 Used to execute detection of various signals with the line connected and to display the detection result. FAX
When a signal is detected, the display is highlighted.
34 Used to execute the send test and display the time required for sending image data in the test. Used to FAX
execute send test and display. (Unit: ms)
36 Used to check send and receive data from the MODEM controller to the MFP controller or the data line or FAX
the command line individually.
39 Used to check and change the destination setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX. FAX
42 Used to rewrite the program to power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
43 Used to write the adjustment value into the power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
61 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while FAX
checking with the LCD.
62 Used to import the FAX receive data into a USB memory in PDF file type. FAX
67 17 Printer reset Printer
24 Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) Printer
25 Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) Printer
26 Used to set the target color balance of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
27 Used to set the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
28 Used to set the default of the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value. Printer
33 Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. Printer
34 Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section. Printer
(Support for the high density section tone gap)
36 Used to adjust the density in the low density section. Printer
41 Used to set the two color printing. Printer
42 Used to adjust the color density in the two color printing. Printer
43 Used to adjust the color balance in the two color printing. Printer
45 Used to adjust the printer image filter and trapping.
52 Used to set the default of the gamma of the printer screen. Printer
54 Printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment for each dither) Printer
4. Details of simulation
2
1
2-1
1-1 Purpose Operation test/check
Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto-
matic document feeder and the control cir-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner cuit.
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
Section DSPF/RSPF
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. key.
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the The DSPF/RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit
scan resolution (operation speed). operations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution
(operation speed).
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
(372.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s) [DSPF]
400DPI 400DPI
(372.0mm/s) Item/Display Operation mode Default value
600DPI 600DPI (SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(248.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s)
1200DPI 1200DPI 400DPI 400DPI
(124.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(248.0mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
1-2 (372.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI
Purpose Operation test/check
(372.0mm/s)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner 600DPI 600DPI
(reading) section and the related circuits. (248.0mm/s)
[RSPF]
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
The operating status of the sensor is displayed.
(SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi- (248.0mm/s) (248.0mm/s)
tion. 400DPI 400DPI
(248.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(248.0mm/s)
1-5
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
Purpose Operation test/check (248.0mm/s) (248.0mm/s)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner 400DPI 400DPI
(reading) unit and the control circuit. (248.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(248.0mm/s)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
2-2
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan
resolution (operation speed). Purpose Operation test/check
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and the detectors in the automatic
Item/Display Operation mode Default value document feeder section and the control
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI circuits.
(372.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s)
Section DSPF/RSPF
400DPI 400DPI
(372.0mm/s) Operation/Procedure
600DPI 600DPI The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
(248.0mm/s) played.
1200DPI 1200DPI
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
(124.0mm/s)
are highlighted.
[DSPF]
[RSPF]
Display Content
Display Content
SSET DSPF installation detector
SPUM_F RSPF paper feed motor (normal rotation)
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor
SPUM_R RSPF paper feed motor (reverse rotation)
SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor
SPFM_F RSPF transport motor (normal rotation)
SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close sensor
SPFM_R RSPF transport motor (reverse rotation)
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit sensor
SRRC RSPF registration roller clutch
SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor
SRVC RSPF reverse clutch
SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1
SPRS RSPF pressure release solenoid
STMPS Stamp solenoid
SPOD DSPF document exit sensor
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short sensor
3
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long sensor
STLD DSPF document feed tray lower limit sensor 3-2
STUD DSPF document feed tray upper limit sensor
STMPU DSPF stamp unit installation detection
SWD_LEN DSPF guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm) Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
SWD_AD DSPF document detection volume output AD value sors and the detectors in the finisher and
the control circuit.
NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display. Section Finisher
[RSPF] Operation/Procedure
Display Content The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
SSET RSPF installation detector played.
SOCD RSPF open/close sensor The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
SCOV RSPF upper cover open/close sensor are highlighted.
SPED RSPF document sensor NOTE: When the punch module is installed, the code names are
SPPD1 RSPF document pass sensor 1 displayed at the back of the sensor display.
SPPD2 RSPF document pass sensor 2
SPPD3 RSPF document pass sensor 3 Inner finisher (MX-FNX9)
SPPD4 RSPF document pass sensor 4 Display Content
SPLS1 RSPF document length detection short sensor FED Entry port paper detector
SPLS2 RSPF document length detection long sensor FBED Tray paper detector
STMPU RSPF stamp unit installation detection FULD Tray upper limit detector
SWD_LEN RSPF guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm) FMLLD Tray intermediate lower limit detector
SWD_AD RSPF document detection volume output AD value FLLD Tray lower limit detector
FSLD1 Paper surface detector 1
NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.
FSLD2 Paper surface detector 2
FRLD Roller up/down detector
FBRD Belt separation detector
2-3 FFJHPD Alignment plate home position detector front
Purpose Operation test/check FRJHPD Alignment plate home position detector rear
FJPD Alignment guide position detector
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
FSTPD Staple tray paper detector
in the automatic document feeder and the
FSHPD Staple drive home position detector
control circuit.
FSTHPD Staple shift home position detector
Section DSPF/RSPF FSD Staple empty detector
Operation/Procedure FSTD Staple lead edge position detector
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel FDSW Door open detector
key. FFANLK Fan motor lock detector

Inner finisher punch module (MX-PNX1A/B/C/D)
The selected load performs the operation.
Display Content
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
FPRPD Punch rear position detector
[DSPF] FPUC Punch unit connection detector
FPHPD Punch home position detector
Display Content
FPSHPD Punch side registration home position detector
SPUM DSPF document feed motor
FPPD1 Punch paper surface detector 1
SPFM DSPF transport motor
SPOM DSPF document exit motor
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor
SPFFAN DSPF cooling fan motor
SPFC DSPF document feed clutch
SRRC DSPF No.2 registration roller clutch
FPDD Punch dust detector
STRRC DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch
FPPEND Punch paper rear edge detector
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch
FPDES1 Punch destination detector 1
STMPS Stamp solenoid
FPDES2 Punch destination detector 2
Display Content
1K saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN10) FBED2 Tray 2 paper detector
FCCD Tray approach detector
Display Content FSLD1 Tray 1 paper surface detector
PDPPD1 Paper pass paper transport detector 1 FPDD1 Discharged paper detector
PDPPD2 Paper pass paper transport detector 2 FSLD2 Tray 2 paper surface detector
PDOS Paper pass cover open/close sensor FASHPD Rear edge assist home position detector
FPPD1 Paper delivery detector 1 FSWHPD Oscillation guide home position detector
FPAPHS_F Paper alignment plate home position sensor F FSWOPD Oscillation guide open detector
FPAPHS_R Paper alignment plate home position sensor R FSTPD Staple tray paper detector
FATPD Paper alignment tray paper detector FSHPD Staple drive home position detector
FGHPS Gripper home position sensor FSTHPD Staple shift home position detector
FDTPD Delivery tray paper detector FSD Staple empty detector
FPLD Paper surface detector FSTD Staple lead edge position detector
FPPD2 Paper transport detector 2 FFANLK Fan motor lock detector
FSPHS Saddle plate home position sensor FSJOGD Stapler alignment interference detector
FSTPD Saddle exit tray paper detector FSAD Staple safety SW
FSMRS Saddle motor rotation sensor FSHTD Shutter open detector
FTULD Tray upper limit detector FCD Finisher connection detector
FTLLD Tray lower limit detector FFDD Front cover open detector
FTLMRS Tray lift motor rotation sensor F24V 24V output interruption detector
FSHS Staple home position sensor FPSW1 PUSHSW1 detector
FSSHPS Stapler shift home position sensor FPSW2 PUSHSW2 detector
FSED Staple empty detector FPSW3 PUSHSW3 detector
FSLS Staple lead edge sensor FAED21 Tray 2 area detector 1
FTPS Tray position sensor FAED22 Tray 2 area detector 2
FCD1 Cover detector 1 FAED23 Tray 2 area detector 3
FCD2 Cover detector 2
FSSW1 Safety switch 1 4K saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN18)
FCD Finisher connection detector
Display Content
FSSSW1 Staple safety switch
FSSUC Saddle staple unit detection
FFL Fan lock signal
FSPIND Saddle entry port paper detection
FDRHS Delivery roller home position sensor
FSPDD Saddle paper exit detection
FPPD3 Paper transport detector 3
FSDTPD Saddle tray paper detection
FSATPD Saddle paper alignment tray paper detector
FS1PD Saddle paper detection 1
FSSSW2 Stapler safety switch 2
FPHHS Paper hold home position sensor
FSAPHS Saddle alignment plate home position sensor
FSLGE Paper pushing plate motor lock detection
FSPGHS Saddle paper guide home position sensor
FSLGHPD Paper pushing plate home position detection
FSRHS Saddle roller home position sensor
FSLGTD Paper pushing plate lead edge position detection
FPDD Delivery detector
FSFOE Paper folding motor lock detection
FSSHS Saddle staple home position sensor
FSFOHPD Paper folding home position detection
FSSES Saddle staple sensor
FSPPHPD Paper positioning plate home position detection
FSSCS Saddle staple cover sensor
FSPPPD Paper positioning plate paper detection
FSSSHS Finisher saddle stapler shift home position sensor
FSAHPD Alignment plate home position detection
FSSIND Stitcher storage detection
1K saddle stitch finisher punch module (MX-PNX5A/B/C/D)
FSVPPD Vertical path paper detection
Display Content FSCRPD Semi-circular roller phase detection
FPMRS Punch motor rotation sensor FSGHPD Guide home position detection
FPD Punch unit detection FSSHP1 Stitch operation home position detection 1
FPCHPS Punch home position sensor FSSHP2 Stitch operation home position detection 2
FPDFS Punch dust sensor FSSD1 Saddle needle presence detection 1
FPHPS Punch unit home position sensor FSSD2 Saddle needle presence detection 2
FPTS Punch timing sensor FSAHPC Alignment home position sensor connector connection
FPES1 Punch paper edge sensor 1 detection
FPES2 Punch paper edge sensor 2 FSFOHPC Paper folding home position sensor connector
FPES3 Punch paper edge sensor 3 connection detection
FPES4 Punch paper edge sensor 4 FSEJDC Paper exit door sensor connector connection detection
FPMS Punch mode sensor FSFDC Front door open/close sensor connector connection
detection
4K finisher (MX-FN11) FSPPHPC Paper positioning plate home position sensor connector
connection detection
Display Content
FSLGTC Paper pushing plate lead edge position sensor
PDPPD1 Paper pass paper transport detector 1 connector connection detection
PDPPD2 Paper pass paper transport detector 2 FSINDD Inlet port cover open detection
PDOS Paper pass cover open/close sensor FSEJDD Paper exit cover open detection
FED Entry port paper detector FSINDSW Saddle inlet port door detection
FAED1 Tray 1 area detector 1 FSFDSW Front door open detection SW
FAED2 Tray 1 area detector 2 FSEJDSW Paper exit door open detection SW
FAED3 Tray 1 area detector 3 FSPSW1 S-PUSHSW detection
FFJHPD Alignment home position detector front FSBHPC Paper pushing plate home position sensor connector
FRJHPD Alignment home position detector rear connection detection
FBED1 Tray 1 paper detector
4K finisher punch module (MX-PNX6A/B/C/D) 1K saddle stitch finisher punch module (MX-PNX5A/B/C/D)
Display Content Display Content
FPE Punch motor lock detection FPM Punch motor
FPUC Punch unit connection detection FPSM Punch shift motor
FPHPD Punch home position detection
FPSHPD Punch side registration home position detection 4K finisher (MX-FN11)
FPFDD Punch front door open detection Display Content
FPDD Punch dust detection PDPGS Paper pass paper gate solenoid
FPUDSW Punch upper cover open detection SW PDPTM Paper pass paper transport motor
PDCF Paper pass cooling fan
FFM Entry port transport motor
FAM Bundle paper exit motor
3-3 FFJM Alignment motor front
Purpose Operation test/check FRJM Alignment motor rear
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in FSM Staple shift motor
the finisher and the control circuit. FTLM1 Tray 1 lift motor
FTLM2 Tray 2 lift motor
Section Finisher
FFSM Staple motor
Operation/Procedure FSWM Oscillation motor
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel FASM Rear edge assist motor
key. FINRRS Inlet port roller separation solenoid
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. FBRRS Buffer roller separation solenoid
The selected load performs the operation. FFDRRS Delivery roller separation solenoid
FBES Buffer rear edge holding solenoid
FSHC Shutter open/close clutch
Inner finisher (MX-FNX9) FAORC Bundle exit lower roller clutch
Display Content
FINRPS Entry port reverse pass solenoid
FSLS Paper surface detection solenoid Display Content
FPDS Paddle solenoid FPPM Saddle paper positioning motor
FBRS Belt separation solenoid FSIFM Saddle entry port transport motor
FRM Registration motor FSFM Saddle transport motor
FSWM Oscillation motor FSFOM Paper folding motor
FAM Bundle paper exit motor FSGM Guide motor
FFJM Alignment motor front FSJM Saddle alignment motor
FRJM Alignment motor rear FSFSTM Stitch motor front
FSM Staple shift motor FSRSTM Stitch motor rear
FFSM Staple motor FSLGM Paper holding motor
FTLM Tray lift motor FSFS Saddle flapper solenoid
FFANM Fan motor FS1DFS Paper deflection plate 1 solenoid
FS2DFS Paper deflection plate 2 solenoid
Inner finisher punch module (MX-PNX1A/B/C/D) FSFCS Transport plate contact solenoid
Display Content
4K finisher punch module (MX-PNX6A/B/C/D)
FPNM Punch motor
FPSM Punch side registration motor Display Content
FPNM Punch motor
1K saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN10) FPSM Punch side registration motor
Display Content
FPTM1 Paper transport motor 1
FPAM_F Paper alignment motor F
FSSM Stapler shift motor
FTLM Tray lift motor
FSM Staple motor
FPAM_R Paper alignment motor R
PDPGS Paper pass paper gate solenoid
PDPTM Paper pass paper transport motor
PDCF Paper pass cooling fan
FPTM2 Paper transport motor 2
FDRLM Delivery roller lift motor
FSDM Saddle motor
FGM Gripper motor
FSPTM Saddle paper transport motor
FSPAM Saddle paper alignment motor
FSPM Saddle positioning motor
FSDSM Saddle staple motor
FPHS1 Paper holding solenoid 1
FPHS2 Paper holding solenoid 2
3-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.
Section Finisher
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Inner finisher (MX-FNX9)
Change
when the
Setting Default Purpose (Case where the Change when the adjustment value is
Item/Display Content adjustment
range value adjustment is required) increased or decreased
value is
changed by 1
A FRONT Alignment position 2 - 18 10 This adjustment is used to F side paper When the adjustment value is 0.3665mm
ADJUST adjustment (front) adjust the paper alignment alignment increased, the alignment plate stop
width when the paper stop position position is shifted to the R side.
alignment is improper. (F/R When the adjustment value is
Alignment is determined by direction) decreased, the alignment plate stop
the combination of the both position is shifted to the F side.
adjustment values of FRONT
ADJUST and REAR ADJUST.
B REAR Alignment position 2 - 18 10 When changing the R side paper When the adjustment value is 0.3665mm
ADJUST adjustment (Rear) adjustment values of FRONT alignment increased, the alignment plate stop
ADJUST and REAR ADJUST stop position position is shifted to the F side.
from the default values, be (F/R When the adjustment value is
sure to change them by the direction) decreased, the alignment plate stop
same variation. position is shifted to the R side.
C STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple position on Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
REAR adjustment (one the R side is shifted, perform position increased, the staple position is
position at the the adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
rear) position) When the adjustment value is
D STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple position on Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
FRONT adjustment (one the F side is shifted, perform position increased, the staple position is
position in front) the adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
E STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple off-center is Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
BOTH adjustment (Two shifted, perform the position increased, the staple position is
positions, center) adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
F STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When it is required to change Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
PITCH adjustment (Two the staple interval, perform position increased, the staple interval is
positions, pitch) the adjustment. (Stapler stop increased.
(F/R decreased, the staple interval is
direction) decreased.
G PUNCH Punch center 37 - 63 50 When the punch off-center is Punch When the adjustment value is 0.1441mm
CENTER adjustment shifted, perform the position decreased, the punch position is
adjustment. (F/R shifted to the front side.
direction) When the adjustment value is
increased, the punch position is
shifted to the rear side.
H PUNCH Punch hole 42 - 58 50 When the punch hole position Punch When the adjustment value is 0.2584mm
HOLE position is shifted in the transport position increased, the punch position is
adjustment direction, perform the (Paper shifted to the paper lead edge side.
adjustment. transport When the adjustment value is
direction) decreased, the punch position is
shifted to the paper rear edge side.
Purpose Change when

A SADDLE Saddle stitch 25 - 75 50 The adjustment is Saddle paper lead When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
POSITION position executed when the edge striking plate increased, the stapling
adjustment saddle staple stop position (Up- position is shifted to the lead
position is shifted. down direction) edge of transported paper.
B FOLDING Saddle folding 25 - 75 50 The adjustment is Saddle paper lead When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
POSITION position executed when the edge striking plate increased, the folding position
adjustment saddle folding stop position (Up- is shifted to the lead edge of
position is shifted. down direction) transported paper.
outside.
D REAR Alignment position 35 - 65 50 R side paper When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
ADJUST adjustment (Rear) alignment plate stop increased, the alignment
position position is shifted to the
(F/R direction) center.
decreased, the alignment
outside.
E STAPLE REAR Stapling position 25 - 75 50 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
adjustment (Rear, position on the R (stapler stop increased, the distance
executed. longer.
shorter.
F STAPLE REAR Stapling position 45 - 75 50 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
R adjustment (Rear, position on the R (stapler stop increased, the distance
one position /R side is shifted with R position) between the stapling position
adjustment is longer.
shorter.
G STAPLE Stapling position 25 - 75 50 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
FRONT adjustment (one position on the F (stapler stop decreased, the distance
executed. shorter.
longer.
H STAPLE Stapling position 25 - 55 50 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
FRONT R adjustment (Front, position on the F (stapler stop decreased, the distance
one position / R side is shifted with R position) between the stapling position
adjustment is shorter.
longer.
Purpose Change when
I STAPLE BOTH Stapling position 45 - 55 50 When the staple off- Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
adjustment (Two center is shifted, the (stapler stop increased, the stapling
positions, center) adjustment is position) position is shifted to the front.
executed. (F/R direction) When the adjustment value is
position is shifted to the rear.
J STAPLE Stapling position 35 - 62 50 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
PITCH adjustment (Two interval is to be (stapler stop increased, the pitch of two
positions, pitch) changed, the position) points is widened.
adjustment is (F/R direction) When the adjustment value is
executed. decreased, the pitch of two
points is narrowed.
K PUNCH Punch center 35 - 65 50 When the punch off- Punching position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
L PUNCH HOLE Punch hole 30 - 60 50 When the punch Punch position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
edge of paper.
M SADDLE_ Saddle alignment 35 - 65 50 When the paper Saddle paper When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
ADJUST_POS position alignment capability alignment plate stop increased, the alignment plate
adjustment in the saddle position position is shifted to the
plate position is shifted to the
outside.
N GRIPPER_ Gripper exit 35 - 65 50 When the gripper Gripper discharge When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
POS position discharge position is position (Gripper increased, the gripper
adjustment shifted, the stop position) discharge position is shifted to
adjustment is (F/R direction) the front.
executed. (When a When the adjustment value is
JAM or trouble decreased, the gripper
occurs, the discharge position is shifted to
adjustment is the rear.
executed.)
4K finisher (MX-FN11)
Purpose Change when

A FRONT Alignment position 0 - 20 10 When the paper F side paper When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
outside.
B STAPLE REAR Stapling position 94 - 100 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
executed. longer.
shorter.
Purpose Change when
C STAPLE Stapling position 94 - 100 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
executed. shorter.
longer.
D PUNCH Punch center 30 - 70 50 When the punch off- Punching position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
E PUNCH HOLE Punch hole 46 - 52 50 When the punch Punch position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
edge of paper.
Purpose Change when

A SADDLE Saddle stitch 197 - 200 The adjustment is Saddle paper lead When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
POSITION position 203 executed when the edge striking plate increased, the stapling
adjustment saddle staple stop position position is shifted to the lead
position is shifted. (Up-down direction) edge of transported paper.
B FOLDING Saddle folding 192 - 200 The adjustment is Saddle paper lead When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
POSITION position 208 executed when the edge striking plate increased, the folding position
adjustment saddle folding stop position is shifted to the lead edge of
position is shifted. (Up-down direction) transported paper.
outside.
D STAPLE REAR Stapling position 94 - 100 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
executed. longer.
shorter.
E STAPLE Stapling position 94 - 100 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
executed. shorter.
longer.
Purpose Change when
F PUNCH Punch center 30 - 70 50 When the punch off- Punching position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
G PUNCH HOLE Punch hole 46 - 52 50 When the punch Punch position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
edge of paper.
LCC
Display Content
LPFD LCC transport detector
4 LUD LCC tray upper limit detector
LDD LCC tray lower limit detector
LPED LCC tray paper empty detector
4-2
LCLD LCC tray open/close detector
Purpose Operation test/check LDSW LCC upper open/close detection switch
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- LRE LCC lift motor encoder detector
sors and detectors in the desk/large capac- L24VM LCC24V power monitor
ity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of LLSW LCC upper limit switch
those. LCCD LCC main unit connection detector
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 4-3
played.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
are highlighted. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and
Desk the control circuit of those.
Display Content Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
D1MDC Desk 1 installation detection connector Operation/Procedure
D1PPD Desk 1 paper transport detector
1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
D1ULD Desk 1 upper limit detector
touch panel key.
D1PED Desk 1 paper empty detector
D1PQD Desk 1 remaining paper quantity detector
D1PRED1 Desk 1 paper rear edge detector 1 The selected load performs the operation.
D1PRED2 Desk 1 paper rear edge detector 2 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
D1PRED3 Desk 1 paper rear edge detector 3
Desk
D2MDC Desk 2 installation detection connector Display Content
D2PPD Desk 2 paper transport detector D1LM Tray 1 lift-up motor
D2ULD Desk 2 upper limit detector D1PFC Tray 1 paper feed clutch
D2PED Desk 2 paper empty detector D2LM Tray 2 lift-up motor
D2PQD Desk 2 remaining paper quantity detector D2PFC Tray 2 paper feed clutch
D2PRED1 Desk 2 paper rear edge detector 1 DPFM Desk transport motor
D2PRED2 Desk 2 paper rear edge detector 2 DPTRC Desk paper transport clutch
D2PRED4 Desk 2 paper rear edge detector 4 Tandem Desk
Display Content
Tandem Desk D1LUD Tray1 upper limit detector
Display Content D1PED Tray1 paper empty detector
D1LUD Tray1 upper limit detector D1PPD1 Tray1 paper transport detector1
D1PED Tray1 paper empty detector D1PPD2 Tray1 paper transport detector2
D1PPD1 Tray1 paper transport detector1 D1PQD Tray1 remaining paper quantity detector
D1PPD2 Tray1 paper transport detector2 D2LUD Tray2 upper limit detector
D1PQD Tray1 remaining paper quantity detector D2PED Tray2 paper empty detector
D2LUD Tray2 upper limit detector D2PQD Tray2 remaining paper quantity detector
D2PED Tray2 paper empty detector DCDT Tandem tray insertion detector
D2PQD Tray2 remaining paper quantity detector DPFD1 Tray1 paper transport detector
DCDT Tandem tray insertion detector DSW_TD Tandem LCC transport cover open/close detector
DPFD1 Tray1 paper transport detector
DSW_TD Tandem LCC transport cover open/close detector
LCC Heater lamp operation check method:
Remove the front cabinet upper and the paper exit tray, and the
Display Content
lighting status of each heater lamp can be checked through the
LPFM LCC transport motor
clearance between the fusing pressure release drive gear and the
LLM LCC lift motor
frame fusing section.
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
Display Content
LTRC LCC transport clutch
HL_UM Heater lamp main (Front surface of paper heat roller)
HL_US Heater lamp sub (Front surface of paper heat roller)
HL_LM Heater lamp main (Back surface of paper heat roller)
HL_UW Upper assist heater lamp (Warm-up)
4-5
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the paper
feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC) 5-3
and the LCC paper transport clutch (LTRC). Purpose Operation test/check
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC) Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
Operation/Procedure lamp and the control circuit.
Check the ON operation Section Scanner (reading)
Press the button of the code name for checking the ON operation. Operation/Procedure
Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not key.
highlighted. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Check the OFF operation The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.
Press the highlighted button which is ON. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
display is maintained. 5-4
Button Content Purpose Operation test/check
DTRC Desk transport clutch Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis-
LTRC LCC transport clutch charge lamp and the control circuit.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
5 When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
5-1 The selected discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display, DL_K Discharge lamp K
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir- DL_C Discharge lamp C
cuit. DL_M Discharge lamp M
Section Operation panel DL_Y Discharge lamp Y
Operation/Procedure
The LCD is changed as shown below.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX ->
MIN -> the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted. 6
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are
checked.
6-1
5-2 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
the paper transport system (clutches and
solenoids) and the control circuits.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater Section Paper transport/Paper exit section
lamp and the control circuit.
Operation/Procedure
Section Fusing
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
Operation/Procedure key.
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
key.
The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF.
Load operation check method:
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
Section Item/Display Content 6-3
Transport/ PFM Transport motor Purpose Operation test/check
process RRM Registration motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the trans-
POMF (*1) Paper exit motor (normal rotation)
port unit and the control circuit.
POMR (*1) Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)
FUM Fusing motor Section Process (Transport)
CPFM Paper feed motor Operation/Procedure
OSM Shifter motor 1) Select the operation mode with the mode select button.
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch
1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch Mode select button Content
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid TC1 Primary transfer (normal rotation)
WTNM Waste toner drive motor TC1_R Primary transfer (reverse rotation)
PTCHT PTC heater TC2 Secondary transfer
HPFM Horizontal transport motor
Paper CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) 2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation of the mode
feed CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) selected in 1) is performed.
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2)
Mode
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Mode
select Content NOTE
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch display
button
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
TC1 BLACK Monochrome Black mode position -> Color
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid mode position mode position -> Black mode
LSU LSUSS LSU shutter solenoid COLOR Color mode position -> Drum separation
position position -> (Black mode
*1: If "Normal rotation" and "Reverse rotation" of a same load are position)
FREE Non-transport
displayed as different items, when the both are selected at the (Repeated in this sequence.)
position
same time, "Normal rotation" is performed. In addition, a
TC1_R BLACK Monochrome Black mode position -> Drum
change in the rotating direction is accepted only when the mode position separation position -> Color
operation is stopped. FREE Non-transport mode position -> (Black mode
position position) (Repeated in this
COLOR Color mode sequence.)
6-2 position
TC2 PRINT Print position Print position - Transfer
Purpose Operation test/check position - Non-transfer
FREE Non-transport
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan position position (Repeated in this
motor and its control circuit. sequence)
Section Others
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel 6-6
key. Purpose Operation test/check
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to perform fusing pressure release
The selected load performs the operation. and applying, and to check the operations
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. of the control circuits.
Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively. Section Fusing
Load operation check method: Operation/Procedure
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, 1) Press [FUSER] key to highlight it.
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and fusing pressure applying and fus-
sound.
ing pressure release are repeated.
Display Content During this period, the status of the fusing roller pressure is dis-
POFM Paper exit cooling fan motor played.
(Drives POFM1 and POFM2 at the same time.)
OZFM Ozone fan motor PRINT Fusing pressure Fusing pressure applying -> Fusing
PSFM Power cooling fan motor applying pressure release -> (Fusing pressure
FREE Fusing pressure applying) The operation is repeated.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor
release
CCFM Process cooling fan motor
RCFM Rear section cooling fan motor
FUFM Fusing fan motor
PCSFM Toner cooling fan motor
6-90
(Drives PCFM1 and PCFM2 at the same time.)
MFPFAN Controller fan motor Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the machine to the factory
setting. (The scanner is set to the lock
enable position)
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
The scanner is shifted to the lock enable position and stopped.
7-9
7
Function (Purpose) Color setting in the color copy test mode
7-1
(Used to check the copy operation and the
Purpose Setting image quality for each color).
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of Section
aging.
Operation/Procedure
Section Others 1) Select the copy color with the touch panel key.
Operation/Procedure (Two or more colors can be selected.)
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel key. The key of the selected color is highlighted.
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode. Copying is performed with the selected color.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here- When [CLOSE] key is pressed, the display goes into the copy oper-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. ation menu in the simulation mode.
AGING Aging operation setup K Setup/cancel of black

INTERVAL Intermittent operation setting C Setup/cancel of cyan
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection ignoring setting M Setup/cancel of magenta
FUSING DISABLE Fusing unit ignoring setting Y Setup/cancel of yellow
WARMUP DISABLE Warming up ignoring setting
DV CHECK DISABLE Developing unit ignoring setting
SHADING DISABLE Shading correction operation omitting setting
CCD GAIN FREE CCD gain adjustment omitting setting 7-12
Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets
7-6 setting (for aging operation)
Purpose Setting Section DSPF/RSPF
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging Operation/Procedure
cycle. 1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key.
(Setting range:0 - 255)
Section
2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
Operation/Procedure
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
key.
2) Press [OK] key.
The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec).
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
7-8
Purpose Operation display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key.
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for
warm-up is displayed
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
8
8-1
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
the developing voltage in each print mode
and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
low speed are also adjusted simultane-
ously.
Section Process (Developing)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
panel.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
3) Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the
label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Adjustment Actual
range voltage
MIDDLE A MIDDLE Developing K 0 - 600 -450V
SPEED bias voltage
DVB_K (Middle
speed mode)
B MIDDLE Developing C 0 - 600 -450V
SPEED bias voltage
DVB_C (Middle
speed mode)
C MIDDLE Developing M 0 - 600 -450V
SPEED bias voltage
DVB_M (Middle
speed mode)
D MIDDLE Developing Y 0 - 600 -450V
SPEED bias voltage
DVB_Y (Middle
speed mode)
LOW A LOW Developing K 0 - 600 -450V
SPEED bias voltage
DVB_K (Low speed
mode)
B LOW Developing C 0 - 600 -430V
SPEED bias voltage
DVB_C (Low speed
mode)
C LOW Developing M 0 - 600 -430V
SPEED bias voltage
DVB_M (Low speed
mode)
D LOW Developing Y 0 - 600 -430V
SPEED bias voltage
DVB_Y (Low speed
mode)
8-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
low speed are also adjusted simultane-
ously.
Section Process (Charging)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
panel.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified
on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec.
Adjustment Default value

MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED GB_K Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) K 150 - 850 630 640
B MIDDLE SPEED GB_C Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) C 150 - 850 630 640
C MIDDLE SPEED GB_M Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) M 150 - 850 630 640
D MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) Y 150 - 850 630 640
LOW A LOW SPEED GB_K Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) K 150 - 850 620 620
B LOW SPEED GB_C Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) C 150 - 850 600 600
C LOW SPEED GB_M Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) M 150 - 850 600 600
D LOW SPEED GB_Y Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) Y 150 - 850 600 600
8-6
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the transport voltage and the control circuit.
Section Process (Transport)
Operation/Procedure
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec.

range output output
value value
value value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transfer Color K Low speed 51 - 255 95 8A 95 8A
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K bias reference Middle speed 51 - 255 146 15A 182 20A
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C value C Low speed 51 - 255 95 8A 95 8A
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C Middle speed 51 - 255 146 15A 146 15A
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M Low speed 51 - 255 95 8A 95 8A
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M Middle speed 51 - 255 146 15A 146 15A
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y Low speed 51 - 255 95 8A 95 8A
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y Middle speed 51 - 255 146 15A 146 15A
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Black/White K Low speed 51 - 255 95 8A 95 8A
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K Middle speed 51 - 255 146 15A 182 20A
range output output
value value
value value
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer Color Standard Front surface 51 - 255 103 40A 117 50A
bias reference paper
value
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX Back surface 51 - 255 96 35A 103 40A
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 90 30A 103 40A
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 83 25A 90 30A
O TC2 HEAVY CL SPX Color Heavy Front surface 51 - 255 76 20A 76 20A
P TC2 HEAVY CL DPX paper Back surface 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
Q TC2 HEAVY BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
R TC2 HEAVY BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 62 10A 62 10A
S TC2 HEAVY2 CL Color Heavy paper 2 51 - 255 76 20A 76 20A
T TC2 HEAVY2 BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
U TC2 HEAVY3 CL Color Heavy paper 3 51 - 255 76 20A 76 20A
V TC2 HEAVY3 BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
W TC2 GLOSSY CL Gloss paper Color 51 - 255 76 20A 76 20A
X TC2 GLOSSY BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
Y TC2 OHP CL OHP Color 51 - 255 76 20A 76 20A
Z TC2 OHP BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
AA TC2 ENVELOPE CL Envelope Color 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
AB TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
AC TC2 THIN CL Thin paper Color 51 - 255 103 40A 117 50A
AD TC2 THIN BW Black/White 51 - 255 90 30A 103 40A
AE TC2 CLEANING Cleaning process 51 - 255 59 8A 59 8A
AF TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary transfer In low speed print 0 - 255 0 0V 0 0V
AG TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD cleaning In middle speed print 0 - 255 0 0V 0 0V
AH TC2 CLEAN CLEANING Cleaning 0 - 255 85 - 500V 85 - 500V
AI VPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied voltage Color Low speed 0 - 255 60 2.07KV 60 2.07KV
AJ VPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL control (AC Middle speed 0 - 255 60 2.07KV 60 2.07KV
AK VPTC LOW SPEED BK constant voltage Black/White Low speed 0 - 255 60 2.07KV 60 2.07KV
AL VPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK setting value) Middle speed 0 - 255 60 2.07KV 60 2.07KV
AM FPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied voltage Color Low speed 46 - 192 192 0.5KHz 192 0.5KHz
AN FPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL control Middle speed 46 - 192 192 0.5KHz 192 0.5KHz
AO FPTC LOW SPEED BK (frequency setting Black/White Low speed 46 - 192 192 0.5KHz 192 0.5KHz
AP FPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK value) Middle speed 46 - 192 136 0.7KHz 136 0.7KHz
AQ DCPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied voltage Color Low speed 0 - 255 123 1.22KV 123 1.22KV
AR DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL control (DC Middle speed 0 - 255 179 1.62KV 179 1.62KV
AS DCPTC LOW SPEED BK constant voltage Black/White Low speed 0 - 255 179 1.62KV 179 1.62KV
AT DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK setting value) Middle speed 0 - 255 179 1.62KV 179 1.62KV
AU PTC_HT PTC heater 0: OFF 0-6 3 3
operating 1-6: Environment conditions
environment setting (TC environment table 6 steps)
AV HT_DUTY Setting of the 0: OFF 0 - 10 5 5
supply power in 10: Lighting-up fully
PTC heater (10 steps)
constant operation
(Duty ratio setting)
TNM_K Toner motor K
9 TNM_C Toner motor C
TNM_M Toner motor M
9-2 TNM_Y Toner motor Y
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and detectors in the paper reverse
section (duplex section) and its control cir-
cuit.
13
Section Duplex
13--
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played. Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active Section
are highlighted. Operation/Procedure
APPD1 ADU paper transport detector 1
APPD2 ADU paper transport detector 2 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
DSW_ADU ADU paper guide open/close detector
9-3
14
14--
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
the paper reverse section (duplex section)
and its control circuit. Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5
troubles.
Section Duplex
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel Operation/Procedure
key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Display Content 15
ADUM1 ADU motor 1
ADUM2 ADU motor 2
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid
15--
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6" trouble.
Section LCC
10 Operation/Procedure
10-1 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.

Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
supply mechanism (toner motor) and the
related circuit.
16
Section Process (Developing)
16--
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key. Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected. Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec. Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
NOTE: This simulation must be executed without installing the 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
toner cartridges.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing
unit, resulting in overtoner.
If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner car-
tridges installed, overtoner state may be deleted by making
a few black background copy in the single color copy mode
of the target color.
2 ‘13/Nov
17 22
17-- 22-1
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble. Check
Section Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each
section and each operation mode.
Operation/Procedure
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
Section
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Operation/Procedure
Change the display page with scroll key on the touch panel.

21 Total TOTAL OUT Total output All prints including
output (BW) quantity of black jams
quantity and white
21-1
TOTAL OUT Total output All prints including
Purpose Setting (COL) quantity of color jams
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle. Total use TOTAL (BW) Total use quantity Effective paper
quantity of black and white (including self print,
Section excluding jams)
Operation/Procedure TOTAL (COL) Total use quantity Effective paper
* Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance of full color (including self print,
excluding jams)
counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing clean-
TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper
ing roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not
(2COL) of 2-color (including self print,
clarify.
excluding jams)
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper
panel. (3COL) of 3-color (including self print,
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. excluding jams)
TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper
(SGL_COL) of single color (including self print,
excluding jams)
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range Copy COPY (BW) Black and white Billing target
value
copy counter (excluding self print)
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0: Default 300K
COUNTER counter (Total) 1 - 300: 1K - 300K COPY (COL) Full color copy Billing target
(TOTAL) 999: Free counter (excluding self print)
B MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0: Default 300K COPY (2COL) 2-color copy Billing target
COUNTER counter (Color) 1 - 300: 1K - 300K counter (excluding self print)
(COLOR) 999: Free COPY Single color copy Billing target
(SGL_COL) counter (excluding self print)
Print PRINT (BW) Black and white Billing target
print counter (excluding self print)
PRINT (COL) Full color print Billing target
counter (excluding self print)
PRINT (2COL) 2-color print Billing target
PRINT (3COL) 3-color print Billing target
PRINT Single color print Billing target
(SGL_COL) counter (excluding self print)
Document DOC FIL (BW) Black and white 2
filing document filing
print counter
DOC FIL Color document
(COL) filing print counter
DOC FIL 2-color document
(2COL) filing print counter
DOC FIL Single color
(SGL_COL) document filing
print counter
Other OTHER (BW) Black and white Self print quantity
other counter
OTHER (COL) Color other Self print quantity
counter
PCI PCI OPE- PCI counter PCI accumulated
TIME operation time (H)
22-2 PUNCH Punch module
NIC NIC
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check POWER-CON Power controller
Function (Purpose) Used to check the total number of misfeed E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage)
and troubles. (When the number of total WATER MARK Watermark (HDD storage)
jam is considerably great, it is judged as ESCP ESCP font ROM
necessary for repair.) ACRE (MAIN) Enhanced compression kit (Main section)
Section ACRE (DATA) Enhanced compression kit (Data section)
PCI PCI
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter 22-6

DSPF/RSPF JAM DSPF/RSPF JAM counter
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
TROUBLE Trouble counter
Function (Purpose) Used to output the setting/adjustment data
(simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the
firmware version, and the counter list.
22-3 Section
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the * When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
misfeed count of each position. the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
* Presumption of the faulty point by this (Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
data is possible. 1) Select the print list mode with 10-key.
Section
Operation/Procedure Item Print list mode Print content
DATA PATTERN NO.1 Firmware version, counter data, etc.
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
NO.2 SIM50-24 data
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
NO.3 Data related to the process control
2SIDED PRINT 1-SIDED Simplex surface print (Default)
2-SIDED Duplex surface print
22-4
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step
1).
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his-
tory.
Section 22-8
Operation/Procedure Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations
(The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
(counter value) of the finisher, the DSPF/
RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit.
Section
22-5
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Others
The counter values of the finisher, the DSPF/RSPF, and the scan-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each ner related counters are displayed.
unit (section).
Section Firmware SPF Document feed quantity
SCAN Number of times of scan
Operation/Procedure
STAPLER Staple counter
The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed. PUNCHER Puncher counter
When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to STAMP Stamp counter
check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary. SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
S/N Serial No. (The codes for November and December
COVER Document cover open/close counter
are "X" and "Y" respectively.)
HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection
ICUM(MAIN) ICUM(MAIN)
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the scanner lamp
ICUM(BIOS) ICUM(BIOS)
(* hour * minutes)
ICU (MAIN) ICU (Main section)
DSPF LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the scanner lamp
ICU (BOOT) ICU (Boot section) (* hour * minutes) (DSPF-installed model only)
ICU (SUB) ICU (Sub section) (ARM9)
LANGUAGE Language support data version
UICONTENTS Content data for display
PCL (PROFILE) PCL (Color profile)
PCU PCU
SCU SCU
SPF SPF
FAX1 (MAIN) FAX 1-Line (Main section)
DESK Desk unit
LCC LCC
FINISHER Finisher
SADDLE Saddle unit
22-9 SECURITY MX-FR42U Data security kit
(commercial version)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check MX-FR42 Data security kit
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print (Authentication version)
quantity) of each paper feed section. AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
SDRAM(SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
Section Paper feed, ADU, LCC
SDRAM(ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
Operation/Procedure HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed. SD *****MB SD Card capacity
NIC STANDARD NIC
TRAY1 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 1) BARCODE MX-PF10 Barcode font kit
TRAY2 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 2) INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
TRAY3 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 3) ACM (*) MX-AMX2 Application communication module
TRAY4 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 4) EAM (*) MX-AMX3 External account module
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total) WEB BROWSING MX-AM10/ Web browsing expansion kit
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper) STANDARD
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP) ACRE MX-EB11/ Enhanced compression kit (ACRE)
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope) STANDARD
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (LCC) MIRRORING MX-EB12 N Mirroring kit
ADU ADU paper transport counter (Paper reverse section) PCI CONNECT PCI generating unit
CF *****MB Compact Flash Card capacity
(*) Displayed only in the OSA models.

22-10
Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration 22-11
(option, internal hardware). Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Section Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/
Operation/Procedure receive) of FAX.
(Only when FAX is installed)
The system configuration is displayed.
(The model names of the installed devices and options are dis- Section FAX
played.) Operation/Procedure
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
MACHINE RSPF MX-4140N Main unit are displayed.
model MX-5140N
DSPF MX-4141N FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1)
model MX-5141N FAX SEND FAX send counter
SPF STANDARD Automatic document feeder FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
DESK MX-DE22 Stand/1x500 sheet paper drawer SEND TIME FAX send time
MX-DE23 Stand/2x500 sheet paper drawer RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
LCC MX-LC11 Large capacity tray (Side LCC)
PUNCHER MX-PNX1A Punch module
MX-PNX1B
MX-PNX1C 22-12
MX-PNX1D Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
MX-PNX5A
Function (Purpose) Used to check the DSPF/RSPF misfeed
MX-PNX5B
positions and the number of misfeed at
MX-PNX5C
each position. (When the number of mis-
MX-PNX5D
feed is considerably great, it can be judged
MX-PNX6A
as necessary for repair.)
MX-PNX6B
MX-PNX6C Section DSPF/RSPF
MX-PNX6D Operation/Procedure
FINISHER MX-FNX9 Inner finisher The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
MX-FN10 Saddle stitch finisher (1K) up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
MX-FN11 Finisher (4K)
MX-FN18 Saddle stitch finisher (4K)
FAX1 MX-FX11/ Facsimile expansion kit
STANDARD
PS MX-PK11/ PS expansion kit
STANDARD
XPS MX-PUX1 XPS expansion kit
22-13
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
cartridge) and the fusing unit
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The number of prints and the number of rotations in the process
section are displayed.
Number of Number of
Item/Display Content Print counter RPM Life meter
use days remaining days
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color) Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING BELT Fusing belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
PRESSURE ROLLER Fusing pressure roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
SEPARATE PAWL Fusing separation pawl Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
SEPARATE PLATE Fusing separation plate Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING WEB UNIT * Fusing web unit Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING WEB SEND Fusing web cleaning send counter 0 - 65535 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
TRANSFER BLADE Transfer cleaning blade Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
PTC PTC counter Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
PS PAPER Paper dust cleaner Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
OZONE FILTER Ozone filter Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG (K) DV unit (K) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG (C) DV unit (C) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG (M) DV unit (M) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG (Y) DV unit (Y) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG (K) OPC drum unit (K) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG (C) OPC drum unit (C) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG (M) OPC drum unit (M) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG (Y) OPC drum unit (Y) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER (K) Main charger (K) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER (C) Main charger (C) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER (M) Main charger (M) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER (Y) Main charger (Y) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE (K) OPC drum cleaning blade K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE (C) OPC drum cleaning blade C Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE (M) OPC drum cleaning blade M Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE (Y) OPC drum cleaning blade Y Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
TONER CTRG (K) Toner cartridge (K) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG (C) Toner cartridge (C) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG (M) Toner cartridge (M) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG (Y) Toner cartridge (Y) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) Not displayed
*: If the feed amount of SIM43-24-M is changed, the life meter does not show precise values.
22-14
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use status of the toner
cartridge.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The status of the toner cartridge is displayed.
Accumulated No. of Accumulated No. of near Accumulated No. of Remaining quantity

Display item Content installed cartridges (Unit) near end (Unit) end (Unit) (Unit: %)
INSTALL NN END END RESIDUAL
TONER (K) Toner cartridge use counter (K) 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0-25%
TONER (C) Toner cartridge use counter (C) 25-50%
TONER (M) Toner cartridge use counter (M) 50-75%
TONER (Y) Toner cartridge use counter (Y) 75-100%
22-18 22-40
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Error contents display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the user data delete history. Function (Purpose) Used to display the error code list and the
Section contents.
The date and time of the user data delete are displayed. Operation/Procedure
1) Select the main error code.
Display item
Content The sub error code and the contents are displayed.
Item name Date
START Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time
of operation start)
END Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time 22-42
of operation end) Purpose Display the data
Function (Purpose) JAM data details display
Section
22-19 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check 1) Change the displayed contents by [PAPER JAM], [SPF JAM]
Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters or [TROUBLE] key.
related to the scan - image send.
Section 22-43
Operation/Procedure Purpose Display the data
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner Function (Purpose) JAM data details display
Change the display with scroll key. Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Change the displayed contents by [PAPER JAM], [SPF JAM]
Network NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
scanner ORG_B/W counter (B/W scan job)
or [TROUBLE] key.
NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity Display each key contents
ORG_CL counter (Color scan job)
NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity Key Contents
ORG_2CL counter (2-Color scan job) Number of JAM ,Paper feed counter, Paper feed retry
COUNTER
NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity counter
ORG_SGL counter (Single-color scan job) HISTORY1 JAM history
Internet INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output HISTORY2 Temperature and humidity data
FAX OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending page
Display data and contents (COUNTER)
SEND OUTPUT Item Content
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive PAPER JAM COUNT Number of machine JAM troubles
RECEIVE PAPER FEED COUNTER Paper feed counter (Similar with
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX send SIM22-09 display content)
SEND PAPER FEED RETRY COUNTER Paper feed retry counter (Similar
E-Mail MAIL Number of times of E-MAIL send with SIM27-18 display content)
COUNTER
FTP FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send Display data and contents (HISTORY1)
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send
Item Description
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
NO History number
TRIAL Trial mode counter
MODE_B&C (B/W & COLOR scan job) JAM CODE Jam code main
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) DATE/TIME Occurrence date
HDD_B/W TOTAL_BW Total counter (B/W)
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity TOTAL_CL Total counter (color)
HDD_CL (COLOR) P_S * Paper size
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity P_T * Paper type
HDD_2CL (2-COLOR) JOB * Job mode
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity JN First after JOB start or not
HDD_SGL (SINGLE color) OF Paper exit: Offset
EP Paper exit: Exit position
PC Paper exit: Punch
SP Paper exit: Staple
* : Refer to the detail display content of HISTORY1.
Display data and contents (HISTORY2)
Display Content
Item Content 054 A0x2
NO History number 055 A0x2 R
DATE/TIME Occurrence date A0 A0
Fusing upper main thermistor (differential) A0R A0R
TH_UM
temperature/AD value B0 B0
Fusing upper main thermistor (compensation) B0R B0R
TH_UM_AD1
temperature/AD value
B1 B1
Fusing upper main thermistor (detection)
TH_UM_AD2 B1R B1R
temperature/AD value
B2 B2
TH_LM Fusing lower main thermistor temperature/AD value
B2R B2R
TH_US Fusing lower sub thermistor temperature/AD value
K8 K8
TEMPRATURE Temperature thermistor
K8R K8R
HUMIDITY Humidity thermistor
K16 K16
TH1_LSU LSU thermistor temperature/AD value
16R K16R
K32 K32
Detail display content of HISTORY1(P_S)
32R K32R
Display Content 066 SRA3
NON No paper size 067 SRA3R
WLG Double Legal 068 SRA4
WLR Double Legal-R 069 SRA4R
LD Ledger 06A 318 x 469 mm
LDR Ledger-R(Double Letter) 06B 469 x 318 mm
LG Legal 06C 234 x 318 mm
LGR Legal-R 06D 318 x 234 mm
FC Foolscap 06E 312 x 440 mm
FCR Foolscap-R 06F 440 x 312 mm
LT Letter 070 220 x 312 mm
LTR Letter-R 071 312 x 220 mm
IV Invoice(Mini) 082 DBL Postcard
IVR Invoice-R(Mini) 083 DBL Postcard-R
EC Executive 084 Postcard
ECR Executive-R 085 Postcard-R
A3W A3W(12x18 in) 087 119 x 277 mm
AWR A3W(12x18 in)-R 089 120 x 235 mm
012 22x17 08B 90 x 205 mm
013 22x17R 08D 90 x 185 mm
014 22x34 08F 240 x 332 mm
015 22x34R 091 216 x 277 mm
016 34x44 093 197 x 267 mm
017 34x44R 095 190 x 240 mm
018 44x68 097 162 x 229 mm
019 44x68R 099 142 x 205 mm
01A 9x12 09B 119 x 197 mm
01B 9x12R 09D 120 x 176 mm
01C 13x19 09F 114 x 162 mm
01D 13x19R 0A1 98 x 148 mm
MLG Mexican-Legal 0A3 105 x 235 mm
MLR Mexican-Legal-R 0A5 95 x 217 mm
ALG Asiain-Legal 0A7 98 x 190 mm
ALR Asiain -Legal-R 0A9 92 x 165 mm
EXT Extra (Special) 0AA AB series E-version
A1 A1 0AB AB series L-version
A1R A1R 0AC AB series panorama size
A2 A2 0AD AB series name card size
A2R A2R 0AE AB series identification photo
A3 A3 0AF AB series name card small
A3R A3R 0B0 A3 width
A4 A4 0B1 B4 width
A4R A4R 0B2 A4 width
A5 A5 0B3 A3 width (Long size)
A5R A5R 0B4 B4 width (Long size)
A6 A6 0B5 A4 width (Long size)
A6R A6R 0BC Custom (Large size)
B3 B3 0BD Custom (Small size)
B3R B3R 0BF Custom
B4 B4 0C2 Monarch
B4R B4R 0C3 Monarch-R
B5 B5 0C4 DL
B5R B5R 0C5 DL-R
B6 B6 0C6 C4
B6R B6R 0C7 C4-R
Display Content Display Content
0C8 C5 RMT Remote maintenance
0C9 C5-R 00E SIM 52-01
0CA C6 00F Tandem (Cordless handset)
0CB C6-R CFP Confidential print
0CC C65 NET Network scanner
0CD C65-R PRF Proof print
0CE ISOB5
0CF ISOB5-R
0D0 Size6-1/2
0D1 Size6-1/2-R 22-90
0D2 Size9 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
0D3 Size9-R Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
0D8 Com-10
0D9 Com-10-R
Section
0DA Inch series E-version Operation/Procedure
0DB Inch series L-version 1) Change the display with scroll key.
0DC Inch series panorama size 2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
0DD Inch series name card large
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
0DE Inch series identification photo
0DF Inch series name card small All setting list (*) ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST
0EC Extra (Special large size) Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
0ED Extra (Special small size) PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
0EF Extra (Special/Not fixed) PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
0F0 Long size PS FONT LIST
JAM (Used for canceling temporary charging in a coin PS KANJI FONT LIST (Japan)
0FF
vendor.)
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
Display content detail: Paper type (P_T) NIC PAGE
Address registration INDIVIDUAL LIST
Display Content list (*) GROUP LIST
UST User type PROGRAM LIST (Output Disable)
LHP Letter head paper MEMORY BOX LIST
PNP Perforated sheet ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
RCL Recycled paper Document filing list (*) DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
COL Color paper System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
PLN Standard paper ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
PRP Pre printed ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND)
OHP OHP Transparency ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
HV Heavy paper ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
LBL Label sheet ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
ENV Envelope ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
HG Postcard Receive rejection ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
TAB Tab sheet number table
THN Thin paper Receive rejection/ ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
US1 User type 1 allow address
US2 User type 2 domain table
US3 User type 3 To E-mail INBOUND ROUTING LIST
US4 User type 4 Transfer table list
US5 User type 5 To administrator DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
US6 User type 6 Transfer list
US7 User type 7 Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST
HV2 Heavy paper 2 Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
PL2 Plain paper 2 (not used)
*: When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK
HV3 Heavy paper 3
model, this setting is invalid.
HV4 Heavy paper 4
GLS Glossy paper
Display content detail: Job mode (JOB)

Display Content
SHD Shading.
PCL Process control
SIM Test mode (Sim)
ICP Interruption copy
CP Copy
FXS FAX send scan
AXS AXIS
FXP FAX reception print
PR Printer
FXC FAX communication report print
00A Zaurus print
SLF Self/Test print
00C Document counter
MACHINE Machine JAM counter
23 SPF DSPF/RSPF JAM counter
TROUBLE Trouble counter
23-2
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of 24-2
paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of
Purpose Data clear
troubles of misfeed is considerably great,
the judgment is made that repair is Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
required.) ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
23-80
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
and paper transport in the paper feed sec- TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
tion and the paper transport section. Used MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
to output the list of the operation status of MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
the sensor and the detectors in the paper MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
feed section and the paper transport sec- MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
tion. LCC LCC paper feed counter (LCC)
Section Paper feed, Paper transport ADU ADU paper feed counter
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and
paper transport is outputted. 24-3
Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors Purpose Data clear
in the paper feed and transport section.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, DSPF/RSPF, and
The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the
the scan (reading) unit counter.
latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed.
Section
Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending
on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen- Operation/Procedure
sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Item Content
3) Press [YES] key.
JAM CODE JAM code
DATA/TIME JAM occurrence date/time The target counter is cleared.
MODE Printing mode when JAM occurs
SPF DSPF/RSPF document feed counter
SIZE Paper size
(No. of discharged sheets)
TYPE Paper type
SCAN Scan counter
PIC TRAY Paper feed tray
STAPLER Staple counter
OUT TRAY Paper exit tray
PUNCHER Puncher counter
SECTION Measurement section of paper feed time
STAMP Stamp counter
STANDARD Theoretical paper feed time
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
JAM-1 Measurement time of the first paper before JAM occurs
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
JAM Measurement time of JAM paper
COVER Document cover open/close counter
POS/
MIOP (sensor / load) data when JAM occurs HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection
STATUS
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the scanner lamp
DSPF LAMP TIME *1 DSPF section lamp total lighting time
24 *1: Display only when the DSPF is installed.
24-1
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
ble counter. (After completion of mainte-
nance, clear the counters.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
3) Press [YES] key.
24-4 Item/Display Content
Drum DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge (K) (Counter)
Purpose Data clear Drum cartridge (K) (Number of use
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the days)
printer counters of the transport unit and Drum cartridge (K)
the fusing unit. (After completion of mainte- (Accumulated number of rotations)
nance, clear the counters.) DRUM CTRG C Drum cartridge (C) (Counter)
Drum cartridge (C)
Section
(Number of use days)
Operation/Procedure Drum cartridge (C)
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. (Accumulated number of rotations)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. DRUM CTRG M Drum cartridge (M) (Counter)
Drum cartridge (M)
3) Press [YES] key.
(Number of use days)
The target counter is cleared. Drum cartridge (M)
(Accumulated number of rotations)
Item/Display Content DRUM CTRG Y Drum cartridge (Y) (Counter)
Maintenance MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter (Total) (Counter) Drum cartridge (Y)
ALL Maintenance counter (Total) (Number of use days)
(Number of use days) Drum cartridge (Y)
MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter (Color) (Counter) (Accumulated number of rotations)
COL Maintenance counter (Color) Main MAIN Main charger (K) (Counter)
(Number of use days) charger CHARGER K Main charger (K) (Number of use days)
Fusing FUSING BELT Fusing belt (Counter) Main charger (K)
Fusing belt (Number of use days) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Fusing belt MAIN Main charger (C) (Counter)
(Accumulated number of rotations) CHARGER C Main charger (C) (Number of use days)
FUSING Fusing roller (Counter) Main charger (C)
ROLLER Fusing roller (Number of use days) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Fusing roller MAIN Main charger (M) (Counter)
(Accumulated number of rotations) CHARGER M Main charger (M) (Number of use days)
PRESS Pressure roller (Counter) Main charger (M)
ROLLER Pressure roller (Number of use days) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Pressure roller MAIN Main charger (Y) (Counter)
(Accumulated number of rotations) CHARGER Y Main charger (Y) (Number of use days)
Separation SEPARATE Separation pawl (Counter) Main charger (Y)
PAWL Separation pawl (Number of use days) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Separation pawl Drum blade DRUM BLADE Drum blade K (Counter)
(Accumulated number of rotations) K Drum blade K (Number of use days)
SEPARATE Separation plate (Counter) Drum blade K
PLATE Separation plate (Number of use days) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Separation plate DRUM BLADE Drum blade C (Counter)
(Accumulated number of rotations) C Drum blade C (Number of use days)
FUSING WEB Fusing web unit print counter Drum blade C
Use day of fusing web unit (Accumulated number of rotations)
Fusing web cleaning send counter DRUM BLADE Drum blade M (Counter)
Transfer TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt (Counter) M Drum blade M (Number of use days)
Primary transfer belt Drum blade M
(Number of use days) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Primary transfer belt DRUM BLADE Drum blade Y (Counter)
(Accumulated number of rotations) Y Drum blade Y (Number of use days)
TRANS BLADE Transfer blade (Counter) Drum blade Y
Transfer blade (Number of use days) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Transfer blade Other PS PAPER PS paper dust cleaner (Counter)
(Accumulated number of rotations) PS paper dust cleaner
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer belt (Counter) (Number of use days)
Secondary transfer belt OZONE FILTER Ozone filter (Counter)
(Number of use days) Ozone filter (Number of use days)
Secondary transfer belt
(Accumulated number of rotations) * The winding counter for the fusing web cleaning is cleared by
PTC PTC counter (Counter) being synchronized with the fusing web cleaning feed counter.
PTC counter (Number of use days)
PTC counter
(Accumulated number of rotations)
24-5 24-10
Purpose Data clear Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. (After Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter.
replacement of developer, clear the coun- (Only when FAX is installed)
ter.) Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Press [YES] key.
3) Press [YES] key. The target counter is cleared.
FAX OUTPUT FAX Print quantity counter
NOTE: When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared
FAX SEND FAX send counter
automatically.
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter
Developer cartridge print counter (K)
SEND TIME FAX send time
K Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (cm) (K)
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
Number of day that used developer (Day) K
Developer cartridge print counter (C)
C Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (cm) (C)
Number of day that used developer (Day) C
24-12
Developer cartridge print counter (M)
M Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (cm) (M) Purpose Data clear
Number of day that used developer (Day) M Function (Purpose) Used to clear the document filing counter.
Developer cartridge print counter (Y) Section
Y Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (cm) (Y)
Operation/Procedure
Number of day that used developer (Day) Y
3) Press [YES] key.
24-6
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter. Display Content
DOC FIL (BW) Black and white document filing print counter
Section
DOC FIL (COL) Color document filing print counter
Operation/Procedure DOC FIL (2COL) 2-color document filing print counter
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. DOC FIL (SGL_COL) Single-color document filing print counter
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared. 24-15
COPY BW Copy counter (B/W) Purpose Data clear
COPY COL Copy counter (COLOR) Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the
SINGLE COLOR Single color scan mode and the image send.
2COLOR 2-color Section
Operation/Procedure
24-9 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Data clear 3) Press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter The target counter is cleared.
and the self print mode print counter.
Division Item/Display Content
Section
Network NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read
Operation/Procedure scanner quantity counter (B/W scan job)
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read
quantity counter (COLOR scan job)
NET SCN ORG_2CL Network scanner document read
3) Press [YES] key. quantity counter (2-color scan job)
The target counter is cleared. NET SCN ORG_SGL Network scanner document read
quantity counter (single color scan
PRINT BW Print counter (B/W) job)
PRINT COL Print counter (COLOR) Internet INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output
PRINT (2COL) Print counter (2-colors) Fax OUTPUT
PRINT (3COL) Print counter (3-colors) INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending page
PRINT (SGL_COL) Print counter (Single color) SEND OUTPUT
OTHER BW Other counter (B/W) INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
OTHER COL Other counter (COLOR) RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX send
SEND
E-mail MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
Division Item/Display Content 25-2
FTP FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send
Purpose Setting
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR density when replacing developer. (Auto-
scan job) matic adjustment)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
(COLOR)
SCAN TO HDD_2CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity
Operation/Procedure
(2-COLOR) 1) Select a color to be adjusted with the touch panel.
SCAN TO HDD_SGL SCAN TO HDD record quantity 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(SINGLE color)
The developing motor rotates for 1 min 30 sec, and the toner den-
sity sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level
is displayed.
24-35 After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con-
Purpose Data clear
trol level.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the toner cartridge use status
data. NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
Section
error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the ref-
Operation/Procedure erence toner density level is not set normally.
NOTE: Do not execute this simulation except when new developer
2) Press [YES] key. is supplied. If it is executed in other cases, undertoner or
The toner cartridge use status data (SIM22-14) are cleared. overtone may occur, causing a trouble.
Display Default
Division Item/Display
range value
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_L_K 1 - 255 128
25 adjustment value in AT DEVE ADJ_L_C 1 - 255 128
the low speed process AT DEVE ADJ_L_M 1 - 255 128
mode AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y 1 - 255 128
25-1
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_M_K 1 - 255 128
Purpose Operation test/check adjustment value in AT DEVE ADJ_M_C 1 - 255 128
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel- the medium speed AT DEVE ADJ_M_M 1 - 255 128
oping section. process mode AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y 1 - 255 128
Section Process (Developing section) Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_L_K 1 - 255 128
control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_L_C 1 - 255 128
Operation/Procedure
the low speed process AT DEVE VO_L_M 1 - 255 128
1) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] keys. mode AT DEVE VO_L_Y 1 - 255 128
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_M_K 1 - 255 128
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3 control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_M_C 1 - 255 128
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis- the medium speed AT DEVE VO_M_M 1 - 255 128
played. process mode AT DEVE VO_M_Y 1 - 255 128
TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K) Display during execution of the simulation
TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C) Item/Display Content
TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M) TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K)
TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y) TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C)
TSG_K Toner density sensor control voltage level (K) TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M)
TSG_C Toner density sensor control voltage level (C) TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y)
TSG_M Toner density sensor control voltage level (M) TSG_K Toner density sensor control voltage level (K)
TSG_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level (Y) TSG_C Toner density sensor control voltage level (C)
TSG_M Toner density sensor control voltage level (M)
LOW Process speed: Low speed TSG_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level (Y)
MIDDLE Process speed: Medium speed
Error content
NOTE: The toner cartridge must be removed before executing this
Display Error name Error content
simulation.
EE-EL EL abnormality The sensor output level is less than 77, or
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridge the control voltage exceeds 207.
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing EE-EU EU abnormality The sensor output level exceeds 177, or the
unit, resulting in over toner and a trouble. control voltage is less than 52.
EE-EC EC abnormality The sensor output level is outside of 128 ±
10.
25-4
26
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the
26-1
toner supply quantity. (Not used in the mar-
ket.) Purpose Setting
Section Process Function (Purpose) Used to set Yes/No of installation of the
right paper exit tray.
Operation/Procedure
The operation data of the toner supply quantity are displayed. Section Paper exit
Operation/Procedure
Display 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
range
YLD_CNT_FB Toner supply FB rate by the yield count 50 - 200
DELTA_DVB Delta DVB -500 - 500 This setting is required to use the right paper exit tray unit.
(Process control DVB - Target DVB)
IDL_DVB Target DVB 100 - 600
A 0 YES Paper exit tray: YES
PROCON_DVB Process control DVB 100 - 600
1 NO Paper exit tray: NO
DV_LIFE Developer life area 1 - 32
COVERAGE_ Average print rate area 1 - 29
AREA
ENV_AREA Environment area 1 - 16
26-2
MULTI_TIME Toner supply drive time area 1-8
(Specified by the DV motor rotation time) Purpose Setting
PRO_FB_CNT No. of remaining times of toner supply for 0 - 65535 Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the large
the process control result
capacity tray (Tandem) and the large
PRO_FB_INT Interval of toner supply for the process 0 - 65535
capacity desk (LCC). (When the paper size
control result
is changed, this simulation must be exe-
PRO_FB_RATIO Correction rate of one-time toner supply -10 - 10
cuted to change the paper size in software.)
for the process control result
RECV_MODE_ No. of times of recovery mode (+) 0 - 65535 Section Paper feed
CNT(+) (No. of times of compulsory toner supply) Operation/Procedure
RECV_MODE_ No. of times of recovery mode (-) 0 - 65535
Select a paper size and a weight system to be changed.
CNT(-) (No. of times of compulsory printing of
one-color background image)
Item Setting value Content
Tray 3(Tandem) 0 8.5 x 11
1 A4
2 B5
25-5
LCC 0 8.5 x 11
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check 1 A4
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density correction 2 B5
data. (Not used in the market.) G/LBS SET 0 GRAM
Section Process 1 LBS
Operation/Procedure
Setting value
The toner density correction data are displayed. Destination
Tandem LCC G/LBS SET
Display U.S.A 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
Display Content CANADA 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
range
TCS_B_AVE. Average value of the toner sensor output 0 - 255 INCH 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
block JAPAN B5 A4 GRAM
TSG_HUM Current TSG environment correction value -127 - 127 AB_B A4 A4 GRAM
(Medium speed) EUROPE A4 A4 GRAM
TSG_COV Current TSG print ratio correction value -127 - 127 U.K. A4 A4 GRAM
(Medium speed) AUS. A4 A4 GRAM
TSG_LIFE Current TSG developer life correction value -127 - 127 AB_A A4 A4 GRAM
(Medium speed) CHINA A4 A4 GRAM
TSG_ENV Current TSG accumulated drive area -127 - 127
correction value (Medium speed)
DELTA_TSG Control voltage correction value -255 - 255
TSG_REF Control voltage reference value (Medium 0 - 255
speed)
TSG_TOTAL Current applying TSG (Medium speed) 0 - 255
TCS_AVE. Toner sensor output average value 0 - 255
TN_EMP_W Number of times of detecting the toner empty 0 - 255
threshold value w or above
TN_EMP_X Number of times of detecting the toner empty 0 - 255
threshold value x or above
TN_EMP_Y Number of times of detecting the toner empty 0 - 255
threshold value y or above
26-3 Default
value
Purpose Setting COUNTUP FUSER_IN Mode in which the detection EXIT_
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor. TIMING timing of the paper lead OUT
(Setting must be made according to the edge by the sensor after the
auditor use conditions.) paper passes the fusing
section is used as the
Section Auditor money charging timing.
Operation/Procedure FUSER_OUT Mode in which the detection
timing of the paper rear
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
edge by the sensor after the
paper passes the fusing
Default
Item/Display Content section is used as the
value
money charging timing.
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10
EXIT_OUT Mode in which the detection
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation.
timing of the paper rear
OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
edge by the paper exit
AUDITOR vendor is used.
sensor of the right paper
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode exit tray or of the after
(Only the copy mode can process unit is used as the
be controlled.) money charging timing.
P VENDOR3 Vendor mode in which
signals for the intercard (*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC.
connected to the PCU are (*2) Details of the vendor mode
used for communication in
parallel I/F. Details of the vendor mode
P OTHER Mode for an external Completion Insufficient money during Completion
auditor connected to the of the copy job of the
SCU. specified specified
VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC BW/Color Color
quantity. quantity.
(*1) (no money (Money
(Money (No money
VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job remaining) remaining)
remaining) remaining)
(MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
document filing print MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3
OFF No support for the auditor in
document filing print Operation 1:
PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
performed in the duplex which can be changed in the system setting.
print mode.
If the remaining money Operation 2:
expires during continuous Auto clear is not made.
printing, the sheets in the Operation 3:
machine are discharged The display is shifted to the initial screen.
without being printed on the
back surfaces.
OFF Continuous printing is not
performed in the duplex 26-5
print mode. (The remaining Purpose Setting
amount is checked for
printing every surface in all Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total
the printing process.) counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/
If the remaining money 11x17 size)
expires during printing, the
Section
sheet is discharged without
printing on the back Operation/Procedure
surface. 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE 2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Item/Display Content Default value

A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 1
B TOTAL (COL) Total counter (Color) (Japan)
2
(Except Japan)
C MAINTE (B/W) Maintenance counter (B/W) 2
D MAINTE (COL) Maintenance counter (Color)
E DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)
F DEV (COL) Developer counter (Color)
26-6 26-8
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed Function (Purpose) Counter mode setting (Long scale)
magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination. Section
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a setting item with the scroll key.
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1 = 1 count up, 2 = 2 count up
The selected set content is saved. 3) Press [OK] key.
U.S.A. United States of America Item/Display Content Setting Default Default

CANADA Canada range value value
INCH Inch series, other destinations (Taiwan)
JAPAN Japan TOTAL(B/W)
Long scale (Small)
AB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinations A LONG 1 - 10 3 2
Total counter (B/W)
EUROPE Europe SIZE(S)
U.K. United Kingdom TOTAL(COL) Long scale (Small)
AUS. Australia B LONG Total counter 1 - 10 3 2
SIZE(S) (Color)
AB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinations
MAINTE(B/ Long scale (Small)
CHINA China
C W) LONG Maintenance 1 - 10 3 2
SIZE(S) counter (B/W)
MAINTE(COL Long scale (Small)
D ) LONG Maintenance 1 - 10 3 2
26-7 SIZE(S) counter (Color)
Purpose Setting DEV(B/W) Long scale (Small)
E LONG Developer counter 1 - 10 3 2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine ID.
SIZE(S) (B/W)
Section DEV(COL) Long scale (Small)
Operation/Procedure F LONG Developer counter 1 - 10 3 2
1) Enter the machine ID with the 10-key. SIZE(S) (color)
TOTAL(B/W)
Max. 30 digits of numerals and alphabetical characters can be Long scale (Large)
G LONG 1 - 10 5 2
inputted. Total counter (B/W)
SIZE(L)
To select a desired character, press the 10-key repeatedly. TOTAL(COL) Long scale (Large)
Refer to the following list and enter characters. H LONG Total counter 1 - 10 5 2
SIZE(L) (Color)
Touch the "CONFIRM" section every time a character is input-
MAINTE(B/ Long scale (Large)
ted. I W) LONG Maintenance 1 - 10 5 2
To modify an inputted character, delete it with "CLEAR" key SIZE(L) counter (B/W)
and enter the correct character. MAINTE(COL Long scale (Large)
2) Press [SET] key to set the contents entered in procedure 1). J ) LONG Maintenance 1 - 10 5 2
SIZE(L) counter (Color)
NOTE:
DEV(B/W) Long scale (Large)
The machine ID can be set also by the Web Page service mode K LONG Developer counter 1 - 10 5 2
function. SIZE(L) (B/W)
Conventionally, the machine ID has been set by the Web Page DEV(COL) Long scale (Large)
function. In this mode, this function is made available in the simula- L LONG Developer counter 1 - 10 5 2
SIZE(L) (color)
tion mode.
Number of times of key input

10-key
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 1 - - - - - - - - - 26-10
2 A B C a b c 2 - - - Purpose Setting
3 D E F d e f 3 - - - Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network
4 G H I g h i 4 - - - scanner.
5 J K L j k l 5 - - -
Section
6 M N O m n o 6 - - -
7 P Q R S p q r s 7 - Operation/Procedure
8 T U V t u v 8 - - - 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
9 W X Y Z w x y z 9 - 2) Press [OK] key.
0 0 - - - - - - - - -
TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting

(0: YES 1: NO) 1 Trial mode cancel (Default)
26-18 26-30
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre-
save mode operation. sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
(For the Japan and the UK versions.) standards). (For slow start to drive the fus-
Section ing heater lamp)
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
0 Control allowed
The set value in step 2) is saved. 1 Control inhibited

Setting Default
NOTE
2) Press [OK] key.
range value
A COPY 0 Copy toner 0-3 0
(0: OFF save mode * Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due
1: SV1 NOT to the power frequency, etc.
2: SV2 available
3: SV3) 1 Copy toner 1: Toner U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported)
save mode 1 save LOW CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported)
2 Copy toner INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported)
save mode 2 JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported)
3 Copy toner 3: Toner AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)
save mode 3 save HIGH
B PRINTER 0 Printer toner 0-3 0
(0: OFF save mode
1: SV1 NOT 26-32
2: SV2 available
Purpose Setting
3: SV3) 1 Printer toner 1: Toner
save mode 1 save LOW Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the fusing
2 Printer toner cleaning operation.
save mode 2 Section Fusing
3 Printer toner 3: Toner
Operation/Procedure
save mode 3 save HIGH
C COPY TS 0 Setting of 0-1 Linked 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
DISPLAY copy toner with the Enable/Disable of the user fusing cleaning function is set.
(0: YES save is set value
2) Press [OK] key.
1: NO) displayed. of
1 Setting of SIM26-6.
Default
copy toner Item/Display Content Setting range
value
save is not
A CLEANING User fusing cleaning 0 YES 1 (NO)
displayed.
PRINT SET function is Enable.
D PRINTER 0 Setting of 0-1 Linked
User fusing cleaning 1 NO
TS printer toner with the
function is Disable.
DISPLAY save is set value
(0:YES displayed. of
1:NO) 1 Setting of SIM26-6.
printer toner
save is not
26-35
displayed. Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4
Destination Default value C Default value D trouble history when a same trouble
U.S.A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) occurred repeatedly. There are two display
CANADA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) modes: display as one trouble and display
INCH 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) as several series of troubles.
JAPAN 1 (Not Displayed) 0 (Displayed) Section
AB_B 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
Operation/Procedure
EUROPE 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
U.K. 1 (Not Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
AUS. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
0 Only once display. (Default value)
AB_A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
1 Any time display.
CHINA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
2) Press [OK] key.
26-38 26-50
Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the Function (Purpose) Used to set functions.
maintenance life is reached. Section
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. panel.
2) Press [OK] key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The set value in step 1) is saved. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Default Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
value value
A MAINTENANCE 0 Setting of Print Continue/ 0 A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer to
LIFE OVER Stop when the maintenance 1 BW reverse copy Enable *1
(0: CONTINUE life is over (Print Continue) B COLOR MODE 2-color/Single color copy mode Refer to
1: STOP) 1 Setting of Print Continue/ Enable/Disable setting *1/*2
Stop when the maintenance C FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0
life is over (Print Stop) FUNCTION The number of paper exit is Refer to
B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 1 limited. *3
(0: CONTINUE when the fusing web is end 1 Finisher special paper
1: STOP) (Print Continue) The number of paper exit is
1 Continue/Stop setting of print not limited.
when the fusing web is end D COLOR MODE 0 All colors and monochrome Refer to
(Print Stop) (PRINTER) counters are displayed. *1
1 All are displayed except for
the 3-color print counter.
2 Monochrome and full color
26-41 print counters are displayed.
Purpose Setting E FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0
COLOR ON during paper feed
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi-
1 Paper feed tray color display
cation ratio automatic select function (AMS) OFF during paper feed
in the center binding mode. F LONG SIZE PRINT 0 Enable 0
Section 1 Disable
Operation/Procedure G WIRELESS SET 0 Disables wireless LAN 0
setting.
1 Enables wireless LAN
setting.
0 AMS Disable
1 AMS Enable (*1) Default values for each destination of item A/B/D
2) Press [OK] key.
Destination Item A Item B Item D
The set value in step 1) is saved. U.S.A 1 0 2
<Default value of each destination> CANADA 1 0 2
INCH 1 0 2
U.S.A 0 (Disable) EUROPE 1 (Enable)
JAPAN 1 7 2
CANADA 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable)
AB_B 1 0 2
INCH 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable)
EUROPE 1 0 2
JAPAN 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable)
U.K. 0 0 2
AB_B 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable)
AUS. 1 0 2
AB_A 1 0 2
CHINA 1 0 2
26-49 (*2) Item B: COLOR MODE set value (OFF: Displayed/ON: Not dis-
Purpose Setting played)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards Mode 2-Color/Single
mode. Set value
Single 2-color Counter
Section 0 OFF OFF OFF
Operation/Procedure 1 OFF ON OFF
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW) 2 ON OFF OFF
3 ON ON OFF
Item/Setting value Content Default value 4 OFF OFF ON
LOW Postcard copy speed LOW LOW 5 OFF ON ON
HIGH Postcard copy speed HIGH 6 ON OFF ON
7 ON ON ON
(*3)
26-52
Target Target paper setting Purpose Setting
paper 0 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
Inner Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1," (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
finisher envelope 10 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
or not.
discharged continuously. When, stopped when
however, different kinds of the paper exit Section
sheets are mixed and tray is full or Operation/Procedure
discharged and 10 or less when 250
sheets of a kind are sheets
continuously discharged, the (35.5mm thick)
operation is stopped by the are discharged. 0 Count up
paper exit tray full detection. 1 No count up
Label The operation is stopped when
2) Press [OK] key.
sheet, 100 sheets of a same kind are
tab sheet, discharged continuously. When, The set value in step 1) is saved.
OHP however, different kinds of
sheets are mixed and Destination Default
discharged and 100 or less U.S.A 0 (Counted)
sheets of a kind are CANADA 0 (Counted)
continuously discharged, the INCH 0 (Counted)
operation is stopped by the JAPAN 1 (Not counted)
paper exit tray full detection.
AB_B 0 (Counted)
Saddle Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1,"
EUROPE 0 (Counted)
stitch envelope 30 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
U.K. 0 (Counted)
finisher discharged continuously. When, stopped when
however, different kinds of the paper exit AUS. 1 (Not counted)
sheets are mixed and tray is full or AB_A 0 (Counted)
discharged and 30 or less when 500 CHINA 0 (Counted)
sheets of a kind are sheets (67mm
continuously discharged, the thick) are
operation is stopped by the discharged.
paper exit tray full detection. 26-53
Label The operation is stopped when
Purpose Setting
sheet, 100 sheets of a same kind are
tab sheet, discharged continuously. When, Function (Purpose) User auto color calibration (color balance
OHP however, different kinds of adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting.
sheets are mixed and
Section
discharged and 100 or less
sheets of a kind are Operation/Procedure
continuously discharged, the 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
operation is stopped by the
paper exit tray full detection. Setting Default
range value
A COPY Copy Allow 1 1
(1:YES 0:NO) mode Inhibit 0
26-51 B PRINTER Printer Allow 1 1
Purpose Setting (1:YES 0:NO) mode Inhibit 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the serial 2) Press [OK] key.
port operation. (For PCI)
Section
Operation/Procedure
When the PCI is installed, setting is made to 1 or 2.
2) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
range value
A PCI Serial port PCI mode OFF 0 0
SETTING (-> For connecting the serial (Serial port
port vendor) PCI mode
Serial port PCI mode ON 1 OFF)
(JOB status LED: MODE1)
Serial port PCI mode ON 2
(JOB status LED: MODE2)
MODE1: Red LED is light/blink/OFF, MODE2: Red LED always

OFF
NOTE: When "PCI SETTING" is changed from "0" to "1" or "2," if
SIM26-03 "OUTSIDE AUDITOR" is set to "S_VENDOR,"
"OUTSIDE AUDITOR" is changed to "NONE."
26-65 Setting Default
range value
Purpose Setting B REMAINING 5% 0 Toner 0-9 4
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode. TONER preparation at
LEVEL remaining toner
Section level of 5%
Operation/Procedure 10% 1 Toner
Use the touch key to set. preparation at
remaining toner
Set Setting Default level of 10%
Item Content NOTE
value range value 15% 2 Toner
LIMIT 30 Number of 30 or 50 50 A4, A4R, B5, preparation at
SHEETS sheets of 8.5" x 11", remaining toner
stapling: 8.5" x 11"R, level of 15%
Max. 30 16K, 16KR 20% 3 Toner
50 Number of For saddle preparation at
sheets of stitch finisher remaining toner
stapling: level of 20%
Max. 50 25% 4 Toner
LIMIT ON Number of ON or ON preparation at
COPIES sets of OFF remaining toner
Limited 30% 5 Toner
OFF Number of preparation at
sets of remaining toner
Not Limited 35% 6 Toner
LIMIT 25 Number of 25 or 30 25 A3, B4, preparation at
SHEETS sheets of 11" x 17", remaining toner
(L) stapling: 8.5" x 14", level of 35%
Max. 25 8.5" x 13.5", 40% 7 Toner
30 Number of 8.5" x 13.4", preparation at
sheets of 8.5" x 13", 8K remaining toner
stapling: For saddle level of 40%
Max. 30 stitch finisher 45% 8 Toner
SADDLE ON Number of ON or ON For saddle preparation at
COPIES sets loaded in OFF stitch finisher remaining toner
the saddle level of 45%
staple: Limited 50% 9 Toner
OFF Number of preparation at
sets loaded in remaining toner
the saddle level of 50%
staple: C TONER NEAR 0 The toner near 0-1 List of
Not Limited END (0:YES 1:NO) end message is Default
displayed. values and
* The limit for loading when folding paper is linked with SADDLE 1 The toner near set values
COPIES. end message is for each
not displayed. destination
D TONER END 1 Operation 1-3
Enable in
26-69 TONER END
Purpose Setting 2 Operation
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for STOP in
TONER END
toner near end.
3 Operation
Section STOP in
Operation/Procedure TONER END
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. E TONER END Setting of the 1-3 1
COUNT number of copy/print/
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. FAX outputs Enable
3) Press [OK] key. after TONER NEAR
The set value in step 2 is saved. END.
F TONER E-MAIL 0 Low status send 0-1 1
Setting Default ALERT of E-mail alert
Item/Display Content (When the toner
range value
preparation
A TONER 0 The toner 0-1 List of
message is
PREPARATION preparation Default
displayed) (in
(0:YES 1:NO) message is values and
near near toner
displayed. set values
end)
1 The toner for each
destination 1 Low status send
preparation
of E-mail alert
message is not
(near toner end)
displayed.
Item E (TONER END COUNT) setting value and printable quan- B: The toner remaining quantity at which the toner preparation
tity message is displayed.
Setting value Printable quantity at A4/5% equivalent conversion C: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
1 0 when the toner near end status is reached.
2 25 D: Enable/Disable setting of the machine operation when the toner
3 50 end status is reached.
E: Number of allowable copy/print/FAX when the toner near end
<List of Default values and set values for each destination> message is displayed. (Range: 0 - 50 sheets)
Setting value The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the
Enable/ assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 5%.
Toner Toner Toner near Disable of (The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper
Destination
preparation preparation end print job size and the print ratio.)
message time message continuation
at toner end NOTE: When item A is set to "0" and item E is properly set, printing
U.S.A 0 4 (Displayed 0 2 can be made after toner near end. However, improper phe-
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) (Print nomena such as insufficient density, thin spots, or improper
toner operation color balance may result depending on the using condi-
remaining stopped) tions. When item E is set to "1" printing is disabled after
quantity is toner near end. In this case, toner end display is made in
25%.)
the toner near end status, and copy/print/FAX outputs are
CANADA 0 4 (Displayed 0
disabled.
(Displayed) when the (Displayed)
toner
remaining
quantity is 26-71
25%.)
Purpose Setting
INCH 0 4 (Displayed 0
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the web
toner browsing function.
remaining
Section
quantity is
25%.) Operation/Procedure
JAPAN 0 4 (Displayed 1 (Not 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
(Displayed) when the Displayed) 2) Press [OK] key.
toner
remaining
Setting Default
quantity is Item/Display Content
range value
25%.)
A WEB 0 Web browsing trial 0-1 1
AB_B 0 4 (Displayed 0
BROWSING mode setting
(Displayed) when the (Displayed)
TRIAL MODE 1 Web browsing trial
toner
(0: YES 1: NO) mode canceling
remaining
quantity is
25%.)
EUROPE 0 4 (Displayed 0
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) 26-73
toner Purpose Setting
remaining
quantity is
Function (Purpose) Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide
25%.) copy mode image loss (shade delete quan-
U.K. 0 4 (Displayed 0 tity) adjustment
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) Section
toner
Operation/Procedure
remaining
quantity is 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
25%.) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
AUS. 0 4 (Displayed 0 2 3) Press [OK] key.
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) (Print
toner operation When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
remaining stopped) (shade delete quantity) is increased.
quantity is
25%.) Setting
Item/Display Content Default value
AB_A 0 4 (Displayed 0 range
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
toner SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment
remaining (M) (shade delete amount:
quantity is quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
25%.) B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
CHINA 0 4 (Displayed 0 1 SHADOW ADJ loss quantity (shade (Adjustment
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) (Print (S) delete quantity) amount:
toner operation adjustment 0.1mm/step)
remaining continued)
quantity is
25%.)
(Contents of set items)

A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display.
26-74 27-2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode. Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
Section ber and the HOST server telephone num-
ber. (FSS function)
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Section
2) Press [OK] key. Operation/Procedure

1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
Setting Default [USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
range value 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
A OSA TRIAL MODE 0 Used to set the 0-1 1
3) Press [SET] key.
(0: YES 1: NO) OSA trial mode.
1 OSA trial mode is The set value in step 2) is saved.
canceled.
USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)
SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
- If the connection process is not completed
26-78 normally when registering the FSS, calling
to the HOST may be continuously made
Purpose Setting
every time when the power is turned ON
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote (from OFF) or rebooted.
operation panel. In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the
Section HOST.
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits)
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW". 27-4
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key Purpose Setting
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
2) Press [SET] key. auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
26-79
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display 3) Press [OK] key.
of user data delete result.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The value for the display operation specification after comple-
tion of user data delete is set.
2) Press [OK] key.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A DISP SET User data delete result YES 1 0 (NO)
pop-up display ON
User data delete result NO 0
pop-up display OFF
27
27-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communica-
tion error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
0 Not detection
1 Detection
2) Press [OK] key.

Default
Item/Display Content Setting range Remarks
value
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send in NE-B mode 0-3 0 1
NEB2 Send/Receive in NE-B mode 1
NFB1 Exclusive for send in NE-F mode 2 For convenience
stores
NFB2 Send/Receive in NE-F mode 3 For convenience
stores
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 0: No retry
C TIMER(MINUTE)_BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 0: No retry
E TIMER(MINUTE)_ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
F FAX RETRY Resend number setting when FAX initial connection 0 - 15 2 Unit: Number of times
G TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto Empty 0 - 11 0 11
TIMING(K) NEAR_END send timing setting Near end 1
5% (K) 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
H TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto Empty 0 - 11 0 11
TIMING(C) NEAR_END send timing setting Near end 1
5% (C) 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
I TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto Empty 0 - 11 0 11
TIMING(M) NEAR_END send timing setting Near end 1
5% (M) 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
J TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto Empty 0 - 11 0 11
TIMING(Y) NEAR_END send timing setting Near end 1
5% (Y) 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
K TEMP HISTORY CYCLE Frequency of acquiring the temperature and humidity history 1 - 1440 60 Unit: min.
L LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU) Log output capacity 0 - 50 30 Unit: [KB]
M TONER ORDER TIMING CONTROL Toner order timing Toner order alert send at the fixed 0-1 0 0
control toner remaining quantity
Toner under alert send when 1
presuming the toner consumption
N TONER ORDER DELIVERY Toner order delivery setting 0-1 0(OFF) 0
SETTING 1(ON)
O TONER ORDER DELIVERY Toner order delivery setting delivery threshold setting 1 - 15 3 Unit: DATE
INTERVAL
27-5 27-9
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func- Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record-
tion allows the host computer to check the ing YES/NO threshold value and shading
machine tag No.) (FSS function) gain adjustment retry number.
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM) (FSS function)
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”. 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. 3) Press [OK] key.
2) Press [SET] key. The set value in step 2) is saved.
Setting Default
range value
27-6 A FEED TIME1 Threshold value of paper 0 - 100 50(%)
Purpose Setting transport time between
sensors (Machine)
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call.
B FEED TIME2 Threshold value of paper 0 - 100 50(%)
(FSS function)
transport time between
Section sensors (SPF)
Operation/Procedure C GAIN Threshold value of the 0 - 20 11
ADJUSTMENT gain adjustment retry (TIMES)
RETRY number
D JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert 1 - 100 10
0 Allow (Default)
judgment threshold value (TIMES)
1 Inhibit
(Alert judgment threshold
2) Press [OK] key. value for continuous
JAM's) (Setting of the
The set value in step 1) is saved. number of JAM's
continuously made at
which it is judged as an
alert.)
27-7
E JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert 0 - 99 30
Purpose Setting PERIOD period setting (DAYS)
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert callout.
* Items A, B: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;
(FSS function)
100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper.
Section
* Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of
Operation/Procedure retry is actually not registered.
3) Press [OK] key. 27-10
The set value in step 2) is saved. Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history
Setting Default
Item/Display Content information. (FSS function)
range value
A FUNCTION FSS function enable 0 1 (NO) Section
(0:YES 1:NO) FSS function disable 1 Operation/Procedure
B ALERT Alert call enable 0 0 (YES)
(0:YES 1:NO) Alert call disable 1
2) Press [YES] key.
C CONNECTION FAX connection enable 0 0 (FAX)
(0: FAX Not used. 1 The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
1: No Use HTTP connection enable 2
2: HTTP) Target history Serial communication retry history
High density process control error history
Halftone process control error history
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert
Automatic registration adjustment error history
Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached.
Scanner gain adjustment retry history
Service call When pressing Service call.
DSPF gain adjustment retry history (DSPF model only)
Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is
reached. Paper transport time between sensors
Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for
a new product)
Alert resend
Except DSPF
27-11
Display Item
Purpose Others Occurrence date Retry Content
Item name
Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication (Display) number
retry number and the scanner gain adjust- LSU1 99/99/99 8 digits Serial
ment retry number history. (FSS function) 99:99:99 communication
LSU2 99/99/99 8 digits retry number history
Section 99:99:99 display
Operation/Procedure DESK1 99/99/99 8 digits
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner 99:99:99
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed. DESK2 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99
DSPF FINISHER1 99/99/99 8 digits
Display Item 99:99:99
Occurrence date Retry Content FINISHER2 99/99/99 8 digits
Item name 99:99:99
(Display) number
LSU1 99/99/99 8 digits Serial SCAN GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 8 digits Scanner gain
99:99:99 communication 99:99:99 adjustment retry
retry number history SCAN GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 8 digits history
LSU2 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99 display 99:99:99
DESK1 99/99/99 8 digits SCAN GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99 99:99:99
DESK2 99/99/99 8 digits SCAN GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99 99:99:99
FINISHER1 99/99/99 8 digits SCAN GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99 99:99:99
FINISHER2 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99
DSPF1 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99 27-12
DSPF2 99/99/99 8 digits Purpose Others
99:99:99
Function (Purpose) Used to check the high density, halftone
SCAN GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 8 digits Scanner gain
99:99:99 adjustment retry process control and the automatic registra-
SCAN GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 8 digits history tion adjustment error history. (FSS Func-
99:99:99 tion)
SCAN GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 8 digits Section
99:99:99
Operation/Procedure
SCAN GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99 The high density, halftone process control and the automatic regis-
SCAN GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 8 digits tration adjustment error history is displayed.
99:99:99
HV_ERR1 High density process control error history 1
DSPF GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 8 digits DSPF gain
99:99:99 adjustment retry HV_ERR2 High density process control error history 2
DSPF GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 8 digits history HV_ERR3 High density process control error history 3
99:99:99 HV_ERR4 High density process control error history 4
DSPF GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 8 digits HV_ERR5 High density process control error history 5
99:99:99 H_TONE ERR1 Halftone process control error history 1
DSPF GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 8 digits H_TONE ERR2 Halftone process control error history 2
DSPF GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 8 digits H_TONE ERR4 Halftone process control error history 4
AUTO REG ADJ1 Automatic registration adjustment error history 1
27-13
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with scroll key.
Code between Reference

Item/Display Content Occurrence date Passing time
sensors passing time
Main FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
unit hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
DSPF/ FEED TIME1 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
RSPF sensors 1 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME2 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 2 hour: min.: sec.
27-14 27-15
Purpose Setting Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection Function (Purpose) Used to display the FSS connection status.
test mode. Section
Operation/Procedure The FSS operating status is displayed.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
0 Disable (Default) value
1 Enable FSS CONNECTION Used to display the 0 Not 0
FSS connection operated
2) Press [OK] key. status. 1 Operated
27-16 Item/ Setting Default
Content NOTE
Display range value
Purpose Setting A3: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS alert send. FIRST number setting (A3) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time
Section sheets)
Operation/Procedure A4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. FIRST number setting (A4) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time
The value for the FSS alert operation specification is set.
sheets)
2) Press [OK] key. B4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
FIRST number setting (B4) 10000 sheets for the
Setting Default (Number of used first time
range value sheets)
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance Alert send 0 0 B5: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
ALERT alert send Enable FIRST number setting (B5) 10000 sheets for the
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1 (Number of used first time
Disable sheets)
B TONER Toner order Alert send 0 0
ORDER ALERT alert send Enable
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1
Disable 27-18
C TONER CTRG Toner Alert send 0 0
Purpose Data clear
ALERT cartridge Enable
(0:YES 1:NO) replacement Alert send 1 Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry
alert send Disable counter.
Enable setting
Section
D JAM ALERT Continuous Alert send 0 0
(0:YES 1:NO) JAM alert Enable Operation/Procedure
send Enable Alert send 1 1) Select an item to be cleared.
setting Disable 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
E TROUBLE Trouble alert Alert send 0 0
3) Press [YES] key.
ALERT send Enable Enable
(0:YES 1:NO) setting Alert send 1 The target counter is cleared.
Disable
F PAPER ORDER Paper order Alert send 0 0
ALERT alert send Enable TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed retry counter
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1 TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed retry counter
Disable TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed retry counter
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed retry counter
MFT Manual paper feed retry counter
LCC LCC paper feed retry counter
27-17
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
Section 30
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set. 30-1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Purpose Operation test/check
The value for the FSS paper order alert operation specification Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
is set. sors and the detectors in other than the
3) Press [SET] key. paper feed section and the control circuits.
Item/ Setting Default

Section
Content NOTE
Display range value Operation/Procedure
PAPER Setting of paper kind for 0-2 0 0: Standard The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
TYPE paper order alert paper and played.
SET recycled paper
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
1: Standard
paper only
lighted.
2: Recycled
PPD1 Registration pre-detection
paper only
PPD2 Registration detection
A3 Paper order number 500 - 1250 Unit: No. of
POD1 Fusing rear detection
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
sheets] (A3) POD2 Paper exit detection
A4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of POD3 Right tray paper exit detection
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box TFD2 Paper exit full detection
sheets] (A4) TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection
B4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of SHPOS Shifter home detection
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box DSW_R Right door open/close detection
sheets] (B4) DSW_C Tray 1 transport cover open/close detection
B5 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of DSW_F Front cover open/close detection
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box DHPD_K BK phase detection
sheets] (B5) DHPD_C C phase detection
DHPD_M M phase detection 7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
DHPD_Y Y phase detection 8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1TNFD Waste toner full detection The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
HLPCD Fusing roller pressure release detection
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
WEBEND Web end detection
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
PRTPD Right paper exit tray paper empty detection
1TUD_CL Primary transfer belt separation CL detection MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width
1TUD_K Primary transfer belt separation BK detection P1(A4)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
----- Not used. P2(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width
30-2
Purpose Operation test/check 40-7
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Purpose Adjustment/Setup
sors and the detectors in the paper feed Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
section and the control circuits. manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
Section Section Paper feed
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
played.
3) Press [OK] key.
lighted.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection Default
value
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection
A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 241
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
B P1 POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4) 231
CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1
C P2 POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R) 140
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 19
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining detection
41
CSS22 Tray 2 rear edge detection 2 41-1
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
MPLD Manual feed paper length detection ment size sensor and the control circuit.
MTOP1 Manual feed tray retraction detection Section
MTOP2 Manual feed tray extension detection Operation/Procedure
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
lighted.
40 OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display
Close: Highlighted
40-2 PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
sensor status Document present: Highlighted
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
adjustment.
Section Paper feed 41-2
Operation/Procedure Purpose Adjustment
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX). Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. detection level.
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized. Section
3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4). Operation/Procedure
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without
place a document on the document table.
The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized.
The sensor level without document is recognized.
5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R).
2) Set A3 (11” x 17") paper on the document table, and press
[EXECUTE] key.
The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed.
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed.
41-3 Item/Display Content Detection level range
Purpose Operation test/check OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close)
PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
ment size sensor and the control circuit.
Section PD4 Document detection 4 0 - 255
Operation/Procedure PD5 Document detection 5 0 - 255
The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document PD6 Document detection 6 0 - 255
sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time. PD7 Document detection 7 0 - 255
The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
43
43-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the setting value to be set with scroll keys.
Display Content Setting range * (Button display) Default value

-10
-5
Used to change the fusing temperature setting of
PLAIN PAP&WUP&RDY GR 0 0
plain paper, WUP, and Ready series.
+5
+10
-10
-5
HEAVY PAPER GR 0 0
heavy paper series.
+5
+10
-10
-5
Used to change the fusing temperature setting of thin
THIN PAPER GR 0 0
paper series.
+5
+10
-10
-5
RECYCLED PAPER GR 0 0
recycled paper series.
+5
+10
-10
-5
GLOSS PAPER GR 0 0
gloss paper series.
+5
+10
-10
-5
ENV PAPER GR 0 0
envelope series.
+5
+10
0
1
PAP CURL IMPROVEMENT Used to improve the curl of the paper. 2 0
3
4
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
43-2
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Operation setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the setting value to be set with scroll keys.
Item/Display Content Setting Default value (SW A) Default value (SW B)

range 41cpm/51cpm 41cpm/51cpm
Group Group Group Group Group Group
A B C A B C
WARMUP FUMON
A Fusing motor previous rotation start TH_US set value 30 - 200 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30
HL_US T
B WARMUP FUMOFF Fusing motor previous rotation complete time 0 - 255 20/20 20/20 20/20 20/20 20/20 20/20
C WARMUP END TIME Warm-up complete time 1 - 255 25/27 25/27 25/27 25/27 25/27 25/27
HI_WU_FM_ON_TM FM preliminary rotation start TH_UM when warming up at
D 30 - 200 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30
P alpha degree C or above
Warm-Up completion time when Warm-Up at alpha degree
E HI_WU_END_TIME 0 - 255 25/27 25/27 25/27 25/27 25/27 25/27
C or above
Setting value applying time in warm-up of 120 degree C or
F LO_WARMUP_TIME 0 - 255 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0
below (Timer from Ready completion)
Setting value applying time in warm-up of 120 degree C or
G HI_WARMUP_TIME 0 - 255 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0
above (Timer from Ready completion)
HI_WARMUP_BORD Threshold value alpha to apply the setting value in warm-
H 1 - 119 60/60 60/60 60/60 60/60 60/60 60/60
ER up of alpha degree C or above
JOBEND_FUMON_T
I After-rotation time after completion of a job 0 - 255 5/5 5/5 5/5 5/5 5/5 5/5
IME
125/ 135/ 125/ 135/ 135/
J HL_UM E-STAR TH_UM set value when preheating 30 - 200 135/
135 140 135 140 140
100/ 100/ 100/ 100/
K HL_LM E-STAR TH_LM set value when preheating 30 - 200 90/90 90/90
100 100 100 100
135/ 145/ 145/ 135/ 145/ 145/
L HL_US E-STAR TH_US set value when preheating 30 - 200
145 150 150 145 150 150
145/ 155/ 160/ 155/ 170/
M HL_UM PRE-JOB Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 15/175
155 160 165 165 175
Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) HL_LM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
List of destination groups

Group Destination
Group A JAPAN - - - - -
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH - - -
Group C AB_B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A CHINA
43-20
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99)
3) Press [OK] key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
The set value in step 2) is saved. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_US set value under LL
A WARMUP FUMON HL_US T LL 1 - 99 40
environment
B WARMUP FUMOFF LL Fusing motor prior rotation completion time under LL environment 1 - 99 50
C WARMUP END TIME LL Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL environment 1 - 99 80
Correction value for FM prior rotation start TH_UM in Warm-Up at alpha degreeC
D HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_LL 1 - 99 40
or above under LL environment
Correction value for Warm-Up completion time in Warm-Up at alpha degreeC or
E HI_WU_END_TIME_LL 1 - 99 50
above under LL environment
Correction value of the setting value applying time in warm-up of 120degreeC or
F LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL 1 - 99 50
below under LL environment (Timer from Ready completion)
Correction value of the setting value applying time in warm-up of 120degreeC or
G HI_WARMUP_TIME_LL 1 - 99 50
above under LL environment (Timer from Ready completion)
Correction value of the threshold value alpha to apply the setting value in warm-
H HI_WARMUP_BORDER_LL 1 - 99 50
up of alpha degree C or above under LL environment
Correction value for the after rotation time when completing a job under LL
I JOBEND_FUMON_TIME LL 1 - 99 50
environment
J HL_UM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
K HL_LM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_LM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
L HL_US E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
Correction value for the set value of TH_UM when restoring from preheating
M HL_UM PRE-JOB LL 1 - 99 55
under LL environment
43-21
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
Operation/Procedure 99)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved.

41cpm/51cpm
Group A Group B Group C

A WARMUP FUMON HL_US T HH Fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50/50 50/50 50/50
B WARMUP FUMOFF HH Fusing motor previous rotation complete time 1 - 99 50/50 50/50 50/50
C WARMUP END TIME HH Warm-up complete time 1 - 99 50/50 50/50 50/50
FM preliminary rotation start TH_UM when warming up
D HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP HH 1 - 99 50/50 50/50 50/50
at alpha degree C or above
Warm-Up completion time when Warm-Up at alpha
E HI_WU_END_TIME HH 1 - 99 50/50 50/50 50/50
degree C or above
Correction value for AF - AH application time (timer from
F LO_WARMUP_TIME_HH 1 - 99 50/50 50/50 50/50
Ready complete)
Correction value for AJ - AL application time (timer from
G HI_WARMUP_TIME HH 1 - 99 50/50 50/50 50/50
Ready complete)
41cpm/51cpm
Group A Group B Group C

H HI_WARMUP_BORDER_HH Threshold value alpha to which AN - AP is applied 1 - 99 50/50 50/50 50/50
I JOBEND_FUMON_TIME HH After-rotation time after completion of a job 1 - 99 50/50 50/50 50/50
J HL_UM E-STAR HH TH_UM set value when preheating 1 - 99 45/45 45/45 50/50
K HL_LM E-STAR HH TH_LM set value when preheating 1 - 99 45/45 45/45 50/50
L HL_US E-STAR HH TH_US set value when preheating 1 - 99 45/45 45/45 45/45
M HL_UM PRE-JOB HH Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value 1 - 99 45/45 45/45 50/50
Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) HL_LM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for back surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

Group Destination
43-24
Function (Purpose) Operation setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
3) Press [OK] key. 99)
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Item/Display Content Setting Default value

range 41 cpm 51 cpm
Group Group Group Group Group Group
A B C A B C
A COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool down time (Heavy paper) 1 - 60 5 5 5 5 5 5
B COOL_DOWN_OHP Cool down time (OHP) 1 - 60 10 10 10 10 10 10
COOL_DOWN_ENVELO
C Cool down time (Envelope) 1 - 60 15 15 15 15 15 15
PE
D FUS_MOTOR Fusing web motor operating interval (*1) 3 - 20 10 10 10 10 10 10
Power voltage setting 1: 100V, 2: 110 - 120V, 3:
E POWER_SET 1-3 1 2 3 1 2 3
220V - 240V

Group Destination
2) When cleaning the fusing web is completed, "COMPLETE" is

43-31
displayed.
Fusing web unit
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing
installation Operation Remarks
web cleaning.
detection state
Section Fusing Fusing web unit not Does not operate * During this operation, the
Operation/Procedure installed fusing web cleaning feed
Fusing web unit Operates for the counter is counted up.
installed specified time.
Cleaning the fusing web is performed.
43-35
43-32 Purpose Adjustment and setting
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Fusing nip operation check

Function (Purpose) Used to set various items related to the Section Fusing
forcible operation of web cleaning when job Operation/Procedure
end. 1) Prepare a black-background image, and put it on the cassette
Section Fusing with the black background facing upward.
Operation/Procedure 2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (The cassette is specified.)
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 4) [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and printing is started.
3) Press [OK] key. When printing is executed, a jam is always generated. (As
The set value in step 2) is saved. shown in the photo below.)
5) Leave the jam paper for about 30sec, then remove the jam
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an paper.
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
6) Measure the width of the gloss change section (nip) of the jam
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
paper, and check to confirm that it is in the range of about
trouble may be occur.
10.5mm - 12mm.
Setting Default * If the difference between F and R is considerably great, the
Item/Display Item
range value fusing pressure may be insufficient.
A JOB END Fusing web motor Enable 0-1 0 1
COMP ACT forcible operation Disable 1 Setting Default
Item/Display item Content
CHECK condition when job end range value
B JOB END Interval of the print quantity of 1 - 200 100 A PAPER MFT Cassette selection 1-5 1 2 (CS1)
COMP ACT compulsory action of the fusing CS1 2
INTERVAL web motor at job end CS2 3
C JOB END Number of forcible operations of 1-5 1 CS3 4
COMP ACT the fusing web motor when job CS4 5
CNT end
0APERFEEDDIRECTION "LACKBACKGROUND
'LOSSCHANGE
SECTION
.IPWIDTH
2 ‘13/Nov
44
44-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
tion in the image forming (process) section.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
(The selected item is highlighted.)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
HV Normal operation high density process control Enable/Disable Normal Enable
setting (Disable:
HT Normal operation halftone process control Enable/Disable 0: NO) Enable
setting Reverse
TC Transfer output correction Enable/Disable setting (Enable: Enable A variation of the transfer efficiency is corrected with
1: YES) temperature and humidity (absolute moisture). Enable/
Disable setting. Correction of the output voltage of the
high transfer voltage.
MD VG Membrane decrease grid voltage correction Enable/Disable Enable
setting
MD LD Membrane laser power voltage correction Enable/Disable Disable
setting
MD EV Membrane decrease environment grid voltage correction Enable
Enable/Disable setting
MD DL Membrane decrease discharge light quantity correction Enable
Enable/Disable setting
MD DV_VG Enable/Disable setting of the grid correction by the developer Enable
2 bias absolute value
MD DL EV Membrane decrease environment discharge light quantity Disable
correction Enable/Disable setting
TN_PIX_SUP Setting of Enable/Disable of toner supply control for the yield Enable In the case of Disable, the FB ratio of all the colors is
count fixed to 100%.
TN_FB Enable/Disable setting of feedback toner density correction Enable In the case of Disable, toner is not supplied by means
of process control feedback.
TN_INT Enable/Disable setting of interval toner supply control Enable In the case of Disable, toner supply is not made
according to the developer traveling distance.
TN_RECV Enable/Disable setting of developer recovery Enable In the case of Disable, the developer recovery mode
cannot be used in the HV process control.
TN_ADJ Enable/Disable setting of the sensor output adjustment Enable In the case of Disable, the control voltage adjustment
cannot be used in the process control.
TN_EMP Setting of Enable/Disable of the toner falling distance Enable In the case of Disable, detection of the fall amount is
detection control not made. (No detection for ENP_INT and ENP_NEW)
TN_EMP_INT Setting of Enable/Disable of the toner falling distance Enable In the case of Disable, Near End when detecting EMP
detection control of job interruption during a job.
TN_EMP_NEW Setting of Enable/Disable of the new toner cartridge falling Enable
distance detection control
TN_PIX_TBL Setting of Enable/Disable of execution of revision of the yield Enable
count conversion table for the toner supply control in the
halftone process control
AR_AUTO Auto registration adjustment Enable/Disable setting Enable
AR_ERROR Auto registration adjustment execution error check Enable/ Enable
Disable setting
DM_PHASE Drum phase fitting Enable/Disable setting Enable
AR_PHASE Enable/Disable setting of the drum phase alignment in the Enable
automatic registration adjustment
PRT_HT Halftone process control printer correction feedback Enable/ Enable
Disable setting
PTC_ENV PTC environment correction Enable/Disable setting Enable Enable: Correction ON
PTC_LIFE PTC life correction Enable/Disable setting Enable Enable: Correction ON
44-2 Classifica Item/Display Content Setting Default
tion range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup REGIST Belt surface when
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image REG_R the item R
T 0 - 255 0
density sensor (registration sensor). GRND adjustment is
completed
Section Process REG_F
Belt substrate input
Operation/Procedure U BELT 0 - 255 0
max. value (F side)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto- MAX
matically. REG_F
Belt substrate input
V BELT 0 - 255 0
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis- min. value (F side)
MIN
played. REG_F Belt substrate input
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. W BELT difference (Item U - 0 - 255 0
DIF Item V)
Classifica Item/Display Content Setting Default REG_R
tion range value Belt substrate input
X BELT 0 - 255 0
max. value (R side)
F side color sensor MAX
PCS_F_ 100 -
A normalization co 100 REG_R
CL_KA 999 Belt substrate input
efficiency Y BELT 0 - 255 0
min. value (R side)
F side sensor light MIN
PCS_F
B emitting quantity 1 - 255 32 REG_R Belt substrate input
LED ADJ
adjustment value Z BELT difference (Item X - 0 - 255 0
R side sensor light DIF Item Y)
PCS_R
C emitting quantity 1 - 255 40 REG_F
LED ADJ Patch light reception
adjustment value AA PATCH( 0 - 255 0
potential F (K)
PCS_F_ K)
F side color dark
D CL_DAR 0 - 255 0 REG_F
voltage Patch light reception
K AB PATCH( 0 - 255 0
potential F (C)
PCS_F F side sensor dark C)
E 0 - 255 0
DARK voltage REG_F
Patch light reception
PCS_R R side sensor dark AC PATCH( 0 - 255 0
F 0 - 255 0 potential F (M)
DARK voltage M)
Belt surface when REG_F
PCS_F the item B AD PATCH( 0 - 255 0
G 0 - 255 0 potential F (Y)
GRND adjustment is Y)
completed REG_R
PCS_F AE PATCH( 0 - 255 0
PROCON Belt substrate input potential R (K)
H BELT 0 - 255 0 K)
max. value
MAX REG_R
PCS_F AF PATCH( 0 - 255 0
Belt substrate input potential R (C)
I BELT 0 - 255 0 C)
min. value
MIN REG_R
PCS_F Belt substrate input AG PATCH( 0 - 255 0
potential R (M)
J BELT difference (Item H - 0 - 255 0 M)
DIF Item I) REG_R
Belt surface when AH PATCH( 0 - 255 0
potential R (Y)
PCS_R the item C Y)
K 0 - 255 0
GRND adjustment is
completed
Error name Error content
PCS_R
Belt substrate input Process control F sensor -> PCS_F LED ADJ error The target is
L BELT 0 - 255 0
max. value adjustment abnormality not reached by 3 times of retries.
MAX
Process control R sensor -> PCS_R LED ADJ error The target is
PCS_R
Belt substrate input adjustment abnormality not reached by 3 times of retries.
M BELT 0 - 255 0
min. value F color sensor adjustment
MIN -> PCS_F_CL_KA calculation error
abnormality
PCS_R Belt substrate input
-> PCS_F GRND error
N BELT difference (Item L - 0 - 255 0 F sensor element scan
Effective difference of the upper and the
DIF Item M) abnormality
lower values of the belt element surface
F side registration
-> PCS_R GRND error
REG_F sensor light emitting R sensor element scan
O 1 - 255 32 Effective difference of the upper and the
LED ADJ quantity adjustment abnormality
value
Registration sensor F -> REG_F LED ADJ error The target is
REG_F F side registration
P 0 - 255 0 adjustment abnormality not reached by 3 times of retries.
DARK sensor dark voltage
Registration sensor R -> REG_R LED ADJ error The target is
Belt surface when
adjustment abnormality not reached by 3 times of retries.
REG_F the item O
REGIST Q 0 - 255 0 -> REG_F GRND error
GRND adjustment is Registration element F scan
completed Effective difference of the upper and the
abnormality
R side registration
REG_R sensor light emitting -> REG_R GRND error
R 1 - 255 40 Registration element R scan
LED ADJ quantity adjustment Effective difference of the upper and the
abnormality
value lower values of the belt element surface
REG_R R side registration
S 0 - 255 0
DARK sensor dark voltage
44-4 44-6
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high den- Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
sity process control operation. control forcibly.
Section Process Section Process
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
3) Press [OK] key. In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe- (Refer to the table below.)
cially required. In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.
Setting Default Result display Content description

range value COMPLETE Normal complete
A PCS_CL TARGET Color image sensor 1 - 255 204 ERROR Abnormal end
adjustment target value INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
B PCS_K TARGET Black image sensor 1 - 255 204
adjustment target value
Details of error display Content description
C LED_CL OUTPUT Color image sensor light 1 - 255 21
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color image sensor adjustment abnormality
emitting start level
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black image sensor adjustment abnormality
D LED_K OUTPUT Black image sensor light 1 - 255 21
K_HV_ERR K high density process control abnormality
emitting start level
C_HV_ERR C high density process control abnormality
E PCS ADJSTMENT Color image sensor 1 - 255 4
LIMIT adjustment error M_HV_ERR M high density process control abnormality
allowance level Y_HV _ERR Y high density process control abnormality
F BELT GROUND Transfer belt one-turn 1 - 255 1 TIMEOUT_ERR Time out
DIF substrate detection level
difference allowance level
G BIAS_CL Developing bias (for 0 - 255 60
STANDARD DIF color) reference
correction voltage
H BIAS_BK Developing bias (for 0 - 255 0
STANDARD DIF black) reference
correction voltage
I BIAS PATCH Toner patch making 1 - 255 60
INTERVAL developing bias interval
J Y_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 40
density level (yellow)
K M_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 45
density level (magenta)
L C_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 45
density level (cyan)
M K_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 45
density level (black)
N HV BK_GROUND Black image sensor 1 - 255 60
LIMIT adjustment error
allowance level
2 ‘13/Nov
44-9
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN], [OTHER] keys.
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
CPY/PRN P (PROCON) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control mode GB: 150 - 850 GB: 630
CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 600 DV: 430
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Output voltage level/base voltage level)
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N(M) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** Medium speed print mode GB: 150 - 850 GB: 630
(NORMAL CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 600 DV: 430
(MIDDLE)) MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Actual output voltage level/base voltage level)
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N(L) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** Low speed print mode GB: 150 - 850 GB: 600
(NORMAL CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 600 DV: 400
(LOW)) MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Actual output voltage level/base voltage level)
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
OTHER TN/TC TN HUD AREA Toner density correction humidity area 1-8 4
TN HUD DATA Toner density correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC TMP AREA Transfer correction temperature area 1-9 4
TC TMP DATA Transfer correction temperature AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC HUD AREA Transfer correction humidity area 1-9 4
TC HUD DATA Transfer correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
MD HUD AREA Membrane decrease correction humidity area 1-9 4
MD HUD DATA Membrane decrease correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
DRUM MD K STEP Drum membrane decrease correction STEP level 0-4 0
MD C STEP (KCMY)
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
MD K DRUM COUNTER Membrane decrease drum traveling distance area 0 - 20 0
MD C DRUM COUNTER (KCMY)
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
LIFE MD K REVISE(LIFE) : L *** M *** MC grid correction voltage level (for the drum 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(LIFE) : L *** M *** membrane decrease) (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LIFE) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LIFE) : L *** M ***
EV MD K REVISE(EV) : L *** M *** MC grid voltage correction level (for the 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(EV) : L *** M *** environment) (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(EV) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(EV) : L *** M ***
VG_HV MD K REVISE(VG_HV) : L1 *** L2 *** M Electric field grid voltage correction 0 - 255 0 2
*** display (KCMY)
MD C REVISE(VG_HV) : L1 *** L2 *** M
***
MD M REVISE(VG_HV) : L1 *** L2 *** M
***
MD Y REVISE(VG_HV) : L1 *** L2 *** M
***
ALL MD K REVISE(ALL) : L *** M *** MC grid voltage correction level (for the drum 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(ALL) : L *** M *** membrane decrease) (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(ALL) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(ALL) : L *** M ***
LD MD K REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** Laser power correction level (for the drum 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** membrane decrease) (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
DL MD K REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** Discharge lamp correction level (%) (for the drum 0 - 100 70
MD C REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** membrane decrease)
MD M REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
DL EV MD K REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** Discharge lamp correction level (%) (for the -100 - 100 0
MD C REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** environment)
MD M REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
OTHER CRUM DESTINATION CRUM destination (Main unit data) - -
MODEL TYPE Machine model type 0-1 0
CRUM DEST_K CRUM destination (CRUM data) - -
CRUM DEST_C
CRUM DEST_M
CRUM DEST_Y
CNT PROCON COUNT HV High density process control number of executions 0 - 99999999 0
PROCON COUNT HT Halftone process control number of executions 0 - 99999999 0
44-12 Item/ Display Default

Mode Content
Display range value
Purpose Operation data display PATCH n-1 High density process 0 - 255 0
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the control nth time toner
high density process control and the image patch density level 1
density sensor (registration sensor). (n=1-5)
n-2 Toner patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop- patch 2 (n=1-5)
ing) n-3 Toner patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
Operation/Procedure patch 3 (n=1-5)
Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys. n-4 Toner patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
patch 4 (n=1-5)
Item/ Display Default - BK only
Mode Content
Display range value PATCH n-1 Toner patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
TARGET ADK_SL (K) Development -9.99 - 0 patch 1 (n=6-10)
characteristics gradient 9.99 n-2 Toner patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
coefficient (High density patch 2 (n=6-10)
process control n-3 Toner patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
operation) patch 3 (n=6-10)
ADK_SL (C) Development -9.99 - 0 n-4 Toner patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
characteristics gradient 9.99 patch 4 (n=6-10)
coefficient (High density - BK only
process control
operation)
ADK_SL (M) Development -9.99 - 0
characteristics gradient 9.99 44-14
coefficient (High density
process control Purpose Operation data display
operation) Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem-
ADK_SL (Y) Development -9.99 - 0 perature and humidity sensor.
characteristics gradient 9.99
Section Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/
coefficient (High density
process control LSU
operation) Operation/Procedure
ADK_INT(K) Development -999.9 - 0 The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
characteristics intercept 999.9 temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
level (High density
process control Item/Display Content Display range
operation 0V)
TH_UM Fusing main thermistor Temperature:
ADK_INT(C) Development -999.9 - 0 differential input level 0 - 255 degree C (+/-1
characteristics intercept 999.9 (Degree C) / (AD value) degree C)
level (High density AD value: 0-1023
process control
TH_UM_AD1 Fusing thermistor detection Temperature:
operation 0V)
level for compensation 0.0-255.0 degree C (+/-
ADK_INT(M) Development -999.9 - 0 (Degree C) / (AD value) 0.2 degree C)
characteristics intercept 999.9 AD value: 0-1023
level (High density
TH_UM_AD2 Fusing thermistor detection AD value: 0-1023
process control
level (AD value)
operation 0V)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor A/D value Temperature:
ADK_INT(Y) Development -999.9 - 0
(temperature Degree C) 0 - 255 degree C (+/- 1
characteristics intercept 999.9
(Fusing roller B edge) degree C)
level (High density
AD value: 0-1023
process control
TH_US Fusing sub thermistor A/D Temperature:
operation 0V)
value (temperature Degree 0 - 255 degree C (+/-1
TARGET (K) High density process 0.00 - 0
C) (Fusing belt) degree C)
control target density 255.00
AD value: 0-1023
level (K)
TEMPRATURE Process control thermistor Temperature:
TARGET High density process 0.00 - 0
detection level -40.0 - 60.0 degree C
(C/M/Y) control target density 255.00
(+/- 0.1Degree C)
level (C/M/Y)
AD value: 0-1023
PCS_F_ F sensor dark potential 0 - 255 0
HUMIDITY Process control humidity Humidity:
DARK
sensor detection level 5.0-90.0% (+/-0.1%),
PCS_R_ R sensor dark potential 0 - 255 0 AD value: 0-1023
DARK
Item/Display Content Display range 44-21
TH1_LSU LSU thermistor detection Temperature:
level (A/D value) (Degree C) 5.0-60.0 degree C (+/- Purpose Adjustment/Setup
0.1 degree C) Function (Purpose) Used to set the halftone process control tar-
AD value: 0-255 get.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
44-15 Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Setting The halftone process control target is set and the operation data
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation. are displayed.
Section Process Display Content
Operation/Procedure COMPLETE Normal complete
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key. ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor sensitivity
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity
3) Press [OK] key. ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
The initial value must be set unless any special change is required. [YMCK] High density process control error [YMCK]
OTHER Other errors
Item/ Setting Default
Content
Display range value
A TIME Idle rotation interval (time interval 0 - 255 6
between the previous OPC drum idle 44-22
rotation and the next one) setting (h)
B AREA1 Environmental area difference 0-5 2 Purpose Operation data display
judgment threshold value setting Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density
(difference between the previous OPC level in the halftone process control opera-
drum idle rotation and the current one) tion.
C AREA2 Environmental area conditions (AND 1 - 15 1
condition of the previous OPC drum Section Process
idle rotation and the current one) Operation/Procedure
D CYCLE Previous rotation time setting (sec) in 0 - 255 0 1) Select the display mode with [1ST STEP], [2ND STEP] key.
the process control when recovered
from power ON, preheating/sleep
The toner patch density level made in the halftone process
mode. control operation is displayed.
The execution YES/NO of the OPC drum idle rotation is determined Item/Display Content
by the AND condition of TIME, AREA1, and AREA 2. ID_n Patch data display
(PTK: n = 1 - 24, PTC/PTM/PTY: n = 1 - 16)
To execute the OPC drum idle rotation, set item B (AREA 1) to "0,"
BASE1 Belt substrate data (START)
and item C (AREA2) to "15."
BASE5 Belt substrate data (LAST)
However, idle rotation is performed in a certain interval while in shut
off. This must be fully explained to the user.
44-24
44-17 Purpose Operation data display
Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and
Function (Purpose) Process refresh execution the correction level in the halftone process
control operation.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure Section Process
1) Select a refresh item with the touch panel key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key.
3) The refresh operation is executed. 2) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
NOTE: Do not execute this simulation unless specially required. Category Item/Display Content
Coefficient [EX-LOW] Coefficient of the approximation
Display items and descriptions of contents
formula of the minimum density
Display Content [LOW] Coefficient of the approximation
BLADE REFRESH Blade development refresh formula of the low density
DRUM REFRESH Drum refresh [CONNECT] Coefficient of the approximation
DEVE REFRESH Development refresh formula of when connecting the low
* DEVE REFLESH execution consume density and the medium density
W-Letter A3 100% worth of toner. [MID] Coefficient of the approximation
formula of the medium density
Display of results and descriptions of items [HIGH] Coefficient of the approximation
formula of the high density
Display Content
[CONNECT POINT] Each density section connection
COMPLETE Normal completion
output ratio
ERROR Abnormal end
Reference [SENSOR_TARGET] Halftone process control reference
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption value value
Correction [S_VALUE] Halftone process control correction
value value
Category Item/Display Content 44-26
For printer [PRINTER_S_VALUE] Printer halftone process control
correction value Purpose Adjustment/Setup
[PRINTER_BASE_ Printer halftone process control Function (Purpose) Used to execute the halftone process con-
DITHER_VALUE] reference dither value trol compulsory.
[PRINTER_AUTO_ Printer auto density adjustment
Section Process
HT_VALUE] correction value
Previous [BEFORE S_VALUE] Previous halftone process control Operation/Procedure
correction value Press [EXECUTE] key.
value The halftone process control is performed and the operation data
are displayed.
COMPLETE Normal complete

44-25
ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor sensitivity
Purpose Setting ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
correction value for the halftone process
[YMCK] High density process control error [YMCK]
control.
error
Section Process OTHER Other errors
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
2) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the
44-27
touch panel.
Purpose Data clear
4) Press [OK] key. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half-
tone process control.
Section Process
cially required.
Operation/Procedure
Default 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Setting
Item/Display Content value
range 2) Press [YES] key.
K CMY
A LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 98 98
The correction data of the halftone process control are cleared.
LOWER LIMIT approximate
expression data lower
limit value
B LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 60 60
UPPER LIMIT approximate
expression data upper
limit value
C MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 90 90
LOWER LIMIT approximate
expression data lower
limit value
D MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 6 2
UPPER LIMIT approximate
expression data upper
limit value
E HIGHLIGHT Reference point of the 1-8 7 7
POINT highlight correction
amount
F HIGHTLIGHT Highlight correction 0 - 128 20 20
VALUE LIMIT amount limit value
G MAX VALUE Maximum density value 0 - 128 20 20
LIMIT correction limit value
44-28
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
cially required.
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Process control A INITIAL YES When warm-up after clearing the counter Enable 0-1 0 0
Enable/Disable NO of the OPC drum and the developer unit Disable 1
setting B SW ON When supplying the power (when Color process control 0-3 0 3
canceling power shut-off) Enable
Process control Disable 1
BK process control Enable 2
Pixel count judgment 3
C TIME After passing the specified time from Color process control 0-3 0 3
leaving READY continuously (Time can be Enable
changed by INTERVAL TIME) Process control Disable 1
Pixel count judgment 3
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is made when turning ON Color process control 0-2 0 0
the power and after passing INTERVAL Enable
TIME. Process control Disable 1
E HUM The temperature and humidity inside the Color process control 0-2 0 0
machine are monitored only during a job at Enable
the interval set by the item of HUM HOUR. Process control Disable 1
When the changes in the temperature and BK process control Enable 2
the humidity are greater than the specified
level (the set value of item HUM DIF) in
comparison with the previous process
control.
F REV1 YES When the accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of K or M OPC drum unit reaches the Inhibit 1
specified level after turning ON the power.
G REV2_BK YES When the accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of K OPC drum unit reaches the specified Inhibit 1
level from execution of the previous
density correction.
H REV2_CL YES When the accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of M OPC drum unit reaches the specified Inhibit 1
level from execution of the previous
density correction.
I REFRESH YES Select of YES/NO of the manual process Key operation display 0-1 0 1
MODE NO control key with key operation Key operation NO display 1
Default
value
Setting of the J DAY When there is no color job from when the 0: Disable of the specified 0 - 999 0 1
execution previous color process control was days judgment
conditions of performed to when the number of days set 1 - 999: 1 - 999 days 999
the process by this item setting, perform the process passing
control control when executing the next warming
up.
K HI-COV Setting of the execution conditions of the The process control is 0-2 0 0
process control for the print ratio performed by considering
the average print ratio of
every 10 pages as the
judgment criteria.
Print ratio judgment inhibit 1
(The process control for
the target of print ratio is
not performed.)
The process control is 2
performed by considering
the average print ratio of
30 pages as the judgment
criteria in a continuous
print job of 30 or more
pages.
Setting of the L LO-COV Setting of the execution judgment of the Enable 0-1 0 0
execution process control in continuous printing of Inhibit 1
conditions of low print ratio images
the process M TonerCA-END Setting of the process control interval Enable 0-1 0 0
control reduction when the toner cartridge Inhibit 1
remaining quantity is 25% or less (If this is
set to Enable, item M RATIO is changed.)
N AVERAGE-PAGE Setting of the number of pages of item HI- 1: 10 pages - 5: 50 pages 1-5 1 3
COV set value 2 1 step corresponds to 10 5
pages.
O LIMIT PAGE Setting of the number of connected jobs of 1: 10 pages - 10: 100 1 -10 1 10
the process control and of the limit number pages
of the process control 1 step corresponds to 10
A number of reservation jobs are pages. 10
connected. When the number of jobs
exceeds the specified number of pages
(the set value of this setting), the process
control is performed. / The process control
is performed by AND conditions of item
REV condition and the specified number of
pages (the set value of this setting).
P PIX_RATIO_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count specified value 1 - 999 10
The set value of 100 corresponds to K print of A4 at the print ratio of 5%.
Q PIX_RATIO_CL Magnification ratio setting (%) of the color (CMY) toner count specified 1 - 999 10
value
The set value of 100 corresponds to K print of A4 at the print ratio of 5%.
R INTERVAL TIME Setting of non-use time after turning ON the power. (h: hour) 1 - 255 3
S HUM HOUR Interval setting of the temperature and humidity monitoring time of 1 - 24 2
"HUM" (unit: 10 minutes)
T HUM_DIF The specified value of the area difference in humidity between the level 1-9 2
at execution of the previous control and the current humidity (Applied to
item HUM)
U BK_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the specified value of the BK OPC 1 - 999 (Entry of 20 15
drum traveling distance of "REV2_BK" corresponds to
100,000mm.)
V M_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the M OPC drum traveling distance of 1 - 999 (Entry of 20 15
"REV2_CL" corresponds to
100,000mm.)
W COLOR BORDER Judgment criteria whether the BK high 0: The BK process control 0 - 999 20
density process control is individually is executed regardless of
performed or not (Setting of the ratio of thethe M OPC drum traveling
M OPC drum rotation distance for the K distance.
OPC drum rotation distance (%)) 1 - 999: 1 - 999(%)
X BK ONLY Setting of the frequency of execution of the Frequency of once for 5 0-6 0 5
4-color high density process control when times
only monochrome output is continued (The Frequency of once for 1 - 5 1-5
result of this setting is applied only when times
the M OPC drum rotation distance is The 4-color high density 6
smaller than the set value of COLOR process control is always
BORDER.) performed.
Y HT_DIF HT process control execution judgment developing bias variation value 1 - 255 40
Default
value
Setting of the Z RG_ON_ CL Setting of execution of the registration adjustment when executing the When the color 0 0
execution SYNC process control when turning ON the power process control is
condition of the executed.
registration ALL Executed 1
adjustment regardless of the
process control.
CL/BK When the color 2
process control
and the K process
control are
executed.
AA RG_TEMP_TIMER Time interval from registration adjustment after turning ON the power to 0 - 240 0
the next execution. (MINUTE)
AB RG_PERM_TIMER Setting of inhibit time of execution of the registration adjustment 0 - 15 1
(HOUR)
AC RG_HOUR_TIMER Setting of the interval time of execution of the registration adjustment 0 - 15 5
(Above)+(HOUR)
AD RG_BW_SYNC Setting of Enable/Disable of the Enable 0-1 0 1
registration adjustment after a Inhibit 1
monochrome job
Setting of the AE 2TRAN_CLEAN_ Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold value 1 5 - 999 200
secondary TIME1 (The total number of sheets for cleaning execution conditions) (Cleaning
transfer time: Short)
cleaning AF 2TRAN_CLEAN_ Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold value 2 5 - 999 300
conditions TIME2 (The total number of sheets for cleaning execution conditions) (Cleaning
time: Medium)
AG 2TRAN_CLEAN_ Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold value 3 5 - 999 500
TIME3 (The total number of sheets for cleaning execution conditions) (Cleaning
time: Long)
Drum reverse AH DRUM_REVERSE Drum reverse rotation control setting Enable 0-1 0 1
rotation control Disable 1
When REFRESH MODE setting is enabled (0), the menu of the user process control execution button is displayed on the user system setting
menu.
When the color balance or the density change is not within the allowable range, the user can perform the process control manually and forcibly.
However, toner is consumed grater than as usual. This point must be explained to the user clearly.
44-29
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
process control during a job.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
panel.
3) Press [OK] key.

A COPY During copy job 0-2 0: No execution 2
B PRINTER During print job 1: HV only 2
C FAX During FAX print job 2: HV -> HT 2
D SELF PRINT During self print 2
E CPY TO PRT TABLE Halftone process control copier - 0-1 0:CALCULATED 0: Color balance calculation value (Revised every 0
printer conversion table select 1:DEFAULT time when SIM46-74 is executed.)
1: Default (Fixed value)
HV: High density process control

HT: Halftone process control
44-31
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Man-
ual adjustment)
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: For the OPC drum phase adjustment, do not use this simu-
lation, but use SIM50-22 (auto adjustment).
1) Select item A with scroll key.

2) Enter the value corresponding to the adjustment pattern with
10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed out.)
4) Select an adjustment pattern whose deflection is within two
scale lines on the adjustment pattern of C,M, Y colors.
5) Select item B with scroll key.
6) Enter the adjustment pattern sheet number selected in proce-
dure 4).
8) The adjusted adjustment pattern is printed.
44-37
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correc-
tion level in the continuous printing opera-
tion.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a set target color with the touch panel.
2) Select a target item with scroll keys.
NOTE: When the print density is varied in the continuous printing
operation, this simulation is used.
Button Item Display Content Setting Default

range value
A DV_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_1 DV bias correction data 1 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
B DV_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_2 DV bias correction data 2 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
C DV_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_3 DV bias correction data 3 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
D DV_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_1 DV bias correction data 1 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
E DV_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_2 DV bias correction data 2 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
F DV_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_3 DV bias correction data 3 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
G DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_1 DV bias correction data 1 in monochrome printing (high speed) 0-5 0
H DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_2 DV bias correction data 2 in monochrome printing (high speed) 0-5 0
I DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_3 DV bias correction data 3 in monochrome printing (high speed) 0-5 0
DV bias correction starting position data 1 in color printing (low
J DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_1 1 - 12 4
speed)
K DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_2 1 - 12 3
speed)
L DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_3 1 - 12 1
speed)
K M DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_4 1 - 12 1
speed)
DV bias correction starting position data 1 in color printing (middle
N DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_M_1 1 - 12 4
speed)
O DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_M_2 1 - 12 3
speed)
P DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_M_3 1 - 12 1
speed)
Q DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_M_4 1 - 12 1
speed)
DV bias correction starting position data 1 in monochrome printing
R DV_ADJ_START_BK_H_1 1 - 12 4
(high speed)
S DV_ADJ_START_BK_H_2 1 - 12 3
(high speed)
T DV_ADJ_START_BK_H_3 1 - 12 1
(high speed)
U DV_ADJ_START_BK_H_4 1 - 12 1
(high speed)
A DV_ADJ_CL_C_L_DATA_1 DV bias correction data 1 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
B DV_ADJ_CL_C_L_DATA_2 DV bias correction data 2 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
C DV_ADJ_CL_C_L_DATA_3 DV bias correction data 3 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
D DV_ADJ_CL_C_M_DATA_1 DV bias correction data 1 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
E DV_ADJ_CL_C_M_DATA_2 DV bias correction data 2 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
F DV_ADJ_CL_C_M_DATA_3 DV bias correction data 3 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
G DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_L_1 1 - 12 4
speed)
H DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_L_2 1 - 12 3
speed)
C DV bias correction starting position data 3 in color printing (low
I DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_L_3 1 - 12 1
speed)
J DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_L_4 1 - 12 1
speed)
K DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_M_1 1 - 12 4
speed)
L DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_M_2 1 - 12 3
speed)
M DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_M_3 1 - 12 1
speed)
N DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_M_4 1 - 12 1
speed)
Button Item Display Content Setting Default
range value
A DV_ADJ_CL_M_L_DATA_1 DV bias correction data 1 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
B DV_ADJ_CL_M_L_DATA_2 DV bias correction data 2 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
C DV_ADJ_CL_M_L_DATA_3 DV bias correction data 3 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
D DV_ADJ_CL_M_M_DATA_1 DV bias correction data 1 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
E DV_ADJ_CL_M_M_DATA_2 DV bias correction data 2 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
F DV_ADJ_CL_M_M_DATA_3 DV bias correction data 3 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
G DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_L_1 1 - 12 4
speed)
H DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_L_2 1 - 12 3
speed)
M DV bias correction starting position data 3 in color printing (low
I DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_L_3 1 - 12 1
speed)
J DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_L_4 1 - 12 1
speed)
K DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_M_1 1 - 12 4
speed)
L DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_M_2 1 - 12 3
speed)
M DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_M_3 1 - 12 1
speed)
N DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_M_4 1 - 12 1
speed)
A DV_ADJ_CL_Y_L_DATA_1 DV bias correction data 1 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
B DV_ADJ_CL_Y_L_DATA_2 DV bias correction data 2 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
C DV_ADJ_CL_Y_L_DATA_3 DV bias correction data 3 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
D DV_ADJ_CL_Y_M_DATA_1 DV bias correction data 1 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
E DV_ADJ_CL_Y_M_DATA_2 DV bias correction data 2 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
F DV_ADJ_CL_Y_M_DATA_3 DV bias correction data 3 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
G DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_L_1 1 - 12 4
speed)
H DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_L_2 1 - 12 3
speed)
Y DV bias correction starting position data 3 in color printing (low
I DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_L_3 1 - 12 1
speed)
J DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_L_4 1 - 12 1
speed)
K DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_M_1 1 - 12 4
speed)
L DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_M_2 1 - 12 3
speed)
M DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_M_3 1 - 12 1
speed)
N DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_M_4 1 - 12 1
speed)
44-43
Purpose Data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification informa-
tion of the developing unit.
Section Developing system
Operation/Procedure
The identification number and the identification signal level of the
developing unit are displayed.
Item/Display Content Display range NOTE

A DVCH KIND K K developing unit identification number 1-9 The model identification number of the developing unit which
B DVCH KIND C C developing unit identification number 1-9 is backed up in the EEPROM of the machine.
C DVCH KIND M M developing unit identification number 1-9
D DVCH KIND Y Y developing unit identification number 1-9
E DV_TYP_SEL_K K developing unit identification detection 0-1 0 = High (Open)
F DV_TYP_SEL_C C developing unit identification detection 0-1 1 = Low (GND)
G DV_TYP_SEL_M M developing unit identification detection 0-1
H DV_TYP_SEL_Y Y developing unit identification detection 0-1
I DVCH_AD_K K developing unit identification AD value 0 - 255 AD value of the developing unit identification voltage
J DVCH_AD_C C developing unit identification AD value 0 - 255
K DVCH_AD_M M developing unit identification AD value 0 - 255
L DVCH_AD_Y Y developing unit identification AD value 0 - 255
* The developing unit is identified by the combination of items E, F, G, H and items I, J, K, and L.
44-61 Display/Item Content
PROCON HIGH QUALITY1 The execution frequency of the process
Purpose Adjustment MODE control is high. (It is set when the color
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the color image density sen- image quality is given priority.)
sor. (The adjustment is made according to HIGH QUALITY2 The execution frequency of the process
the input of SIM44-13 to set the target value control is highest. (It is set when the color
of the color sensor gain adjustment.) image quality is given priority.)
PRINT The execution frequency of the process
Section PERFORMANCE control is low. (It is set when the job
Operation/Procedure speed is given priority.)
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key. BW MODE The process control is executed in the
normal frequency. (It is set when there
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. are little color jobs and many
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) monochrome jobs.)
NORMAL The process control is executed in the
Setting Default normal frequency.
range value
A PCS_CL CARB OUT Calibration plate sensor 1 - 255 108 When PROCON TARGET is selected.
value 1) Select the density level.
B PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light 1 - 255 21 When PROCON MODE is selected.
emitting quantity
adjustment value 1) Select the execution frequency of the process control.
3) Press [YES] key.
NOTE:
44-62
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions.
Purpose Setup/Adjustment
In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest ver-
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution sion.
conditions.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
This simulation allows collective change in the set contents of 46
SIM44-4 and SIM44-28.
A suitable one is selected among a number of options depending 46-1
on the condition.
Purpose Adjustment (Color copy mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
Select an item to be set.
mode.
- To change the image density in the high density area, select
Section
PROCON TARGET.
Operation/Procedure
- To change the frequency of the process control operations,
select PROCON MODE.
panel.
Display/Item Content 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
PROCON CL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, and Y decrease. * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
TARGET (The C/M/Y high density process control item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
target values decrease.)
CL ID UP The densities of C, M, and Y increase.
(The C/M/Y high density process control To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
target values increase.) mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
BK ID DOWN The density of K decreases. (The high in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
density process control target value adjustment value.
decreases.)
BK ID UP The density of K increases. (The high
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
density process control target value
increases.)
sity is decreased.
ALL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, Y and K decrease.
Setting Default
(The C/M/Y/K high density process Item/Display Content
range value
control target values decrease.)
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50
ALL ID UP The densities of C, M, Y and K increase.
(The C/M/Y/K high density process HIGH 1 - 99 50
control target values increase.) B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
NORMAL The standard density of C, M, Y and K. HIGH 1 - 99 50
(The C/M/Y/K high density process C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
control target values are the standard PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
values.) D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value Item/Display Content
range value
G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
I TEXT(COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
COPY) document)
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
document) F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
L TEXT (COLOR Text (Color tone LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
TONE enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50 G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) HIGH 1 - 99 50
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (COLOR Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
TONE (Color tone I TEXT (COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) COPY) document)
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 (COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) document)
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 L LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
Q MAP (COLOR Map LOW 1 - 99 50
TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
46-4
R LIGHT (COLOR Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50 send mode.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
T SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
Section
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
document) 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
U TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50 panel.
black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
V TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
(copy document) item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
46-2
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode) Setting Default
Mode Item/Display Content
range value
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
LOW A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
mode.
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
Section C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure PHOTO
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
panel. E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
H RIP - 1 - 99 50
HIGH A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW" C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density PHOTO
in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
adjustment value. E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den- G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
sity is decreased. H RIP - 1 - 99 50
46-5 46-9
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode) Purpose Adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density.
send mode. Section
Operation/Procedure 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch panel.
panel. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is mode, and the fax mode.
increased, and vice versa. When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
Setting Default
range value [DSPF]
LOW A AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
Setting Default
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50 Item Button Display Content
range value
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
PHOTO SIDEA: exposure adjustment
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 LOW (Low density side)
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 SIDEA: exposure adjustment
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50 LOW (Low density side)
H RIP - 1 - 99 50 C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
HIGH A AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50 LOW exposure adjustment
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50 (Low density side)
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52
PHOTO SIDEA: exposure adjustment
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 HIGH (High density side)
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52
SIDEA: exposure adjustment
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
H RIP - 1 - 99 50
(High density)
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
46-8 LOW (Low density side)
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color
balance RGB.
C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
Section LOW exposure adjustment
Operation/Procedure (Low density side)
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch
panel. HIGH (High density side)
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 50
panel. SIDEB: exposure adjustment
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. HIGH (High density side)
F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density (High density)
area and the high density area. G BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the SIDEB: R R
target color is increased, and vice versa. H BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: G G
Setting Default I BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
range value SIDEB: B B
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density 1 - 99 50
correction amount
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density 50
correction amount
[RSPF]
46-16
Setting Default
range value Purpose Adjustment
A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the monochrome copy den-
adjustment (Low density side) sity and the gamma (for each monochrome
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48 copy mode).
C FAX : LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48 Section
adjustment (Low density side) Operation/Procedure
D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
adjustment (High density side) panel.
E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 53
F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53 * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
adjustment (high density) item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
46-10
Purpose Adjustment Item/Display
Density level
Setting range Default value
(Point)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance and
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
the gamma (for each color copy mode).
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
Section C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key. E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
touch panel.
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
panel.
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
4) Enter the set value with 10-key. K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
TEXT Text
TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo
PHOTO + TEXT/PHOTO Photograph + Text/Printed Photo
46-19
MAP Map Purpose Setting
LIGHT Light document Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the
COPY ORG Copy document density scanning (exposure) of mono-
chrome auto copy mode documents.
Density level Section
Item/Display Setting range Default value
(Point)
Operation/Procedure
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500 Select an item to be set with touch panel.
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500 When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500 saved.
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500 Default
Item/Display Content Set value
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500 value
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500 AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 MODE1
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500 AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Stop (for copy) STOP/
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
PRESCAN
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
Stop (for FAX)
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500 Stop (for scanner) STOP/
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500 PRESCAN
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500 AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 setting NORMAL
SHARP
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL
NOTE:
46-23
MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images) Purpose Adjustment/Setup
MODE 2 Normal gamma
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy
STOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is high density section (High density tone gap
scanned, and the output image density is determined
supported).
according to the scanned density. (The output image
density is even for all the surface.) Section
REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned Operation/Procedure
sequentially, and the output image density is determined
according to the density in each area of document. (The
output image density may not be even for all the
0 Enable
surface.)
1 Inhibit
PRESCAN The densities of the all surface of document are scanned
sequentially, and the output image density is determined 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
according to the average of the scanned densities. (The
output image density is even for all the surface.)
Setting Default
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome Item/Display Content
range value
FULL auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x the
A CMY 0 CMY engine highest 0-1 0
document width. This is not related to the PRESCAN
(0: ENABLE density correction mode:
mode.
1: DISABLE) Enable
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome
1 CMY engine highest
PART auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x
density correction mode:
100mm width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
Disable
B K 0 K engine highest density 0-1 1
(0: ENABLE correction mode: Enable
1: DISABLE) 1 K engine highest density
46-21 correction mode: Disable
Purpose Adjustment C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for CYAN 0 - 999 500
TARGET maximum density correction
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Manual
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
adjustment)
Section correction
Operation/Procedure E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET YELLOW maximum density
correction
touch panel.
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch TARGET BLACK maximum density
panel. correction
* When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set items A
and B to "0".
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
gap is better.
* To increase the density in the high density area further, set items
A and B to "1".
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
value. NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these
values are changed, the density in the high density area is
Density level Default changed.
Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
46-24 Default value
C M Y
Purpose Adjustment G ORANGE 0 - 255 0 150 255
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment H NAVY 0 - 255 255 200 0
(Auto adjustment) I LIGHT GREEN 0 - 255 150 0 150
Section J LIGHT BLUE 0 - 255 150 20 0
K AQUA MARINE 0 - 255 170 0 50
Operation/Procedure
L PURPLE 0 - 255 128 255 0
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. M PINK 0 - 255 0 150 20
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. N YELLOW GREEN 0 - 255 128 0 255
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, O BEIGE 0 - 255 0 50 170
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
The copy color balance automatic adjustment is performed, 46-26
then the adjustment result pattern is printed.
Purpose Adjustment
4) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the single color mode color
The halftone correction target registration is processed.
balance set value to the default.
Section
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
Operation/Procedure
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25;;6,=(3$3(5

)257+,6$'-8670(17 2) Press [YES] key.
The color balance value of the single color mode is reset to the
default value.
46-27
(;(&87(
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy

images, texts, and line image edges.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Section
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&( Operation/Procedure
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66 panel.
Item/Display Setting Default

Content
(Copy mode) range value
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87( (SLOPE) gamma skew adjustment
C COLOR TEXT Color character edge gamma 1 - 99 50
46-25 (SLOPE) skew adjustment
Purpose Adjustment D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Sin-
E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma 1 - 99 50
gle color copy mode)
(SLOPE) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
Section F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure (INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
1) Select an adjustment target color with [C][M][Y] keys on the When the adjustment values of items A, C, and E are changed, the
touch panel. gamma of text and line edge image density section is changed.
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
panel. character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjustment
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. value is decreased, the image contrast of character and line edge
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) is decreased.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the When the adjustment values of items B, D, and F are increased,
target color is increased, and vice versa. the image density of text and line edge section is decreased, and
vice versa.
Default value
C M Y
A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200
B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
C BLUE 0 - 255 255 150 0
D CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0
E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
F YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255
[RSPF]
46-30
Setting Default
Purpose Adjustment/Setup range value
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the resolution in the sub A COPY : OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
scanning direction in the copy mode. B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
Section
D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
Operation/Procedure E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
1) Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corre- F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
sponding to the resolution mode with 10-key.
Setting Default
range value
A SCAN Scan resolution Mode 1 0-1 0 0
RESOLUTION selection Mode 2 1
SW (COPY: COLOR)
Resolution in the sub scanning direction (DPI)

Scan 25-99% 100-200% 201-400%
Mode
mode [Magnification [Magnification [Magnification
ratio] ratio] ratio]
Mode 1 OC 600 600 600
RSPF 600 600 -
DSPF 600 600 -
Mode 2 OC 400 600 600
RSPF 600 600 -
DSPF 400 600 -
46-32
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background
density reproducibility in the monochrome
auto copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
and the low density image is decreased.
[DSPF]
Setting Default
range value
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF front 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) surface)
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF back 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) surface)
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) front surface)
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) back surface)
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode (for DSPF front 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) surface)
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode (for DSPF back 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) surface)
46-36
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color
copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
By changing the density level of each color, the color adjustment in
the 2-color copy mode can be performed.
Setting Default value Default

range C M Y value
OUTCOLOR A RED R output color 0 - 255 0 255 200 -
(Output color coefficient) B GREEN G output color 0 - 255 255 0 255 -
C BLUE B output color 0 - 255 255 150 0 -
D CYAN C output color 0 - 255 255 0 0 -
E MAGENTA M output color 0 - 255 0 255 0 -
F YELLOW Y output color 0 - 255 0 0 255 -
G ORANGE O output color 0 - 255 0 150 255 -
H NAVY N output color 0 - 255 255 200 0 -
I LIGHT GREEN LG output color 0 - 255 150 0 150 -
J LIGHT BLUE LB output color 0 - 255 150 20 0 -
K AQUA MARINE AM output color 0 - 255 170 0 50 -
L PURPLE PU output color 0 - 255 128 255 0 -
M PINK P output color 0 - 255 0 150 20 -
N YELLOW GREEN YG output color 0 - 255 128 0 255 -
O BEIGE BE output color 0 - 255 0 50 170 -
CHROMA A RED / BLACK Red extraction mode 0-6 - - - 3
(Chroma adjustment) (The red recognition area is adjusted.)
B KS:CHROMATIC Chromatic color extraction mode 0-6 - - - 3
(The chromatic color recognition area is adjusted.)
46-37 Item/Display Select Default
Content
(Copy mode) button value
MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text print NORMAL
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability (-) LUT1 (Manual)
of monochrome mode color. NOMAL
Section (+) LUT1
Operation/Procedure (+) LUT2
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel. TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) NORMAL
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (+) LUT1
4) Press [YES] key. (+) LUT2
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of red and yellow PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo NORMAL
images when copying color documents with red and yellow images PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
in the monochrome mode. NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
An individual adjustment is available in each of the copy mode and
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photograph/Text NORMAL
the printer mode. photograph
(-) LUT1
NOMAL (Manual)
Setting Default
Item/Display Content (+) LUT1
range value
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 145 (+) LUT2
B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 805 TEXT (-) LUT2 Text/Photograph NORMAL
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
C R-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 299
D G-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 587 NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
B-Ratio Gray making setting (B)
MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) NORMAL
(1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio)
(-) LUT1
B-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (B)
NOMAL
(1000-R-Ratio RIP - G-Ratio RIP)
(+) LUT1
* B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained from (+) LUT2
the formula below. CPY TO CPY/ (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio TXT PRT (-) LUT1 Text printed
NOMAL (Manual)
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial
(+) LUT1
values (Default).
(+) LUT2
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is increased, CPY TO CPY/ (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
the copy density of red images is decreased. When the adjustment TEXT (-) LUT1 Text (Manual)
value is decreased, the density is increased. NOMAL
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is increased, (+) LUT1
the copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjust- (+) LUT2
ment value is decreased, the density in also decreased. CPY TO CPY/ (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
PHOTO (-) LUT1 Printed photo
NOMAL (Manual)
46-38 (+) LUT1

(+) LUT2
LIGHT (-) LUT2 Light document NORMAL
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black component ORIGINAL (-) LUT1 (Manual)
amount in the color copy mode. NOMAL
Section (+) LUT1
Operation/Procedure (+) LUT2
AUTO AUTO0 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
1) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode judgment 0
(-) LUT1
key.
NOMAL
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. (+) LUT1
3) Press the black component amount select key. (+) LUT2
This adjusts black ingredient amount in the color copy mode. AUTO1 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(except character and line image) (-) LUT1 judgment 1
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part NOMAL

changes. (+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT1 judgment 2
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Item/Display Select Default 46-40
Content
(Copy mode) button value
AUTO AUTO3 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL Purpose Adjustment/Setup
(-) LUT1 judgment 3 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
NOMAL (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
(+) LUT1 Section
(+) LUT2
Operation/Procedure
(-) LUT1 judgment 4 1) Set the document on the document table.
NOMAL 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
(+) LUT1 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
(+) LUT2 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
AUTO5 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL and the scanned document image is outputted.
(-) LUT1 judgment 5
NOMAL Setting Default
(+) LUT1 range value
(+) LUT2 A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX send 1 - 99 50
AUTO6 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL LEVEL(ALL) image density. (Collective
(-) LUT1 judgment 6 adjustment of all the modes)
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
46-41
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
46-39
(Normal)
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send
Operation/Procedure
images.
1) Set the document on the document table.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. and the scanned document image is outputted.
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large Setting Default
numeric value to decrease moire. range value
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
Setting Default B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
range value C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
A 200 x 100 [DPI] OFF 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1 D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
halftone OFF E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
B 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1 F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
halftone OFF G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1-6 1 1
C 200 x 200 [DPI] ON 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1 MODE EXP1 mode Exposure 1 2 (AUTO)
halftone ON EXP2 Exposure 2 3
D 200 x 400 [DPI] OFF 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1 EXP3 Exposure 3 4
halftone OFF
EXP4 Exposure 4 5
E 200 x 400 [DPI] ON 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
EXP5 Exposure 5 6
halftone ON
F 400 x 400 [DPI] OFF 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1 To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the docu-
halftone OFF ment and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F,
G 400 x 400 [DPI] ON 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1 and press [EXECUTE] key.
halftone ON
H 600 x 600 [DPI] OFF 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
halftone OFF
I 600 x 600 [DPI] ON 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
halftone ON
46-42 46-43
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Fine) (Super Fine)
Section Section
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Set the document on the document table.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.
Setting Default Setting Default

range value range value
A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 Exposure 1
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 Exposure 2
F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 3
Halftone E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 4
Halftone F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 5
Halftone G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50 Auto/Halftone
Halftone H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 1/Halftone
Halftone I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 2/Halftone
Halftone J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1- 1 1 Exposure 3/Halftone
MODE EXP1 mode Fine/ 12 2 (AUTO) K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 1 Exposure 4/Halftone
EXP2 Fine/ 3 L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 2 Exposure 5/Halftone
EXP3 Fine/ 4 M EXECUTE AUTO Print Super Fine/ 1- 1 1
Exposure 3 MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
EXP4 Fine/ 5 EXP1 Super Fine/ 2
Exposure 4 Exposure 1
AUTO Fine/ 7 EXP3 Super Fine/ 4
H_TONE Automatic/ Exposure 3
halftone EXP4 Super Fine/ 5
EXP1 Fine/ 8 Exposure 4
H_TONE Exposure 1/ EXP5 Super Fine/ 6
Halftone Exposure 5
EXP2 Fine/ 9 AUTO Super Fine/ 7
H_TONE Exposure 2/ H_TONE Auto/
Halftone Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 3/ H_TONE Exposure 1/
Halftone Halftone
H_ONE Exposure 4/ H_TONE Exposure 2/
Halftone Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 5/ H_TONE Exposure 3/
Halftone Halftone
EXP4 Super Fine/ 11
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- H_TONE Exposure 4/
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, Halftone
and press [EXECUTE] key. EXP5 Super Fine/ 12
H_TONE Exposure 5/
Halftone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-

ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
and press [EXECUTE] key.
46-44 46-45
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Ultra fine) (600dpi).
Section Section
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Set the document on the document table.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.

A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50 A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/ 1 - 99 50 G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone Halftone 1
H EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
H_TONE Exposure 1/Halftone Halftone
I EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1- 1 1 M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/ 1- 1 1
MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO) MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2 EXP1 600dpi/ 2
AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7 AUTO 600dpi/ 7
H_TONE Auto/ H_TONE Auto/
Halftone Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 1/ H_TONE Exposure
Halftone 1/Halftone
Halftone 2/Halftone
Halftone 3/Halftone
Halftone 4/Halftone
Halftone 5/Halftone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
and press [EXECUTE] key. and press [EXECUTE] key.
46-46 Operation Setting Default
mode range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup FILLING B FILLING LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (GRAY) (G) compres-
(RGB RIP) Filing sion
(Mono- (Halftone)
Section chrome MIDDLE Medium 1
Operation/Procedure halftone compres-
1) Select a target mode for adjustment. mode) sion
(Mono-
2) Set the document on the document table. chrome
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. halftone
4) Press [OK] key. mode)
HIGH High 2
When the set value is increased, the density becomes higher.
compres-
When the set value is decreased, the density becomes lower. sion
(Mono-
Setting Default chrome
range value halftone
A STANDARD RIP For Normal/ 1 - 99 50 mode)
Halftone OFF PRINT C PRINT LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
mode HOLD (C) compres-
B FINE RIP For Fine/Halftone 1 - 99 50 (COLOR) sion
OFF mode Print hold (Color)
C FINE RIP H_TONE For Fine/Halftone 1 - 99 50 (Color MIDDLE Medium 1
ON mode mode) compres-
D SUPER FINE RIP For Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 sion
Halftone OFF (Color)
mode HIGH High 2
E SUPER FINE RIP H_TONE For Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 compres-
Halftone ON sion
mode (Color)
F ULTRA FINE RIP For Ultra fine/ 1 - 99 50 PRINT D PRINT LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
Halftone OFF HOLD (G) compres-
mode (GRAY) sion
G ULTRA FINE RIP H_TONE For Ultra fine/ 1 - 99 50 Print hold (Halftone)
Halftone ON (Mono- MIDDLE Medium 1
mode chrome compres-
H 600DPI RIP For 600dpi/ 1 - 99 50 halftone sion
Halftone OFF mode) (Mono-
mode chrome
I 600DPI RIP H_TONE For 600dpi/ 1 - 99 50 halftone
Halftone ON mode)
mode HIGH High 2
compres-
sion
(Mono-
46-47 chrome
halftone
Purpose Adjustment/Setup mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy PUSH E SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1
and scan images (JPEG). SCAN (C) *1 1 compres- (MIDDLE
(COLOR) sion mode 2)
Section (Scanner 1
Operation/Procedure color) Low
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel. compres-
sion
MIDDLE Medium 1
3) Press [OK] key. 2 compres-
The set value is saved. sion mode
2
Operation Setting Default Medium
Item/Display Content compres-
mode range value
FILLING A FILLING LOW Low 0 0 (LOW) sion
(COLOR) (C) compres- MIDDLE Medium 2
Filing sion 3 compres-
(Color (Color) sion mode
mode) MIDDLE Medium 1 3
compres- High
sion compres-
(Color) sion
HIGH High 2
compres-
sion
(Color)
Operation Setting Default
Item/Display Content Density level Default
mode range value Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
PUSH F SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
SCAN (G) *1 1 compres- (MIDDLE
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
(GRAY) sion mode 2)
(Scanner 1 C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
mono- Low D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
chrome compres- E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
halftone sion F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
mode) MIDDLE Medium 1 G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
2 compres- H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
sion mode I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
2 J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
Medium
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
compres-
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
sion
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
MIDDLE Medium 2
3 compres- N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
sion mode O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
3 P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
High Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
compres-
sion
*1: Setting of compression rate for images when the image

46-52
compression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode.
NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity
in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other Function (Purpose) Used to set the gamma default for the copy
hand, however, the image quality of some documents may mode heavy paper and the image process
be remarkably reduced. mode. (After execution of either SIM46-54
or SIM46-51, the adjustment value is reset
to the initial value.)
Section
46-51
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy
To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].
mode heavy paper mode and the image
process mode. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section 3) Press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key
[PAPER/DITHER]. 46-54
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the Purpose Adjustment
touch panel. Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine halftone auto-
3) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the matic density adjustment (dither).
touch panel. Section
4) Enter the set value with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is out- The high density process control is started to make 48 patch
putted. self print. (A4 (11" x 8.5") or A3 (11" x 17") paper in the paper
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is feed tray is used.)
made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust 2) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press
the image density. [EXECUTE] key.
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started.
Item/Display Content Color
HEAVY Copier heavy paper gamma KCMY After scanning the 48 patch self print, the 17 patch self print is
DITH1 Black edge K automatically printed.
DITH2 Color edge KCMY 3) Press [OK] key.
DITH3 Color error diffusion KCMY After completion of the correction amount registration, the
DITH4 Monochrome error diffusion K screen shifts to the dither selection menu.
DITH8 Monochrome dither K
4) Select an item (dither) to be adjusted.
HEAVYPAPER Copier/gamma for heavy paper

BLACK EDGE Black edge
COLOR EDGE Color edge
COLOR ED Color error diffusion
B/W ED Monochrome error diffusion
B/W 600 Monochrome dither 600dpi
WOVEN1 Watermark mode 1
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. Content (copy Setting Default
Mode Item/Display
The 48 patch self print is printed. mode) range value
6) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press COLOR H LIGHT Light document OFF 0 0 (OFF)
[EXECUTE] key. ON 1
I CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started.
TEXT document) ON 1
After scanning the patch, the screen automatically shifts to the J CPY TO CPY/ Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
dither selection menu. TXT PRT (copy document) ON 1
7) After completion of the adjustment of all the density adjustment K CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
items (dither), press [OK] key. PHOTO (copy document) ON 1
MONO A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
46-55 B TEXT Text OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
C TEXT PRT Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the drop out color in the ON 1
image send mode (monochrome manual D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
text mode). PHOTO ON 1
Section E TEXT PHOTO Text photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
Operation/Procedure ON 1
F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
In the image send mode (monochrome manual text mode), the
ON 1
range where color images are reproduced as monochrome images
G MAP Map OFF 0 1 (ON)
is adjusted.
ON 1
1) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. H LIGHT Light document OFF 0 0 (OFF)
When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout ON 1
becomes easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the I CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
adjustment value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult TEXT document) ON 1
to widen the reproduction range. J CPY TO CPY/ Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
TXT PRT (copy document) ON 1
Setting Default K CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
range value PHOTO (copy document) ON 1
A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3
2) Scan the document in the image send mode (monochrome

manual text mode), and check the adjustment result.
46-59
46-58 Function (Purpose) Used to perform the copy mode pseudo

resolution image process adjustment.
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolu-
Operation/Procedure
tion. (Smoothing process)
1) Select the MAIN (main scanning direction) or the SUB (sub
Section
scanning direction) button.
Operation/Procedure
2) Press the button of the adjustment value of the target copy
1) Select an item (mode) to be set with the button and the scroll mode.
key.
NOTE: This adjustment is valid when SIM46-58 Pseudo resolution
setting is set to ON.
3) Press [OK] key.
The thickness of images in the section processed by
1(ON): 9600 (equivalent) x 600 dpi smoothing is changed.
0 (OFF): 600 x 600 dpi Positive: The image in the section processed by smoothing
The setting is reflected only the image edge area. becomes thicker.
Negative: The image in the section processed by smoothing
Content (copy Setting Default
Mode Item/Display becomes thinner.
mode) range value
COLOR A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
B TEXT Text OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
C TEXT PRT Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO ON 1
E TEXT PHOTO Text photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
G MAP Map OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
Item
Item Scanning Adjustment Default
Scanning Adjustment Default (copy Content NOTE
(copy Content NOTE direction button value
direction button value mode)
mode)
SUB COLOR (-)2 Color copy 0 Sub
MAIN COLOR (-)2 Color copy 0 Main
COPY (-)1 For BLACK scanning
COPY (-)1 For BLACK scanning
K 0 direction
K 0 direction
(+)1 smoothing
(+)1 smoothing
fine
fine (+)2
(+)2 adjustment
adjustment COLOR (-)2 Color copy 0
COLOR (-)2 Color copy 0 Negative
Negative COPY (-)1 For CYAN
COPY (-)1 For CYAN (-)
(-) C 0
C 0 direction:
direction:
(+)1 The
(+)1 The
(+)2 smoothing
(+)2 smoothing
COLOR (-)2 Color copy 0 section
COLOR (-)2 Color copy 0 section
COPY (-)1 For becomes
COPY (-)1 For becomes
M 0 MAGENTA thinner.
M 0 MAGENTA thinner.
Positive
Positive (+)1
(+)1 (+)
(+) (+)2
(+)2 direction:
direction: COLOR (-)2 Color copy 0
COLOR (-)2 Color copy 0 The
The COPY (-)1 For
COPY (-)1 For smoothing
smoothing Y YELLOW
Y YELLOW 0 section
0 section
(+)1 becomes
(+)1 becomes
(+)2 thicker.
(+)2 thicker.
MONO (-)2 Mono- 0
MONO (-)2 Mono- 0
COPY (-)1 chrome
COPY (-)1 chrome
K 0 copy For
K 0 copy For
(+)1 BLACK
(+)1 BLACK
(+)2
(+)2
COLOR (-)2 Color print 0
PRINT (-)1 For BLACK
PRINT (-)1 For BLACK
K 0
K 0
(+)1
(+)1
(+)2
(+)2
PRINT (-)1 For CYAN
PRINT (-)1 For CYAN
C 0
C 0
(+)1
(+)1
(+)2
(+)2
PRINT (-)1 For
PRINT (-)1 For
M 0 MAGENTA
M 0 MAGENTA
(+)1
(+)1
(+)2
(+)2
PRINT (-)1 For
PRINT (-)1 For
Y 0 YELLOW
Y 0 YELLOW
(+)1
(+)1
(+)2
(+)2
MONO (-)2 Mono- 0
MONO (-)2 Mono- 0
PRINT (-)1 chrome
PRINT (-)1 chrome
K 0 print For
K 0 print For
(+)1 BLACK
(+)1 BLACK
(+)2
(+)2
46-60
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color
auto copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
2) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter
process mode).
3) Press [OK] key.
This is used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode
and the smoothness (roughness) in the dark area.

A SCREEN FILTER LEVEL H Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern image in auto Strong emphasis 1 3 (Auto)
L copy mode Soft emphasis 2
AUTO Auto 3
B CPY CL AUTO FILTER SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the automatic copy mode SOFT 1 2 (CENTER)
LEVEL CENTER (Text, Printed Photo / Printed Photo images) CENTER 2
HIGH HIGH 3
C CPY PUSH AUTO SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the automatic push scan SOFT 1 2 (CENTER)
FILTER LEVEL CENTER mode (Text, Printed Photo / Printed Photo images) CENTER 2
HIGH HIGH 3
D COLOR COPY : CMY OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image in color copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON mode ON 1
E COLOR COPY : K OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in color copy mode OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON ON 1
F SINGLE COLOR : CMY OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image in single color OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON copy mode ON 1
G 2 COLOR COPY : CMY OFF Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter to C/M/Y OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON images of the 2-color copy mode ON 1
H 2 COLOR COPY : K OFF Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter to K images of OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON the 2-color copy mode ON 1
I B/W COPY OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome copy mode OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON ON 1
J COLOR PUSH : RGB OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan color OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON mode ON 1
K B/W PUSH OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON monochrome mode ON 1
L COLOR PRINT: CMY OFF Setting of ON/OFF of soft filter application to color print C, OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON M, Y images ON 1
M COLOR PRINT: K OFF Setting of ON/OFF of soft filter application to color print K OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON images ON 1
N B/W PRINT OFF Setting of ON/OFF of soft filter application to monochrome OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON print images ON 1
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Q SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni- [SCR 1 MIDDLE] adjustment: Medium
tion level. density dots
R SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
Section [SCR 1 LOW] adjustment: Low
Operation/Procedure density dots
1) Select an adjustment mode. S SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
[SCR 2] adjustment: Dot 2
T SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
panel.
[SCR 3] adjustment: Dot 3
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. U SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
4) Press [OK] key. [LINE HALFTONE] adjustment: line
screen
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe-
cially required.
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ-
ent from the default value, image quality trouble may occur 46-62
for some documents. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Item/Display Content Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
COLOR AUTO [Color/Gray] Auto ACS, the area separation, the background
TPP [Color/Gray] Manual (Text print) image process, and the auto exposure
COPY(TPP) [Color/Gray] Copy document (Text print) mode.
MONO AUTO [Monochrome] Auto Section
TPP [Monochrome] Manual (Text print) Operation/Procedure
COPY(TPP) [Monochrome] Copy document (Text print)
panel.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
range value
A SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 3) Press [OK] key.
[TXT ON SCR] Text on dot NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe-
B SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 cially required.
[LINE SCR] line screen
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ-
C SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
ent from the default value, image quality trouble may occur
[SMALL SCR] Dot in a small area
for some documents.
D SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
[HIGH LPI] High line number
Setting Default
judgment select Item/Display Content
range value
E SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
A SW_ACS ACS judgment 0-1 1
[TXT ON SCR IMAGE Text on image send
reference area select
SEND] dots
B TEXT_IMAGE Text/Image judgment 0-6 3
F SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
priority level adjustment
[BK TXT 1] adjustment: Black text
1 C TEXT_BLANK Text/Blank judgment 0-6 4
priority level adjustment
G SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
[CL TXT 1] adjustment: Color text D HT_LV Dot area judgment 0-6 1
1 threshold value
adjustment
H SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
[BK TXT 2, CL TXT 2] adjustment: Black text E AE_AREA_LV Color AE judgment 0-6 3
2, Color text 2 target area adjustment
I SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50 F AE_LV_CC AE background 0-8 4
[TXT ON SCR 1] adjustment: Text 1 on detection division result
dots adjustment:
For color copy
J SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
[TXT ON SCR 2] adjustment: Text 2 on G AE_LV_MC AE background 0-8 4
dots detection division result
adjustment:
K SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
For monochrome copy
[TXT ON SCR AREA] adjustment: Detection
area of text on dots H AE_LV_CS AE background 0-8 4
detection division result
L SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
adjustment:
[HIGH LPI] adjustment: High line
For color scan
number judgment
I AE_LV_MS AE background 0-8 4
M SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
detection division result
[BK] adjustment: No
adjustment:
chrome judgment
For monochrome scan
N SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
J AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0-4 0
[CL] adjustment: Chrome
_LV_L_U density threshold value
judgment
adjustment (lower limit)
O SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
K AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0 - 10 0
[TXT ON BG] adjustment: Text on
LV_L_O density threshold value
background
adjustment (upper limit)
P SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
L AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0 - 10 5
[SCR 1 HIGH] adjustment: High
LV_C detection level
density dots
adjustment (chroma)
M AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1 TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Character print
_CC For color copy (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
N AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, 1-9 5
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1 (COPY TO COPY) Character
_MC For mono- (color copy)
chrome copy J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
O AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) PRINTED PHOTO (COPY Printed photo
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1 TO COPY) (color copy)
_CS For color scan K COLOR PUSH : Text print 1-9 3
P AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1 L COLOR PUSH : TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3
_MS For mono- M COLOR PUSH : Printed photo 1-9 5
chrome copy PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
Q BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0 N COLOR PUSH : Photograph 1-9 5
LV_L adjustment (value) PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
R BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0 O COLOR PUSH : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
LV_C adjustment (chroma) TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
S MODE0_UNDER Mode 0 developing 0-6 0 P COLOR PUSH : MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
paper mode select
T MODE1_UNDER Mode 1 developing 0-6 0
paper mode select
U MODE5_UNDER Mode 5 developing 0-6 0 46-65
paper mode select
V MODE6_UNDER Mode 6 developing 0-6 0
paper mode select Function (Purpose) Used to set the color correction table.
W SW_CHANGE_ Mode 0: Mode judgment 0-6 0 Section
MODE0 select
Operation/Procedure
X SW_CHANGE_ Mode 1: Mode judgment 0-6 1
MODE1 select 1) Select an adjustment mode.
Y SW_CHANGE_ Mode 2: Mode judgment 0-6 2 2) Select an item (mode) to be set with the scroll key.
MODE2 select 3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
Z SW_CHANGE_ Mode 3: Mode judgment 0-6 3
MODE3 select
4) Press [OK] key.
AA SW_CHANGE_ Mode 4: Mode judgment 0-6 4 When the setting is changed, the color tone is changed. This func-
MODE4 select tion is used to make copies of different color tone for each copy
AB SW_CHANGE_ Mode 5: Mode judgment 0-6 5 mode.
MODE5 select The initial value must be set unless any special change is required.
AC SW_CHANGE_ Mode 6: Mode judgment 0-6 6
MODE6 select Setting Default
range value
COPY A [MANUAL] TEXT Text print 0-8 0
PRT
46-63 B [MANUAL] TEXT Text 0-8 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setup C [MANUAL] Printed 0-8 0
PRINTED PHOTO Photo
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low
D [MANUAL] Photograph 0-8 1
density section.
PHOTO
Section E [MANUAL] TEXT Text 0-8 1
Operation/Procedure PHOTO photograph
F [MANUAL] MAP Map 0-8 0
G [MANUAL] LIGHT Pencil 0-8 0
panel.
H [MANUAL] CPT Copy 0-8 0
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. TO CPT/TXT PRT document/
3) Press [OK] key. Text print
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the I [MANUAL] CPT Copy 0-8 0
background and the low density image is increased. When the TO CPT/TEXT document/
Text
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
J [MANUAL] CPY Copy 0-8 0
and the low density image is decreased.
TO CPY/PHOTO document/
Printed
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Photo
range value
K AUTO0 Automatic 0-8 2
A COLOR COPY : Text print 1-9 3
mode
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
judgment 0
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3
L AUTO1 Automatic 0-8 2
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
mode
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
judgment 1
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
(color density)
Setting Default
range value
COPY M AUTO2 Automatic 0-8 3
mode
judgment 2
N AUTO3 Automatic 0-8 3
mode
judgment 3
O AUTO4 Automatic 0-8 2
mode
judgment 4
P AUTO5 Automatic 0-8 2
mode
judgment 5
Q AUTO6 Automatic 0-8 2
mode
judgment 6
PREVIEW A [MANUAL] TEXT Text print 0-4 0
(Preview PRT
screen) B [MANUAL] TEXT Text 0-4 0
C [MANUAL] Printed 0-4 0
PRINTED PHOTO Photo
D [MANUAL] Photograph 0-4 1
PHOTO
E [MANUAL] TEXT Text 0-4 1
PHOTO photograph
F [MANUAL] MAP Map 0-4 0
G [MANUAL] LIGHT Pencil 0-4 0
H [MANUAL] CPT Copy 0-4 0
TO CPT/TXT PRT document/
Text print
I [MANUAL] CPT Copy 0-4 0
TO CPT/TEXT document/
Text
J [MANUAL] CPY Copy 0-4 0
TO CPY/PHOTO document/
Printed
Photo
K AUTO0 Automatic 0-4 2
mode
judgment 0
L AUTO1 Automatic 0-4 2
mode
judgment 1
M AUTO2 Automatic 0-4 3
mode
judgment 2
N AUTO3 Automatic 0-4 3
mode
judgment 3
O AUTO4 Automatic 0-4 2
mode
judgment 4
P AUTO5 Automatic 0-4 2
mode
judgment 5
Q AUTO6 Automatic 0-4 2
mode
judgment 6
46-66
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of watermarks in the copy/printer mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of watermarks in the
copy/printer mode.
1) Select the adjustment mode.
2) Select an adjustment item according to the necessity.
4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Note
range value
PATTERN A WOVEN DEN BK LOW Watermark density level (Black LOW) 0 - 255 15 The adjustment value is changed to
increase or decrease the density of the
B WOVEN DEN BK MIDDLE Watermark density level (Black MIDDLE) 0 - 255 19 watermark of background documents
(primary output).
C WOVEN DEN BK HIGH Watermark density level (Black HIGH) 0 - 255 23 To increase the watermark density,
increase the adjustment value.
D WOVEN DEN C LOW Watermark density level (Cyan LOW) 0 - 255 19 To decrease the watermark density,
decrease the adjustment value.
E WOVEN DEN C MIDDLE Watermark density level (Cyan MIDDLE) 0 - 255 23
NOTE: When the adjustment value is
F WOVEN DEN C HIGH Watermark density level (Cyan HIGH) 0 - 255 27 increased, the watermark area
which is originally not reproduced
G WOVEN DEN M LOW Watermark density level (Magenta LOW) 0 - 255 15 becomes difficult to disappear.
H WOVEN DEN M MIDDLE Watermark density level (Magenta MIDDLE) 0 - 255 18 decreased, the watermark area
which is originally reproduced
I WOVEN DEN M HIGH Watermark density level (Magenta HIGH) 0 - 255 21 becomes easy to disappear.
J CONTRAST Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2 This is used to adjust the variation in the
watermark density when the adjustment
value of the watermark print/contrast
adjustment in the system setting is changed
by 1.
When this value is increased, the variation
is also increased. When the value is
decreased, the variation is also decreased.
When the adjustment value is 0, the result
of the contrast adjustment is not reflected.
(* The adjustment value must be set to 1 or
greater.)
K HT TYPE (POSI) For half-tone index watermark type positive 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing characters of
watermark copy (secondary output) more
clearly, set to 43.
In that case, however, the containing
characters of the watermark document
(primary output) can be easily reproduced.
L HT TYPE (NEGA) For half-tone index watermark type negative 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing characters of
watermark copy (secondary output) more
clearly, set to 43.
In that case, however, the containing
characters of the watermark document
(primary output) can be easily reproduced.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Note
range value
COPY A TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed Photo OFF 0-1 0 1 Normally set to the default.
MODE mode select Enable/ ON 1 No need to change in the market.
Disable
B TEXT Text mode select OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
C PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/Disable ON 1
D PHOTOGRAPH Photograph mode OFF 0-1 0 1
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph OFF 0-1 0 1
mode select Enable/ ON 1
Disable
F MAP Map mode select OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
G LIGHT Light density OFF 0-1 0 1
document mode select ON 1
Enable/Disable
H TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Copy document: Text/ OFF 0-1 0 1
(CPY TO CPY) Printed Photo mode ON 1
select Enable/Disable
I TEXT (CPY TO CPY) Copy document: Text OFF 0-1 0 1
mode select Enable/ ON 1
Disable
J PRINTED PHOTO Copy document: OFF 0-1 0 1
(CPY TO CPY) Printed Photo mode ON 1
select Enable/Disable
K AUTO Automatic mode OFF 0-1 0 1
COPY L DEFAULT MODE Default exposure TEXT/ 0-5 0 0 Normally set to the default.
MODE mode PRINTED PHOTO No need to change in the market.
Used to specify the TEXT 1
exposure mode set PRINTED PHOTO 2
when the watermark is PHOTOGRAPH 3
ON.
TEXT/PHOTO 4
MAP 5
POSITION A LINE SPACE 1 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 50
(24P - 36P)
B LINE SPACE 2 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 60
(37P - 48P)
C LINE SPACE 3 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 70
(49P - 64P)
D LINE SPACE 4 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 80
(65P - 80P)
E BLANK H/B 1 Upper margin/Lower margin in the 0 - 200 25
watermark print box (24P - 36P)
F BLANK H/B 2 Upper margin/Lower margin in the 0 - 200 30
G BLANK H/B 3 Upper margin/Lower margin in the 0 - 200 35
H BLANK H/B 4 Upper margin/Lower margin in the 0 - 200 40
I BLANK L/R 1 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 60
print box (24P - 36P)
J BLANK L/R 2 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 90
K BLANK L/R 3 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 120
L BLANK L/R 4 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 150
2) Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key.
46-74
Purpose Adjustment
4) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Auto
adjustment)/Printer color balance adjust- Setting Default
ment (Auto adjustment) range value
TEXT A GLYPH Text handling 0-2 0
Section
SENSITIVITY selection
Operation/Procedure B BG SW FOR Line handling 0-1 0
This simulation is used to perform SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 contin- FINDLINES selection
uously. C HOR Line detection 0-2 0
To perform both the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic FINDLINES SW SW (H)
adjustment) and the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic D VERT Line detection 0-2 0
FINDLINES SW SW (V)
adjustment), use this simulation for efficient adjustment operations.
E FGCOLOR Text color 0-3 0
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the high density process control is INDEXING SEL number
performed. Then, the copy color balance adjustment pattern is adjustment SW
printed. F FGCOLOR Text color 0-4 2
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, INDEXING ADJ adjustment
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. COLOR A LUMINANCE Luminance 0-4 2
ADJUSTMENT adjustment
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
is performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed. B CHROMA Chroma 0-2 1
INTENT selection
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust- C NEUTRAL Neutral 0-2 0
ment pattern is printed. ADJUSTMENT adjustment
5) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, D R-RATIO Gray scale 0 - 1000 299
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. ADJUSTMENT adjustment (R)
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust- E G-RATIO Gray scale 0 - 1000 587
ment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the adjustment ADJUSTMENT adjustment (G)
result pattern is printed. BG LAYER A BG LAYER Speed priority 0-2 1
INTENT 1 setting
7) Press [OK] key, and the halftone correction target is registered. B BG LAYER Image quality 0-2 1
8) When [EXECUTE] key is displayed, press it. INTENT 2 priority setting
When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the adjust-
ment is completed.
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes effective only when the
adjustment procedure for both copy and print mode have
completed successfully. For example, when the copy color
balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed
and the simulation is canceled, the adjustment result is not
effective.
46-90
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process operation of high-
compression PDF images.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode.
46-91
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of black text.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set.
When COLOR key or MONO key is pressed, the adjustment value
is set and a copy is made simultaneously.
Setting Default
Item Display Content Description
range value
A SEGMENT PARAM COMMON Area separation setting select 0: Other than image send mode black text 0-1 0
SPECIAL emphasis (simple, high compression)
1: Image send mode black text
emphasis (simple, high compression)
B BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [COL: COMPACT] JPEG recompression level adjustment The JPEG compression ratio of the 0-2 1
[Color: High compression mode] background layer is selected.
C BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [COL: ULTRA FINE] JPEG recompression level adjustment 0: Low 0-2 1
[Color: Ultra fine mode] 1: Middle
D BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [GRY: COMPACT] JPEG recompression level adjustment 2: High 0-2 1
[Gray: High compression mode]
E BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [GRY: ULTRA FINE] JPEG recompression level adjustment 0-2 1
[Gray: Ultra fine mode]
F FG: TARGET AREA TYPE0 Front ground extraction area select 0: type0 0-2 0
TYPE1 1: type1
TYPE2 2: type2
G FG: TEXT DENSITY [COL] Front ground black text density The black text density in the front ground 0 - 10 5
adjustment [Color] layer is changed.
H FG: TEXT DENSITY [GRY] Front ground black text density 0: Dark - 5: Default - 10: Light 0 - 10 5
adjustment [Gray]
I ULTRA FINE MODE OFF High compression/Ultra Fine mode 0: High compression mode 0-1 0
ON select 1: Ultra fine mode
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is specially required.
When a great change is made to the adjustment value from the initial value, an image quality problem may occur.
48-5
48
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to correct the scan image magnifica-
48-1
tion ration (in the sub scanning direction).
Purpose Adjustment
Section Scanner section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica-
Operation/Procedure
tion ratio (in the main scanning direction
and the sub scanning direction). 1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.
panel.
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is
adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci-
3) Press [OK] key. fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform
The set value is saved. this adjustment.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,
ratio is increased. change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corre- is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio. the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B, D, or F corre-
Setting Default
sponds to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio. Item/Display Content
range value
[DSPF] A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50
Setting Default B MR(MID) Scanner motor (Reference speed) 1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50
range value
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50 D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment (High speed)
(CCD) E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50 (Reference speed)
magnification ratio adjustment
(CCD)
C SPF (MAIN) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment 48-6
(Main scan) Purpose Adjustment
D SPF (SUB) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each
(Sub scan) motor.
E SPFB (MAIN) DSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50 Section
Operation/Procedure
(Main scan)
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [COLOR] [MONO]
[RSPF] [HEAVY] keys on the touch panel.
Setting Default 2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
Item/Display Content panel.
range value
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
magnification ratio adjustment 4) Press [OK] key.
(CCD)
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
The set value is saved.
magnification ratio adjustment When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased,
(CCD) and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds
C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50 to a change of about 0.1% in the speed.
(Main scan) Setting Default
Item/Display Content Mode
D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50 range value
magnification ratio adjustment A RRM Registration Color COLOR 1 - 99 53
(Sub scan) motor Mono- MONO
E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50 correction chrome
magnification ratio adjustment value Heavy HEAVY 55
(Main scan) paper
F SPFB (SUB) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50 B BTM Belt motor Color COLOR 1 - 99 46
magnification ratio adjustment correction Mono- MONO
(Sub scan) value chrome
Heavy HEAVY
paper
C DM_K Drum K Color COLOR 1 - 99 44
motor Mono- MONO
correction chrome
value Heavy HEAVY
paper
Setting Default Error display
Item/Display Content Mode
range value Item/Display Content in case of
D DM_CL Drum CL Color COLOR 1 - 99 44 abnormality
motor Heavy HEAVY ICU (SUB) ICU Sub section (ARM9) ICUS
correction paper LANGUAGE Language support data program LANG
value SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD SLIST
DVM_K Developing Mono- MONO 1 - 99 50 UNICONTENTS Display contents data UNICON
K motor chrome EOSA embedded OSA EOSA
correction
PCL (PROFILE) PCL Color profile PCLP
value
PCU (BOOT) PCU Boot section PCUB
E DVM_K Developing Color COLOR 1 - 99 50
PCU (MAIN) PCU Main section PCUM
K motor Heavy HEAVY
correction DESK (BOOT) Desk unit Boot section DESKB
paper
value DESK (MAIN) Desk unit Main section DESKM
F FSM Fusing motor Color COLOR** 1 - 99 40 A4LCC (BOOT) Side LCC (A4) Boot section LCC4B
correction Heavy HEAVY 42 A4LCC (MAIN) Side LCC (A4) Main section LCC4M
value paper FIN (BOOT) Inner finisher Boot section FINB
G DVM_CL Developing Color COLOR 1 - 99 50 FIN (MAIN) Inner finisher Main section FINM
CL motor Heavy HEAVY SADDLE (BOOT) Saddle Boot section SDLB
correction paper SADDLE (MAIN) Saddle Main section SDLM
value 1KFIN (BOOT) 1K finisher Boot section FIN1B
H PFM Paper transport motor COLOR* 1 - 99 50 1KFIN (MAIN) 1K finisher Main section FIN1M
correction value 4KFIN (BOOT) 4K finisher Boot section FIN4B
I POM Paper exit motor COLOR* 1 - 99 45 4KFIN (MAIN) 4K finisher Main section FIN4M
correction value
1KPUNCH (BOOT) 1K finisher punch unit Boot section 1PUNB
J CPFM Paper feed motor COLOR* 1 - 99 50
1KPUNCH (MAIN) 1K finisher punch unit Main section 1PUNM
correction value
4KPUNCH (BOOT) 4K finisher punch unit Boot section 4PUNB
K FUSER Fusing speed select HEAVY 1 - 99 50
4KPUNCH (MAIN) 4K finisher punch unit Main section 4PUNM
SETTING timing
SCU (BOOT) SCU Boot section SCUB
L RRM RPM acceleration start HEAVY 0 - 255 0
START timing SCU (MAIN) SCU Main section SCUM
M RRM RPM acceleration end HEAVY 0 - 255 210 DSPF (BOOT) DSPF Boot section DSPFB
END timing DSPF (MAIN) DSPF Main section DSPFM
FAX (BOOT) FAX1 Boot section FAXB
* Common items for color, monochrome, and heavy paper FAX (MAIN) FAX1 Main section FAXM
** Common items for color and monochrome ANIMATION Animation data ANIME
The greater the correction value is, the higher the speed is, and ACRE (BOOT) Enhanced compression kit Boot ACREB
vice versa. Change by ±1 corresponds to 0.1%. ACRE (MAIN) Enhanced compression kit Main ACREM
ACRE_DATA Enhanced compression kit Table ACRED
List of error displays in case of abnormal end

49 ICUM ICU Main section
ICUBM ICU Boot section main
49-1 ICUCN ICU Boot section CN
ICUS ICU Sub section (ARM9)
Purpose
LANG Language support data program
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update. GRAPH Graphic data for L-LCD
Section SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
Operation/Procedure EOSA embedded OSA
PCLB PCL Boot section
1) Save the firmware to the USB memory.
PCLM PCL Main section
2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the
PCLC PCL Configuration data
operation panel section.)
PCLP PCL Color profile
3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel. PCUB PCU Boot section
4) Select a target firmware. PCUM PCU Main section
Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively. DESKB Desk unit Boot section
DESKM Desk unit Main section
LCC4B Side LCC (A4) Boot section
6) Press [YES] key.
LCC4M Side LCC (A4) Main section
The selected firmware is updated. FINB Inner finisher Boot section
When the operation is normally completed, "COMPLETE" is FINM Inner finisher Main section
displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is dis- SDLB Saddle Boot section
played. SDLM Saddle Main section
FIN1B 1K finisher Boot section
Error display FIN1M 1K finisher Main section
Item/Display Content in case of FIN4B 4K finisher Boot section
abnormality
FIN4M 4K finisher Main section
ICUM(MAIN) ICUM Main section ICUMM
1PUNB 1K finisher punch unit Boot section
ICUM(OS) ICUM OS ICUMO
1PUNM 1K finisher punch unit Main section
ICUM(CN) ICUM CN ICUMC
4PUNB 4K finisher punch unit Boot section
ICUM(BOOT) ICUM BOOT ICUMT
4PUNM 4K finisher punch unit Main section
ICUM(BIOS) ICUM BIOS ICUMB
SCUB SCU Boot section
ICU (MAIN) ICU Main section ICUM
SCUM SCU Main section
ICU (BOOTM) ICU Boot section main ICUBM
DSPFB DSPF Boot section 50
DSPFM DSPF Main section
FAXB FAX1 Boot section
50-1
FAXM FAX1 Main section
ANIME Animation data Purpose Adjustment
ACREB Enhanced compression kit Boot Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust-
ACREM Enhanced compression kit Main ment
ACRED Enhanced compression kit Table Section
Operation/Procedure
49-3 panel.
Purpose 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
HDD. default.
Section RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
Operation/Procedure LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. SIDE: Side image loss adjustment
* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E- 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is
Setting Default
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1. Item/Display Content
range value
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis- A Lead RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.) edge reference position
The current version and the update version are displayed. adjust- (OC)
B ment RRCB- Regis- Standard 1 - 99 50
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. value CS12 tration Tray
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes C RRCB- motor Desk 1 - 99 50
active from gray out. CS34 ON
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is D RRCB-LCC timing LCC 1 - 99 50
updated. E RRCB-MFT adjust- Manual 1 - 99 50
ment paper feed
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed. F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
loss area loss area setting
H setting SIDE Side image loss area 0 - 99 20
49-5 value adjustment
Purpose I Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 40
adjust- adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the watermark update. J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
Section adjustment
Operation/Procedure K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark adjust- OC center adjustment
update. ment
3) The current version and the update version are displayed. M Magnifica- SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
tion ratio SPEED_ magnification ratio
correction OC adjustment (CCD)
5) Press [YES] key. N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
The selected watermark is updated. scanning correction value
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
49-10 value value
Purpose Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the ACU firmware update. value
R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
Section value
Operation/Procedure S DENB-LCC LCC correction value 1 - 99 50
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. T DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 55
value
2) Press [YES] key.
U DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
3) Press [OK] key when the update is finished and updating result correction value
is displayed. Then, restart the machine.
A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying
the image lead edge reference is adjusted. (01.mm/step)
* When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When
the value is increased, the timing is delayed.
B - F. (RRC-B) Timing of paper (registration roller ON) for the
image position on the transfer belt is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the
value is increased, the timing is advanced.
G. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
step)
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
H. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted.
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
(0.1mm/step)
I. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
step)
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
J. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
step)
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
K. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of
paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
50-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
position. (PRINTER MODE)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with scroll key on the
touch panel.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard reference value: 4.0 +/- 2.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.
Setting Default
range value
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print lead edge image 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the
position. printer. When the adjustment value of this item is
(PRINTER MODE) decreased by 1, the printer print start position in the paper
transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.
B DEN-B Rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 30 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the
adjustment value of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the
print area adjustment value in the sub scanning direction
for the paper transport direction is decreased by 0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area adjustment 1 - 99 20 Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and
right edges of paper. When the adjustment value is
increased, the void amount is increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50 Fine adjustment value of each paper feed source for the
correction value adjustment value of DEN-B
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void aria adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria adjustment 1 - 99 55
correction value
K DENB-HV Heavy paper correction value 1 - 99 50
L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
Setting Default
range value
M PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
N DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO No 1
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.
[RSPF]
50-6
Setting Default
Purpose Adjustment Item/Display Content
range value
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
the image loss. (DSPF/RSPF mode) document scan
position adjustment
Section DSPF/RSPF
(CCD)
Operation/Procedure B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch document scan
panel. position adjustment
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (CCD)
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) amount EDGE edge image loss
[DSPF] setting (SIDE1) amount setting
Setting Default REAR image loss amount
range value (SIDE1) setting
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50 E TRAIL_ Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
document scan position EDGE edge image loss
adjustment (CCD) (SIDE1) amount setting
B SIDE2 Back surface document 1 - 99 50 F Image loss LEAD_ Back surface lead 0 - 99 20
scan position amount EDGE edge image loss
adjustment (CCD) setting (SIDE2) amount setting
C Image loss LEAD_ Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20 G SIDE2 FRONT_ Back surface side 0 - 99 20
amount EDGE image loss amount REAR image loss amount
setting (SIDE1) setting (SIDE2) setting
D SIDE1 FRONT_ Front surface side 0 - 99 20 H TRAIL_ Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 40
REAR image loss amount EDGE image loss amount
(SIDE1) setting (SIDE2) setting
E TRAIL_ Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 40 I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
EDGE image loss amount document off-center
(SIDE1) setting adjustment
F Image loss LEAD_ Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 40 J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
amount EDGE image loss amount document off-center
setting (SIDE2) setting adjustment
G SIDE2 FRONT_ Back surface side 0 - 99 20 K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
REAR image loss amount surface magnification
(SIDE2) setting ratio (Sub scan)
H TRAIL_ Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 20 L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
EDGE image loss amount surface magnification
(SIDE2) setting ratio (Sub scan)
document off-center Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing
adjustment is delayed.
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
document off-center
is increased.
adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document front 1 - 99 50 Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
surface magnification increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
ratio (Sub scan) All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing
is delayed.
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
is increased.
Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
50-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magni-
fication ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for
each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value NOTE

A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio BK 60 - 140 100 Adjustment Item List
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment value (Manual paper feed) 1 - 99 50
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) 1 - 99 50
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) 1 - 99 50
E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) 1 - 99 50
F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) 1 - 99 50
G MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment value (Large capacity tray) 1 - 99 50
H MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment value (Duplex) 1 - 99 50 Adjustment Item List
NOTE: If the adjustment items A - G are not properly adjusted,
this adjustment cannot be executed properly.
I SUB-MFT Registration motor ON timing adjustment Manual paper feed 1 - 99 50
J SUB-CS1 Standard cassette 1 - 99 50
K SUB-DSK DESK 1 - 99 50
L SUB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 50
M SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
N MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print
O PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1) conditions setting
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
P DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO No 1
Item A: When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set value is
decreased, the image magnification ratio is decreased.
Item B - H: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to
the rear frame side.
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
50-12
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center
position adjustment. (The adjustment is
made separately for each scan mode.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch Setting Default
panel. range value
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
B SPF (SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is center adjustment
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is C SPF (SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side. center adjustment
1step = 0.1mm
50-20
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment (Main scan-
ning direction)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.

A CYAN(FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction CYAN F side 1 - 399 200
B CYAN(REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction CYAN R side 1 - 399 200
C MAGENTA(FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction MAGENTA F side 1 - 399 200
D MAGENTA(REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction MAGENTA R side 1 - 399 200
E YELLOW(FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction YELLOW F side 1 - 399 200
F YELLOW(REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction YELLOW R side 1 - 399 200
G CYAN(SUB) Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction CYAN (Black drum reference) 1 - 399 200
H MAGENTA(SUB) Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction MAGENTA (Black drum reference) 1 - 399 200
I YELLOW(SUB) Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction YELLOW (Black drum reference) 1 - 399 200
J OFFSET_C_F Registration adjustment value main scanning direction offset value CYAN (FRONT) 1 - 99 50
K OFFSET_C_R Registration adjustment value main scanning direction offset value CYAN (REAR) 1 - 99 50
L OFFSET_M_F Registration adjustment value main scanning direction offset value MAGENTA (FRONT) 1 - 99 50
M OFFSET_M_R Registration adjustment value main scanning direction offset value MAGENTA (REAR) 1 - 99 50
N OFFSET_Y_F Registration adjustment value main scanning direction offset value YELLOW (FRONT) 1 - 99 50
O OFFSET_Y_R Registration adjustment value main scanning direction offset value YELLOW (REAR) 1 - 99 50
P OFFSET_C_S Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction offset value CYAN 1 - 99 50
Q OFFSET_M_S Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction offset value MAGENTA 1 - 99 50
R OFFSET_Y_S Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction offset value YELLOW 1 - 99 50
S MULTICOUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
T PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 3 (CS2)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
U DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO No 1
50-22
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image registration. (Main
scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto
adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The adjustment is automatically performed, and the adjust-
ment data are displayed.
NOTE: The contents of the following list are mainly used by the
technical division, and are not necessary for the market.
Default
Item/Display Content Display NOTE
value
MAIN F C Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is F side)
M Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is F side)
Y Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is F side)
MAIN R C Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is R side)
M Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is R side)
Y Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is R side)
SUB C Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Cyan drum to black drum)
M Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Magenta drum to cyan drum)
Y Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Yellow drum to magenta drum)
SKEW C Calculated result of print skew amount (Cyan) L99.9 - R99.9 - If the value is plus, R is displayed to left side of
(+/- 0.1) numerical value. If the value is minus, L is
M Calculated result of print skew amount (magenta) L99.9 - R99.9 - displayed to left side of numerical value.
(+/- 0.1) When the value is -5.1 - +5.1, "(OK)" is place
Y Calculated result of print skew amount (yellow) L99.9 - R99.9 - at the back of the value. For the other cases,
(+/- 0.1) "(NG)" is displayed. *1
PHASE Phase Angle step 1-8 2 Same item as SIM44-31. (41cpm machine)
adjustment (1)45 degree C (2)90 degree C (3)135 degree C(4)180
value BK degree C (5)225 degree C (6)270 degree C (7)315
-> CL degree C
Phase 2 Same item as SIM44-31. (51cpm machine)
adjustment
value C
Phase 4
adjustment
value M
Phase 5
adjustment
value Y
Color/ Default
Item/Display Content Setting range (unit) NOTE
History value
MAIN F - REG_M_F Registration adjustment correction 1.0 - 399.0 (+/- 0.1) CMY/- 100
(VALUE) amount main scanning direction F
() REG_M_F (DIF) Registration value correction -399.0 - 399.0 (+/- CMY/- 0
amount from the previous one, main 0.1)
scanning F
MAIN R - REG_M_R Registration adjustment correction 1.0 - 399.0 (+/- 0.1) CMY/- 100
(VALUE) value, main scanning direction R
() REG_M_R (DIF) Registration value correction -399.0 - 399.0 (+/- CMY/- 0
amount from the previous one, main 0.1)
scanning R
SUB - REG_SUB Registration adjustment correction 1.0 - 399.0 (+/- 0.1) CMY/- 100
(VALUE) value, sub scanning direction
() REG_SUB (DIF) Registration value correction -399.0 - 399.0 (+/- CMY/- 0
amount from the previous one, sub 0.1)
scanning
SKEW CMY SKEW_CLC SKEW adjustment rotating direction L99.9 - R99.9 (+/- KCMY/- 0 If the value is plus, L is
and the number of clicks (CMY) 0.1) displayed to left side of
numerical value. If the value is
minus, R is displayed to left
side of numerical value.
When the value is -5.1 - +5.1,
"(OK)" is place at the back of
the value. For the other cases,
"(NG)" is displayed. *1
ALL_ SKEW adjustment rotating direction If the value is plus, L is
ROTATE and the number of clicks (K) displayed to left side of
numerical value. If the value is
minus, R is displayed to left
side of numerical value. *2

Color/ Default
Item/Display Content Setting range (unit) NOTE
History value
PHASE PHASE_ADJ Phase adjustment value (1: Value of 1 - 8 (+/-1) -/2 1 -
this time, 2: Value of the previous
time)
Angle step 0 degree(1) -> 45
degree (2) -> 90 degree (3) -> 135
degree (4) -> 180 degree (5) -> 225
degree (6) -> 270 degree (7) ->
315 degree (8)
*1: The color image skew adjustment is performed according to this display value.
When "R" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the value.
When "L" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the value.
*2: The color image skew adjustment is performed according to this display value.
When "R" is displayed at the head of the value, turn the skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the number of the value.
When "L" is displayed at the head of the value, turn the skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the number of the value.
At that time, the values under the decimal point are rounded.
Error displays in case of abnormal end

Error
Error display Error content Description
code
Forcible end - SUSPENDED Door open end Door open during operation
error - SUSPENDED CA end CA button pressed during operation
- - OFF end Unconfirmed operation during operation (Power OFF)
Basic error 01 TONNER EMPTY Toner Empty BK or ALL Color toner EMPTY detection
02 BEFOR BEHAVIOR Other condition Other condition
04 SENSOR CALIBLATION F Calibration error F The target is not reached by 3 times of retry of F or R
05 SENSOR CALIBLATION R Calibration error R
06 SENSOR CALIBLATION FR Calibration error FR
07 TIME OVER Time error No data are obtained for 90sec from data acquisition
08 PROCESS CONTROL Process control error Process control error detection
Sub scanning 10 - 49 SUB XXX XXXX XXX
adjustment error
Main scanning 50 - 89 MAIN XXX XXXX XXX
adjustment error
Adjustment 90 RANGE_SKEW_K 90 Adjustment range error SKEW K color
range error 91 RANGE_SUB_C 91 Adjustment range error Sub scan C color
92 RANGE_SKEW_C 92 Adjustment range error SKEW C color
93 RANGE_SUB_M 93 Adjustment range error Sub scan M color
94 RANGE_SKEW_M 94 Adjustment range error SKEW M color
95 RANGE_SUB_Y 95 Adjustment range error Sub scan Y color
96 RANGE_SKEW_Y 96 Adjustment range error SKEW Y color
97 RANGE_MAIN_C_F 97 Adjustment range error Main scan C color F
99 RANGE_MAIN_C_R 99 Adjustment range error Main scan C color R
101 RANGE_MAIN_M_F 101 Adjustment range error Main scan M color F
103 RANGE_MAIN_M_R 103 Adjustment range error Main scan M color R
105 RANGE_MAIN_Y_F 105 Adjustment range error Main scan Y color F
107 RANGE_MAIN_Y_R 107 Adjustment range error Main scan Y color R
50-24
Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the
market.)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2,
50-20, 21 and 22.
Section
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: This simulation is mainly used by the technical division,
and is not necessary for the market.

50-27
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment
of scanned images in the FAX or image
send mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER]
key.
panel.
[DSPF]

FAX send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
C TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
E amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
When image A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
send mode B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR(OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
(Except for C TRAIL_EDGE(OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
FAX and D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
copy) amount setting
E FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1step = 0.1mm
[RSPF]
FAX send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
C TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
E amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
When image A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
send mode B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR(OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
(Except for C TRAIL_EDGE(OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
FAX and D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
copy) amount setting
E FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1step = 0.1mm

50-28 Item/Display Content Section
Purpose Adjustment BK-MAG MFT BK main scanning Main scanning Engine
ADJ CS1 magnification ratio direction image
Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image magnification ratio
CS2
loss, void area, image off-center, and image adjustment
ADU
magnification ratio.
CS3
Section CS4
Operation/Procedure LCC
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM50-28. RESULT Adjustment result display
* ADJ16 Print image position, image magnification ratio, void area, DATA Adjustment operation data display
off-center adjustments (Manual adjustments)
* ADJ 17 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Print engine)
(Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 18 Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)
51
* ADJ 19 Copy image position and the image loss
(Manual adjustments)
51-1
1) Select an adjustment item with the menu button.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
3) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the
secondary transport voltage.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
5) Press [OK] key. Section
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Content Section 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
OC ADJ MFT Document lead edge Image loss off-center Scanner panel.
CS1 sub scanning
Document off-center direction image
CS2
ADU Sub scanning magnification ratio 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
magnification ratio adjustment When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF tim-
CS3
(Document table ing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is
CS4
mode)
LCC increased, the timing is delayed.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed
Item/Display Content Section by about 10ms. The setting range is -490 - +490ms.
SPF ALL SIDE1 MFT Document Image loss Scanner
Setting Default
ADJ (Front lead edge off-center Item/Display Content
range value
(DSPF/ surface) sub
RSPF) Document scanning A TC2 ON TIMING Secondary transfer voltage 1 - 99 40
SIDE2 CS1
off-center direction ON timing setting
(Back CS2
surface) Sub image B TC2 OFF TIMING Secondary transfer voltage 1 - 99 60
ADU
scanning magnifica- OFF timing setting
CS3
magnification ratio
CS4
tion ratio adjustment
LCC Document (DSPF/
lead edge RSPF 51-2
Document mode)
off-center
Sub Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec-
scanning tion amount) on paper by the main unit and
magnifica- the DSPF/RSPF registration roller.
tion ratio (This adjustment is performed when there
is a considerable variation in the print
Item/Display Content Section image position on the paper or when paper
SETUP/ ALL LEAD MFT Print off Print lead Engine jams frequently occur.)
PRINT CS1 center edge
Section
ADJ CS2 Print lead adjustment,
edge image off- Operation/Procedure
OFFSET ADU
center (each 1) When RSPF model
CS3
paper feed
CS4 Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or
tray, duplex
LCC [ENGINE] keys.
mode)
adjustment 2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.

[DSPF]
Setting Default
Mode Display/Item Content
range value
DSPF A NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
REGI1 (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
DSPF A NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
REGI2 (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
ENGINE A TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Small size)
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Large size)
C TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 15
(Heavy paper/Small size)
D TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 25
(Heavy paper/Large size)
E TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
F TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
G TRAY HEAVY A PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 15
H TRAY HEAVY A PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 25
I MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
J MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
K MANUAL HEZVY A Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
PAPER(S) (Heavy paper/Small size)
L MANUAL HEAVY A Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 25
PAPER(L) (Heavy paper/Large size)
M MANUAL HEAVY B Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 25
PAPER(S) (Heavy paper B/Small size)
N MANUAL HEAVY B Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value The above mentioned 1 - 99 35
PAPER(L) (Heavy paper B/Large size) size or above
O MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 15
P MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Envelope) - 1 - 99 15
Q ADU PLAIN PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
R ADU PLAIN PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
S ADU HEAVY PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
T ADU HEAVY PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 25
U DESK(S) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
V DESK(L) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
W DESK HEAVY PAPER(S) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 15
X DESK HEAVY PAPER(L) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 25
Y A4LCC A4LCC/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 20

Note on “Large size” and “Small size”
Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter than the LT size (216mm).
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer than the LT size (216mm).
Adjustment value
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp amount is
decreased.
(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is changed by 0.1mm.)
[RSPF]
Setting Default
Mode Display/Ite Content
range value
SIDE1 A NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment - 1 - 99 50
value (Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
B NORMAL_THIN _LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment - 1 - 99 50
value (Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
C RANDOM_PLAIN _LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment - 1 - 99 50
value (Random/Plain paper/LOW)
D RANDOM_THIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment - 1 - 99 50
value (Random/Thin paper/LOW)
SIDE2 A NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1 RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment - 1 - 99 50
value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
ENGINE A TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
C TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER (S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 15
D TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER (L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 15
E TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
F TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
G TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER (S) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 15
H TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER (L) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 15
I MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
J MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
K MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 15
L MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 15
M MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 15
N MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Envelope) - 1 - 99 15
O ADU PLAIN PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
P ADU PLAIN PAPER (L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
Q ADU HEAVY PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 15
R ADU HEAVY PAPER (L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 15
S DESK (S) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
T DESK (L) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
U DESK HEAVY PAPER (S) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 15
V DESK HEAVY PAPER (L) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 15
W A4LCC A4LCC/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 20
Note on “Large size” and “Small size”

Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter than the LT size (216mm).
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer than the LT size (216mm).
Adjustment value
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp amount is
decreased.
(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is changed by 0.1mm.)

53-8
53
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge ref-
53-6
erence and the DSPF/RSPF mode docu-
Purpose Adjustment ment scan position.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the Section
DSPF/RSPF document width.
Operation/Procedure
Section Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key.
Operation/Procedure <AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment>(Auto
1) Open the RSPF (or DSPF) paper feed guide to the maximum adjustment)
width. 1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. table.
The maximum width detection level is recognized. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the
3) Open the RSPF (or DSPF) paper feed guide to the A4R width. adjustment value is saved.)
Setting Default
The A4R width detection level is recognized. Item/Display Content
range value
5) Open the RSPF (or DSPF) paper feed guide to the A5R width. MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 -
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit)
RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
reference position
7) Open the RSPF (or DSPF) paper feed guide to the minimum
width. <MANUAL: DSPF/RSPF mode document scan position adjust-
8) Press [EXECUTE] key. ment>
The minimum width detection level is recognized. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally, [DSPF]
"COMPLETE" is displayed.
Setting Default
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value range value
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value A ADJUST DSPF mode document scan 1 - 99 10
3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value VALUE position adjustment (Scanner
stop position adjustment)
4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
- When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop posi-
tion in the DSPF mode is shifted to the right.
53-7 - When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is
shifted by 0.1mm.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the DSPF/RSPF document [RSPF]
size width sensor. Setting Default
Section range value
A ADJUST RSPF mode document scan 1 - 99 5
Operation/Procedure
VALUE position adjustment (Scanner
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch stop position adjustment)
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. - When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop posi-
tion in the RSPF mode is shifted to the right.
- When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is
[DSPF] shifted by 0.1mm.
Setting Default
Item/Display
range value
A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 66
B AD_P1 Intermediate position (L) 0 - 1023 438
C AD_P2 Intermediate position (S) 0 - 1023 699
D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 893
[RSPF]
Setting Default
Item/Display
range value
A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 84
B AD_P1 Intermediate position (L) 0 - 1023 509
C AD_P2 Intermediate position (S) 0 - 1023 808
D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 961

53-9
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set dirt detection for DSPF/RSPF
scanning position.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an items to be set with scroll key.
RSPF
Item/Display item, Details of display Content Setting Default

range value
SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_ OFF SPF front surface optimum scan position detection OFF 0 1
A 0-1
ET_START ON setting (when starting) ON 1 (ON)
SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_ OFF SPF front surface optimum scan position detection level OFF 0 1
B 0-1
ET_JOB ON setting ON 1 (ON)
WEAK Low 0
SPF front surface optimum scan position detection level 1
C SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_LV MODDLE Medium 0-2 1
setting (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
WEAK Low 0
1
D OC_DIRT_LV MIDDLE OC dirt level setting Medium 0-2 1
(MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
WEAK Low 0
1
E SIDEA_DIRT_ALARM_LV MIDDLE SPF front surface dirt alarm level setting Medium 0-2 1
(MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
OFF OFF 0 1
F SIDEA_DIRT_SHADING_SET SPF front surface streak delete shading setting 0-1
ON ON 1 (ON)
SCAN_POSITION_ MVIEW SPF front surface MVIEW/SCU priority setting (Optimum MVIEW 0 0
G 0-1
RIORITY_SET SCU scan position) SCU 1 (MVIEW)
MVIEW MVIEW 0 0
H DIRT_ALARM_PRIORITY_SET SPF common MVIEW/SCU priority setting (Alarm) 0-1
SCU SCU 1 (MVIEW)
DSPF
Item/Display item, Details of display Content Setting Default

range value
SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_ OFF SPF front surface optimum scan position detection OFF 0 1
A 0-1
ET_START ON setting (when starting) ON 1 (ON)
SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_ OFF DSPF front surface optimum scan position detection OFF 0 1
B 0-1
ET_JOB ON setting (After a job) ON 1 (ON)
WEAK Low 0
SPF front surface optimum scan position detection level 1
C SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_LV MIDDLE Medium 0-2 1
setting (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
WEAK Low 0
1
D OC_DIRT_LV MIDDLE OC dirt level setting Medium 0-2 1
(MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
WEAK Low 0
1
E SIDEA_DIRT_ALARM_LV MIDDLE SPF front surface dirt alarm level setting Medium 0-2 1
(MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
WEAK Low 0
1
F SIDEB_DIRT_ALARM_LV MIDDLE SPF back surface dirt alarm level setting Medium 0-2 1
(MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
OFF OFF 0 1
G SIDEA_DIRT_SHADING_SET SPF front surface streak delete shading setting 0-1
ON ON 1 (ON)
OFF OFF 0 1
H SIDEB_DIRT_SHADING_SET SPF back surface streak delete shading setting 0-1
ON ON 1 (ON)
SCAN_POSITION_ MVIEW SPF front surface MVIEW/SCU priority setting MVIEW 0 0
I 0-1
RIORITY_SET SCU (Optimum scan position) SCU 1 (MVIEW)
MVIEW MVIEW 0 0
J DIRT_ALARM_PRIORITY_SET SPF common MVIEW/SCU priority setting (Alarm) 0-1
SCU SCU 1 (MVIEW)

range value
A 1ST DIGIT First digit (left edge) 1 - 90 1
Function (Purpose) DSPF/RSPF dirt detection execution. B 2ND DIGIT Second digit
Section C 3RD DIGIT Third digit 32 [blank:
D 4TH DIGIT Fourth digit 20H]
Operation/Procedure
65 - 90
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. E 5TH DIGIT Fifth digit
[Alphabet:
When the operation is finished, the detected result is dis- F 6TH DIGIT Sixth digit (right edge)
41H("A) -
played. 5AH("Z")]
48 - 57
Item Content [Numeral:
OC Forcible execution of OC/SPF SIDE A and the result 30H("0") -
display are made. 39H("9")]
DSPF Forcible execution of SPF SIDE B and the result G COLOR K Color specification 0 0
display are made. C input 1
M 2
Y 3
55 R 4
G 5
B 6
55-1 H TYPE PATTERN Print Edging type 0 1
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially 1 com-
required.) PATTERN posing OR process 1
2 method type
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine
PATTERN No-delete- 2
control operations. (SOFT SW) 3 compo-
Section sition type
Operation/Procedure
Input value
Print Blank A B C D E F
Input value 32 65 66 67 68 69 70
55-2
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially Print G H I J K L M
required.) Input value 71 72 73 74 75 76 77
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan-
ner control operation. (SOFT SW) Print N O P Q R S T
Input value 78 79 80 81 82 83 84
Section
Operation/Procedure
Print U V W X Y Z 0
55-3 Input value 85 86 87 88 89 90 48
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.) Print 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Input value 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control-
ler operation. (SOFT SW) Print 8 9
Section Input value 56 57
Operation/Procedure
55-10
Purpose Adjustment/Setting
56
Function (Purpose) Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan
56-1
only)
Purpose Backup
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP
Operation/Procedure
PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the
1) Select an item to be set (digit, color, type) with the scroll key. PWB.)
2) Enter the value corresponding to the setting item with 10-key.
Section
3) Press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target content of data transfer.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
EEPROM -> HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD

HDD -> EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM

Classifi-
Content NOTE
cation
56-2 Operation E-manual
manual
Purpose Data backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM.
SD Card, and HDD (including user authen-
tication data and address data) to the USB 56-3
memory. (Corresponding to the device Purpose Data backup
cloning and the storage backup.)
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to
Section the USB memory.
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. Operation/Procedure
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
<IMPORT> 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SD Card HDD
<IMPORT>
<EXPORT>
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card, HDD
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD To USB MEMORY
<EXPORT>
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
(Machine with the DSK installed) displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
<IMPORT> 56-4
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card HDD
Purpose Data backup
<EXPORT>
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
USB memory.
3) Enter the password with 10-key.
Section
4) Press [SET] key.
Operation/Procedure
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key.
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
<Data list outside the backup targets> Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
(EEPROM/SD Card) When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
PWB Type Content NOTE
Controller Machine serial No.
Product key information 56-5
Various counter Copy counter/FAX
send counter etc.
Trouble history Function (Purpose) Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB
PCU Machine serial No. memory in the TEXT format.
Various counter Maintenance counter Section
Machine adjustment execute
Operation/Procedure
history
Trouble history 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
SCU Various counter Maintenance counter 2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
Trouble history 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
(HDD) Procedure 2) The selected data are imported.
Classifi- displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Content NOTE
cation
Japanese FEP User dictionary
Job end list Job end list display data
(The image send series include
the preserved job list.)
Log Job log Read from WEB is
enable.
New N/A - Print history information
- JAM history information
- Trouble history information
- Same position continuous
jam count value
- Charging information
- Life information

56-6
60
Purpose Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to import the SIM23-2 data to a USB
60-1
memory in the TEXT format.
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to check the memory operations
Operation/Procedure
(read/write) of the MFP PWB.
Section
2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
Operation/Procedure
Perform the data import selected in step 2. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When the operation is finished successfully, [COMPLETED] is Start the test.
displayed.
When the operation is failed, [ERROR] is displayed. Result display Description
OK Success
NG Fail
NONE Not installed (Including DIMM trouble)
INVALID Execution disable
56-7
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check SLOT Description
Function (Purpose) Used to import the syslog data to a USB ICUM SLOT1 ICUM standard memory ON BOARD
memory. ICUM SLOT2 ICUM expansion memory DIMM
Section ICU1 SLOT1 ICU1 standard memory ON BOARD
ACRE SLOT ACRE ACRE
Operation/Procedure

3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
61 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are
61-3 increased, the print density is increased and the line width of
line images are increased.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY], [PR600/
FAX] on the touch panel.
panel.
Default value
Setting Destination
Mode Item/Display Content 41cpm 51cpm
range linkage
machine machine
COPY A LASER POWER MIDDLE (K1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K1) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
B LASER POWER MIDDLE (K2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K2) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
C LASER POWER MIDDLE (C1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/C1) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
D LASER POWER MIDDLE (C2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/C2) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
E LASER POWER MIDDLE (M1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/M1) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
F LASER POWER MIDDLE (M2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/M2) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
G LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/Y1) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
H LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/Y2) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
I LASER POWER LOW (K1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/K1) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
J LASER POWER LOW (K2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/K2) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
K LASER POWER LOW (C1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/C1) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
L LASER POWER LOW (C2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/C2) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
M LASER POWER LOW (M1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/M1) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
N LASER POWER LOW (M2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/M2) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
O LASER POWER LOW (Y1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/Y1) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
P LASER POWER LOW (Y2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/Y2) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
Q LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/BW1) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
R LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/BW2) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
S LASER POWER LOW (BW1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/BW1) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
T LASER POWER LOW (BW2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/BW2) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
U LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 O
V LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 O
W LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 O
X LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 O
Y LASER DUTY LOW (K) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 O
Z LASER DUTY LOW (C) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AA LASER DUTY LOW (M) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AB LASER DUTY LOW (Y) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AC LASER DUTY MIDDLE (BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AD LASER DUTY LOW (BW) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 O
PR600/FAX A LASER POWER MIDDLE (K1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K1) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕

Default value
Setting Destination
Mode Item/Display Content 41cpm 51cpm
range linkage
machine machine
PR600/FAX E LASER POWER MIDDLE (M1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/M1) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
U LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 O
V LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 O
W LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 O
X LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 O
Y LASER DUTY LOW (K) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 O
Z LASER DUTY LOW (C) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AA LASER DUTY LOW (M) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AB LASER DUTY LOW (Y) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AC LASER DUTY MIDDLE (BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AD LASER DUTY LOW (BW) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AE LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AF LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AG LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AH LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AI LASER DUTY LOW (K 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AJ LASER DUTY LOW (C 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AK LASER DUTY LOW (M 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AL LASER DUTY LOW (Y 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AM LASER DUTY MIDDLE (BW 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AN LASER DUTY LOW (BW 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 O
PR1200 A LASER POWER MIDDLE (K1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K1) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
E LASER POWER MIDDLE (M1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/M1) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
U LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 ✕
V LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 ✕
W LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 ✕
X LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 ✕
Y LASER DUTY LOW (K) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 ✕
Z LASER DUTY LOW (C) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 ✕
AA LASER DUTY LOW (M) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 ✕
AB LASER DUTY LOW (Y) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 ✕
AC LASER DUTY MIDDLE (BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 ✕
AD LASER DUTY LOW (BW) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 ✕

4) Enter the adjustment value by the density meter and press
61-4
[EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Adjustment The laser power adjustment is performed and the adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to print the print image skew adjust- result is displayed.
ment pattern. (LSU unit)
Section
Operation/Procedure 61-13
1) Select a target item with scroll key on the touch panel. Purpose Adjustment
2) Enter the print conditions setting value with 10-key. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the laser power correction
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. value.
The print image skew adjustment pattern is printed. Section
Operation/Procedure
Default
Item/Display Content 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
value
A MULTICOUNT Print quantity (1-999) 1 2) Press [YES] key.
B PAPER MFT Tray 1 Manual paper feed 2 (CS1)
CS1 selection 2 Paper feed tray 1
CS2 3 Paper feed tray 2
62
LCC 6 LCC
62-1
Purpose Data clear
61-11 Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk/SD Card.
(HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and
Purpose Adjustment
the watermark data) (SD Card: User data)
Function (Purpose) Used to correct the laser power automati-
Section
cally.
Operation/Procedure
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
1) Press [AUTO CORRECTION] key.
Used to execute the HDD/SD Card format.
2) Select a density to be corrected and press [EXECUTE] key.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
3) Place the printed sample for scanning on the OC in the normal display.
A4R(LTR) direction and press [EXECUTE] key.
The laser power adjustment is performed and the adjustment
result is displayed.
62-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(partial).
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
62-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(all areas).
61-12
Section
Purpose Adjustment Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Laser power manual correction 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section LSU 2) Press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure Read/write operations are performed.
Press an item button to be adjusted.
When [MEASURING INSTRUMENT] is pressed:
1) Press [VISUAL INSPECTION] key.
2) Select the adjustment density pattern and press [EXECUTE]
key.
3) The adjustment pattern is printed out. Then, press [4POINT
CORRECTION] key or [31POINT CORRECTION] key.

62-6 62-10
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the Function (Purpose) Used to clear the job completion list data.
hard disk. Section
Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Select the self diag area. 2) Press [YES] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Used to delete the job log data.
The self diag operation is performed. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
NOTE: E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD, normal display.
use this simulation to cheek the HDD.
SHORT S.T Partial area diag 62-11

EXTENDED S.T All area diag
Purpose Data clear
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.
normal display.
Section
Normal completion -> "OK (RESULT:0)" is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
Abnormal end -> "NG (RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.
* If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for
some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding sec- 2) Press [YES] key.
tion. Used to delete the document filing data.
normal display.
62-7
62-12
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics
error log. Purpose Setting
Section Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
Operation/Procedure in a hard disk trouble.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section
ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and Operation/Procedure
the result is printed. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the 2) Press [OK] key.
normal display. The set value is saved.
When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system
data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system
62-8 data storage area is cleared.
Purpose Data clear
A 0 Enable
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk/SD Card. 1 Disable (Default)
(HDD: Excluding the Operation Manual, the
watermark data, and the system area) (SD
Card: User data)
Section 62-13
Operation/Procedure Purpose Data clear
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Operation
2) Press [YES] key. Manual, watermark data only)
Used to execute the hard disk format. Section
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the Operation/Procedure
normal display. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not 2) Press [YES] key.
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA) The operation manual data are deleted.
NG" is displayed.
normal display.

[DSPF]
62-14
Item/
Purpose Data clear Button Content NOTE
Display
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing manage- DSPF GAIN ODD Gain adjustment
ment data. value (odd number)
Section HDD GAIN Gain adjustment
EVEN value (Even number)
Operation/Procedure
OFFSET Offset value
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. ODD (odd number)
2) Press [YES] key. OFFSET Offset value
The document filing management data are cleared. EVEN (even number)
SMP AVE Reference plate
At the same time, the job log data are also cleared. ODD sampling average
This simulation is executed in the following trouble cases. value (ODD)
* The document filing function does not work normally. SMP AVE Reference plate
EVEN sampling average
* The job log is not recorded normally.
value (EVEN)
NOTE: TARGET Target value
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions. VALUE
In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest ver- BLACK Black output level
LEVEL
sion.
ERROR Error code 0 No error
CODE (0, 1-14) 1 Loop number over
(for debug) 2 The target value is
62-20 under the specified
Purpose Operation test/check value.
3 The gain set value is
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the mirror- negative.
ing hard disk. 4 END is not asserted.
Section Mirroring hard disk (Gain adjustment)
Operation/Procedure 5 (reserve)
6 Underflow
Enter the simulation mode, and the operation status of the HDD is
7 Black shading error
displayed.
DSPF ERROR Error code 8 Other error
The status display is renewed in every second. CODE (0, 1-14) 9 END is not asserted.
(for debug) (White shading)
Display Content description
10 END is not asserted.
OK Normal operation
(Black shading)
NONE Not connected 11 END is not asserted.
REBUILDING Data rebuilding (Light quantity
ERROR Error occurrence correction)
TROUBLE Trouble 12 END is not asserted.
(Scan)
13 Register check
error. (When
booting/Before gain)
63 14 Register check
error. (Before light
quantity correction)
63-1 DSPF First scan DSPF
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check BACK back surface white
WHITE reference level
Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction LEVEL 1ST
result. DSPF DSPF back surface
Section Scanner BACK white reference level
WHITE of the second or
Operation/Procedure
LEVEL 2ND later scanning
1) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch
panel. [Except DSPF]
GAIN ODD Gain adjustment value
(odd number)
GAIN EVEN Gain adjustment value
(Even number)
OFFSET ODD Offset value (odd number)
OFFSET EVEN Offset value (even
number)
SMP AVE ODD Reference plate sampling
average value (ODD)
SMP AVE EVEN Reference plate sampling
average value (EVEN)
TARGET VALUE Target value
BLACK LEVEL Black output level

Item/Display Content NOTE When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
ERROR CODE Error code 0 No error normal display.
(0, 1-14) 1 Loop number over After completion of the operation, press [RESULT] key, and the
(for debug) 2 The target value is adjustment data are displayed. At that time, the target color of data
under the specified display can be selected with [R] [G] [B] key.
value.
3 The gain set value is
negative.
63-4
(Gain adjustment) Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
5 (reserve) Function (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
6 Underflow
7 Black shading error
Section
8 Other error Operation/Procedure
9 END is not asserted. 1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)
(White shading) on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the doc-
10 END is not asserted. ument table. For the DSPF mode, put the SIT chart backside
(Black shading) up on the DSPF tray.
2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key.
(Light quantity
correction) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
12 END is not asserted. The patch of the SIT chart is scanned.
(Scan) When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
13 Register check
the normal display.
error. (When
booting/Before gain) 4) Select a data display mode.
14 Register check
error. (Before light GAMMA THROUGH SIT chart scan data
quantity correction) COPY GAMMA Copy mode gamma process data of the SIT chart
RSPF WHITE First scan RSPF white scan data
LEVEL 1ST reference level SCANNER GAMMA Image send mode gamma process data of the SIT
RSPF WHITE Second scan RSPF white chart scan data
LEVEL 2ND reference level SIT CHECK SIT chart scan data/Check result
Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys.
63-2
Purpose Adjustment 63-5
Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Section Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color
balance and gamma default setting.
Operation/Procedure
Section
- DSPF-installed model
1) Select [OC SHADING] key or [DSPF SHADING] key, and Operation/Procedure
press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key
Used to perform shading. 2) The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the default.
normal display.
- RSPF-installed model
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 63-6
Used to perform shading. Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the Function (Purpose) Used to display the scan level and the den-
normal display. sity level of the copy color balance adjust-
ment patch.
Section
Purpose Adjustment 1) Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with
SIM46-21 on the document table.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD) color bal-
ance and gamma auto adjustment. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Scanner The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned.
Operation/Procedure Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key.
1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)
on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the doc-
ument table. For the DSPF mode, put the SIT chart backside
up on the DSPF tray.
2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key.
The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per-
formed.

63-7 63-11
Function (Purpose) Used to register the service target of the Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the
copy mode auto color balance adjustment. copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
Section Section
1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel. 1) Select the target color balance with the touch panel.
2) Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with
Default
SIM46-21 on the document table. Item/Display Content
value
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Target DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target DEF 1
The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned. color in the automatic color balance operation is
4) Press [OK] key. balance slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target
is selected, the color balance is converted
The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance into natural gray color balance by the color
adjustment is registered according to the patch image of the table in an actual copy mode and print is
scanned adjustment pattern sheet. made.
The registered color balance and the density are displayed. DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment target
in the automatic color balance operation is
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key.
slightly shifted to natural gray color balance.
NOTE: This simulation is executed only when the copy color bal- When this target is selected, the color
ance is manually adjusted. balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the
color table in an actual copy mode and print
B Point B target value is made.
C Point C target value DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment target
D Point D target value in the automatic color balance operation is
E Point E target value slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is
selected, the color balance is converted into
F Point F target value
the color balance with enhanced Cyan by
G Point G target value
the color table in an actual copy mode and
H Point H target value print is made.
I Point I target value
J Point J target value
K Point K target value
L Point L target value
M Point M target value
N Point N target value
O Point O target value
BASE Background sampling value
63-8
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target
of the copy mode auto color balance adjust-
ment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance
adjustment is set to the default.
The service color balance target and the color balance target
for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
balance as the factory color balance target.

64
64-1
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 - 58 (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 1
(1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22, 29) (* For details, refer to the description below.) 22, 29)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of blank dot number (N parameter) 0-255 254
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2, 11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19) CHAR/PIC specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17-19: 2-8 2 (STANDARD
CHAR/PRPIC Text/ Photograph except above:1-8) 3 DITHER)
CHAR Text 4
PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1
NO selection No 1 (NO)
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-6 1 1
HEAVY Heavy paper 2 (PLAIN)
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 5
GLOSSY Glossy paper 6
Print pattern of Item A

Pattern generating
Pattern No. Content NOTE
section
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC - When the print width is 100 or more and all colors are selected, print is
made in the three colors (CMY).
- Print is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge.
- Writing regardless of pound. The first one is fixed to LD1.
2 Dot print -
9 Each color 10% area (A4/A4R) - Each interval is 41.86mm (989dot).
density print - If m is not in the range of 1 - 13%, it is rounded.
- K print is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt print
11 4-color dot print (sub scan) - For every 1/4 of the sub scanning direction paper size, print is made for each color.
- When N=0, print of all the background is made in 4 colors.

Pattern generating
section
17 All background (halftone) Halftone - When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
18 256 gradations pattern (IMG-ASIC rear - When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
(Other dither) process) - 16 gradations are printed in the main scanning direction, and feedback is made, and
the next 16 gradations are printed. (16 x 16 patch print)
- Print is made from 255 gradations, and 0-254 gradations are printed.
19 256 gradations pattern - Print is made from 255 gradations, and 0-254 gradations are printed.
(For text dither)
21 4-point dot print (main scan) LSU-ASIC - For every 1/4 of the main scanning direction paper size, print is made for each color.
22 Slant line LSU-ASIC
29 Dot print 1200dpi LSU-ASIC M = 1 (Fixed), N = 1 or 3
64-2
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1 - 58 1
(1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22, 29) (* For details, refer to the description below.) (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22,
29)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of blank dot number 0-255 254
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2, 11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19) CHAR/PIC specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17-19: 2-8 2 (STANDARD
CHAR/PRPIC Text/ Photograph except above: 1-8) 3 DITHER)
CHAR Text 4
PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1
NO selection No 1 (NO)
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-6 1 1
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4

Pattern generating
section
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC - When the print width is 100 or more and all colors are selected, print is
made in the three colors (CMY).
- Writing regardless of pound. The first one is fixed to LD1.
2 Dot print -
9 Each color 10% area (A4/A4R) - Each interval is 41.86mm (989dot).
density print - If m is not in the range of 1 - 13%, it is rounded.
- K print is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt print
11 4-color dot print (sub scan) - For every 1/4 of the sub scanning direction paper size, print is made for
each color.
17 All background (halftone) Halftone (IMG-ASIC -
18 256 gradations pattern rear process) -
(Other dither)
19 256 gradations pattern -
(For text dither)
21 4-point dot print (main scan) LSU-ASIC - For every 1/4 of the main scanning direction paper size, print is made for
each color.
22 Slant line LSU-ASIC
29 Dot print 1200dpi LSU-ASIC M = 1 (Fixed), N = 1 or 3

64-4
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-6 6
(* For details, refer to the description below.)
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray selection Manual paper feed 1 3
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS2)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW Halftone Low line number 0 0
HIGH High line number 1 (LOW)
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard 0 1
HIGHQUALITY High quality 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
FINE Ultra fine 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 0 1
CALIB correction Calibration 1 (CALIB)
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1

Pattern No. Content
1 256 gradations pattern (COLOR)
2 256 gradations pattern (B/W)
3 256 gradations pattern (COLOR) (Y-M-C-K continuous)
4 Halftone pattern (COLOR)
5 Halftone pattern (B/W)
6 Background dot print

64-5
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Section
Operation/Procedure

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1-5 3
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 - 255 255
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0 3
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1 (AUTO)
GLOSSY For glossy paper 2
AUTO Auto (for photo/text) 3
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0 1
HIGHQUALITY High quality (600dpi, 4bit) 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
FINE Ultra fine (1200dpi, 1bit) 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither 0: Straight 0 1
CALIB correction 1: Calibration 1
I INTENT PERCEPTUAL Rendering indent Perceptual 0 0
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 1 (PERCEPTUAL)
SATURATION Saturation 2
J OUTPUT PROFILE SHARP Output profile Standard 0 0
STANDARD Photo image 1 (SHARP)
GRAPHICS Graphics 2
K RGB SOURCE SRGB RGB source profile SRGB 0 0
PROFILE GAMMA1.6 Gamma 1.6 1 (SRGB)
GAMMA1.8 Gamma 1.8 2
TONER SAVE For TONER SAVE 6
L GRAY COMPENSATION K Gray print method Print method K 0 0
KCMY KCMY 1 (K)
M PURE BLACK PRINT ON Black monochrome set. 0 0
OFF print not set. 1 (ON)
N TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1 (OFF)

Pattern No. Content
1 COLOR
2 B/W
3 Continuous COLOR,B/W
4 Service chart (COLOR)
5 Service chart (B/W)

64-6
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select a print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1-2 1
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 - 255 255
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0 3
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1 (AUTO)
GLOSSY For glossy paper 2
AUTO Auto (for photo/text) 3
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0 1
HIGHQUALITY High quality (600dpi, 4bit) 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
FINE Ultra fine (1200dpi, 1bit) 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither 0: Straight 0 1
CALIB correction 1: Calibration 1 (CALIB)
I INTENT PERCEPTUAL Rendering indent Perceptual 0 0
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 1 (PERCEPTUAL)
SATURATION Saturation 2
J OUTPUT PROFILE SHARP Output profile Standard 0 0
STANDARD Photo image 1 (SHARP)
GRAPHICS Graphics 2
K RGB SOURCE SRGB RGB source profile SRGB 0 0
PROFILE GAMMA1.6 Gamma 1.6 1 (SRGB)
L GRAY COMPENSATION K Gray print method Print method K only 0 0
KCMY KCMY 1 (K)
M PURE BLACK PRINT ON Black monochrome set. 0 1
OFF print not set. 1 (OFF)
N TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1 (OFF)
O CMY INK SIMULATION OFF CMYK simulation OFF 0 0
SWOP SWOP 1 (OFF)
EURO EURO 2
JAPAN COLOR JAPAN COLOR 3

Pattern No. Content
1 COLOR
2 B/W

64-7 65-2
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to print the adjustment pattern of the Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD dis-
test print. (Self print). (The adjustment pat- play section) detection coordinates.
tern of SIM46-21 is printed.) Section
Operation/Procedure Touch the touch panel.
1) Set the print conditions. The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys. the touched position is displayed in real time.


;<
The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is printed.

Setting Default
Item/Display Content Writing
range value
A COPIES Number of print 1 - 999 1 No

B PROC YES 0 The halftone 0-1 1 Yes

ADJ process control
correction

value is

reflected.
NO 1 The halftone
process control
correction
value is not
reflected.
65-5
Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key
input.
65 Section
Operation/Procedure
65-1
Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on
Purpose Adjustment the screen.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis- If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key
play section) detection coordinates. is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
Section Operation panel section is displayed.
Operation/Procedure <Check target key>
Using a stylus or pointed but not shape device, touch the center of 10 Inch LCD model
the cross marks at the four corners of the screen. HOME
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to
the simulation sub number entry menu.
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu. 66
66-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2
- 150) on the LCD to allow changing the
soft SW while checking with the LCD.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value of [SW NO] is
cleared.
2) Press [DATA] button.
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
* When [SW NO] button is pressed, the display returns to the
initial screen.
3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
10-key.
* [1] -> [0]
[0] -> [1]

4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the SOUTHAFRICA 10011111
setting is saved. SPAIN 10100000
After saving the setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the nor- PORTUGUESE 10001011
mal display. LUXEMBURG 01101001
BELGIUM 00001111
CZECH 00101110
66-2 HUNGARY 01010001
GREECE 01000110
Purpose Setting POLAND 10001010
Function (Purpose) Used to enter a country code and set the BRAZIL 00010110
default value for the country code.
Section FAX
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-02, the following
Purpose Operation test/Check
screen is displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the EEPROM
* When [DEST CODE] button is pressed, the display is shifted
and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller
to the country code list screen.
and display the result.
* The currently set country code is displayed in the column of
Section FAX
"PRESENT:".
Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the country code (8 digits) with 10-key([0]/[1]). The
entered country code is displayed in the column of "NEW:" and 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-03, the following
[SET] key becomes active. screen is displayed.
* When [C] key is pressed, the column of “NEW:” is cleared. * Select the page of memory check item with the scroll key.
3) When [SET] button is pressed after entering the country code, 2) When the memory check item button is selected, the display is
[EXECUTE] button becomes active. The country code is dis- shifted to the memory check screen.
played in the column of "PRESENT:", and the column of 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
"NEW:" is cleared. memory check of the selected item is started.
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and 4) After completion of memory check, [EXECUTE] button returns
[YES] and [NO] buttons become active. The country name is to the normal display and the result of memory check is dis-
displayed on the tile line. played.
5) When [YES] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the soft SW Memory check status
corresponding to the country code is initialized.
NO CHECK No check
6) After completion of initialization of the soft SW, [EXECUTE],
CHECKING During checking
[YES], and [NO] buttons become inactive.
OK Check complete OK
NG A## Check complete NG Error occurring address or data
Operation/Procedure (Shifting to the country page) line is displayed for each item.
* When [DEST CODE] button is pressed on the initial screen, the
Check item
display is shifted to the country code list screen.
Use scroll keys to select the country select page. Check memory item Remark
1 All Memory Device Check (once) All the items are checked
<Country code list> once.
JAPAN 00000000 2 MODEM EEPROM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1
U.S.A. 10110101 3 MODEM EEPROM <1> (repeat) Repeat check in LINE1
AUSTRALIA 00001001 4 MODEM SDRAM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1
U.K. 10110100 5 MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat) Repeat check in LINE1
FRANCE 00111101
The number in < > indicates the line.
GERMANY 00000100
SWEDEN 10100101
NEWZEALAND 01111110
CHINA 00100110 66-4
SINGAPORE 10011100 Purpose Operation test/Check
TW 11111110
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signals to the
MIDDLEANDNEAREAST 11111101
line and the main unit speaker. (Send level:
SLOVAKIA 11111100
max.)
OTHER3 11111011
FINLAND 00111100 Section FAX
NORWAY 10000010 Operation/Procedure
DENMARK 00110001 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-04, the screen on the
NETHERLANDS 01111011 right is displayed. (Default, left upper selected.)
ITALY 01011001
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page.
SWITZERLAND 10100110
AUSTRIA 00001010
2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high-
INDONESIA 01010100
lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal
THAILAND 10101001
display.
MALAYSIA 01101100 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
INDIA 01010011 nals are sent.
PHILIPPINES 10001001 4) To end signal send:
HONGKONG 01010000 When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
RUSSIA 10111000 nal send is interrupted.

<Signal send table>
66-8
NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34 Purpose Operation test/Check
26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound mes-
16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34 sages to the line and the speaker. (Send
7.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33 level: Max.)
12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17
7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t
Section FAX
2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100 Operation/Procedure
0.3 V21 ANSam RINGER No RBT 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-08, the following
DP MAKE DP BRK NO MSG 2) When the sound message button to be sent is selected, it is
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
display.
<Sound message table>
66-5
NONE (Mute) PAUSE (Pause MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2
melody) (Message 1) (Message 2)
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal to the line MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE6
and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft (Message 3) (Message 4) (Massage 5) (Message 6)
SW setting) (For the kinds of send signals, ALARM (Alarm) RINGER EXT.TEL.RING
refer to SIM66-04.) (Ringing sound ER (External
(Speaker)) telephone call)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
screen is displayed. 66-9
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page. Purpose Operation test/Check
2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high- Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound message
lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
display. Soft SW setting)
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig- * For details of sound messages, refer to
nals are sent. the sound message table of SIM66-08.
4) To end signal send: Section FAX
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and Operation/Procedure
signal send is interrupted.
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
66-6 highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
Purpose Data output/Check display.
Function (Purpose) Used to print the confidential registration 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a
check table (BOX NO., BOX name, pass- sound message is sent.
code. (If there is no confidential registra- 4) To end signal send:
tion, no print is made.) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
Section FAX nal send is interrupted.
Operation/Procedure
1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
confidential checkable is printed. 66-10
* If there is no confidential registration, no print is made even Purpose Data clear
though [EXECUTE] key is pressed. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX and image send
2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the image data. (The confidential data are also
normal display. cleared.)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
66-7
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
Purpose Data output/Check 2) Press [YES] button.
Function (Purpose) Used to output all image data saved in the 3) After completion of clearing, press [CA] key to reboot the
image memory. (Confidential data are also machine.
outputted.)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all
image data saved in the image memory are outputted.
2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.

3) When [SET] key is pressed after completion of entry, the
66-11
entered number is displayed (registered) in the column of
Purpose Operation test/Check [PRESENT:]. The column of [NEW:] becomes blank.
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps
to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
Max.) 66-14
Section FAX Purpose Adjustment
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS)
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-11, the following send test and to adjust the make time.
Section FAX
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
Operation/Procedure
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
display.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a
sound message is sent. 2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time.
4) To end signal send:
3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The but-
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
ton returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
nal send is interrupted.
<300bps send signal table>
NO SIGNAL 11111 11110 00000 66-15
010101 00001 Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS)
send test and to adjust the make time.
66-12 Section FAX
Purpose Operation test/Check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-15, the following
to the line and the speaker. (Send level: screen is displayed.
Soft SW setting) 2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps, dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time.
refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal * The dial pulse in this example is up to 20 digits registered
table. with SIM66-13.
Section FAX 3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The but-
Operation/Procedure ton returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is 66-16
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal Purpose Adjustment
display. Function (Purpose) Used to execute the DTFM signal send test
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a and to adjust the send level.
sound message is sent.
Section FAX
4) To end signal send:
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
nal send is interrupted.
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
dial pulse signal is sent from the line by the setting of high/low
66-13 group of the signal send level.
Purpose Setting 3) To terminate the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button. The button
Function (Purpose) Used to register dial numbers for SIM66- returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be
registered.)
Section FAX 66-17
Operation/Procedure Purpose Operation test/Check
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-13, the following Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
screen is displayed. and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)
* The number saved in the memory is displayed in the column Section FAX
of [PRESENT:]. (If there is no data, [-------] is displayed.)
Operation/Procedure
2) Enter a number with 10-key.
The entered number is displayed in the column of [NEW:]. screen is displayed.
After entering 20 digits, 10-key is disabled (no response). Only 2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
[C] key is enabled. (10-key [0] to [9], [*], [#], [C] key (back by the previously set button returns to the normal display.
one digit))
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
nals are sent.

4) To stop signal sending:
66-24
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normal
display and signal sending is interrupted. Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAST save data.
Section FAX
Purpose Operation test/Check 1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line 2) Press [YES] button.
and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW set- The FAST save data are cleared.
ting) 3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] button returns
Section FAX to the normal display and [YES] and {NO} buttons gray out.
Operation/Procedure
screen is displayed. 66-29
2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and Purpose Clear
the previously set button returns to the normal display. Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the telephone book data
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig- (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/
nals are sent. Desktop expansion table, the group expan-
4) To stop signal sending: sion table, the program registration table,
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normal the interface memory box table, the meta
display and signal sending is interrupted. data, InboundRouting, and the Documen-
tAdmin table).
Section FAX
Purpose Check 1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
Function (Purpose) Used to print the selected items (system 2) Press [YES] button.
error, protocol monitor). The telephone book data area cleared.
Section FAX 3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] button returns
Operation/Procedure to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
1) When an item button to be printed is selected, it is highlighted
and the previously set button returns to the normal display.
66-30
2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and printing is started. Purpose Operation test/Check
3) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the Function (Purpose) Used to display the TEL/LIU status change,
normal display. The display is highlighted by status change.
<FAX information print content table> Section FAX

Operation/Procedure
PROTOCOL LINE 1 SYSTEM ERROR LINE 1
2) HS1, HS2, RHS, and EXHS are highlighted when the signal is
66-22 detected, and displayed normally when the signal is not
Purpose Setting detected.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the handset sound volume. <TEL/LIU status change item description>
(This simulation can be executed even HS1 Polarity inversion signal
though the handset setting is set to NO. HS2 Polarity inversion signal
When, however, the handset is not RHS Handset hook SW
installed, the sound volume cannot be EXHS External telephone hook SW
checked.) (Japan model only)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
66-31
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the number of the set
sound volume is displayed. (In this example, MIDDLE is set as Purpose Setting
the default sound volume.) Function (Purpose) Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to
2) Use 10-key to set the handset sound volume. (0: MIN 1:MID- TEL/LIU.
DLE 2:MAX) Section FAX
3) Press [EXECUTE] button to deliver the selected on-hold tone. Operation/Procedure
* If, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-31, the following
cannot be checked. Execution is possible. screen is displayed.
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and deliv- 2) Change the port setting.
ery of the on-hold tone is stopped. When a port is set to ON, the port display is highlighted.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the changed setting is
reflected to the port which outputs to TEL/LIU.

4) To terminate the process, press [EXECUTE] button again.
66-36
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
<Port which outputs to TEL/LIU>
Function (Purpose) Used to check send and receive data from
CION MR EC S. the MODEM controller to the MFP control-
ler or the data line or the command line
individually.
66-32 Section FAX

Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the fixed data received from
the line and to display the result.
2) Operation check
Section FAX
Select an item to be checked on the screen.
Operation/Procedure
<MFP controller I/F check item table>
1) Press [EXECUTE] button to check the fixed data received from
the line. At that time, [EXECUTE] button is highlighted. MFP <- MDMC (DATA once) MFP -> MDMC (DATA once)
Data line Once Data line Once
* Fixed data check procedure
MFP <- MDMC (DATA repeat) MFP -> MDMC (DATA repeat)
- The data received from the line is checked of the following Data line Repeat Data line Repeat
fixed data status for minutes, then if they are in accord with MFP <- MDMC (CMD once) MFP -> MDMC (CMD once)
“OK” is displayed on LCD, if not “NG” is displayed. Command line Once Command line Once
MFP <- MDMC (CMD repeat) MFP -> MDMC (CMD repeat)
- The judgment is made in 2 minutes.
Command line Repeat Command line Repeat
Receive speed: 300BPS
Receive data: 00H
Judgment data: 100byte 66-39
2) After completion of check, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
Purpose Setting
normal display. The result is displayed as "OK" or "NG."
Function (Purpose) Used to check and change the destination
setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
66-33 Section FAX

Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the currently set des-
Function (Purpose) Used to execute detection of various sig-
tination button is highlighted. (In the default state, JAPAN is set
nals with the line connected and to display
as the destination.)
the detection result. When a signal is
detected, the display is highlighted. 2) Select a destination button to set the destination. (In this
example, USA/CANADA is selected.) The selected button is
Section FAX highlighted and the previously selected button returns to the
Operation/Procedure normal display.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-33, the following * When the destination button is changed, the new destination
screen is displayed. setting is saved to EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
2) The signal to be checked can be selected from the two
<Destination setting table>
options: "FNET" and "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF."
JAPAN U.S.A/CANADA EUROPE AUSTRALIA
3) When a signal is detected, "FNET" and "BUSY TONE CNG
CHINA ASIA&OTHERS
CED DTMF" are highlighted. When a signal is not detected,
they are normally displayed.
<Signal used for signal detection check>
(When "FNET" is selected) 66-42
FNET Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to rewrite the program to power con-
(When "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF" is selected) trol installed in the FAX BOX.
BUSY TONE CNG CED DTMF Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.[EXECUTE] button is highlighted
66-34 and YES] and [NO] buttons become active.
2) Press [YES] button.
The power control program is rewritten.
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the send test and display
the time required for sending image data in 3) When rewriting of the power control program is normally com-
the test. Used to execute send test and dis- pleted, "OK" is displayed and [EXECUTE] button returns to the
play. (Unit: ms) normal display, and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) FAX send is performed.
The send time in procedure 1) is displayed.

66-43
67
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to write the adjustment value into the
67-17
power control installed in the FAX BOX.
Purpose Reset
Section FAX
Function (Purpose) Printer reset
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-43, the following Section Printer
screen is displayed. Operation/Procedure
* Use scroll keys to select the select item of the power control 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
adjustment value. 2) Press [YES] key.
2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and writing The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the
to the power control is executed. When writing is normally NIC setting.)
completed, "OK" is displayed. When it is failed, "NG" is dis- When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
played. normal display.
3) After completion of writing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor-
mal display.
<Set range and default value of each set value> 67-24
Item Set range Default value Purpose Adjustment/Setup

A CI_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 6 Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Auto
B CI_CYCLE_MIN 1 to 254 10 adjustment)
C CI_CYCLE_MAX 2 to 255 142 Section Printer
D CI_COUNT 2 to 15 3
Operation/Procedure
E RES_3.3V_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 15
F EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 225 240 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
G RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 2 The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
H SON_TIMEOUT 1 to 127 20 2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
The printer color balance auto adjustment is performed, and
66-61
the adjustment result is printed.
Purpose Setting
4) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW The halftone correction target registration is processed.
(151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing
the soft SW while checking with the LCD.
Section FAX
67-25
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Manual
2) Press [DATA] button.
adjustment)
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
Section Printer
3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
Operation/Procedure
10-key.
* [1] -> [0]
touch panel.
[0] -> [1]
2) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the touch panel.
setting is saved.
66-62
Purpose Backup
Function (Purpose) Used to import the FAX receive data into a increased, and vice versa.
USB memory in PDF file type. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
Section FAX the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
Operation/Procedure value.
2) Select data to be imported. A POINT1 1 - 999 500
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. B POINT2 1 - 999 500
Execute import of data selected in procedure 2). C POINT3 1 - 999 500
When the operation is completed normally, [COMPLETE] is D POINT4 1 - 999 500
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, [ERROR] is displayed. E POINT5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 1 - 999 500
Error display Content G POINT7 1 - 999 500
ERROR: NO USB MEMORY DEVICE No USB memory installed H POINT8 1 - 999 500
ERROR: NO IMAGE DATA No image data I POINT9 1 - 999 500
ERROR Other errors J POINT10 1 - 999 500

B Point B target value
K POINT11 1 - 999 500
C Point C target value
L POINT12 1 - 999 500
D Point D target value
M POINT13 1 - 999 500
E Point E target value
N POINT14 1 - 999 500
F Point F target value
O POINT15 1 - 999 500
G Point G target value
P POINT16 1 - 999 500
H Point H target value
Q POINT17 1 - 999 500
I Point I target value
J Point J target value
K Point K target value
67-26 L Point L target value
M Point M target value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup N Point N target value
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the O Point O target value
printer mode auto color balance adjust- BASE Background sampling value
ment.
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
67-28
1) Select the target color balance with the touch panel.
Default Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target
value of the printer mode auto color balance
Target DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment DEF 1 adjustment.
value target in the automatic color balance
Section Printer
table operation is slightly shifted to Magenta.
select When this target is selected, the color Operation/Procedure
balance is converted into natural gray 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
color balance by the color table in an
2) Press [YES] key.
actual printer mode and print is made.
DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment The service target of the printer mode auto color balance
target in the automatic color balance adjustment is set to the default.
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray The service color balance target and the color balance target
color balance. When this target is for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
selected, the color balance is slightly
balance as the factory color balance target.
shifted to Cyan by the color table in an
actual copy mode and print is made.
DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment
target in the automatic color balance 67-31
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When
Purpose Data clear
this target is selected, the color balance is
converted into the color balance with Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value.
enhanced Cyan by the color table in an Section Printer
actual copy mode and print is made.
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
67-27 The printer calibration data (Halftone correction data) are
Purpose Adjustment/Setup cleared.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the service target of the printer (The printer color balance correction is canceled.)
mode auto color balance adjustment.
Section Printer
1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
2) Place the printed color balance adjustment pattern sheet Function (Purpose) Used to change the gamma of the printer
printed in SIM 67-25 on the document table. screen.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section Printer
The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned. Operation/Procedure
4) Press [OK] key. 1) Select a target change color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key on the
The service target of the printer mode auto color balance touch panel.
adjustment is set according to the scanned adjustment pattern 2) Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key.
sheet patch images. 3) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key.
The registered color balance and the density are displayed. 4) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key. 5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
NOTE: This simulation is executed only when the printer color bal- When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
ance is manually adjusted. the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
value.

Setting Default
Setting Default Item/Display Content
Item/Display Content range value
range value
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
A POINT1 Point 1 0 - 255 128
B POINT2 Point 2 0 - 255 128
correction
C POINT3 Point 3 0 - 255 128
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 0 - 255 128 TARGET YELLOW maximum density
E POINT5 Point 5 0 - 255 128 correction
F POINT6 Point 6 0 - 255 128 F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 0 - 255 128 TARGET BLACK maximum density
H POINT8 Point 8 0 - 255 128 correction
I POINT9 Point 9 0 - 255 128
- When tone gap is generated in the high density section, set
J POINT10 Point 10 0 - 255 128
items A and B to "0."
K POINT11 Point 11 0 - 255 128
The density in the high density section is decreased, but tone
L POINT12 Point 12 0 - 255 128
gap is reduced.
M POINT13 Point 13 0 - 255 128
N POINT14 Point 14 0 - 255 128 - To increase the density in the high density section further, set
O POINT15 Point 15 0 - 255 128 items A and B to "1."
P POINT16 Point 16 0 - 255 128
Q POINT17 Point 17 0 - 255 128
NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these
values are changed, the density in the high density area is
Display Content Key
changed.
HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper CMYK
SCREEN1 600dpi 1bit Photo CMYK
SCREEN2 600dpi 1bit Graphics CMYK
SCREEN3 600dpi 4bit Photo CMYK 67-36
SCREEN4 600dpi 4bit Graphics CMYK Purpose Adjustment/Setup
SCREEN5 1200dpi 1bit Photo CMYK
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the low den-
SCREEN6 1200dpi 1bit Graphics CMYK
sity section.
SCREEN7 B/W 600 dpi 1bit K
SCREEN8 B/W 600 dpi 4bit K Section Printer
SCREEN9 B/W 1200dpi 1bit K Operation/Procedure
SCREEN10 Toner Save B/W CMYK 1) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
* When only the K data are displayed, [C], [M], and [Y] keys are 2) Press [OK] key.
grayed out, disabling the key operations. When the adjustment value is increased, the low density images
* When "600dpi 1bit SCREEN" is displayed, [EXECUTE] key is are strongly reduced. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
grayed out, disabling the key operations. low density are images are weakly reproduced.
When tone gap is generated in the low density section (highlight
section), changing this adjustment value may improve the trouble.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup range value
A A PATCH INPUT A patch input value 0 - 13 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction in the
printer high density section. (Support for
the high density section tone gap)
Section Printer 67-41
Operation/Procedure Purpose Adjustment/Setup
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Function (Purpose) Used to set the threshold for judging the
selected color printing or the black color
0 Enable
printing in the black and white mode.
1 Disable
Section Printer
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Operation/Procedure
Setting Default 1) Select a set value with the scroll key.
range value 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
A CMY 0 CMY engine highest 0-1 0 3) Press [OK] key.
(0: ENABLE density correction
1: DISABLE) mode: Enable Setting Default
1 CMY engine highest Item/Display Content
range value
density correction A C1 Mode1 : Threshold of Saturation 0 - 255 5
mode: Disable
B V1 Mode1 : Threshold of Brightness 0 - 255 0
B K 0 K engine highest 0-1 1
C C2 Mode2 : Threshold of Saturation 0 - 255 5
(0: ENABLE density correction
1: DISABLE) mode: Enable D V2 Mode2 : Threshold of Brightness 0 - 255 0
1 K engine highest
density correction
mode: Disable
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET CYAN maximum density
correction

range value
Purpose Adjustment
A SHARPNESS: Color print 0-4 2 The greater
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gradation by increasing / COLOR PRINT the set value
decreasing the selected color componet B SHARPNESS: Monochrome 0-4 2 is, the
amount or the black color component B/W PRINT print stronger the
amount in the black and white mode. filer
enhancement
Section Printer
is. The smaller
Operation/Procedure the set value
1) Select Mode1 or Mode2. is, the
stronger the
2) Select an item to be set.
filter
smoothness
Mode Default
Item/Display Content is.
value
(0: Soft High,
Black F1 Black : Light F2 1: Soft Low, 2:
(Achromatic F2 Black : Normal Center, 3:
MODE color) F3 Black : Dark Sharp Low, 4:
1 Sharp High)
COLOR G1 Selected color : Light G2
(Selected G2 Selected color : Normal C TRAPPING: CMY 0-5 3 The greater
G3 Selected color : Dark CMY (PCL & (PCL, Direct the set value
color)
DIRECTPRINT) Print) is, the
Black F1 Black : Light F2 D TRAPPING: K K 0-5 3 stronger the
(Achromatic F2 Black : Normal (PCL & (PCL, Direct trapping is.
MODE color) F3 Black : Dark (0: OFF, (Low)
DIRECTPRINT) Print)
2 1<2<3<4<
COLOR G1 Selected color : Light G2 E TRAPPING: CMY (PS) 0-5 3
G2 Selected color : Normal CMY (PS) 5)
(Selected
F TRAPPING: K K (PS) 0-5 0 (The target is
color) G3 Selected color : Dark
(PS) vector images.
There is no
G TRAPPING: CMY (XPS) 0-5 0
67-43 effect for the
CMY (XPS)
raster
Purpose Adjustment H TRAPPING: K K (XPS) 0-5 0
images.)
(XPS)
Function (Purpose) 2 Color mode balance adjustment However, the
sharpness
Section Printer
also varies.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-keys.
67-52
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default value Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the gamma of the
Item/Display Content Color range C M Y printer screen.
A RED R output CMY 0 - 255 0 235 22 Section Printer
color 4 Operation/Procedure
B GREEN G output CMY 0 - 255 180 0 24 1) Select a target default setting mode with the touch panel.
color 1 Press [ALL] key to select all the modes.
C BLUE B output CMY 0 - 255 235 15 0
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
color 9
When the printer screen gamma was changed by SIM 67-33,
D CYAN C output CMY 0 - 255 182 0 25
SIM67-54, it is reset to the default.
color
E MAGENT M output CMY 0 - 255 0 27 0 Item/Display Content
A color 1 Screen HEAVYPAPER Heavy paper screen
F YELLOW Y output CMY 0 - 255 0 0 23 Printer heavy paper automatic density
color 4 correction amount
1200DPI_1BIT SCREEN5 (1200dpi 1bit Photo)
SCREEN6 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics)
600DPI_1BIT SCREEN1 (600dpi 1bit Photo)
67-45 SCREEN2 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup B/W SCREEN7 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the printer image filter and
trapping.
Printer B/W toner save automatic density
Section correction amount
Operation/Procedure GLOSSPAPER SCREEN10 (Glossy paper screen)
1) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
2) Enter the set value.
3) Press [OK] key.

67-54
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment
(Automatic adjustment for each dither)
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
This simulation is used to adjust the color balance, the density, and
the gradation in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode,
the 1200dpi mode, and the 600dpi 1bit mode.
This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
selected.)
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
mality.
4) Press [OK] key.
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
5) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
Select item
Content
(Mode)
Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
heavy paper mode
1200dpi 1bit Adjustment item to improve the color balance in 1200dpi
mode
B/W Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
the monochrome mode
Glossy Adjustment item to improve the color balance in glossy
paper mode
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically

selected.)
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
the color balance check patch image is printed out.
9) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
press [EXECUTE] key.
After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
tered.
10) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
NOTE: Use SIM67-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default
values.

MX-5141N
[7] TROUBLE CODE Service Manual
1.Trouble code D.Self diag operation

The machine always monitors its own state.
A.General When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a con- displays the trouble message.
sumable part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
machine detects and displays it on the display section. This allows nearly expired or is expired.
the user and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of
a trouble, this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
the machine to minimize the damage. may not be stopped.
The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
B.Function and purpose the LCD and lamp.
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a trou- Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
ble.) ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
tion.
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is
stopped on detection of a trouble.) Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be
sages must be cleared by a simulation.
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,
improving the repair efficiency.)
Monitors the machine
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows conditions.
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This avoids
stopping of the machine due to running out the a consumable
part.) Detects/analyzes
the content.
C.Self diag message kinds
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Warning
࠙࣬
Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the
Trouble/Warning
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration,
etc.) Trouble
Πρήσ
Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by
a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Others - ൲ै೪গ
The machine is stopped.
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)
ඤယͬນা
The content is displayed.
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
Others -
Warning
࠙࣬ A consumable No
OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime
Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬ಺औ the cause. ક࿍ΩȜΜ࢐۟¦༞‫ݯ‬
the consumable part.
ਘၑ
Repair
Cancel the self-diagnostic

ΘͼͺΈȪΞΑΠ΋ζϋΡȫ
message with the
൝ͤ͢ͅুࡨ૷౯ιΛΓȜΐ
diagnostic (test
ٜੰcommands).
Reset
໘‫ܦ‬
Standby
ఞ‫ેܥ‬ఠ state
MX-5141N TROUBLE CODE 7 – 1

E.Breakdown sequence
(1) Trouble code and operatable mode
Operatable mode
Judg- Copy scan FAST
Scan-
Trouble content ment Trouble code (including Scan Scan List FAX FAX Notifi-
To Print
block interrup- (Push) (Pull) print Send print cation
HDD
tion) to host
FAX board - FAX board MFP F6 (00, 01, 04, 21, ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
trouble breakdown 30, 97, 98)
HDD trouble - SD card E7 (07) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
- HDD breakdown E7 (03, A5) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
- HDD-ASIC E7 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
Scanner - SCU A0 (02) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○ ○ ✕ ○ ○
communication communication E7 (80)
trouble error
Engine - PCU A0 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
communication communication E7 (90)
trouble error
Option - ACU A0 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
communication communication
trouble error
Backup battery - Backup battery U1 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
voltage fall voltage fall
trouble
Operation - Controller fan L4 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble 1 trouble
Operation - External serial U7 (50, 51) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
disable trouble 2 I/F communication
error (RIC)
- Memory error U2 (00, 11, 40, 41, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 15
(included not 42)
installed the
expansion RAM)
- Connection trouble A0 (10, 15, 17, 20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(Model data E7 (60, 61)
discrepancy)
(MFPC detection)
- Serial number data U2 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
error
- HDD registration U2 (50) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
data check sum
error
Operation - Memory check E7 (96) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
disable trouble 3 error when booting
- Image memory E7 (01, 49, 91, 92, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
trouble, decode 93, 94)
error
- Image memory E7 (42, 46, 47, 48) ✕ 17 ✕ ✕ ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○
trouble, decode
error
(Image high
compression)
Operation - Personal counter PC (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
disable trouble 4 connection trouble
Power controller - Power controller L8 (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
trouble error
Special function - Watermark data U2 (60) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
trouble error P1 (00, 01, 02)

Operatable mode
Scan-
To Print
HDD
tion) to host
Laser trouble - LSU breakdown PCU E7 (20, 24, 28, 29, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
A0) *10
L6 (10)
Engine trouble 1 - Connection trouble A0 (21) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(Model data E7 (50, 55)
discrepancy) (PCU F1 (50)
detection)
Engine trouble 2 - PCU troubles C1 (10, 14) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
(motor, fusing, etc.) C4 (00, 02, 03, 20) *10
F2 (22, 40, 64, 70,
74, 91)
H2 (00, 01, 02, 03)
H3 (00, 01, 02)
H4 (00, 01, 02, 30)
H5 (01)
H7 (10, 11)
L4 (02, 03, 04, 05,
06, 11, 16, 31, 32,
34, 35, 45, 50, 56,
58)
L8 (01)
U2 (90, 91)
Color system - General PCU color E7 (21, 22, 23, 25, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
trouble system breakdown 26, 27, A1, A2, A3) *19 *19 *19 *19 *19 *19 *19 *10
F2 (23, 24, 25, 41, *19
42, 43, 65, 66, 67,
71, 72, 73, 75, 76,
77, 92, 93, 94)
Paper feed tray - Paper feed tray 1 F3 (12) 3 ○ ○ ○ 3 3 ○ 3 ○
1 trouble breakdown *10
Paper feed tray - Paper feed tray 2 F3 (22) 3 ○ ○ ○ 3 3 ○ 3 ○
Paper feed tray - Paper feed tray 3 U6 (01) 3 ○ ○ ○ 3 3 ○ 3 ○
Paper feed tray - Paper feed tray 4 U6 (02) 3 ○ ○ ○ 3 3 ○ 3 ○
Paper feed tray - Paper feed tray 5 U6 (09, 20, 21, 22, 3 ○ ○ ○ 3 3 ○ 3 ○
5 trouble breakdown 51) *10
Paper feed tray - Paper feed tray U6 (00, 10, 50) 11 ○ ○ ○ 11 11 ○ 11 ○
other troubles other breakdown *10
Staple trouble - Staple breakdown F1 (08, 10) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 ○
*10
Saddle stitch - Saddle stitch F1 (31, 41, 42, 43, 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 ○
section trouble section breakdown 44, 45, 46, 47, 51) *10
Finisher trouble - After-process F1 (00, 03, 11, 15, 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 ○
breakdown 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, *10
30, 32, 33, 34, 36,
37, 38, 39, 52)
Other troubles - Other troubles EE (EC, EL, EU) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Process control - Process control F2 (39, 49, 50, 51, ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
trouble breakdown 52, 53, 58, 78) *12
(PCU detection)
PCU section - PCU error C4 (10) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
error *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16

Operatable mode
Scan-
To Print
HDD
tion) to host
Operation - Connection trouble SCU A0 (22) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble (Model data E7 (70)
discrepancy) (SCU
detection)
Color system - SCU color system UC (02) 9 9 9 9 ○ ○ 9 ○ ○
trouble breakdown
(SCU detection) (SCU detection)
Anti-copy - Anti-copy system UC (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○ ○ ✕ ○ ○
trouble
Scanner trouble - SCU EEPROM U2 (80, 81) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○ ○ ✕ ○ ○
1 error
Scanner trouble - Scanner section L1 (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○ ○ ✕ ○ ○
2 breakdown (mirror L3 (00)
motor, lens, copy
lamp)
- Multi touch panel U9 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○ ○ ✕ ○ ○
error
CCD trouble - CCD breakdown E7 (10, 11, 14) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○ ○ ✕ ○ ○
(shading, etc.)
DSPF/DF - DSPF/DF U5 (00,16,30,31) 6 6 6 6 ○ ○ 6 ○ ○
trouble breakdown
SPF back - General troubles in E6 (10,11,14) 7 7 7 7 ○ ○ 7 ○ ○
surface trouble the SPF back
surface scanning
section
Error where only history data are saved
Operatable mode
Scan-
To Print
HDD
tion) to host
Error history PCU F2 (45) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Error history MFP U2 (05) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
E7 (02)
○ : Operation enabled ✕: Operation disabled

1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.
3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section. * However, it is valid
only when the exit tray setting has been made.
9: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the black and white mode.
*10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
11: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK and the LCC.
*12: A trouble message is displayed. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
15: FAST notification function (When in U2-22, trouble notification cannot be made. If there is no abnormality in the FAX software or the
FAST data in U2-23, trouble notification can be made.)
*16: Print is enabled. Displays "Call for service. CODE: **-**".
17: Job execution enable only in a format other than high compression PDF.
*19: When the color mode is set to disable in the "Color mode disable setting" of the system setting, the operation is enabled in the black and
white mode.

(2) Trouble detection sequence and trouble cancel sequence when turning on the power
MFP event Each block

manager
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6, F3 trouble check When the power is turned on,
Trouble check is preformed in each block, check is made in each block.
and the result is sent to the MFP. Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP
U2 Saved in each block
U6-09 Saved in the PCU
F3-12, 22 Saved in the PCU
(Trouble cancel sequence)

When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16 sim task
SIM13: U1 trouble cancel

SIM14: H3, H4, H5
(Color mode inhibition) cancel
SIM15: U6 trouble cancel,
F3-12, F3-22 trouble cancel Trouble cancel
SIM16: U2 trouble cancel Trouble cancel command
(The trouble memory is
initialized.)
Trouble cancel status
is communicated.
The process has priority when the power is turned ON with the MFP.
When booting, two or more troubles in the list below may be detected. In this case, the trouble code of higher priority is displayed.
Process sequence Error code Content

U2 10 User authentication index check sum error
24 User authentication counter check sum error
30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error
60 Watermark check error
First 23 Individual data of MPF PWB SRAM memory check sum error
(Low priority) 22 SRAM memory check sum error
A0 15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware

20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP)
U2 11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error

00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
Last E7 48 Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC memory error
(High priority) 42 Image data trouble (Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC)
96 MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error (MFPC PWB)
95 Printer PWB DIMM memory check error (PRINTER section)
U1 01 Battery trouble
E7 60 Combination error between PWB and firmware (MFPC PWB detection)
A0 04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM error

F.Trouble code list
Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
A0 01 PCU PWB ROM error MFP ○
02 SCU PWB ROM error MFP ○
04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM error MFP ○
10 Color profile error MFP ○
15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware MFP ○
17 Inconsistency between the UI data and the CPU firmware version MFP ○
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP) MFP ○
21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU) PCU ○
22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU) SCU ○
C1 10 Main charger trouble (Monochrome) PCU ○
14 Main charger trouble (Color) PCU ○
C4 00 PTC trouble PCU ○
02 PTC heater open trouble PCU ○
03 PTC heater short trouble PCU ○
10 PTC no control PCU ○
20 Primary transfer output trouble PCU ○
E6 10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU ○
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU ○
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU ○
E7 01 MFP image data error MFP ○
02 HDD trouble when the mirroring kit is installed MFP ○
03 HDD trouble / Mirroring kit error MFP ○
04 HDD-ASIC error MFP ○
07 SD card error MFP ○
10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU ○
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU ○
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU ○
20 LSU laser detection error (K) PCU ○
21 LSU laser detection error (C) PCU ○
22 LSU laser detection error (M) PCU ○
23 LSU laser detection error (Y) PCU ○
24 LSU LD driver error (K) PCU ○
25 LSU LD driver error (C) PCU ○
26 LSU LD driver error (M) PCU ○
27 LSU LD driver error (Y) PCU ○
28 LSU - PCU connection error PCU ○
29 LSU ASIC frequency error PCU ○
42 Image data trouble (Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC) MFP ○
46 Image data decode error (Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC) MFP ○
47 Combination error between MFP PWB and ACRE firmware MFP ○
48 Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC memory error MFP ○
49 Water Mark data error MFP ○
50 Combination error between PWB and firmware (PCU PWB detection) PCU ○
60 Combination error between PWB and firmware (MFPC PWB detection) MFP ○
61 Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the PCU PWB MFP ○
(MFPC PWB detection)
70 Scanner connection error SCU ○
80 MFP - SCU PWB communication error MFP ○
90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error MFP ○
91 FAX reception image data error MFP ○
92 Copy image data error MFP ○
93 Copy, image send, filing, print image data process error MFP ○
94 Image file data process error (when importing file data) MFP ○
96 MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error MFP ○
A0 LSU LD PWB EEPROM read/write error (K) PCU ○
A1 LSU LD PWB EEPROM read/write error (C) PCU ○
A2 LSU LD PWB EEPROM read/write error (M) PCU ○
A3 LSU LD PWB EEPROM read/write error (Y) PCU ○
A5 Installation error of HDD which was used in the mirroring kit MFP ○
A6 Compact flash memory trouble MFP ○
EE EC Automatic toner density adjustment error PCU ○
EL Automatic toner density adjustment error (Over toner) PCU ○
EU Automatic toner density adjustment error (Under toner) PCU ○

Trouble
code Trouble
Main Sub detection
code code
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU ○
03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble PCU ○
08 Stapler shift trouble PCU ○
10 Staple operation trouble PCU ○
11 Finisher grip motor trouble PCU ○
15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble PCU ○
19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F PCU ○
20 Finisher alignment operation trouble R PCU ○
21 Finisher fan trouble PCU ○
22 Finisher rear edge assist motor trouble PCU ○
23 Finisher shutter trouble PCU ○
30 Finisher - Saddle unit communication trouble PCU ○
31 Finisher saddle motor trouble (Saddle stitch finisher) PCU ○
32 Communication error between the finisher and the punch unit PCU ○
(Saddle stitch finisher)
33 Punch unit shift operation trouble PCU ○
34 Punch operation trouble PCU ○
36 Punch paper edge detection error PCU ○
37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU ○
38 Punch data backup RAM error PCU ○
39 Punch paper dust sensor error PCU ○
41 Saddle paper positioning operation trouble PCU
42 Saddle guide motor trouble PCU ○
43 Saddle alignment operation trouble PCU ○
44 Saddle staple motor R trouble PCU ○
45 Saddle staple trouble PCU ○
46 Saddle pushing plate motor trouble PCU ○
47 Saddle paper transport motor trouble PCU ○
50 Main unit - Finisher combination error PCU ○
51 Saddle sensor connection trouble PCU ○
52 Finisher micro switch trouble PCU ○
F2 22 Discharge lamp trouble (K) PCU ○
23 Discharge lamp trouble (C) PCU ○
24 Discharge lamp trouble (M) PCU ○
25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y) PCU ○
39 Process thermistor trouble PCU ○
40 Toner density sensor trouble (K) PCU ○
41 Toner density sensor trouble (C) PCU ○
42 Toner density sensor trouble (M) PCU ○
43 Toner density sensor trouble (Y) PCU ○
45 Color image density sensor trouble PCU ○
49 LSU thermistor trouble PCU ○
50 K drum phase sensor trouble PCU ○
51 CL drum phase sensor trouble (41cpm machine) PCU ○
51 CL drum phase sensor trouble (CYAN) (51cpm machine) PCU ○
52 CL drum phase sensor trouble (MAGENTA) (51cpm machine) PCU ○
53 CL drum phase sensor trouble (YELLOW) (51cpm machine) PCU ○
58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble (HUD_M/TH_M) PCU ○
64 Toner supply operation trouble (K) PCU ○
65 Toner supply operation trouble (C) PCU ○
66 Toner supply operation trouble (M) PCU ○
67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y) PCU ○
70 Improper toner cartridge detection (K) PCU ○
71 Improper toner cartridge detection (C) PCU ○
72 Improper toner cartridge detection (M) PCU ○
73 Improper toner cartridge detection (Y) PCU ○
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K) PCU ○
75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (C) PCU ○
76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (M) PCU ○
77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (Y) PCU ○
78 Registration/BK image density sensor trouble PCU ○
(Transfer belt substrate reflection rate abnormality)
F2 91 High density process control high voltage error (K) PCU ○
92 High density process control high voltage error (C) PCU ○
93 High density process control high voltage error (M) PCU ○
94 High density process control high voltage error (Y) PCU ○
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU ○
22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble PCU ○

Trouble
code Trouble
Main Sub detection
code code
F6 00 MFPC PWB - FAX communication trouble MFP ○
01 FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write error FAX ○
04 FAX MODEM operation trouble FAX ○
21 Improper combination of TEL/LIU PWB and FAX soft switch FAX ○
30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (FAX detection) FAX ○
97 Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the main machine MFP ○
98 Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB destination and the main MFP ○
machine destination
H2 00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU ○
01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_LM) PCU ○
02 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US) PCU ○
03 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM_AD1) PCU ○
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU ○
01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU ○
02 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU ○
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU ○
01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU ○
02 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU ○
30 Thermistor input circuit trouble (TH_UM) PCU ○
H5 01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam PCU ○
H7 10 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_UM_AD2) PCU ○
11 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_LM) PCU ○
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCU ○
L3 00 Scanner return trouble SCU ○
L4 02 Paper feed motor trouble PCU ○
03 Fusing motor trouble PCU ○
04 Developing motor trouble (BLACK) PCU ○
05 Developing motor trouble (COLOR) PCU ○
06 Transfer unit lift trouble PCU ○
07 Transfer belt motor trouble PCU ○
11 Shift motor trouble PCU ○
16 Fusing pressure release trouble PCU ○
30 MFP fan motor trouble MFP ○
31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble PCU ○
32 Power source cooling fan trouble PCU ○
34 LSU cooling fan trouble PCU ○
35 Fusing cooling fan trouble PCU ○
45 Toner cooling fan trouble (Toner cooling fan 1, 2) PCU ○
50 Process fan trouble PCU ○
56 Rear cooling fan trouble PCU ○
58 Ozone exhaust fan trouble PCU ○
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU ○
L8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU ○
02 Full wave signal error PCU ○
20 Communication error of MFPC PWB/LSU mother board MFP ○
P1 00 PCI communication error MFP ○
01 PCI fan error MFP ○
02 Plasma generating device error MFP ○
PC - Personal counter not detected MFP ○
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP ○
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFP ○
05 Erroneous detection of account management data MFP ○
11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error MFP ○
30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency MFP ○
40 SD card system storage data area error MFP ○
41 HDD system storage data area error MFP ○
42 Machine adjustment data (system storage data area) error MFP ○
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error MFP ○
60 Watermark check error MFP ○
80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error SCU ○
81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error SCU ○
90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU ○
91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU ○
U5 00 Document feed unit communication error SCU ○
16 Document feed unit fan trouble SCU ○
30 Document feed unit tray lift up trouble SCU ○
31 Document feed unit tray lift down trouble SCU ○

Trouble
code Trouble
Main Sub detection
code code
U6 00 PCU PWB - Paper feed desk (paper feed tray 3, 4) communication trouble PCU ○
01 Paper feed tray 3 lift trouble PCU ○
02 Paper feed tray 4 lift trouble PCU ○
09 LCC lift motor trouble PCU ○
10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport motor trouble PCU ○
20 LCC control PWB - PCU PWB communication error PCU ○
21 LCC transport motor trouble PCU ○
22 LCC 24V power trouble PCU ○
50 Desk - Main unit combination trouble PCU ○
51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble PCU ○
U7 50 MFPC PWB - Vendor machine communication error MFP ○
51 Vendor machine error MFP ○
U9 01 Multi touch panel error SCU ○
UC 02 CPT - ASIC error SCU ○
20 DOCC ASIC error SCU ○

G.Details of error codes and countermeasures
A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error A0-20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (MFP)
Detail MFP
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by Detail MFP
interruption of the power during the version-up Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and
operation, etc. the EEPROM data version.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up
procedure again.
Replace the PCU PWB.
A0-21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (PCU)
A0-02 SCU PWB ROM error
Detail PCU
Detail MFP Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by the EEPROM data version.
interruption of the power during the version-up Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
operation, etc.
SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up A0-22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
procedure again. version (SCU)
Replace the SCU PWB.
Detail SCU
A0-04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) Cause Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.
(ACRE) ROM error Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Detail MFP
Cause Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM data C1-10 Main charger trouble (Monochrome)
error.
An error occurs during firmware upgrading for some
reasons. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Perform firmware upgrading again. Cause The main charger unit (BK) is not installed properly.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (BK).
The developer unit (KCMY) is not installed properly.
There is an abnormality in the developer unit
A0-10 Color profile error (KCMY).
Disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB
Detail MFP connector.
Cause The content of the color profile is abnormal. Breakage of the high voltage harness.
Combination error between the MFPC PWB firmware High voltage MC PWB trouble.
and the color profile PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware collectively. Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Check the output of the developing bias with SIM8-1.
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace.
Check disconnection of the developer unit./Replace.
A0-15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and pro- Check disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB
connector./Replace.
gram firmware Replace the high voltage MC PWB.
Detail MFP
Cause Installation of the normal firmware was performed
with a security kit enable. C1-14 Main charger trouble (Color)
Check & Remedy Stop installation of the normal firmware.
Detail PCU
Cause The main charger unit (CMY) is not installed properly.
A0-17 Inconsistency between the UI data There is an abnormality in the main charger unit
and the CPU firmware version (CMY).
Disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB
connector.
Detail MFP Breakage of the high voltage harness.
Cause Combination error between the UI contents data and High voltage MC PWB trouble.
the CPU UI firmware version. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Install the firmware in the all-firmware version-up Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2.
mode. Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace.
Check disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB
connector./Replace.
Replace the high voltage MC PWB

C4-00 PTC trouble (TC high pressure trou- C4-10 PTC no control
ble)
Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause The engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 is set to "1".
The PTC control is not executed. (The PTC does not
Cause PTC unit is not properly installed.
operate.)
Primary/Secondary transfer PWB trouble..
When the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 is set to
Primary/Secondary transfer unit is not installed
"1", the PTC output, the heater control, and the error
properly.
detection are disabled. When this setting is made in
High pressure TC PWB trouble.
case of a PTC unit trouble, the PTC function is
PCU PWB trouble.
disabled regardless of the PTC trouble and printing
Connector, harness connection trouble.
operation can be performed.
Check & Remedy Replace the PTC unit.
Check & Remedy Set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "0".
Replace the secondary transfer PWB.
(The mode returns to the normal PTC control mode.)
Replace the secondary transfer unit.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
NOTE: C4-20 Primary transfer output trouble
When the PTC unit is broken down and repair cannot
be made because of no replacement part: Detail PCU
To use the machine continuously, make the setting to
Cause The primary transfer unit is not installed properly./
ignore the PTC trouble, and the machine can be
Trouble.
operated tentatively.
High voltage 1TC PWB trouble.
Set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "1".
High voltage MC PWB trouble.
This setting disables the PTC output, the heater
PCU PWB trouble.
control, and the error detection.
After completion of repair, set the engine soft SW8-3
Check & Remedy Replace the primary transfer unit.
in SIM55-1 to "0".
Check disconnection of the high voltage 1TC PWB
connector./Replace.
Check disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB
C4-02 PTC heater open trouble connector./Replace.
Detail PCU
Cause The PTC unit is not installed, or the eater line
conduction trouble. E6-10 Shading error (Black correction)
PCU PWB trouble.
Detail SCU
Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness.
CCD unit trouble.
DSPF PWB trouble.
NOTE:
Check and remedy Check the installing state of the harness to the CCD
unit.
be made because of no replacement part:
Check the CCD unit.
Check the DSPF PWB.
Set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "1".
This setting disables the PTC output, the heater E6-11 Shading error (White correction)
control, and the error detection.
After completion of repair, set the engine soft SW8-3 Detail SCU
in SIM55-1 to "0".
Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness.
Copy lamp lighting trouble.
Dirt on the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
C4-03 PTC heater short trouble plate.
CCD unit trouble.
Detail PCU DSPF PWB trouble.
Shading SIM not executed / Shading ROM
Cause PTC unit trouble.
abnormality.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Check and remedy Check the installing state of the harness the CCD
unit.
Check the installing state of the harness to the copy
lamp unit.
Clean the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
NOTE:
plate.
Check the CCD unit.
be made because of no replacement part:
Check the DSPF PWB.
Set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "1". E6-14 CCD-ASIC error
This setting disables the PTC output, the heater
control, and the error detection. Detail SCU
After completion of repair, set the engine soft SW8-3
Cause DSPF PWB trouble.
in SIM55-1 to "0".
Check and remedy Check the DSPF PWB.

Check & Remedy Replace the SD card.
E7-01 MFP image data error Check the SD card socket.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Detail MFP
Cause Image data transfer error in the MFPC PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble. E7-10 Shading error (Black correction)
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
of the MFPC PWB. Detail SCU
Check or replace the MFPC PWB. Cause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the
scanner lamp is turned OFF.
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
E7-02 HDD trouble when the mirroring kit is CCD unit abnormality.
installed SCU PWB abnormality.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check the CCD unit.
Detail MFP Check the SCU PWB.
Cause When installing the mirroring kit, the HDD of the
machine or the HDD of the mirroring kit breaks down
or connection fails. E7-11 Shading error (White correction)
- Defective installation of the mirroring kit
- Breakdown of the HDD of the mirroring kit
- Defective connection between the HDD Detail SCU
and the mirroring kit harness Cause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan
level when the scanner lamp is turned ON.
- MFP PWB trouble
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check & Remedy - Use SIM62-20 to check the trouble. Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate.
- Check installation of the mirroring kit (con- Scanner lamp lighting trouble.
nector and harness), and replace if neces- Scanner lamp drive PWB trouble
sary. CCD unit abnormality.
- Replace the broken HDD. SCU PWB abnormality.
- Replace the mirroring kit. Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
- Replace the MFP PWB. Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp
unit.
Check or replace the scanner lamp.
Check or replace the scanner lamp drive PWB.
E7-03 HDD trouble / Mirroring kit error Clean or replace the mirror, the lens, and the
reference white board.
Detail MFP Check or replace the CCD unit.
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFPC Check or replace the SCU PWB.
PWB and HDD.
HDD (error file management area) data abnormality
(FAT breakage). E7-14 CCD-ASIC error
MFPC PWB trouble.
(When the mirroring kit is installed)
Detail SCU
RAID PWB trouble.
Cause SCU PWB trouble.
A HDD which has been used for mirroring is installed.
Both HDD's go into trouble under the use Check & Remedy Check the SCU PWB.
environment of mirroring. Replace the SCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
of the MFPC PWB and HDD.
Use SIM62-2, 3 to check read/write operations of the E7-20 LSU laser detection error (K)
HDD.
Replace the HDD. Detail PCU
Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
Cause Laser optical axis misalignment
(When the mirroring kit is installed) Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
Check the RAID PWB, and replace if necessary. trouble.
Replace the HDD. LSU harness, connector trouble
(For details, refer to the HDD and RAID PWB LSU trouble
replacement procedures under mirroring
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
environment.)
Check or replace the LSU control PWB.
Check connection of the LSU harness.
Replace the LSU.
E7-04 HDD-ASIC error
Detail MFP E7-21 LSU laser detection error (C)

Cause HDD-ASIC trouble. (MFPC PWB trouble.)
An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when Detail PCU
booting.
Check & Remedy Check or replace the MFPC PWB. Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
trouble.
LSU harness, connector trouble
E7-07 SD card error LSU trouble
Detail MFP Check or replace the LSU control PWB.
Check connection of the LSU harness.
Cause SD card trouble or contact error
Replace the LSU.
MFPC PWB trouble.

E7-22 LSU laser detection error (M) E7-26 LSU LD driver error (M)
Detail PCU Detail PCU

Cause Laser optical axis misalignment Cause When lighting the LSU LD, initialization of the LD
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode driver is not performed normally.
trouble. Harness/connector trouble between the LD PWB and
LSU harness, connector trouble the LSU mother PWB.
LSU trouble LD PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. LSU mother PWB trouble.
Check or replace the LSU control PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check connection of the LSU harness. Check the LSU, and replace if necessary.
Replace the LSU. Check the LSU mother PWB, and replace if
necessary.
Check connection of the harness/connector between
E7-23 LSU laser detection error (Y) the LD PWB and the LSU mother PWB.
Detail PCU
E7-27 LSU LD driver error (Y)
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
trouble. Detail PCU
LSU harness, connector trouble Cause When lighting the LSU LD, initialization of the LD
LSU trouble driver is not performed normally.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. Harness/connector trouble between the LD PWB and
Check or replace the LSU control PWB. the LSU mother PWB.
Check connection of the LSU harness. LD PWB trouble.
Replace the LSU. LSU mother PWB trouble.
Check the LSU, and replace if necessary.
E7-24 LSU LD driver error (K) Check the LSU mother PWB, and replace if
necessary.
Detail PCU the LD PWB and the LSU mother PWB.
Cause When lighting the LSU LD, initialization of the LD
driver is not performed normally.
Harness/connector trouble between the LD PWB and E7-28 LSU - PCU connection error
the LSU mother PWB.
LD PWB trouble.
LSU mother PWB trouble. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. Cause Communication error between the CPU in the PCU
Check the LSU, and replace if necessary. PWB and the LSU control ASIC.
Check the LSU mother PWB, and replace if Improper connection of the communication connector
necessary. between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB
Check connection of the harness/connector between (interface PWB).
the LD PWB and the LSU mother PWB. Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the LSU
control PWB (interface PWB)
PCU PWB trouble.
E7-25 LSU LD driver error (C) LSU control PWB trouble.
LSU trouble.
LSU mother PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
Cause When lighting the LSU LD, initialization of the LD between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB
driver is not performed normally. (interface PWB).
Harness/connector trouble between the LD PWB and Replace the LSU mother PWB.
the LSU mother PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
LD PWB trouble. Replace the LSU.
LSU mother PWB trouble. Replace the LSU control PWB.
Check the LSU, and replace if necessary.
Check the LSU mother PWB, and replace if E7-29 LSU ASIC frequency error
necessary.
the LD PWB and the LSU mother PWB. Detail PCU
Cause Oscillation abnormality of the external oscillator and
the internal oscillating circuit used in the LSU ASIC.
LSU ASIC abnormality on the LSU ASIC PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the LSU control PWB.

E7-42 Image data trouble (Scanner E7-50 Combination error between PWB and
expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC) firmware (PCU PWB detection)
Detail MFP Detail PCU

Cause An image data error occurs. Cause A PWB/firmware/LSU which is not compatible with
An image data send error occurs. the machine specifications is detected.
Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble
Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) trouble. LSU trouble
MFPC PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the scanner expansion PWB Check or replace the LSU.
(ACRE). Check or replace the PCU PWB.
Check the scanner expansion PWB (ACRE), and
replace if necessary.
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary. E7-60 Combination error between PWB and
firmware (MFPC PWB detection)
E7-46 Image data decode error (Scanner
Detail MFP
expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC)
Cause A PWB/firmware which is not compatible with the
machine specifications is detected in the MFPC
Detail MFP PWB.
Cause A decode error occurs while high compression PDF MFPC PWB trouble.
images are made. (garbled data) Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) connection trouble. Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the scanner expansion PWB E7-61 Combination error between the MFPC
(ACRE).
PWB and the PCU PWB
replace if necessary. (MFPC PWB detection)
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
Detail MFP
Cause Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the
E7-47 Combination error between MFP PWB PCU PWB.
and Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) MFPC PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFPC PWB and
the PCU PWB.
Cause Connect to the scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) with
the firmware which does not support MFP PWB.
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware on SIM49-1 or SIM49-10.
E7-70 Scanner connection error

E7-48 Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC
memory error Detail SCU
Cause Unsupported PWB or firmware is detected.
Trouble content - DDR calibration error Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware.
- DIMM insertion trouble, etc. Replace the SCU PWB.
Detail MFP
Cause Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) DIMM trouble,
memory slot trouble. E7-80 MFP - SCU PWB communication error
Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) DIMM insertion
trouble.
Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) connection trouble. Detail MFP
Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) trouble. Cause SCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble. SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check insertion of the scanner expansion PWB MFPC PWB trouble.
(ACRE) DIMM memory. Check & Remedy Check connection of the SCU PWB and the MFPC
Check the scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) DIMM PWB.
memory, and replace if necessary. Check the ground.
Check connection of the scanner expansion PWB Replace the SCU PWB.
(ACRE). Replace the MFPC PWB.
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary. E7-90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error
Detail MFP
E7-49 Water Mark data error Cause PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Detail MFP MFPC PWB trouble.
Cause Watermark data trouble. Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB and the MFPC
HDD trouble. PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data. Check the ground.
Replace the HDD. Replace the PCU PWB.

E7-91 FAX reception image data error E7-94 Image file data process error (when
importing file data)
Detail MFP
Cause Image data process abnormality Detail MFP
HDD trouble
Cause Image data process abnormality
SD card trouble or contact error
HDD trouble
Image compression data corruption
MFPC PWB trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
DIMM memory trouble or contact error
FAX control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
the memory.
the memory.
Replace the HDD.
Replace the HDD.
Replace or check installation of the SD card.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
Replace the FAX control PWB.
E7-96 MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error
E7-92 Copy image data error Detail MFP

Cause Memory data corruption occurs
MFPC PWB trouble
Detail MFP
HDD trouble
the memory.
MFPC PWB trouble
DIMM memory socket check
Replace the DIMM memory.
the memory.
Replace the HDD.
E7-A0 LSU LD PWB EEPROM read/write
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory. error (K)
Detail PCU
E7-93 Copy, image send, filing, print image Cause LD PWB EEPROM trouble.
data process error LSU mother PWB trouble.
Connector/harness trouble between the LD PWB and
the LSU mother PWB.
Detail MFP
Connector/harness trouble between the PCU PWB
and the LSU mother PWB.
HDD trouble
Check & Remedy Check the LSU, and replace if necessary.
Check the LSU mother PWB, and replace if
MFPC PWB trouble
necessary.
Check the connector/harness between the LD PWB
and the LSU mother PWB, and replace if necessary.
the memory.
Check the connector/harness between the PCU PWB
Replace the HDD.
Replace the LSU.
E7-A1 LSU LD PWB EEPROM read/write

error (C)
Detail PCU
Cause LD PWB EEPROM trouble.
Connector/harness trouble between the LD PWB and
the LSU mother PWB.
Connector/harness trouble between the PCU PWB
and the LSU mother PWB.
necessary.
Replace the LSU.

E7-A2 LSU LD PWB EEPROM read/write EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment
error (M) error (Over toner)

Cause LD PWB EEPROM trouble. Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
LSU mother PWB trouble. Developing unit trouble.
Connector/harness trouble between the LD PWB and PCU PWB trouble.
the LSU mother PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Connector/harness trouble between the PCU PWB Replace the developing unit.
and the LSU mother PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
necessary. EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment
error (Under toner)
and the LSU mother PWB, and replace if necessary. Detail PCU
Replace the LSU. Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
E7-A3 LSU LD PWB EEPROM read/write Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
error (Y) Replace the developing unit.
Detail PCU
Cause LD PWB EEPROM trouble. F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication
Connector/harness trouble between the LD PWB and error
the LSU mother PWB.
Connector/harness trouble between the PCU PWB Detail PCU
and the LSU mother PWB. Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
Check & Remedy Check the LSU, and replace if necessary. between the finisher and the PCU PWB.
Check the LSU mother PWB, and replace if Finisher control PWB trouble.
necessary. PCU PWB trouble.
Check the connector/harness between the LD PWB Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
and the LSU mother PWB, and replace if necessary. finisher and the PCU PWB.
Check the connector/harness between the PCU PWB Replace the finisher control PWB.
and the LSU mother PWB, and replace if necessary. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the LSU.
F1-03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting

E7-A5 Installation error of HDD which was
operation trouble
used in the mirroring kit
Detail PCU
Detail MFP
Cause Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble
Cause A HDD which was used in the mirroring kit is installed Harness and connector connection trouble
to the MFP without the mirroring kit. Home position sensor trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the HDD with one which has not been used Finisher control PWB trouble
in the mirroring kit. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
roller lift motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
E7-A6 Compact flash memory trouble position sensor.
Replace the paper exit roller lift motor.
Detail MFP Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the home position sensor.
Cause Compact flash memory trouble.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble.
File system control area data trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the compact flash memory.
F1-08 Stapler shift trouble
Detail PCU
EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment Cause Stapler shift motor trouble.
error Finisher control PWB trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
Detail PCU motor.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble. Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Developing unit trouble. position sensor.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the stapler shift motor.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the developing unit. Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the finisher control PWB.

F1-10 Staple operation trouble F1-20 Finisher alignment operation trouble
R
Detail PCU
Cause Staple motor trouble. Detail PCU
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Motor speed abnormality.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple Over-current to the motor.
motor. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home Home position sensor trouble.
position sensor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
Replace the staple motor.
alignment motor R.
position sensor.
Replace the paper alignment motor R.
F1-11 Finisher grip motor trouble
Detail PCU F1-21 Finisher fan trouble

Cause Paper exit operation trouble caused by the gripper.
Gripper motor lock or trouble. Detail PCU
Gripper home position sensor trouble.
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short-circuit/open, finisher
control PWB trouble, connection harness/connector
Connection trouble of the harness and the connector
trouble.
of the finisher control PWB and the gripper motor.
Fan motor lock, short-circuit, open circuit.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the gripper Finisher fan trouble.
motor. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check the connection of the harness and the Connector/harness trouble
connector of the finisher control PWB and the gripper
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the fan.
motor, and replace if necessary.
Check the finisher fan, and replace if necessary.
Check the gripper motor, and replace if necessary.
Check the finisher control PWB, and replace if
Check the gripper home position sensor, and replace
necessary.
if necessary.
Check the connector/harness, and replace if
necessary.
necessary.
F1-22 Finisher rear edge assist motor

F1-15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation
trouble
trouble
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Motor harness short/open trouble.
Cause Paper exit tray lift motor trouble.
Control PWB trouble.
Connection harness/connector connection trouble
Check & Remedy Check the operation of the rear edge assist motor
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
with SIM3-3.
tray lift motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the
motor.
position sensor.
Replace the control PWB.
Replace the paper exit tray lift motor.
F1-23 Finisher shutter trouble
F1-19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F Detail PCU

Cause Motor lock trouble.
Control PWB trouble.
Detail PCU
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Connection harness/connector connection trouble.
Motor speed abnormality.
Check & Remedy Check the operation of the bundle paper exit motor
Over-current to the motor.
with SIM3-3.
Check connection from the control PWB to the
motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor F.
position sensor.
F1-30 Finisher - Saddle unit communication
Replace the paper alignment motor F. trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Connector and harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Turn OFF/ON the power.

F1-31 Finisher saddle motor trouble F1-36 Punch paper edge detection error
(Saddle stitch finisher)
Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Punch paper edge sensor trouble.
Harness disconnection.
Cause Saddle paper folding motor trouble.
Saddle paper folding mechanism trouble.
Punch control PWB trouble.
Folding plate home position sensor trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor.
Saddle paper folding motor rotation sensor trouble. Replace the punch paper edge sensor.
Harness/connector connection trouble. Replace the finisher control PWB.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the punch control PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
motor.
Check the saddle paper folding mechanism. F1-37 Finisher data backup RAM error
necessary. Detail PCU
Check the folding plate home position sensor, and
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
Malfunction due to noises
Check the saddle paper folding motor rotation sensor,
Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.
and replace if necessary.
Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10, Finisher control
Check connection of the harness/connector, and
PWB DIP SW adjustment.)
Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary.
F1-38 Punch data backup RAM error

F1-32 Communication error between
the finisher and the punch unit Detail PCU
Cause Punch control PWB trouble.
(Saddle stitch finisher) Malfunction due to noises
Check & Remedy Replace the punch control PWB.
Detail PCU Set the punch unit specifications, and adjust the
Cause Connector/harness trouble between the finisher and sensor. (Punch unit control PWB DIP SW
the punch unit. adjustment.)
PCU PWB trouble.
Malfunction due to noises. F1-39 Punch paper dust sensor error
Check & Remedy Check the connector/harness between the finisher
and the punch unit, and replace if necessary.
Detail PCU
necessary. Cause Punch dust sensor trouble.
Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Punch unit control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor.
F1-33 Punch unit shift operation trouble Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Replace the punch dust sensor.
Detail PCU Replace the finisher control PWB.
Cause Punch shift motor trouble. Replace the punch unit control PWB.
Harness and connector connection trouble. F1-41 Saddle paper positioning operation
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch trouble
shifting.
position sensor. Detail PCU
Replace the punch shift motor. Cause Saddle paper positioning guide drive motor trouble.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Replace the home position sensor. Home position sensor trouble.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Harness and connector connection trouble.
paper positioning motor.
F1-34 Punch operation trouble Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Detail PCU
Replace the sensor.
Cause Punch motor trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
position sensor.
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch.
Replace the punch motor.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.

F1-42 Saddle guide motor trouble F1-47 Saddle paper transport motor trouble

Cause Saddle roller guide motor trouble. Cause Saddle paper transport motor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Fuse blown (24V line).
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle roller Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
guide motor. paper transport motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Turn OFF/ON the power. Replace the control PWB.
Replace the control PWB. Replace the sensor.
Replace the sensor.
F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error

F1-43 Saddle alignment operation trouble
Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit
Cause Saddle alignment motor trouble. model is installed.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the Saddle
alignment motor (FSPAM).
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. F1-51 Saddle sensor connection trouble
Replace the sensor. Detail PCU
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
F1-44 Saddle staple motor R trouble Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM03-02 to check the operations of the guide
HP sensor and the push plate lead edge sensor.
Detail PCU Check connection from the control PWB to the sensor.
Cause Saddle staple motor R trouble. Replace the control PWB.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Replace the sensor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle F1-52 Finisher micro switch trouble
staple motor R.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Turn OFF/ON the power. Detail PCU
Replace the control PWB. Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
Replace the sensor. Each micro switch trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM03-02 to check the operations of the front
F1-45 Saddle staple trouble door/upper door open detection and the oscillation
guide close detection.
Check connection from the control PWB to the sensor.
Detail PCU Replace the control PWB.
Cause Saddle staple motor trouble. Replace the sensor.
Harness and connector connection trouble. F2-22 Discharge lamp trouble (K)
staple motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. Detail PCU
Turn OFF/ON the power. Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (K)
Replace the control PWB. and the PCU PWB.
Replace the sensor. Discharge lamp PWB (K) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (K).
F1-46 Saddle pushing plate motor trouble Check the harness and the connector.
Detail PCU
Cause Saddle motor trouble. F2-23 Discharge lamp trouble (C)
Harness and connector connection trouble. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (C)
motor. and the PCU PWB.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. Discharge lamp PWB (C) trouble.
Turn OFF/ON the power. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the control PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (C).
Replace the sensor. Check the harness and the connector.

F2-24 Discharge lamp trouble (M) F2-42 Toner density sensor trouble (M)

Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
(M) and the PCU PWB. Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
Discharge lamp PWB (M) trouble. Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (M). Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check the harness and the connector. Check connection of the sensor connector and the
Replace the PCU PWB. harness.
Replace the developing unit.
F2-25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y)
Detail PCU
F2-43 Toner density sensor trouble (Y)
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (Y)
and the PCU PWB. Detail PCU
Discharge lamp PWB (Y) trouble. Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
PCU PWB trouble. Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (Y). Developing unit trouble.
Check the harness and the connector. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check connection of the sensor connector and the
harness.
F2-39 Process thermistor trouble Replace the developing unit.
Detail PCU
Cause Process thermistor trouble. F2-45 Color image density sensor trouble
Process thermistor harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the process thermistor. Detail PCU
Check connection of the process thermistor harness Cause Color image density sensor sensitivity adjustment
and the connector. trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Color image density sensor trouble.
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble.
Image density sensor dirt.
F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble (K) Calibration plate dirt.
Transfer unit lift operation trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Replace the color image density sensor.
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality. Check connection of the sensor harness and the
Sensor connector and harness connection trouble. connector.
Developing unit trouble. Clean the image density sensor.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the calibration plate.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. Repair the transfer unit lift mechanism.
Check connection of the sensor connector and the Replace the PCU PWB.
harness. Use SIM44-13 to perform the sensitivity adjustment of
Replace the developing unit. the process control sensor.
F2-49 LSU thermistor trouble

F2-41 Toner density sensor trouble (C)
Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause The LSU temperature is outside of -28C - 78C.
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality. LSU thermistor trouble.
Sensor connector and harness connection trouble. LSU thermistor harness and connector connection
Developing unit trouble. trouble
PCU PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. LSU control PWB trouble.
Check connection of the sensor connector and the Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
harness. Replace the LSU control PWB.
Replace the developing unit. Replace the LSU.

F2-50 K drum phase sensor trouble F2-53 CL drum phase sensor trouble
(YELLOW) (51cpm machine)
Detail PCU
Cause Drum phase sensor trouble. Detail PCU
Drum phase sensor harness and connector
Cause Drum phase sensor trouble.
connection trouble
Drum drive section trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_K".
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_C",
Replace the drum phase sensor.
"DHPD_M", "DHPD_Y".
Check connection of the drum phase sensor harness
and the connector.
Check connection of the connectors and the
Repair the drum drive section.
harness.
F2-51 CL drum phase sensor trouble

(41cpm machine) F2-58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble
(HUD_M/TH_M)
Detail PCU
Cause Drum phase sensor trouble. Detail PCU
Drum phase sensor harness and connector
Cause Temperature/humidity sensor trouble.
connection trouble
Process humidity sensor harness and connector
connection trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_C",
Check & Remedy Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
"DHPD_M", "DHPD_Y".
Check connection of the temperature/humidity sensor
harness and the connector.
Check connection of the drum phase sensor harness
and the connector.
F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble (K)
F2-51 CL drum phase sensor trouble Detail PCU

(CYAN) (51cpm machine) Cause Toner motor trouble.
Toner density sensor trouble.
Connector/harness trouble.
Detail PCU PCU PWB trouble.
Cause Drum phase sensor trouble. Toner cartridge trouble.
Drum phase sensor harness and connector Developing unit trouble.
connection trouble Toner transport pipe section trouble
Drum drive section trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the toner density sensor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_C", Connector and harness check.
"DHPD_M", "DHPD_Y". Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the drum phase sensor. Replace the toner cartridge.
Check connection of the drum phase sensor harness Replace the developing unit.
and the connector. Check the toner transport pipe section.
F2-65 Toner supply operation trouble (C)
F2-52 CL drum phase sensor trouble Detail PCU
(MAGENTA) (51cpm machine) Cause Toner motor trouble.
Detail PCU Connector/harness trouble.
Cause Drum phase sensor trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Toner cartridge trouble.
Drum drive section trouble. Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Toner transport pipe section trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_C", Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
"DHPD_M", "DHPD_Y". Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the drum phase sensor. Connector and harness check.
Check connection of the connectors and the Replace the PCU PWB.
harness. Replace the toner cartridge.
Repair the drum drive section. Replace the developing unit.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check the toner transport pipe section.

F2-66 Toner supply operation trouble (M) F2-73 Improper toner cartridge detection (Y)

Cause Toner motor trouble. Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
Toner density sensor trouble. unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
Connector/harness trouble. specification.)
PCU PWB trouble. Toner cartridge trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Developing unit trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Toner transport pipe section trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Replace the toner density sensor.
Connector and harness check. F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K)
Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the developing unit. Detail PCU
Check the toner transport pipe section. Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
F2-67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y) and toner cartridge
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Detail PCU Check the connector and the harness between the
Cause Toner motor trouble. PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.
Connector/harness trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. F2-75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (C)
Toner cartridge trouble.
Developing unit trouble.
Toner transport pipe section trouble Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor. Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
Replace the toner density sensor. PCU PWB trouble.
Connector and harness check. Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
Replace the PCU PWB. and toner cartridge
Replace the toner cartridge. Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the developing unit. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check the toner transport pipe section. Check the connector and the harness between the
PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.
F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection (K)

F2-76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (M)
Detail PCU
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main Detail PCU
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
specification.) PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble. Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
PCU PWB trouble. and toner cartridge
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check the connector and the harness between the
PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.
F2-71 Improper toner cartridge detection (C)
F2-77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (Y)
Detail PCU
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different Detail PCU
specification.) Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. and toner cartridge
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Check the connector and the harness between the
F2-72 Improper toner cartridge detection (M) PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.
Detail PCU
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
specification.)
Toner cartridge trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.

F2-78 Registration/BK image density F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble
sensor trouble (Transfer belt
substrate reflection rate abnormality) Detail PCU
Cause LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
CLUD2 sensor trouble.
Detail PCU Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble.
Cause Image density (registration) sensor trouble (Sensor PCU PWB trouble.
sensitivity adjustment trouble). Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of LUD2.
Image density (resist) sensor connector and harness Replace the lift-up unit.
connection trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
Image density (registration) sensor dirt.
Transfer belt dirt, scratch.
Check & Remedy Replace the image density (registration) sensor. F6-00 MFPC PWB - FAX communication
Check connection of the connector and the harness trouble
of the image density (resist) sensor.
Clean the image density (registration) sensor. Section MFP
Clean or replace the transfer belt.
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB trouble.
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
and
F2-91 High density process control high Remedy
voltage error (K) Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB - MFPC PWB connector and
harness trouble
Detail PCU Check Check the connector and the harness between the
and FAX control PWB and the MFPC PWB.
Cause ?
Remedy
Check & Remedy ?
Case 3 Cause FAX control PWB - Mother board connector and
harness trouble
Check Check the connector and the harness between the
F2-92 High density process control high and FAX control PWB and the mother board.
voltage error (C) Remedy
Case 4 Cause FAX control PWB ROM trouble / ROM pin breakage
Detail PCU Check Check the ROM of the FAX control PWB.
Cause ? and
Remedy
Check & Remedy ?
F2-93 High density process control high F6-01 FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write
voltage error (M) error
Section FAX
Detail PCU
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM trouble
Cause ?
Check Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of
Check & Remedy ?
and EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to
Remedy insure that EEPROM can be accessed.
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
F2-94 High density process control high
voltage error (Y) and
Remedy
Detail PCU
Cause ?
Check & Remedy ?
F6-04 FAX MODEM operation trouble
Section FAX
F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble Case 1 Cause FAX MODEM chip operation trouble.
Detail PCU and
remedy
Cause LUD1 is not turned ON within the specified time.
CLUD1 sensor trouble. Case 2 Cause The FAX MODEM chip cannot be accessed.
Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble. Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
PCU PWB trouble. and
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble Remedy
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
of LUD1.
Replace the lift-up unit.

F6-21 Improper combination of TEL/LIU H2-01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_LM)
PWB and FAX soft switch
Detail PCU
Section FAX Cause Thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Case 1 Cause The destination of the TEL/LIU PWB installed is
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
improper.
Fusing section connector connection trouble
Check Check the destination of the TEL/LIU PWB.
Fusing unit not installed
and
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Remedy
Replace the thermistor.
Case 2 Cause TEL/LIU PWB trouble.
Check Replace the TEL/LIU PWB. Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
and harness.
Remedy Check the connector in the fusing section.
F6-30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access H2-02 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US)
error (FAX detection)
Detail PCU
Section FAX Cause Thermistor trouble
Case 1 Cause Program writing trouble to the 1-chip microprocessor, PCU PWB trouble
or no program data written. Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Check Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor Fusing section connector connection trouble
and program. Fusing unit not installed
Remedy Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Case 2 Cause FAX 1-chip microprocessor circuit trouble. Replace the thermistor.
Check Replace the FAX control PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
and Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
Remedy harness.
Check the connector in the fusing section.
F6-97 Incompatibility between FAX control

H2-03 Thermistor open trouble
PWB and the main machine
(TH_UM_AD1)
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause The FAX control PWB installed is improper. Detail PCU
FAX control PWB trouble. Cause Thermistor trouble
Check Install a proper FAX control PWB. PCU PWB trouble
and Replace the FAX control PWB. Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Remedy Fusing section connector connection trouble
Fusing unit not installed
F6-98 Incompatibility between the FAX Replace the thermistor.
control PWB destination and the main Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
machine destination harness.
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Incompatibility between the destination information H3-00 Fusing section high temperature
written into the FAX control PWB EEPROM and that
in the main machine (set with SIM26-6) trouble (TH_UM)
Check 1) Check the destination of the FAX control PWB.
and 2) Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6) Detail PCU
Remedy Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
H2-00 Thermistor open trouble Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
(TH_UM_AD2) HL control PWB trouble
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Detail PCU heater lamp.
Cause Thermistor trouble Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the thermistor.
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
Fusing section connector connection trouble Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
Fusing unit not installed harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Replace the HL control PWB.
Replace the thermistor.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
harness.

H3-01 Fusing section high temperature H4-01 Fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_LM) trouble (TH_LM)

Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level. Cause Thermistor trouble.
Thermistor trouble Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble.
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble Thermostat trouble.
HL control PWB trouble Connector, harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. HL control PWB trouble.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Power unit trouble.
heater lamp. Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Replace the thermistor. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Replace the PCU PWB. heater lamp.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the Replace the thermistor.
harness. Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the HL control PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the thermostat.
H3-02 Fusing section high temperature Replace the HL control PWB.
Replace the power unit.
trouble (TH_US)
Detail PCU H4-02 Fusing section low temperature

Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level. trouble (TH_US)
Thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
HL control PWB trouble level within the specified time from turning ON the
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. power relay.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Detail PCU
heater lamp. Cause Thermistor trouble.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Heater lamp trouble.
Replace the thermistor. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Thermostat trouble.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the Connector, harness connection trouble.
harness. HL control PWB trouble.
Replace the HL control PWB. Power unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
H4-00 Fusing section low temperature Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
trouble (TH_UM_AD2) Replace the thermistor.
Replace the heater lamp.
Detail PCU Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause Thermistor trouble. Replace the thermostat.
Heater lamp trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the HL control PWB.
Thermostat trouble. Replace the power unit.
HL control PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble. H4-30 Thermistor input circuit trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. (TH_UM)
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
heater lamp. Detail PCU
Replace the thermistor. Cause Thermistor trouble.
Replace the heater lamp. Heater lamp trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble
Replace the thermostat. Thermostat trouble.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Replace the HL control PWB. Power unit trouble.
Replace the power unit. Interlock switch trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Replace the thermostat.
Replace the power unit.
Replace the interlock switch.
heater lamp.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.

H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach L1-00 Scanner feed trouble
jam
Detail SCU
Detail PCU Cause Scanner unit trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
Cause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper
Scanner control PWB trouble.
remains.)
POD1 sensor trouble
Scanner home position sensor trouble.
Fusing unit installation trouble
Scanner motor trouble.
POD1 sensor connector and harness connection
trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the scanner unit.
Fusing unit, drive section trouble Replace the SCU PWB.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the POD1 sensor.
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Check installation of the fusing unit.
Replace the scanner motor.
Replace the fusing unit.
Check or repair the fusing drive section.
Check connection of the POD1 sensor connector and
the harness. L3-00 Scanner return trouble
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Detail SCU
Cause Scanner unit trouble
SCU PWB trouble
H7-10 Recovery error from low fuser temp. Scanner control PWB trouble
(TH_UM_AD2) Harness and connector connection trouble
Scanner home position sensor trouble
Scanner motor trouble
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
Cause Thermistor trouble. Replace the scanner unit.
Heater lamp trouble. Replace the SCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Thermostat trouble. Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Replace the scanner motor.
HL control PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. L4-02 Paper feed motor trouble
Replace the thermostat. Detail PCU
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Cause Paper feed motor trouble
Replace the HL control PWB. Paper feed motor harness and connector connection
Replace the power unit. trouble
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the PCU PWB trouble
heater lamp. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the paper feed
motor.
Replace the paper feed motor.
H7-11 Recovery error from low fuser temp. Check connection of the paper feed motor harness
(TH_LM) and the connector.
Detail PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble. L4-03 Fusing motor trouble
Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Thermostat trouble. Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
Connector, harness connection trouble. the fusing motor.
HL control PWB trouble. Detail PCU
Power unit trouble. Cause Fusing motor trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Fusing motor harness and connector connection
Replace the heater lamp. trouble
Replace the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble
Replace the thermostat. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the fusing
Check connection of the connector and the harness. motor.
Replace the HL control PWB. Replace the Fusing motor.
Replace the power unit. Check connection of the fusing motor harness and
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the the connection.
heater lamp. Replace the PCU PWB.

L4-04 Developing motor trouble (BLACK) L4-11 Shift motor trouble

Cause Developing motor trouble Cause Shift motor trouble.
Developing motor harness and connector connection PCU PWB trouble.
trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble Shifter home position sensor trouble.
Developing unit trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the shift operation.
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the shifter
developing motor. home position sensor.
Replace the developing motor. Replace the shift motor.
Check connection of the developing motor harness Replace the PCU PWB.
and the connection. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the shifter home position sensor.
Replace the developing motor.
Replace the developing unit.
L4-16 Fusing pressure release trouble
L4-05 Developing motor trouble (COLOR) Detail PCU
Cause Fusing pressure release sensor trouble.
Detail PCU Fusing pressure release motor trouble.
Cause Developing motor trouble Pressure release drive gear and pressure release idle
Developing motor harness and connector connection gear trouble.
trouble PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Developing unit trouble Check & Remedy Replace the fusing pressure release sensor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the Replace the fusing pressure release motor.
developing motor. Replace the pressure release drive gear and the
Replace the developing motor. pressure release idle gear.
Check connection of the developing motor harness Replace the PCU PWB.
and the connection. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the developing motor.
Replace the developing unit. L4-30 MFP fan motor trouble
Detail MFP
L4-06 Transfer unit lift trouble
Cause Fan motor trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.Harness and connector
Detail PCU connection trouble.
Cause Transfer unit position sensor trouble PCU PWB trouble
Dirt on the transfer unit position sensor. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the fan motor.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Replace the MFP PWB.
Transfer unit lift mechanism trouble Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Primary transfer belt unit is not installed. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-3 to check the separating operation of the
transfer unit.
Install the primary transfer belt unit. L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble
Replace the transfer unit position sensor.
Clean the transfer unit position sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Detail PCU
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Cause Paper exit cooling fan trouble.
Repair the transfer unit lift mechanism. PCU PWB trouble
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
L4-07 Transfer belt motor trouble Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the fan.
Replace the paper exit cooling fan.
Detail PCU
Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
the transfer belt motor. L4-32 Power source cooling fan trouble
Transfer belt motor trouble
Transfer belt motor harness and connector
connection trouble Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble Cause Power cooling fan trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the transfer PCU PWB trouble.
belt motor. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check the transfer belt motor, and replace if Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
necessary. Replace the power cooling fan.
Check connection of the harness and connectors of Replace the PCU PWB.
the transfer belt motor, and replace if necessary. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary.

L4-34 LSU cooling fan trouble L4-58 Ozone exhaust fan trouble

Cause When the LSU cooling fan is operated, the fan Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
operation signal is not detected within the specified specified time in the ozone exhaust fan operation.
time. Ozone exhaust fan trouble.
LSU fan trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Harness, connector trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the
LSU mother PWB trouble. harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the fan operation. Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the
Check the LSU fan, and replace if necessary. power.
Check the harness/connector, and replace if Replace the ozone exhaust fan.
necessary. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check the LSU mother PWB, and replace if Check connection of the connector and the harness.
necessary.
L6-10 Polygon motor trouble

L4-35 Fusing cooling fan trouble
Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Polygon motor trouble.
Cause Fusing cooling fan trouble. LSU mother PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating. motor.
Replace the fusing cooling fan. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the LSU.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the LSU mother PWB.
L4-45 Toner cooling fan trouble L8-01 Full wave signal detection error
(Toner cooling fan 1, 2)
Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause PCU PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.
Cause When the toner cooling fan is operated, the fan
operation signal is not detected within the specified
time. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Toner cooling fan trouble. Replace the power unit.
PCU PWB trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness.
Check & Remedy After turning ON the power, check to confirm that the L8-02 Full wave signal error
fan is rotating.
Replace the toner cooling fan. Detail PCU
Cause An abnormality in the full wave signal frequency is
detected.
(The frequency is detected as 65Hz or above, or
45Hz or less.)
L4-50 Process fan trouble PCU PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.
Detail PCU Connection trouble of the connector and the
Cause Process fan trouble. harness.
PCU PWB trouble. Power frequency, waveform abnormality.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the Replace the power unit.
power. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the process fan. Check the power waveform.
L8-20 Communication error of MFPC PWB/
LSU mother board
L4-56 Rear cooling fan trouble
Detail MFP
Detail PCU Cause LSU mother board PWB - MFPC PWB connection
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the trouble.
specified time in the rear cooling fan operation. MFPC PWB trouble.
Rear cooling fan trouble. LSU mother board trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check connection between the LSU mother board
Connection trouble of the connector and the PWB and the MFPC PWB.
harness. Check the ground of the main unit.
Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the Replace the MFPC PWB.
power. Replace the LSU mother board.
Replace the rear cooling fan.

P1-00 PCI communication error U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
Detail MFP Detail MFP

Cause Communication error between the MFPC PWB and Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
the PCI. EEPROM socket contact trouble
Connection failure of connectors and harness MFPC PWB trouble
between the MFPC PWB and the PCI. Strong external noises.
MFPC PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC PWB EEPROM.
PCI control PWB trouble. Replace the MFPC PWB.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and connectors (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
between the MFPC PWB and the PCI. replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary. perform the works.)
(Refer to the necessary procedures after replacement Check the power environment.
of the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
perform the procedures.)
Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if U2-05 Erroneous detection of account
necessary.
management data
P1-01 PCI fan error Detail MFP

Cause Breakage of the authentication DB is detected.
Detail MFP Check & Remedy When breakage of the authentication DB is detected,
the MFP is rebooted and the DB tables are
Cause The PCI fan operation signal is not detected.
reconstructed, generating "U2-05".
PCI fan trouble.
The message, however, is not displayed and only the
PCI control PWB trouble.
trouble history is saved.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and harness
The authentication data are cleared.
between the PCI fan and the PCI control PWB.
Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if
necessary.
Check the PCI fan, and replace if necessary.
U2-11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check
sum error
P1-02 Plasma generating device error Detail MFP
Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
Detail MFP EEPROM socket contact trouble
Cause Connection failure of connectors and harness MFPC PWB trouble
between the plasma generating device and the PCI Strong external noises.
control PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The previous writing
Plasma generating device trouble. data (about the latest 8 sheets) are written into the
PCI control PWB trouble. EEPROM.)
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and harness Replace the MFPC PWB.
between the plasma generating device and the PCI (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
control PWB. replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
Replace the plasma generating device. perform the works.)
Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if
necessary.
U2-30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB
manufacturing No. data inconsistency
PC-- Personal counter not detected
Detail MFP
Detail MFP Cause When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFPC PWB,
Cause The personal counter is not installed. the EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before
The personal counter is not detected. replacement is not mounted on the new PWB.
SCU PWB trouble. MFPC PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness. PCU PWB trouble
Replace the SCU PWB. Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was
mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted
U1-01 Battery trouble on the new PWB.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
Detail MFP
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life perform the works.)
2) Battery circuit abnormality Replace the PCU PWB.
Check Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about
and 2.5V or above.
Remedy Replace the battery.

U2-40 SD card system storage data area U2-60 Watermark check error
error
Detail MFP
Detail MFP Cause Watermark data trouble
HDD trouble
Cause A file error occurs in the SD card system storage data
MFPC PWB trouble
partition.
SD card trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data.
Replace the HDD.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power, and the backup data in the
HDD are written into the SD card and the machine is
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
automatically booted.
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service
Manual, and perform the works.)
Check the SD card, and replace if necessary.
U2-41 HDD system storage data area error U2-80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
Detail SCU
Detail MFP
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble
Cause A file error occurs in the HDD system saved data
SCU PWB trouble
area, disabling backup of the saved file of the
SCU PWB EEPROM socket connection trouble
machine adjustment values in the SD card.
HDD trouble Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
MFPC PWB trouble Replace the SCU PWB.
Check connection of the SCU PWB EEPROM socket.
Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary.
Check the SIM adjustment value of the following
items, and adjust again if they are improper.
When replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB, refer
? Scanner-related adjustments
to the chapter of "Necessary works and procedures
? Touch panel-related adjustments
of HDD and MFPC PWB replacement."
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
U2-42 Machine adjustment data (system

U2-81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
storage data area) error
Detail SCU
Detail MFP Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Cause The saved file of the machine adjustment values in Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
the SD card and the HDD cannot be found or is SCU PWB trouble.
broken. EEPROM socket contact trouble.
Both of the SD card set data and the HDD system Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
saved data area are broken. Replace the SCU PWB.
HDD trouble Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
MFPC PWB trouble Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum
SD card trouble error detection data are calculated again to reset the
Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary. proper check sum data.)
Check the SD card, and replace if necessary.
When replacing the HDD, the MFPC PWB, and the U2-90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
SD card, refer to the chapter of "Necessary works
and procedures of HDD, MFPC PWB, and SD card
replacement." Detail PCU
Use SIM to adjust the machine again and set the Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
adjustment values. PCU PWB trouble
EEPROM socket contact trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
U2-50 HDD user authentication data check Check the SIM adjustment values of the engine, and
sum error adjust again if they are improper.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Detail MFP Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Cause HDD trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Strong external noises. U2-91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
Check & Remedy Check the data related to the check sum error
(address book, image send system registration data
Detail PCU
(senders record, meta data)) and register again.
Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble. Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
Replace the HDD. PCU PWB trouble
Replace the MFPC PWB. EEPROM socket contact trouble
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service Replace the PCU PWB.
Manual, and perform the works.) Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum
error detection data are calculated again to reset the
proper check sum data.)

U5-00 Document feed unit communication U6-01 Paper feed tray 3 lift trouble
error
Detail PCU
Detail SCU Cause D1ULD sensor trouble.
Desk control PWB trouble.
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble.
Lift unit trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
DSPF PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power.
Check & Remedy Replace the D1ULD sensor.
Replace the desk control PWB.
Replace the SCU PWB.
Replace the lift unit.
Replace the DSPF PWB.
U5-16 Document feed unit fan trouble
U6-02 Paper feed tray 4 lift trouble
Detail SCU
Cause When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is
Detail PCU
not detected within the specified time.
Cause D2ULD sensor trouble
Fan motor trouble.
Desk control PWB trouble
Lift unit trouble
DSPF PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM2-3 to check that the fan is rotating.
PCU PWB trouble
Replace the fan motor.
Check & Remedy Replace the D2ULD sensor.
Replace the lift unit.
U5-30 Document feed unit tray lift up trouble
Detail SCU U6-09 LCC lift motor trouble

Cause STUD does not turn ON 5 times continuously within
the specified time.
Detail PCU
STUD/STLD sensor trouble.
Cause LCC lift motor rotation sensor trouble
LCC control PWB trouble
DSPF PWB trouble.
LCC lift mechanism trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor.
LCC lift motor trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the LCC
sensor and the lift motor.
Check the LCC lift motor rotation sensor, and replace
if necessary.
U5-31 Document feed unit tray lift down Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if
trouble necessary.
Check the LCC lift mechanism, and repair if
necessary.
Detail SCU
Check the LCC lift motor, and replace if necessary.
Cause STLD does not turn OFF within the specified time. Use SIM15 to cancel the trouble.
STUD/STLD sensor trouble.
DSPF PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor.
U6-10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport
Check connection of the connector and the harness. motor trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Desk paper feed motor trouble (motor lock, motor rpm
U6-00 PCU PWB - Paper feed desk (paper abnormality, over-current to the motor).
feed tray 3, 4) communication trouble Desk control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the desk
Detail PCU
transport motor.
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Replace the desk control PWB.
Paper feed desk control PWB trouble Replace the desk paper feed motor.
PCU PWB trouble Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the paper feed desk control PWB.

U6-20 LCC control PWB - PCU PWB U6-51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble
communication error
Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause LCC control PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Cause Communication error between the LCC control PWB
and the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Check to confirm the LCC model.
Connection trouble of the harness and the connector Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if necessary.
between the machine and the LCC and those of the Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary.
LCC control PWB.
PCU PWB trouble U7-50 MFPC PWB - Vendor machine
Malfunction due to noises. communication error
Check & Remedy Check to confirm the LCC model.
Check the connection of the harness and the
connector between the machine and the LCC and Detail MFP
those of the LCC control PWB, and replace if Cause Improper setting of the vendor machine specifications
necessary. (SIM26-3).
Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if Vendor machine trouble.
necessary. MFPC PWB trouble.
Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
U6-21 LCC transport motor trouble Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
Change the specifications of the vendor machine
Detail PCU (SIM26-3).
Cause LCC transport motor rotation sensor trouble Replace the MFPC PWB.
LCC paper transport mechanism trouble
LCC paper transport motor trouble U7-51 Vendor machine error
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the LCC
transport motor.
Check the LCC transport motor rotation sensor, and Detail MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor)
replace if necessary. Cause Serial vendor machine trouble.
Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if Connector, harness connection trouble.
necessary. Check & Remedy Err.XX is displayed on the operation panel of the
Check the LCC paper transport mechanism, and vendor. (XX is the detail code.)
replace if necessary. Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail code.
Check the LCC transport motor, and replace if Check the connector and the harness in the
necessary. communication line.
U6-22 LCC 24V power trouble U9-01 Multi touch panel error
Detail PCU Detail SCU

Cause Connection trouble of the harness and the connector Cause SCU PWB trouble.
between the machine and the LCC and those of the Connector and harness related with the touch panel
LCC control PWB. connection trouble.
LCC control PWB trouble Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
Machine power unit trouble Check the connector and the harness related with the
Check & Remedy Check the connection of the harness and the touch panel in the communication line.
connector between the machine and the LCC and
those of the LCC control PWB, and replace if
necessary. UC-02 CPT - ASIC error
Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if
necessary.
Check the machine power unit, and replace if Detail SCU
necessary. Cause SCU PWB trouble. (CPT-ASIC trouble.)
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
U6-50 Desk - Main unit combination trouble

UC-20 DOCC ASIC error
Detail PCU
Cause Improper combination between the main unit and the Detail SCU
desk. Cause SCU PWB trouble. (DOCC-ASIC trouble.)
Desk control PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Install a desk which is proper for the main unit mode.

(1) Descriptions on E7-91 - 94 errors
Two-digit numbers with double parentheses are added to E7-91 - 94 error codes recorded in SIM22-6 indicate the detailed contents of the
errors.
The number in each digit has its own meaning.
(Example) E7-91(**)
The upper digit of the added code indicates the job kind at the occurrence of the error.
Error The upper digit of Image Job kind at the occurrence

code the added code type of the error
E7-91 0* Other *1
1* JPEG - FAX (Internet FAX) *1
2* JBIG reception print (Other than *1
3* Mxx1ch long size images)
4* Mxx4ch
5* Other *1
6* JPEG - FAX (Internet FAX) *1
7* JBIG reception print *1
8* Mxx1ch (Long size images)
9* Mxx4ch
A* - F* Not Used *1
E7-92 0* Other *1
1* JPEG
2* JBIG - OC copy (in Non ERDH) *1
3* Mxx1ch *1
4* Mxx4ch
5* - F* Not Used *1
E7-93 0* Other *1
1* JPEG - Copy print (in ERDH)
- Copy composing system
2* JBIG
function (Custom Stamp,
3* Mxx1ch *1
Water mark)
4* Mxx4ch
5* Other *1
6* JPEG - Image send
7* JBIG - Document filing
8* Mxx1ch - Preview display
9* Mxx4ch
A* Other *1
- GDI/PCL printer print
B* JPEG
- Copy composing system
C* JBIG
function (Custom Stamp,
D* Mxx1ch Water mark) *1
E* Mxx4ch
F* Not Used *1
E7-94 0* Other *1
1* JPEG
- Backup restore
2* JBIG *1
(Filing data import)
3* Mxx1ch *1
4* Mxx4ch *1
5* - F* Not Used *1
*1: Added code without generating
The lower digit of the added code indicates the kind and the content of the abnormality or the result of the automatic memory check executed
when the abnormality is detected.
Lower digit of the added code Kind/Content of the error

*1 *9 *A *B *C *D *E *F
Memory Huffman Restart Improper Head decoding Head decoding Other
verify - code marker marker error detection error detection abnormal
NG error error error (ASIC detection) (CPU detection) termination
The upper digit of the 1*, 6*, B* JPEG - O O O O - O
added code 2*, 7*, C* JBIG - - - O O - O
3*, 8*, D* Mxx1ch - - - - - - 〇
Error detection circuit 4*, 9*, E* Mxx4ch - - - - - - 〇
: Added code indicating that the memory and its peripheral must be focused for check in case of an error.
O: Added code indicating that doubtful sections are in a wider range such as the memory, PWB's, HDD, etc.
- : Added code without generating

(2) Countermeasures in case of E7-91 - 94 (3) Countermeasures against the case where nothing
In case of E7-9x (11), E7-9x (21), E7-9x (31), E7-9x (41) is displayed when the machine is booted
[Trouble content]
Cause In case of E7-91 - 94, the DIMM memory (DRAM) is
If nothing is displayed when the machine is booted, the error code
automatically read/written to perform a simplified
check. If an abnormality is detected in that case, the cannot be checked and the cause is hard to identify.
added code becomes (*1). One of the causes may be an abnormality in the boot program of
Therefore, there is a strong possibility that an the SD card. To check that, the following method is used.
abnormality lies around the memory.
Check and remedy - Check the installing state of the DIMM memory
[Check method]
and the MFPC PWB to insure that there is no
abnormality. (Disconnect and connect the DIMM Check to confirm that the LED (red) under the CPU heat sink on the
memory and the MFPC PWB to check to insure MFPC PWB shown in the figure below is lighted when the power is
that there is no error occurring again.) supplied.
- Use SIM60-01 (Memory read/write check) to If the LED is lighted, it is judged as an abnormality of the SD card.
check to insure that no error occurs.
- Replace the DIMM memory.
- Replace the MFPC PWB.
SD Card
Since the automatic memory check executed when E7-91 - 94

occurs is a simplified check, it cannot detect an abnormality with
absolute certainty. Heat sink (CPU)
If the added code is (*1), there may be a memory abnormality.

Even if it is not (*1), however, it cannot be said that there is no
abnormality around the memory.
Other added codes
Cause Mostly because the data inputted to the ASIC for

decoding are broken for some reasons.
There is an abnormality in the process of read/write
of the process data in the memory or the hard disk. Red LED
A great noise unexpectedly generated may be the
cause.
For the cases of FAX or Internet FAX reception data, [Countermeasures]
when broken data are saved, printing is performed 1) Replace the SD card with a new one. (Be sure to use a service
every time when the machine is booted, generating part.)
an error repeatedly. (E7-91)
(To clear the received data, execute SIM66-10.) 2) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
Check and remedy - Check the DIMM memory, the MFPC PWB, and 3) Use SIIM66-62 to backup the FAX reception data from the
the HDD to insure that there is no abnormality. HDD to a USB memory device. (If there is no FAX reception
- When the job at occurrence of an error is FAX data, this procedure is not required.) (The FAX reception data
(E7-91), check the installing state of the FAX are backed up in the PDF format. Supply the date to the user.)
control PWB and the SC CARD PWB.
4) Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX and image send memory.
- Perform SIM60-01 (Memory read/write check) to
insure that there is no NG. (Ensure consistency between the HDD data and the image
- Perform SIM62-02 and SIM62-03 (HDD read/ related memory.)
write check) to insure that there is no NG. (It is not
required, however, when the job at occurrence of
an error is FAX.)
- Check the installing state of the DIMM memory
and the MFPC PWB to insure that there is no
abnormality. (Disconnect and connect the DIMM
memory and the MFPC PWB to check to insure
that there is no error occurring again.)
- Replace the HDD.
- Replace the FAX control PWB.
- Replace the DIMM memory.
- Replace the MFPC PWB.
- Replace the SD card.
When there is an abnormality around the HDD, E7-03 may occur.

If error E7-91 - 94 as well as E7-03 occurs, there is a high possibil-
ity that the error can be removed by replacing the HDD and the
MFPC PWB.

(4) Relation between the MFPC PWB LED status and
errors
When the machine cannot be booted, check the LED status of the
MFPC PWB to presume the error content and its cause.
<Process content and LED display>
LED status Cause for halt during
Process operation content
(Lighting) operation
OOOO CPU initial setting Reus ASIC trouble
OOO Memory adjustment Memory and its
peripheral circuit trouble
OO O Memory check Memory and its
peripheral circuit trouble
OO - -
O OO Program memory development Memory-related trouble
O O Interruption-related initialization Reus ASIC trouble
O O PCIe initialization PCIe and its peripheral
circuit trouble (SoC/
ACRE, etc.)
O Basic device initialization Reus ASIC trouble
OOO SD card initialization Reus ASIC trouble
SATA initialization SD card trouble
HDD trouble
OO OS initialization (1) Reus ASIC trouble
O O Timer enabling Reus ASIC trouble
O Serial driver enabling Reus ASIC trouble
I2C driver enabling
OO LCD initialization Reus ASIC trouble
O Image process IP initialization Reus ASIC trouble
O OS initialization (2) Reus ASIC trouble
Main process Reus ASIC trouble
* : LED ON / O: LED OFF
<When an error occurs>

LED status
Error content Cause
(Flashing)
OOO Nonsupport memory Memory trouble
OO O Nonsupport memory (access Memory trouble
speed)
OO Nonsupport memory controller Memory trouble
O OO DDR-PHY setting error Reus ASIC trouble
O O Interruption handler process Reus ASIC trouble
error
OOO Memory check error Memory trouble
Memory combination error Memory trouble
* In case of an error, the LED's flash as shown in the above table.
* : LED ON / O: LED OFF
O O O O
LED No D25/D24/D23/D22
3 / 2 / 1 / 0

2. JAM and troubleshooting JAM code JAM content
A. JAM code list NO_MATCH Parameter inconsistency
POD1_FUS POD1 JAM (Fusing winding detection)
(1) Main unit/Desk POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM
JAM code JAM content
POD2_N POD2 not-reached JAM
APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM
APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM
POD3_N POD3 not-reached JAM
APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM
PPD1 JAM (LCC communication abnormality detec-
CPFD1_N2 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Main tray 2 feed paper) PPD1_LCC
tion)
CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk upper tray feed
CPFD1_N3 PPD1_N1 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Main traiy 1 feed paper)
paper)
PPD1_N2 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Main tray 2 feed paper)
CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk lower tray feed
CPFD1_N4 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk upper tray feed
paper) PPD1_N3
paper)
CPFD1_NT CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Tandem left tray feed
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk lower tray feed
1 paper) PPD1_N4
paper)
CPFD1_NT CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Tandem right tray feed
PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
2 paper)
PPD1_NL PPD1 not-reached JAM (LCC feed paper)
CPFD1_S1 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Main tray 1 feed paper)
PPD1_NM PPD1 not-reached JAM (Manual tray feed paper)
CPFD1_S2 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Main tray 2 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Tandem left tray feed
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk upper tray feed PPD1_NT1
CPFD1_S3 paper)
paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Tandem right tray feed
CPFD1_S4 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk lower tray feed paper) PPD1_NT2
paper)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Tandem left tray feed
CPFD1_ST1 PPD1_S1 PPD1 remaining JAM (Main tray 1 feed paper)
paper)
PPD1_S2 PPD1 remaining JAM (Main tray 2 feed paper)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Tandem right tray feed
CPFD1_ST2 PPD1_S3 PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk upper tray feed paper)
paper)
CPFD2_DE CPFD2 JAM (Desk communication abnormality PPD1_S4 PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk lower tray feed paper)
SK detection) PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Desk upper tray feed PPD1_SL PPD1 remaining JAM (LCC refeed paper)
CPFD2_N3 PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual tray feed paper)
paper)
CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Desk lower tray feed PPD1_ST1 PPD1 remaining JAM (Tandem left tray feed paper)
CPFD2_N4
paper) PPD1 remaining JAM (Tandem right tray feed
PPD1_ST2
CPFD2_NT CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem left tray feed paper)
1 paper) PPD2_DRU
PPD2 JAM (Drum lock detection)
CPFD2_NT CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem right tray feed M
2 paper) PPD2 JAM (Finisher communication abnormality
PPD2_FIN
CPFD2_S2 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Main tray 2 feed paper) detection)
CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk upper tray feed PPD2_N1 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Main tray 1 feed paper)
CPFD2_S3
paper) PPD2_N2 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Main tray 2 feed paper)
CPFD2_S4 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk lower tray feed paper) PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk upper tray feed
PPD2_N3
CPFD2 remaining JAM (Tandem left tray feed paper)
CPFD2_ST1
paper) PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk lower tray feed
PPD2_N4
CPFD2 remaining JAM (Tandem right tray feed paper)
CPFD2_ST2
paper) PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
D1PPD1_S D1PPD1 remaining JAM (Tandem left tray feed PPD2_NL PPD2 not-reached JAM (LCC feed paper)
T1 paper) PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM (Manual tray feed paper)
D1PPD2_N D1PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem left tray feed PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem left tray feed
PPD2_NT1
T1 paper) paper)
D1PPD2_S D1PPD2 remaining JAM (Tandem left tray feed PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem right tray feed
PPD2_NT2
T1 paper) paper)
DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk lower tray feed PPD2_PRI PPD2 JAM (Image preparation wait timeout)
DPFD1_N4
paper) PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM (Main tray 1 feed paper)
DPFD1_NT DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Tandem left tray feed PPD2_S2 PPD2 remaining JAM (Main tray 2 feed paper)
1 tray) PPD2_S3 PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk upper tray feed paper)
DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk upper tray feed PPD2_S4 PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk lower tray feed paper)
DPFD1_S3
paper) PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
DPFD1_S4 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk lower tray feed paper) PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM (LCC feed paper)
DPFD1 remaining JAM (Tandem left tray feed PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM (Manual tray feed paper)
DPFD1_ST1
paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem left tray feed
DPFD1 remaining JAM (Tandem right tray feed PPD2_ST1
DPFD1_ST2 paper)
paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem right tray feed
DPFD2_S4 DPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk lower tray feed paper) PPD2_ST2
paper)
Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (PPD1 not- SIZE_ILG Size irregular JAM
MFT
reached)
STOP_JAM Emergency stop JAM
MPFD_S MPFD remaining JAM
TRAY1 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Main tray 1 feed paper)
MTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAM
TRAY2 CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Main tray 2 feed paper)

JAM code JAM content (5) 1K finisher
TRAY3 Paper feed JAM (Desk upper tray/Tandem left tray)
TRAY4 Paper feed JAM (Desk lower tray/Tandem right tray) JAM code JAM content
FDRLMJ Paper exit roller lift motor JAM
FGMJ Gripper motor JAM
(2) RSPF/DSPF FIN_PAOF Paper attribute data reception overflow
FIN_TIME Finisher paper early reaching JAM
JAM code JAM content FPDD_S Bundle exit remaining JAM
ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM FPNCHJ Punch JAM
P_SHORT Short size JAM FPPD1_N Finisher inlet port not-reached JAM
SDFS_S Paper JAM FPPD1_S Finisher inlet port remaining JAM
FPPD2_N Saddle section not-reached JAM
SPOD_N SPOD not-reached JAM
FPPD2_S Saddle section remaining JAM
SPOD_S SPOD remaining JAM
FPPD3_N Saddle paper exit not-reached JAM
SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM
FPPD3_S Saddle paper exit remaining JAM
SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM FSATPD_S Saddle transport remaining JAM
SPPD2_N SPPD2 not-reached JAM FSDMJ Saddle motor JAM
SPPD2_NR SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM FSPTMJ Saddle paper transport motor JAM
SPPD2_S SPPD2 remaining JAM FSSMJ Staple shift motor JAM
SPPD2_SR SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM FSSTPLJ Saddle staple JAM
SPPD3_N SPPD3 not-reached JAM FSTPLJ Staple JAM
SPPD3_S SPPD3 remaining JAM PDPPD1_N Interface inlet port not-reached JAM
PDPPD1_S Interface inlet port remaining JAM
SPPD4_N SPPD4 not reached JAM
PDPPD2_N Interface outlet port not-reached JAM
SPPD4_S SPPD4 remaining JAM
PDPPD2_S Interface outlet port remaining JAM
SPPD5_N SPPD5 not-reached JAM
SPPD5_S SPPD5 remaining JAM (6) 4K finisher
SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification timer end
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM JAM code JAM content
FED_N Finisher inlet port not-reached JAM
FED_S Finisher inlet port remaining JAM
(3) LCC FFPD_N Saddle section not-reached JAM
FFPD_S Saddle section remaining JAM
JAM code JAM content FHS_N Finisher paper exit not-reached JAM
LCC LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD not reached) FHS_S Finisher paper exit remaining JAM
LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM (LCC feed paper) FIN_TIME Finisher paper early reaching JAM
FPNCHJ Punch JAM
FSFS_N Saddle paper exit not-reached JAM
(4) Inner finisher FSFS_S Saddle paper exit remaining JAM
FSHS_N Saddle transport not-reached JAM
JAM code JAM content
FSHS_S Saddle transport remaining JAM
FED_N Finisher inlet port not-reached JAM
FSSTPLJ Saddle staple JAM
FED_S Finisher inlet port remaining JAM
FSTPLJ Staple JAM
FEXIT_S Bundle exit remaining JAM
PDPPD1_N Interface inlet port not-reached JAM
FIN_TIME Finisher paper early reaching JAM
PDPPD1_S Interface inlet port remaining JAM
FSTPD_S Finisher paper exit remaining JAM
PDPPD2_N Interface outlet port not-reached JAM
FSTPLJ Staple JAM
PDPPD2_S Interface outlet port remaining JAM

MX-5141N
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE Service Manual
1. Outline
A. Cases where update is required C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware
ROM update is required in the following cases: There are following methods of update of the firmware.
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. 1) Update method using SIM 49-1
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the 2) Update method using FTP
machine. 3) Update method using the Web page
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for 4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three
repair to the machine. methods.)
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.
repaired.
When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as
B. Notes for update power-off during updating, etc., and when retries of these
methods are failed, the method 4) is employed.
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update Firmware types
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s The firmware type can be displayed by SIM22-5.
installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations
Use SIM22-5 to check the firmware type.
of each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.
2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or
USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter
USB Host
Firmware.sfu +
Firmware.sfu USB memory
Firmware.sfu The machine detects the media

and executes the program automatically.
*1:
- Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.
- The media used for the update must have an enough capacity for storing the firmware data.
- The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.
MX-5141N FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 1

Execution of the firmware by SIM49-01 * If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] key is gray out
1) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware and cannot be pressed.
into the main unit. (Be sure to use the USB I/F on the operation 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. “ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]”
panel.) becomes clear. Press [YES] key to start the update of selected
2) Enter the SIM49-01. firmware.
Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to

the update screen. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(>PHGLDXVELFXVIX@
,&800$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72 .(<

,&8068% ˖&855(1783'$7('72
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( (;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5
,&8026 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
),50:$5(83'$7(>PHGLDXVE@
.(< ,&80&1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
,&80%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72 .(<

.(<
.(<

),/( ',5!)2/'(5
(;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5
,&80%,26 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
˖&855(1783'$7('72 .(<
.(<
.(<

,&80$,1
.(<
.(<
.(<
,&8%2270 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
.(<
.(<
.(<

,&868% ˖&855(1783'$7('72
.(<
.(<
.(<
/$1*8$*( ˖&855(1783'$7('72
.(<
.(<
.(<

6/,67 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
.(<
.(<
.(<
˖&855(1783'$7('72
(26$

.(<
0212
&2/25
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( &/26(
.(<
.(<
.(<

.(<
0212 &2/25
The progress is displayed on right side of "FIRMWARE

UPDATE" title by 20 steps.
* The number of key changes according to the number of the

sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to ),50:$5(83'$7(
6 ( .(<
the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE 5(0$,16)25 0,187(6

(;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5
CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on the &$87,21'212732:(52))7+(0)3),50:$5(83'$7(,1352*5(66
screen. Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK] .(<
.(<
.(<

key to open the file. If the media have not been inserted and
.(<
.(<
.(<

[OK] key is pushed, the next screen does not appear and the
screen waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB .(<
.(<
.(<

memory is pulled out on the file list screen, the error is .(<
.(<
.(<

detected by the [FILE] key pressing, and the first screen

appears. .(<
0212 &2/25
3) Current version number and the version number to be updated

will be shown for each firmware respectively. At this time, only the progress gauge is displayed on the
screen, and the version and the firmware selection key are not
displayed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6) If the update is normal completion, following screen is dis-
,&800$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72 .(< played.
,&8068% ˖&855(1783'$7('72
(;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5
,&8026 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&80&1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72

.(<
.(<
.(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
,&80%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
),50:$5(83'$7(
,&80%,26 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
6 ( .(<
˖&855(1783'$7('72 .(<
.(<
.(<

,&80$,1
5(0$,16)25 0,187(6
,&8%2270 ˖&855(1783'$7('72 (;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5
&$87,21'212732:(52))7+(0)3),50:$5(83'$7(,1352*5(66
.(<
.(<
.(<

,&868% ˖&855(1783'$7('72
/$1*8$*( ˖&855(1783'$7('72
.(<
.(<
.(<

.(<
.(<
.(<

6/,67 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
(26$ ˖&855(1783'$7('72 .(<

.(<
.(<

.(<
0212
&2/25
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( &/26(
.(<
.(<
.(<

4) Press [ALL] key. .(<

.(<
.(<

All the firmware programs are selected.

.(<
0212 &2/25

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Press [OK] key. (The machine is rebooted.)
,&800$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72 .(< Go to SIM22-05 and confirm the firmware has upgraded suc-
,&8068% ˖&855(1783'$7('72
(;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5 cessfully.
,&8026 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&80&1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72 7) If the update is not normal completion, following screen is dis-
.(<
.(<
.(<

,&80%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
played.
,&80%,26 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
˖&855(1783'$7('72 .(<
.(<
.(<

,&80$,1
,&8%2270 ˖&855(1783'$7('72

.(<
.(<
.(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
,&868% ˖&855(1783'$7('72
),50:$5(83'$7(
/$1*8$*( ˖&855(1783'$7('72
(55253/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+ .(<
.(<
.(<
.(<

6/,67 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&803&806&8%
(26$ ˖&855(1783'$7('72 (;,7 .(<

%$&. &/($5

.(<
0212
&2/25
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( &/26(
.(<
.(<
.(<

* Normally select all the firmware and execute updating. .(<

.(<
.(<

* In this case, firmware which does not exist on the machine

.(<
.(<
.(<

side are ignored.
To update a certain firmware only, select the firmware with .(<
.(<
.(<

the firmware display key.

.(<
0212 &2/25
2.

B. Firmware update using FTP
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-
fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53
C. Firmware update using the Web page 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
An Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
[Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
the firmware.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.
MX-XXXX
"Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-

tion." will be displayed.
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.
3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firm-
ware to the machine. Update processing begins. While pro-
cessing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..."
appears.

D. Firmware update using the CN update function c. DIP-SW used in the CN update mode
(There are three methods.) To enter the CN update mode, turn ON the UPDATE DIP-SW on
the MFP PWB and boot the machine.
(1) Outline
When terminating the CN update mode, reset UPDATE DIP-SW to
The update method using the DIP SW of the MFP PWB is called OFF (normal mode).
the CN update.
a. Function
There are the following three functions in the CN update mode.
1) Firmware update function
This function is used to update the firmware by transferring
data from the PC which is connected to the MFP PWB, the
SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and various options
by means of a USB memory or USB cable.
This is basically the same as SIM49-01, but differs in the fol-
lowing points:
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a
section other than the boot program for some reasons during
firmware update operation of other method than the CN
update, this method can be used to update the firmware.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the SD
card must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot
program. d. Keys used in the CN update mode
If the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality The following five keys are used for operations in the CN update
in the boot program. mode. Be careful that the functions of the keys differ those in the
normal mode.
If the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormal-
ity in the main program. ;50= ;"!#+=
2) Firmware version check function
(The method to check the firmware version by using SIM22-5
is easier than this method. Therefore, it is not described in this
manual.)
3) ROM making function
(This function is not used in the market, and not described in
this manual.)
;$/7.= ;-%.5= ;/+=
b. Purpose
This function is used in the following cases:
1) When an error occurs during firmware update operation other Key name Functions in the CN update mode
than the CN update. [OK] key Executes the selected function or item.
[MENU] key Selects a menu.
When the power is shut down or an error occurs in a section
[BACK] key Selects a menu.
other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware (Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)
update operation of other method than the CN update, this [UP] key Selects an item.
method can be used to update the firmware. [DOWN] key Selects an item.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the SD
card must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot
program.
If an error occurs in the boot program, this method cannot be
used. In such a case, the SD card must be replaced with a new
one having the normal boot program.

(2) Operating procedures 6) Select the firmware update mode.
a. Firmware update function Select the update mode with [MENU] key and [BACK] key.
This function is used to revise the firmware by using the USB mem-
ory for the MFP PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX Firm Update
PWB, and each option. From USB Memory
It is basically same as SIM 49-01, but differs in the following points.
1) The update target ROM is automatically selected. Display of the firmware update mode
2) When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a
7) Press [OK] key.
section other than the boot program for some reasons during
firmware update operation of other method than the CN The firmware file saved in the USB memory is retrieved, and
update. the file selection menu is displayed.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, this
method cannot be used. On that case, the SD card must be
replaced with a new one having the normal boot program.
&IRM5PDATE
When the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
&XXSFU
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in
$ISPLAYOFFILESELECTION
the main program (SD card).
8) Select the firmware file (SFU).
a-1. Necessary items
Select the target firmware file (SFU) with [UP] key and
1) Insert the SD card to the MFP PWB of the machine.
[DOWN] key.
2) USB memory with the firmware file (SFU) saved in it.
When [OK] key is pressed with a directory name (the head: ">
NOTE: Save the firmware file in the main directory or in a one-level D") displayed, the menu goes to the one-stage lower directory.
lower directory. When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower-stage directory, the
a-2. Procedures menu returns to the original upper directory.
1) Turn OFF the power, and remove the cabinet and the MFP 9) Press [OK] key.
PWB cover. The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. It takes about one
2) Turn ON the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. minute.
3) Install the USB memory into the USB port.
USB memory installing position Firm Update
Reading Data
Display of file reading
10) After completion of reading, the firmware update process is

continued.
53"PORT Firm Update IcuM

Writing Data
Display of the firmware update process
- The abbreviated name of the firmware which is under update

4) Turn ON the power. process is indicated on the right upper corner of the display.
5) Check to confirm that the machine starts booting. (It takes -
During the update process, the display may flash instanta-
more than ten seconds to display the menu.) neously. It is a normal operation.
11) Check the update result.
Update Program Init Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to display the results of all the
firmware programs.
Please wait
Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM
Result : OK Result : Not Update Result : NG
Display of the firmware update result

Version Check OK: Update is completed successfully.
Conf : 00050000 NG: Update is failed.
Not Update: Update is not executed.
Display when booting is completed 12) Turn OFF the power.
13) Turn OFF the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. (Set the
DIP-SW to the normal mode.)
14) Turn ON the power, and check to confirm that the machine
boots up normally.
Check to confirm that the boot animation is displayed.
Check to confirm that "Copying is enabled" is displayed on the
copier basic menu.
15) Check to confirm the version of each firmware with SIM22-5.
16) Attach the MFP PWB cover and the cabinet.

2 ‘13/Nov
MX-5141N
[9] MAINTENANCE Service Manual
1. Works necessary when executing the maintenance

A. Counter check
Before execution of the maintenance, execute SIM22 to check the
counter values of the following counters to confirm consuming
states of each section.
1) Each consumable part counter
2) Each unit counter
3) Trouble counter, JAM counter
B. Counter reset
When a part or consumable part is replaced with new one in the
maintenance, execute SIM24 to reset the following counters.
1) Maintenance counter
2) Each consumable part counter
3) Each unit counter
4) Trouble counter, JAM counter
C. Firmware version check and upgrading

Execute SIM22-5 to check the firmware version, and upgrade it as
needed. (SIM49-1)
D. Confirmation, adjustment
After completion of part replacement and cleaning, etc, execute the following procedures.
Items necessary to execute
Item SIM to be used

ADJ 5 Print engine image distortion adjustment / ADJ5A Print engine image distortion adjustment (Manual adjustment) / 50-22
OPC drum phase adjustment / OPC drum phase adjustment (Automatic adjustment) /
Color registration adjustment Color registration adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
(Print engine section)
ADJ11/SET1 Image quality adjustment Copy image quality adjustment
Printer image quality adjustment
ADJ11B Printer, copy color balance, density adjustments 46-74
(Automatic adjustments) (Basic adjustments)
Items to execute as needed
Item SIM to be used

ADJ 2 High voltage adjustment ADJ2A Main charger grid voltage adjustments 8-2
ADJ2B Developing bias voltage adjustments 8-1
ADJ2C Transfer current/voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 3 Image density sensor adjustment ADJ3A Image density sensor adjustment 44-2
ADJ4 Image lead edge position, image loss, void ADJ4A Print image main scanning direction automatic magnification 50-28
area, image off-center, image magnification ratio adjustment (Print engine)
ratio adjustments (Automatic adjustments) ADJ4B Print image off-center automatic adjustment (Print engine) 50-28
(Each paper feed tray)
ADJ4C Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, 50-28
image off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification
ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (Document table mode)
ADJ4D Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, 50-28
image off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification
ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (RSPF mode)
ADJ11/SET1 Image quality adjustment ADJ11A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) 63-3 (63-5)
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
2. Display of maintenance execution timing
The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the set value. The relations between the messages
and the counters are shown below.
A. Maintenance counter
Display condition
Print JOB
Display content SIM26-38-A
Counter name Counter value Enable/Disable
set value
Maintenance required. Code: TA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop) (Total) When 90% of the SIM21-1 set value is reached.
Maintenance required. Code: TA 1 (Print stop) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Disable
Maintenance required. Code: CA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop) (Color) When 90% of the SIM21-1 set value is reached.
Maintenance required. Code: CA 1 (Print stop) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Disable
Maintenance required. Code: AA 0 (Print continue) Both of total and color When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop) When 90% of the SIM21-1 set value is reached.
Maintenance required. Code: AA 1 (Print stop) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Disable
* After execution of maintenance, be sure to execute SIM24-4 to clear the maintenance counter (Total) and the maintenance counter (Color).
B. Primary transfer unit

Display condition Print JOB
Display content
SIM26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Enable/Disable
Maintenance required.: TK1 0 (Print continue) Primary transfer unit print counter When 300K is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop)
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the primary transfer unit print counter, the accumulated number of rotations
counter, and the use day counter.
C. Secondary transfer unit

Display content
Maintenance required.: TK2 0 (Print continue) Secondary transfer unit print When 300K is reaches. Enable
1 (Print stop) counter
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the secondary transfer print counter, the accumulated number of rotations
counter, and the use day counter.
D. Fusing unit
Display content
Maintenance required.: FK1 0 (Print continue) Fusing belt print counter When 300K is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop)
Maintenance required.: FK2 0 (Print continue) Pressure roller print counter Enable
1 (Print stop)
Maintenance required.: FK3 0 (Print continue) Fusing web print counter Enable
1 (Print stop)

Display content
SIM26-38-B set value Counter name Counter value Enable/Disable
Maintenance required.: FK3 0 (Print continue) Fusing web print counter When 300K is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop)
Maintenance required.: FK3 0 (Print continue) Fusing web print counter When Web end detection is ON Enable
1 (Print stop) Enable
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the fusing roller counter, the fusing belt counter, the fusing web print counter,
the accumulated rotation number counter, and the use day counter.
E. OPC drum
Display condition
Print JOB
set value
Maintenance required.: DK 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (K) or 840K is reached Enable
1 (Print stop) OPC drum accumulated rotation number counter (K) or 200K is reached
Maintenance required.: D (C/M/Y) 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (C/M/Y) or 840K is reached
1 (Print stop) OPC drum accumulated rotation number counter (C/M/Y) or 160K is reached
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the OPC drum print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter, and
the use day counter.
F. Developer
Display condition
Print JOB
set value
Maintenance required.: VK 0 (Print continue) Developer print counter (K) or 840K is reached Enable
1 (Print stop) DV unit accumulated number of rotations (K) or 200K is reached
Maintenance required.: V (C/M/Y) 0 (Print continue) Developer print counter (C/M/Y) or 840K is reached
1 (Print stop) DV unit accumulated number of rotations (C/M/Y) or 160K is reached
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the developer print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter, and
the use day counter.
G. Waste toner box

Display condition
Print JOB
set value
Replacement timing of the toner No relation When near end is detected. Waste toner full detection switch ON Enable
collection container is
approaching. (Near end)
Replace the toner collection box. No relation The pixel count from near end Specified pixel count Disable
(End) reaches the specified value.
* When the waste toner box is replaced with an empty one, the message disappears.
H. Toner
Display condition
Print JOB
set value
(K/C/M/Y) Prepare a toner No relation Toner motor rotation time Specified time of rotations Enable
(Near near end)
(K/C/M/Y) Toner supply is low No relation Toner supply amount is decreasing. ATC sensor output variation Enable
(Near end)
Replace the toner cartridge. (K) 0 (Print continue) The pixel count from near end Specified pixel count (Disable for a JOB which
(End) 1 (Print stop) reaches the specified value. requires K toner)
Replace the toner cartridge. 0 (Print continue) The pixel count from near end Specified pixel count Enable for monochrome,
(C/M/Y) (End) 1 (Print stop) reaches the specified value. Disable for color
3. Maintenance list
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
Color items
Section Unit name Part name When 840 K 840 K 840 K 840 K 840 K Remark
name calling rotation rotation rotation rotation rotation
Developing Developing Unit Developer × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
section (monochrome) DV blade / inner blade × × × × × ×
DV side seal F/R × × × × × × Maximum printed number 200K
Toner filter × × × × × ×
Bias pin, Connector × × × × × ×
Developing Unit Developer × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
(color) DV blade / Inner blade × × × × × ×
DV side seal F/R × × × × × × Maximum printed number 160K
Toner filter × × × × × ×
Bias pin, Connector × × × × × ×
OPC drum OPC drum unit Drum × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
section (monochrome) Cleaning blade × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
MC unit × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Side seal F/R × × × × × × Maximum printed number 200K
Toner reception blade × × × × × ×
MC cleaner roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Waste toner box × × × × × ×
OPC drum unit Drum × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
(color) Cleaning blade × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
MC unit × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Side seal F/R × × × × × × Maximum printed number 160K
Toner reception blade × × × × × ×
MC cleaner roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Waste toner box × × × × × ×
Section Unit Part name When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 Remark
name name calling K K K K K K K K K K
RSPF RSPF Paper feed Replace according to SPF paper feed counter
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
section unit roller value at 100K or after 1 year use.
Pickup roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ When replacing the paper feed roller, apply
Separation grease to the paper feed shaft.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ GP-501MR
roller
Transport
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
rollers
Scanning
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
plate
Replace according to SPF paper feed counter
Torque limiter × × × × × × × × × × ×
value at 400K or 2 years use.
Discharge
× × × × × × × × × × ×
brush
OC mat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Belts × × × × × × × × × × ×
DSPF DSPF Paper feed
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
section unit roller Replace according to SPF paper feed
Pickup roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ counter value at 100K or after 1 year
Separation use.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
roller
Transport
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
rollers
Discharge
× × × × × × × × × × ×
brush
Torque limiter × × × × × × × × × × ×
value at 800K
No.1
scanning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
plate
No.2
scanning
section, ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
scanning
glass
No.2
scanning
section, white ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
reference
glass
Mirror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Lens/CCD ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Scanner
lamp/ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Blow air to clean the LED section
Reflector
OC mat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When checking, apply grease (UKOG-
Gears × × × × × × × × × × ×
0299FCZZ) to the necessary positions
Belts × × × × × × × × × × ×
Scanner Scanne Mirror/Lens/
section r unit Reflector/ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
CCD
Table glass/
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
SPF glass
Scanner lamp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Blow air to clean the LED section
Rails ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Drive belt /
× × × × × × × × × × ×
drive wire
Sensors × × × × × × × × × × ×
Transfer Primary Primary
－ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲
section transfer transfer belt
unit Primary
Replace at every 300K or 2 years use.
transfer
－ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲
cleaning
blade
Primary
－ × × × × × × × × × ×
transfer roller
Primary Replace as needed
transfer belt － × × × × × × × × × ×
drive gear
Primary
transfer belt － × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
drive roller
Primary
transfer belt － × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
follower roller
Primary
transfer belt － × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
tension roller
Belt CL brush － × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
PTC backup
－ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
roller
Transfer
separation － × × × × × × × × × ×
pawl
Transfer
cleaner seal － × × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed
F/R
Primary
transfer toner － × × × × × × × × × ×
reception seal
Second Secondary Replace at every 300K or 2 years use.
－ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲
ary transfer belt Never use alcohol or solvents for cleaning.
transfer Secondary
unit － × × × × × × × × × ×
transfer roller
Secondary Replace as needed
transfer idle － × × × × × × × × × ×
gear
Secondary
transfer belt － × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
drive roller
Secondary
transfer belt － × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
follower roller
Secondary
transfer idle － × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
shaft
Secondary
transfer － × × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed
backup blade
LSU Dust-proof
LSU ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Use the LSU cleaning rod.
section glass
Cleaning
Other × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
base
Paper Manual Paper pickup
× ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
feed paper roller
section feed / Paper feed Replace according to each paper feed
Tray × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
roller counter value at 100K or 1 year use.
paper Separation
feed × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
roller
unit Torque limiter × × × × × × × × × × ×
Transport ✕
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
rollers
Sensors ✕ For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
× × × × × × × × × ×
must be also cleaned.
Transport, Transpo PS follower ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Reverse, rt, roller
Paper exit Reverse
Transport ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
section , Paper
exit unit rollers
Discharge ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
brush
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
Paper dust ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
removing unit
Shifter PG ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Transport ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
paper guides
Gears Apply to the specified position when checking
－ × × × × × × × × × ×
(Grease) FLOIL G-313S
Drive Drive Shaft earth
section unit sections Apply to the specified position when checking
－ × × × × × × × × × ×
(Conduction FLOIL GE-676
grease)
Belts － × × × × × × × × × ×
Sensors － × × × × × × × × × ×
Fusing Fusing Fusing belt ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
section unit Fusing roller ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
Apply grease to the shaft section when
Pressure ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
replacing (JFE552)
roller
Separation ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
plate
Lower ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Clean as needed
separation
pawl
Meandering- ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
prevention
collar
Heating roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Fusing roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
bearing
Heating roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
bearing
Pressure ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
roller bearing
Heat- ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
insulation
Replace as needed
bush
Pressure ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
roller gear
Main ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
thermistor
Sub ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
thermistor
Lower ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
thermistor
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Fusing paper ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
exit roller
Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Web roller ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  Apply grease to the specified position.
Web guide ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  Replace together with the fusing belt.
shaft
Web pressure ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
roller
Web pressure ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
roller bearing
Paper guides ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Other section Ozone filter × ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
Left cabinet
× ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
filter
4. Details
A. RSPF section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 Remark
calling K K K K K K K K K K
1 Paper feed roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Replace according to SPF paper feed counter value at
2 Pickup roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
100K or after 1 year use.
3 Separation roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 Transport rollers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 Scanning plate ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Replace according to SPF paper feed counter value at
Torque limiter × × × × × × × × × × ×
6 400K or 2 years use.
7 Discharge brush × × × × × × × × × × ×
8 OC mat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 Belts × × × × × × × × × × ×
9 9
6
2
6
1
3
4
5
4
4
7
(1) Pickup roller, paper feed roller replacement 2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the holder. Remove the sep-
1) Open the paper feed unit. aration roller.
Maintenance: Replace at every 100K of each paper feed coun-
ter.
2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the paper guide.
(3) Torque limiter SPF replacement

1) Remove the torque limiter SPF.
ter.
3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the holder guide. Remove

the pickup roller and the paper feed roller.
ter.
(4) Take-up torque limiter replacement

1) Remove the one-way coupling, the belt, and the pulley.
Remove the E-ring.
Pull out the shaft, and remove the bearing, the holder, and the
take-up torque limiter.
ter.
(2) Separation roller replacement

1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the cover.
2 ‘13/Nov
B. DSPF section
No Part name When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 Remark
. calling K K K K K K K K K K
1 Paper feed roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 2
2 Pickup roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
value at 100K or 1 year use.
3 Separation roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 Transport rollers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 Discharge brush × × × × × × × × × × ×
6 Torque limiter × × × × × × × × × × ×
value at 800K
7 No.1 scanning plate ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
No.2 scanning
8 section, scanning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
glass
No.2 scanning
9 section, white ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
reference glass
10 Mirror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 Lens/CCD ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Scanner lamp/
12 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Blow air to clean the LED section
Reflector
13 OC mat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When checking, apply grease (UKOG-
14 Gears × × × × × × × × × × ×
0299FCZZ) to the necessary positions
15 Belts × × × × × × × × × × ×
1
6
4 2
3
4
7
4 13
4
4
5
10
14
11 12
12 15
8
10 14
15
9
1) Open the upper door. Remove the screw. Remove the paper 5) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed PG lower
feed cover. cover.
6) Disengage the pawl, and remove the reverse pressure release

lever. Remove the separation roller.
Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
2) Remove the pawl, and remove the paper feed PG upper cover.
2
7) Open the DSPF unit, and clean the No.1 scanning plate.
3) Remove the pawl. Remove the pickup roller holder. Remove

the pickup roller from the pickup roller holder.
2
8) Open the lower door.
4) Remove the paper feed roller. 1

9) Remove the cleaner. 13) Remove the pawl, and remove the front cabinet.
2 3
14) Remove the screw. Remove the pawl. Remove the rear cabi-
10) Use the cleaner to clean the scanning glass (surface).
net.
2
15) Open the DSPF unit, and remove the OC mat from the left
11) Use the cleaner to clean the white reference glass. edge.
Maintenance: Clean at every 150K. Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
12) Close the DSPF unit. Open the upper door, and remove the * When assembling, place the OC mat on the document table
screw. to fit with the reference and close the DSPF unit.
16) Remove the connector from the DSPF CL inverter PWB. 20) Remove the screw, and remove the lamp mounting plate.
17) Remove the screw, and remove the intersecting point plate.
Remove the lower door.
21) Clean the scanning glass (back surface).

2
1 Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
18) Remove the screw, and remove the intersecting point plate.
Remove the white reference plate.
22) Remove the screw, and remove the reflector and the DSPF
copy lamp.
19) Remove the screw, and remove the scanning section cover.
Remove the screw, and remove the lamp unit.
2
3
27) Remove the pawl, and remove the lens cover.
23) Remove the screw, and remove the transport PG upper.
28) Clean the lens (a) and the CCD (b).

24) Remove the screw, and remove the harness cover. Disconnect Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
the connector.
* When assembling, arrange the harness so that it is placed in
the lower position than the rib height.
1 b
2
a
29) Remove the screw, and remove the mirror base cover.
25) Remove the step screw, and remove the screw. Remove the
optical fixing plate. Remove the optical unit.
2
3
30) Clean the mirror.

26) Remove the pawl. Remove the dust-proof cover. Remove the Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
screw, and remove the dark box.
C.Scanner section
1 Mirror/Lens/Reflector/CCD ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 Table glass/SPF glass ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 Scanner lamp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Blow air to clean the LED section
4 Rails ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
5 Drive belt /drive wire × × × × × × × × × × ×
6 Sensors × × × × × × × × × × ×

D. Developing section
Color items
No. Part name When 840 K 840 K 840 K 840 K 840 K Remark
calling rotation rotation rotation rotation rotation
1 Developer × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 DV blade / Inner blade × × × × × ×
3 DV side seal F/R × × × × × × Maximum printed number 160K
4 Toner filter × × × × × ×
5 Bias pin, Connector × × × × × ×
Monochrome items
1 Developer × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 DV blade / inner blade × × × × × ×
3 DV side seal F/R × × × × × × Maximum printed number 200K
4 Toner filter × × × × × ×
5 Bias pin, Connector × × × × × ×

(Note for servicing the DV roller)
1. Prevent roller contamination 2) Remove the waste toner box.
[Note]
- Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the DV roller
surface.
- When rotating the DV roller manually, hold the drive gear section 1
to rotate it.
3) Check that the lock is released as shown in (A).

Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit.
* Unlock the Primary Transfer Assembly by turning the screw
counterclockwise so the tab is visible through the slot as
Rotate this section manually. indicated in figure A.
A
B
[Countermeasures]
If a fingerprint is attached to the DV roller surface erroneously, per-
form the following countermeasures.
1) Remove developer material from the developer unit and the
developer mag roller.
2) Remove oily dirt on the DV roller with alcohol.
3) When alcohol dries completely, supply developer and perform 4) Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw.
SIM 25-02. (1position for each color)
[Check method]
Check to confirm that the DV roller is free from fingerprints or oily
dirt and that cleaning is completely executed or not by the following
method.
1
- Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
the image.
1) Remove the front cabinet.
2
5) Pinch the knob and remove the development unit.
6) Remove the screws.
NOTE:
Before cleaning with a vacuum, ground the magnet roller
rear side shaft as shown in the figure below and clean the
unit with a vacuum.
Magnet roller
rear side cored bar
9) Remove the cover and the toner filter.

7) Hold the sections (A), and remove the DV cover in the arrow Maintenance: Check at every 840K rotation (monochrome).
direction (B).
"
10) Remove the DV blade.

Maintenance: Check at every 840K rotation (monochrome).
8) Remove developer material.
NOTE:
Note for cleaning the developing unit If the developing unit * When attaching, use alcohol to remove oil from the attached
is cleaned with a cleaner or an air blower with much devel- surface, and fit with the reference.
oper in the developing unit, static electricity may be accu-
mulated in the unit. 0㨪0.3mm
* Metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller 0㨪0.3mm
surface when transporting developer or removing foreign
material from the magnet roller, developer may adhere to
the magnet roller surface. Be careful to avoid this when
handling the magnet roller.
* Remove developer in the development unit as well as
developer attached to the magnet roller as far as possi-
ble.
11) Remove the DV side seal F/R.
Maintenance: Check at every 840K rotation (monochrome). 12) Insert the new developer.
Maintenance: Replace at every 840K rotation (monochrome).
* When attaching, use alcohol to remove oil from the attached

surface, and fit with the reference so that the DV side seals
F and R are inserted between the DV cover R (A) and the
DV blade (B).
0㨪0.3mm
0 㨪 0.5mm
NOTE:
When replacing developer, use extreme care not to drop
developer on the drive section (marked with ).
0 㨪 0.3mm 0 㨪 0.3mm NOTE:
After supplying developer, do not tilt the development unit.
E.Photoconductor section
Color items
1 Drum × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Cleaning blade × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
3 MC unit × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
4 Side seal F/R × × × × × × Maximum printed number 160K
5 Toner reception blade × × × × × ×
6 MC cleaner roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
7 Waste toner box × × × × × ×
Monochrome items
1 Drum × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Cleaning blade × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
3 MC unit × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
4 Side seal F/R × × × × × × Maximum printed number 200K
5 Toner reception blade × × × × × ×
6 MC cleaner roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
7 Waste toner box × × × × × ×
(Note for servicing the OPC drums) 1) Open the front cover.
1. Prevention of oily dirt attachment
[Note]
- Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC drum
surface. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.)
- When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum with the
protection sheet and hold the protection sheet.
If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough care
not to touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from both
edges of the OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached to
the cleaning blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning blade
may flip.)
5mm
2) Remove the waste toner box.
Maintenance: Check when calling or every 150K.
OPC DRUM
5mm
CLEANING BLADE 2
[Countermeasures]
If a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously,
perform the following countermeasures. 3) Remove the MC cleaner rod.
1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt.
2) Apply stearic acid powder to prevent blade flip.
[Check method]
Check to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oily
dirt and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the follow-
ing method.
- Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
the image.
2. Prior exposure prevention
[Note] PET
- Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.
- Do not expose the unit to light for a long time.
- Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using
paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)
[Countermeasures]
If the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior
exposure), perform the following countermeasures.
1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular density
area in the previously exposed section.
2) Damages due to prior exposure may be recovered by keeping
the OPC drum for several hours. If, however, image are not
recovered, replace the OPC drum.
4) Insert the MC cleaner rod into the insertion port where the 7) Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw.
cleaning guide label is attached, and clean the MC unit. (1position for each color)
Maintenance: Clean at every call.
T
PE
PET
* Slide the rod back and forth 3 times to cleaning the MC unit.
If there is no improvement, clean again.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained by cleaning again,
replace the MC cleaner rollers with spare ones.
5) Remove the MC cleaner roller from the MC cleaner rod.
9) Hold the lock lever, and pull out each color drum unit slowly,
and support the lower section of the unit with hand to remove.
* Be careful to prevent against dirt of the MC cleaner roller.

(Prevent adhesion of the oils or the toner etc.)
Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit.
* When the lock is not released, use a screwdriver to turn the 10) Remove the screws and remove the fixing shaft.
screw (B) counterclockwise so that it is fit as (A).
A 2
B
11) Slide the OPC drum to the front side, and lift the drum rear 12) Remove the C-ring, carefully lift the hook, and push the drum
side, and remove the OPC drum from the hole in the front sec- shaft. Pull the drum shaft which extends to the opposite side
tion. until it is caught, and rotate and remove the OPC drum.
Maintenance: Replace at every 840K rotation (monochrome). * When installing the drum shaft to a new drum, leave the
drum protection paper wrapped on the drum.
* When replacing, apply stearic acid powder to the OPC drum.
13) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
* Don't touch the OPC drum surface. (excluding the area of

within 5mm from the both ends)
* Even if it wrapped with black paper, don't apply hard pres-
sure.
* Apply the stearic acid powder to the whole surface of the 1
OPC drum.
* Hold both ends, rotate twice by hand in the direction shown
in the figure. (For seating the drum cleaning blade.)
14) Release the pawl, and remove the cover. Remove the MC unit.
NOTE:
Attach the cover so that it does not float on the opposite
side of the pawl.
1 3
15) Remove the toner receiving seal. 17) Remove the screw, and remove the DC holding plate and the
Maintenance: Check at every 840K rotation (monochrome). DCH lens.
* When attaching, use alcohol to remove oil from the attached

surface, and fit as indicated below. Press securely after
attachment.
Reference line
Reference 18) Remove the screws, and remove the cleaner blade.
line
16) Remove the side seal F/R.

Maintenance: Check at every 840K rotation (monochrome).
NOTE:
When attaching the cleaner blade, do not pinch side seals
F and R with the cleaner blade.
* When attaching, use alcohol to remove oil from the attached OK R side F side
surface, and fit as indicated below. Press securely after
attachment.
Reference 0 - 0.3mm Reference 0 - 0.3mm
NG R side F side
0 - 0.3mm 0 - 0.3mm
NOTE:
Check to conform that the cleaner blade is installed before
attaching side seals F and R.
If the sequence is reversed, the blade may extend over
side seals F and R.
F. Transfer section
1 Intermediate transfer belt – –  –  –  –  –  Replace at 300K.
Primary transfer cleaner blade – Replace at 300K.
2 × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ Replace together with
the primary transfer belt.
3 Primary transfer roller – × × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
4 Primary transfer belt drive gear – × × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
5 Primary transfer belt drive roller – × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
6 Primary transfer belt follower roller – × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
7 Primary transfer belt tension roller – × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
8 Belt CL brush – × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
9 PTC opposed roller – × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
10 Registration backup shaft – – ○ – ○ – ○ – ○ – ○
11 Transfer separation pawl – × × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
12 Registration backup roller – – ○ – ○ – ○ – ○ – ○
Secondary transfer belt – Replace at 300K.
13 × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ Do not use alcohol or
solvent for cleaning.
14 Secondary transfer roller – × × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
15 Secondary transfer idle gear – × × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
16 Secondary transfer belt drive roller – × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
17 Secondary transfer belt follower roller – × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
18 Secondary transfer idle shaft – – ○ – ○ – ○ – ○ – ○
19 Secondary transfer backup blade – × × × × × × × × × ×
20 PTC unit – ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
21 Pro-reg sensor – ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
22 Transfer cleaner seal F/R – – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕
23 Primary transfer toner reception seal – × × × × × × × × × ×

Note for servicing the transfer unit
1. Prevention of oily dirt attachment
[Note]
- Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the transfer belt
surface. (Keep the transfer unit away from oil and dust.)
- When replacing the transfer belt, hold the edge section (within
10mm from the edge) of the transfer belt.
Exposure surface of the transfer belt
[Countermeasures]
If oily dirt is erroneously attached to the transfer belt surface, per-
form the following countermeasures.
1) Use alcohol to remove oily dirt from the transfer belt.
10mm 2) Wipe alcohol trail completely away from the transfer belt sur-
10mm face. (If alcohol residue remains on the transfer belt, its image
may be printed on copy paper.)
- When rotating the transfer belt manually, use a screwdriver to 3) Apply kynar powder (UKOG-0123FCZZ) to the cleaning blade
turn the drive gear section as shown below. to prevent reverse rotation of the cleaning blade.
[Check method]
Check to confirm that the transfer belt is free from fingerprints or
oily dirt and that alcohol residue are completely removed or not by
the following method.
- Make three continuous multi prints of half tone images on all the
surface of A3 (11" x 17") paper, and check the printed paper for
any alcohol residue images.
1) Open the front cover.
NOTE:
Rotate clockwise.
- When installing the transfer unit, hold the handle to insert the unit
into the machine. When placing the transfer unit on the guide rail
of the machine and inserting the unit to the machine, the expo-
sure surface on both sides of the transfer belt may be touched
erroneously. Use enough care not to touch the exposure surface.
Also when the right door is opened, the exposure surface may be
touched. Use enough care in this case, too. 2) Remove the waste toner box.
Exposure surface of the transfer belt
3) Open the right door. 6) Hold the specified position, and remove the primary transfer
unit.
NOTE:
4) Loosen the blue screw. After maintenance, when the transfer belt tension of the pri-
mary transfer unit is released manually, turn on the power
again after completion of the work. (Power OFF-ON)
This procedure initializes the transfer roller to return it to
the home position.
7) Loosen the screw, and remove the maintenance cover.
5) Turn the blue screw (A) counterclockwise. Making sure that

the lock is released (B), open and then pull out the drum posi-
tioning unit.
NOTE:
Failure to complete this step may damage the intermediate
transfer belt.
A
B
8) Remove the screw, and tilt the cleaner unit and remove it.
9) Remove the screws, and remove the primary transfer cleaner 11) Remove the screws, and remove the primary transfer belt
blade. drive gear.
Maintenance: Replace at every 300K. Maintenance: Check at every 300K.
12) Remove the parts.
10) Remove the transfer cleaner seals F and R, and remove the
primary transfer toner reception seal.
Maintenance: Check at every 300K.
13) Remove the screws, and remove the paper guide.

NOTE:
After removing the paper guide, place it so that the separa-
tion pawl faces upward in order to protect the separation
pawl tip from damages.
In addition, when attaching the paper guide, be careful not
NOTE:
to damage the transfer belt by the separation pawl.
When replacing the transfer cleaner seals F and R and the
primary transfer toner reception seal, attach new seals
according to the attachment references.
Attachment reference
(Frame bump edge)
0mm 0.3mm
0mm
Attachment
reference
(Frame bump)
0.3mm
0.3mm 0.3mm
Attachment Attachment
reference reference
(Frame edge) 0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm (Frame edge)
0mm 0mm
Attachment reference Attachment reference
(Blade edge) (Blade edge)
14) Remove the screw from the paper guide, and remove the sep- 17) Clean the PTC opposed roller and the registration backup
aration pawl fixing plate. roller.
Remove the transfer separation pawl, and remove the spring. Maintenance: Clean at every 300K.
15) Fold the transfer frame and lift the rear side of the unit 90
degrees. Remove the intermediate transfer belt.
18) Clean the primary transfer belt follower roller (A) and the pri-
Maintenance: Replace at every 300K. mary transfer belt tension roller (B).
NOTE: Use alcohol for cleaning.
16) Clean the primary transfer belt drive roller, the belt CL brush
and the registration backup shaft. 19) Disengage the engagement on the front side, and remove the
Maintenance: Clean at every 300K. primary transfer roller.
20) Install intermediate transfer belt 22) Remove the PTC unit.
Form the intermediate transfer belt into triangle. Slide the inter- Maintenance: Replace at every 300K.
mediate transfer belt over the transfer frame. * After replacing the PTC unit, use SIM24-4 to reset the PTC
counter.
Lot No.
NOTE:
When installing, be careful not to bring the intermediate 23) Release the pawl, and remove the secondary transfer unit.
transfer belt into contact with the transfer unit frame and
the gears. Use care not to touch the intermediate transfer 3
belt surface with bare hands.
Put so that the dot mark or the lot number on the belt sur-
face is on the rear side.
21) Apply Kynar. 1

NOTE:
Do not touch the intermediate transfer belt with bare hands. 3
Be careful not to scratch or fold it.
a) Place the primary transfer unit on a flat surface with the
top surface upward. While turning the belt, apply KYNAR
(UKOG-0123FCZZ) to all the full-circle surface of the belt.
24) Remove parts as outlined below.

NOTE:
When placing the primary transfer unit on a flat surface,
use a flat table and be careful not to scratch the belt and
not to attach a foreign material.
b) Attach the primary transfer cleaner unit.
c) Manually rotate the transfer belt drive gear to remove
25) Remove the secondary belt transfer frame.
starting powder from the primary transfer belt clearly.
d) After inserting into the machine, make three sheets of
background copy on A3 paper.
2 ‘13/Nov
30) Push up the shutter, and clean the pro-reg sensor.
26) Remove parts as outlined below. Maintenance: Check at every 150K.
Maintenance: Clean at every 300K. NOTE : Execute SIM44-2 after cleaning sensor. 2
27) Remove the secondary transfer belt.

Maintenance: Replace at every 300K.
28) Clean the secondary transfer belt drive roller and the second-
ary transfer idle shaft.
29) Remove the bearing on the front side, and remove the second-
ary transfer roller.
G. LSU section
1 Dust-proof glass ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Use the LSU cleaning rod.
2 Cleaning base × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
4) Insert the LSU cleaning rod into the insertion port to which the
cleaning guide label is attached so that the cleaning base (A)
is under the cleaning rod (B). Move the cleaning rod back and
forth 2 or 3 times to clean the dust proof glass.
A
2
B
3) Remove the LSU cleaning rod from the front cover.
PET
PET
5) Remove the cleaning base from the LSU cleaning rod.

H. Paper feed section
1 Paper pickup roller × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Replace according to each paper feed
2 Paper feed roller × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
counter value at 100K or 1 year use.
3 Separation roller × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 Torque limiter × × × × × × × × × × ×
5 Transport rollers × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Sensors For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
6 × × × × × × × × × × ×

1) Remove the pickup cover.
5) Remove the paper pickup roller (a) and the paper feed roller
(b).
2) Remove the paper pickup roller (A) and the paper feed roller
(B).
Maintenance: Clean at every 150K. a
6) Remove the separation roller.

B
3) Open the maintenance cover, remove the separation roller.

4) Remove the tray 1 and 2.
I. Transport, Reverse, Paper exit section
1 PS follower roller ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 Transport rollers ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ *1
3 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ For the reflection-type sensor, the
4
other side must be also cleaned.
5 Paper dust removing unit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 Shifter PG ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ *1
- Transport paper guides ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
*1: The paper exit roller 1 and the shifter PG rib should be cleaned with alcohol at every 100K.

(1) Transport section
1) Open the right door. 2) Clean the paper exit roller 2 (Drive).
3) Open the ADU open/close door.
2) Clean the resist roller (Idle) (A), resist roller (Drive) (B) and the
transport roller 8 (Drive) (C).
B C
4) Clean the transport roller 10 (Drive) (A), and the transport

roller 11 (Drive) (B).
(2) Reverse, Paper exit section
1) Clean the paper exit roller 1 (Drive), and the shifter PG.
5) Open the right door.
6) Remove the reverse PG unit.
7) Clean the transport roller 13 (Drive).

J. Drive section
Apply to the specified position when
1 Gears (Grease) － × × × × × × × × × ×
checking FLOIL G-313S
Shaft earth sections Apply to the specified position when
2 － × × × × × × × × × ×
(Conduction grease) checking FLOIL GE-676
3 Belts － × × × × × × × × × ×
4 Sensors － × × × × × × × × × ×
4 3 4
1
(FLOIL G313S)
2
(FLOIL GE-676)
41cpm machine only
1
3 51cpm machine only
(HANARL FL955R)
K. Fusing section
1 Fusing belt ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
2 Fusing roller ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  Apply grease to the shaft section
3 Pressure roller ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  when replacing (JFE552)
4 Separation plate ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Clean as needed
5 Lower separation pawl ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Meandering-prevention ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
6
collar
7 Heating roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
8 Fusing roller bearing ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
9 Heating roller bearing ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
10 Pressure roller bearing ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
11 Heat-insulation bush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replace as needed
12 Pressure roller gear ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
13 Main thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
14 Sub thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
15 Lower thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
16 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
17 Fusing paper exit roller ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18 Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Web roller ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  Apply grease to the specified
19
position.
20 Web guide shaft ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  Replace together with the fusing belt.
21 Web pressure roller ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
22 Web pressure roller bearing ✕ ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ 
- Paper guides ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

(1) Fusing paper exit roller cleaning
1) Pull out the right door unit. NOTE:
Before executing the operation, turn off the power switch
on the operation panel to release the pressure of fusing.
- Pressure release state (The convex portion of the pres-
sure release gear can be seen.)
2) Clean the fusing paper exit roller.

- Pressure applying state (The convex portion of the pres-
sure release gear cannot be seen.)
(2) Fusing unit removal

1) Remove the screw. Release the fusing lever, and remove the
fusing unit.
NOTE:
If the knob is turned in direction B with the fusing unit disas-
1 sembled from the machine, the web sheet may sag and
twist. around the roller. Therefore, never turn it in direction
B.
3 Direction A: Paper transport direction
Direction B: Opposite to paper transport
1
2
2
A (OK)
B (NG)
3) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing cover.
(3) Lower separation pawl and separation plate
removal
1) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing transport unit.
4) Remove the fusing rear lower PG unit.

NOTE:
When installing the fusing rear lower PG unit, be careful of
the direction and installing position of U-shape hooks of IN
(A) and OUT(B) of the rear lower return spring.
A
B
A
2) Open the fusing rear lower PG unit, remove the screw, and
remove the fusing cover.
A B
5) Remove the lower separation pawl and the lower separation

pawl spring from the paper guide.
NOTE:
1 When assembling, check to confirm that the hook of the
lower separation pawl spring is engaged.
(4) Web guide shaft, Web pressure roller bearing,
6) Remove the screw, and remove the paper guide. Web pressure roller, and Web roller removal
1) Remove the screw, and remove the drive plate, and remove
the gear.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screw, and remove

NOTE: the sensor holder.
After installing the separation plate and the paper guide, NOTE:
manually move the separation plate to check the operation. When assembling, place the actuator tip on the outside of
the web sheet.
7) Remove the spring, and slide it to the front side, and remove
the separation plate. 3) Remove the screw, and remove the Web unit.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage or scratch the separation plate
surface.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the angle, and remove the
Web guide shaft.
8) Remove the holder, from the separation plate. Maintenance: Replace at every 300K or at the end.
5) Remove the spring and the web pressure roller bearing, and
remove the web pressure roller. Route diagram
(5) Lower thermistor removal

6) Remove the web roller. 1) Remove the screw, and remove the paper guide.
(Replace the web roller together with the fusing belt.)
NOTE: 2) Remove the screw, disconnect the connector, and remove the
After assembling the web unit, rotate the drive gear until mounting plate. Remove the lower thermistor from the mount-
the end position of the start mark on the web sheet comes ing plate.
to the pressure roller.
NOTE:
Attach the web sheet to the fusing unit without slack in the
web sheet.
NOTE:
If the web roller is not replaced together with the fusing
belt, the fusing belt may be dirtied with toner.
End position of the

start mark
3) Remove the pressure roller.
(6) Pressure roller gear, Pressure roller gear bearing,
Pressure roller removal
1) Disconnect the connector of the lower heater lamp. Remove NOTE:
the screw, and remove the holder, and remove the lower When attaching the pressure roller, attach it with the pro-
heater lamp. tection sheet on it. After completion of assembly, remove
the protection sheet.
NOTE:
When replacing the pressure roller, apply grease (JFE552)
to section A. In addition, wipe the pressure roller surface
with alcohol.
NOTE:
For removal of the pressure roller, remove the lower therm-
istor then remove the roller.
A A
2) Remove the C-ring, the pressure roller gear, and the pressure
roller gear bearing.
(7) Sub thermistor removal

1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the sub thermistor.
2 ‘13/Nov
3) Remove the screw, and remove the E-ring, the gear, the fusing
(8) Fusing roller bearing, heat-insulating bush, roller bearing, and the support plate.
heating roller bearing, meandering suppress
collar, fusing roller, heating roller, fusing belt 2
removal
1) Disconnect the connector.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum plate, and remove
the fusing belt unit.
2) Remove the spring, and remove the screw. Remove the

holder, and remove the upper heater lamp.
5) Remove the C-ring, the insulation bush, the heating roller

bearing, and the wave washer.
When replacing the insulation bush, apply grease (JFE552) to
section A.
2 2
A
A
NOTE:
When installing the upper heater lamp, be careful of the
direction of the convex section of the upper heater lamp.
6) Remove the heating roller from the frame. Remove the mean-
dering suppress collar from the heating roller. Remove the
heating roller and the fusing roller from the fusing belt.
(Replace the fusing belt together with the web roller.)
NOTE:
When attaching the fusing belt, attach it with the protection
sheet on it. After attaching the fusing roller bearing, remove
the protection sheet.
NOTE:
After attaching the fusing belt, wipe the belt surface with
alcohol.
NOTE:
If the fusing belt is not replaced together with the web roller,
the fusing belt may be dirtied with toner.
1 2
4
2
3
When replacing the fusing roller, apply grease (JFE552) to

section A.
L. Other (Filter) section
1 Ozone filter × × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲
2 Left cabinet filter × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1) Remove the ozone filter cover, and remove the ozone filter.
Maintenance: Replace filter at every 300K.
2 ‘13/Nov
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

MX-5141N
Service Manual
1. Disassembly of Units
(1) Front cabinet
A. Cabinet
1) Remove the front cabinet band. Remove the front cabinet
hinge. Remove the front cabinet.
(2) Rear cabinet

1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
Parts
a Front cabinet
b Rear cabinet
c Left cabinet rear lower
d Left cabinet
e Upper cabinet right
f Upper cabinet left
g Upper cabinet rear cover (3) Left cabinet rear lower/Left cabinet
h Upper cabinet rear
i Front cabinet upper
j Right cabinet front
2
k Right connection cabinet
l Right cabinet rear cover
m Right cabinet rear
n Paper exit cover
o Paper exit tray cabinet
p Left cabinet rear
q Frame cover
MX-5141N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 1

2) Remove the desk connection lid (A). Remove the screw, and
remove the left cabinet rear lower (B) and the left cabinet (C).
(5) Upper cabinet rear cover/Upper cabinet rear
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover lid (A). Remove the
screw, and remove the upper cabinet rear cover (B).
A
A 4
1 3
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the

earth wire. Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet
(4) Upper cabinet right/Upper cabinet left rear.
1) Remove the glass holder (B), the table glass (C), and the SPF
glass (A).

!
#

"
(6) Front cabinet upper

1) Open the front cabinet. Remove the screws, and remove the
front cabinet upper.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet right (A) and
the upper cabinet left (B).
"

(7) Right cabinet front/Right connection cabinet/Right (8) Paper exit cover/Paper exit tray cabinet/Left
cabinet rear cover/Right cabinet rear cabinet rear
1) Remove the front cabinet upper. 1) Remove the paper exit cover (A). Open the front cabinet, and
2) Open the right door and the right cabinet lower. remove the screw.
Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit tray cabinet (B).
Remove the screw, and remove the left cabinet rear (C).
2 2
C 4
3
1
3
(9) Frame cover
1) Remove the waste toner box, and open the drum positioning
unit.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet front (A). 2) Remove the front cabinet.
Remove the screw, and remove the right connection cabinet 3) Remove the front cabinet upper.
(B). Remove the ozone filter cover (C). Remove the screw, and 4) Remove the screw, and remove the frame cover.
remove the right cabinet rear cover (D). Remove the desk con-
nection lid (E). Remove the screw, and remove the right cabi-
net rear (F).
B 2
1
6 D
A
4
3
C
F
5
E

B. Operation panel section
3) Slide the operation panel unit to the left, and put it down.
No. Name Remove the operation panel cover.
1 Operation panel unit)

4) Remove the operation panel lower cover.
(1) Operation panel unit

1) Remove the operation panel cover.

5) Turn over the operation panel unit.

2) Remove the operation panel upper cover.

Fit the flat cable edges with sections A of the Mylar, and

remove slack in sections B of the flat cables.

6) Remove the clamp. Peel off the mylar and disconnect the con- 1
nector.
2 3

3) Loosen the screw, and lower the angle adjustment plate.

Fit the flat cable edges with sections A of the Mylar, and
remove slack in sections B of the flat cables.
"
"
!
C. DSPF unit
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover lid. Remove the screw,
and remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth line. Disconnect the
connector, and remove the snap band. Remove the screw, and
remove the locking band and the interface harness cover.

4) Open the DSPF unit to put it straight up, and remove the
screw.
2 3
(2) Rear cabinet

1) Open the upper door. Remove the screw. Remove the pawl.
2 2 Remove the rear cabinet.
1
5) Slide the DSPF unit to the rear side, and fit the step screw with
the key hole of the hinge, and lift it up to remove.
(3) Paper feed cover

1) Open the upper door. Remove the screw. Remove the paper
feed cover.
(1) Front cabinet

1) Open the upper door, and remove the screw.
2) Remove the pawl, and remove the front cabinet.

earth wire. Remove the snap band. Remove the screw, and
(4) Upper door remove the harness cover and the locking band.
2) Remove the spring. Remove the pawl. Remove the pressure
release axis holder. Remove the screw. Remove the pressure
release link lever.
4 2
3) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the upper door.
2
3
D. RSPF unit
d
c
b
a
e
Parts
a Reverse clutch
b PS clutch
c Paper feed motor
d Transport motor
e Pressure release solenoid
f RSPF driver PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.

[Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]

4) Open the RSPF unit until it is upright. Remove the screw, and 3) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
slide the RSPF unit to the rear side. Fit the step screw with the
key hole of the hinge and remove the RSPF unit.
4) Remove the harness from the wire saddle, and disconnect the
connector. Remove the screw, and remove the grounding wire.
Remove the screw, and remove the holder. Remove the docu-
ment tray.
(1) Reverse clutch

1) Open the paper feed unit.
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the snap band.

Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire.
2) Remove the screw. Disengage the pawls (2 positions) of the

front cabinet by inserting a minus screwdriver under the base
tray, and remove the front cabinet.

6) Remove the screw, and remove the transport unit.
(3) Paper feed motor
1) Remove the reverse clutch.
2) Remove the PS clutch.
3) Loosen the belt tensioning screw to allow belt removal.
Remove the screw, and remove the drive frame.
7) Remove the E-ring, and remove the reverse clutch.

NOTE:
When installing, engage the rotation-stopper of the clutch
with the frame.
4) Remove the belt from the paper feed motor. Remove the
screw, and remove the shield plate and the paper feed motor.
NOTE:
Do not use the attached harness. Use the original harness.
If the motor harness needs replacement, order the harness
shown in the parts guide.
(2) PS clutch
1) Remove the transport unit.
2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the PS clutch.
NOTE:
When installing, attach the rotation-stopper of the clutch to
the frame.
(4) Transport motor

1) Remove the reverse clutch.
2) Remove the PS clutch.
3) Remove the drive frame.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the transport motor.

(5) Pressure release solenoid
1) Remove the rear cabinet of the RSPF unit.
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the E. Scanner unit
harness from the edge saddle. Remove the solenoid unit.
f
NOTE:
b d
When installing, insert the solenoid pin into the slit of the
a
lever.
c
e
Parts
a LED PWB
b LED driver PWB
c CCD unit
d Scanner motor
e Document detection light receiving PWB
f Document detection light emitting PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the pressure release solenoid. 3) Remove the upper cabinet right and the upper cabinet left..
NOTE: 4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the snap band.
When installing, insert the solenoid pin into the long hole of
the frame.
(6) RSPF driver PWB

5) Remove the screw, and remove the scanner unit.
1) Remove the rear cabinet of the RSPF unit.
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the
PWB supporter. Remove the RSPF driver PWB.

3) Remove the lock block. Disengage the right door lock pawl.
F. Manual paper feed unit Remove the ADU cabinet F, and the right door release lever.
3
c a 1
3
4
Parts
5
a Temperature humidity sensor
b Manual paper feed tray paper width detector
c Manual paper feed gate solenoid
d Paper pickup solenoid
4) Remove the ADU cabinet R.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the connector cover. Remove 5) Remove the MF harness cover, and disconnect the connector.
the screw and remove the ADU inner cover.

1 2
1
2
6) Remove the MF tray installing shaft, and remove the manual

feed tray unit.
7) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed

unit.
G. Tray paper feed unit

1) Remove the right cabinet front.

3) Remove the right lower door unit.
7) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove

the registration roller unit.
4) Remove the paper feed movable PG lower.
I. Duplex unit
5) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1, 2.
(2)-b
(1)-d
(1)-a
(1)-c
(2)-a
(1)-b
(1)
H. Registration roller unit

1) Remove the developing unit (K).
2) Remove the drum unit (K).
3) Remove the primary transfer unit.
Unit Parts
4) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1. (1) Right door a RD I/F PWB
5) Remove the rear cabinet. unit b Manual paper feed clutch
6) Remove the ADU connection drive. c Right paper exit gate
d ADU gate solenoid
(2) Others a ADU motor lower
b ADU motor upper

(1) Right door unit
2
K. Waste toner collection section

No. Name
2) Remove the right door unit. 1 Waste toner box
J. Paper exit unit

e
a
a b (1) Waste toner box

1) Open the front cabinet. Slide the lock to release it, and remove
c f the waste toner box.
Unit Parts
(1) Paper exit a Paper exit cooling fan motor
unit b Shifter motor
c Fusing web cleaning motor
d Fusing drive motor
e Paper exit drive motor
f ADU motor upper
(1) Paper exit unit

1) Remove the screw, the upper cabinet right, and the right con-
necting cabinet.
2) Remove the fusing unit.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit unit, and dis-
connect the connector.

L. Development unit
A
B
4) Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw.

Parts (1position for each color)
a Density sensor


Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit. M. Drum unit
* When the lock is not released, use a screwdriver to turn the 1) Open the front cover.
screw (B) counterclockwise so that it is fit as (A).

2) Remove the waste toner box unit.
6) Hold the lock lever and pull out each drum unit slowly.
Hold the lower section of the unit and remove it with both
hands.
3) Loosen the blue screw. Check to confirm that the lock is
released, and open the drum positioning unit.
A
B
N. Primary transfer unit

(CAUTION)
When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is
manually released, turn the power OFF/ON after completion of
the operation. This procedure initializes the transfer roller to
return it to the home position.
4) Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw.
(1position for each color)
1
2
1

3) Open the right door. 6) Hold the specified position, and remove the primary transfer
unit.
4) Loosen the blue screw. (NOTE)

When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is
released manually, turn on the power again after completion of
the work. (Power OFF-ON)
This procedure initializes the transfer roller to return it to the
home position.
O. Secondary transfer unit

5) Turn the blue screw (A) counterclockwise. Making sure that

the lock is released (B), open and then pull out the drum posi-
tioning unit.
* Failure to complete this step may damage the intermediate
transfer belt.
A
B
2) Release the pawl, and remove the secondary transfer unit.

P. LSU
5) Remove the LSU left plate PA.
Parts
a LSU
1) Turn off the power of the machine, and disconnect the power
plug from the power outlet.
2) Remove the left cabinet rear lower and the left cabinet.
[Refer to "Left cabinet lower, left cabinet" in "External view."]
3) Open the front cabinet, and remove the waste toner box.
(For U.S.A. 51cpm machine only)
Remove the power switch cover.
6) Remove the fan sheet.
For U.S.A. 51cpm machine only

7) Remove the LSU slant adjustment plate screw (A), and loosen
the screw (B).
Remove the LSU shaft fixing plate. Remove the screw.
3 3
B
4) Disconnect the connector.

A
8) Shift the front side of the LSU shaft from (A) to (B), and remove
the LSU shaft.

Q. Main drive unit
2 A A
B
3 A
1
B
I
9) Disconnect the connector, and remove the LSU.
C
H
G
K
F J
D
E
Parts
a Toner motor
b Developing drive motor (K)
c Developing drive motor (CL)
d Registration motor
e Transfer belt motor
f BK drum motor
g C drum motor (51cpm machine)
h CL drum motor (41cpm machine) /
M drum motor (51cpm machine)
i Y drum motor (51cpm machine)
j Primary transfer separation clutch
k Primary transfer separation reverse rotation clutch
1) Remove the rear cabinet.

2) Remove the screw, and open the control box.

3) Remove the flywheel. (2) Developing drive motor (K)
* Installing sequence: (1) C VR (2) KM 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
(Engraved mark for each color) 2) Open the control box.
* After installing, check to confirm that it is not in contact with 3) Remove the flywheel.
the harness.
the developing drive motor (K)
KM
C VR
BK

the main drive unit. (3) Developing drive motor (CL)
* Hold section A and remove. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the flywheel.
the developing drive motor (CL).
* The motor differs depending on the 40ppm machine and the
51ppm machine.
(4) Registration motor

(1) Toner motor 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
1) Remove the rear cabinet. 2) Open the control box.
2) Open the control box. 3) Remove the flywheel.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove 4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the toner motor. the registration motor.

(5) Transfer belt motor
the transfer belt motor.
(6) BK drum motor

the BK drum motor.
(7) C drum motor (51cpm machine)

the C drum motor.

(8) CL drum motor (41cpm machine) / (10) Primary transfer separation clutch
M drum motor (51cpm machine) 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
1) Remove the rear cabinet. 2) Open the control box.
2) Open the control box. 3) Remove the flywheel.
3) Remove the flywheel. 4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear.
the CL drum motor/M drum motor.
2 1
5) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear. Disconnect the con-
nector, and remove the E-ring, and remove the primary trans-
fer separation clutch.
(9) Y drum motor (51cpm machine)
* When installing, engage the projected section for stopping
1) Remove the rear cabinet. the clutch rotation with the frame projection.
4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove (11) Primary transfer separation reverse rotation clutch
the Y drum motor. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear.
2 1

5) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear. Disconnect the con- 4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Disengage
nector, and remove the E-ring, and remove the primary trans- the pawl, and remove the filter box unit.
fer separation reverse rotation clutch.
* When installing, engage the projected section for stopping
the clutch rotation with the frame projection.
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed drive

unit.
R. Paper feed drive unit
b a
e
g c
(1) Transport motor
d
f 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the transport motor.
d
Parts
a Transport motor
b Horizontal transport motor
c Paper feed motor
d Paper tray lift-up motor
e Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
f Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
g Tray vertical transport clutch

3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw and the each
terminal. Remove the driver main PWB unit.

(2) Horizontal transport motor (4) Paper tray lift-up motor
1) Remove the rear cabinet. 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External
2) Open the control box. view.")
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove 2) Open the control box.
the horizontal transport motor. 3) Remove the driver main PWB unit.
* When installing, insert the connector downward, and rotate 4) Remove the filter box unit.
the motor. 5) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
6) Disengage the pawl, and remove the lift-up coupling.
(3) Paper feed motor

3) Remove the driver main PWB unit.
4) Remove the filter box unit.
the paper feed motor. (5) Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1/
Paper feed tray 2)/Tray vertical transport clutch
1) Remove the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
2) Remove the paper feed motor.
3) Remove the paper feed drive unit.
4) Remove the gear and disconnect the connector.

5) Remove the screw, and remove the drive frame upper unit. 8) Remove the belt.
9) Remove the gear, and remove the tray vertical transport clutch
unit.
6) Remove the paper feed clutch unit.
* When installing, be careful of wiring process.
* When installing, be careful of wiring process.
10) Remove the E-ring, and remove the tray vertical transport
clutch.
7) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.

S. Fusing unit 2) Remove the screw. Release the lock lever and remove the fus-
ing unit.
b
b
1
a
1
2
c
d NOTE: Before executing the operation, turn off the power switch
on the operation panel to release the pressure of fusing.
- Pressure release state (The convex portion of the pres-
Parts
sure release gear can be seen.)
a Upper heater lamp
b Upper thermostat
c Lower thermostat OK
d Lower heater lamp
- Pressure applying state (The convex portion of the pres-

sure release gear cannot be seen.)
NG

NOTE: If the knob is turned in direction B with the fusing unit disas- U. Control box
sembled from the machine, the web sheet may sag and
twine around the roller. Therefore, never turn it in direction
B.
K L
F
Direction A: Paper transport direction G O
Direction B: Opposite to paper transport

J
H
M
D
A (OK) I Q
P
N
A
C
B (NG) B
Parts
a DC power PWB
b Driver main PWB
c High voltage MC PWB
T. Toner cartridges d High voltage 1TC PWB
1) Open the front cover. e AC power PWB
f Scanner control PWB
g HL PWB
h High voltage 2TC PWB
i WH PWB
j Driver sub PWB
k Mother PWB
l PCU PWB
m SD card memory
n CF card
o Compact Flash memory
p Scanner expansion PWB
q MFP cnt PWB
(1) SD card/DIMM memory PWB/MFP control PWB

2) Lift the lock lever, and pull it out slowly and horizontally. 1) Remove the right cabinet rear cover.
2) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP control PWB.
* When placing the HDD on the upper side, do not apply an

excessive force to the DIMM memory. So remove it or put a
spacer.

* Inserting position an inserting procedure when the DIMM 5) When the lock is released, the memory PWB tilts. Pull it out.
memory is removed * Be sure to release the lock before pulling it out.
* Do not touch the IC on the memory PWB.
3$CARD
#&CARD
$)--
* Note for removing procedure of the memory PWB
DIMM: 1GB Remove the PWB inside the tilt of the memory PWB first.
(Removing the IC outside the tilt will result in poor efficiency
of work.)
3) Remove the SD card.
Outside Inside Outside Inside
* Note for installing procedure of the memory PWB

Install the PWB outside the tilt of the memory PWB first.
(Installing the IC inside the tilt will result in poor efficiency
of work.)
Outside Inside Outside Inside
4) Push Stopper (A) with your finger to release the lock holding a) Tilt the memory PWB and fit with the connector port. Put
the memory PWB. the memory PWB up to the line (A) in the figure.
* When inserting, be sure to hold the both ends and be
sure not to touch the IC on the PWB.
About 15
A
A A

b) Push the memory PWB which is kept tilted fully to the (2) HDD
bottom. 1) Remove the right cabinet rear cover.
* Be careful not to tilt left and right. 2) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP control PWB.
* The gold plated section must be completely seated 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
inside slot. the HDD unit.
[ Tilting left and right ]
[ The gold plated

section can be seen ]
[ Normal ]
c) Raise the memory PWB until the connector stopper

clicks.
* Check to confirm that the lock pin (A) is in the center
of the lock hole.
* The stopper (B) must penetrate inside the PWB.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the HDD.
* The HDD is very fragile. Handle the HDD carefully so as not
to damage the unit due to any external shock.
A A
B B

the MFP control PWB.

(3) PCU Flash ROM PWB (5) Mother PWB
1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet lid. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
the mother PWB.
1
2) Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB.
V. Power unit
b
2
(4) PCU PWB

1) Remove the rear cabinet. Parts
2) Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB. a AC power PWB
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove b DC power PWB
the PCU PWB.
(1) AC power PWB
2) Remove the screw, and disconnect the connector, and remove
the AC power PWB.

(2) DC power PWB W. Others
a
b
c e
f
3) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove

the filter box unit.
d
Parts
a Scanner control PWB
b HL PWB
c Secondary transfer PWB
d Driver main PWB
e Driver sub PWB
f Hight voltage 1TC PWB
g Hight voltage MC PWB
(1) Scanner control PWB

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2) Remove the screw, and pull out the scanner control PWB unit.
Disconnect the connector.
4) Remove the screw, the reactor and the AC cord unit and dis-
connect the connector, and remove the AC power PWB unit.

the DC power PWB.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the scanner control PWB.

(2) HL PWB (5) Driver sub PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the rear cabinet. 1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the rear cabinet.
2) Open the control box. 2) Open the control box.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the snap band.
the duct. Remove the screw, and remove the PCI support plate.

the HL PWB.
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screw, and remove
the driver sub PWB.
(3) Secondary transfer PWB

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the rear cover.
the secondary transfer PWB.
(6) Hight voltage 1TC PWB

3) Remove the screw, and remove the flywheel.
* Installing sequence: (1) C VR (2) KM
(Engraved mark for each color)
* After installing, check to confirm that it is not in contact with
the harness.
(4) Driver main PWB

the driver main PWB.
KM
C VR

4) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove 5) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove
the hight voltage 1TC PWB. the hight voltage MC PWB and the supporter.
X. Filter section
No. Name
(7) Hight voltage MC PWB 1 Ozone filter

3) Remove the screw, and remove the flywheel.
* Installing sequence: (1) C VR (2) KM
(Engraved mark for each color)
* After installing, check to confirm that it is not in contact with
the harness.
(1) Ozone filter

KM 1) Remove the ozone filter cover.
C VR 2) Remove the ozone filter.
4) Disconnect the connector, remove the supporter, and remove

the hight voltage 1TC PWB unit.

2. Disassembly and assembly of each (3) KEY PWB, LCD, Touch panel
unit 1) Remove the Mylar. Disconnect the connector, and remove the
KEY PWB.
A. Operation panel unit
2) Remove the LCD holder.
No. Name
a USB I/F PWB
b LVDS PWB
c KEY PWB
d LCD
e Touch panel
(1) USB I/F PWB

1) Remove the USB I/F PWB.

1
2
3
3) Remove the holder, and remove the LCD.
NOTE: Use enough care not to put finger prints on the LCD sur-
face.
(2) LVDS PWB

1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the LVDS PWB.
4) Remove the touch panel.

NOTE: Use enough care not to put finger prints on the touch panel
surface.


2 ‘13/Nov
2 B. DSPF unit 5) Remove the screw, and remove the rotation tray shaft.
Remove the paper feed rotation tray.
(1) Paper feed tray unit of DSPF unit
2
a
6) Disconnect the connector. Remove the pawl, and remove the

DSPF document width sensor.
Parts
a DSPF document width sensor

paper feed tray unit.
b. Paper feed unit

2
a. DSPF document width sensor

3) Remove the paper feed tray unit.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed tray lower. Dis- Parts
connect the connector. a DSPF paper feed clutch

2 2) Remove the rear cabinet.
1 3) Remove the paper feed cover.
4) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle. Remove the
snap band.

2 ‘13/Nov
2 5) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed unit. (2) Transport section
a
b
c
c. DSPF paper feed clutch

Parts
2) Remove the rear cabinet. a DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch
3) Remove the paper feed cover. b DSPF transport roller clutch
4) Remove the paper feed unit. c DSPF No.2 registration roller clutch
5) Remove the pawl, and remove the paper feed PG upper cover.
a. DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the clutch stopper (a), and
remove the DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch (b).
* When assembling, check to insure that the clutch rotation stop-
per is engaged with the plate.
2
paper feed PG upper supporting plate.
1
1
b. DSPF transport roller clutch

Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the DSPF transport
roller clutch.
7) Remove the E-ring and the bearing. Lift the paper feed roller
shaft diagonally, and remove the DSPF paper feed clutch.
3
2
1

2 ‘13/Nov
2 c. DSPF No.2 registration roller clutch

1) Remove the rear cabinet. 4) Remove the screw, and remove the drive unit.
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the clutch stopper (a), and
remove the DSPF No.2 registration roller clutch (b).
b
2
a
a. DSPF paper feed motor

(3) Drive unit 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Disconnect the connector, and open the edge saddle. Remove
the screw, and remove the DSPF paper feed motor.
a
b
c
Parts
a DSPF paper feed motor
b DSPF paper exit motor
c DSPF lift-up motor

2) Remove the DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch.
b. DSPF paper exit motor
the snap band.
the screw, and remove the DSPF paper exit motor.

2 ‘13/Nov
2 c. DSPF lift-up motor a. DSPF transport motor

1) Remove the rear cabinet. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Disconnect the connector, and open the edge saddle. Remove 2) Loosen the screw, and loosen the belt tension. Tighten the
the screw, and remove the DSPF lift-up motor. screw.
(4) Drive transport unit
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screw. Remove the

a
DSPF transport motor.
Parts
a DSPF transport motor

2) Remove the DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch.
3) Remove the DSPF transport roller clutch. (5) Others
4) Remove the DSPF cooling fan motor.
5) Loosen the screw, and loosen the belt tension. Tighten the a
screw.
c
6) Remove the screw, and remove the drive transport unit.

Parts
a DSPF cooling fan motor
b DSPF driver PWB
c DSPF control PWB

2 ‘13/Nov
2 a. DSPF cooling fan motor 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screw. Remove the
1) Remove the rear cabinet. DSPF control PWB.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the DSPF cooling fan
motor.
b. DSPF driver PWB C. RSPF unit

DSPF driver PWB.
d
c
b
a
e
Parts
a Reverse clutch
b PS clutch
c Paper feed motor
d Transport motor
e Pressure release solenoid
f RSPF driver PWB
c. DSPF control PWB 1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.

[Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screw. Remove the
earth wire. Remove the snap band. Remove the screw, and
control PWB unit.
remove the harness cover and the locking band.

3) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
4) Open the RSPF unit until it is upright. Remove the screw, and
slide the RSPF unit to the rear side. Fit the step screw with the
key hole of the hinge and remove the RSPF unit. 4) Remove the harness from the wire saddle, and disconnect the
connector. Remove the screw, and remove the grounding wire.
Remove the screw, and remove the holder. Remove the docu-
ment tray.
(1) Reverse clutch

1) Open the paper feed unit. Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire.
2) Remove the screw. Disengage the pawls (2 positions) of the

front cabinet by inserting a minus screwdriver under the base
tray, and remove the front cabinet.
6) Remove the screw, and remove the transport unit.

7) Remove the E-ring, and remove the reverse clutch. 4) Remove the belt from the paper feed motor. Remove the
NOTE: screw, and remove the shield plate and the paper feed motor.
When installing, engage the rotation-stopper of the clutch NOTE:
with the frame. Do not use the attached harness. Use the original harness.
If the motor harness needs replacement, order the harness
shown in the parts guide.
(2) PS clutch (4) Transport motor

1) Remove the transport unit. 1) Remove the reverse clutch.
2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the PS clutch. 2) Remove the PS clutch.
NOTE: 3) Remove the drive frame.
When installing, attach the rotation-stopper of the clutch to 4) Remove the screw, and remove the transport motor.
the frame.
(5) Pressure release solenoid

(3) Paper feed motor 1) Remove the rear cabinet of the RSPF unit.
1) Remove the reverse clutch. 2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the
2) Remove the PS clutch. harness from the edge saddle. Remove the solenoid unit.
3) Loosen the belt tensioning screw to allow belt removal. NOTE:
Remove the screw, and remove the drive frame. When installing, insert the solenoid pin into the slit of the
lever.

3) Remove the screw, and remove the pressure release solenoid. 2) Move the lamp unit to the notch section of the scanner base-
NOTE: plate.
When installing, insert the solenoid pin into the long hole of
the frame.
3) Turn up the sheet.

(6) RSPF driver PWB * When returning the sheet to the original position, put the L-
1) Remove the rear cabinet of the RSPF unit. shape sections on the both ends into the inside of the plate
and attach the center portion to the plate with double-stick
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the
tape.
PWB supporter. Remove the RSPF driver PWB.
4) Remove the lamp guide, and disconnect the connector from

the LED driver PWB.
D. Scanner unit
(1) LED PWB/LED driver PWB 1
2
1) Remove the glass holder (B), the table glass (C), and the SPF
glass (A).
5) Remove the LED driver, and disconnect the connector from

the LED PWB.
1 2

6) Remove the harness holder, and remove the flat cable from (5) Document detection light emitting PWB
the LED driver PWB. Remove the LED driver PWB. 1) Remove the upper cabinet rear.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the light emitting unit.
1
2
4
3
(2) CCD unit

1) Remove the dark box cover. Disconnect the connector, and 3) Remove the document detection light emitting PWB.
remove the CCD unit.
E. Manual paper feed unit

(3) Scanner motor (1) Temperature and humidity sensor/Manual paper
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
feed tray paper width detector
rear. 1) Remove the manual paper feed tray unit.
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the scanner motor. 2) Remove the MF tray upper inside cover.
1
3) Disengage the pawl, lift the MF tray upper and MF tray 2, and
disconnect the connector.
(4) Document detection light receiving PWB

1
1) Remove the operation base plate.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the document detection
light receiving PWB.
2

4) Remove the temperature and humidity sensor. (3) Paper pickup solenoid
1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
5) Remove the manual paper feed tray paper width detector.
3) Remove each part, and remove the transport roller 12 (drive).
1
2
(2) Manual paper feed gate solenoid

1
1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
4) Remove each part, and remove the MF drive plate.
1
3) Disconnect the connector, and disengage the pawl, and
remove the manual paper feed gate solenoid.
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the MF front plate.

2 ‘13/Nov
6) Remove the MF upper base paper guide unit. F. Duplex unit
(2)-b
(1)-d
(1)-a
(1)-c
(2)-a
(1)-b
(1)
7) Remove the MF upper guide supporting plate.

Unit Parts
(1) Right door a RD I/F PWB
unit b Manual paper feed clutch
c Right paper exit gate
d ADU gate solenoid
(2) Others a ADU motor lower
b ADU motor upper
8) Remove the paper pickup solenoid.
(1) Right door unit
2) Remove the right door unit.

a. RD I/F PWB 5) Remove the manual paper feed clutch.
2) Remove the connector cover. Remove the ADU inner cover.
c. Right paper exit gate

2) Remove the connector cover ADU inner cover.
3) Remove the ADU cabinet R.
4) Remove the ADU cabinet F.
5) Remove the lock block, and disengage the right door lock
pawl. Remove the right door release lever.
6) Remove the E-ring, and the ADU gate.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the RD I/F PWB.
1
b. Manual paper feed clutch d. ADU gate solenoid

1) Remove the right door. 1) Open the right door.
2) Remove the connector cover and the ADU inner cover. 2) Remove the connector cover ADU inner cover.
3) Remove the ADU cabinet R. 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the ADU gate solenoid
unit.
Remove the ADU gate solenoid.
4) Remove the MF drive connection plate. Disconnect the con-

nector. Remove the manual paper feed clutch unit. 1

(2) Others a. Paper exit cooling fan motor
a. ADU motor lower 1) Remove the paper exit unit.
1) Remove the rear cabinet. 2) Remove the exhaust fan duct.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper exit cooling

fan motor.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the ADU motor lower.
* When installing, be sure to note the fan direction.
G. Paper exit unit

b. Shifter motor
(1) Paper exit unit 1) Remove the paper exit unit.
1) Remove the screw, the upper cabinet right, and the right con- 2) Remove the harness from the saddle (A) and the saddle (B).
necting cabinet. Remove the screw, and remove the earth terminal. Disconnect
2) Remove the fusing unit. the connectors and remove the snap band.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit unit, and dis-
connect the connector.
1 B

3) Remove the shifter motor unit. Remove the gear. d. Fusing drive motor
1) Remove the paper exit unit.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, and then
remove the fusing drive motor.
* When installing, place the paper exit roller SP pin in the gear
slit.
Engage the bar ring of the shifter motor unit with the gear. e. Paper exit drive motor
4) Remove the screws, and remove the shifter motor.
f. ADU motor upper
1) Remove the paper exit unit.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, and
remove the paper exit drive motor (A), and the ADU motor
upper (B).
c. Fusing web cleaning motor

1) Remove the paper exit unit. B
2) Remove the exhaust fan duct.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, and then
remove the fusing web cleaning motor.
B A
* Be careful to install the motors in the proper direction.

* When installing, attach the belt as shown below.

H. Development unit 2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the waste toner drive unit.
(1) Density sensor
1) Remove the developing unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV guide.
Remove the screw, and disconnect the connector.
Remove the density sensor.
3) Remove the screw and the spring, and remove the waste toner
box instillation lever.
Disconnect the connector and disengage the pawl. Remove
the waste toner full detection switch.
I. Drum unit
b
a
Parts
a Waste toner drive motor J. Transfer section
b Waste toner full detection switch
(1) Waste toner drive motor

1) Remove the frame cover.
the waste toner drive unit.
a
Remove the screw, and remove the waste toner drive motor
from he waste toner drive unit.
Parts
a Process control shutter solenoid
1) Remove the developing unit (K).

2) Remove the drum unit (K).
3) Remove the registration roller unit.
(2) Waste toner full detection switch

1) Remove the frame cover.

4) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the 3) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove
pro-reg sensor unit. the filter box unit.
4) Remove the screw and remove the duct harness cover. Dis-
(1) Process control shutter solenoid connect the connector.
1) Remove the pro-reg sensor unit.
2) Remove the screw. Disconnect the connector, and remove the
process control shutter solenoid.
* When installing, engage the process control shutter solenoid
with the groove section of the shutter mounting plate (A).
5) Remove the screw, and remove the ozone air inlet duct A.
K. LSU section
6) Remove the screw, and remove the ozone air inlet duct B.
Parts
a LSU shutter solenoid 1
(1) LSU shutter solenoid 1

2) Remove the MC PWB.

7) Remove the LSU. 3) Open the fusing rear lower PG unit, remove the screw, and
8) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove remove the fusing cover.
the LSU shutter solenoid unit.
2
1
* When installing, insert the projected section (A) of the sole-
noid arm into the hole in the lever link arm.
9) Remove the screw and the spring, and remove the LSU shut-
ter solenoid.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing cover.
* When installing, engage the solenoid pin (A) with the shutter
lever arm.
L. Fusing unit
(1) Upper heater lamp, Upper thermostat
2) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing transport unit. 5) Remove the fusing rear lower PG unit.
NOTE:
When installing the fusing rear lower PG unit, be careful of
the direction and the installing position of the U-shape
hooks of IN (A) and OUT (B) of the rear lower return spring.
A
B
A
A B

2 ‘13/Nov
6) Remove the screw, and remove the paper guide. Disconnect NOTE:
the connector. When installing the upper heater lamp, be careful of the
direction of the convex section of the upper heater lamp.
9) Remove the screw, and remove the E-ring, the gear, the fusing
roller bearing, and the support plate.
2
7) Remove the screw, and remove the drive plate, and remove
the gear.
10) Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum plate, and remove
the fusing belt unit.
8) Remove the spring, and remove the screw. Remove the

holder, and remove the upper heater lamp.
11) Remove the screw, and remove the terminal. Remove the
upper thermostat.
* Install so that the caulked section of the terminal faces
upward.

(2) Lower thermostat M. Fusing unit 2
2) Remove the fusing transport unit.
3) Remove the fusing cover.
4) Remove the fusing rear lower paper guide.
5) Remove the screw, and remove the terminal. Remove the
lower thermostat.
* Install so that the caulked section of the terminal faces
upward.
Parts
a Fusing pressure release motor
(1) Fusing pressure release motor

1) Remove the front cabinet upper.
(3) Lower heater lamp 2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
1) Remove the fusing unit. the fusing pressure release motor unit.
2) Remove the fusing transport unit.
3) Remove the fusing cover.
4) Remove the fusing rear lower paper guide.
5) Remove the drive plate.
6) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw, and remove the
sensor holder.
NOTE:
When assembling, place the actuator tip on the outside of
the web sheet.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing pressure release

motor.
7) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw, remove the

holder, and remove the lower heater lamp.

MX-5141N
[11] Service Manual
VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING
1. HDD/SD card memory map
A. HDD partition
HDD size = 320GB (Actual size 289GB)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 [GB]
0 [L-1] 0.3GB [S-1] 7GB [I-1] 100GB
Outer
track
10
90
100 [I-2] 10GB
110 [I-3] 10GB
[S-2]
120 [I-4] 1GB [L-2] 1GB
0.2G
[S-5] B
130 [S-3] 4GB [S-4] 2GB
0.5G
[S-6] 2GB [S-7] 2GB
B
140 [S-8] 16GB
150 [S-9] 4GB
160 [S-10] 4GB [S-11] 120GB
170
270
280 [S-12] 8GB
Inner 290 [L-3] 1GB

track
[GB]
B. HDD data contents

No File system Stored data NOTE
L-1 Not available
e-manual
S-1 Universal
Watermark
I-1 Image data Image data (ERDH/Document filing) 3000 documents, 20000 images
I-2 Image data Image data (Temporary storage) 1000 documents, 10000 images
I-3 Image data User watermark/Stamp 1000 documents, 10000 images
I-4 Image data FAX/Internet FAX receive images 3000 documents, 5000 images
L-2 Not available System storage data
S-2 Universal System storage data (for backup)
Download font
User profile
S-3 Universal User macro
storage data
System setting data
S-4 Universal System log
Document filing (Database)
S-5 Universal Job log (Database)
Job completion list
Address book (Database)
Account information (Database)
S-6 Universal
Direct WEB browsing setting information
OSA application cookie file
S-7 Universal Database file
S-8 Universal Spool area for printer
MX-5141N VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 1

No File system Stored data NOTE
S-9 Universal Application work area (User file used in SMB direct print
S-10 Universal eOSA application file
S-11 Universal User file saved in the SMB server
Data backup when installing DSK Address book Account
S-12 Universal
information
L-3 Not available RAID system information
C. CF card partition
CF card size = 8GB (Actual size 7.8GB)
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 ;-"=
0 [L-201] 7080MB
7 [S-201] 512MB [S-203] 200MB
;'"=
D. CF card data contents

No. File system Stored data NOTE
ICU firmware (Boot/Main)
Log data
L-201 Universal
Snapshot
Swap area
font
web help
S-201 Universal
spdl
Option FontROM
S-203 Universal System setting value data file
E. SD card partition
SD card size = 4GB (Actual size 3.6GB)
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 ;-"=
0 [L-101] 500MB [I-101] 500MB
;'"=
F. SD card data contents

No. File system Stored data NOTE
L-101 Not available ICU (Reus) firmware (Boot/Main)
I-101 Image data FAX/ Internet FAX receive images backup

2. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB, HDD, SD Card and CF Card
A. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)
IMPORTANT:
Registered user information will not be recovered if the MFP PWB is affected by U2-05 trouble. (*1)
1) Attach the flash ROM, the memory, the EEPROM, the SD card etc. of the MFP PWB on the service parts MFP PWB and install it to the
main unit.
IMPORTANT:
Ground your body with grounding band during the work.
2) When U2 trouble occurs, use SIM16 to cancel it.
3) Set as follows after restarting the main unit.
At this timing, F6-21 may occur. Whether it may occur or not, go to execute procedure 1.
(1) Set the appropriate country code by Sim66-02 (clear the software switches related to FAX).
IMPORTANT:
Make sure to execute even if the fax option is not installed on the machine.
B. Procedures necessary for HDD replacement

Note for HDD replacement
- Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data backup is possible before
replacement, perform data backup and then replace the HDD.
- If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up.
- The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD.
Contents of this chapter
- HDD storage data and backup
- Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be backed up
- Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD
- Reinstall and update procedures of Operation Manual data saved in HDD
- Reinstall and update procedures of watermark data.

(1) HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other data cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other storage
data cannot.
If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the
HDD storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD.
a. HDD storage data list
Before installation After installation Enable/ Enable/

Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (When shipping (After use by Disable of Backup means Disable of
procedures operator
from the factory) users) data backup data reinstall
1 e-Manual Available Available Disable *1 Enable Sim49-3 Service
2 Address book Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
3 Image send series Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
registration data (Sender’s Device cloning / Device cloning /
information, meta data, etc.) Storage backup Storage backup
4 User authentication Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 Enable Sim56-2 Service
Account management
5 Japanese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable ?
(Learning)
6 Chinese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable ?
(Learning)
7 JOB LOG Not available Available Enable Perform with Disable ?
WEB PAGE.
8 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable Not available Disable ?
9 New N/A (FSS) information Not available Available Disable Not available Disable ?
10 User font (Added) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
WEB PAGE. or User
11 User macro Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE.
12 Document filing Not available Available Enable Perform with Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE. WEB PAGE.
13 Some of system setting Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
data Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
14 Watermark Available Available Disable *2 Enable Sim49-5 Service
15 User color profile Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
WEB PAGE.
16 Mirroring information (When Not available Available Disable Not available Enable The mirroring Service
the mirroring kit is installed, (After installation information is
the mirroring information is of the mirroring erased by
written.) kit) forcible build or
RIB BUSTER.
17 Individual setting Not available Available Disable Disable Service
information for direct WEB
browsing
18 Cookie file for OSA Not available Available Disable Disable Service
application
19 eOSA application file Not available Installation of Disable Enable Reinstallation of Service
application application
20 User file saved in the SMB Not available Available Disable Disable Service
server (NAS)
*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-3 and USB memory.
*2: Watermark data cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-5 and USB memory.

(2) Replacement procedures when HDD data can be (3) Replacement procedures when the HDD storage
backed up data cannot be backed up due to breakdown
a. Work contents and procedures a. Display when HDD breakdown
When a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03
When a new HDD
is popped up.
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD
is normal but a program model) is used * must be replaced.
error occurs in it is used.
b. Work contents and procedures
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement.
(Servicing) When a new HDD
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup (blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same
memory.) is normal but a program model) is used *
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 error occurs in it is used.
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
Step 1 Install a HDD to the machine, Install a HDD to the
authentication data))
and boot the complex machine. machine, and boot the
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User Formatting is automatically complex machine.
or servicing) performed.
Back up the data to PC with Web page.
Step 2 The trouble code, U2-05,
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 7, 10, 14
is displayed. Cancel
(Document filing data, JOB LOG data))
with SIM16.
Step 3 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use
Step 3 Since a blank HDD is Use Sim62-1 to format
SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to
automatically formatted, there the HDD.
the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file
is no need to perform
type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup
formatting procedure with SIM.
data are given to the user.)
Step 4 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use
Step 4 Replace the HDD.
SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to
Step 5 Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file
Formatting is automatically machine. type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup
performed. data are given to the user.)
Step 6 The trouble code, U2-05, Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The
is displayed. Cancel memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
with SIM16. the HDD data and the image related memory and to
Step 7 Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
automatically formatted, there the HDD. only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet
is no need to perform Fax models.)
formatting procedure with SIM. Step 6 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
Step 8 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The Step 7 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed. Use SIM49-5 to
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between install the watermark data to the HDD. After booting the
the HDD data and the image related memory and to machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
Fax models.) shipping.
Step 9 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
Step 10 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed. Use SIM49-5 to
install the watermark data to the HDD. After booting the
machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
Step 11 Import the data backed up in Step 1.
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup
to import.
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
authentication data))
Step 12 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in
Step 2.
Import enable data: Document filing data, User font, Use
macro
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
imported.)

(4) Reinstall and update procedures of the HDD (5) Watermark data reinstall and update procedures
storage Operation Manual data 1) Obtain the watermark data.
1) Obtain the Operation Manual data. Download the watermark data from the utility menu on the web
Download the Operation Manual data from the utility menu on site (Tech-DS home page).
the web site (Tech-DS home page). Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing
Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing the file hierarchy.
the file hierarchy. NOTE:
For the above models, there is only one file (**.uar). When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if
NOTE: there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are
When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which
there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD.
compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which - The file size is different.
satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD. - The time stamp is different.
The file size is different. - The file exists only in the USB memory.
The time stamp is different. 2) Enter the SIM49-5 mode.
The file exists only in the USB memory.

IMPORTANT: ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installed to :$7(50$5.83'$7(>XVEEG@

',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
another machine. If installed, the adjustment data will be over- ),/( ',5!)2/'(5
written and a trouble may be generated. ',5!:0

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 12 &/26(
(0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
',5!0$18$/

3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.

- When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STOR-
ANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK]
button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu

1.
4) Select the folder of the watermark data. (The screen shifts to
3) Insert the USB memory into the machine. the watermark data install menu.)
- When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STOR- The current version and the update version are displayed.
ANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] 5) Press [EXECUTE] button.
button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu [EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
1. are changed from gray-out to active display.
4) Select the folder of the Operation Manual data. (The screen 6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected watermark data
shifts to the Operation Manual data install menu.) are installed.
The current version and the update version are displayed. When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case
5) Press [EXECUTE] button. of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
are changed from gray-out to active display.
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected Operation Manual
is installed.
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case
of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.

C. Procedures necessary for SD card replacement
(1) SD card data and backup
Some SD card storage data can be backed up, and some other cannot. Some SD card storage data can be reinstalled, and some other cannot.
If the SD card operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the SD card referring
to the storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the SD card.
The SD card includes the following data.
SD card backup
Partition Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Data reinstall

Stored data Backup means
number of data backup of data reinstall procedures
L-101 ICU firmware data ICU firmware (Boot/Main) Disable Enable SIM49-1
lang.sfu (BOOT cannot be
graph.sfu installed again.)
Boot animation
Boot (CN)
ARM9 firmware
I-101 FAX reception data FAX/Internet Fax reception image Enable SIM66-62 Disable
data
1) When there are some FAX/Internet Fax data received, use 4) Use SIM66-10 to clear the image send memory. (This is in
SIM66-62 to backup the image data to the USB memory in the order to obtain consistency between the HDD data and the
PDF file type, and give the PDF file to the user. (The data can- image related memory.)
not be restored to the machine.) IMPORTANT:
2) Replace the SD card with a new one. When replacing the SD card, be sure to use only the specified SD
3) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. card supplied as a service part.
D. Procedures necessary for CF card replacement

Some CF card storage data can be backed up, and some other cannot. Some CF card storage data can be reinstalled, and some other cannot.
If the CF card operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the CF card referring
to the storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the CF card.
CF card backup
No. File Stored data NOTE

system
ICU firmware (Boot/Main)
Log data
L-201 Universal
Snapshot
Swap area
font
web help
S-201 Universal
spdl
Option FontROM
S-203 Universal System setting value data file
1) Use SIM56-2 to back up the CF card data to the USB flash

drive.
2) Back up the CF card data by the device cloning function when
the operation panel screen is customized..
3) Replace the CF card with a new one.
4) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
5) Use SIM56-02 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).
6) Restore the data backed up in procedure 2) by using the
device cloning function.

3. Necessary works and notes for replacement of the mirroring kit HDD
NOTE:
Terminology and contents
Mirroring information: When the mirroring kit is installed and the power is turned ON, the mirroring information is written into the L-2 partition of
the both HDD's.
Rebuilding: Copying operation of the whole contents of one HDD to the other HDD.
Forcible rebuilding: Erasing the mirroring information in the HDD and rewriting new information.
When the mirroring kit is installed, the two HDD's are named HDD1 and HDD2.
HDD1: Mirroring kit HDD
HDD2: Standard HDD for the machine
The status of each HDD can be checked with SIM62-20.
Outline / Description Items
Kinds of errors and remedies A. Causes and remedies when the icon of HDD trouble is displayed
B. Causes and remedies when the E7-03 error display is popped up
Specified remedies for each error C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the mirroring kit or that of the machine
(Details of remedies and procedures) D. Replacement procedures of both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the machine
E. Note for reuse of HDD
Mirroring kit status and status icons

When the mirroring kit is installed, one of the following icons is displayed on the operation panel.
Icon Mirroring kit status
Mirroring kit installed
Mirroring kit/HDD trouble
Mirroring kit/Rebuilding
A. Causes and remedies when the icon of HDD trouble is displayed

(When the icon shown below is displayed)
Display screen
1) When one HDD goes into trouble, the UI icon which indicates HDD trouble of the mirroring kit is displayed.
2) Use SIM62-20 to check the HDD status, and refer to the table below to confirm the relation between the HDD status and the remedy.
SIM62-20 status and causes of troubles (When the icon of HDD trouble is displayed)
HDD2
OK NONE REBUILDING ERROR TROUBLE
HDD1 OK - A - A A
NONE A - - - -
REBUILDING - - - - -
ERROR A - - - -
TROUBLE A - - - -
3) Refer to the table below and check to confirm the remedy.

Table: Causes of troubles and remedies when the icon of HDD trouble is displayed
Case State Cause Remedy

A One HDD status is OK. - The HDD which indicates the status other than - Replace the HDD. (Perform "C. Replacement procedures of the
The other HDD status is other OK is in trouble. HDD of the mirroring kit or that of the machine")
than OK. - Connection failure of the connectors and - Replace the mirroring kit. (Perform "C. Replacement procedures
harness of the mirroring kit of the HDD of the mirroring kit or that of the machine")
4) Refer to the details of the remedy and perform the necessary procedures.

B. Causes and remedies when the E7-03 error display is popped up
1) Use SIM62-20 to check the HDD status, and refer to the table below to confirm the relation between the HDD status and the remedy.
Refer to the table of "Causes of troubles and remedies when the E7-03 error occurs" and perform the necessary procedures.
Backup the data from the HDD without trouble first.
SIM62-20 status and causes of troubles
HDD2
OK NONE REBUILDING ERROR TROUBLE
HDD1 OK B B or C B B B
NONE B or C C C C C
REBUILDING B C F F F
ERROR B C F F F
TROUBLE B C F F D or E
2) Refer to the table below, and check to confirm the remedy.

Causes of troubles and remedies when the E7-03 error occurs

B When at least one HDD is - Communication trouble through the SATA - Replace the cable. Remove and connect.
OK. harness of HDD. - Replace the HDD which indicates other than OK. (Perform
- Trouble of HDD which indicates the status procedures of "C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the
other than OK. mirroring kit or that of the machine.")
- Broken data in HDD - Replace both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the
- The mirroring side HDD is normal. The machine. (Perform procedures of "D. Replacement procedures of
machine side HDD is in trouble or rebuild both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the machine.")
operation is not completed.
- RAID PWB trouble
C When at least one HDD is - Communication trouble through the SATA - Replace the cable. Remove and connect.
NONE. harness of HDD. - Check connection between the mirroring kit and the HDD.
- Connection failure between the RAID PWB - Replace the HDD which indicates NONE. (Perform procedures of
and the HDD. "C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the mirroring kit or
- HDD trouble that of the machine.")
- HDD SATA harness and connector trouble - Replace the mirroring kit. (Perform procedures of
- Both the mirroring side HDD and the machine "C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the mirroring kit or
side HDD are in trouble. that of the machine.")
- RAID PWB trouble - Replace both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the
machine. (Perform procedures of "D. Replacement procedures of
both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the machine.")
D When in TROUBLE- - RAID PWB trouble - Replace the mirroring kit. (Perform procedures of
TROUBLE. - (Both or one) HDD trouble "C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the mirroring kit or
- Raid PWB is in trouble. The mirroring side that of the machine.")
HDD is normal. The machine side HDD is - Replace both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the
other than OK. machine. (Perform procedures of "D. Replacement procedures of
E When in TROUBLE- - The mirroring kit is composed of HDD's which - Replace both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the
TROUBLE. (Occurring when have different mirroring information each other. machine. (Perform procedures of "D. Replacement procedures of
replacing the HDD) (A HDD which has been used in the mirroring both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the machine.")
kit of another machine is used.)
3) Refer to the details of the remedy and perform the necessary procedures.
Causes and remedies when cases B, C, D, and E are not applicable

F Other than cases B, C, D, - RAID PWB trouble - Replace the mirroring kit. (Perform procedures of
and E - Both HDD's trouble "C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the mirroring kit or
that of the machine.")
- Replace both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the
machine. (Perform procedures of "D. Replacement procedures of

C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the D. Replacement procedures of both of the HDD of
mirroring kit or that of the machine the mirroring kit and that of the machine
(Details of the remedies and the procedures) (Details of the remedies and the procedures)
- When replacing the mirroring kit, follow the replacement proce- (1) Work contents and procedures
dures of the HDD of the mirroring kit only.
Data backup
(1) Work contents and procedures
Step 1 When there is some received data of FAX and Internet FAX,
Data backup use SIM66-62 to back up the image data from the SD card
NOTE: to a USB memory. (The backed up image data are in the
When E7-03 error code is popped up, procedures of Step 1 and PDF file type and cannot be returned to the machine.) Give
the backed up data to the use.
Step 2 are nor required.
Step 1 Back up the data in the HDD before replacement. (By HDD replacement procedures
servicing) Procedure Procedure
Use SIM56-2, the device cloning, or the storage backup Condition When two new HDD's (blank)(*1) (service part) are used for
function to save the data. (Back up the data to the PC or a the both.
USB memory.)
Step 2 Replace the both HDD's (as well as the RAID PWB if
(Data which can be backed up: Address book data, image
necessary). (*2)
send registration data, user authentication data)
Step 3 Set DIPSW2 of the mirroring
Step 2 Back up the data in the HDD before replacement. (By the
kit to ON, and turn on the
user or by servicing)
main power of the machine.
Back up the data to the PC by Web page.
Forcible rebuilding is
(Data which can be backed up: Document filing data, JOB
executed.
log data)
Check to confirm that the
Step 3 When there is some received data of FAX and Internet FAX, E7-03 error (HDD trouble)
use SIM66-62 to back up the image data from the SD card does not occur and that the UI
to a USB memory. (The backed up image data are in the icon which indicates
PDF file type and cannot be returned to the machine.) Give installation of the mirroring kit is displayed. Use SIM62-20 to
the backed up data to the use. confirm that the HDD status is displayed as HDD1/
HDD2=OK/OK.
HDD replacement procedures
Step 4 Turn OFF the main power of
Procedure Procedure the machine, and set DIPSW2
Condition When a new HDD (blank)(*1) (service part) is used. to OFF. Then, turn ON the
Step 4 If HDD1 is in trouble, replace the HDD of the mirroring kit. If main power of the machine
HDD2 is in trouble, replace the HDD of the machine. (*2) again.
Step 5 Boot the machine. Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory
Rebuilding is automatically executed. is cleared in order to ensure consistency between the HDD
Check to confirm that E7-03 error (HDD trouble) does not data and the image memory and to prevent against
occur, and that the UI icon which indicates rebuilding of the malfunctions. (Not only the FAX model, but also the scanner
mirroring kit is displayed. Use SIM 62-20 to confirm that the and the Internet FAX models require memory clearing.)
status of the replaced HDD is displayed as REBUILDING. Step 6 Use SIM49-3 to install the e-Operation Manual data to the
Step 6 It takes about one hour to complete rebuilding. HDD.
Step 7 Check to confirm that the UI icon which indicated installation Step 7 The trouble code "U2-60" is displayed.
of the mirroring unit is displayed. Use SIM62-20 to confirm Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data to the HDD.
that the HDD status is displayed as HDD1/HDD2=OK/OK. Use SIM16 to cancel the U2-60 error.
E. Note for reuse of HDD

When replacing the HDD for the mirroring kit, be sure to use a new
HDD.
If a HDD which has been used in a mirroring kit is used for replac-
ing the HDD, the operations and the data cannot be assured.
If a HDD which has been used in a mirroring kit is installed, the
original data may be erased.
If, however, the mirroring information of the HDD is erased by RIB
Buster as described later, it can be used. (*1) In addition, if the both
HDD's are replaced with HDD's which have been used, SIIM62-1
must be executed to format HDD's in addition to erasing the mirror-
ing information.
When removing the HDD after installing the mirroring kit, be sure to
remove the both HDD's together.
If only one HDD is removed then it is reinstalled, the data of both
HDD's may not be identical, causing an error.
When removing the HDD and performing some work, first discon-
nect the HDD SATA connector of the MFP PWB and perform the
work.
With the above procedure, the both HDD's are brought into the sta-
tus disconnected from the machine.
Put mark on the mirroring kit HDD and the machine HDD to indi-
cate that they have been used. (*2)
*1: Refer to "5-C. Deleting the HDD mirroring information."
*2: Refer to "5-B. How to check the usage history of a HDD in a
mirroring kit."

4. Note for installing and repairing the mirroring kit
When installing or repairing the mirroring kit, fully understand the following descriptions to avoid erroneous handling and procedures. When a
HDD which has once been used for the mirroring kit is reused without proper preparation, it may cause an error and destruction of user data, or
other troubles.
The following three cases must be strictly avoided.
? When newly installing a mirroring kit, do not use one which has been once used.
? When replacing the HDD because of a HDD trouble, do not replace it with a HDD which has been once used in a mirroring kit.
? When replacing the HDD because of a HDD trouble in the machine, do not replace it with a HDD which has been once used in a mirroring kit.
NOTE:
When a HDD is once used in a mirroring kit, the mirroring information is written into the HDD. This causes a trouble by erroneous using.
The details of inhibited items, results of erroneous procedures, and precautions for avoiding those errors are described below.
A. Details of inhibited items

(1) When newly installing a mirroring kit, do not use one which has been once used.
Trouble contents
If HDD1 which has been once used is used for new installation of a mirroring kit, the data in HDD1 will be written into HDD2. This causes era-
sion of the original user data, freeze of the machine, or other troubles. The "HDD which has been once used" includes a HDD which was just
installed and conducted only.
Before installation of the mirroring kit Rebuild
Mirroring kit which has been once used

MFP control RAID PWB
PWB MFP control RAID
PWB controller
Data
User data overwriting
Rebuild start during
rebuilding
No mirroring Mirroring Mirroring

information information A information A
HDD1 HDD2
HDD
Mirroring kit side Machine side
Machine side
Approx. after 1 hour
Installation of a mirroring kit which has been once used

Rebuild complete → The HDD1 data is overwritten into the user data
Mirroring kit which has been once used area of HDD2.
RAID PWB Mirroring kit which has been once used
MFP control RAID RAID PWB
PWB controller MFP control RAID
PWB controller
User data
Mirroring No mirroring
information A information Mirroring Mirroring
information A information A
HDD1 HDD2 HDD1 HDD2
Mirroring kit side Machine side Mirroring kit side Machine side
Boot → The mirroring information is written.
Since HDD1 acts as the master, the HDD1

Mirroring kit which has been once used
data is overwritten into HDD2, erasing the
RAID PWB
MFP control user data of HDD2.
PWB RAID
controller
Since the mirroring User

information area in data
HDD2 is empty, the write
mirroring information is
Mirroring Mirroring
written into it. information A information A
HDD1 HDD2
Countermeasures
Use a new mirroring kit for installation.
If there is no choice but to use a mirroring kit which has been once used, be sure to erase the mirroring information in the HDD before installa-
tion. (For details, refer to "5-C. Deleting the HDD mirroring information.")

(2) When replacing the HDD in case of a trouble in the HDD, do not use a HDD which has been used in another
mirroring kit of another machine.
Trouble contents
If a HDD which has been used in another mirroring kit, the RAID controller cannot recognize the HDD, causing E7-03 error, and the necessary
data may be destructed in some cases.
A HDD which has been used in a

HDD trouble mirroring kit is installed.
Mirroring kit
Mirroring kit RAID PWB
RAID PWB
MFP control RAID
MFP control RAID PWB controller
PWB controller
User data User data

Used
User data
Trouble
Mirroring Mirroring
Mirroring Mirroring information X information A
HDD1 HDD2 HDD1 HDD2

Mirroring kit side Machine side Mirroring kit side Machine side
Removing the HDD in trouble The RAID controller cannot recognize both HDD's.
Mirroring kit Mirroring kit

RAID PWB RAID PWB
MFP control MFP control RAID

RAID
PWB controller PWB controller
??????
Remove.
User data
User data User data
Trouble
Mirroring Mirroring Mirroring Mirroring
information A information A information X information A
HDD1 HDD2
HDD1 HDD2
Since the mirroring information of both HDD's

does not synchronize each other, the RAID
controller cannot recognize both HDD's.
→E7-03 error occurs.
The user data may be erased and the machine
may freeze in some cases.
Countermeasures

(3) When the HDD is replaced because of a HDD trouble, do not use a HDD which has been used in a mirroring kit of
another machine.
Trouble contents
In the case of a machine produced before March/2011
If a HDD which has been used in another mirroring kit is installed, the operation and the data safety cannot be assured. If a HDD which has
been used in another mirroring kit is installed, the original data may be erased.
Support from production of May/2011.
E7-A5 error occurs. If a HDD which has been used in a mirroring kit is used as the machine HDD, the machine does not operate normally.
In this case, the trouble of erasing the original data is avoided.
Remove the mirroring kit from the machine.
Mirroring kit
RAID PWB
MFP control RAID
PWB controller
Remove. User data User data
Mirroring Mirroring
HDD1 HDD2
Mirroring kit side MFP main unit side
Boot → The error message is displayed.
MFP control
PWB
User data
E7-A5 error occurs.
Mirroring The machine cannot be operated.
information A
HDD
MFP main unit side
Countermeasures
When a HDD is used without any other HDD, the mirroring information must be erased before executing SIM62-1 to format.
This procedure allows the HDD being treated as a new HDD.
When removing the HDD after installation of the mirroring kit, remove both HDD's simultaneously. If only one HDD is removed and then
installed again, the data of both HDD's may not match, causing a trouble.
[Simultaneous removal of both HDD's] Disconnect the HDD SATA connector of the MFP PWB, and both HDD's are brought into disconnected
state from the machine.

B. How to check the usage history of a HDD in a IMPORTANT:
mirroring kit When removing or attaching a HDD to the HDD case, be sure
As stated before, when installing a mirroring kit or replacing a HDD, to disconnect the USB cable from the PC in advance.
be sure to check the usage history of a HDD or a mirroring kit which If this precaution is ignored, the HDD may be damaged.
is to be used. 2) Copy the RIB Buster software files (RIB Buster {YYYYM-
For convenience of checking the usage history, put a mark on the MDD}.exe and Setup.ini) to a same directory of the PC.
mirroring kit HDD and the machine HDD when installing them to ? RIB Buster{YYYYMMDD}.exe
indicate that they have been used. ? Setup.ini
3) Connect the PC and the USB HDD case unit assembled in
procedure 1) with the USB cable.
C. Deleting the HDD mirroring information

Be deleting the HDD mirroring information, the HDD can be used
under the mirroring kit environment.
(1) Necessary tools
4) Double-click RIB Buster {YYYYMMDD}.exe to boot the RIB
? RIB Buster software
Buster software.
The software is composed of the following two files. (They can be
If the user account control is ON in VISTA or Windows 7 set-
downloaded from Tech DS Web site.)
ting, the user account control menu is displayed. Click [Allow]
? RIB Buster{YYYYMMDD}.exe on this menu.
? Setup.ini
? Commercially available USB HDD case unit (SATA support)
5) Select the target HDD to delete the mirroring information.
? USB cable
? Windows PC
(Support OS: Windows XP, Windows VISTA, Windows 7 (32/
64bit)
(2) Procedures
1) Assemble the HDD (the mirroring information of which is to be
deleted) to the USB HDD case unit (SATA support), and con-
nect the USB cable.

6) Click [Clear RIB in HDD] button. Phenomenon 2
The mirroring information has not been deleted normally.
Cause Temporary communication trouble, cable or other

device trouble, HDD trouble
Countermeasures 1. Click [Clear RIB in HDD] button again.
2. If the trouble is not solved by procedure 1. ,
disconnect and connect the cable, change the
devices, and reboot the RIB Buster. Then execute
procedure 1. .
7) Click [OK] button. (The mirroring information is deleted.)
8) After completion of deleting the mirroring information, "OK" is

displayed.
Phenomenon 3
Though the target HDD is connected, it is not displayed.
Cause The target HDD is not registered in the Setup.ini file.

Cable or other device trouble, HDD trouble
Countermeasures 1. Reboot RIB Buster, and click the frame section.
2. If the trouble is not solved by procedure 1. , replace
the Setup. ini file and the RIB Buster {YYYYMMDD}
(3) Kinds of errors, causes and remedies with the latest version, and execute procedure 1. .
3. If the trouble is not solved by procedure 2. ,
Phenomenon 1 disconnect and connect the cable, change the
An error indicating an abnormality in the Setup.ini file when booting devices, and reboot the RIB Buster. Then execute
the RIB Buster software. procedure 1. .
Cause Setup.ini file does not exists, or there is any

abnormality in the file.
Countermeasures Check to confirm that there is Setup.ini file in the
proper directory and that there is no abnormality in
the descriptions.

2 ‘13/Nov
MX-5141N
[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE Service Manual
1. General
The following functions are available on the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
Menu/Item Function and content

Output of Test Page Used to print out the test page (system setting contents).
Font/Form Download Used to download Font/Form.
Font/Form of PCL and PostScript, macro, and other resources are downloaded to the HDD and controlled.
(PS, PCL5 only)
Device Cloning Used to import/export the system setting information in XML format. By importing the export file to the other device, the
setting values and setting contents of the device can be copied to another device. This function is useful to set the same
setting to two or more machines efficiently.
Filing Data Backup Used to import/export the document filing data in the unit of folder.
User Control Used to shift to the user mode. After log in, the screen is shifted to the setting screen of user management.
User Control 2 Used to set the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group by authority of the serviceman.
(Select among preset items.)
Job Log Save Job Log Used to save the Job Log.
View Job Log Used to display the Job Log.
Update of Firmware Used to update the firmware version.
Syslog*1 Administration Settings Used to set the Log Type. (Set to the default.)
Storage/Send Settings Keep all the items selected.
Save/ Delete Syslog Used to save or delete the log data.
View Syslog Used to display the log data.
*1: This may be useful for troubleshooting when a trouble occurs. When submission of the log data file is requested in order to troubleshoot,
use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the client PC.
2. Details and operation procedures

A. Procedures to enter the Hidden Web page B. Output of Test Page
exclusively used for the serviceman
1) Boot a browser program.
2) Enter the specified
URL (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/service_login.html) and enter the MX-XXXX
servicing page menu.

Default password: "service"
MX-XXXX
1) Click "Print" button of an item or report to be printed.

When there is a list of items for selection, select one of the
items in the pull-down menu list, and click "Print" button.
The list is printed out.
MX-5141N SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 1

C. Font/Form Download 2) Click "Execute" button.
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file.
(File name: *****.bin)
When the password is set, the set password must be entered
when importing.
MX-XXXX
(2) Import
1) Import from a file: Click "Refer" button to select the back-up
file. (File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button to execute import.
If the password is set when exporting, the password must be
entered.
3) Reboot the machine.
E. Filing Data Backup
(1) Download of Font, Form, and Macro MX-XXXX
1) Select "Resource Type" from the pull-down menu list.

(Example: PCL/PostScript Font/Form or Macro)
2) Click "Refer" button to select a target file.
3) Click "Download" button.
4) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
The file is downloaded to the HDD.
The list of the downloaded files and the use percentage of the
HDD are displayed.
(2) Delete of downloaded font
(Procedures to delete a file separately)
1) Select a file to be deleted from the list of the downloaded files,
and click "Delete" button. (1) Export
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press 1) Select the folder to be backed up.
Yes key. The list display conditions can be specified by changing the
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button. index and the number of display items on the pull-down menu.
The file in the HDD is deleted. 2) Click "Execute" button.
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (File
(3) Procedures to delete all the files at a time
name: *****.bin)
1) Click "Initialize" button.
3) Click "Update" button.
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press
OK key. (2) Import
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button. 1) Click "Refer" button to select a target file. (File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button.
NOTE: By the Write-Protect Setting function, the downloaded files
can be set to write protect. The target file is imported.
D. Device Cloning
F. User Control 1
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
1) Enter the password to log in.

Default Password: admin
(1) Export The screen is shifted to the setting menu of user management.
1) Select an item to be backed up.

G. User Control 2 (2) View Job Log
MX-XXXX MX-XXXX
1) Select the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation

Group. (The Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation
Group must be set in advance.)
(Example of use)
The use sets the conditions for servicing work by using the
Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group functions
in advance, and the serviceman selects the set conditions in
this mode for servicing work.
H. Job Log
(1) Save Job Log
MX-XXXX
1) Select a Jog Log item to be displayed. (In the default setting,

all the items are selected. Remove check marks of the items
which are not to be displayed.)
2) Click "Show" (display) button.
The Jog Log is displayed.
I. Update of Firmware
MX-XXXX
1) Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the Job
Log to save it.
1) Click "Refer" button to select a firmware file.

2) After selecting a firmware file, click "Execute" button.
The firmware data are sent to the machine, and update of the
firmware is processed.
During the process, the message of "Firmware Update, now pro-
cessing..." is displayed.

J. Syslog (2) Storage/Send Settings
There are following functions in the Syslog mode. Keep all the items selected.
This function is provided to acquire the detailed Syslog to trouble-
shoot when a trouble occurs.
When submission of the log data file is requested for troubleshoot-
ing, use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the cli- MX-XXXX
ent PC.
Syslog Administration Settings Log Type Setting (Set to the default.)

Storage/Send Settings Set all the items selected.
Save/ Delete Syslog Log data save, delete
View Syslog Log data display
MX-XXXX
(3) Save/ Delete Syslog
MX-XXXX
(1) Administration Settings/ Log Type Setting

Set to the default.
MX-XXXX
When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the save
position and save it.
When deleting, click "Delete" button.
Check to confirm that the confirmation message is displayed, and
press OK key.
(4) View Syslog
MX-XXXX
1) Select a Syslog item to be displayed.

2) Click "Show" button.
The Syslog is displayed.

2 ‘13/Nov
K. Output Profile Settings L. Machine ID Setting

㪤㪯㪄㫏㫏㫏㫏㪝㪥
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
1) Enter the machine ID.

Max. 30 digits of numeral figures and characters can be
entered.
2) Press the registration button.
NOTE: The machine ID can be set with SIM26-7 as well as this
㪦㫌㫋㫇㫌㫋㩷㪛㩷㪧㫉㫆㪽㫀㫃㪼㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾 function.
M. Administration Settings (Menu display setting)

This setting is to select whether to display all the menus of Web
Page on the machine display or to display only the restricted sys-
tem setting menu of the default.
㪪㫇㫆㫋㪺㫆㫃㫆㫉㩷㪫㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾 Setting must be executed according to the user request.
1) Press the setting execution button corresponding to the dis-
play mode.
MX-XXXX
(1) Download procedures of custom output profile

1) Click "Refer" button to select the output profile.
2) Click "Add" button to add the output profile.
3) Click "Add" button to add the output profile.
The added profile is displayed on the list. For the output A pro-
file and the output B profile, the newly added profile becomes
valid.
When no profile is added, the default output profile in the firm-
ware of the machine set when shipping from the factory is
valid.
Output A profile / Output B profile / Output D profile: Selectively
used.
Output C profile: PS mode, for CMYK simulation (Custom)
Spot Color Table: For PS mode
(2) Procedures to delete the custom output profile and
return to the default output profile
1) Clock "Delete" button of the output profile to be deleted.
The custom output profile is deleted and the default output pro-
file in the firmware of the machine becomes valid.

2 ‘13/Nov
#. #.
#. #. #. .# .#
[13]
6 6 '.$ '.$ 6 .# .# .#
6 N,#$$)30 N,#$$)30 6 6
6
6 6
MX-5141N
$'.$ '.$ ,#$3%,?( ,#$3%,?(

6 ,#$3%,?( ,#$3%,?( 6 6
6. #,+%$)$ #,+%$)$
6. 6 '.$ '.$
,#$?!?0 ,#$?!?0 $!4!%$)$ $!4!%$)$
$'.$ '.$
6(2 . ,#$?!?- ,#$?!?- 48?/54 48?/54
,#$MODULE
6(2 . "0 6( 48?/54 48?/54
'.$ '.$

$ '.$ $ '.$
,#$?#,+?0 ,#$?#,+?0
48?/54 48?/54
#. #. ,#$?#,+?- ,#$?#,+?-
48?/54 48?/54
3#!.$!4!? '.$ '.$
3#!.$!4!?. $ '.$ $ '.$
3#!.$!4!? ,#$?!?0 ,#$?!?0 48?/54 48?/54
3#!.$!4!?0
$'.$ ,#$?!?- ,#$?!?- 48?/54 48?/54
'.$
3#!.$!4!? '.$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
3#!.$!4!?.
3#!.$!4!? ,#$?!?0 ,#$?!?0 4#,+ 4#,+
3#!.$!4!?0
$'.$ '.$ ,#$?!?- ,#$?!?- 4#,+ 4#,+

3#!.$!4!?V '.$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
3#!.$!4!?.
3#!.$!4!? 3#!.$!4!?0 ,#$?!?0 ,#$?!?0 $ '.$ $ '.$
$'.$ '.$ ,#$?!?- ,#$?!?- $ '.$ $ '.$
3#!.#,+/54? 3#!.#,+/54?. '.$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
3#!.#,+/54? 3#!.#,+/54?0 ##&4 ##&4 $ '.$ $ '.$
'.$ 8,?8?3$! 8,?8?3$! $ '.$ $ '.$
$'.$
9(?9?3#, 9(?9?3#, $ '.$ $ '.$

3#!.$!4!? 3#!.$!4!?0
9,?9?).4 9,?9?).4 ##&4?OUT ##&4?OUT
3#!.$!4!? 3#!.$!4!?.
8(?8?#3 8(?8?#3 $)30?OUT $)30?OUT
$'.$ '.$
'.$ '.$ 6?,#$ 6?,#$
6 .# .# 6
6 6 6?,#$ 6?,#$
"" 0($33 " 0($2 63 0($2 63 "" 0($33 " 6?,#$ 6?,#$
6 6
6 6 .# .#
6 6 % .# .#

.# .#
'.$ '.$
.# .#
'.$ '.$
.# .#
6 6
.# .#
6 6
1. Operation panel section
.# .#
6 6 .# .#
6 6 .# .#
'.$ '.$ .# .#
'.$ '.$
6#/.4'.$ '.$
07237
3#?4%-0'.$ '.$
'.$ '.$ #.
#. #. &8- 3 36 &83 3 3( 8,8

$'.$ '.$ 9(9
$'.$ 3( '.$ 3( 8(8
,#$?$!4! 0+ ,#$?!?0 0+ 9,9
,#$?$!4! 7( ,#$?!?. 7(

$'.$ 3( '.$ 3(
,#$?#,+ 0+ ,#$?#,+?0 0+
07"
,#$?#,+ 7( ,#$?#,+?. 7(
,6$3
$'.$ 3( '.$ 3(
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
,#$?$!4! 0+ ,#$?!?0 0+
,#$?$!4! 7( ,#$?!?. 7(
$'.$ 3( '.$ 3(
,#$?$!4! 0+ ,#$?!?0 0+
,#$?$!4! 7( ,#$?!?. 7( 0(2 "0 0( + 3
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
$'.$ 3( '.$ 3( '.$

,#$?$!4! 0+ ,#$?!?0 0+ 0$
,#$?$!4! 7( ,#$?!?. 7( 6
$'.$ '.$ 0$3%,
$'.$ '.$ 0$3%,
3#.#.407"
,#$3%, #.?,#$3%, 0$3%,
,#$3%, #.?,#$3%,
N,#$?$)30 N,#$?$)30
N2%3?3#. #.?N2%3?3#.
N0/&?3#. #.?N0/& #.
48$?3#. #.?28$?-&0# 6/
28$?3#. #.?48$?-&0# 6/
6/ 6/ #.?N(/-%?+%9
N30%$ 30%$ #.?":2
N243?3#. #.?N#43?-&0# #.?N(/-%?,%$ .#

N#43?3#. #.?N243?-&0# '.$ .#

6/?$549 607- '.$
.# .# #.?N0#5?2%1 '.$ .#
.# .# #.?N3#?!#+ 6 .#
$'.$ .# '.$ '.$ #.
$'.$ '.$ #.?0$ N(-?+%9
"" 0($33 " 0($2 63 0($2 63 "" 0($33 " 6 N(-?,%$&
#.?0$3%, 63%'
#.?0$3%, ":2
#.?0$3%, N75?+%9
'.$ .# 75?,%$
#.?N/0%,%$?& 6/ "-" '(3 4"4
#.?/0%,%$?3%' 0/7?,%$
N07237
/#37
MX-5141N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 1

"" 0($33 "

'.$
Service Manual
'.$
'(2 6 3
'.$
3#?!#+
0#5?2%1

3-0 6 "#3-2 6 "
㹋/4(%207"
#.4/0
#.
#.4/0
6 6
'.$ '.$
/#37 /#37
#.
#.
#.
6 %(2 6(0,'.,
0#507"
#.
3):%?,%$
N75?,%$
3):%?,%$ 6
N0/7?,%$
"" 0( 3- 4" 3):%?,%$
N).&/?&!8?,%$
3):%?,%$
N75?+%9 0(2
$'.$ '.$
6(0,'.,
$'.$
N072?37 $&" $%0 2#$&" $%3 2#
"" 0( + 3 0(2 N07237
'.$ 32! 4
'.$ .# #.
N75?+%9 6/
N).&/?,%$ N).&/?,%$
0/7?,%$ .# & '.$
75?,%$ "" 0!3+
OCSW Paper size detection trigger sensor Generates the document size detection trigger signal.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Turns ON/OFF the power on the secondary side.

1 HW-KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
2 PW-KEY PWB Turns ON/OFF the power on the secondary side.
3 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal. / Controls the touch panel.
4 Document size detection PWB (Light emitting) Drives the LED for the document size detection.
5 Document size detection PWB (Light receiving) Outputs the document size detection signal.
6 USB I/F PWB USB Interface
B. Operational descriptions
The operation panel unit is composed of the LCD unit, the LVDS PWB, the USB I/F PWB, and the KEY PWB. It displays the machine operation.
It is provided with the USB I/F which is used for the firmware update, USB print, and Scan to USB.
In addition, the USB I/F line is provided inside the operation panel to connect with the keyboard and the IC card reader.
A document size is detected by the document size detection PWB (light emitting) and the document size detection PWB (light receiving).
The detection timing of document size is determined according to the document size detection trigger sensor signal.

D_SPED2 1
SGND 2 CN2
5V(sensor) 3 4 D_SPED2
175487-3 1 SGND
3 5V(sensor)
D_STLD 1 6 D_STLD
SGND 2 2 SGND
5V(sensor) 3 5 5V(sensor)
175487-3 8 D_SPOD
9 SGND
7 5V(sensor)
10 NC(SGND)
B10B-PHDSS-B
2. DSPF section
(1) Paper feed section
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
DSPF CNT PWB
DRIVER PWB
2 /D_SPFC 1
SPRDMD
1 24V_TR 2
PHNR-03-H CN8 CN 2
5V 1 1 5V
CN7
SPPD1
5V 3 SGND 2 2 SGND
18 SGND
D_SPPD1 2 16 /D_SPFC
D_SPFFAN 3 3 D_SPFFAN
SGND 1 15 24V_TR SGND 4 4 SGND
PHR-3 13 5V D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1
3 14 D_SPPD1 D_RANDOM 6 6 D_RANDOM
5V
2 17 SGND D_SOCV 7 7 D_SOCV
D_RANDOM
1 11 5V D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
SGND
12 D_RANDOM D_SPUM_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
PHR-3
4 SGND
D_SPUM_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
2 D_SPUM_INB 11 11 D_SPU M_INB
STUD
SGND 3 SGND
D_STUD 1 10 D_STUD D_SPUM_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
175487-3 7 5V(sensor) D_SLUMA 13 13 D_SLUMA
2 SGND D_SULM/A 14 14 D_SULM/A

5V (sensor) 3 8 D_SPED1 D_SLUMB 15 15 D_SLUMB
SCOV
STLD
SGND 2 5 5V(sensor) D_SLUM/B 16 16 D_SLUM/B
SPWS
D_SPED1 1 1 SGND D_SPOM_ENA 17 17 D_SPO M_ENA
175487-3 6 D_SOCV
D_SPOM_ STEP 18 18 D_SPOM_ STEP
B18B-PHDSS-B
SPED2
D_SPO M_ MODE 19 19 D_SPO M_ MODE
5V(sensor) 3 D_SPOM_DIR 20 20 D_SPO M_ DIR
SGND 2 24V 21 21 24V
D_SOCV 1
PGND 22 22 PGND
175487-3 24V 23 23 24V
SPED1
SPFC
PGND 24 24 PGND
24V 25 25 24V
CN6
PGND 26 26 PGND
SPLS1
1 D_SPUM/B
2 D_SPUM/A
B26B-PHDSS-B B 26B-PHDSS-B
3 D_SPUMB
4 D_SPUMA C N3 CN 3
5 24V_SPUM D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF
SPUM
6 24V_SPUM D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF
B6B-PH-K-S D_SPOM_VREF1 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1

D_SPOM_VREF2 4 4 D_SPOM_VREF2
SPLS2
CN4 D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA
1 D_SLUM/B D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB
2 D_SLUM/A D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
3 D_SLUMB D_SELOUT 8 8 D_SELOUT
4 D_SLUMA VAREF 9 9 VAREF
5 24V_TR
SLUM
D_SPWS 10 10 D_SPWS
B5B-PH-K-S
AGND 11 11 AGND
D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
D_SRRBC 14 14 D_SRRBC
D_SPFM_M1 15 15 D_SPFM_M1
D_SPLS1 1
CN1 D_SPFM_M2 16 16 D_SPFM_M2
SGND 2
2 D_SPLS1 D_SPFM_CLK 17 17 D_SPFM_CLK
5V(sensor) 3
175487-3 1 SGND D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC
3 5V(sensor) D_STRRC 19 19 D_STRRC
D_SPLS2 1 8 D_SPLS2 D_STRRBC 20 20 D_STRRBC
SGND 2 9 SGND D_STMPS 21 21 D_STMPS
/D_STRC 22 22 /D_STRC
175487-3 4 VAREF
5V 23 23 5V
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H 5 D_SPWS
6 AGND SGND 24 24 SGND
VAREF 1 VAREF 3
D_SPWS 2 D_SPWS 2 B9B-PH-K-S B 24B-PHDSS-B B 24B-PHDSS-B
AGND 3 AGND 1
PHNR-03-H
SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the upper door.
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor Lifts up or moves down the document feed tray.
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the DSPF document.
SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor Detects document empty in the document feed tray.
SPFC DSPF document feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the rollers in the document feed section.
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1 Detects pass of the document.
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor Detects the document size in random document feed.
SPUM DSPF document feed motor Drives the rollers and transport rollers in the document feed section.
SPWS DSPF document width sensor Detects the document width of the document feed tray upper.
STLD DSPF document feed tray lower limit sensor Detects the lower limit of the document feed tray.
STUD DSPF document feed tray upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the document feed tray.

1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the document feed roller.
2 Document feed roller Performs the document feed operation of documents.
4 Torque limiter A fixed level of resistance is always provided for rotation of the separation roller to prevent double feed.
(2) Upper transport section

1 D_SPUM_VREF
3 D_SPOM_VREF1
4 D_SPOM_VREF2
2 D_SPFM_VREF
18 D_SPFM_DIREC
18 D_SPOM_ STEP
19 D_SPO M_ MODE
17 D_SPFM_CLK
17 D_SPO M_ENA
20 D_SPO M_ DIR
10 D_SPU M_IN/A
12 D_SPU M_IN/B
B 26B-PHDSS-B
B 24B-PHDSS-B
9 D_SPU M_INA
11 D_SPU M_INB
15 D_SPFM_M1
16 D_SPFM_M2
6 D_RANDOM
DSPF CNT PWB
20 D_STRRBC
8 D_SELOUT
3 D_SPFFAN
14 D_SULM/A
16 D_SLUM/B
14 D_SRRBC
13 D_SLUMA
15 D_SLUMB
19 D_STRRC
21 D_STMPS
5 D_SPPD1
22 /D_STRC
10 D_SPWS
7 D_SOCV
8 D_SPOD
13 D_SRRC
12 D_SPFC
7 D_SELC
5 D_SELA
6 D_SELB
CN 3
9 VAREF
CN 2
2 SGND
4 SGND
11 AGND
24 SGND
22 PGND
24 PGND
26 PGND
CN 1
21 24V
23 24V
25 24V
1 5V
23 5V
D_SOCD 13
GND 16
5V䋨䍜䍻䍙䍎䋩 7
D_ROCD 18
GND 17
5V䋨䍜䍻䍙䍎䋩 8
GND 1 1 SGND
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
D_SPOM_ STEP 18
D_SPO M_ MODE 19
D_SPOM_DIR 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
D_SPFM_CLK 17
D_SPFM_DIREC 18
19
20
21
22
23
24
B26B-PHDSS-B
B 24B-PHDSS-B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D_SPUM_VREF 1
D_SPFM_VREF 2
D_SPOM_VREF1 3
D_SPOM_VREF2 4
5
6
7
8
9
D_SPPD2 9 2 D_SPPD2
5V 3 3 5V
CN 8
D_SPOM_ENA
D_SPUM_IN/A
D_SPUM_IN/B
D_SPFM_M1
D_SPFM_M2
D_SPUM_INA
D_SPUM_INB
C N3
D_RANDOM
GND 2
D_STRRBC
D_SELOUT
B3B-PH-K-S
D_SPFFAN
D_SULM/A
D_SLUM/B
D_SRRBC
D_SLUMA
D_SLUMB
D_STRRC
D_STMPS
D_SPPD1
/D_STRC
D_SPWS
D_SPPD3 11
D_SOCV
D_SPOD
D_SRRC
D_SPFC
D_SELC
D_SELA
D_SELB
VAREF
PGND
PGND
SGND
SGND
AGND
SGND
5V 4
PGND
24V
24V
24V
GND 14
5V
5V
D_SPPD4 10
5V 5
26 NC(FAN_PWM)
GND 15
5 /D_STRRBC
28 FAN_LOCK
5 24V_SPUM
6 24V_SPUM
D_SPPD5 12
1 D_SPUM/B
2 D_SPUM/A
24 24V_SPF 㪤
23 24V_SPF 㪤
9 /D_SRRBC
7 /D_STRRC
13 D_SPFM/A
B28B-PHDSS-B
11 D_SPFM/B
3 D_SPUMB
4 D_SPUMA
17 D_SPFMA
19 D_SPFM 㪙
2 D_STSET
20 /D_SRRC
3 /D_STMP
18 /D_STRC
DRIVER PWB 5V 6
14 24V_TR
27 24V_TR
12 24V_TR
10 24V_TR
8 24V_TR
6 24V_TR
4 24V_TR
B6B-PH-K-S
25 PGND
1 SGND
㪙㪈㪏㪙㪄㪧㪟㪛㪪㪪㪄㪙
22 NC
21 NC
16 NC
15 NC
CN7
CN9
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
1
2
1
2 /D_STRRC
2 /D_STRC
STRC
1 24V_TR
2 24V_TR
SMP-0㪉㪭㪄㪥㪚
PHNR-02-H
SMR-02V-N
STRRC
SPUM
1
SPPD2

SPPD2 DSPF document pass sensor 2 Detects pass of the document.
SPUM DSPF document feed motor Drives the rollers, transport rollers and transport rollers in the document feed section.
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 1.
STRRC DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 1 registration roller.

1 No. 1 registration roller (Drive) Performs registration of document transport.
2 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from No. 1 registration roller to No. 2 registration roller.

Make synchronization between the lead edge of a document and the scan start position.
C N9
SPFM
SGND 1
D_STSET 2
/D_STMP 3
24V_TR 4
/D_STRRBC 5
24V_TR 6
SPPD5
/D_STRRC 7
Transports document from the transport roller 2 to the document exit roller.
24V_TR 8 SMP-0 6 V-N C
D_SPF M/A 13 1 D_SPF M/B 1
A pressure is applied to document to prevent fluctuations of document.

D_SPFM B 19 2 D_SPF M/A 2
D_SPF M/B 11 3 D_SPFM B 3
Transports document from the platen roller to the transport roller 3.

D_SPF MA 17 4 D_SPF MA 4
24V_SPF M 23 5 24V_SPF M 5
24V_SPF M 24 6 24V_SPF M 6
/D_SRRBC 9 SMR-0 6V-N
24V_TR 10
Function/Operation
/D_SRRC 20
Function/ Operation
24V_TR 12
SRRC
NC( FAN _PWM) 26 PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H

FAN_LOCK 28 2 /D_SRRC 1
PGND 25 1 24V_TR 2
SPPD3
24V_TR 27
PHNR-02-H
Controls ON/OFF of No. 2 registration roller.

24V_TR 14
/D_STRC 18
NC 15

NC 16
NC 21
NC 22
B28B-PHDSS-B
SPPD4
Detects pass of the document.

CN 8 CN 2
5V 1 1 5V
Drives the transport roller.

SGND 2 2 SGND
SGND 4 4 SGND
D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1
D_RANDOM 6 6 D_RANDOM
DRIVER PWB
D_SOCV 7 7 D_SOCV
DSPF CNT PWB
D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
D_ SPU M_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
D_ SPU M_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
D_ SPU M_INB 11 11 D_SPU M_INB
D_ SPU M_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
D_SLUMA 13 13 D_SLUMA
D_SULM/A 14 14 D_SULM/A
D_SLUMB 15 15 D_SLUMB
D_SLUM/B 16 16 D_SLUM/B
D_ SPO M_ENA 17 17 D_SPO M_ENA
D_ SPO M_STEP 18 18 D_SPO M_ STEP
D_SPOM_MODE 19 19 D_SPO M_ MODE
D_ SPO M_ DIR 20 20 D_SPO M_ DIR
24V 21 21 24V
PGND 22 22 PGND
24V 23 23 24V
PGND 24 24 P GND
24V 25 25 24V
PGND 26 26 PGND
CN 1
DSPF No.2 registration roller clutch

B 26 B-PHDSS-B B26 B-PHDSS-B
D_SOCD 13
GND 16
DSPF document pass sensor 3

CN 3 CN 3
5V(sensor) 7
Name
D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF
D_ROCD 18
D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF
No. 2 registration roller (Drive)

GND 17
Name
5V(sensor) 8
(3) Lower transport section
GND 1 1 SGND
DSPF transport motor

D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA
Transport roller 2 (Drive)

Transport roller 3 (Drive)
D_SPPD2 9 2 D_SPPD3
D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB
5V 3 3 5V
D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
GND 2 B3B-PH-K-S
D_SELOUT 8 8 D_SELOUT
D_SPPD3 11
VAREF 9 9 VAREF
5V 4
D_SPWS 10 10 D_SPWS
GND 14 1 SGND
AGND 11 11 AGND
D_SPPD4 10 2 D_SPPD4
D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
Platen roller
5V 5 3 5V
D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
GND 15 B3B-PH-K-S
D_SRRBC 14 14 D_SRRBC
D_SPPD5 12
D_SPFM_M1 15 15 D_SPFM_M1 PHNR-03-H
5V 6
B18B-PHDSS-B 1 SGND 3 1 SGND
D_SPFM_CLK 17 17 D_SPFM_CLK
2 D_SPPD5 2 2 D_SPPD5
D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC 3 5V 1 3 5V
Signal name
D_STRRC 19 19 D_STRRC
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H B3B-PH-K-S
D_STRRBC 20 20 D_STRRBC
D_STMPS 21 21 D_STMPS
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
/D_STRC 22 22 /D_STRC
No.
SRRC
SPFM
1
2
3
4
5V 23 23 5V
SGND 24 24 SGND
B 24B-PHDSS-B B 24 B-PHDSS-B
(4) Optical section
DSPF COPY LAMP
LED PWB
CN5
LED_POWER
IDRV6
IDRV5
IDRV4
IDRV3
IDRV2
IDRV1
B7B-PH-K-S
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
B7B-PH-K-S
7 LED_POWER
6 IDRV6
5 IDRV5
4 IDRV4
3 IDRV3
2 IDRV2
1 IDRV1
CN9
DSPF CNT PWB

DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF copy lamp Radiates light onto a document to allow the CCD to scan document images.

1 Reflector Converges lights from the copy lamp.
2 Mirror Sends the document image to the lens.
3 Lens Reduces the document image (light) and reflects it onto the CCD.
4 DSPF CCD PWB Scans the document image (optical signals) and converts it into electrical signals.

(5) Peper exit section
DSPFCNT PWB
CN8 CN 2
5V 1 1 5V
SGND 2 2 SGND
SGND 4 4 SGND
D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1
D_RANDOM 6 6 D_RANDOM
D_SOCV 7 7 D_SOCV
D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
D_SPU M_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
D_SPU M_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
D_SPU M_INB 11 11 D_SPU M_INB
D_SPU M_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
D_SLUMA 13 13 D_SLUMA
D_SULM/A 14 14 D_SULM/A
D_SLUMB 15 15 D_SLUMB
D_SLUM/B 16 16 D_SLUM/B
D_SPO M_ENA 17 17 D_SPO M_ENA
D_SPO M_ STEP 18 18 D_SPO M_STEP
CN5 D_SPO M_ MODE 19 19 D_SPO M_MODE

1 D_SPOM/B D_SPO M_ DIR 20 20 D_SPO M_DIR
24V 21 21 24V
SPOM 2
3
D_SPOM/A
D_SPOMB PGND 22 22 PGND
4 D_SPOMA 24V 23 23 24V
B4B-PH-K-S PGND 24 24 PGND
24V 25 25 24V
PGND 26 26 PGND
B 26 B-PHDSS-B B26 B-PHDSS-B
DRIVER
CN3 CN3
PWB D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF
D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF
CN2
4 D_SPED2
1 SGND
D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA
3 5V(sensor)
D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB
6 D_STLD
D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
SPOD 2 SGND
D_SELOUT 8 8 D_SELOUT
5 5V(sensor)
VAREF 9 9 VAREF
D_SPOD 1 8 D_SPOD
D_SPWS 10 10 D_SPWS
SGND 2 9 SGND
AGND 11 11 AGND
D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
175487-3 10 NC(SGND)
D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
B10B-PHDSS-B D_SRRBC 14 14 D_SRRBC
STMPS D_SPFM_M1 15 15 D_SPFM_M1
D_SPFM_CLK 17 17 D_SPFM_CLK
D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC
D_STRRC 19 19 D_STRRC
179228-4/29225-4/179228-4 CN9
1 SGND 1 1 SGND D_STRRBC 20 20 D_STRRBC
2 D_STSET 2 2 D_STSET
3
D_STMPS 21 21 D_STMPS
3 /D_STMP 3 /D_STMP
4 24V_TR 4 4 24V_TR /D_STRC 22 22 /D_STRC
B28B-PHDSS-B 5V 23 23 5V
SGND 24 24 SGND
B24 B-PHDSS-B B 24 B-PHDSS-B

SPOD DSPF document exit sensor Detects document exit of the document.
SPOM DSPF document exit motor Drives the document exit roller.
STMPS Stamp solenoid Drives the stamp solenoid.

1 Document exit roller (Drive) Discharges document.
(1) Document size detection
Size detection on the document tray
The document size is detected by the DSPF document width sensor (SPWS), and the document length is detected by the DSPF document
length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from the document width and the document length as shown in the table below.
When, however, documents of different sizes are mixed and set on the document tray, the largest size is detected.
Document length sensor
Document length sensor Document size
Document size SPLS1 SPLS2
SPLS1 SPLS2
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
AB series A5 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
B5 OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
A4 OFF OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
B5R ON OFF
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A4R ON OFF
A3 ON ON
8.5" x 13" ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
B4 ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
8.5" x 13.5" ON ON

SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2
(2) Timing chart

To increase the document replacement speed, pre-feed of the second and the later documents is performed for documents of A4/Letter or
smaller sizes. Therefore, a clutch is provided for each transport roller to perform individual control.
Scan transport speed 372mm/s 400dpi letter single transport
Copy key ON
SPUM
DSPF document feed motor
ON simultaneously with print start of each motor
OFF at 500ms after SPOD OFF of the last paper
SPFM
DSPF transport motor
Decelerates simultaneously with turning off SPOD to

SPOM reduce to 200mm/s for 18.9mm. Drives for 15mm,
DSPF document exit motor and returns to 372mm/s for 18.9mm.
(Common to all the paper sizes)
SPFC
DSPF document feed clutch
1 0
STRRC
DSPF No.1 registration roller
clutch
1
STRC ON simultaneously with SPPD2_ON

DSPF transport roller clutch OFF at 25.7ms after SPPD2_OFF
SRRC
ON at 12.3mm - 10ms (29ms) after SPPD3 ON (SIM adjustment)
DSPF No.2 registration roller
OFF at 10.4mm (28ms) after SPPD3 OFF
clutch
1
SPRDMD
DSPF document random sensor
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SPOD
DSPF document exit sensor

3. RSPF section
(1) Paper feed section
CN F
SPMA/ 1 6 SPMA/
+24VPD_SPM 2 5 +24VPD _SPM
SPMA 3 4 SPMA
SPMB 4 3 SPMB
+24VPD_SPM 5 2 +24VPD _SPM
SPMB/ 6 1 SPMB/
N.C. 7 (NC)
B7B-PH-K-S
CN E PHR-11
SPED 3
GND 4
+5V_SPED 5 PALR-08VF / PAP-08V-S
+5VPD 6 4 +5VPD 4 1 +5VPD
SPPD1 7 5 SPPD1 5 2 SPPD1
GND 8 6 GND 6 3 GND
+24VPD 9
GND 10 (NC)
+24VPD_SW 11 SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC
B11B-PH-K-S 1 +5VPD 1 1 +5VPD
2 SPPD2 2 2 SPPD2
CN G PHR 3 GND 3 3 GND
+5VPD 1 -13
SCN-CNT SPPD2 2
GND 3
PWB
CN15 PHDR-14VS-2 RSPF
B13B-PH-K-S
SPM
GND 1
GND 2 DRIVER
+24V
+24V
+24V
3
4
5
PWB SPPD2
(NC)
+24V 6 (NC)
+12V 7 (NC)
+5V 8
+5VO 9
+5V_SPF 10 CN A
+3.3V
+3.3V
GND
11
12
13
(NC)
1
2
GND
GND 2 SCOV
(NC) 5 +24VPD
GND 14 6 +24VPD
B14B-PHDSS-B 7 +5V
8 AVCC
CN16 34 GND
CN_SPPD1 1 3 SPPD1
CN_SPPD2 2 4 SPPD2
CN_SPFM_C 3 9 SPFMCK
CN_SPFMM1 4 10 SPFMM1
CN_SPFMM2 5 11 SPFMM2
CN_SPFMO1 6 12 SPFMO1
CN_SPFMO2 7 13 SPFMO2
SPPD1 SPED 1
CN_SPRM_A 8 14 SPMA
CN_SPRM_XA 9 15 SPMA/
CN_SPRM_B 10 16 SPMB
CN_SPRM_XB 11 17 SPMB/
CN_SPMO1 12 18 SPMO1
CN_SPRS 13 19 SPRS
CN_STMPS 14 20 STMPS
CN_SRRC 15 21 SRRC
CN_SRVC 16 22 SRVC
CN_SPWS 17 23 SPWS
CN_SEL_A 18 24 SELA
CN_SEL_B 19 25 SELB
CN_SEL_C 20 26 SELC
CN_SEL_OUT
CN_SPPDA
21
22
27
28
SSELO
SPPDA
3
CN_SPFMRV 23 29 SPFMRV
PALR-08VF / PAP-08V-S
CN_SPPD3 24 30 SPPD3
CN_SPPD4 25 31 SPPD4 1 SPED 1 1 SPED
+5VPD 26 32 +5VPD 2 GND 2 2 GND
GND 27 33 GND 3 +5V SPED 3 3 +5V SPED
CN_SPED 28 PHDR-34VS-1 B34B-PHDSS-B 7 +24VPD 7
B28B-PHDSS-B 8 +24VPD SW 8 1 +24VPD
CN I
1 +5VO 2 +24VPD_SW
2 +5V_SPF
3 SPED
PHDR-28VS-1 PHR-3 B3B-PH-K-S
SPWS
SPLS1
CN D PHR-12
SPLS1
GND
+5VPD_SPLS1
1
2
3
1
2
3
SPLS1
GND
+5VPD_SPLS1
SPLS2
SPLS2 4
GND 5
+5VPD_SPLS2 6
AVCC 7
SPWS 8 1 SPLS2
GND 9 2 GND
B12B-PH-K-S 3 +5VPD_SPLS2
SMP-03V-NC / SMP-03V-NC
1 AVCC 1
2 SPWS 2
3 GND 3

SCOV RSPF upper cover open/close sensor Micro switch Detects open/close of the RSPF upper cover.
SPED RSPF document sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS1 RSPF document length sensor (short) Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS2 RSPF document length sensor (long) Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPM Paper feed motor Stepping motor Drives the rollers in the paper feed section.
SPPD1 RSPF paper pass sensor 1 Transmission type Detects pass of the paper.
SPWS RSPF document width sensor Volume resistor Detects the document width in the RSPF paper feed tray.

1 Pick-up roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller Performs the paper feed operation of documents.

(2) Transport section
SPFM
SRRC
SPPD3
SRVC
SPPD4 SPRS
2
3
SOCD
STMPS
5
4
+5VPD SOCD
SPPD3
+5VPD
SOCD
GND
GND
1
2
3
1
2
3
179228-4 / 292254-4 / 179228-4

1 GND 1
2 STMPU 2
SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC
3 STMPS/ 3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
4 +24VPD STMPS 4
1
2
SPPD4
+5VPD
GND
+24VPD SRRC
+5VPD SOCD
+24VPD SPRS
SPPD3
+5VPD
SRRC/
SOCD
GND
GND
SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
SPRS/
1
2
+24VPD SRVC
1
2
3
SRVC/
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
1
2
PHR-7-R
PHR-11
PHR-13
PHR-6
B6B-PH-K-S
CN F
CN B
CN D
B04B-PH-K-S
CN G
B7B-PH-K-R
CN E
B13B-PH-K-S
RSPF DRIVER PWB

1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B11B-PH-K-S
+5VPD_SOCD
+24VPD SRRC
+24VPD_STMPS
+24VPD SRVC
+24VPD SPRS
B3B-PH-K-S
B34B-PHDSS-B
SPFMCK
SPFMM1
SPFMM2
SPFMRV
SPFMO1
SPFMO2
+5V_SPF
STMPU
+24VPD
+24VPD
STMPS/
SPFMA/
SPFMB/
SPFMA
SPFMB
+24VPD
+24VPD
SPPD3
SPMO1
SPPD4
STMPS
SPPDA
+5VPD
SSELO
+5VPD
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SOCD
+5VPD
SPMA/
SPMB/
SPWS
SRRC/
SPMA
SPMB
SRRC
AVCC
SRVC
SRVC/
SPRS/
SPRS
SELC
SELA
SELB
GND
GND
GND
GND
SPED
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5VO
+5V
CN A
34
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
1
2
3
1
2
5
6
7
8
3
4
9
CN I
PHDR-34VS-1
PHDR-14VS-2
PHR-3
PHDR-28VS-1
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
CN15
B14B-PHDSS-B
CN16
B28B-PHDSS-B
10
11
12
13
14
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
SCN-CNT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN_SPFMM1
CN_SPFMO1
CN_SPRM_XA
CN_SPRM_XB
CN_SPFMM2
CN_SPFM_C
CN_SPRM_B
CN_SPFMRV
CN_SEL_OUT
CN_SPFMO2
CN_SPRM_A
CN_SPMO1
CN_STMPS
CN_SPPDA
CN_SPPD1
CN_SPPD2
CN_SPPD3
CN_SPPD4
CN_SEL_C
CN_SEL_A
CN_SEL_B
CN_SPWS
CN_SRRC
CN_SRVC
CN_SPRS
CN_SPED
+5V_SPF
+5VPD
PWB
+3.3V
+3.3V
+5VO
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+12V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5V

SOCD RSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the RSPF unit.
SPFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drives the transport roller.
SPRS Pressure release solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Releases the pressure of the transport roller 3 when reversing a document and
transporting it to the registration roller.
SRRC PS clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of registration roller.
SRVC Reverse clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the transport roller 3 and the paper exit
roller when discharging a document and reversing it to transport to the registration
roller.
STMPS Stamp solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Drives the stamp.

1 Registration roller (Drive) Performs registration of document transport.
2 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from registration roller to No. 2 registration roller.
3 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper to the transport 3 roller.
4 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 2 to the paper exit roller. / Transports document to the registration roller
when reversing the document.
5 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges paper.

(1) Document size detection (2) Paper feed and transport operations
Size detection on the document tray 1. Single face scanning
The document width is detected by the document width sensor 1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
(SPWS), and the document length is detected by the document
length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from
the document width and the document length as shown in the table
below.
When, however, mixed sizes of documents are loaded on the tray,
the maximum size is detected.
Document length sensor

Document size 2) Paper feed start (1st sheet)
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF The pick-up roller descends. (The paper feed motor is booted.)
B5 OFF OFF (The transport motor is booted simultaneously.)
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
B5R ON OFF
A4R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
B4 ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
3) Registration operation (1st sheet)
8.5" x 14" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON (Registration clutch ON)
8.5" x 13.5" ON ON (When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF clutch, the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON 4) Scanning start (1st sheet)
SPWS 5) Paper feed start (2nd sheet)

(When the SPPD1 detects the rear edge of the previous docu-
SPLS1 SPLS2 ment, the paper feed motor is booted.)
6) Scanning complete (1st sheet)/Registration operation (2nd

sheet)
(When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration
clutch, the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)

7) Scanning start (2nd sheet) 3) Registration operation (1st sheet, front surface)
4) Scanning start (1st sheet, front surface)

8) Paper exit complete (1st sheet)
5) After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is

9) Scanning complete (2nd sheet) pressed. (Solenoid ON)
10) Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)

6) After stopping the operation, reversing is started.
11) Pick-up roller lifting up 7) After reversing, registration operation is executed.

(After completion of a job, the paper feed motor is rotated
reversely at a low speed for a certain time to lift the pickup
roller.)
8) After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pres-

sure is released.
2. Duplex scanning
1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
9) Scanning start (First sheet, back surface)
2) Paper feed start (1st sheet)

Pick-up roller descending
10) After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is

pressed.

11) After stopping the operation, reversing is started. 3. Stamp operation
1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
12) After reversing, registration operation is executed.

2) Paper feed start (1st sheet)
Pick-up roller descending (The paper feed motor is booted.)
(The transport motor is booted simultaneously.)
13) After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pres-
sure is released.
3) Registration operation (1st sheet)

(Registration clutch ON)
(When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration
clutch, the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)
14) Scanning start (Second sheet)
4) Scanning start (1st sheet)
15) After passing the scanning section, the reverse follower roller
is pressed.
5) Scanning complete (1st sheet)
16) The reverse follower roller pressure is released.
6) Stop at the stamp position/Stamp operation (1st sheet)

(Stamp solenoid ON)
17) Discharge (First sheet)
7) Paper exit start (1st sheet)/Preliminary paper feed start (2nd

sheet)

8) Paper exit complete (1st sheet)
9) Stop at the stamp position/Stamp operation (2nd sheet)

(Stamp solenoid ON)
10) Paper exit start (2nd sheet)
11) Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)
12) Pick-up roller lifting up

(After completion of a job, the paper feed motor is rotated
reversely at a low speed for a certain time to lift the pickup
roller.)
(3) Document feed, transport, scan, paper exit,

and operating speed
The document fed by the pickup roller is sent through the paper
feed roller and the transport roller to the registration roller section.
In the registration roller section, the document lead edge and the
scan start position are synchronized.
The document is transported to the scan section. After being
scanned, the document discharged to the document exit tray by the
paper exit roller.
The document transport speed depends on the resolution as
shown below.
Resolution Document transport speed

600dpi 248mm/sec

4. Scanner section
MHPS
CL
LED_POWE
6
IDRV1
IDRV2
IDRV3
IDRV4
IDRV5
IDRV6
9
PHR-7 B7B-PH-K-S
3 MIM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
B7B-PH-K-S PHR-7
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
LED_POWE
2
IDRV1
IDRV2
IDRV3
IDRV4
IDRV5
IDRV6
8
RMOTS0920FCPZ
VHPLG217L5A-1
+5VPD
MHPS
GND
LED DRIVER
MIM_XA
MIM_XB
MIM_A
MIM_B
PWB
EHR-3
3
2
1
B4B-PH-SM4-TB
24VPD
24VPD
LAMP
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5597-05APB
2
1
2
3
4
5
CN8
B3B-PH-K-S PHR-3
CN7
B4B-PH-K-S
CN17
5597-05CPB7F
CN2
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
SCN CNT PWB

FX16M2-41S-0.5SV
MIM_XA
MIM_XB
+24VPD
+24VPD
MIM_A
CN_TCLK_N
MIM_B
CN_TCLK_P
CL_ON
CN_AFE_SDO
nRES_CCDAD
+5VPD
AFE_SCLK
MHPS
AFE_SDIO
CN_TC_N
CN_TD_N
CN_TB_N
CN_TC_P
CN_TD_P
CN_TE_N
GND
GND
CN_TB_P
CN_TE_P
GND
CN_TA_N
CN_TA_P
AFE_CS
TG_CS
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A10V
A10V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
A5V
A5V
A5V
CN8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN2
FX16S-41S-0.5SV
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN_AFE_SDO
nRES_CCDAD
CN_TCLK_N
CN_TCLK_P
AFE_SCLK
AFE_SDIO
CN_TC_N
CN_TD_N
CN_TB_N
CN_TC_P
CN_TD_P
CN_TE_N
CN_TB_P
CN_TE_P
CN_TA_N
CN_TA_P
AFE_CS
TG_CS
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A10V
A10V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
A5V
A5V
A5V
CCD PWB
Signal Name Function/Operation

CL Scanner lamp Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit.
MIM Scanner motor Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.

1 Pulley belt Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley.
2 Pulley Drives the scanner drive wire.
3 Scanner drive wire Transmits the scanner motor drive to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
4 Reflector Reflects the copy lamp light.
5 No. 2 mirror Reflects the document image into the No. 3 mirror.
6 No. 3 mirror Reflects the document image into the lens.
7 Lens Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD.
8 CCD PWB Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal.
9 Idle gear Transmits the scanner motor drive power to the belt.

(1) Outline
This section performs the following functions.
1) Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the
contrast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of B
three lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (ana- G
log). R
2) The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital sig-
nals by the A/D converter.
3) The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process sec-
tion (scanner control PWB).
(2) Detail description

1. Optical section drive
R
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner
motor (MIM) to the drive pulley and the wire through the belt, to G
drive the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by B
the drive wires. (Image data for 1 line)
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
2. Scanner lamp drive
The scanner lamp (CLI) is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage
R G B
generated in the CL inverter PWB according to the control signal
Red component Green component Blue component
sent from the scanner control PWB. image data image data image data
3. Image scan/color separation
Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the con- 4. Image signal A/D conversion
trast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of three 1) The image signal (analog) for each of R, G, and B is converted
lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (analog). into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
The color components of document images are extracted to R, G, Each color pixel has 10bit information.
and B separately by the three kinds of CCD elements (R,G,B). 2) The 10bit digital image signals of R, G, B are sent to the image
The red CCD extracts the red component of document images, the process section.
green CCD green the components, and the blue CCD the blue
components. This operation is called the color separation. CCD PWB
The CCD unit looks like one unit, but it includes three kinds of CCD Analog IC
elements, R, G, and B. CCD
AFE ADC LVDS
The document scan in the main scanning direction is performed by (6 Lines) R
the CCD element. The document scan in the sub scanning direc- G
tion is performed by shifting the scanner unit with the scanner B
motor. Document images are optically reduced by the lens and Buffer TG
reflected to the CCD.
The scan resolution is 600 dpi.
Timing
Generator
5. Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically,
but performed with the image process technology (by the software).

5. Manual paper feed section
CN1
INT24V1 1
2 INT24V1
INT24V1 2
5 INT24V1
DRIVER HPFM_B 3
6 HPFM_B
HPFM_B/ 4
3 HPFM_B/
MAIN PWB HPFM_A/ 5
1 HPFM_A/
HPFM_A 6
4 HPFM_A
B06B-PAEK-1(BLUE)
PCU PWB
CN7 CN4 PAP-07V-S
(NC) 15 24V3 15 (NC) (NC) 20 24V3 INT24V2 28 1 INT24V2

31 /MPGS 31 19 /MPGS GND 26 2 GND
30 /MPFS 30 23 /MPFS /CPFM_GAIN 24 3 /CPFM_GAIN
14 24V3 14 24 24V3 /CPFM_CK 22 4 /CPFM_CK
28 /MPUC 28 21 /MPUC /CPFM_D 20 5 /CPFM_D
13 24V3 13 22 24V3 CPFM_LD 18 6 CPFM_LD
P QR/P4 32PIN S B26B-PHDSS-B B28B-PHDSS-B (NC) 7 NC
PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
1 24V3 2
2 /MPUC 1
PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-Ha P SM2P R
CN3(2/2)
8
7
24V3
/MPFS
1
2
1
2
24V3
/MPFS
1
2
HPFM
HPDET 7 6 HPDET 3 1 MPED
2 D-GND
D-GND 8 5 D-GND 4 3 5VLED7
5VLED7 9 4 5VLED7 5
2 /MPGS 7 4 /MPGS 2
3 24V3 6 5 24V3 1
1 5VLED6 5
2 D-GND 4
MPFD 10 1 MPFD 8 3 MPFD 3
R
2
1
MPUC
SM2P
3
2
1
/MPGS
24V3
1
3
5
2
4
6
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
MPFD
P
2
1
DF11-6DP-SP2
1 4 CPFM
5 MPFS
RIGHT MPFD
DOOR I/F 3
PWB 2 TH_D/HUD_M
MPED
MTOP1
MPGS MPWD MTOP2
MPLD
CN3(1/2) PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H

MPLD 16 12 MPLD 3 6 MPLD 4 1 MPLD
MPLD2 13 14 MPLD2 1 5 D-GND 5 2 D-GND
5VLED12 18 11 5VLED12 4 4 5VLED12 6 3 5VLED12
5VN 19 10 5VN 5 3 5VN 7 3 5VN

MPWD 20 9 MPWD 6 2 MPWD 8 2 MPWD
1 D-GND 9 1 D-GND
MTOP2 22 8 MTOP2 7 1 MTOP2

2 D-GND
5VLED13 24 7 5VLED13 8 3 5VLED13
MTOP1 25 6 MTOP1 9 1 MTOP1

2 D-GND
5VLED9 27 5 5VLED9 10 3 5VLED9
5VN 28 4 5VN 11 1 5VN

HUD_M 29 3 HUD_M 12 2 HUD_M
D-GND 14 2 D-GND 13 3 D-GND
TH_M 31 1 TH_M 14 4 TH_M
S32B-PHDSS-B
8
6
7
2
4
5
3
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-8DP-SP1

CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Manual feed paper empty detection
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Manual feed paper entry detection
MPDS Paper pickup solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Controls open/close of the manual paper feed gate solenoid.
MPLD Manual paper feed length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the manual paper feed section.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
detector
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (Storing position)
detector 1
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (Pulling out position)
detector 2
HPFM Horizontal transport motor Transports paper from the paper feed section to the transport motor drive system.
Transports paper from the right door section to the transport motor drive system.
TH_M/HUD_M Temperature/humidity detection Detects temperature and humidity.

1 Paper feed roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
(Manual paper feed tray)
2 Separation roller Separates paper to prevent double feed.
3 Paper pickup roller Sends paper to the paper transport section.
4 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to
prevent double feed.
5 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. /
Transports paper from the manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 8.
The pickup roller moves up and down to press the paper surface,
separating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and sending it
to the paper feed roller section.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to pre-
vent against double feed with the separation roller. The manual
paper feed clutch controls ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the
paper feed roller. Paper is sent to the registration roller by the man-
ual transport roller.

CN12 TZS/CZHR-20V-S-CZHR-20V-S / BU20P
5VNPD 1 A-1 5VNPD A-20
CLUD1 3 TR-P-H/PHNR-12-H - PHHR-12-H/ BU12P
A-2 CLUD1 A-19
D-GND 5 A-3 D-GND A-18 3 5VNPD 10 1 5VNPD
2 CLUD1 11 2 CLUD1
5VNPD 7 A-4 5VNPD A-17 1 D-GND 12 3 D-GND
CPED1 9 A-5 CPED1 A-16 6 5VNPD 7
1 5VNPD
D-GND 11 A-6 D-GND A-15 5 CPED1 8
2 CPED1
4 D-GND 9
3 D-GND
5VN 13 A-7 5VN A-14 9 5VN 4
CPFD1 15 A-8 CPFD1 A-13 8 CPFD1 5 1 5VN
D-GND 17 A-9 D-GND A-12 7 D-GND 6 2 CPFD1
12 5VN 1 3 D-GND
A-18 5VN A-3 11 DSW_C 2
1 5VN
A-19 DSW_C A-2 10 D-GND 3
2 DSW_C
A-20 D-GND A-1 3 D-GND
5VNPD 19 A-10 5VNPD A-11 1 5VNPD

CSPD1 21 A-11 CSPD1 A-10 2 CSPD1
D-GND 23 A-12 D-GND A-9 3 D-GND
D-GND 25 A-13 D-GND A-8 2 D-GND

CSS11 27 A-14 CSS11 A-7 3 CSS11
6. Tray paper feed section
PCU CSS12 29 A-15 CSS12 A-6 4 CSS12

PWB CSS13 31 A-16 CSS13 A-5 5 CSS13
CSS14 33 A-17 CSS14 A-4 6 CSS14
S6P-PH-K-S
TZS/CZHR-17V-CZHR-17V-Y / BU17P
PCU PWB
5VNPD 2 B-1 5VNPD B-17
CLUD2 4 B-2 CLUD2 B-16
D-GND 6 B-3 D-GND B-15
CN4
2 D-GND
3 CSS21
GND
GND
GND
24V3
24V3
24V3
/CPFC
INT24V2
4 CSS22
/CLUM2
/CLUM1
/CPUC2
/CPUC1
/CPFM_D
CPFM_LD
B-4 5VNPD B-14
/CPFM_CK
5VNPD 8
/CPFM_GAIN
B-5 CPED2 B-13 5 CSS23
CPED2 10
B-6 D-GND B-12 6 CSS24
D-GND 12
9
6
5
4
3
2
1
B28B-PHDSS-B
18
20
22
24
26
28
11
12
10
S6P-PH-K-S
5VN 14 B-7 5VN B-11
B-8 CPFD2 B-10
CPFD2 16
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
5VNPD 20 B-10 5VNPD B-8
PHDR-28VS-1
CSPD2 22 B-11 CSPD2 B-7

GND
GND
24V3
24V3
24V3
/CPFC
/CLUM2
/CLUM1
/CPUC2
/CPUC1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
SMP-10V-NC/SMR-10V-N
11
B-13 D-GND B-5
11
D-GND 26
CSS21 28 B-14 CSS21 B-4
CSS22 30 B-15 CSS22 B-3
6
CSS23 32 B-16 CSS23 B-2
CPED2
CPED1
CSS24 34 B-17 CSS24 B-1
3
B34B-PHDSS-B
7
5
12
10
CN10
8
5VN 30
(NC)
CLUD2
CLUD1
PAP-07V-S
DSW_C 24
D-GND 28
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
resere_in 26 (NC)
B30B-PHDSS-B
NC
GND
B07P-PASK
INT24V2
/CPFM_D
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_CK
/CPFM_GAIN
CSS23
CSS21
CSS13
CSS11
2
1
4
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
24V3
/CPUC2

2
1
24V3
CSS2
P-GND
24V3
P-GND
CPFD1
/CPFC
/CLUM1
/CLUM2
/CPUC1
CSS1
CPFD2
PHR-2 B2P-PH-K-S
PHR-2 B2P-PH-K-S
2
1
2
1
CSS22
CSS24
CSS12
CSS14
DSW_C
CSPD1
CSPD2
CPUC2
PHNR-9-H+
BU09P-TR-P-H 1 5VN
9 5VN 1 2 CPFD2
8 CPFD2 2 3 D-GND
7 D-GND 3
3 5VNPD 7 1 5VNPD
CPFM CPUC1
2 CLUD2 8 2 CLUD2
1 D-GND 9 3 D-GND
6 5VNPD 4
5 CPED2 5 1 5VNPD
4 D-GND 6 2 CPED2
3 D-GND
CPFC
1 5VNPD
CN1 2 CSPD2
INT24V1 1 3 D-GND
2 INT24V1
INT24V1 2
CLUM1
5 INT24V1
CLUM2
HPFM_B 3
6 HPFM_B
HPFM_B/ 4
3 HPFM_B/
HPFM_A/ 5
HPFM
1 HPFM_A/
HPFM_A 6
DRIVER MAIN PWB

4 HPFM_A
B06B-PAEK-1(BLUE)
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Tray 1 upper limit detection
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Tray 2 upper limit detection
CLUM1 Paper feed tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
CLUM2 Paper feed tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2) Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
CPED 1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Tray 1 paper empty detection
CPED 2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Tray 2 paper empty detection
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper feed tray section.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection Detects tray 1 paper pass.
(Paper entry detection)
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection Detects tray 2 paper pass.
(Paper entry detection)
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray section.
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
CSS1 Tray 1 installation detection Tray 1 installation defection
CSS2 Tray 2 installation detection Tray 2 installation defection
CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of tray 1 rear edge detection
CSS12 Tray 1 rear edge detection 2 1 to 4.
CSS13 Tray 1 rear edge detection 3 The paper size of tray 1 is detected.
CSS21 Tray 2 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of tray 2 rear edge detection
CSS22 Tray 2 rear edge detection 2 1 to 4.
CSS23 Tray 2 rear edge detection 3 The paper size of tray 2 is detected.
DSW_C Tray 1, 2 transport cover open/close detection Tray 1, 2 transport cover open/close detection
HPFM Horizontal transport motor Transports paper from the paper feed section to the transport motor drive system.
Transports paper from the right door section to the transport motor drive system.

2 Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper transport section.
4 Torque limiter Always provides a certain level of resistance to the rotation of the separation roller,
preventing against double feed.
6 Paper pickup roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper transport section.
8 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and the paper feed roller (No. 2 paper
feed tray) to the transport roller 7.
9 Transport roller 5 (drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
10 Transport roller 7 (drive) Transport paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2 and 3, 4 to the transport roller 8.
11 Rotating plate Lifts up the paper, and always keeps constant the paper feed position.
12 Transport roller 14 (drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 2 to the transport roller 4.
B. Operational descriptions (4) Paper remaining quantity detection method

(1) Paper feed front operation - The paper remaining quantity is judged from the number of rota-
tions of the remaining quantity sensor from starting the lift-up
- Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller operation of the paper feed tray to turning ON the upper limit
falls to turn ON the paper feed tray sensor.
sensor.
- The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up.
- The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate
stops at the specified position.
(2) Paper feed operation
- When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch
are turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup tim-
ing, feeding paper.
- At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport paper
to the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates
to prevent against double feed of paper.
(3) Paper remaining detection
- The notifying levels of paper remaining quantity are 4 steps in
total; 3 steps of paper remaining quantity and 1 step of paper
empty. The result is displayed.

2 ‘13/Nov
&IGURESHOWINGSTATETRANSITIONOFTHEREMAININGPAPERDETECTIONSENSORDURINGTRAYELEVATIONAND
CHANGESINSTATUSACCORDINGTOTHENUMBEROFREMAININGSHEETS
4HENO PAPERDETECTIONSENSORDETECTS #0%$

THESTATEOFNOREMAININGPAPER PAPERSENSOR
2
4RAY,IFT0LATE
2EMAINING0APER
$URINGNO PAPERDETECTION $ETECTION!CTUATOR
#30$
&IELD REMAININGPAPERDETECTION
3ENSORLOGIC,OW
2EMAININGPAPERPOSITION
&IELD
3ENSORLOGIC(I
&IELD
3ENSORLOGIC,OW

7. Paper transport section
RRM DRIVER MAIN PWB

CN3
INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1
INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1
PFMB/ 6 3 PFMB/
PFMB 3 4 PFMB
PFMA 1 5 PFMA
PFMA/ 4 6 PFMA/
PHR-6
1 PFM INT24V1 1 7 INT24V1

INT24V1 6 8 INT24V1
2 RRMB/ 3 9 RRMB/
RRMB 5 10 RRMB
RRMA 4 11 RRMA
RRMA/ 2 12 RRMA/
B6P-PH-K-R 13 N,C
PPD2 B13B-PASK-1
3
PCU PWB
BU06P-TR-P-H+PHNR-06-H CN5
5VNPD 1 4 5VNPD 3 11 5VNPD
PPD1 PPD1 2 5 PPD1 2 13 PPD1
GND 3 6 GND 1 15 GND
179228-3 3 5VNPD 4 12 5VNPD
2 PPD2 5 14 PPD2
1 GND 6 16 GND
B32B-PHDSS
5VNPD 1
PPD2 2
GND 3
179228-3

PFM Transport motor Drives transport between the registration roller and the paper feed section, transport between the registration
roller and the right door section.
PPD1 Registration pre-pre-detection Detects the paper in front of transport roller 8.
PPD2 Registration pre-detection Detects the paper in front of registration roller.
RRM Registration motor Drives the registration roller and controls ON/OFF.

1 Registration roller (drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. / Controls the transport timing of paper, and adjusts the relative
relations between images and paper.
2 Registration roller (idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the registration roller to give paper the transport power of the transport roller.
3 Transport roller 8 (drive) Transports the paper to registration roller.
Transport paper from each paper feed section to the registration roller with two or more transport rollers. The paper transport clutch controls
ON/OFF of each transport roller. The registration roller controls the relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images.
The registration roller controls the relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images. The registration roller is driven by the trans-
port motor. The relative positions of the paper and the transfer images are determined by the ON timing of the transport motor.

8. Paper exit section
DF11-4DP-SP1 DF11-8DP-SP2
4
1
2
3
4
2
8
6
1
3
7
5
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H P DF1B-26p S CN17
1 POFM_V 4 6 POFM_V 6 8 POFM_V
2 /POFM_CNT 3 7 /POFM_CNT 7 7 /POFM_CNT
3 P-GND 2 11 P-GND 11 5 P-GND
4 POFM_LD1 1 8 POFM_LD1 8 10 POFM_LD1
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H 9 POFM_LD2 9 9 POFM_LD2
1 POFM_V 4
2 /POFM_CNT 3
3 P-GND 2
4 POFM_LD2 1
R SM6P P
5 24V2 5 1 24V2 1 2 24V2
1 /OSM_XB 1 2 /OSM_XB 2 4 /OSM_XB
2 /OSM_XA 2 3 /OSM_XA 3 1 /OSM_XA
3 /OSM_B 3 4 /OSM_B 4 6 /OSM_B
4 /OSM_A 4 5 /OSM_A 5 3 /OSM_A
5VNPD 3
TFD2 2 13 TFD2 13 12 TFD2
D-GND 1
5VNPD 1
POD2 2 14 POD2 14 11 POD2
TFD2 HPOS D-GND 3
5VNPD 1
HOPS 2 15 HOPS 15 14 HOPS
D-GND 3
5VNPD 1
POD1 2 16 POD1 16 13 POD1
12 5VNPD 12 15 5VNPD
B16B-PHDSS-B
OSM
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
PCU PWB
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
POFM_2 5VNPD
DF11-6DP-SP1 DF11-6DP-SP1
1 POM_A/ 1
7 7
7 7
CN2
5
POM_A/ POM_A/ POM_A/
INT24V1 2 8 INT24V1 8 8 INT24V1 8 1 INT24V1
POD2 POM POM_B/ 3 9 POM_B/ 9 9 POM_B/ 9 4 POM_B/

DRIVER
MAIN
POM_A 4 10 POM_A 10 10 POM_A 10 6 POM_A
INT24V1 5 11 INT24V1 11 11 INT24V1 11 2 INT24V1 PWB
POM_B 6 12 POM_B 12 12 POM_B 12 3 POM_B
B12B-PASK-1
POFM_1 POD1

HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position.
OSM Shifter motor Performs offset of paper.
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects paper exit from fusing after detection fusing.
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the exit paper.
POFM_1 Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Cools the fusing unit.
POFM_2 Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side) Cools the fusing unit.
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller.
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects face-down paper exit tray full.

1 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper. / Transports paper to the right paper exit tray. / Transport paper to the duplex (ADU)
section.
- Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the transport roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the paper exit
roller 1, and discharged to the inner tray.
- When paper is discharged to the right tray, paper is sent to the paper exit roller 1. The paper exit drive motor rotates reversely. Paper is
passed through the right paper exit gate, and discharged to the right tray.

9. ADU section
CN5
INT24V1 7
INT24V1 8
DRIVER ADML_B 9
ADML_B/ 10
MAIN PWB ADML_A/ 11
ADML_A 12
B12B-PASK-1
2
5
6
3
1
4
S DF1B-26p P
ADML_B/
ADML_A/
CN3/CN4
ADML_B
ADML_A
INT24V1
INT24V1
ADMH_A 6 21 ADMH_A 21 1 ADMH_A
DRIVER ADMH_A/ 5 22 ADMH_A/ 22 2 ADMH_A/
ADMH_B/ 4 23 ADMH_B/ 23 6 ADMH_B/
SUB ADMH_B 3 24 ADMH_B 24 3 ADMH_B
PWB INT24V1 2 25 INT24V1 25 2 INT24V1
INT24V1 1 26 INT24V1 26 5 INT24V1
B06B-PASK
PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H ADUM_U

2 24V3 1
1 /ADUGS 2
CN2
TFD3 1 1 TFD3 6 1 TFD3
POD3 4 4 POD3 3
4
D-GND 5 5 D-GND 2 1 POD3
5VLED4 6 6 5VLED4 1 2 D-GND
PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H 3 5VLED4 5
POD3
TFD3
3 ADUGS
DSW_ADU 7 3 DSW_ADU 2 1 DSW_ADU
D-GND 8 2 D-GND 3 2 D-GND PRTPD
APPD1 10 1 APPD1 3 1 APPD1

D-GND 11 2 D-GND 2 2 D-GND APPD1
5VLED5 12 3 5VLED5 1 3 5VLED5 DSW_ADU
S16B-PHDSS-B PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
CN3(1/2) ADUM_L
APPD2 4 1 APPD2
D-GND 5 2 D-GND
5VLED10 6 3 5VLED10
S32B-PHDSS-B
RIGHT
DOOR I/F PCU PWB 1
P QR/P4 32PIN S CN7
PWB 9 24V3 9 26 24V3 2
25 /ADUGS 25 25 /ADUGS
CN1 FG 32 F-GND 32 FG
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 15 5VN
SIN3 3 2 SIN3 2 4 SIN3
SELIN1 4 18 SELIN1 18 3 SELIN1
APPD1 7 4 APPD1 4 6 APPD1
5VO_PRTPD
APPD2 8 20 APPD2 20 8 APPD2 APPD2

PRTPD
GND
APPD3 9
POD3 10 21 POD3 21 12 POD3
MPFD 11 6 MPFD 6 10 MPFD
5VNPD 16 10 5VNPD 10 16 5VNPD
1
2
3
MPWD 13 7 MPWD 7 13 MPWD

TH_M 14 23 TH_M 23 9 TH_M
HUD_M 15 8 HUD_M 8 11 HUD_M
S16B-PHDSS-B
11 5VO_PRTPD 11 1 5VO_PRTPD
12 PRTPD 12 2 PRTPD
16 GND 16 18 GND
B26B-PHDSS-B BU03P-TZ-S(LF)(SN)+CZHR-03V-S 03CZ-6H
1 PRTPD 3
2 GND 2
3 5VO_PRTPD 1

ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate.
ADUM_L ADU motor lower Drives the right door section.
ADUM_U ADU motor upper Drive the transport roller 13.
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects paper pass in the upstream of the duplex (ADU).
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects paper pass in the midstream of the duplex (ADU).
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Duplex (ADU) cover open/close detection
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit into the right tray.
PRTPD Paper exit tray paper detector Detects paper empty in the paper exit tray (Right paper exit tray).
(Right paper exit tray)
TFD3 Detects the right tray paper exit full. Detects the right tray paper exit full.

1 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
2 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
3 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Used to discharge paper.
4 Right paper exit gate Selects the paper path to transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section or to discharge paper to the right
tray.
5 Transport roller 13 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper exit roller 1 to the paper exit roller 2. Transports paper to the duplex
(ADU) section.
- Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the transport roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the paper exit
roller 1.
-At that time, paper is passed under the ADU reverse gate guide.
- When the specified time passes from detection of the paper lead edge by POD1, the paper exit drive motor rotates normally, and rotates
reversely after the specified time.
- By the reverse rotation of the paper exit drive motor, paper is sent to the reverse section. At that time, paper passes on the upper side of the
Ado gate which lowers by its own weight.
- The transport rollers 10 and 11 are driven by the ADU motor lower to transport paper to the duplex paper feed position.
- Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and then transported to the machine again.

6
7
8
P
1
2
SM-2Pin
BD PWB CN1
R
1
2
D-GND 4 1 D-GND
1
2
3
nBD 3 2 nBD
SM-3Pin
D-GND 2 3 D-GND
5VN 1 4 5VN
R
1
2
B4B-PH-K-S
SM-2Pin
5 D-GND
1
2
3
6 TH
LSU TH1 7 NC
P
1
2
LSUSS
D-GND 4 S7B-PH-K-S
6
TH 3
NC 2
NC 1
B7B-PH-K-S
CN20
B4B-PH-K-S CN9
10
1
2
3
4
7
6
(NC) 1 GND
CN500 CN3 2 INT5V
PCU PWB
/LSUSS_B
CCFM_LD
INT24V1
AK_CS_K#
CCFM_V
DGND 80 80 DGND AK_CS_K 10 3

P-GND
NC
SDA_KC 79 79 SDA_KC AK_CS_EEP_K 12 4 AK_CS_EEP_K#

AK_CS_C#
PCU PWB
SCL_KC 78 78 SCL _KC AK_CS_C 13 5
WP_KC 77 77 WP_KC AK_CS_EEP_C 14 6 AK_CS_EEP_C#
6
DGND 76 76 DGND AK_CS_M 15 7 AK_CS_M#

SDA_MY 75 75 SDA_MY AK_CS_EEP_M 16 8 AK_CS_EEP_M#
SCL_MY 74 74 SCL_MY AK_CS_Y#
CCFM
AK_CS_Y 17 9
WP_MY 73 73 WP_MY AK_CS_EEP_Y 18 10 AK_CS_EEP_Y#
DGND 72 72 DGND AK_TXD 4 11 AK_TXD_K#
LDCHK2 71 71 LDCHK2 Vref(PCU) 8 Vef
12
LDCHK1 70 70 LDCHK1
AK_RXD 2 13 AK_RXD_K

DGND 69 69 DGND
AK_SCLK 6 14 AK_SCLK_K#
AK_CS_EEP_K 68 68 AK_CS_EEP_K
(NC) 15 GND
AK_CS_K 67 67 AK_CS_K
(NC) 16 GND
MSET_K 66 66 MSET_K
nLDERR_K 65 65 nLDERR_K B16B-PHDSS-B
5
nINIT_K 64 64 nINIT_K
DGND 63 63 DGND
NC 62 62 NC
NC 61 61 NC
NC 60 60 NC
4
DGND 59 59 DGND
DT_C2- 58 58 DT_C2-
DT_C2+ 57 57 DT_C2+
2 3
DT_C1- 56 56 DT_C1- CN14
DT_C1+ 55 55 DT_C1+ +3.3V 1 6 +3.3V
AK_RXD 54 54 AK_RXD DGND 3 5 D-GND
AK_TXD 53 53 AK_TXD +5V 5 4 +5V
9
AK_SCLK 52 52 AK_SCLK D-GND 7 3 D-GND
AK_CS_EEP_Y 51 51 AK_CS_EEP_Y +24V 9 2 +24V
PGM
AK_CS_Y 50 50 AK_CS_Y P-GND 11 1 P-GND
AK_CS_EEP_M 49 49 AK_CS_EEP_M B6B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
S18B-PHDSS-B
AK_CS_M 48 48 AK_CS_M
AK_CS_EEP_C 47 47 AK_CS_EEP_C
CN4 CN13
AK_CS_C 46 46 AK_CS_C
LD PWB
19 (NC)
LSU PWB
MSET_Y 45 45 MSET_Y
+5V_LD 1 (NC)
nLDERR_Y 44 44 nLDERR_Y D-GND 2 20 D-GND
nINIT_Y 43 43 nINIT_Y nSCK_LSU 4 18 nSCK_LSU
DGND 42 42 DGND D-GND 3 17 D-GND
DGND 41 41 DGND nTRANS_DAT 5 15 nTRANS_DAT
DGND 40 40 DGND D-GND 6 16 D-GND
LSU_FAN
+3.3V 39 39 +3.3V nRSV_DAT 8 14 nRSV_DAT
1
DGND 38 38 DGND LSUASIC_RST 7 13 LSUASIC_RST
+5V_LDD 37 37 +5V_LDD nTRANS_RST 9 11 nTRANS_RST
+5V_LDD 36 36 +5V_LDD JOBEND_INT 10 12 JOBEND_INT
+5V_LD 35 35 +5V_LD TH_LSU 11 9 TH_LSU
+5V_LD 34 34 +5V_LD nPCU_TRG 12 10 nPCU_TRG

DGND 33 33 DGND VSYNC_K_N 13 7 VSYNC_K_N
DT_K1+ 32 32 DT_K1+ VSYNC_K_P 14 8 VSYNC_K_P
DT_K1- 31 31 DT_K1- 5 VSYNC_C_P
MOTHER PWB
VSYNC_C_P 15
DT_K2+ 30 30 DT_K2+ VSYNC_C_N 16 6 VSYNC_C_N
DT_K2- 29 29 DT_K2- VSYNC_M_N 17 3 VSYNC_M_N
P4_K 28 28 P4_K 4 VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_M_P 18
P3_K 27 27 P3_K 1 VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_P 19
nINIT_C 26 26 nINIT_C
VSYNC_Y_N 20 2 VSYNC_Y_N
nLDERR_C 25 25 nLDERR_C
S20B-PHDSS-B B20B-PHDSS-B
MSET_C 24 24 MSET_C
P4_C 23 23 P4_C
P3_C 22 22 P3_C
nINIT_M 21 21 nINIT_M
nLDERR_M 20 20 nLDERR_M CN5 CN15
MSET_M 19 19 MSET_M CH0_N 1 RD RD 23 CH0_N
P4_M 18 18 P4_M CH0_P 2 WH WH 24 CH0_P
P3_M 17 17 P3_M D-GND 3 SH SH 22 D-GND
P4_Y 16 16 P4_Y D-GND 4 SH SH 21 D-GND
P3_Y 15 15 P3_Y CH1_N 5 WH WH 19 CH1_N
#P2 14 14 #P2 CH1_P 6 RD RD 20 CH1_P
#P1 13 13 #P1 CH2_N 7 WH WH 17 CH2_N
#P0 12 12 #P0 CH2_P 8 RD RD 18 CH2_P
DT_Y1+ 11 11 DT_Y1+ D-GND 9 SH SH 16 D-GND
DT_Y1- 10 10 DT_Y1- D-GND 10 SH SH 15 D-GND
DT_Y2+ 9 9 DT_Y2+ CLK_N 11 WH WH 13 CLK_N
DT_Y2- 8 8 DT_Y2- CLK_P 12 RD RD 14 CLK_P
SDCLK 7 7 SDCLK CH3_N 13 WH WH 11 CH3_N
GAIN_FIX 6 6 GAIN_FIX CH3_P 14 RD RD 12 CH3_P
DT_M1+ 5 5 DT_M1+
D-GND 15 SH SH 10 D-GND
DT_M1- 4 4 DT_M1-
DT_M2+ 3 3 DT_M2+
CH4_N 17 WH WH 7 CH4_N
DT_M2- 2 2 DT_M2-
CH4_P 18 RD RD 8 CH4_P
DGND 1 1 DGND
ECLK_LSU_N 19 WH WH 5 ECLK_LSU_N
KX24-80R-6STH1
ECLK_LSU_P 20 RD RD 6 ECLK_LSU_P
10. LSU section
CN2 D-GND 21 SH SH 4 D-GND

nBRAKE 1 6 nBRAKE
HSYNC_LSU_P 23 RD RD 1 HSYNC_LSU_P
nPOLY _CK 2 5 nPOLY_CK
HSYNC_LSU_N 24 WH WH 2 HSYNC_LSU_N
nPOLY_LOCK 3 4 nPOLY_LOCK
3 S24B-PHDSS-B B24B-PHDSS-B
nPOLY_START 4 nPOLY_START
P-GND 5 2 P-GND
+24V1 6 1 +24V1
B6B-PH-K-S S6B-PH-K-S
CN6
1 FAN_24V
2 FAN_nREADY
3 P-GND
S3B-PH-K-S
CCFM Process air inlet fan motor Cools charger section of the process.
PGM Polygon motor Reflects the laser beams at constant-speed rotating.
LSU_FAN LSU cooling fan motor Cools the section LSU.
LSUSS LSU shutter solenoid Opens/closes the LSU shutter.

1 LD PWB Controls flashing of laser beams and the output values.
2 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams to focus.
3 f lens 1 Laser beams are refracted so that the laser scanning speed at the both ends of the OPC drum is the same as that
4 f lens 1 at the center.
5 Reflection mirror Assures the optical path for laser.
6 Cylindrical lens Collects the laser beams, and focuses it on the OPC drum.
7 Collective lens for BD Converges laser beams to the BD PWB.
8 BD PWB Detects the timing for starting laser scanning.
9 LSU PWB Laser beams are controlled and the polygon motor control signal is generated according to the PCU PWB control
signal and image data.
10 LSU thermistor Measures the temperature in LSU.
(1) Outline
Image data sent from the image process circuit through the PCU
are converted into laser beams which are radiated to the surface of
the OPC drum.
In this model, 2-laser system is employed where 2-laser diodes for
each color are radiated. The LSU unit is composed of the optical
element from laser to the polygon mirror, the primary system
including the mirror which assures light path, and the main scan-
ning system.
(2) Composition
(Primary system)
LD1 LD2 LD2 LD1 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2
(Scanning system) Main scanning direction
Rear
Scanning LD2
direction LD1
Scanning
direction
LD2
LD1
BK C M Y
Front

(Writing position on paper)
Paper exit direction

Rear
Scanning
direction
LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1
LD1 LD2 LD2 LD1
Front
(3) Outline of LSU specifications

Effective scan width : 307mm
Resolution: 1200dpi
Beam diameter: Main scan = 50 to 65µm, Sub scan = 60 to 75µm
Laser power: Max. 0.255mW
LD wavelength: 770 to 795nm

1
MC
MC-CL
CN1 CN4
GB-Y INT24V2 8 27 INT24V2
GB
P-GND 7 25 GND
GB-M
/HV_DATA 6 23 /HV_DATA#
MC
/HV_CLK 5 21 /HV_CLK#
GB-C
/HV_LD 4 19 /HV_LD1#
MC PWB
GB-K HV_REM 3 17 HV_REM#
MC_CL_ERR 2 15 MC_CL_ERR
GB
(1) 41cpm machine
MC-K MC_BK_ERR 1 16 MC_BK_ERR

B8B-PASK B28B-PHDSS-B
MC
PHNR-10-H/BU10P-TR-P-H/PHNR-10-H CN11
GND 1 9 GND 2 3 GND
NC 2
GB
11. OPC Drum section
DL_BK# 3 10 DL_BK# 1 1 DL_BK#
MC
PHNR-10-H/BU10P-TR-P-H/PHNR-10-H
NC 2
GB
DL_C# 3 10 DL_C# 1 21 DL_C#
GND 1 9 GND 2 4 GND
NC 2
DL_M# 3 10 DL_M# 1 2 DL_M#
PCU PWB
NC 2
2
DL_Y# 3 10 DL_Y# 1 22 DL_Y#
B40B-PADSS-1
DL_Y
CN13
DL_M
DHPD_K 1 17 DHPD_K
GND 2 18 GND
5VNPD_DHPD_K 3 19 5VNPD_DHPD_K
DL_C
DHPD_M 1 23 DHPD_M

GND 2 24 GND
5VNPD_DHPD_M 3 25 5VNPD_DHPD_M
B30B-PHDSS-B
DL_BK
DHPD_CL
DM_CL
R P CN2
5 INT24V1 5 1 INT24V1
6 INT24V1 6 2 INT24V1
3 DMBK_B 3 3 DMBK_B
4 DMBK_B/ 4 4 DMBK_B/
1 DMBK_A/ 1 5 DMBK_A/
2 DMBK_A 2 6 DMBK_A
7 INT24V1
8 INT24V1
INT24V1 2 9 DMCL_B
DM_K
DHPD_K
INT24V1 5 10 DMCL_B/
DMCL_B 3 11 DMCL_A/
DMCL_B/ 1 12 DMCL_A
DRIVER SUB PWB
DMCL_A/ 6 B12B-PASK-1
DMCL_A 4
DHPD_CL CL phase detection Detects the CL phase.
DM_K BK drum motor Drives the BK drum.
DM_M CL drum motor Drives the CL drum.
DL Discharge lamp (Y,M,C,BK) Light is radiated to the discharge lamp to discharge the OPC drum surface.
MC Main charger (Y,M,C,K) The OPC drum surface is charged negatively.
GB Grid (Y,M,C,K) The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.

1 OPC drum (Y,M,C,K) Latent electrostatic images are formed.
2 Cleaning blade Cleans and remove residual toner from the OPC drum surface.

1
MC
MC-CL
CN1 CN4
GB-Y INT24V2 8 27 INT24V2
GB
P-GND 7 25 GND
GB-M
/HV_DATA 6 23 /HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK 5 21 /HV_CLK#
1
GB-C
MC
/HV_LD 4 19 /HV_LD1#
MC PWB
GB-K HV_REM 3 17 HV_REM#
MC_CL_ERR 2 15 MC_CL_ERR
MC-K MC_BK_ERR 1 16 MC_BK_ERR
GB
B8B-PASK B28B-PHDSS-B
(2) 51cpm machine
1
CN11
MC
GND 1 9 GND 2 3 GND
NC 2
DL_BK# 3 10 DL_BK# 1 1 DL_BK#
GB
2
MC
NC 2
DL_C# 3 10 DL_C# 1 21 DL_C#
GB
GND 1 9 GND 2 4 GND
NC 2
DL_M# 3 10 DL_M# 1 2 DL_M#
PCU PWB
NC 2
DL_Y# 3 10 DL_Y# 1 22 DL_Y#
B40B-PADSS-1
2
CN13
DHPD_K 1 17 DHPD_K
GND 2 18 GND
DL_Y
5VNPD_DHPD_K 3 19 5VNPD_DHPD_K
DHPD_C 1 20 DHPD_C
GND 2 21 GND
5VNPD_DHPD_C 3 22 5VNPD_DHPD_C
DHPD_M 1 23 DHPD_M
GND 2 24 GND
5VNPD_DHPD_M 3 25 5VNPD_DHPD_M
DL_M
DHPD_Y 1 26 DHPD_Y
GND 2 27 GND CN1
5VNPD_DHPD_Y 3 28 5VNPD_DHPD_Y INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1
B30B-PHDSS-B INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1
DMM_B 3 3 DMM_B
DMM_B/
DL_C
1 4 DMM_B/
DHPD_Y
DMM_A/ 6 5 DMM_A/
DMM_A 4 6 DMM_A
7 INT24V1

INT24V1 2 8 INT24V1
DM_Y
INT24V1 5 9 DMY_B
DMY_B 3 10 DMY_B/
DL_BK
DHPD_M
DMY_B/ DMY_A/
DM_M
1 11
DMY_A/ 6 12 DMY_A
DMY_A 4 13 N,C
B13B-PASK-1
R SM-6Pin P CN2
5 INT24V1 5 1 INT24V1
DHPD_C
6 INT24V1 6 2 INT24V1
3 DMBK_B 3 3 DMBK_B
4 DMBK_B/ 4 4 DMBK_B/
DRIVER SUB PWB
1 DMBK_A/ 1 5 DMBK_A/
DM_C
2 DMBK_A 2 6 DMBK_A
7 INT24V1
DHPD_K
INT24V1 2 8 INT24V1
DM_K
INT24V1 5 9 DMC_B
DMC_B 3 10 DMC_B/
DMC_B/ 1 11 DMC_A/
DMC_A/ 6 12 DMC_A
DMC_A 4 B12B-PASK-1
DM_C C drum motor Drives the C drum.
DM_K BK drum motor Drives the BK drum.
DM_M M drum motor Drives the M drum.
DM_Y Y drum motor Drives the Y drum.
DHPD_C C phase detection Detects the C phase.
DHPD_M M phase detection Detects the M phase.
DHPD_Y Y phase detection Detects the Y phase.
DL Discharge lamp (Y,M,C,BK) Light is radiated to the discharge lamp to discharge the OPC drum surface.
MC Main charger (Y,M,C,K) The OPC drum surface is charged negatively.
GB Grid (Y,M,C,K) The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.

1 OPC drum (Y,M,C,K) Latent electrostatic images are formed.
2 Cleaning blade Cleans and remove residual toner from the OPC drum surface.
B. Operational descriptions 3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the

The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger. cleaning blade.
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images. the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main
charger.
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
Screen grid High voltage unit
Main corona unit 4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The Aluminum Aluminum
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt- layer layer
age applied to the screen grid. CGL CGL
2) Laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser CTL CTL
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
Aluminum
OPC drum layer
CGL
CTL Lens
OPC drum By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens,
light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
Laser beams CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the
When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other
and positive charges are generated. hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the
negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum. positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser lights are not
radiated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.

1
No.
TNM
CRUM
Signal name
1
CRUM (Y, M, C, K)
Toner transport screw

Toner motor (Y, M, C, K)
1
12. Toner supply section
Name
Name
CN15
1
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 2 5VN
/CRM_K_DT 9 2 /CRM_K_DT 2 4 /CRM_K_DT
/CRM_K_CK 11 3 /CRM_K_CK 3 3 /CRM_K_CK
TSR-04V-K
5VN 3 5 5VN 5 2 5VN
/CRM_C_DT 13 6 /CRM_C_DT 6 4 /CRM_C_DT

/CRM_C_CK 15 7 /CRM_C_CK 7 3 /CRM_C_CK
TSR-04V-K
5VN 2 9 5VN 9 2 5VN
/CRM_M_DT 10 10 /CRM_M_DT 10 4 /CRM_M_DT
/CRM_M_CK 12 11 /CRM_M_CK 11 3 /CRM_M_CK
CRUM(Y)

TSR-04V-K
5VN 4 13 5VN 13 2 5VN
/CRM_Y_DT 14 14 /CRM_Y_DT 14 4 /CRM_Y_DT
/CRM_Y_CK 16 15 /CRM_Y_CK 15 3 /CRM_Y_CK
CRUM(M)
B16B-PHDSS P SM-18Pin R TSR-04V-K
Data memory for toner cartridge.

CN14 CN3 CN5
24V3 22 12 24V3 +24V 1
TNM_Y_/B 11 1 TMY_/B +24V 2
TNM_Y
PCU PWB
TNM_Y_B 13 3 TMY_B TMK_A 3
CRUM(C)
TNM_Y_/A 15 5 TMY_/A TMK_/A

4
Toner supply motor to the developing unit

TNM_Y_A 17 7 TMY_A TMK_B 5
Transports toner to the toner transport pipe.

P-GND 19 9 P-GND TMK_/B 6
TNM_K_/B 21 17 TMK_/B CN4
TNM_K_B 23 15 TMK_B +24V 1
TNM_M
TNM_K_/A 25 13 TMK_/A +24V 2

TNM_K_A 27 11 TMK_A TMC_A 3
Function/Operation
Function/Operation
P-GND 29 19 P-GND TMC_/A
CRUM(K)
4
P-GND 12 2 P-GND TMC_B 5
TNM_M_A 14 10 TMM_A TMC_/B 6
TNM_M_/A 16 8 TMM_/A CN2
TNM_C
TNM_M_B 18 6 TMM_B +24V 1

TNM_M_/B 20 4 TMM_/B +24V 2
TNM_C_A 24 20 TMC_A TMM_A 3
TNM_C_/A 26 18 TMC_/A TMM_/A 4
TNM_C_B 28 16 TMC_B TMM_B 5
TNM_C_/B 30 14 TMC_/B TMM_/B 6
TNM_K
B30B-PHDSS B20B-PNDZS CN1

+24V 1
+24V 2
TMY_A 3
PWB
TMY_/A 4
TMY_B 5
TM-DRV
TMY_/B 6
When the toner cartridge is inserted into the machine, the lock
pawl is released and the supply shutter is opened.
The transport shutter is opened and closed by the shaft linked

with the developing lever.
The toner supply section of the developing unit is opened and

closed when the open/close level on the unit pushes the block
.

#.
).46 ).46
'.$ '.$
$6-?+?#+ $6-?+?#+
$6-?+?$ $6-?+?$
$6-?+?,$ $6-?+?,$
.#
.#
$6-?+
).46 ).46
'.$ '.$
$6-?#,?#+ $6-?#,?#+
௏ೞ
$6-?#,?$ $6-?#,?$
$6-?#,?,$ $6-?#,?,$
"2!+%.OTUSED
#7##7
).46 ).46
).46 ).46
'.$ '.$
'.$
$6-?#,?#+ $6-?#,?#+
௏ೞ
$6-?#,?$ $6-?#,?$
$6-?#,
$6-?#,?,$ $6-?#,?,$
"2!+%.OTUSED "" 0($33 "
#7##7
"3?+

#. #.
"3 9 ).46 ).46
-#07"
$ '.$ '.$
(6?$!4! (6?$!4!
"3 -
(6?#,+ (6?#,+
"3?#
(6?,$ (6?,$
"3 # (6?2%- (6?2%-
-#?#,?%22 -#?#,?%22

"3 + -#?"+?%22 -#?"+?%22
"" 0!3+ .# RESERVE?IN
"3?-
"" 0($33 "

4#3?+ 0(.2 ("50 42 0 ( #.
6 6. 6. 6.
"3?9
4#3?+ 4#3?+ 4#3?+ 4#3?+
0#507"
$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
4#3?+
43'?"+ 43'?"+ 43'?"+ 43'?"+
$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$

$6490?+ $6490?+ $6490?+
4.#25?+ 4.#25?+ 4.#25?+
6. 6. 6.
# 120 0 0

4#3?# 0(.2 ("50 42 0 (
6 6. 6. 6.

4#3?#
4#3?# 4#3?# 4#3?# 4#3?#
$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
43'?# 43'?# 43'?# 43'?#
$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$

$6490?# $6490?# $6490?#
4.#25?# 4.#25?# 4.#25?#

6. 6. 6.
4#3?-

# 120 0 0
4#3?- 0(.2 ("50 42 0 (
6 6. 6. 6.
4#3?- 4#3?- 4#3?- 4#3?-
13. Developing section
4#3?9
$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
43'?- 43'?- 43'?- 43'?-

$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
$6490?- $6490?- $6490?-
4.#25?- 4.#25?- 4.#25?-
6. 6. 6.
# 120 0 0
4#3?9 0(.2 ("50 42 0 (
6 6. 6. 6.
4#3?9 4#3?9 4#3?9 4#3?9
$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$

43'?9 43'?9 43'?9 43'?9
$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
$6490?9 $6490?9 $6490?9
4.#25?9 4.#25?9 4.#25?9
6. 6. 6.
# 120 0 0 "" 0!$33
"" !$33
DVM_CL Developing drive motor (Color) Color developing unit/Color drum drive
DVM_K Developing drive motor (Black) Black developing unit/Black drum drive
BS Developing bias (Y,M,C,K) Developer bias
TCS Toner density sensor (Y,M,C,K) Controls the toner density in the developing unit.

1 Developer roller Latent electrostatic images on the OPC drum are changed to visible images.
2 Mixing roller Mixing of developer
3 Toner filter (Y,M,C,K) Prevents dispersing of toner
This converts the electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum gen-
erated by the laser (writing) unit into visible images with toner.
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are stirred and transported
by the mixing roller.
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively
charged due to mechanical friction.
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC
component) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.

14. Transfer section
(1) Transfer section
1st TC PWB CN1 CN2

MC PWB CN1 CN4
1TC-Y 1TC_ERR 9 9 N,C INT24V2 8 27 INT24V2
HV_REM 1 8 HV_REM P-GND 7 25 P-GND
1TC-K-CC 2 7 1TC-K-CC /HV_DATA 6 23 /HV_DATA
1TC-M 1TC-C-CC 3 6 1TC-C-CC /HV_CLK 5 21 /HV_CLK
1TC-M-CC 4 5 1TC-M-CC /HV_LD 4 19 /HV_LD
1TC-Y-CC 5 4 1TC-Y-CC HV_REM 3 17 HV_REM
1TC-C
1TC-REV 6 3 1TC-REV MC_CL_ERR 2 15 MC_CL_ERR
P-GND 7 2 P-GND MC_BK_ERR 1 16 MC_BK_ERR
1TC-K INT24V2 8 1 INT24V2 B8B-PASK 13 1TC_ERR
B9B-PASK B9B-PASK B28B-PHDSS-B
SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N CN20

1TUD_CL 1 1 1TUD_CL 1 22 1TUD_CL
5VNPD_1TUD_CL 3 3 5VNPD_1TUD_CL 3 21 5VNPD_1TUD_CL
1TUD_K 1 1 1TUD_K 1 27 1TUD_K

5VNPD_1TUD_K 3 3 5VNPD_1TUD_K 3 29 5VNPD_1TUD_K
4 PTC_HEAT 4 30 PTC_HEAT
SMP-04V-NC / SMR-04V-N B30B-PHDSS-B
5 6 1TURC_R
CN13
8 INT24V2 1 1
5
INT24V2
GND 2 GND
/DVM_K_CK 4 9 /DVM_K_CK
1TURC /DVM_K_D
DVM_K_LD
5
7
11
13
/DVM_K_D
DVM_K_LD
1 DVM_K NC
NC
3
6
1 24V3 1 15 24V3
1TC_CMY 1TUD_CL 2 /1TURC 2 16 /1TURC
1TC_K 1TUD_K 1
2
24V3
/1TURC_R
1
2
29
30
24V3
/1TURC_R
B30B-PHDSS-B
3
BTM CN1/CN3
INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1
14 INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1
2 15 BTM_B
BTM_B/
4
6
3
4
BTM_B
BTM_B/
BTM_A/ 3 5 BTM_A/
7 BTM_A 1 6 BTM_A
8 PTC B6B-PASK-1
B7B-PASK-1
CN15
3 2TC 2nd TC PWB CN1
1
3
GND
GND
9 PTC
B2P-VH
INT24V2
P-GND
1
2
2
4
INT24V2
GND
/TC_DATA 3 6 /TC_DATA#
/TC_CLK 4 8 /TC_CLK#
/TC_LD 5 10 /TC_LD#
4 /HV_REM 6 5 /HV_REM#
2-TC PTC_ERR 7 7 PTC_ERR
13 PS-187 /PTC_CLK 8
B8B-PASK
9 /PTC_CLK
B10B-PHDSS-B
11
PCU PWB
1TNFD
10
DF1B-24DEP-2.5RC/
WTNM 12 SLP-02V / SLR-02VF DF1B-24DES-2.5RC CN16

1 WTNM_1 1 17 WTNM_1 17 11 WTNM_1
2 WTNM_2 2 19 WTNM_2 19 13 WTNM_2
1TNFD 1 21 1TNFD 21 7 1TNFD

D-GND 2 23 GND 23 9 GND
B34B-PHDSS-B

1TC_CMY Primary transfer output (CMY) Color transfer high voltage
1TC_K Primary transfer output (K) B/W transfer high voltage
1TNFD Waste toner full detection switch Waste toner full detection
1TUD_CL Transfer belt separation CL detection Color transfer roller position detection
1TUD_K Transfer belt separation BK detection B/W transfer folder position detection
1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch Transfer roller separation control
1TURC_R Primary transfer separation reverse clutch Controls the primary transfer separation mode.
2TC Secondary belt transfer output Secondary transfer high voltage
BTM Transfer belt motor Drives the transfer belt.
DVM_K Developing drive motor (K) Transfer unit drive (Commonly used with the B/W developing drive roller)
WTNM Waste toner drive motor Transports waste toner.
PTC PTC output PTC high voltage

1 Primary transfer cleaner blade Clean and remove residual toner from the intermediate transfer belt.
2 Intermediate transfer belt Toner on the drum is transferred to form toner images on the belt.
3 Primary transfer roller Transfers toner images on the OPC drum to the intermediate transfer belt.
4 Primary transfer belt drive roller Drives the transfer belt.
5 Primary transfer belt follower roller Transfer belt follower.
6 Primary transfer belt tension roller Apply a tension to the transfer belt.
7 Belt CL brush Transfer belt back surface cleaning.
8 PTC opposing roller Roller to flow a PTC current.
9 Secondary transfer belt Transfers toner images on the intermediate transfer belt to paper.
10 Secondary transfer roller Transfers toner images on the intermediate transfer belt to paper.
11 Secondary transfer belt dirve roller Drives the transfer belt.
12 Secondary transfer belt follower roller Transfer belt follower.
13 PTC unit Reduces the positive charges on the primary transfer belt.
14 Registration backup shaft Drives the registration backup roller.
15 Registration backup roller Holds the belt position in the registration section in the process control.
(2) Pro-reg sensor section
PCU PWB
CN6 P SM2P R
24V3 18 15 24V3 15 1 24V3 1
/PCSS 17 14 /PCSS 14 2 /PCSS 2
REGS_R_LED# 8 13 REGS_R_LED# 13
REGS_R 6 12 REGS_R 12
GND 4 11 GND 11
5VNPD 2 10 5VNPD 10 3 REGS_R_LED#
4 REGS_R PCSS
PCS_CL 9 8 PCS_CL 8 2 GND
1 5VNPD
5 PCS_R
REGS_F_LED# 7 4 REGS_F_LED# 4
REGS_F 5 3 REGS_F 3
GND 3 2 GND 2 5 PCS_F REGS_R
1 1 3 REGS_F_LED#
5VNPD 1 5VNPD
4 REGS_F
B32B-PHDSS-B P SM18P R
2 GND
1 5VNPD
REGS_F

PCSS Color image density sensor PWB Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the registration sensor.
reflection plate shutter solenoid
REGS_F Color image density sensor/ Detection of registration shift on the machine front (F) side, and detection of the color toner patch
Image registration sensor F density.
REGS_R Black image density sensor/ Detection of registration shift on the machine rear (R) side, and detection of the black toner patch
Image registration sensor R density.

(1) Transfer operation
a. Transfer operation (2) Primary (intermediate) transfer roller separation
mechanism and contents
The primary transfer roller operates pressing all the rollers, sepa-
rates all the rollers, or presses only black depending on the opera-
tion mode.
When the roller separation clutch (1TURC) turns ON, the transfer
cam rotates to shift the primary transfer link and the primary trans-
fer arm linked with the cam in the arrow direction, performing sepa-
rating operation of the roller.
All pressing
PTC Constant
current
Toner images on the OPC drum are transferred to the pri- All separating
mary transfer belt by applying the positive high voltage to
the primary transfer roller.
Negative charge is generated by the PTC unit, and this
weakens positive charges on the transfer belt, reducing the
attractive force between the primary transfer belt and toner.
By this operation, the transfer efficiency in the secondary
transfer is improved.
Next, the positive high voltage is applied to the secondary
transfer belt, and toner images on the primary transfer belt Pressing only black
are transferred to paper. In the monochrome mode and the
color mode, the black (K) transfer voltage is selected.
b. Cleaning operation
In the cleaning operation, the polarity of the applying volt-
age of the secondary transfer belt is made negative, and
unnecessary toner is transferred to the primary transfer
belt, and it is cleaned by the primary transfer belt cleaning
blade, and transported to the waste toner section. It also performs all pressing, all separating, or pressing only black
with the roller separation sensors (1TUD_CL, 1TUD_BK) and the
separation detection arm.
1TUD_CL 1TUD_BK
All pressing ON OFF
All separating OFF ON
Pressing only black OFF OFF
The primary transfer drive and the secondary transfer drive are
commonly used with the black developing motor.
Constant
voltage

3. Image density detection and registration
detection
Image density detection and image registration detection are per-
formed by the sensors arranged on the front frame side and the
rear frame side.
a. Function and operation of the color image density
sensor/image registration sensor F (REGS F)
provided on the front frame side
When the process control is performed with one sensor, the color
toner patch density is detected.
When the image registration adjustment is performed, the image
registration shift on the front frame side is detected.
The shutter plate is provided on the sensor. The shutter plate is
closed before operation of the process control. The sensor sensitiv-
ity adjustment is performed by using the shutter plate as the refer-
ence reflection plate.
The operation of the shutter plate is controlled by the process con-
trol shutter solenoid (PCSS).
b. Function and operation of the black image density
sensor/image registration sensor R (REGS R)
provided on the rear frame side
When the process control is performed with one sensor, the black
toner patch density is detected.
When the image registration adjustment is performed, the image
registration shift on the rear frame side is detected.

2
RTH(UM)Non-contact SMR-03V-B SMP-03V-BC
1 TH_UM_CS_IN 1
2 TH_UM_IN 2
2 ‘13/Nov
3 D-GND 3
RTH(US)Contact SMR-02V-B SMP-02V-NC

CN16 DF1B-24DES-2.5RC / DF1B-24DEP-2.5RC PHR-6 1 TH_US_IN 1 DF1B-20DEP-2.5RC / DF1B-20DES-2.5RC
/PRM_XB 30 1 2 D-GND 2 Drawer RWZ R RCZR-10V-PS CN-18
9 /PRM_XB 9 /PRM_/B RCZR-10V-PS P
/PRM_XA 28 7 /PRM_XA 7 2 /PRM_/A A-10 TH_UM_CS_IN A-1 2 TH_UM_CS_IN 2 1 TH_UM_CS_IN
PRM
24V3_PRM 20 1 24V3_PRM 1 3 24V3 A-9 TH_UM_IN A-2 18 TH_UM_IN 18 8 TH_UM_IN
24V3_PRM 22 12 24V3_PRM 12 4 24V3 A-8 GND A-3 16 GND 16 6 GND
/PRM_B 26 5 /PRM_B 5 5 /PRM_B A-7 TH_US_IN A-4 14 TH_US_IN 14 4 TH_US_IN
/PRM_A 24 3 /PRM_A 3 6 /PRM_A A-6 GND A-5 12 GND 12 7 GND
RTH(US) (NC) A-5 (NC) A-6 (NC) 10 TH_LM_IN 10 9 TH_LM_IN
2
Contact (NC) A-4 (NC) A-7 (NC) 8 GND 8 2 GND
SMR-02V-B SMP-02V-BC RCZR-10PIN
PHDR-26VS-1
5VN 34 11 5VN 11 1 5VN 1 TH_LM_IN 1 B-6 TH_LM_IN B-4
PCU PWB
TH_US_IN
HLPCD 33 13 HLPCD 13 2 HLPCD 2 D-GND 2 B-5 GND B-5
GND 32 15 GND 15 3 D-GND RCZR-09V-PS RCZR-9PIN RCZR-09V-PS
B34B-PHDSS-B PHDR-34VS-1
1 N-HL(LM) 1 1 N-HL(LM) 1
SLR-01VF SLP-01V 3 N-HL(US) 3 3 N-HL(US) 3
15. Fusing section
2 N-HL(UW) 2 2 N-HL(UW) 2
CN-16
1 N-HL(UM) 1 4 N-HL(UM) 4
5 L-HL(UM/UW) 5
GND
YLP-03V / YLR-03VF
6 L-HL(US/LM ) 6 /HL_PR
INT24V1
HLPCD
HLOUT_US
HLOUT_LM
HLOUT_UM
HLOUT_UW
TH_UM_IN
B34B-PHDSS-B
8
6
4
CN18 DF1B-26DES-2.5RC / DF1B-26DEP-2.5RC

16
14
12
10
WEB_M1 15 18 WEB_M1out 18 1 WEB_M1out 1

WEB_M2 16 19 WEB_M2out 19 2 WEB_M2out 2
YLP-04V YLR-04VF
SLR-02V / SLP-02V 2 L-HL(US/LM) 2
FUFM_V 19
FUFM_LD 20 1 L-HL(UM/UW) 1
HL_LM
GND 21 4 L-HL(UM/UW) 4
3 L-HL(US/LM) 3
9
B26B-PHDSS-B PHDR-26VS-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(NC) 8
TS UM
PHDR-34VS-1 PAP-08V-S CN-5
PCU PWB
7
9
WEBM
B08B-PASK-1
N.C
D-GND
/HL_PR
INT24V1
HL_OUT_US
HL_OUT_LM
HL_OUT_UM
HL_OUT_UW
VLR-03V
CN3
2 L-HL(US)
3 L-HL(UM)
1 L-HL(UW)
3 N-HL(LM)
TS US
(NC)2 N.C
3
1
2
VLP-03V
1 N-HL(UW)
VHR-3N B2P3-VH-B
CN2
9
1 N-HL(US)
(NC) 2 N.C
TS LM
3 N-HL(UM)
VLP-03V-BK B03P-VL-K
3
10
CN4
1
3 L-HL(UM/UW)
6
9
HL PWB
(NC) 2 N.C
1 L-HL(US/LM)
VLP-03V-R B03P-VL-RD
4
HL_UM/US/UW
5
1
8
TH_LM_IN
7
N-HL(LM) 1
SLR-01VF / SLP-01V

CN18 PHDR-26VS-1 P Drawer RWZ R RCZR-10V-PS
5VN 12 15 5VN 15 A-8 5VN A-3
WEBD 13 13 WEBD 13 A-9 WEBD A-2
GND 14 11 GND 11 A-10 GND A-1
B26B-PHDSS-B DF1B-20DES-2.5RC/DF1B-20DEP-2.5RC RCZR-10V-PS
RCZR 10PIN
3
2
15VN
GND
WEBD
3
2
1
WEBEND
3
2
1
VHPLG248NL1-1
FUFM
FUM
1 5VN
P-GND
FUFM_/V
FUFM_LD
2 WEBD
CN16 SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N 3 GND
INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
3
2
1
GND 5 2 2 2 P-GND
P-GND
/FUM_CK 27 3 /FUM_CK 3 (NC) 3 NC
/FUM_D 29 4 /FUM_D 4 4 /FUM_CK
FUM_LD 31 5 FUM_LD 5 5 /FUM_D
6 NC 6 (NC) 6 FUM_LD
B34B-PHDSS-B PHDR-34VS-1 B6B-PH-K-R(RED) PHR-6-R(RED)
FUFM Fusing cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing section.
HL_LM Heater lamp (HL_LM) Heats the fusing roller (B).
HL_UM/US/UW Heater lamp (HL_UM/US/UW) Heats the fusing roller (F1), and fusing belt.
HLPCD Fusing pressure detector Detects the fusing pressure state.
PRM Fusing pressure control motor Controls ON/OFF of the fusing roller pressure.
TH_LM_IN Fusing temperature sensor Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (B).
TH_UM_IN Fusing temperature sensor (Main) Detects the surface temperature at the center of the fusing belt.
TH_US_IN Fusing temperature sensor (Sub) Detects the suffered temperature at the edge section of the fusing belt.
TS LM Thermostat LM Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_LM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
TS UM Thermostat UM Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_UM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated. (Center section)
TS US Thermostat US Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_US) circuit when the fusing section is overheated. (Edge section)
WEBEND Web end detector Detects web end of the fusing unit.

1 Fusing roller (F1) Heats the fusing belt.
2 Fusing roller (F2) The cushion layer of the roller forms a wide nip between the fusing belt and fusing roller (B).
3 Fusing roller (B) Heats the back surface of paper to fuse toner on the paper.
4 Transport roller 9 Transports paper from the fusing roller to the paper exit roller.
5 HL control PWB Drives the heater lamp.
6 Fusing web roller Cleans the fusing roller (B).
7 Discharge brush Discharges static electricity generated in the fusing section to the ground.
8 Separation plate Separates the whole surface of paper. (non-contact)
9 Separation pawl Separates fusing roller (B) when it is attached.
10 Fusing belt Heats the front surface of paper to fuse toner on the paper.
(1) Outline of operations (2) Fusing operation
This machine employs the fusing system by the belt. Color toner (Y, M, C, and K) on paper is heated and pressed by the
The features of the belt-type fusing system are as follows: fusing belt, fusing roller (F2), and fusing roller (B) to be fused on
paper.
1) Short warm-up time
Toner in the four layers on the paper is fused by heating from up
2) Low power consumption
and down and both sides.
3) Wide nip providing high fusing capability
The fusing belt, fusing roller (F2) which is provided with the cushion
(2) Heater lamp driving layer, and fusing roller (B) realize the following operations.
The surface temperature of the heat roller and the fusing belt 1) The nip amount is increased and the heat capacity to paper is
detected by the fusing temperature sensor is sent to the PCU. If the increased.
temperature is lower than the specified temperature, the heater 2) By pressing with the flexible roller, toner of many layers can be
lamp lighting signal is sent from the PCU to the heater lamp drive fused without being deformed.
circuit in the HL PWB. 3) An even pressure is applied to rough surface of toner (due to
When the power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned ON, the multi-layer composition).
the AC power is supplied to the heater lamp to light the lamp and
heat the fusing belt.
A thermostat is provided as a safety device against an abnormally
high temperature in the heat roller and the fusing belt.
Fusing roller (F2)
When the thermostat is opened, the AC power supply to the heater Fusing roller (B)
lamp is cut off.
Fusing belt
The heater lamp is arranged to fusing roller (F1) and fusing roller
(B).
In heater lamp (HL_UM/US/UW), three lamps are integrated into
one.
Heater lamp operations
Heater lamp Operation

Heater lamp Heats the center of the fusing roller (F1) and the
(HL_UM) fusing belt.
Heater lamp Heats the edges of the fusing roller (F1) and the
(HL_US) fusing belt.
Heater lamp Heats fusing roller (F1) and the fusing belt.
(HL_UW) Turns ON when warming up.
Heater lamp Heats fusing roller (B). Does not turn ON while heater Fusing roller
(HL_LM) lamp (HL_UM) and heater lamp (HL_LS) light up. (F2) Fusing roller
(B)
Fusing belt

2 ‘13/Nov
(3) Automatic pressure release system (4) Fusing section cleaning

Normally the upper and lower heat rollers are pressed. When, how- In this machine, the fusing roller (B) is cleaned by the web.
ever, the following conditions are satisfied, the pressure is The cleaning unit is composed of the web feed roller, the winding
released. roller, and the backup roller which presses the web onto the fusing
- When the machine shifts to the preheat mode. roller (B) with the proper pressure.
- When the machine shifts to the auto power shut off mode. Residual toner on the fusing roller (B) is cleaned by the web which
- When the power switch of the operation panel is turned OFF. contains silicon oil.
- When the machine is left for 90 sec under the ready state.
Backup roller
- When in the envelope mode.
- When a jam occurs.
a. Pressure release operation Winding side
The fusing pressure control motor (PRM) rotates to turn ON the
fusing pressure detector (HLPCD) (H level). When the specified
time passes after turning ON the fusing pressure detector (HLPCD)
(H level) by rotation of the fusing pressure control roller (PRM), the
pressure release motor stops to complete the pressure release
Web sheet
operation.
Feed side
Fusing roller (B)
HLPCD (5) Web life end detection

The web life near end is detected by the web print counter. When
the life reaches 300K prints, the following message is displayed to 2
notify that the replacement timing is approaching.
(Maintenance required.: FK3)
The web life end is detected by the web end detector. When the life
end is detected, a job is forcibly interrupted even the job is being
performed.
After replacing the web with a new one, reset the web life counter
and the web send counter to clear the life end state.
b. Pressure release operation

When the end user makes some operations or when the machine
receives the Job signal, the fusing pressure control motor (PRM)
rotates reversely to drive the pressure release lever to the pressing
state.
When the specified time passes from turning OFF the fusing pres-
sure detector (HLPCD), the pressure release motor stops to com-
plete the pressing operation.
HLPCD
When turning OFF the main power switch of the machine, be sure
to turn OFF the power switch of the operation panel and check to
confirm that the LCD display goes off before turning OFF the main
power switch.
If the main power switch is turned OFF with the LCD lighted, the
power is cut off before completion of the pressure release opera-
tion. If this state is kept for a long time, the fusing roller may be
deformed.

16. Fan and filter
The machine is provided with the following fan to discharge air from the process section and cool the fusing section and the power unit.

FUFM Fusing cooling fan Prevents heat generated in the fusing section from lowing into the toner cartridge and the paper exit section.
POFM Paper exit cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
POFM2 Paper exit cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
PROFM Process fan motor 1 Blows air to the main charger and the PTC unit to promote discharging of ozone generated.
PROFM2 Process fan motor 2 Discharges ozone generated in the main charger and the PTC unit, and cools the developing unit.
PSFM Power cooling fan motor Cools the power unit.
The flow of air is as shown in the figure below.
02/&- 03&-
0/&-

0/&-
&5&-
02/&-
The machine is provided with the following filter to remove ozone generated in the process section.
Filter process fan motor 1 produces an air flow to generate a difference in the air pressure between inside outside of the developing unit, pre-
venting toner from splashing from the open port of the developing unit.
The toner filter prevents toner from leaking from the slit caused by this difference in air pressure.

1 Toner filter Prevents toner splash.
2 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.

17. Operations and specifications of counters
A. Counters and count conditions
Counter
Job log
Condition Print image Total counter User counter Pixel count Invalid paper
Valid paper counter
counter
Normal discharge paper Valid image Counted Counted Counted as a Counted Not counted
corresponding job.
Simplex surface white paper in White paper Not counted Not counted Not counted Not counted Not counted
the duplex job
White paper of cover paper, White paper Select with the Select with the Not counted Select with the Not counted
insert paper setting of SIM26-52. setting of SIM26-52. setting of SIM26-52.
Size illegal Transfer Valid image for Counted Counted Counted as a Counted Not counted
completed some paper corresponding job.
sizes
Transfer not White paper Not counted Not counted Not counted Not counted Counted
completed
Document jam involvement in White paper Not counted Not counted Not counted Not counted Counted
the RSPF pulling mode
Anti copy Paper for Invalid image Counted Counted Counted as a Counted Not counted
transfer OFF corresponding job.
Following paper White paper Not counted Not counted Not counted Not counted Counted
White paper at CA cancel White paper Not counted Not counted Not counted Not counted Counted
Remaining paper at a paper Not discharged Not counted Not counted Counted as the Not counted Not counted
jam other.
Amount of print cancel for - - - Counted as the - -
paper feed slip or paper empty other.
B. Maintenance system counters (Print counter)

Count-up number
Simplex surface
Duplex surface print
print
Display Reset Paper feed tray - Paper feed tray - ADU paper feed -
Counter name Count-up timing
SIM SIM Paper exit ADU paper entry Paper exit
completed completed completed
Small Large Small Large Small Large
size size size size size size
Maintenance counter (Total) All paper exit operations SIM22-13 SIM24-4 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Maintenance counter (Color) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Fusing belt print counter All paper exit operations SIM22-13 SIM24-4 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Fusing roller print counter All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Pressure roller print counter All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Separation pawl print counter All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Separation plate print counter All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Fusing web print counter All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Primary transfer unit print All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
counter completed
Transfer blade print counter All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
PTC print counter All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Secondary transfer unit print All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
counter completed
PS paper dust cleaner print All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
counter completed
Developer cartridge print All paper exit operations SIM22-13 SIM24-5 1 2(1)*3 1 2(1)*3 1 2(1)*3
counter (K) completed SIM25-2
Developer cartridge print Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*3 1 2(1)*3 1 2(1)*3
counter (C) completed
counter (M) completed
counter (Y) completed

Count-up number
Simplex surface
print
Drum cartridge print counter (K) All paper exit operations SIM22-13 SIM24-4 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Drum cartridge print counter (C) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Drum cartridge print counter (M) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Drum cartridge print counter (Y) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Main charger print counter (K) All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Main charger print counter (C) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Main charger print counter (M) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Main charger print counter (Y) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Drum blade print counter (K) All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Drum blade print counter (C) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Drum blade print counter (M) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Drum blade print counter (Y) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Ozone filter print counter All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Toner cartridge print counter (K) All paper exit operations SIM22-13 - 1 2(1)*4 1 2(1)*4 1 2(1)*4
completed
Toner cartridge print counter (C) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*4 1 2(1)*4 1 2(1)*4
completed
Toner cartridge print counter (M) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*4 1 2(1)*4 1 2(1)*4
completed
Toner cartridge print counter (Y) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*4 1 2(1)*4 1 2(1)*4
completed
*1: The number in ( ) is the count-up number when the large-size count-up setting is changed to the single count-up with SIM26-5 (Mainte-
nance count (B/W, COL)).
*3: The number in ( ) is the count-up number when the large-size count-up setting is changed to the single count-up with SIM26-5 (Developer
count (B/W, COL)).
*4: The number in ( ) is the count-up number when the large-size count-up setting is changed to the single count-up with SIM26-5 (Total count
(B/W, COL)).

C. Maintenance system counters (Number of rotations)
Count-up number
Simplex surface
print
Fusing belt accumulated While the fusing motor is SIM22-13 SIM24-4 RPM (Unit: 1)
rotation time driven. * Calculated from the traveling distance.
Fusing roller accumulated While the fusing motor is
rotation time driven.
Pressure roller accumulated While the fusing motor is
Separation pawl accumulated While the fusing motor is
Separation plate accumulated While the fusing motor is
Primary transfer unit While the primary transfer unit
accumulated rotation time is driven.
Transfer blade accumulated While the drum (K) is driven.
rotation time
PTC accumulated rotation time While the drum (K) is driven.
Secondary transfer unit While the secondary transfer
accumulated rotation time unit is driven
Developer cartridge While the drum (K) is driven. SIM22-13 SIM24-5
accumulated rotation time (K) SIM25-2
Developer cartridge While the drum (C) is driven.
accumulated rotation time (C)
Developer cartridge While the drum (M) is driven.
accumulated rotation time (M)
Developer cartridge While the drum (Y) is driven.
accumulated rotation time (Y)
Drum cartridge accumulated While the drum (K) is driven. SIM22-13 SIM24-4
rotation time (K)
Drum cartridge accumulated While the drum (C) is driven.
rotation time (C)
Drum cartridge accumulated While the drum (M) is driven.
rotation time (M)
Drum cartridge accumulated While the drum (Y) is driven.
rotation time (Y)
Main charger accumulated While the drum (K) is driven.
rotation time (K)
Main charger accumulated While the drum (C) is driven.
rotation time (C)
Main charger accumulated While the drum (M) is driven.
rotation time (M)
Main charger accumulated While the drum (Y) is driven.
rotation time (Y)
Drum blade accumulated While the drum (K) is driven.
rotation time (K)
Drum blade accumulated While the drum (C) is driven.
rotation time (C)
Drum blade accumulated While the drum (M) is driven.
rotation time (M)
Drum blade accumulated While the drum (Y) is driven.
rotation time (Y)
Toner motor accumulated While the toner motor (K) is SIM22-13 - RPM (Unit: 1)
rotation time (K) driven. * Calculated from the rotating time.
Toner motor accumulated While the toner motor (C) is
rotation time (C) driven.
Toner motor accumulated While the toner motor (M) is
rotation time (M) driven.
Toner motor accumulated While the toner motor (Y) is
rotation time (Y) driven.

D. Maintenance system counters (Number of use days)
Count-up number
Simplex surface
print
Count-up Display Reset Paper feed tray - Paper feed tray - ADU paper feed -
Counter name
timing SIM SIM Paper exit ADU paper entry Paper exit
Number of day that used maintenance counter Date change SIM22-13 SIM24-4 1 (Unit: day)
(Total)
Number of day that used maintenance counter
(Color)
Number of day that used fusing belt Date change SIM22-13 SIM24-4
(Excluding the 18cpm/20cpm machine)
Number of day that used fusing roller
Number of day that used pressure roller
Number of day that used separation pawl
Number of day that used separation plate
Number of day that used fusing web
Number of day that used primary transfer unit
Number of day that used transfer blade
Number of day that used PTC
Number of day that used secondary transfer unit
Number of day that used PS paper dust cleaner
Number of day that used developer cartridge (K) Date change SIM22-13 SIM24-5
Number of day that used developer cartridge (C) SIM25-2
Number of day that used developer cartridge (M)
Number of day that used developer cartridge (Y)
Number of day that used drum cartridge (K) Date change SIM22-13 SIM24-4
Number of day that used drum cartridge (C)
Number of day that used drum cartridge (M)
Number of day that used drum cartridge (Y)
Number of day that used main charger (K)
Number of day that used main charger (C)
Number of day that used main charger (M)
Number of day that used main charger (Y)
Number of day that used drum blade (K)
Number of day that used drum blade (C)
Number of day that used drum blade (M)
Number of day that used drum blade (Y)
Number of day that used ozone filter
Number of day that used toner cartridge (K) Date change SIM22-13 -
Number of day that used toner cartridge (C)
Number of day that used toner cartridge (M)
Number of day that used toner cartridge (Y)

E. Maintenance system counters (Other)
Count-up number
Simplex surface
print
Staple counter When requesting for staple SIM22-8 SIM24-3 Number of staples
Punch counter When requesting for punch 1
Manual paper feed counter (Total) When manual paper feed is SIM22-9 SIM24-2 1
started
Manual paper feed counter (Heavy When manual paper feed of
paper) heavy paper is started
(without distinction between
heavy paper 1 and 2)
Manual paper feed counter (OHP) When manual paper feed of
OHP sheet is started
Manual paper feed counter When manual paper feed of
(Envelope) envelopes is started
Tray 1 counter When tray 1 paper feed is
started
started (request)
started (request)
started (request)
LCC counter When LCC paper feed is
started (request)
ADU counter When ADU paper feed is SIM22-9 SIM24-2 1
started
Fusing web cleaning feed counter When the fusing web SIM22-13 SIM24-4 Number of pulses
(36cpm machine only) cleaning roller is rotated
Toner use number counter (K) When toner near end is SIM22-14 SIM24-35 1
Toner use number counter (C) detected (*2)
Toner use number counter (M)
Toner use number counter (Y)
Toner near end number counter (K) When toner near near end
Toner near end number counter (C) is detection
Toner near end number counter (M)
Toner near end number counter (Y)
F. RSPF/Scanner counter
Counter name Display SIM Reset SIM Count-up timing NOTE

RSPF counter SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When SPF document discharge is completed. Number of discharge of document from the
The front surface in duplex scan is counted SPF
when the reverse operation is stopped.
Scan counter SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When the scanner carriage feed is completed. Number of times of scan
Finish stamp counter SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When the stamp is ON. Number of use of the finish stamp
Cover open/close counter SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When the document cover close is detected. Number of open/close of the cover
Home detection counter SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When the home sensor ON is detected. Number of detection of the home position
Scanner lamp lighting time SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When the scanner lamp is lighted. Scanner lamp lighting time
counter

2 ‘13/Nov
37& 81,7 563) 81,7

[14]
3&7B+($7(5
MX-5141N
A. RSPF
237,21
7& 37&B+9
67036 63/6 633' 6&29
'(5,9(5< 81,7 '6:B) :710 71)' )8)0 5&)0 3&6)0 3&6)0 633' 63/6 633' 63('
6356
32' 32)0B) 630 63:6 633' 62&'
721(5B. 81,7 721(5B& 81,7 721(5B0 81,7 721(5B< 81,7 63)0
32' 32)0B5 659& 655& 633'
78'B. 78'B&/ '9&580B. '9&580B& '9&580B0 '9&580B<
7)' 260
1. Block diagram
563) '5,9(5 3:%

352&(66 '5,9( 81,7
6+326 )80 350
+/3&6 +/3&' 710B. 710B& 710B0 710B< 6&$11(5 81,7

:(%B0 $'80B/ ࡣᯛᶵ 237,21 ᑐᛂᮍᐃ
ᯛᶵࡢࡳ ᯛᶵࡢࡳ &&'
'0B&/ 31&
3:%
320 '0B. '0B& '0B0 '0B< :LUH /HVV $8',725
'59B /$1 3:%
$'80B+ 2&6:
68% 237,21 /(' '5,9(5 3:%
3:% 86% 6&1 256B/('
550 '90B. '90B&/ %70 &219 3:% 1)& 3:%
/(' 3:% 0+36
ELECTRICAL SECTION
)86(5 81,7
785& 2563'
7+B80 +/B80 ᯛᶵࡢࡳ '+3'B0 ᯛᶵࡢࡳ 0,0 23(5$7,21 81,7
785&B5 '+3'B& '+3'B&/ '+3'B<
7+B86 +/B86 ࡣᯛᶵ 728&+
'+3'B. /9'6 3$1(/
7+B/0 +/B/0 3:%
/&'
7+B(; +/B8: '/B. '/B& '/B0 '/B<
7+B80 :(%(1' 23( 3:%
'9B. 81,7 '9B& 81,7 '9B0 81,7 '9B< 81,7
027+(5
%:' 7&6B. 7&6B& 7&6B0 7&6B< 86% &1 3:%
3:%
'97<3B. '97<3B& '97<3B0 '97<3B< 237,21 6,&$ྥࡅᶆ‽
5(*,67 6(1625 81,7
5(*6B) 86% .(< %2$5'
3&8 &219 3:%
237,21
36 81,7 3:% ᪥ᮏྥࡅ)*㺱㺡㺼㺷ᶆ‽
5(*6B5
33' '6:B5 7& 0& 2=)0 36)0 237,21 )$;
3&66
+'' 5DLG
33' /68 81,7
237,21
&66 &66 36)0 /' 3:%
5,*+7 '225 81,7 0)3& $&5( /'B.
3&, 3:%
MX-5141N ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 1

$33' 237,21
0)3)0
$'8*6 237,21
/'B&
$33' )$; )$; &&)0 /'B0
Service Manual
3$3(5 )((' 3$3(5 )((' ᪥ᮏྥࡅࡢࡳ

32' 3$3(5 )((' '5,9( 81,7 81,7 81,7 /68 &17
/6866 /'B<
5' ,) 237,21 3:%
7)' 3:%
&2,19(1'(5 7+B/68
'6:B$'8 &/80 &/80 &3)' &3)' +/
3:% '(6. /&& ),1,6+(5 %'B. 3:%
3573' &38& &38& &/8' &/8'
'(6. /&&
0$18$/ 3$3(5 81,7 ),1 N /68)0
&3)& &3)0 &3(' &3(' '+B'(6. '+B'(6. ),1 ,11(5
03:' 3*0
&63' &63'
3)0
03(' '&36
'6:B&
237,21
03/' 038& +3)0 ᪥ᮏྥࡅᶆ‽
03)' 03)6 $& :+

3:% 3:% '+
0723 03*6 06:
'5,9(5 0$,1
7++8'B0 3:%
'+6:
0723 $& ,1
37& 81,7 '63) 81,7
3&7B+($7(5 63)& 632'

63/6
6380 675& 655& 678'
7& 37&B+9
B. DSPF
63/6 6755& 655%& 67/'

633' 6/80
'(5,9(5< 81,7 '6:B) :710 71)' )8)0 5&)0 3&6)0 3&6)0 6&29 6755%& 63))$1 633'
633'
63)0
32' 32)0B) 63(' 635$1'20
633'
721(5B. 81,7 721(5B& 81,7 721(5B0 81,7 721(5B< 81,7 6320
32' 32)0B5 63('
78'B. 78'B&/ '9&580B. '9&580B& '9&580B0 '9&580B< 633'
'63) '5,9(5 3:%
7)' 260
62&' &&' 3:%
352&(66 '5,9( 81,7
6+326 )80 350 52&' '63) &17 3:% /(' 3:%
+/3&6 +/3&' 710B. 710B& 710B0 710B< 6&$11(5 81,7

:(%B0 $'80B/ ࡣᯛᶵ 237,21 ᑐᛂᮍᐃ
ᯛᶵࡢࡳ ᯛᶵࡢࡳ &&'
'0B&/ 31&
3:%
320 '0B. '0B& '0B0 '0B< :LUH /HVV $8',725
'59B /$1 3:%
$'80B+ 2&6:
68% 237,21 /(' '5,9(5 3:%
3:% 86% 6&1 256B/('
550 '90B. '90B&/ %70 &219 3:% 1)& 3:%
/(' 3:% 0+36
)86(5 81,7
785& 2563'
7+B80 +/B80 ᯛᶵࡢࡳ '+3'B0 ᯛᶵࡢࡳ 0,0
23(5$7,21 81,7
785&B5 '+3'B& '+3'B&/ '+3'B<
7+B86 +/B86 ࡣᯛᶵ 728&+
'+3'B. /9'6 3$1(/
7+B/0 +/B/0 3:%
/&'
7+B(; +/B8: '/B. '/B& '/B0 '/B<
7+B80 :(%(1' 23( 3:%
'9B. 81,7 '9B& 81,7 '9B0 81,7 '9B< 81,7
027+(5
%:' 7&6B. 7&6B& 7&6B0 7&6B< 86% &1 3:%
3:%
'97<3B. '97<3B& '97<3B0 '97<3B< 237,21 6,&$ྥࡅᶆ‽
5(*,67 6(1625 81,7
5(*6B) 86% .(< %2$5'
3&8 &219 3:%
237,21
36 81,7 3:% ᪥ᮏྥࡅ)*㺱㺡㺼㺷ᶆ‽
5(*6B5
33' '6:B5 7& 0& 2=)0 36)0 237,21 )$;
3&66
+'' 5DLG
33' /68 81,7
&66 &66 36)0 /' 3:%
5,*+7 '225 81,7 0)3& $&5( /'B.
3&,

3:%
$33' 237,21
0)3)0
$'8*6 237,21
/'B&
$33' )$; )$; &&)0 /'B0
3$3(5 )((' 3$3(5 )((' ᪥ᮏྥࡅࡢࡳ
32' 3$3(5 )((' '5,9( 81,7 81,7 81,7 /68 &17
/6866 /'B<
5' ,) 237,21 3:%
7)' 3:%
&2,19(1'(5 7+B/68
'6:B$'8 &/80 &/80 &3)' &3)' +/
3:% '(6. /&& ),1,6+(5 %'B. 3:%
3573' &38& &38& &/8' &/8'
'(6. /&&
0$18$/ 3$3(5 81,7 ),1 N /68)0
&3)& &3)0 &3(' &3(' '+B'(6. '+B'(6. ),1 ,11(5
03:' 3*0
&63' &63'
3)0
03(' '&36
'6:B&
237,21
03/' 038& +3)0 ᪥ᮏྥࡅᶆ‽
03)' 03)6 $& :+

3:% 3:% '+
0723 03*6 06:
'5,9(5 0$,1
7++8'B0 3:%
'+6:
0723 $& ,1
PCU
Sensor Input
Reset IC
CLK FAN Motor
Xtal
19.6608MHz
C. PCU PWB
Synchronous Motor
I/O ASIC Load control Output
Spread (Solenoid)
Spectrum LSU CLK 2nd TC HV
Not mount
DA converter
Analog Sensor
DC Power FW Analog SW
Supply
CPU DC Motor Control
MFPC
H8S/2373
Mother URAT
I2Cbus
CLK CRUM
LSU FAN Motor
PMC ASIC MC HV 1st TC HV
HL PWB Fuser unit

Option
URAT Load control Output
Finisher (Clutch, Solenoid)
Sensor Input
URAT PMC
DESK Stepping motor
Data (D0-D15)

URAT
LCC
Address (A0-A20)
LSU (LD)
CPLD
Sensor Input
I2Cbus
Coin Vender
I2Cbus EEPROM
(64kbit)
FLASH
(16Mbit)
SRAM
(1Mbit)
2
2 ‘13/Nov
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻷㼑㼥㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㼃㼕㻲㼕㻌㻯㻺㼁㻿㻮㻌↓⥺

㻔㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻕㻔㻲㼞㼛㼚㼠㻕㻸㻭㻺
㻴㻰㻰㻌㻞㻚㻡㻓㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠㻺㻲㻯㻌㻯㻭㻾㻰㻌

㻴㻰㻰㻌㻞㻚㻡㻓
㻟㻞㻜㻳㻮㻌㼛㼞㻌㻾㼍㼕㼐㻌㻼㼃㻮㻌㼀㼅㻼㻱㻙㻭㻌㻯㻺㻾㼑㼍㼐㼑㼞㻸㻯㻰㻌㻼㼍㼚㼑㼘㻌
㻟㻞㻜㻳㻮㻌㼛㼞㻌
㻴㼕㼓㼔㼑㼞㻔㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕㻔㻲㼞㼛㼚㼠㻕㻔㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻕㻿㻯㼁㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻴㼕㼓㼔㼑㼞
㻔㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕㻸㼂㻰㻿
㻡㼜㼕㼚㻿㻭㼀㻭
㻯㻺㻯㻺
㻡㼂㻻⣔ 㻡㼂㻸⣔
㻿㻼㻰㻳㻴㻙㻡㼜㼕㼚
㻿㼘㼕㼐㼑㻿㻰㻿㻯㻝㻥㻢㻿㻯㻠㻝㻤㻯㻺
㻿㼃㻠㻳㻮㼒㼛㼞㻌㻻㼚㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻝㻚㻞㻣㼂㻝㻚㻞㻣㼂
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻯㻰㻕
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻿㼏㼍㼚㻕
㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻻㼚㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
㻿㻰㻿㻯㻝㻥㻢㻿㻯㻝㻤㻡㻴
D. MFP control PWB
㻝㻳㻮㻌
㻿㼛㼏㼗㼑㼠䠄㻞㻳㼎㼇㼤㻝㻢㼉㻌㼤㻌㻠㼜㼏㼟䠅㻝㻚㻤㼂㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻝㻚㻡㼂㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼁㻮
㻿㻯㻝㻥㻢㻿㻯㻝㻤㻡㻽㻠㼜㼛㼞㼠
㻰㻰㻾㻟㻙㻤㻜㻜㻟㻚㻟㼂㻟㻚㻟㼂㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻳㼑㼚
㻿㻸㻟㻤㻜㻜㻜
㻢㻹㻮㻛㻿㼑㼏
㻰㻰㻾㻞㻛㻟
㻿㻼㻵㻛㻿㻰㻿㻭㼀㻭㻌㻵㻲
㻿㻰㻴㻯㻌㻯㼘㼍㼟㼟㻢
㻵㻲
㻯㻺㻌㼁㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠
㼁㻿㻮㻞㻚㻜㻌㻵㻲㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟
㻳㻼㻵㻻
㻴㼛㼟㼠
㻝㻳㼎㼜㼟
㻸㻭㻺㻌㻶㻭㻯㻷 .ON INTERRUPTIONAREA 㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㻾㻶㻠㻡㻸㻯㻰㻯㻌㻵㻲㼀㼞㼍㼚㼟㼙㼕㼠㼠㼑㼞
/.WHEN,!.STANDBY
㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻼㻴㼅㻳㻹㻵㻵㻿㻯㻺㻌㻵㻲
㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻹㻭㻯㻾㼑㼏㼑㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻿㼏㼍㼚㻕
㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳
㻔㻾㼀㻸㻤㻞㻝㻝㻱㻳㻕
㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㼁㻿㻮㻞㻚㻜㻌㻵㻲㼀㼞㼍㼚㼟㼙㼕㼠㼠㼑㼞
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻿㼁㻕
㼀㼅㻼㻱㻙㻮㻌㻯㻺㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻾㼑㼡㼟㻸㻿㼁㻌㻵㻲㻸㻿㼁㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟㻸㼂㻰㻿
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕㻭㻿㻵㻯㻾㼑㼏㼑㼕㼢㼑㼞
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻿㼁㻌㻯㻸㻷㻒㻿㼅㻺㻯㻕
㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻵㻺㼀
㻵㻺㼀㻔㻝㻛㻠㼏㼔㻕
㻔㼚㻲㻭㼄㻝㻞㼋㻼㻵㻯㼋㻵㻺㼀㻕㻼㻻㻲
㻵㻺㼀
㻔㻝㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕㻵㻞㻯㻔㻝㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻯㻰㻕
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞㻵㻞㻯㻌㻥㻡㻷㻴㼦
㻵㻺㼀㻔㼃㼍㼗㼑㼁㼜㻕
㻵㻺㼀
㻔㻞㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕㻵㻞㻯㻔㻞㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕
㻾㼀㻯
㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼛㼞
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞
㻼㻵㻯㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻵㻞㻯㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻵㻺㼀㻔㻿㼘㼑㼑㼜㻕㻟㻢㻜㻷㻴㼦㼚㻲㻭㼄㻝㻞㼋㻼㻵㻯㼋㻵㻺㼀
㻵㻺㼀㻹㼕㼏㼛㼚㻚
㻔㻟㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕㻵㻞㻯㻔㻟㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞㻵㻞㻯㻞㻡㻢㼗㼎
㻟㻢㻜㻷㻴㼦㻲㻭㼄㻔㻝㼟㼠㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻞㼏㼔㻕
㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻹㻭㻯㼁㻭㻾㼀㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲㻸㼛㼏㼍㼘㻌㻮㼡㼟㻯㻼㻸㻰
㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳㻔㻝㻝㼏㼔㻕㻔㻠㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕㻔㻝㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕㻵㻲㻸㼛㼏㼍㼘㻌㻮㼡㼟㻱㻼㻹㻞㻠㻜
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻰㻿㼁㻮㻌㻯㻺
㻔㻾㻵㻯㻌㻒㻌㻼㻯㻵㻌㻒㻌
㼂㼑㼚㼐㼑㼞㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻾㻿㻞㻟㻞㻯
㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘
㻯㼛㼚㼢㼑㼞㼠㼑㼞㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕㻲㻸㻭㻿㻴㻌㻰㻵㻹㻹
㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㼤㻠㻌㼓㼑㼚㻝㻲㻸㻭㻿㻴㻌㻰㻵㻹㻹
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㻯㻺㻝㻞㻚㻡㻳㼎㼜㼟㻟㻞㻹㻮
㻿㻻㻯㻷㻱㼀
㻔㼂㼑㼚㼐㼑㼞㻌㻒㻌㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻰㻿㻷㻌㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕
㻼㻯㻵㻕㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㻯㻺㻞
㻔㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻕㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㼤㻝㻌㼓㼑㼚㻝㻌㻞㻚㻡㻳㼎㼜㼟㻭㻯㻾㻱㻌㻻㼜㼠㻭㻯㻾㻱㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻯㻺㻔㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕㻌㼂㼕㼞㼓㼛㻞㻌㻾㻿㻼㻲
㻹㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻲㻭㼄㻔㻞㼚㼐㻕㻲㻭㼄㻔㻞㼚㼐㻕㻌㻔㻿㼠㼐㻚㻕㻌㼂㼕㼞㼓㼛㻞㻌㻰㻿㻼㻲
㻔㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕㻯㻺㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻞㼏㼔㻕

㻲㻭㼄㻔㻟㼞㼐㻕㻲㻭㼄㻔㻟㼞㼐㻕
㻔㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕㻯㻺㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻞㼏㼔㻕
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟㼜㼛㼞㼠㻌㻤
㼀㼅㻼㻱㻙㻭㻌㻯㻺
㻔㻾㼑㼍㼞㻕㼜㼛㼞㼠㻌㻝
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠㼜㼛㼞㼠㻌㻜㻛㻞
㻴㼑㼍㼐㼑㼞㻌
㻔㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻕㻸㼍㼚㼑㻌㻝㻙㻠
㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲
㼁㻿㻮㻌㼤㻝㻜㻿㻼㻵
㼂㻳㻭㻌㻯㻺㻔㻠㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕
㼂㻳㻭
㻔㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻕㻿㻭㼀㻭
㻰㻹㻵㻰㻹㻵㻿㻭㼀㻭㻯㻺㻌㼤㻌㻞
㻔㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻕
㼂㻙㼎㼥㻙㼛㼚㼑
㻵㼚㼠㼑㼘㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲㻸㼍㼚㼑㻌㻡㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㼤㻝
㻔㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻕
㻵㼚㼠㼑㼘㻔㻝㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕㻯㻺
㻼㼕㼚㼑㼢㼕㼑㼣
㻵㻯㻴㻤㻯㻲
㻸㼂㻰㻿
㻰㻡㻞㻡㻼㻭㼀㻭
㻯㻲㻌㻯㻺
㻯㻲
㻡㼂㻸㼋㻞⣔
㻤㻳㻮
㻰㻰㻾㻞㻛㻟㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲㻔㻭㼀㻻㻹㻌㻼㼞㼛㼓㼞㼍㼙㻕㼂㻾㻰㻝㻝㻿㻯㻠㻝㻤
㻵㻲㻿㻹㼎㼡㼟㻸㻼㻯
㻔㻝㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕㻵㻿㻸㻢㻟㻝㻠㻵㻯㻴㻌㻝㻚㻜㻡㼂
㻟㻜㼜㼕㼚㻌㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻌㻯㻺㻿㻯㻝㻤㻡㻶㻿㻯㻠㻝㻤

㻰㻰㻾㻟㻙㻤㻜㻜㻿㻼㻰㻔㻿㼡㼜㼑㼞㻌㻵㻻㻘㻌㻣㻿㼑㼓㻕㻼㻸㻸㻌㻝㻚㻤㼂㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻝㻚㻡㼂
㼒㼛㼞㻌㻻㼚㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
㻵㻞㻯㻌㻥㻡㻷㻴㼦
㻯㻼㻸㻰㻿㻯㻝㻤㻡㻽
㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻻㼚㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
㻱㻼㻹㻞㻠㻜
㻞㻳㻮㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㼤㻌㻝㻿㼘㼛㼠㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻔㻞㻳㼎㼇㼤㻤㼉㼤㻤㼜㼏㼟䠅㻯㻷㻡㻜㻡
㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻳㼑㼚㻮㻵㻻㻿
㻝㻳㻮㻌㻿㻻㻙㻰㻵㻹㻹
㻿㻼㻵㻌㻠㻹㻮
E. Scanner control PWB
3.3Ｖ
DSPFcntPWB
1.8Ｖ Page Memory
CCD-R PWB 256MBYTE(256Mbitx8)
(DSPF side) Tr RGB Rx FPD Link
10Ｖ Tr 35bit
Tr AFE
Tr SCN LVDS IC Tx
3line color CCD
Tr 19.661MHz
CLK ASIC 28bit Image data
Tr AFE_CS 10Ｖ/5Ｖ/3Ｖ DRIVER
CS3
Serial 2 systems 12→10Ｖ CTRL_A10V 1.5Ｖ
12→5Ｖ CTRL_A5V
5→3.3Ｖ 3.3Ｖ
CTRL_A3.3V
CPU
DRIVER H8S/2373
motor (74VHCT
Various sensors CS2 CS0orCS1
244)
F-ROM
SRAM
(On-board)
DRIVER PWB LED DRIVER CS4
F-ROM
(For saving Shading DATA)
LED
24VPD
12V
5V #OMMUNITARIAN
3.3V etc.
3.3Ｖ 5VO
Power
1.8Ｖ DSPF Model supply
SCNcntPWB
CCD----Ｆ
CCD ＦPWB
Ｆ PWB
PWB
（本体側
（本体側）
本体側
（）） Tr Page Memory 4O#0U
10Ｖ Tr 256MBYTE(256Mbitx8)
Tr AFE RGB
3line color CCD
Tr CPUCLK
Tr line buf
(8Mx16bit)
Tr AFE_CS 19.661MHz CLK
DRIVER line buf
(8Mx16bit)
clk LVDS IC Rx
Rx FPD Link 28bit
35bit RSPF Model
32bit bus MotherPWB
10Ｖ/5Ｖ/3Ｖ Image LVDS IC Tx

SCＡN data 244 Buﬀer
28bit
ASIC
Serial 2 systems 3.3Ｖ 1.5Ｖ
CS3
IPD/DOCC ASIC
12→10Ｖ CTRL_A10V
12→5Ｖ CTRL_A5V CS4
RSPF UN 5→3.3Ｖ CTRL_A3.3V
1.2Ｖ
CPUCLK
Mirror 3.3Ｖ
MOTOR 24V Motor MOTOR
DRIVER DRIVER
24VPD
5VN LED
151他ICs LED E2PROM
DRIVER 24VPD FlashROM
PWB (On-board)
CS0orCS6
MHPsensor
5VPWM
OCSW
CS2
SRAM
CPU
5VO RSPF Power H8S/2373 UARTETC
SPED
5VPWM
CS5
Mother PWB
SEL_A/B/#
HC151 Sensors
5VN
MTP IC
LVDS PWB ORS LED
24V
Touch panel
CPLD
DCDC 24V
LEDVCC s,#$KINDDETECTION
LED
backlight PNL_SEL0
LCD : 10.1icn
DCDC
3.3V 3.3V 5V
Tｘ Auditor(TBD
28bit
CCFT_CPU PNL_SEL0
/CCFT
nLCD_DISP
CPLD ( ON/OFF )
Ｒｘ
Image data 28bit
5V
24V LCD Power
Document size
light reception 5V
HOME KEY
/BZR 5VPWM 5VPWM
5VO
nWU_KEY
nPWRSW
WU_LED
POW_LED 5VO
5VO
Buzzer
nHOME_KEY 24VPD FET 24V 24V Power
supply
HOME LED
LED drive
nHOME_LED circuit 12V CPU 12V
12V
WU_KEY (Reset key)
3.3V
PWRSW (Soft SW) 3.3V
WU_LED (Reset key LED)
POW_LED (Main power LED)
5V
SC_ACK PCU PWB
PCU_REQ
USB CV PWB
INFO_LED (FAX reception LED) INFO_LED
Keyboard

㻻㻼㻱㻌㼁㻺
㻝㻜㻚㻝㻸㻯㻰㻌㻌㼁㻺㻝㻜㻝㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻼㼃㻮㻿㻯㻺㼋㻯㻺㼀㼋㻼㼃㻮
㻞㻜㻠㻡㻡㻙㻜㻟㻜㻱㻙㻏㻞㻲㼄㻝㻢㻿㻙㻠㻝㻿㻙㻜㻚㻡㻿㻴
㻯㻺㻯㻺㻠㻯㻺㻟
㻠㻜㻼㼕㼚㼀㼔㼕㼚㻌㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㼏㼛㼍㼤㼕㼍㼘㻟㻜㻼㼕㼚㻰㼕㼒㼒㼑㼞㼑㼚㼠㼕㼍㼘㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㼀㻯㻸㻷㻲㻼㻰㻌㻸㼕㼚㼏㻾㼇㻣㻦㻞㼉㻰㼍㼙㼜㼕㼚㼓㻌㼞㼑㼟㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻾㼇㻣㻦㻞㼉㼋㼕㼚㻲㻼㻰㻌㻸㼕㼚㼏㻰㼕㼒㼒㼑㼞㼑㼚㼠㼕㼍㼘㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㼀㻯㻸㻷㻠㻝㻼㼕㼚㻲㻲㻯㻠㻝㻼㼕㼚
㻰㼕㼒㼒㼑㼞㼑㼚㼠㼕㼍㼘㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㼀㼄㼋㻻㼁㼀㻜㼂㻟㻤㻡㻳㼇㻣㻦㻞㼉㻳㼇㻣㻦㻞㼉㼋㼕㼚㼂㻼㻟㻤㻢㻰㼕㼒㼒㼑㼞㼑㼚㼠㼕㼍㼘㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㼀㼄㼋㻻㼁㼀㻜
㻰㼕㼒㼒㼑㼞㼑㼚㼠㼕㼍㼘㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㼀㼄㼋㻻㼁㼀㻝㻵㻯㻟㻮㼇㻣㻦㻞㼉㻮㼇㻣㻦㻞㼉㼋㼕㼚㻵㻯㻝㻰㼕㼒㼒㼑㼞㼑㼚㼠㼕㼍㼘㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㼀㼄㼋㻻㼁㼀㻝
㻰㼕㼒㼒㼑㼞㼑㼚㼠㼕㼍㼘㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㼀㼄㼋㻻㼁㼀㻞㻰㼕㼒㼒㼑㼞㼑㼚㼠㼕㼍㼘㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㼀㼄㼋㻻㼁㼀㻞
㻯㻷㼋㼕㼚㻯㻷㼋㼕㼚
Hsync Hsync_in
Vsync Vsync_in
F. Operation unit
ENAB ENAB_in
㻟㻚㻟㼂㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻷㻾㻯㻝㻜㻞
㻽㻮㻝
㻯㻯㻲㼀㼋㼛㼡㼠㻯㻯㻲㼀㼋㼛㼡㼠㻛㻯㻯㻲㼀㼋㼕㼚㻛㻯㻯㻲㼀
㻰㻵㻿㻼㼋㼛㼡㼠
㻼㻿㼀㻤㻠㻞㻣㼁㻾
㻵㻯㻮㻝
㻰㻵㻿㻼㼋㼛㼡㼠㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻟㻚㻟㼂㻮㻭㻝㻣㻮㻹㻝㻤㻲㻼
㻵㻯㻡
㻝㻤㼂㼋㻸㻯㻰㻝㻤㼂㼋㻸㻯㻰㻞㻠㼂
㻾㻼㻝㻟㻝㻿㻟㻟㻝㻰㻙㻱㻞㻙㻲
㻵㻯㻠
㼚㻸㻯㻰㼋㻰㻵㻿㻼
㻡㻞㻞㻣㻝㻙㻜㻠㻢㻥㻟㻚㻟㼂㻡㼂
㻯㻺㻞
㼀㼛㼡㼏㼔㻌㻼㼍㼚㼑㼘 /YL(Y1) /YL(Y1)
XH(X1) XH(X1)
/XL(X2) /XL(X2)
YH(Y2) YH(Y2)
㻴㻹㻙㻷㻱㼅㻌㻼㼃㻮㻮㻹㻜㻡㻮㻙㻳㻴㻿㻙㼀㻮㼀
㻯㻺㻝㻯㻺㻯㻺
㻴㼛㼙㼑㻌㼗㼑㼥㼃㼕㼞㼑㻌㼔㼍㼞㼚㼑㼟㼟
㻴㼛㼙㼑㻌㻸㻱㻰
㻼㼃㻙㻷㻱㼅㻌㻼㼃㻮㻮㻹㻜㻣㻮㻙㻳㻴㻿㻙㼀㻮㼀䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷

㻯㻺㻝㻯㻺
㻮㼡㼦㼦㼑㼞㼃㼕㼞㼑㻌㼔㼍㼞㼚㼑㼟㼟
㻹㻻㼀㻴㻱㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻯㻺
㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㻿㼃

㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㻸㻱㻰
㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻙
㼟㼍㼢㼕㼚㼓㻌㻿㼃
㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻙
㼟㼍㼢㼕㼚㼓
㻸㻱㻰
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻯㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼛㼞
㻯㻺㻯㻺
㻿㻴㻵㻱㻸㻰㻝㻯㻺㻝㼃㼕㼞㼑㻌㼔㼍㼞㼚㼑㼟㼟
㻳㻺㻰
㻰㻝㻗
㻰㻝㻙
㼂㻮㼁㻿㻝
㼚㻵㻺㻲㻻㼋㻸㻱㻰㻯㻺㻟
㻯㻺㻯㻺
㻷㼑㼥㼎㼛㼍㼞㼐㻞㻠㼜㼕㼚㼁㻿㻮㻌㻯㻻㻺㼂㻌㻼㼃㻮㻯㻺
㻳㻺㻰㼃㼕㼞㼑㻌㼔㼍㼞㼚㼑㼟㼟
㻯㻺㻝㻰㻝㻗
㻜㻜㻌㻢㻞㻜㻜㻌㻡㻞㻠㻌㻟㻟㻜㻌㻜㻜㻜㻗㻰㻝㻙
㼂㻮㼁㻿
G. LSUcnt PWB
Thermistor Output Thermistor

AMP
TH
SCLK/TXD/RXD 3
MicroWire BUS
CS K/C/M/Y
Chip select (LDD) 4
CS EEP-ROM K/C/M/Y
Chip select (EEP-ROM) 4
CLK_C_EN
ID[0:1]
Reset CLK_M_EN
Reset Input Reset IC ASIC CLK_A_EN
CHIP-2
Motor Control PGM_CK
PGM_START
IRQ1 3
JOBEND_INT Polygon (PGM_BRAKE)
PCU O.C.
Polygon
ASIC PCU I/F Motor
PGM_LOCK
CHIP-2 Control Motor
Register
SCK etc...
RSV_DAT
3 TRANS_RST FAN_PWM
FAN O.C. O.C. LSU
ASIC Control FANSTABLE FAN
Synchronous Serial CHIP-2
communication SCL
SDA
TRANS_DAT
WP I2C BUS 3
COM_FIFO
ASIC
CHIP-2 GAIN FIX
LSU_ASIC MSET_K/C/M/Y 4
CHIP-2
LD Control
OSC SYSCLK
S/S
(System CK) Serial P4_K(ENB)
ASIC P3_K(WAIT)
D/A I/F
CHIP-2 P4_C(ENB)
P3_C(WAIT) 4
ECLK ECLK
P2(SH)
LVDS/Driver
HSYNC HSYNC P1(CH)

P0(SEL) 3
VSYNC_M/Y
4 VSYNC LD Control
VSYNC_K/C ASIC Horizontal Scan/ (APC 4 LDERR K/C/M/Y
CHIP-2 Vertical Scan /ENB)
VIDEO I/F CK ECLK Timing Control BD
HSYNC HSYNC
ASIC BD
FPD-LINK/Receiver
CHIP-2
ASIC
CHIP-2
35 : 5 8 DT_K1+- 2
Channel A : K1
DT_K2+- 2
Channel B : K2
LD
35 : 5 8 DT_C1+- 2
Channel C : C1
DT_C2+- 2
Channel D : C2
VIDEO IF_ACT
OSCCLK_C OSC CLK_C_EN

(Color CK)
OSCCLK_M OSC CLK_M_EN

Trigger Chain (B/W CK)
OSCCLK_A OSC CLK_A_EN

(Heavy PP
CK)
ID[0:0]
MFP Reset
Motor Control
Polygon
IRQ2 Motor
PCU I/F
Control
Synchronous Serial SD CLK
Register FAN
communication SCK etc... Control
RSV_DAT
TRANS_RST
SCL
SDA
TRANS_DAT WP I2C BUS 3
COM_FIFO
System CK
LSU_ASIC
CHIP-1
VSYNC_K/C LD Control
Horizontal Scan/
ECLK Serial P4_M(ENB)
Vertical Scan
Timing Control D/A I/F P3_M(WAIT)
HSYNC
P4_Y(ENB)
P3_Y(WAIT) 4
LD Control
(APC/ENB)
BD
4 INT ST K/C/M/Y
FPD-LINK/Receiver
35 : 5 8 DT_M1+- 2
Channel A : M1
DT_M2+- 2
Channel B : M2
35 : 5 8 DT_Y1+- 2
Channel C : Y1
DT_Y2+- 2
Channel D : Y2

LIU EX PWB Voltage FAX MAIN PWB
TEL/LIU Regulator
Silicon DAA Connector 3.3V 1.8V MDM3.3V
NJU7772F
Si3056 CHIP SET 18
AFE_CLK
AFE_RES- STATUS LED_0
(1) MX-FX11
PROGRAM
ASPCLK FLASH ROM
ABITCLK 16bit
MJ1 ARXD
16Mb
H. FAX section
Si3019 Si3056 ATX D VHIM29LV16

(LINE)
B-1Q
SPK(analog) MODEM STATUS LED_1
16bit (Not mount)
MMD5020
WORK
Crystal MEMORY
Resonator
24.576MHz SDRAM
16bit RESET- RESET IC 3.3V
BSPCLK
64Mbit
BD45285G
BBITCLK A3
BRXD 64S40ETP-
BTXD
G6
+5VA +5V
+5VA
Filter
+5VA FAX IMAGE MFP IF

Speaker
MEMORY Connector
BZ 16bit MDM3.3V +3.3V
(Not mount) Filter
Volume
Power Change EN_SPKON- FLASH ROM With secure
Speaker Amplifier EN_BZON- 16Mbit
Connector 16bit locking
S02B- BU4066 VOLA device
PA SK
LM4819 NJM3414 VOLB +24V
VOLC
VOLD +5V BM30B-
SHLDS
SPMUTE- +3.3V
RGDT-
(CI detection) +5V2
HDMUTE-
RHS- MON_24V- +24V +24V
SI3_RES- Detection
CI2- RES_FAX-
FAX_RXD(D)+
FAX_RXD(D)-
CI
CI- FAX_TXD(D)+
Detection FAX_TXD(D)-
Polarity FAX_CTS(D)-
HS1-
inversion
FAX ASIC FAX_RTS(D)-
Detection HS2-
(Not mount) FAX_RXD(CS)+
MB87F4930 FAX_RXD(CS)-
CION FAX_TXD(CS)+
FAX_TXD(CS)-
150VON FAX_CTS(CS)-
S relay
+5V2 FAX_RTS(CS)-

FLV PP
MJ2
(TEL) MSGMUTE
OFF fock 16bit Version ID voltage

detection level
ECON
EXHS- CNCT_FAX-
JTAG JTAG
MRON
Connector
14pin
SON1 (Not mount)
CPU
CID-
Download Log SH7706 Voltage
UART 1.9V Regulator 3.3V
Connector
+24V (Not mount) R1173S001B
PIC +12 PICPGM_EN
+12V +24
CI Fi ter microcomputer Spred
UART Crystal
CI Fi ter PIC16F690 Spectrum Resonator
+5V2
CY25811SXCT 14.7456MHz
SON2
WUP_FAX-
voltage TELID
Operation in 1W/7W level
energy-save mode voltage TELID2
level
&52( %PV
HQT &52( OQFGN 5%0 %PV /QVJGT /(2%
4Z& 7#46$A6:&
4$A6Z&A5%0
4Z& 6Z& 5EJOKV +PX
1%
6Z&A&52( 6Z& 7#46$A4:&
5EJKOKV +PX 1% %27 4$A4Z&A5%0
6Z& 4Z& *5 1% 5EJOKV +PX
%27 4Z&A&52( #=? %2.& 7#46$A465A0
1% 5EJKOKV +PX 4$A465A5%0
*5 +1 '2/6%0 1%
&=? 5EJOKV +PX
7#46$A%65A0
5EJKOKV +PX 1% 465A&52( 4$A%65A5%0
+1 5EJOKV +PX
%65A&52( 1%
1% 5EJKOKV +PX
6Z& 7#46$A4:&
2%7A4Z& 4$A4:&A2%7
1% 5EJOKV +PX
4Z& 7#46$A6:&
2%7A6Z& 4$A6:&A2%7
5EJOKV +PX
1%
+1 RQTV 7#46$A%65A0
I. Serial communication
2%7A&54 4$A%65A2%7
1% 5EJOKV +PX
+1 RQTV 7#46$A465A0
2%7A&64 4$A465A2%7
5EJOKV +PX
1%
7#46%A6:&
.57 4%A6Z&A2+%
5EJOKV +PX
1%
6Z& /QVJGT 4Z& 7#46%A4:&
64#05A&#6 4%A4Z&A2+%
5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX 1% 5EJOKV +PX
2+% 2146%
4Z& 6Z& .57 #5+%
458A&#6 4%A%.4A2+%
g
-%/; 5EJOKV +PX
1%
5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX 2146%
5%. 5%- 4%A4'3A2+%
5%- 1% 5EJOKV +PX
5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX 7#46$A6:&
6Z&A(#:
& 4$A6:&A(#:&
6Z&A(#:
& 7#46$A4:&
4Z&A(#:
& 4$A4:&A(#:&
4Z&A(#:
&
.8&5 7#46$A6:&
6Z&A(#:
%5 4$A6:&A(#:%5
6Z&A(#:
%5
%27 7#46$A4:&
4Z&A(#:
%5 4$A4:&A(#:%5 /2(%
6Z& 4Z& 4Z&A(#:
%5
*5 6:&A+05 7#46$A465 4'75 #5+%

1% 5EJOKV +PX #5+% 4$A465A(#:&
1% 5EJOKV +PX 1% 5EJOKV +PX
4Z& 6Z& 7#46$A%65
4Z&A+05 %27 4$A%65A(#:&
1% 1% 5EJOKV +PX 1%
/ 7#46$A465
+1 4$A465A(#:%5
&64A+05 1% 5EJOKV +PX 1% 5EJOKV +PX
1% 5EJOKV +PX
7#46$A%65
(+0+5*'4 4$A%65A(#:%5
+1 5EJOKV +PX 1%
&54A+05
1RVKQPCN
1% 1% 7#46$A6:&
4$A6:&A(#:&
4$A4:&A(#:& 7#46$A4:&
6Z& 4Z&
6Z&A&5- 6Z& .8&5 4$A6:&A(#:%5 7#46$A6:&
%27 2+%
1% 1% 4$A4:&A(#:%5 7#46$A4:&
5*
4Z& 6Z& 4Z& 1RVKQPCN 7#46$A465
4Z&A&5- 4$A465A(#:&
1% UV (#:
HQT () /QFGN 1% 5EJOKV +PX
1% PF (#: 7#46$A%65
+1 4$A%65A(#:&
&64A&5- %27
5COG &KCITCO CU UV (#: 5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX
1% 1% *5 7#46$A465
4$A465A(#:%5
+1 1% 5EJOKV +PX
&54A&5- 7#46$A%65
1% 4$A%65A(#:%5

1%
5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX
+1
64%A&5- &'5- 4$A6:&A(#:& 7#46$A6:&
1% 1%
1RVKQPCN 4$A4:&A(#:& 7#46$A4:&
.8&5 4$A6:&A(#:%5 7#46$A6:&
4$A4:&A(#:%5 7#46$A4:&
6Z& 4Z&
6Z&A.%% 1RVKQPCN 7#46$A465
$WHHGT 1% 1% 4$A465A(#:&
TF (#: 1% 5EJOKV +PX
4Z& 6Z& 7#46$A%65
4Z&A.%% 4$A%65A(#:&
1%
5COG &KCITCO CU UV (#: 5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX
$WHHGT 1%
&=?
7#46$A465
+1 4$A465A(#:%5
&64A.%% %27 1% 5EJOKV +PX
#=?
1% 1% *5 7#46$A%65
4$A%65A(#:%5
+1 5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX
+1 #5+% &54A.%%
1% 1% 4$A)2+A%65A2%+ 2146$
4$A)21A465A2%+ 2146$
.<#)0 +1 1RVKQPCN
64%A.%% .%% 4$A6:&A2%+ 7#46$A6:&
1% 1%
1RVKQPCN 2%+ 57$ 4$A4:&A2%+ 7#46$A4:&
4$A&64A2%+ 7#46$A6:&
4$A&54A2%+ 7#46$A4:&
2/% #5+% 4$A%65A4+% 7#46A%65A0

4$A465A4+% 7#46A465A0
72&)0 1RVKQPCN 45% 45%
4$A6:&A4+% 7#46$A6:&
%QKP 8GPFGT2%+ &TKXGT &TKXGT 4$A4:&A4+% 7#46$A4:&
4$A&64A4+% 2146$
2%7 4$A&54A4+% 2146$

'&32:(56833/<6$1.(1+/
)
9ROWDJH
&RQYHUVLRQ
7$+9 9
$&3:% 9
9
' 9 '
5& 9

9
) 91
9
a
a
$9

1)
(1) 41cpm machine (120V)
0$,132:(56:
$&,1 ) 12702817
2. Power line diagram
/
$9 $

)
7$+9
95
1
):
*HQHUDWLQJ
15 &LUFXLW )
9ROWDJH
) 7$+9 &RQYHUVLRQ
9R
7$+9 9/
:+/ :+1
& &
A. AC power line diagram (41cpm machine)
:$50+($7(56(72SWLRQDO
:+6: +/3:%
/
:+3:% /
2SWLRQDO
5<
: 㻿㻯㻺㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠 ,179
:+1 6&1
% +($7(5 %
:+/ 5< 2SWLRQDO
1&
:+B&17
12 7' 7' 7' 7' +/B35
7 * 7 * 7 * 7 *
9
7 665 7 665 7 665 7 665
㻯㻿
+/287B86 +/287B80 +/287B8: +/287B/0
:

*1' *1' *1' *1'
&6+($7(5
2SWLRQDO
㻰㻱㻿㻷
: :
㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺
'(6. '(6.
+($7(5 +($7(5
㼐㼞㼍㼣㼑㼞
2SWLRQDO 2SWLRQDO
㻸㻯㻯 9: 9:

:
/&& 㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺 +/B80 +/B8:
+($7(5
2SWLRQDO 9DF$0D[Υ
9:
+/B/0
9: 7+(50267$7 76B/0
9DF$0D[Υ
$ $
+/B86
: 㻸㻿㼁
/68
+($7(5 9DF$0D[Υ 7+(50267$7 76B80
2SWLRQDO
7+(50267$7 76B86
)86,1*81,7

'&32:(56833/<6$1.(1++
5HDFWRU )
9ROWDJH
P+ &RQYHUVLRQ
7$+9 9
$&3:% $ 9
9
' 9 '
5& 9

9
) 91
9
a
a
7$+9

1)
0$,132:(56:
$&,1 ) 12702817
/
7$+9 $

)
7$+9
95
)
1
7$+9 ):
*HQHUDWLQJ
15 &LUFXLW )
9ROWDJH
) ) 7$+9 &RQYHUVLRQ
9R
7$+9 7$+9 9/
:+/ :+1
& &
:$50+($7(56(72SWLRQDO
:+6: +/3:%
/
:+3:% /
2SWLRQDO
5<
㻿㻯㻺㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠 ,179
:
:+1 6&1
% +($7(5 %
:+/ 5< 2SWLRQDO
1&
:+B&17
12 7' 7' 7' 7' +/B35
7 * 7 * 7 * 7 *
9

7 665 7 665 7 665 7 665
㻯㻿
+/287B86 +/287B80 +/287B8: +/287B/0
:
*1' *1' *1' *1'
&6+($7(5
2SWLRQDO
㻰㻱㻿㻷
: :
㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺
'(6. '(6.
+($7(5 +($7(5
㼐㼞㼍㼣㼑㼞
2SWLRQDO 2SWLRQDO
㻸㻯㻯 9: 9:

:
/&& 㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺 +/B80 +/B8:
+($7(5
2SWLRQDO 9DF$0D[Υ
9:
+/B/0
9: 7+(50267$7 76B/0
9DF$0D[Υ
$ $
+/B86
: 㻸㻿㼁
/68
+($7(5 9DF$0D[Υ 7+(50267$7 76B80
2SWLRQDO
7+(50267$7 76B86
)86,1*81,7

'&32:(56833/<6$1.(1+/
)
9ROWDJH
&RQYHUVLRQ
7$+9 9
$&3:% 9
9
' 9 '
5& 9

9
) 91
9
a
a
$9

1)
0$,132:(56:
$&,1 ) 12702817
/
$9 $

)
7$+9
95
1
):
*HQHUDWLQJ
15 &LUFXLW )
9ROWDJH
) 7$+9 &RQYHUVLRQ
9R
7$+9 9/
:+/ :+1
& &
B. AC power line diagram (51cpm machine)
:$50+($7(56(72SWLRQDO
:+6: +/3:%
/
:+3:% /
2SWLRQDO
5<
: 㻿㻯㻺㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠 ,179
:+1 6&1
% +($7(5 %
:+/ 5< 2SWLRQDO
1&
:+B&17
12 7' 7' 7' 7' +/B35
7 * 7 * 7 * 7 *
9

7 665 7 665 7 665 7 665
㻯㻿
+/287B86 +/287B80 +/287B8: +/287B/0
:
*1' *1' *1' *1'
&6+($7(5
2SWLRQDO
㻰㻱㻿㻷
: :
㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺
'(6. '(6.
+($7(5 +($7(5
㼐㼞㼍㼣㼑㼞
2SWLRQDO 2SWLRQDO
㻸㻯㻯 9: 9:

:
/&& 㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺 +/B80 +/B8:
+($7(5
2SWLRQDO 9DF$0D[Υ
9:
+/B/0
9: 7+(50267$7 76B/0
9DF$0D[Υ
$ $
+/B86
: 㻸㻿㼁
/68
+($7(5 9DF$0D[Υ 7+(50267$7 76B80
2SWLRQDO
7+(50267$7 76B86
)86,1*81,7

'&32:(56833/<6$1.(1++
)
9ROWDJH
&RQYHUVLRQ
7$+9 9
$&3:% 9
9
' 9 '
5& 9

9
) 91
9
a
a
7$+9

1)
0$,132:(56:
$&,1 ) 12702817
/
7$+9 $

)
7$+9
95
)
1
7$+9 ):
*HQHUDWLQJ
15 &LUFXLW )
9ROWDJH
) ) 7$+9 &RQYHUVLRQ
9R
7$+9 7$+9 9/
:+/ :+1
& &
:$50+($7(56(72SWLRQDO
:+6: +/3:%
/
:+3:% /
2SWLRQDO
5<
㻿㻯㻺㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠 ,179
:
:+1 6&1
% +($7(5 %
:+/ 5< 2SWLRQDO
1&
:+B&17
12 7' 7' 7' 7' +/B35

7 * 7 * 7 * 7 *
9
7 665 7 665 7 665 7 665

㻯㻿 +/287B86 +/287B80 +/287B8: +/287B/0
:
*1' *1' *1' *1'
&6+($7(5
2SWLRQDO
㻰㻱㻿㻷
: :
㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺
'(6. '(6.
+($7(5 +($7(5
㼐㼞㼍㼣㼑㼞
2SWLRQDO 2SWLRQDO
㻸㻯㻯 9: 9:

:
/&& 㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺 +/B80 +/B8:
+($7(5
2SWLRQDO 9DF$0D[Υ
9:
+/B/0
9: 7+(50267$7 76B/0
9DF$0D[Υ
$ $
+/B86
: 㻸㻿㼁
/68
+($7(5 9DF$0D[Υ 7+(50267$7 76B80
2SWLRQDO
7+(50267$7 76B86
)86,1*81,7

A B C D E
㻰㻯㻌㻼㻻㼃㻱㻾㻌㻸㻵㻺㻱㻌㻰㻵㻭㻳㻾㻭㻹㻌
FUM INT24V1
GND
INT24V1
24V3 24V3 24V3
RDSW
DSW_R GND HLPCD TNM_M TNM_K 1TURC CPFC CPUC1 CPUC2 PRM PCSS L
4 5VN 5VN 4
INT24V1 INT24V1 41cpm
TNM_Y TNM_C 1TURC_R DMCL
GND WEBD
5VN DRIVER SUB
3.3V 3.3V GND PWB ADUMH DMBK BTM
51cpm
5VN 5VN GND GND
6.3A/250V FUSE 12V 12V 5VNPD
24V1 24V3 DMC DMM DMY
INT24V1 INT24V1
6.3A/250V FUSE 24V2 OSM ADUGS MPFS HL_PR
C. DC power line diagram
24V3 24V3 PCU PWB GND DRIVER MAIN

GND GND DSW_R 5VNPD PWB HPFM RRM PFM ADUML POM
FW FW HL PWB
5VNPD FDSW MPUC MPGS HL_UM
DSW_F
㐜ᘏᅇ㊰
INT5V 5VN 5VN HL_LM
24V3 5VN GND 5VNPD
FET
㐜ᘏᅇ㊰
GND GND GND RD I/F PWB HL_US
24V2 FET GND GND
INT24V2 INT24V2 INT24V2 HL_UW
/INT_CNT 5VN
INT24V1in GND
GND GND INT24V2
GND DVM_CL DVM_K
GND
GND
INT24V1in INT24V2
3 /INT_CNT 5VN CRUM 2ndTC PWB 3
INT24V2 GND (C/M/Y/K) GND
24V2
6.3A/250V FUSE
24V2 24V2 GND GND
MC PWB 1stTC PWB
㐜ᘏᅇ㊰
INT24V2 INT24V2
AC PWB
WH PWB
INT5V
5VO PW KEY
24V3 24V3 GND PWB
3.3V FAX 3.3V INT24V2
5VO MAIN 5VO TEL GND CPFM
5VL PWB 5VL LIU
GND GND PWB
5VN HOME KEY
INT24V2 GND PWB
5VL HDD LSUSS_BK
GND
5VN ORS PD
24V3
3.3V
GND
5VO
5VL
GND
5VL
GND
INT5V
GND
GND PWB
INT5V
5VNPD 24V3 24V3 LD 24V_LVDS

GND GND GND GND LSU PWB LD_BK LD_C LD_M LD_Y 5V_LVDS LVDS 18V_LCD
5VL 5VL 5VN 5VN PWB GND PWB 3.3V LCD UN
2 5VO 5VO 3.3V 3.3V GND GND 2
5V_LVDS
3.3V 3.3V
24V_LVDS
5VO
5VN
GND
5VN
GND
GND
5VN 5VN 24V3 POLYGON

12V 12V MOTHER PWB GND MOTOR

24V3 24V3 BD 5VN A10V
PWB GND A5V
A3.3V CCD PWB
GND
CPU 12V
FAN GND
24VPD LED DRIVER

24V3 24V3 24V3 GND PWB LED PWB
5VL GND GND
MFPC 5VO 12V 12V
PWB 3.3V 5VN 5VN 24V3
GND 3.3V 3.3V ORS LED
5VO 5VO PWB
24V3 24V3
6.3A/250V FUSE 12V 12V
24V5 24V5 5VSPF 5VSPF
GND GND 5VO 5VO RSPF/DSPF
5VN 5VN FINISHER SCAN CNT 5VPD 5VPD
PWB 3.3V 3.3V
6.3A/250V FUSE GND GND
24V4 24V4
1
GND GND 1
5VN 5VN LCC
PSU
24V4
GND
5VN DESK 5VO
FAX INFO
LED
option
JAPAN ONLY
A B C D E
$&&25' )*1' $&3:% 9+51 9+51 027+(53:%
&1%39/ &1 &1 &1
96HULHV! /B,1 06:1RXW 06:1RXW '*1' '*1'
1& 1& 1& 1& 365(' '&3:% '*1' '*1'
1B,1 06:/RXW 06:/RXW 9/ 9/
㼛㼞 %39/. 9/ 9/
&1%39/ &1 365(' 92 92
/B,1 /B,1 /B,1 06:/LQ 06:/LQ %39+% 9
96HULHV! )* )* 1& 1& 1& 1& 36 06: 91
1B,1 1B,1 1B,1 06:1LQ 06:1LQ 9
㻵㼚㼘㼑㼠㻌㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼛㼞 )*1' %39/5 36 &1 9
65$7 9 3*1'
&1%39+5 9 %39+
1B:+ '*1'
1& 1& %39+% 9+51
/B:+ &1 &1
'&&17Q5< Q5<B&17
1& 1& Q2))B&17
'&&17Q2)) 1& '*1'
+/3:% %%3$6. 3$396 %%3$6.
&1 &1%39/( &1 3$396
/B+/ /B+/ 91
1& 1& 1& 1& 91
1 +/
1B+/ 1 +/
1B+/ 91 Ѝ 72/&&3%
72 /&&3%
%39/:+ 91 Ѝ 72,16(57253'
'*1'
&1 '*1' Ѝ 72/&&3%
3. Actual wiring chart
36 1+/LQ &1 9+51 &1 %39+% 9+51

/B:+ 1& 1& /B'& /B'& &1%39+% &1 3&83:%
/+/LQ 1& 1& 1& 1& 9 &1ࠉ
36 :+B6: %39+5 1& 1& 1B'& 9 9
/B:+ 1B'& %39+% 1& 1& 9
%39+% 9+51 1& 1& 9
3&,$&LQWHUIDFH3:%
%39+% 9+51 91
㼛㼞㼛㼞㼛㼞 &1 9
&1 &1 &1 9+51 9+51 &1 ): *1'
:+/ /LQ /B'& /B'& 3*1' *1'
1& 1& 1& 1& 1& 1& 1& 1& 3*1' *1'
:+1 1LQ 1& 1& 1B'& 3*1' *1'
%39+5 %39+5 㼛㼞 1B'& %39+% 1&3*1' 1& ):
㼛㼞
&1 &1%39+ %39+% 3*1' Ѝ 72,16(57253' %39+%
:+3:% /LQ /3&,B7 3*1' Ѝ 72/&&3% 9+51
1& 1& 1& 1& 㼛㼞 &1 1&3*1' 㸦1&
&1 1LQ 13&,B7 (/59(/39 365HF,1 %39+% 9+51
:+B1/68 %39+5 365HF,1 1& 1& &1 6059160391& 3+'59 &1
:+B1'(6./&& &1 5($&725 365HF287 365HF287 1&9 1& *1' *1'
1& 3࡬ 3&,1RXW %39+%%/8( 9 Ѝ 723& 36)0 36)0B/' 36)0B/'
:+B/'(6./&& 1& 㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䚷㻼㻯㻵 9+51%/ 9 Ѝ 723% 36)0B9 36)0B9
:+B//68 3&,/RXW 9
%39+ %39+ 9 60391&60591
A. Power supply section/Front section (P1)
6&$11(581,7 9 Ѝ 72/&&3% *1' *1'

&1 (/59(/39 (/59(/39 9 Ѝ 72,16(57253' 36)0 36)0B/' 36)0B/'
:+16&$1 :+16&$1 :+16&$1 %39+% 9+51 36)0B9 36)0B9
1& 1& :+/6&$1 :+/6&$1 :+ 60391&60591
:+/6&$1 2=)0B9 2=)0B9
%39+%/ 9+51 -31237,21 2=)0B&17 2=)0B&17
(;9237,21 2=)0 *1' *1'
&1 -3167$1'$5' (;9237,21 B
2=)0B/' B
2=)0B/'
:+1'(6. (;9237,21 (;9237,21 %%3+'66%
1& 1& :+ (;9237,21
:+/'(6. (;9237,21
%39+ 9+51
&1
:+B35 &1
1& 1& :+B35
9 9
%%3+.5 %%3+'66%
3+5 3+'59
6/59)6/39
9 9 )5203'
'6:5 36 9+51 &1
'6:B5 '6:B5
36 '6:B5
'6:B)
(/39(/59 ,179
'6:B5 '6:B5 ᯛᶵ3'࡬ *1'
36 '6:B) ᯛᶵ3&࡬ 91
'6:)
'6:B) %39+%
6367 &1
,179
$&3:% 3$࡬ *1'
&1 913'
,179 ,179

3*1' *1'
,179LQ ,179LQ
*1' 1&
,17B&17 ,17B&17
9 %39+%
9 &1 9+51
%39+% 9 '&36
9+5 1
9+51 %3 9+ %
%39+%
9+51
3+5 ')%'(35&')%'(65& &1
350B% 350B;% 350B;%
350B$ 350B;$ 350B;$
9 9B350 9B350
350 9 9B350 9B350
350B% 350B% 350B%
350B$ 350B$ 350B$
+/3&'
91 91 91
+/3&' +/3&' +/3&'
'*1' *1' *1'
*3$
6/396/59)
:710B :710B :710B
710 :710B :710B :710B
71)'
71)' 71)' 71)'
'*1' *1' *1'

1& *1'
3$3963$/59 6059160391&
7RQHU 3&6)0B9 3&6)0B9 3&6)0B9 3&6)0B9
3&6)0B/' 3&6)0B9 3&6)0B9 3&6)0B9
FRROLQJIDQ *1' 3&6)0B/' 3&6)0B/' 3&6)0B/'
3&6)0B/' 3&6)0B/' 3&6)0B/'
*1' *1' *1'
3$3963$/59 1& 1& 1&
7RQHU 3&6)0B9 1& 1& 1& 1& 5&)0B9
&
3&6)0
3&6)0B/'
/' 1& 1& 1& 1& 5&)0B/'
5&)0 /'
1&
FRROLQJIDQ
OL I *1' 1& 1& 1& 1& *1'
1& 1& 1& 3+'596 %%3+'66%
1& 1& 1&
')'6& 1& 1& 1&
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
')'363
B. Fusing section (P2)
)XVLQJVHFWLRQ
6/59)6/39 6/59)6/39 3 'UDZHUࠉ5:= 5 &1

1+//0 +/ /0 1+//0 1+//0 1+//0
1& 1& +/3:%
1+/8:
76/ 9+51 %39+%
'01L '01L &1 3$396

1& 1&
+/B35
+/B287B80
+/B287B/0
+/B287B8:
+/B287B86
'01L '01L </39</59) 9/599/39 </39</59) &1 '*1'
766 /+/86/0 /+/86 +/ 86 1+/86 1+/86 1+/86 ,179
1& 1& %%3$6.
/+/8: +/ 8: 1+/8: 1+/8: 1+/80
'01L '01L 9/39%. %39/.
760 /+/808: /+/80 +/ 80 1+/80 1+/80
&1
/+/808: /+/808: /+/808:
1& 1&
/+/86/0 /+/86/0 /+/86/0
%39/5'
%3 9/ 5'
9/395
6059%6039%&
7+B80&6B,1
57+80 7+B80B,1 3&83:%
1RQFRQWDFW *1' 5&=5936 5&=5936 ')%'(35&')%'(65& 3+'596 &1
$ 7+B80&6B,1 $ 7+B80&6B,1 7+B80&6B,1
$ 7+B80B,1 $ 7+B80B,1 7+B80B,1 &1
6059%6039%& $ *1' $ *1' *1' ,179
57+86 7+B86B,1 $ 7+B86B,1 $ 7+B86B,1 7+B86B,1 *1'
&RQWDFW *1' $ *1' $ *1' *1' +/287B8:
1& $ 1& $ 1& 7+B/0B,1 7+B/0B,1 +/287B/0
1& $ 1& $ 1& *1' *1' +/287B86
$ 91 $ 91 91 +/287B80
$ :(%' $ :(%' :(%' +/B35
6059160391& $ *1' $ *1' *1' %%3+'66% 3+'596
91 91 5&=53,1
:(%' :(%'
:(%' *1' *1'
9+3/*1/
㻝㻣㻥㻞㻞㻤㻙㻟 1& 1& 1& 1& 7+B80B,1
1& 1& 1& 1& *1'
1& % 1& % 1& 1& 1& 1& 1& 7+B(;B,1
1& % 1& % 1& 1& 1& 1& 1& *1'
6059%6039%& 1& % 1& % 1& 1& 1& 1& 1& +/3&6

57+/0 7+B/0B,1 % 7+B/0B,1 % 1& 1& 1& 1& 9
&RQWDFW *1' % *1' % 1& 1& 1& 1& %:'
1& % 1& % 1& 1& 1& 1& 1& *1'
1& % 1& % 1& 1& 1& 1& 1& 91
1& % 1& % 1& 1& 1& 1&
1& % 1& % 1&
5&=5936 5&=53,1 5&=5936 6039%&6059%
3&8B5(4
B 4 3&8B5(4
6&B$&. 6&B$&.
*1' %%3+'66%
㼀㼛㻌㻼㻝㻞㻙㻣㻮
㼀㼛㻌㻼㻝㻜㻙㻡㻱
3&83:%
6HSDUDWLRQHOHFWURGH81B. 3+'596
78'B. 60391&60591 &1
78'B. 78'B. 78'B.
*1' *1' *1'
913'B78'B. 913'B78'B. 913'B78'B.
*36 37&B+($7 37&B+($7
%%3+'66%
+HDWHUHOHFWURGH
65$7
C. High voltage section (P3)
&1
37&81 *1'
37&HOHFWURGH
37& 37& &1 3$396 *1'
36:+ %39+ QG7&3:% ,179 㻝 ,179
3*1' 㻞 *1'
7&B'$7$ 㻟 7&B'$7$
7&B&/. 㻠 7&B&/.
7&B/' 㻡 7&B/'
+9B5(0 +9B5(0
7& 7& 37&B(55 㻣 37&B(55
36%/8( 36 37&B&/. 㻤 37&B&/.
%%3$6. %%3+'66%
3+'596
&1 3$396 &1

0&. 0&. ,179 㻤 ,179
36 365(' 0&3:% 3*1' 㻣 *1'
*%. 㸦㸧
㸦635,1*㸧 *%. B
+9B'$7$ 㻢 B
+9B'$7$
+9B&/. 㻡 +9B&/.
%6. 㸦635,1*㸧 %6. +9B/' 㻠 +9B/'
+9B5(0 㻟 +9B5(0
*%& 㸦635,1*㸧 *%& 0&B&/B(55 㻞 0&B&/B(55
0&B%.B(55 㻝 0&B%.B(55
%6& 㸦635,1*㸧 %6& %%3$6. 7&B(55
0&& &1 3$396 1& UHVHUYHBLQ
36 *%0 㸦635,1*㸧 *%0 ,179 㻝 %%3+'66%
0&0 3*1' 㻞 3+'596
36 %60 㸦635,1*㸧 %60 7&5(9 㻟
0&0 7&<&& 㻠
36 *%< 㸦635,1*㸧 *%< 7&0&& 㻡
0&< 7&&&& 㻢
36 %6< 㸦635,1*㸧 %6< 7&.&& 㻣
+9B5(0 㻤
1& 㻥
0&< 0&&/ %%3$6.
36 36

&1
VW7&3:% 7&B(55 㻥
7&. 7&. +9B5(0 㻝
6367 )36 7&.&& 㻞
7&& 7&& 7&&&& 㻟
6367 )36 7&0&& 㻠
7&0 7&0 7&<&& 㻡
636 7
6367 )36
)36 7& 5(9
7&5(9 㻢
7&< 7&< 3*1' 㻣
6367 )36 ,179 㻤
%%3$6.
3$396
78'B&/ 60391&60591 &1

78'B&/ 78'B&/ 78'B&/
*1' *1' *1'
913'B78'B&/ 913'B78'B&/ 913'B78'B&/
*36 3+'596 %%3+'66%
6HSDUDWLRQHOHFWURGH81B&/
3&83:%
'90B. 3+'596 &1 &1 60391&60591 &580%/$&.
,179 ,179 91 91 91
*1' *1' &50B.B'7 &50B.B'7 &50B.B'7
'90B.B&. '90B.B&. &50B.B&. &50B.B&. &50B.B&.
'90B.B' '90B.B' *1' *1' *1'
'90 . /'
'90B.B/' '90 . /'
'90B.B/' 76+59.
1& 1&
1& 1& &30RQO\ &580&<$1
%%3$6. 3$396 '90B&/ 91 91 91
,179 ,179 &50B&B'7 &50B&B'7 &50B&B'7
*1' *1' &50B&B&. &50B&B&. &50B&B&.
'90B&/B&. '90B&/B&. *1' *1' *1'
'90B&/B' '90B&/B' 76+59.
'90B&/B/' '90B&/B/'
%5$.(ᮍ౑⏝ 1& 1& ,179 &5800$*(17$
&:&&: 1& 1& ,179 91 91 91
%%3$6. 3$396 1& *1' &50B0B'7 &50B0B'7 &50B0B'7
1& *1' &50B0B&. &50B0B&. &50B0B&.
&30RQO\ *1' *1' *1'
'90B&/ 76+59.
,179 ,179
D. Process drive unit section (P4)
,179 ,179 &580<(//2:

*1' *1' 91 91 91
*1' *1' &50B<B'7 &50B<B'7 &50B<B'7
'90B&/B&. '90B&/B&. &50B<B&. &50B<B&. &50B<B&.
'90B&/B' '90B&/B' *1' *1' *1'
'90B&/B/' '90B&/B/' 1& 1& 1& 76+59.
&:&&: 1& 1& ,179 1& 1& 1&
*$,11& 1& 1& *1'
%%3$6. 3$396
6059160391&
&$)0B9 &$)0B9
6059160391& &$)0B/' &$)0B/'
9 9 *1' *1'
785& 785& 785& UHVHUYHBLQ 1&
*1' 1&
913'B78' 1&
78' 1&
%%3+'66% 3+'596
&1 %%3+.6
710B0B;% 710B0B;%
710B0B;$ 710B0B;$
9B710B0 9B710B0
9B710B0 9B710B0 710B0
710B0B% 710B0B%
'+3'B. 710B0B$ 710B0B$
'+3'B. '+3'B. 3+5 %%3+.6
*1' *1' 710B<B;% 710B<B;%
913'B'+3'B. 913'B'+3'B. 710B<B;$ 710B<B;$

*36 '+3'B& 9B710B< 9B710B<
'+3'B& '+3'B& 9B710B< 9B710B< 710B<
*1' *1' 710B<B% 710B<B%
913'B'+3'B& 913'B'+3'B& 710B<B$ 710B<B$
*36 3+5 %%3+.6
&30RQO\ 710B.B;% 710B.B;%
710B.B;$ 710B.B;$
'+3'B&/㸭0 9B710B. 9B710B.
'+3'B0 '+3'B0 9B710B. 9B710B. 710B.
*1' *1' 710B.B% 710B.B%
913'B'+3'B0 913'B'+3'B0 710B.B$ 710B.B$
*36 3+5 %%3+.6
'+3'B< 710B&B;% 710B&B;%
'+3'B< '+3'B< 710B&B;$ 710B&B;$
*1' *1' 9B710B&
9 710 & 9 710 &
9B710B&
913'B'+3'B< 913'B'+3'B< 9B710B& 9B710B& 710 &
710B&
*36 710B&B% 710B&B%
&30RQO\ 710B&B$ 710B&B$
%%3+'66% 3+'596 3+5
6059160391&
9 9
785&B5 785&B5 785&B5
%%3+'66%
3&83:%
'/B%. 3+15+%83753+3+15+ &1
'981,7 *1' *1' *1'
1& 1&
%/$&. '/B%. '/B%. '/B%.

7&6B.
91B7&6 91B7&6 91B7&6 91B7&6
7&6B. 7&6B. 7&6B. 7&6B.
*1' *1' *1' *1'
76*B%. 76*B%. 76*B%. 76*B%.
%%3+.6 *1' *1' *1'
3+5 '97<3B. '97<3B. '97<3B.
1& '97<36(/B. '97<36(/B. '97<36(/B.
1& *1' *1' *1'
& 4533 3
%6. 㸦635,1*㸧 Ѝ7R3
65$7 65$7 6367
'/
'/B&
& 3+15+%83753+3+15+
*1' *1' *1'
1& 1&
&<$1 '/B& '/B& '/B&

7&6B&
91B7&6 91B7&6 91B7&6 91B7&6
7&6B& 7&6B& 7&6B& 7&6B&
*1' *1' *1' *1'
76*B& 76*B& 76*B& 76*B&
%%3+.6 *1' *1' *1'
3+5 '97<3B& '97<3B& '97<3B&
1& '97<36(/B& '97<36(/B& '97<36(/B&
1& *1' *1' *1'
& 4533 3
%6& 㸦635,1*㸧 Ѝ7R3
65$7 65$7 6367
'/B0 3+15+%83753+3+15+
*1' *1' *1'
1& 1&
0$*(17$ '/B0 '/B0 '/B0

7&6B0
91B7&6 91B7&6 91B7&6 91B7&6
7&6B0 7&6B0 7&6B0 7&6B0
*1' *1' *1' *1'
76*B0 76*B0 76*B0 76*B0
%%3+.6 *1' *1' *1'
3+5 '97<3B0 '97<3B0 '97<3B0
1& '97<36(/B0 '97<36(/B0 '97<36(/B0
1& *1' *1' *1'
& 4533 3
%60 㸦635,1*㸧 Ѝ3࡬
65$7 65$7 6367
'/B<
B 3+15+%83753+3+15+

*1' *1' *1'
1& 1&
<(//2: '/B< '/B< '/B<

7&6B<
91B7&6 91B7&6 91B7&6 91B7&6
7&6B< 7&6B< 7&6B< 7&6B<
*1' *1' *1' *1'
76*B< 76*B< 76*B< 76*B<
%%3+.6 *1' *1' *1'
3+5 '97<3B< '97<3B< '97<3B<
1& '97<36(/B< '97<36(/B< '97<36(/B<
1& *1' *1' *1'
& 4533 3 %%3$'66
%6< 㸦635,1*㸧 Ѝ7R3 3$'396
65$7 65$7 6367
5(*,675$7,216(1625 5(6,6(1625)
E. DV/DL/⁄Registration sensor/Process control sensor section (P5)
352&(66&21752/6(1625 913'
*1'
5(*6B)
5(*6B)B/('

3&6B&/
20521
6059%6039%& &1
913' 913'
*1' *1'
352&21 5(*6 )
5(*6B) 5(*6 )
5(*6B)
5(*6B)B/(' 5(*6B)B/('
6(162581 5(6,6(16255 1& 1& 1&
3&6B5 1& 1& 1& 1&
913' 1& 1& 1&
*1' 3&6B&/ 3&6B&/
5(*6B5 1& 1& 1&
5(*6B5B/(' 913' 913'
20521 *1' *1'
5(*6B5 5(*6B5
6059160391& 5(*6B5B/(' 5(*6B5B/('
3&66 3&66 3&66
3&66 9 9 9
1& 1& 1&
1& 1& 1& 1& UHVHUYHBLQ
1& 1& 1& 1& *1'
1& UHVHUYH)0B/'
1& *1'
1& UHVHUYH)0B9
33'36๓㺜㺻㺙㺎 3+15+%83753+3+15+
913' 913' 913'
33' 33' 33'
*1' *1' *1'
*3$ 913' 913'
33' 33'
3681,7 *1' *1'
33'36㺜㺻㺙㺎 %%3+'66%
913' 3+'596
33'
*1'
*3$
3&83:%
/'3:% /683:% &1
㸦1&㸧 *1'
&1 &1 ,179
'*1' '*1' $.B&6B. $.B&6B.
6'$B.& 6'$B.&
6&/B.& 6&/B.& $.B&6B((3B. $.B&6B((3B.
:3B.& :3B.& $.B&6B& $.B&6B&
'*1' '*1' $.B&6B((3B& $.B&6B((3B&
6'$B0< 6'$B0<
6&/B0< 6&/B0< $.B&6B0 $.B&6B0
:3B0< :3B0< $.B&6B((3B0 $.B&6B((3B0
'*1' '*1' $.B&6B< $.B&6B<
/'&+. /'&+.
/'&+. /'&+.
$.B&6B((3B< $.B&6B((3B<
F. LSU section (P6)
'*1' '*1' $.B7;' $.B7;'B.

$.B&6B((3B. $.B&6B((3B. 9UHI3&8 9HI
$.B&6B. $.B&6B.
06(7B. 06(7B. $.B5;' $.B5;'B.
B
Q/'(55B. B
Q/'(55B. $.B6&/. $.B6&/.B.
Q,1,7B. Q,1,7B. 㸦1&㸧 *1'
'*1' '*1'
1& 1&
㸦1&㸧 *1'
1& 1& 3+'596 %%3+'66%
1& 1&
'*1' '*1'
'7B& '7B&
'7B& '7B&
'7B& '7B&
'7B& '7B& 027+(53:%
$.B5;' $.B5;'
$.B7;' $.B7;'
$.B6&/. $.B6&/.
$.B&6B((3B< $.B&6B((3B<
$.B&6B< $.B&6B<
$.B&6B((3B0 $.B&6B((3B0 3+5 &1
$.B&6B0 $.B&6B0 9 9 &1 60391&60591 6059160391&
$.B&6B((3B& $.B&6B((3B&
$.B&6B& $.B&6B& '*1' '*1' ,179 ,179 ,179
06(7B< 06(7B< 9 9 QF 1& /6866B% /6866B% /6866%.
Q/'(55B< Q/'(55B< '*1' '*1' /6866B%
Q,1,7B< Q,1,7B<
'*1' '*1' 9 9
'*1' '*1' 3*1' 3*1' 60391&60591
'*1' '*1' 6%3+'66% %%3+.6/)61 &&)0B9 &&)0B9
9 9
'*1' '*1' 3+'596 &&)0B/' &&)0B/' &&)0
9B/'' 9B/'' &1 3+'596 &1 *1' *1'
9B/'' 9B/'' 9B/' 㸦1&㸧㸦1&㸧 &&)0B&17 1&
9B/' 9B/'
9B/' 9B/' '*1' '*1'
'*1' '*1' Q6&.B/68 Q6&.B/68
'7B. '7B. '*1' '*1' *1' 1&
'7B. '7B.
'7B. '7B. Q75$16B'$7 Q75$16B'$7 *1' 1&
'7B. '7B. '*1' '*1' UHVHUYHBLQ 1&
3B. 3B. Q569B'$7 Q569B'$7 91 1&
3B. 3B.
Q,1,7B& Q,1,7B& /68$6,&B567 /68$6,&B567 *1' 1&
Q/'(55B& Q/'(55B& Q75$16B567 Q75$16B567 UHVHUYHBLQ 1&
06(7B& 06(7B& -2%(1'B,17 -2%(1'B,17 91 1&
3B& 3B&
3B& 3B& 7+B/68 7+B/68 %%3+'66% 3+'596
Q,1,7B0 Q,1,7B0 Q3&8B75* Q3&8B75*
Q/'(55B0 Q/'(55B0 96<1&B.B1 96<1&B.B1
06(7B0 06(7B0
3B0 3B0 96<1&B.B3 96<1&B.B3
3B0 3B0 96<1&B&B3 96<1&B&B3
3B< 3B< 96<1&B&B1 96<1&B&B1
3B< 3B<
3 3 96<1&B0B1 96<1&B0B1
3 3 96<1&B0B3 96<1&B0B3
3 3 96<1&B<B3 96<1&B<B3
'7B< '7B<
'7B< '7B< 96<1&B<B1 96<1&B<B1
'7B< '7B< 6%3+'66% 3+'596 %%3+'66%
'7B< '7B<
6'&/. 6'&/.
*$,1B),; *$,1B),;
'7B0 '7B0
'7B0 '7B0 &1 3+'596 &1
'7B0 '7B0
'7B0 '7B0 &+B1 &+B1
'*1' '*1' &+B3 &+B3
.;567+ '*1' '*1'
'*1' '*1'
&+B1 &+B1
&+B3 &+B3
&+B1 &+B1
&+B3 &+B3
'*1' '*1'
'*1' '*1'
㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
&/.B1 &/.B1
&/.B3 &/.B3
&+B1 &+B1
&+B3 &+B3
'*1' '*1'
'*1' '*1'
3+5 3+5 &+B1 &+B1
%'3:% &1 &+B3 &+B3
'*1' '*1' (&/.B/68B1 (&/.B/68B1
Q%' Q%' (&/.B/68B3 (&/.B/68B3

'*1' '*1' '*1' '*1'
91 91 '*1' '*1'
%%3+.6 '*1' +6<1&B/68B3 +6<1&B/68B3
7+ +6<1&B/68B1 +6<1&B/68B1
/687+
/68 7+ 1& 1& 6% 3+'66 %
6%3+'66% %% 3+'66 %
%%3+'66%
'*1' 6%3+.6 3+'596
7+
1& 1&
1& 1&
%%3+.6 3+5
32/<*2102725 &1 &1

Q%5$.( Q%5$.(
Q32/<B&. Q32/<B&.
Q32/<B/2&. Q32/<B/2&.
Q32/<B67$57 Q32/<B67$57
3*1' 3*1'
9 9
%%3+.6 6%3+.6
3+5 3+5
&1
)$1B9
/68B)$1 )$1BQ5($'<
3*1'
6%3+.6
3+5
3DSHUIHHGXQLWVHFWLRQ 3&83:%
&/8' 3+15+%83753+3+15+ &=+596%837=6&=+596 3+'596 &1
913' 913' $ 913' $ 913'
&/8' &/8' $ &/8' $ &/8'
*1' *1' $ *1' $ *1'
*3$ &3('
913' 913' $ 913' $ 913'
&3(' &3(' $ &3(' $ &3('
*1' *1' $ *1' $ *1'
&63$3(5)(('81,7 &3)' *3$
91 91 $ 91 $ 91
&3)' &3)' $ &3)' $ &3)'
*1' *1' $ *1' $ *1'
*3$/ '6:B& ࠉ
91 91 $ 91 $
'6:B& '6:B& $ '6:B& $
*1' *1' $ *1' $
*3$
&63'
913' $ 913' $ 913'
&63' $ &63' $ &63'
'*1' $ *1' $ *1'
&66 *3$
1& 1&
'*1' $ *1' $ *1'
&66 $ &66 $ &66
&66 $ &66 $ &66
&66 $ &66 $ &66
&66 $ &66 $ &66
633+.6
&/8' 3+15+%83753+3+15+ &=+59<%837=6&=+59<

913' 913' % 913' % 913'
&/8' &/8' % &/8' % &/8'
*1' *1' % *1' % *1'
*3$
&3('
913' 913' % 913' % 913'
&63$3(5)(('81,7 &3(' &3(' % &3(' % &3('
*1' *1' % *1' % *1'
&3)' *3$
91 91 % 91 % 91
&3)' &3)' % &3)' % &3)'
*1' *1' % *1' % *1'
*3$/
&63'
913' % 913' % 913'
&63' % &63' % &63'
*1' % *1' % *1'
&66 *3$
1& 1&
*1' % *1' % *1'
&66 % &66 % &66
&66 % &66 % &66
&66 % &66 % &66
&66 % &66 % &66
633+.6 %%3+'66%
&1
91
'6:B&
*1'
1& UHVHUYHBLQ
3+'596 %%3+'66%
3DSHUIHHGGULYHXQLWVHFWLRQ &3)0 3$396 3+'596 &1

,179 ,179
*1' *1'
&3)0B*$,1 &3)0B*$,1
&3)0B&. &3)0B&.
&3)0B' &3)0B'
&3)0B/' &3)0B/'
1& 1&
G. Paper feed unit section / Paper feed drive unit section (P7)
%33$6.
6059160391& 6059160391&
&3)& &3)& &3)&
&3)& 9 9 9
&38& &38&
9 9
6059160391& &38& &38&
&38& 9 9
&38& 9 *1' *1'
&/80 &/80

*1' *1'
6059160391& &/80 &/80
&38& %%3+'66%
&38& 9
&/80
*1'
&/80 $'80/ &1
%33+.6 3+5 ,179 ,179
,179 ,179 '5,9(5
&/80 $'80/B% $'80/B%
*1' $'80/B% $'80/B% 0$,13:%
&/80 $'80/B$ $'80/B$
%33+.6 3+5 $'80/B$ $'80/B$
%33+.6 3+5 3$396 %%3$6.
5IUDPH
+3)0 &1
,179 ,179
,179 ,179
+3)0B% +3)0B%
+3)0B% +3)0B%
+3)0B$ +3)0B$
+3)0B$ +3)0B$
%33+.6 3+5 3$39(%/8( %%3$(.%/8(
3)0 &1
,179 ,179
,179 ,179
3)0B% 3)0B%
3)0B% 3)0B%
3)0B$ 3)0B$
3)0B$ 3)0B$
%33+.6 3+5
3DSHUIHHGGULYH
550
,179 ,179
,179 ,179
550 %
550B% 550
550B%%
550B% 550B%
550B$ 550B$
550B$ 550B$
%33+.55(' 3+555(' 1& 1&
3URFHVVGULYH 3$396 %%3$6.
-DSDQRQO\
3573' &=+ %837=6/)61㸩&=+596

3573' 3573'
*1' *1'
92B3573' 92B3573' 3&83:%
6* ;5+3
6059160391& 3 4533LQ 6 &1

9 9 9
$'8*6 $'8*6 $'8*6 $'8*6
&1 )* )*1' )*
65$7 65$7
91 91 91
H. Right door section (P8)
'*1' *1' *1'

6,1 6,1 6,1
6(/,1 6(/,1 6(/,1
7)' 3+15+%83753+3+15+ &1 6(/,1 6(/,1 6(/,1
7)' 7)' 7)' 6(/,1 6(/,1 6(/,1
'*1' '*1' '*1' $33' $33' $33'
9/(' 9/(' 9/(' $33' $33' $33'
32' *36 $33' 1& 1& 1& 㸦1& 㸦1& $33'
32' 32' 32' 32' 32' 32'
'*1' '*1' '*1' 03)' 03)' 03)'
9/(' 9/(' 9/(' 91 91 91
*36 03:' 03:' 03:'
'6:B$'8 7+B0 7+B0 7+B0
'6:B$'8 '*1' +8'B0 +8'B0 +8'B0
'6:B$'8 9/(' 6%3+'66%
'*1' $33' 1& 9 㸦1& 㸦1& 9
9/(' '*1' 03*6 03*6
*36 9/(' 03)6 03)6
1& $33' 9 9
$33' 3+15+%83753+3+15+ 1& *1' 038& 038&
$33' $33' 1& 9/(' 9 9
'*1' '*1' 1& 1&
9/(' 9/(' 6%3+'66%
*36 3+'596 92B3573' 92B3573'
3573' 3573'
*1' *1'
㸦1& 1& 㸦1& %%3+'66%
㸦1& 1& 㸦1& 3+'596
5,*+7'225,) 㸦1& 1& 㸦1&
㸦1& 1& 㸦1&
3:% 㸦1& 1& 㸦1&
038&
9 038&
$33' &1 60391&60591
$33' $33'
'*1' '*1'
9/(' 9/('
*36
&1
1&*1' 1& 60391&60591
03/' 3+15+%83753+3+15+ 3+15+%83753+3+15+ 1&9/(' 1& 9
03/' 1& 1& 03/' 03/' 1&*1' 1& 03)6 03)6
'*1' 1& 1& 03/' 1& 1& 03/' 1&*1' 1&
9/(' 1& 1& 9/(' 9/(' 1&*1' 1&
*36 03/' 1&*1' 1& 3+15+%83753+3+15+
'*1' 91 91 1&*1' 1& 9
03:' 9/(' 03:' 03:' 1& 1& 03)6 03('
91 91 03(' 03(' 03('
03:' 03:' '*1'
'*1' '*1' '*1' '*1' 9/('

95B3:% 3+15+ 9/(' 9/(' *36
0723 1&)$;B' 1& 3+15+%83753+3+15+
0723 0723 0723 1&*1' 1& 03*6 03*6 6059160391&
'*1' 9/(' 9/(' 9/(' 03*6
9/(' 9/(' 9/(' 9 9 03*6
0723 *36 '*1'
0723 0723 0723 03)' 03)' 03)'
'*1' 6%3+'66% 3+'596
9/(' 9/(' 9/(' 03)'
*36 7+ +8' 03)'

91 91 91 ' *1'
'*1'
+8'B0 +8'B0 +8'B0 9/('
'*1' '*1' '*1' *36
9
9
9
7+B0 7+B0 7+B0

'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
=+5 9/(' 1& 1& 9/('

3+'596 6%3+'66% ')'363

'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
')'363
'5,9(568%3:%
$'8+0 ')%'(35&')%'(65& 3$396 &1㸭&1
$'0+B$ $'0+B$ $'0+B$
$'0+B$ $'0+B$ $'0+B$
$'0+B% $'0+B% $'0+B%
$'0+B% $'0+B% $'0+B%
,179 ,179 ,179
,179 ,179 ,179
%%3+.6 3+5 %%3$6.
6059160391& &1
32)0B9 32)0B9 32)0B9
32)0B&17 32)0B&17 32)0B&17
32)0 3*1' 3*1' *1'
32)0B/' 32)0B/' 32)0B/'
6059160391& 32)0B/' 32)0B/'
32)0B9 6059160391&
9
I. Paper exit unit section (P9)
32)0B&17 9 9

32)0 3*1' 260B;% 260B;% 260B;%
32)0B/' 260 260B;$ 260B;$ 260B;$
6+,)7(502725 260B% 260B% 260B%
260B$ 260B$ 260B$
1&
7)' 3+5 7)' 7)'

913'
7)'
'*1' 32' 32'
*3$ 6%3+.6 32'
913'
32' +326 6+326
'*1'
+326 /*1/
913' 32' 32'
+326 '*1' *1'
'*1' 913' 913'
/*1/ 32' :(%B0RXW 3+'596 %%3+'66%
913' :(%B0RXW
32' 3&83:%
'*1'
㸦1&
㸦1&
㸦1&
㸦1&
㸦1&
㸦1&
㸦1&
/*1/ 1& 1& 1& &1
1& 1& 1& :(%B0

:(%B0
B
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
913'
913'
913'
913'
913'
913'
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
32)0B9
32)0B9
32)0B9
32)0B9
32)0B&17
32)0B&17
32)0B&17
32)0B&17
')'363 66-& 66-&
6/396/59
:(%B0RXW
:(%0 :(%B0RXW
60391&60591
)8)0B9 )8)0B9
)8)0 )8)0B/' )8)0B/'
3*1' *1'
3+'596 %%3+'66%

)80 6059160391& &1
,179 ,179 ,179
3*1' 3*1' *1'
1& 1& )80B&. )80B&.
)80B&. )80B' )80B'
)80B' )80B/' )80B/'
)80B/' 1& 1& 1& 3+'596 %%3+'66%
%%3+.55(' 3+555('
320 6059160391& &1

320B$ 320B$ 320B$ 320B$
,179 ,179 ,179 ,179
320B% 320B% 320B% 320B% '5,9(5
320B$ 320B$ 320B$ 320B$
,179 ,179 ,179 ,179
0$,13:%
320B% 320B% 320B% 320B%
%%3+.6 3+5 %%3$6.
)* )* 3$396
65$7 65$7
3&83:%
027+(53:%
FSPPDFKLQH '5,9(568%3:%&30
&1 &1 &1 %70
'0B&/B&17 '0&/&17 ,179 ,179
&1 &1 '0B&/B;$ '0&/B$ ,179 ,179
*1' *1' '0B&/B$ '0&/B$ %70B% %70B%
*1' *1' '0B&/B% '0&/B% %70B% %70B%
03)&B5(6 03)&B5(6 '0B&/B;% '0&/B% %70B$ %70B$
3&8B5(6 3&8B5(6 '0B.B&17 '0.&17 %70B$ %70B$
3&8B7;' 3&8B7;' '0B.B;$ '0.B$ %%3$6. 3$396 㼄㻴㻼㻙㻢 %%;+
*1' *1' '0B.B$ '0.B$
3&8B5;' 3&8B5;' '0B.B% '0.B%
3&8B'75 3&8B'75 '0B.B;% '0.B%
㸦1& *1' *1' 1& 1&550&17 &1 '0%.
3&8B'65 3&8B'65 1& 1&550B$ ,179 ,179
*1' *1' 1& 1&550B$ ,179 ,179
32) 32) *1' '*1' '0%.B% '0%.B%
75$16B567 75$16B567 %70B&17 %70&17 '0%.B% '0%.B%
/68B567 /68B567 %70B;$ %70B$ '0%.B$ '0%.B$
6&. 6&. %70 $
%70B$ %70 $
%70B$ '0%. $
'0%.B$ '0%. $
'0%.B$
*1' *1' %70B% %70B% 㻼㻴㻾㻙㻢 %%3+.6
J. MOTOR DRIVER (P10)
*1' *1' %70B;% %70B%

75$16B'$7 75$16B'$7 1& 1&550B% '0&/
-2%(1'B,17 -2%(1'B,17 1& 1&550B% ,179 ,179
569B'$7 569B'$7 $'80B&17 $'808&17 ,179 ,179
*1' *1' $'80B;$ $'808B$ '0&/B% '0&/B%
7+B/68 7+B/68 $'80B$ $'808B$ '0&/B% '0&/B%
3573'RXW 3573'RXW $'80B;% $'808B% '0&/B$ '0&/B$
92BGXW\ 92BGXW\ $'80B% $'808B% '0&/B$ '0&/B$
*1' *1' %%3+'66% 3+'596 6059%6039%& 31'39= %%31'=6 %%3$6. 3$396 㻼㻴㻾㻙㻢 %%3+.6
913' 913' *1'
913' 913' 㼀㼛㻌㻼㻞㻙㻟㻰 6&B$&. 㼀㼛㻌㻼㻝㻞㻙㻤㻮
*1' *1' &1 3&8B5(4 &1
)0=%7 )0=%7 ,179 ,179
*1' 3*1'
91 91
%39+% 9+51 9+51%/ %39+(%/8(
&1
1&%70B%㸧 1& FSPPDFKLQH
1&%70B;%㸧 1& '5,9(568%3:%&30
1&'0B.B%㸧 1& &1 %70
1&'0B.B;%㸧 1& ,179 ,179
*1' &1 ,179 ,179
'0B&/B&17 '0&/B&17 %70B% %70B%
'0B&/B&. '0&/B&. %70B% %70B%
'0B&B(1 '0&B(1 %70B$ %70B$
'0B0B(1 '00B(1 %70B$ %70B$
'0B<B(1 '0<B(1 1& 1& 㼄㻴㻼㻙㻢 %%;+
B B
'0B.B&17 B
'0%NB&17 %%3$6. 3$396
'0B.B&. '0%NB&. &1 '0%.
'0B.B(1 '0%NB(1 ,179 ,179
*1' '*1' ,179 ,179
%70B&17 %70B&17 '0%.B% '0%.B%
%70B&. %70B&. '0%.B% '0%.B%
%70B(1 %70B(1 '0%.B$ '0%.B$
$'80B&17 $'808B&17 '0%.B$ '0%.B$
$'80B;$ $'808B$ 㻼㻴㻾㻙㻢 %%;+
$'80B$ $'808B$
$'80B;% $'808B% '0&
$'80B% $'808B% ,179 ,179
'0B.B527 '0%NB527 ,179 ,179
'0B&/B527 '0&/B527 '0&B% '0&B%
%70B527 %70B527 '0&B% '0&B%
*1' '*1' '0&B$ '0&B$
UHVHUYH)0B/' 1& 1& 1& '0&B$ '0&B$
%%3$6. 3$396 3+5 %%3+.6
*1' 1& 6059%6039%& 1& 1& &1 '00

%%3+'66% 3+'596 *1' 1& 1& ,179 ,179
6&B$&. 3%࡬ 31'39= %%31'=6 ,179 ,179
3'࡬
3&8B5(4 '00B% '00B%
&1 &1 '00B% '00B%
,179 ,179 '00B$ '00B$
*1' 3*1' '00B$ '00B$
91 91 3+5 %%3+.6
%39+% 9+51 9+51 %39+ '0<
,179 ,179
,179 ,179

'0<B% '0<B%
'0<B% '0<B%
'0<B$ '0<B$
'0<B$ '0<B$
1& 1& 3+5 %%3+.6
%% 3$6.
%%3$6. 3$3 9 6
3$396
'5,9(50$,13:%
&1 &1 &1
$'80B&17 $'80/&17
㹼
$'80B;$ $'80/B$ +3)0

$'80B$ $'80/B$
$'80B% $'80/B%
$'80B;% $'80/B% &1
320B&17 320&17
㹼
320B;$ 320B$ 320

320B$ 320B$
320B% 320B%
㹼
320B;% 320B% $'80/

550B&17 550&17
550B;$ 550B$
550B$ 550B$ &1
*1' '*1'
㹼
+3)0B&17 +3)0&17 3)0

+3)0B;$ +3)0B$
+3)0B$ +3)0B$
㹼
+3)0B% +3)0B% 550

+3)0B;% +3)0B%
550B% 550B%
550B;% 550B%
3)0B&17 3)0&17
3)0B;$ 3)0B$
3)0B$ 3)0B$
3)0B;% 3)0B%
3)0B% 3)0B%
%%3+'66% 3+'596 31'39= %%31'=6
&1 &1
,179 ,179
*1' 3*1'
913' 913'
%39+% 9+51 9+51 %39+
3&83:%
&1
9
*1'
&1 &1 (139(/59 3+'596 &1 &9B&23<
7;'B),1 7;'B),1 7;'B,16 7;'B,16 &9B&2817
5;'B),1 5;'B),1 5;'B,16 5;'B,16 &9B67$57
'75B),1 '75B),1 '75B,16 '75B,16 &9B&$
'65 ),1
'65B),1 '65 ),1
'65B),1 '65 ,16
'65B,16 '65 ,16
'65B,16 &9 &/&23<
&9B&/&23< 72&2,19(1'25
72 &2,1 9(1'25
5(6B),1 5(6B),1 5(6B,16 5(6B,16 &9B&2/25
),1,6+(5 9 9 1& 1& 1& *1' &9B67$3/( 237,21
91 91 91 %%3+'66% &9B&2/25
'*1' '*1' '*1' &9B'83/(;
3*1' 3*1' 1& 1& 1& 91
)*1' )*1' )*1' &9B6,=(
9 9 9 &9B6,=(
3*1' 3*1' 3*1' &9B6,=(
&9B6,=(
),1,6+(5 ,16(5725237,21 ,16(5725 %%31'=6
65$7
)*
'&3:%
&1 )520WR3
9
9+51 %39+%
&1 )520WR3
3*1'
9+51 %39+%
&1 )520WR3
91
9+51 %39+%
&1) 6059160391& 3&83:%

K. DESK/LCC/INSERTOR/COIN VENDOR (P11)
9 9
3*1' 3*1'
91 91
'*1' '*1' 3+'596 &1
'*1' '*1' *1'
'(6.&21752/3:% 7;'B'6. 7;'B'6. 7;'B'6.
5;'B'6. 5;'B'6. 5;'B'6.
'75B'6. '75B'6. '75B'6.
'65B'6. '65B'6. '65B'6.
5(6B'6. 5(6B'6. 5(6B'6.
75&B'6. 75&B'6. 75&B'6.
1&
%%3+'66%
(/39(/59
:+B/'(6. :+B/'(6.
:+ :+B1'(6. :+B1'(6.
)*1'
)*
'(6.237,21 65$7
)*
(/39(/59
&1$ 1& 1&
1& 1& 1&
7;'B/&& 7;'B/&& 7;'B/&&

5;'B/&& 5;'B/&& 5;'B/&&
'75B/&& '75B/&& '75B/&&
'65B/&& '65B/&& '65B/&&
5(6B/&& 5(6B/&& 5(6B/&&
/&&&21752/3:% 1& )*1' 1& *1'
91 91 1& *1'
'*1' '*1' *1'
9 9 75&B/&&
3*1' 3*1' %%3+'66%
75& /&&
75&B/&& 75& /&&
75&B/&&
%%3+'66% 1& 1&
1& 1&
'&3:%
65$7 )* &1 )520WR3
)* 9
(/39(/59 (/39(/59 9+51 %39+
:+B//&& :+B//&&
:+ :+B1/&& :+B1/&& &1 )520WR3
)*1' 3*1'
)* 1& 9+51 %39+
/&&237,21 1& )*
1& 65$7 &1 )520WR3
1& 91
1& '*1'
1& 9+51 %39+
1&
1&
1&
3 (/3LQ 5 :+3:%
(/39(/59 &1
:+B//68 :+B//68 :+B1/68
:+ :+B1/68 1& :+B1'(6./&&
:+B1/68 1& 1&
(/59(/39 :+B/'(6./&&
᪥ᮏྥ㸸ᶆ‽ࠉ᪥ᮏྥ௨እ㸸㺓㺪㺽㺚㺌㺻 :+B//68
9+51 %39+
LQFK23(5$7,2181
/&'8QLW
/9'63:%
027+(53:% 6&1&173:%
/&'PRGXOH
&1 &1 &1 &1 &1 1& 1&
9 9 *1' *1' 9 1& 1& 1&
9 9 Q/&'B',63 Q/&'B',63 9 9
'*1' *1' &1B/&'6(/ &1B/&'6(/ 9 9
91 9 &1B/&'6(/ &1B/&'6(/ 9 9
91 9 *1' *1' &/.(',' &/.(','
'*1' *1' /&'B$B3 /&'B$B3 '$7$(',' '$7$(','
%%9+ 9+51 9+51 %39+ /&'B$B1 /&'B$B1 7;B287 7;B287
*1' *1' 7;B287 7;B287
/&'B&/.B3 /&'B&/.B3 '*1' '*1'
/&'B&/.B1 /&'B&/.B1 7;B287 7;B287
&1 &1 *1' *1' 7;B287 7;B287
6&$1'$7$B 6&$1'$7$B1 /&'B$B3 /&'B$B3 '*1' '*1'
6&$1'$7$B 6&$1'$7$B3 /&'B$B1 /&'B$B1 7;B287 7;B287
'*1' *1' *1' *1' 7;B287 7;B287
6&$1'$7$
6&$1'$7$B 6&$1'$7$ 1
6&$1'$7$B1 /&' $ 3
/&'B$B3 /&' $ 3
/&'B$B3 ' *1'
'*1' ' *1'
'*1'
6&$1'$7$B 6&$1'$7$B3 /&'B$B1 /&'B$B1 7&/. 7&/.
'*1' *1' *1' *1' 7&/. 7&/.
6&$1'$7$BY 6&$1'$7$B1 /&'B$B3 /&'B$B3 '*1' '*1'
6&$1'$7$B 6&$1'$7$B3 /&'B$B1 /&'B$B1 '*1' '*1'
'*1' *1' *1' *1' '*1' '*1'
6&$1&/.287B 6&$1&/.287B1 &1BQ&&)7 &1BQ&&)7 '*1' '*1'
6&$1&/.287B 6&$1&/.287B3 Q+/; Q+/; '*1' '*1'
'*1' *1' <+< <+< '*1' '*1'
6&$1'$7$B 6&$1'$7$B3 ;+; ;+; '*1' '*1'
6&$1'$7$B 6&$1'$7$B1 Q</< Q</< &&)7BRXW &&)7BRXW
'*1' *1' *1' *1' ',63BRXW ',63BRXW
9 1& 1& 9 9B/9'6 9B/9'6 9B/&' 9B/&'
L. Operation panel section (P12)
%%3+'66% %%3+'66% 9B/9'6 9B/9'6 9B/&' 9B/&'

3+'596 3+'596 9B/9'6 9B/9'6 9B/&' 9B/&'
9B/9'6 9B/9'6 1& 1&
*1' *1' ( 1& 1&
*1' *1' 1& 1&
9B/9'6 9B/9'6 1& 1&
&1 &1 9B/9'6 9B/9'6 1& 1&
'*1' *1' 9B/9'6 9B/9'6 1& 1&
'*1' *1' 9B/9'6 9B/9'6 1& 1&
/&'B'$7$ /&'B$B3 *1' *1' 1& 1&
/&'B'$7$ /&'B$B1 *1' *1' 1& 1&
'*1' *1' *1' *1' 1& 1&
/&'B&/. /&'B&/.B3 *1' *1'
/&'B&/. /&'B&/.B1 *1' *1'
'*1' *1' );6669 );666+ &1
/&'B'$7$ /&'B$B3 ;/;
/&'B'$7$ /&'B$B1 <+<
'*1' *1' ;+; 728&+3$1(/
/&'B'$7$ /&'B$B3 </<
/&'B'$7$ /&'B$B1
'*1' *1'
/&'B'$7$
/&'B'$7$ /&'B$B3
/&'B'$7$ /&'B$B1
'*1' *1'
'*1' *1'
/&'6(/ &1B/&'6(/ 3+5
/&'6(/ &1B/&'6(/
Q/&'B',63 Q/&'B',63 *1'
Q5(6B6&1 &1BQ5(6B6&1 3'
Q32)B6&1 &1BQ32) 9
7;'B6&1 &1B5;'B0)3& 3'6(/ 2563'3:%
5;'B6&1 &1B7;'B0)3& 3'6(/
92 92 3'6(/
Q63(' 63(' %33+.6
Q576B6&1 &1BQ&76B0)3&
Q&76B6&1 &1BQ576B0)3&
92B'87< 93:0
㸦1& 1& &1BQ3&8B5(4
㸦1& 1& &1BQ6&B$&.
'*1' 1& *1'
'*1' *1' +20(.(<3:%
%%3+'66% 3+'596 3+'596 %%3+'66% &1
Q+0B.(<
&1 Q+0B/(')
Q:8B/(' 96(*
Q32:B/(' 92
Q,1)2B)$;B/(' &1 *1'
Q:8B.(< 92 %0%*+67%7
'*1' 1& 92 *+596
'*1' &1BQ+20(B.(<
Q3:5B6: &1B%=5

%%3+.6 3+5 &1BQ+20(B/(' 1&
*1' 1&
*1'
&1 *1' 1&
9%86 9 32:(5.(<3:%
'
' *1' &1
' &1B3' Q3:B6:
'*1' 9 32:B/('
6KLHOG &1B3'6(/ 9
%0%*+67%7 *+596 &1B3'6(/ :8B/('
&1B3'6(/ Q:8B.(<
*1' 1& Q%=5
&1BQ23(/('B) '*1'
&1B23(/('B6(* *+596 %0%*+67%7
%%3+'66%
3+'596
-DSDQRQO\
3$396 &1
92 86%&211(&725
Q,1)2B/('
3&83:%! 6059%6039%& 㸦1& )*1' 3:%
&1 3&8B5(4 %%3$6. )*1'
&1 6&B$&.
&1 *1' 65$7 65$7
&17R3'
&17R3( &=+596%837=6&=+596
:8B/('
32:B/('
Q,1)2B/('
Q:8B.(<
*1'
Q3:56: 86%&13:%1
&1 86%$
9%86 9%86 9%86
' 䡾䡮䡹䢀 ' '
'
' '
' '
' 㼃㼕㼞㼑㼘㼑㼟㼟㻸㻭㻺㻰㼛㼚㼓㼘㼑
㼃㼕㼞㼑㼘㼑㼟㼟㻌㻸㻭㻺㻌㻰㼛㼚㼓㼘㼑
'*1' '*1' '*1'
6KLHOG 6KLHOG 6KLHOG
%%3$6.
2 ‘13/Nov
6&1&173:% &&'3:%
&1 &1
*1' *1'
*1' *1'
*1' *1'
*1' *1'
*1' *1'
*1' *1'
563)PRGHO &1 *1' *1'
*1' *1' *1'
*1' *1' *1'
9 *1' *1'
9 &1B$)(B6'2 &1B$)(B6'2
1& 9 $)(B6'72 $)(B6'72
1& 9 $)(B6&/. $)(B6&/.
1& 9 $)(B&6 $)(B&6
9 Q5(6B&&'$' Q5(6B&&'$'
92 *1' *1'
9B63) $9 $9
563)'5,9(53:% 9 $9 $9
1& 9 $9 $9
1& *1' $9 $9
*1' $9 $9
&1 3+'596 %%3+'66% $9 $9
*1' *1' *1'
*1' $9 $9
93' $9 $9
M. Scanner section (P13)
93' $9 $9

9 *1' *1'
$9&& $9 $9
*1' &1 $9 $9
633' &1B633' *1' *1'
633' &1B633' &1B7$B1 &1B7$B1
63)0B&/. &1B63)0B&/. &1B7$B3 &1B7$B3
63)0B)8+$ &1B63)00 *1' *1'
1& &1B63)00 &1B7%B1 &1B7%B1
63)0B2 &1B63)02 &1B7%B3 &1B7%B3
63)0B2 &1B63)02 *1' *1'
6380B$ &1B6350B$ &1B7&B1 &1B7&B1
6380B;$ &1B6350B;$ &1B7&B3 &1B7&B3
6380B% &1B6350B% *1' *1'
6380B;% &1B6350B;% &1B7&/.B1 &1B7&/.B1
6380B2 &1B6302 &1B7&/.B3 &1B7&/.B3
6356 &1B6356 *1' *1'
67036 &1B67036 &1B7'B1 &1B7'B1
655& &1B655& &1B7'B3 &1B7'B3
659& & 1B659 & *1' *1'
63:6 &1B63:6 &1B7(B1 &1B7(B1
6(/B$ &1B6(/B$ &1B7(B3 &1B7(B3
6(/B% &1B6(/B% 6&1&17B6( 6&1&17B6(
6(/B& &1B6(/B& 6&1&17B6( 6&1&17B6(
6(/BRXW &1B6(/B287 *1' *1'
563)B' &1B633'$ )+669 )+669
63)0B59 &1B 63)05 9
633' &1B633'
633' &1B633'
1& 1&
*1' *1'
%%3+'66% &1B63('
2
3+'596 3+'596 %%3+'66%
&1
92
9%3:0 &1
63(' Q$B31& 1&
%%3+.6 3+5 Q$B&23< 1&
Q$B&$ 1&
Q$B5($'< 1&
65$7 65$7 Q$B$8' 1&
9 1& $8',725
*1' 1&
9 1& 237,21
'63)PRGHO &1B&2/ 1&
Q$B7& 1&
9 1&
'63)FQW3:% Q31&D
*1'
&1 &1 %%3+.6 3+5
*1' *1'
*1' *1'
93' 9
93' 9
2
93' 9
93' 9
9 9
9 9
92 9 2 &1
9B63) 9B63) 0,0B$ 0,0B$
9 9 0,0B% 0,0B%

9 9 0,0B;$ 0,0B;$ 0,0
*1' *1' 0,0B;% 0,0B;%
*1' *1' %%3+.6 %%3+607% 50276)&3=
%%3+'66% 3+'596 3+'596 %%3+'66%
&1 &1
&1BQ&76B6&1 &1BQ576B'63) &1 (+5
&1BQ576B6&1 &1BQ&76B'63) 0+36 0+36
&1B5;'B6&1 &1B7;'B'63) *1' *1' 0+36
&1B7;'B6&1 &1B5;'B'63) 93' 93'
*1' *1' %%3+.6 3+5 9+3/*/$
&1BQ'63)B,17 &1BQ'63)B,17
*1' *1'
&1BQ5(6B'63) &1B5(6B'63)
*1' &1BQ'63)83
1& 1& 1& 1&
63(' &1B63('
Q/9'6B67%<B6&1 Q/9'6B67%< /(''5,9(53:% /('3:%
1& 1& 1& 1& &1 &1
&1BQ32)B'63) &1BQ32)B'63) 93' 93' ,'59 ,'59
*1' *1' 93' 93' ,'59 ,'59
*1' *1' &/B21 /$03 ,'59 ,'59
'6'$7$B3 '6'$7$B3 *1' *1' ,'59 ,'59
'6'$7$B1 '6'$7$B1 *1' *1' ,'59 ,'59
*1' *1' &3%) $3% ,'59 ,'59
'6&/.287B3 '6&/.287B3 /('B32:(5 /('B32:(5
'6&/.287B1 '6&/.287B1 %%3+.6 3+5 3+5 %%3+.6
*1' *1'
'6'$7$B3 '6'$7$B3
'6'$7$B1 '6'$7$B1
*1' *1' 9
'6'$7$B3 '6'$7$B3 *1' 2&6:
'6'$7$B1 '6'$7$B1 &1 2&6:
*1' *1' 9 (+5 9+3/*1/
'6'$7$B3 '6'$7$B3 *1'
'6'$7$B1 '6'$7$B1 2&6:
%%3+'66% 3+'596 3+'596 %%3+'66% 9 9
6,=(B/(' 6,=(B/(' 256/('3:%
6,=(B/(' 6,=(B/('
%%3+607% *1'
65$7 65$7 9+3/*1/
3+5
65$7
&=+596%837=6&=+596 &=+596
6KLHOG 6KLHOG
'*1' '*1'
027+(53:% ' '
' '
,&&DUG5HDGHU
0)33:% $&5(3:% 9%86 9%86
&1 &1 &1 1& 1&
1& *1' *1' 1& ,&&DUG5HDGHU 6KLHOG
1& 1& 1& 1& '*1'
1& 1& 1& 1& ' .(<%2$5'3:%
1& 1& 1& 1& ' 65$7 3$/593$396 3$3963$/59
1& 1& 1& 1& 9%86 )*1' )*1' )*1'
1& 1& 1& 1& .H\ERDUG 6KLHOG 6KLHOG 6KLHOG 6KLHOG 6KLHOG
1& 1& 1& 1& '*1' '*1' '*1' '*1' '*1'
1& 1& 1& 1& ' ' ' ' '
1& 1& 1& 1& ' ' ' ' '
1& 1& 1& 1& 9%86 9%86 9%86 9%86 9%86
1& 1& 1& 1& )URQW86% 6KLHOG
5(86B3&,(B7;1 5(86B3&,(B5;23 5(86B3&,(B5;23 5(86B3&,(B7;1 '*1' 1RUWK$PHULFD67$1'$5'
5(86B3&,(B7;3 5(86B3&,(B5;23 5(86B3&,(B5;23 5(86B3&,(B7;3 ' ([FHSW1RUWK$PHULFD237,21
1& 1& 1& 1& '
5%B7;'B'(%8* 1& 1& 5%B7;'B'(%8* 9%86
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻯㻻㻺㻺㻱㻯㼀㻻㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮
5%B5;'B'(%8* 1& 1& 5%B5;'B'(%8* %0%*+67%7 86%$
1& 1& 1& 1& *+596 6KLHOG 6KLHOG 6KLHOG
$&5( 5() &/.3
$&5(B5()B&/.3 1& 1& $&5(B5()B&/.3
$&5( 5() &/.3 '*1' '*1' '*1'
㼞㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
$&5(B5()B&/.1 1& 1& $&5(B5()B&/.1 ' ' '
䡾䡮䡹䢀㼁㻿㻮
1& 1& 1& 1& ' ' '
5&B*3,B$&5(237B,16(57B1 5B3/'B*32B567B$&5( 5B3/'B*32B567B$&5( 5&B*3,B$&5(237B,16(57B1
㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㼠
9%86 9%86 9%86
1& 5B3/'B*32B567B$&5(3&,( 5B3/'B*32B567B$&5(3&,( 1& 3$396 %%3$6.
59B21 1& 1& 59B21
1& 1& 1& 1&
*1' 91 9B,1 *1' &1 3$396 6059160391&
*1' 91 9B,1 *1' 9 9
*1' 91 9B,1 *1' 3:0B)$1 3:0B)$1
*1' 91 9B,1 *1' 3*1' 3*1' &38)$1
*1' 91 9B,1 *1' /2&.B)$1 /2&.B)$1
*1' 91 9B,1 *1' 9 1&
6< %< %%3$6. 4536&4533&
9 㻴㻰㻰㻌㻔㻿㼠㼍㼚㼐㼍㼞㼐㻕 +''$
3:0B)$1
3*1' 6$7$6,*1$/ 32:(5
N. FAX/USB/HDD/KEYBOARD (P14)
&1 /2&.B)$1 *1'

9 1& 1& 9 1& 6$7$B7;3
'*1' '*1' 6$7$B7;1
'63)0RGHO㸸67$1'$5' 9+' 9+' *1'
㻿㻯㻭㻺㻺㻱㻾㻌㻱㼄㻼㻭㻺㻿㻵㻻㻺㻌㻭㻯㻾㻱䚷 563)0RGHO㸸237,21 '*1' '*1' 6$7$B5;1
%39+ 9+51 6$7$B5;3
*1'
1& 9
0)33:% 1& 9
9 1& 9
' 86% '*1'
' '*1'
*1'
7<3($ '*1'
8$5.- 9+'
9 9+'
7(//,83:% )$;0$,13:% ' 9+'
' 86% '*1'
&1 &1 &1 &1 *1' '*1'
9 9 &1 /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 8%5.
7<3(% '*1'
$* 3*1' &1 1& *1' 86%B'1BRXW /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 86%B'1BRXW 753 1& 9
0- 9 9 '*1' *1' 86%B'3BRXW /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 86%B'3BRXW 753 1& 9
-$3$1 $* 3*1' 9 9B) 86%B9%86BRXW /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 86%B9%86BRXW 753 1& 9
/ 921 921 9 9B) 86%B571B3BLQ /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 86%B571B3BLQ 753
/ &,21 &,21 &1&7B)$; Q&1&7B)$; 86%B571B1BLQ /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 86%B571B1BLQ 753 /$1
0--5' 06*087( 06*087( )$;B5;'' )$;'B7;'B1 3,&93321 /&'B&/. /&'B&/. 3,&93321 753
+6 +6 )$;B5;'' )$;'B7;'B3 5;'B6&1 /&'B&/. /&'B&/. 5;'B6&1 753
RU +6 +6 9 9BRII 1&76B6&1 /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 1&76B6&1 753 +''%
72/,1( (; &, &, Q5(6B)$; Q5(6B)$; 7;'B6&1 /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 7;'B6&1 8 㻾㻭㻵㻰㻌㻔㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻕
7(/ (;+6 (;+6 )$;B5;'&6 )$;&6B7;'B3 1576B6&1 Q/'&B',632& Q/'&B',632& 1576B6&1 &1 6$7$6,*1$/ 32:(5
/ 621 621 )$;B5;'&6 )$;&6B7;'B1 15(6B6&1 1& 1& 15(6B6&1 *1' *1'
/ 621 621 '*1' *1' 15(6B3&8 6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ 15(6B3&8 6$7$B7;3 6$7$B7;3
7(/ (&21 (&21 )$;B7;'' )$;'B5;'B1 5;'B3&8 6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ 5;'B3&8 6$7$B7;1 6$7$B7;1
0--5' 0521 0521 )$;B7;'' )$;'B5;'B3 1&76B3&8 6&$1&/.287 6&$1&/.287 1&76B3&8 *1' *1'
7(/,' 7(/,' )$;B:83 Q)$;B:83 7;'B3&8 6&$1&/.287 6&$1&/.287 7;'B3&8 6$7$B5;1 6$7$B5;1
&, &, )$;B7;'&6 )$;&6B5;'B3 1576B3&8 6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ 1576B3&8 6$7$B5;3 5$,'3:% 6$7$B5;3
1& 1& )$;B7;'&6 )$;&6B5;'B1 132)B0)3& 6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ 132)B0)3& *1' *1'
7(/,' 7(/,' 9 9BRII 15(4B3,& 6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ 15(4B3,& 6$73%% 1& 9
1& 1& '*1' *1' 1&/5B3,& 6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ 1&/5B3,& &1 &1 1& 9
'* 0'0*1' )$;B&76' Q)$;'B576 7;'B3,& 6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ 7;'B3,& *1' *1' 1& 9
0- 9 0'09 '*1' *1' 5;'B3,& 6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ 5;'B3,& 6$7$B7;3 7;3 '*1'
/ '* 0'0*1' )$;B576' Q)$;'B&76 3:0 &+B1 &+B1 3:0 6$7$B7;1 7;1 &1 '*1'
72(;7(/ / 96 96 )/933 )/933 1)$1B&17569 &+B3 &+B3 1)$1B&17569 *1' *1' *1' '*1'
0--5' '* 0'0*1' )$;B&76&6 Q)$;&6B576 1567B3,& &+B1 &+B1 1567B3,& 6$7$B5;1 5;1 6$7$B7;3 9+'
6,B5(6 6,B5(6 96 9B$ 86%B)5B',6 &+B3 &+B3 86%B)5B',6 6$7$B5;3 5;3 6$7$B7;1 9+'
63. 63. )$;B576&6 Q)$;&6B&76 3:0 &+B1 &+B1 3:0 *1' *1' *1' 9+'
0'0B$7;' $7;' 9 9 15(4B3,&B,17 &+B3 &+B3 15(4B3,&B,17 6$73%% 1& 95 6$7$B5;1 '*1'
0'0B$5;' $5;' 9B) 9B) )$;'B7;' &/.B1 &/.B1 )$;'B7;' &1 1& 95 6$7$B5;3 '*1'
0'0B$%,7&/. $%,7&/. 9B) 9B) )$;'B5;' &/.B3 &/.B3 )$;'B5;' $B6&/. 1& 95 *1' '*1'

&1 0'0B$63&/. $63&/. '*1' *1' )$;'B576 &+B1 &+B1 )$;'B576 %B/' *1' 6$73%% 1& 9
7; 5*'7 5*'7 3*1' 3*1' )$;'B&76 &+B3 &+B3 )$;'B&76 &B'2 *1' &1 1& 9
5; 0'0B&/. $)(B&/. %0%6+/'6*7)7 %%&65. )$;&6B7;' &+B1 &+B1 )$;&6B7;' <B', *1' *1' 1& 9
72+$1'6(7 5; $)(5(6 $)(5(6 )$;&6B5;' &+B3 &+B3 )$;&6B5;' *1' 9 9&&9
-$3$1 21/<
-$3$121/< 7;
7; %%,7&/. %%,7&/. )$;&6 576
)$;&6B576 (&/.
(&/.B/68B1
/68 1 (&/.
(&/.B/68B1
/68 1 )$;&6 576
)$;&6B576 %0% 6566 7%7/)61
%0%65667%7/)61 9 *1'
㻮㼛㼍㼞
'* %63&/. %63&/. )$;&6B&76 (&/.B/68B3 (&/.B/68B3 )$;&6B&76 &1 9 %0%3$667)7
5+6 %5;' %7;' 5(6B)$; +6<1&B/68B3 +6<1&B/68B3 5(6B)$; *1' *1'
0'6 %7;' %5;' 1&1&7B)$; +6<1&B/68B1 +6<1&B/68B1 1&1&7B)$; *1' *1' +''$
+'087( +'087( 1:8B)$;B/$1 96<1&B.B1 96<1&B.B1 1:8B)$;B/$1 9B) *1'
5+6 5+6 9(&2B0)3BRXW 96<1&B.B3 96<1&B.B3 9(&2B0)3BRXW 9B) 1& 9 &1 6$7$6,*1$/ 32:(5
7;367+( 7;567+( 173B,17 96<1&B&B3 96<1&B&B3 173B,17 Q&1&7B)$; 1& 9 *1' *1'
9B)$; 96<1&B&B1 96<1&B&B1 9B)$; )$;'B7;'B1 1& 9 7;3 6$7$B7;3
9B)$; 96<1&B0B1 96<1&B0B1 9B)$; )$;'B7;'B3 6$73.6%)* 7;1 6$7$B7;1
9B)$; 96<1&B0B3 96<1&B0B3 9B)$; 9BRII *1' *1'
1& 96<1&B<B3 96<1&B<B3 1& Q5(6B)$; 5;1 6$7$B5;1
9B)$; 96<1&B<B1 96<1&B<B1 9B)$; )$;&6B7;'B3 5;3 6$7$B5;3
&1 :2/$1B21 73B6&/ 73B6&/ :2/$1B21 )$;&6B7;'B1 *1' *1'
63 /&'6(/ 73B6'$ 73B6'$ /&'6(/ *1' 95 9
63($.(5 63 /&'6(/ 9/ 9/ /&'6(/ )$;'B5;'B1 &1 95 9
6%3$6./)61 '*1' 9/ 9/ '*1' )$;'B5;'B3 $B6&/. 95 9
'*1' 9/ 9/ '*1' Q)$;B:83 %B/' *1' '*1'
'*1' 9/ 9/ '*1' )$;&6B5;'B3 &B'2 *1' '*1'
'*1' 9/ 9/ '*1' )$;&6B5;'B1 <B', *1' '*1'
'*1' 9/ 9/ '*1' 9BRII *1' 9 9+'
'*1' 9/ 9/ '*1' *1' %0%65667%7/)61 9 9+'

'*1' 9/ 9/ '*1' Q)$;'B576 9 9+'
'*1' 9/ 9/ '*1' *1' *1' '*1'
'*1' 9/ 9/ '*1' Q)$;'B&76 QG)$;81237,21 *1' '*1'
'*1' '*1' '*1' '*1' )/933 *1' '*1'
1& '*1' '*1' 1& Q)$;&6B576 9 9
9B)$; 9B)$; 9B$ 9 9
7;3/7+( 7;5/7+( Q)$;&6B&76 9 9
9 6$73.6%)*
&' 9B)
5;' 9B)
7;' *1'
'75 3*1'
*1' %%&65./)611
56& '65 &1
576
7KHVDPHDV
&76 WR
WKH&1 UG)$;81237,21
5,
'%5) %%&65./)611
6&29
'B62&9
*1'
9VHQVRU

6&1&173:% '63)&173:% '63)&&'3:% '63)'5,9(53:% 3+'596
&1 63('
'B62&9 'B63('
*1' *1'
9VHQVRU 9VHQVRU
&1 3+'596 3+'596 &1 &1 &1 'B63('
*1' *1' *1' *1' *1'
O. DSPF (P15)
*1' *1' $)(B5'' $)(B5'' 9VHQVRU 678'

9 93' $)(B:5' $)(B:5' 'B678' 'B678'
9 93' $)(B6&/. $)(B6&/. *1' *1'
9 93' $)(B&6 $)(B&6 9VHQVRU 9VHQVRU
9 93' 5(6B&&'$' 5(6B&&'$' *1'
9 9 *1' *1' 'B5$1'20
9 9 $9 $9 9 635'
92 92 $9 $9 *1' *1'
9B63) 9B63) $9 $9 'B633' 'B5$1'20
9 9 $9 $9 9 9VHQVRU
9 9 $9 $9 9B75 3+5 3+5
*1' *1' $ 9
$9 $ 9
$9 ' 63)&
'B63)&
*1' *1' *1' *1' *1' 633'
%%3+'66% %%3+'66% $9 $9 %%3+'66% 1& *1'
$9 $9 'B633'
&1 &1 $9 $9 9VHQVRU
&1BQ576B'63) &1BQ&76B6&1 *1' *1' 3+5 3+5
&1BQ&76B'63) &1BQ576B6&1 $9 $9 6039%&6059%
&1B7;'B'63) &1B5;'B6&1 $9 $9 9B75
&1B5;'B'63) &1B7;'B6&1 *1' *1' 'B63)& 63)&
*1' *1' 5$ 5$
&1BQ'63)B,17 &1BQ'63)B,17 5$ 5$
*1' *1' *1' *1'
&1B5(6B'63) &1BQ5(6B'63) 5% 5%
&1BQ'63)83 *1' 5% 5%
&1B0)B'6B5(4 1& 1& 1& *1' *1' *1'
&1B63(' 63(' 5& 5& &1 'B676(7
Q/9'6B67%< Q/9'6B67%<B6&1 5& 5& *1' 'B67036 67036
&1B'6B0)B$&. 1& 1& 1& *1' *1' 'B676(7 B6703
&1BQ32)B'63) &1BQ32)B'63) &/. &/. 'B67036 3+15+%83753+3+15+
*1' *1' &/. &/. B6703 'B6755&
*1' *1' *1' *1' 'B6755%& 1& 9B75 6755&
'6'$7$B3 '6'$7$B3 5' 5' 9B75 1&
'6'$7$B1 '6'$7$B1 5' 5' 'B6755&
*1' *1' *1' *1' 9B75 60391&60591
'6&/.287B3 '6&/.287B3 5( 5( 'B63)0%RXW 'B63)0%RXW 'B63)0%RXW
'6&/.287B1 '6&/.287B1 5( 5( 'B63)0$RXW 'B63)0$RXW 'B63)0$RXW
*1' *1' *1' *1' 'B63)0%RXW 'B63)0%RXW 'B63)0%RXW 63)0
'6'$7$B3 '6'$7$B3 $)(B&67* $)(B&67* 'B63)0$RXW 'B63)0$RXW 'B63)0$RXW
'6'$7$B1 '6'$7$B1 *1' *1' 9B63)0 9B63)0 9B63)0
*1' *1' ),5(69) ),5(69) 9B63)0 9B63)0 9B63)0
'6'$7$B3 '6'$7$B3 ),5)B+/ ),5)B+/ 'B655%& 1&
'6'$7$B1 '6'$7$B1 9B75 1& 3+15+%83753+3+15+
*1' *1' 'B655& 'B6755&
'6'$7$B3 '6'$7$B3 9B75 9B75 655&
'6'$7$B1
B '6'$7$B1
B 1&)$1B3:0
B 1&

%%3+'66% 3+'596 3+'596 %%3+'66% 'B)$1B/2&. 3+15+%83753+3+15+
*1' 1& 1&
)$1&20 'B)$1B/2&.
9B75 *1' )$1
'B675& )$1&20
1& 1& 60391&60591
65$7 65$7 1& 1& 9B75
1& 1& 'B675& 675&
1& 1&
3+'596 3+'596 %%3+'66% 3+'596 63/6
&1 &1 'B63/6
9 9 *1'
6*1' *1' &1 9VHQVRU
3+'596 'B63))$1 'B63))$1 'B63/6
633' 3+5 6*1' *1' *1'
6*1' 'B633' 'B633' 9VHQVRU 63/6
'B633' 'B5$1'20 'B5$1'20 'B63/6 'B63/6
9 'B62&9 'B62&9 *1' *1'
%%3+.6 'B632' 'B632' 9VHQVRU 9VHQVRU
'B6380B,1$ 'B6380$ 9$5()
'B6380B,1$ 'B6380;$ 'B63:6
633' 'B6380B,1% 'B6380% *1' 3+15+%83753+3+15+ 63:6
6*1' 'B6380B,1% 'B6380;% %%3+.6 9$5() 9$5()
'B633' 'B6/80$ 'B6/80$ 'B63:6 'B63:6
9 'B68/0$ 'B68/0;$ *1' *1'
%%3+.6 3+5 'B6/80% 'B6/80% 3+5
&1 'B6/80% 'B6/80;%
*1' 'B6320B(1$ 'B6320B(1$
633' 'B633' 'B6320B67(3 'B6320B67(3 63('

6*1' 9 'B6320B02'( 1& 1& 'B6320B02'( 'B63('
'B633' *1' 'B6320B',5 1& 1& 'B6320B',5 *1'
9 'B633' 9 9 93:0VHQVRU
%%3+.6 9 3*1' *1' &1
3+5 *1' 9 9 'B63('
' 633'
'B633' 3*1' *1' *1'
633' 3+15+%83753+3+15+ 9 9 9 93:0VHQVRU 67/'
6*1' 6*1' *1' 3*1' *1' 'B67/' 'B67/'
'B633' 'B633' 'B633' %%3+'66% %%3+'66% *1' *1'
9 9 9 9VHQVRU 9VHQVRU
%%3+.6 3+5 1& 9㸦VHQVRU㸧 &1 &1 'B632'
'B52&' 'B6380B95() 'B6380B95() *1'
*1' 'B63)0B95() 'B63)0B95() 9VHQVRU
52&' 'B62&' 'B6320B95() 'B6320B95() 1&6*1' 632'
'B52&' *1' 'B6320B95() 'B6320B95() %%3+'66% 3+'596 'B632'
6*1' 9㸦VHQVRU㸧 'B6(/$ 'B6(/$ *1'
%%3+'66% 'B6(/% 'B6(/% 9VHQVRU
&1 'B6(/& 'B6(/&
9 'B6(/287 'B6(/287
62&' *1' 9 9$5()
'B62&' &38B5;' 'B63:6 'B63:6 &1
6*1' &38B7;' $*1' *1' 'B/80%RXW 'B/80%RXW
96HQVRU 1& 'B63)& 'B63)& 'B/80$RXW 'B/80$RXW
1& 'B655& 'B655& 'B/80%RXW 'B/80%RXW 6/80
%0%*+67%7 'B655%& 1& 1& 'B655%& 'B/80$RXW 'B/80$RXW
'B63)0B0 'B63)0B0 9B'B/80 9B'B/80
'B63)0B0 'B63)0B0 %%3+.6 3+5
'B63)0B&/. 'B63)0B&/.
/('3:% 'B63)0B',5(& 'B63)0B',5(& &1
'B6755& 'B6755& 'B6320% 'B6320%
&1 &1 'B6755%& 1& 1& 'B6755%& 'B6320$ 'B6320$
,'59 ,'59 'B67036 'B67036 'B6320% 'B6320% 6320
,'59 ,'59 'B675& 'B675& 'B6320$ 'B6320$
,'59 ,'59 9 9 %%3+.6 3+5
,'59 ,'59 6*1' *1'
,'59 ,'59 93:0 93:0 &1
,'59 ,'59 63(' 63('BPRQ 'B6380%RXW 'B6380%RXW
/('B32:(5 /('B32:(5 92 92 'B6380$RXW 'B6380$RXW
%%3+.6 3+5 3+5 %%3+.6 6*1' *1' 'B6380%RXW 'B6380%RXW
%%3+'66%
%% 3+'66 % %%3+'66%
%% 3+'66 % 'B6380$RXW
' 6380$RXW ' 6380$RXW
'B6380$RXW 6380
3+'596 3+'596 9B6380 9B6380
9B6380 9B6380
%%3+.6
3+5
563)'5,9(53:%
&1 3+5 3+5 6380
6380$RXW 6380$RXW
93'B6380 93'B6380
6380$RXW 6380$RXW
6380%RXW 6380%RXW
93'B6380 93'B6380
6380%RXW 6380%RXW
1& 1& %%3+.6
%%3+.6
P. RSPF (P16)
&1 3+5 3+5 63)0

63)0$RXW 63)0$RXW
93'B63)0 93'B63)0
63)0$RXW 63)0$RXW
63)0%RXW 63)0%RXW
93'B63)0 93'B63)0
63)0%RXW 63)0%RXW
%%3+.6 %%3+.6

&1 3+5 3$/59)3$396 63('
63(' 63(' 63('
*1' *1' *1'
9%B63(' 9%B63(' 963('
9 93'
633' '6:B93'
*1' %/$&.
9 3$/59)3$396 633'
633' 9 9
*1' 633' 633'
93' *1' *1'
*1' 1& 9
'6:B93' 633'
%%3+.6 *1' %/$&.
633'
9
633'
*1'

369
36 6&29
93'
'6:B93'
6367
65$7 65$7
&1 3+5 6039%&6059%

93' 93'659&
659& 659& 659&
93'
6356
%%3+.6
60391&60591
93'6356
6356 6356
&1 3+5 6039%&6059%

93' 93'655&
655& 655& 655&
9
633'
*1'
62&' %/$&.
*1' 60391&60591 633'
9B62&' 93' 93'
%%3+.6 633' 633'
*1' *1'
62&'
*1'
93'62&'
62&'
62&'
*1'
93'62&'

&1 3+'596
9 1& 65$7 65$7
9
1&
1 & 1&
633'
*1' 1&
*1' %/$&.
*1' 633'
67038 9
67036 633'
93'B67036 *1'
%%3+'66%

*1'
67038
67036
93'67036 67036

&1 3+5 63/6
9B63/6 9B63/6
63/6 63/6
*1' *1'
*1'
63/6
9B63/6
$9&& 63/6
63:6 *1'
*1' 63/6
%%3+.6 9B63/6
60391&60591 63:6
$9&& %/ $9&&
63:6 %5 63:6
*1' *< *1'
4. Signal list
Connector level Connector PWB
Signal name Name [Type] Function/Operation Pin No. NOTE
"L" "H" No. name
1TC_ERR 1TC output trouble 1TC output trouble – Trouble CN4 13 PCU
signal
1TNFD Waste toner full Detects waste toner full. – – CN16 7 PCU
detection signal
1TUD_CL Primary transfer Detects the primary Transmission Shield CN20 22 PCU
separation detection CL transfer separation CL.
signal
1TUD_K Primary transfer Detects the primary Transmission Shield CN20 20 PCU
separation detection BK transfer separation BK.
signal
/1TURC Primary transfer Controls the primary Separation/ Stop CN13 16 PCU
separation clutch control transfer separation. Contact
signal
/1TURC_R Primary transfer Primary transfer Reverse Stop CN13 30 PCU
separation reverse separation reverse
clutch control signal control
2TUD Secondary transfer Detects the secondary – – CN20 30 PCU (Not used)
position detection signal transfer position.
/ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate Duplex Single CN7 25 PCU
control signal solenoid.
(ADUM1_A) ADU motor 1 control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 18 PCU
signal ADU motor 1.
(ADUM1_B) ADU motor 1 control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 22 PCU
signal ADU motor 1.
/ADUM1_CNT ADU motor 1 set current ADU motor 1 set current Current: Current: CN19 14 PCU
select control signal select control Large Small
(ADUM1_XA) ADU motor 1 control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 16 PCU
signal ADU motor 1.
(ADUM1_XB) ADU motor 1 control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 20 PCU
signal ADU motor 1.
(ADUM2_A) ADU motor 2 control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 5 PCU
signal ADU motor 2.
(ADUM2_B) ADU motor 2 control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 7 PCU
signal ADU motor 2.
/ADUM2_CNT ADU motor 2 set current ADU motor 2 set current Current: Current: CN10 1 PCU
select control signal select control Large Small
(ADUM2_XA) ADU motor 2 control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 3 PCU
signal ADU motor 2.
(ADUM2_XB) ADU motor 2 control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 9 PCU
signal ADU motor 2.
AK_CS_C# Driver CS C signal Driver chip select C – – CN9 5 PCU
signal
AK_CS_EEP_C# EEP CS C signal EEP chip select C signal – – CN9 6 PCU
AK_CS_EEP_K# EEP CS K signal EEP chip select K signal – – CN9 4 PCU
AK_CS_EEP_M# EEP CS M signal EEP chip select M signal – – CN9 8 PCU
AK_CS_EEP_Y# EEP CS Y signal EEP chip select Y signal – – CN9 10 PCU
AK_CS_K# Driver CS K signal Driver chip select K – – CN9 3 PCU
signal
AK_CS_M# Driver CS M signal Driver chip select M – – CN9 7 PCU
signal
AK_CS_Y# Driver CS Y signal Driver chip select Y – – CN9 9 PCU
signal
AK_RXD_K Serial I/F data (Receive) Serial I/F data (Receive) – – CN9 13 PCU
AK_SCK_K# Serial clock signal Basic clock – – CN9 14 PCU
AK_TXD_K# Serial I/F data (Send) Serial I/F data (Send) – – CN9 11 PCU
APPD1 ADU transport detection Detects paper pass in Pass – CN7 6 PCU
1 the ADU upper stream
section (Paper entry).
APPD2 ADU transport detection Detects paper pass in Pass – CN7 8 PCU
2 the ADU lower stream
section (Paper delivery).
APPD3 Accordion detection Accordion detection Paper – CN7 14 PCU (Not used)
presence
(BTM_A) Belt motor control signal Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 8 PCU 41cpm machine
belt motor. only
(BTM_B) Belt motor control signal Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 10 PCU 41cpm machine
belt motor. only
/BTM_CK Belt motor clock signal Controls the belt motor – – CN19 6 PCU 51cpm machine
speed. only
/BTM_CNT Belt motor set current Controls the belt motor Current: Current: CN19 4 PCU
select control signal set current select. Large Small

"L" "H" No. name
BTM_EN Belt motor operation Controls enable of the Stop Enable CN19 8 PCU 51cpm machine
enable signal belt motor operation. only
(BTM_ROT) Belt motor rotation signal Controls the rotating Normal Reverse CN19 27 PCU 51cpm machine
direction of the belt only
motor.
(BTM_XA) Belt motor control signal Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 6 PCU 41cpm machine
belt motor. only
(BTM_XB) Belt motor control signal Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 12 PCU 41cpm machine
belt motor. only
BWD1 Belt winding detection Detects winding of the – – CN18 24 PCU (Not used)
signal belt.
CAFM_LD Cartridge cooling fan Detects the cartridge Normal Lock CN20 25 PCU
lock detection signal cooling fan lock.
CAFM_V# Cartridge cooling fan Controls the cartridge Stop Operating CN20 26 PCU
operation signal cooling fan operation.
/CCFM_CNT Process suction fan Controls the process – – CN6 10 PCU (Not used)
rotation speed control suction fan rotation
signal speed.
CCFM_LD Process suction fan lock Detects the process Normal Lock CN6 14 PCU
detection signal suction fan lock.
CCFM_V# Process suction fan Controls the process Stop Operating CN6 8 PCU
operation signal suction fan operation.
CCFT LCD backlight [CCFT LCD backlight ON OFF CN9 21 SCNcnt
cool cathode ray tube]
CL_ON Scanner lamp Radiates lights to the ON OFF CN7 3 SCNcnt
document for the CCD to
scan the document
images.
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit Detects the tray 1 upper – Upper limit CN12 3 PCU
detection signal limit.
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit Detects the tray 2 upper – Upper limit CN12 4 PCU
detection signal limit.
/CLUM1 Cassette 1 lift-up motor Controls the cassette 1 Stop Tray lift CN4 9 PCU
operation signal lift-up motor operation.
/CLUM2 Cassette 2 lift-up motor Controls the cassette 2 Stop Tray lift CN4 11 PCU
operation signal lift-up motor operation.
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty Detects paper empty in Paper – CN12 9 PCU
detection signal the tray 1. presence
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty Detects paper empty in Paper – CN12 10 PCU
detection signal the tray 2. presence
/CPFC Tray vertical transport Controls the vertical Transport – CN4 1 PCU
clutch operation signal transport roller.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport Detects paper transport Pass – CN12 15 PCU
detection signal in the tray 1.
CPFD2 Tray 1 transport Detects paper transport Pass – CN12 16 PCU
/CPFM_CK Paper feed motor clock Controls the paper feed – – CN4 22 PCU
signal motor speed.
/CPFM_D Paper feed motor Controls enable of the Stop Enable CN4 20 PCU
operation enable signal paper feed motor
operation.
/CPFM_GAIN Paper feed motor gain Controls the paper feed Low seed High speed CN4 24 PCU
select signal motor gain select.
CPFM_LD Paper feed motor lock Detects the paper feed Normal Lock CN4 18 PCU
detection signal motor lock.
/CPUC1 Paper feed clutch 1 Controls the roller of the Transport – CN4 3 PCU
operation signal paper feed tray 1
section.
/CPUC2 Paper feed clutch 2 Controls the roller of the Transport – CN4 5 PCU
operation signal paper feed tray 2
section.
CRM_C_CK# CRUM C clock signal CRUM C clock – – CN20 15 PCU
CRM_C_DT CRUM C data signal CRUM C data – – CN20 13 PCU
CRM_K_CK# CRUM K clock signal CRUM K clock – – CN20 11 PCU
CRM_K_DT CRUM K data signal CRUM K data – – CN20 9 PCU
CRM_M_CK# CRUM M clock signal CRUM M clock – – CN20 12 PCU
CRM_M_DT CRUM M data signal CRUM M data – – CN20 10 PCU
CRM_Y_CK# CRUM Y clock signal CRUM Y clock – – CN20 16 PCU
CRM_Y_DT CRUM Y data signal CRUM Y data – – CN20 14 PCU
CSPD1 Tray 1 remaining paper Detects the remaining – – CN12 21 PCU
quantity detection signal paper quantity in the tray
1.

"L" "H" No. name
CSPD2 Tray 2 remaining paper Detects the remaining – – CN12 22 PCU
quantity detection signal paper quantity in the tray
2.
CSS11 Tray 1 vertical size Detects the vertical size – – CN12 27 PCU
/CV_CA Clear all signal Clear all Clear – CN23 6 PCU Coin vendor
/CV_CLCOPY Color copy enable signal Color copy enable Enable – CN23 7 PCU Coin vendor
/CV_COLOR0 Color mode signal Color mode select – – CN23 10 PCU Coin vendor
(2 output matrix)
/CV_COLOR1 Color mode signal Color mode select – – CN23 8 PCU Coin vendor
(2 output matrix)
/CV_COPY Copy enable signal Copy enable Enable – CN23 3 PCU Coin vendor
/CV_COUNT Count-up signal Count-up Count up – CN23 4 PCU Coin vendor
/CV_DUPLEX Print count identification Print count identification Duplex – CN23 11 PCU Coin vendor
signal (Duplex mode) signal (Duplex mode)
(Single count or double
count is identified.)
/CV_SIZE0 Paper size signal 0 Paper size 0 – – CN23 13 PCU Coin vendor
/CV_STAPLE Staple mode signal Staple mode STAPLE – CN23 9 PCU Coin vendor
identification
/CV_START Copy start signal Copy start status Copy start – CN23 5 PCU Coin vendor
DHPD_C Process phase detection Detects process phase Detection – CN13 20 PCU
C signal C.
DHPD_K Process phase detection Detects process phase Detection – CN13 17 PCU
BK signal BK.
DHPD_M Process phase detection Detects process phase Detection – CN13 23 PCU
M signal M.
DHPD_Y Process phase detection Detects process phase Detection – CN13 26 PCU
Y signal Y.
DL_BK# Discharge lamp BK Controls the discharge – Light CN11 1 PCU
control signal lamp BK.
DL_C# Discharge lamp C Controls the discharge – Light CN11 21 PCU
control signal lamp C.
DL_M# Discharge lamp M Controls the discharge – Light CN11 2 PCU
control signal lamp M.
DL_Y# Discharge lamp Y Controls the discharge – Light CN11 22 PCU
control signal lamp Y.
(DM_C_EN) Drum C motor operation Controls the drum C Stop Enable CN19 5 PCU 51cpm machine
enable signal motor operation enable. only
(DM_CL_A) Drum CL motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 5 PCU 41cpm machine
signal drum CL motor. only
(DM_CL_B) Drum CL motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 7 PCU 41cpm machine
(DM_CL_CK) Drum C, M and Y motor Controls the drum C, M – – CN19 3 PCU 51cpm machine
clock signal and Y motor speed. only
/DM_CL_CNT Drum CL system motor Controls the drum CL Current: Current: CN19 1 PCU
set current select control system motor set current Large Small
signal select.
(DM_CL_ROT) Drum C, M and Y motor Controls the drum C, M Normal Reverse CN19 25 PCU 51cpm machine
rotation signal and Y motor rotating only
direction.
(DM_CL_XA) Drum CL motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 3 PCU 41cpm machine
(DM_CL_XB) Drum CL motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 9 PCU 41cpm machine
(DM_K_A) Drum K motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 15 PCU 41cpm machine
signal drum K motor. only

"L" "H" No. name
(DM_K_B) Drum K motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 17 PCU 41cpm machine
(DM_K_CK) Drum K motor clock Controls the drum K – – CN19 13 PCU 51cpm machine
signal motor speed. only
/DM_K_CNT Drum K motor set Controls the drum K Current: Current: CN19 11 PCU
current select control motor set current select. Large Small
(DM_K_EN) Drum K motor operation Controls the drum K Stop Enable CN19 15 PCU 51cpm machine
(DM_K_ROT) Drum K motor rotation Controls the drum K Normal Reverse CN19 23 PCU 51cpm machine
signal motor rotating direction. only
(DM_K_XA) Drum K motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 13 PCU 41cpm machine
(DM_K_XB) Drum K motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 19 PCU 41cpm machine
(DM_M_EN) Drum M motor operation Controls the drum M Stop Enable CN19 7 PCU 51cpm machine
(DM_Y_EN) Drum Y motor operation Controls the drum Y Stop Enable CN19 9 PCU 51cpm machine
/DSR_DSK Serial communication Reception control – – CN8 13 PCU DESK
control signal
(Data set ready)
/DSR_INS Serial communication Reception control – – CN8 6 PCU Inserter
control signal
(Data set ready)
/DSR_LCC Serial communication Reception control – – CN8 19 PCU LCC
control signal
(Data set ready)
DSW_C Cassette 1 transport Detects open/close of Open Close CN10 24 PCU
cover open/close the cassette 1 transport
detection signal cover.
/DTR_DSK Serial communication Transmission control – – CN8 12 PCU DESK
control signal
(Data terminal ready)
/DTR_INS Serial communication Transmission control – – CN8 5 PCU Inserter
control signal
/DTR_LCC Serial communication Transmission control – – CN8 18 PCU LCC
control signal
/DVM_CL_CK Developing CL motor Controls the developing – – CN13 10 PCU
clock signal CL motor speed.
/DVM_CL_D Developing CL motor Controls the developing Stop Enable CN13 12 PCU
operation enable signal CL motor operation
enable.
DVM_CL_LD Developing CL motor Detects the developing Normal Lock CN13 14 PCU
lock detection signal CL motor lock.
/DVM_K_CK Developing K motor Controls the developing – – CN13 9 PCU
clock signal K motor speed.
/DVM_K_D Developing K motor Controls the developing Stop Enable CN13 11 PCU
operation enable signal K motor operation
enable.
DVM_K_LD Developing K motor lock Detects the developing Normal Lock CN13 13 PCU
detection signal K motor lock.
DVTYP_C DV identification Detects identification of – – CN11 35 PCU Analog
detection C signal DV for C.
DVTYP_K DV identification Detects identification of – – CN11 15 PCU Analog
detection K signal DV for K.
DVTYP_M DV identification Detects identification of – – CN11 16 PCU Analog
detection M signal DV for M.
DVTYP_Y DV identification Detects identification of – – CN11 36 PCU Analog
detection Y signal DV for Y.
/DVTYPSEL_C DV identification Detects identification of – – CN11 37 PCU
detection C signal DV for C.
/DVTYPSEL_K DV identification Detects identification of – – CN11 17 PCU
detection K signal DV for K.
/DVTYPSEL_M DV identification Detects identification of – – CN11 18 PCU
detection M signal DV for M.
/DVTYPSEL_Y DV identification Detects identification of – – CN11 38 PCU
detection Y signal DV for Y.
FAN_24V LSU cooling fan Drives the cooling fan of Stop Drive CN6 1 LSU-
(LSUFM) signal the LSU unit. CNT
FAN_nREADY LSU cooling fan Detects lock of the – Lock CN6 2 LSU-
(LSUFM) lock signal cooling fan of the LSU detection CNT
unit.

"L" "H" No. name
FUFM_LD Fusing cooling fan lock Detects the fusing Normal Lock CN18 20 PCU
detection signal cooling fan lock.
FUFM_V Fusing cooling fan Controls the fusing Stop Operating CN18 19 PCU
/FUM_CK Fusing motor clock Controls the fusing – – CN16 27 PCU
signal motor speed control.
/FUM_D Fusing motor operation Controls the fusing Stop Enable CN16 29 PCU
enable signal motor operation enable.
FUM_LD Fusing motor lock Detects the fusing motor Normal Lock CN16 31 PCU
detection signal lock.
/HL_PR Fusing lamp relay Controls the fusing lamp OFF ON CN16 16 PCU
operation signal relay.
HLOUT_LM Fusing lamp LM lighting Controls lighting of the – Light CN16 10 PCU
control signal fusing lamp LM.
HLOUT_UM Fusing lamp UM lighting Controls lighting of the – Light CN16 14 PCU
control signal fusing lamp UM.
HLOUT_US Fusing lamp US lighting Controls lighting of the – Light CN16 12 PCU
control signal fusing lamp US.
HLOUT_UW Fusing lamp UW lighting Controls lighting of the – Light CN16 8 PCU
control signal fusing lamp UW.
HLPCD Fusing pressure release Detects pressure Pressure Pressure CN16 33 PCU
detection signal release of the fusing release applying
roller.
/HLPCS Fusing pressure release Controls the fusing – – CN18 17 PCU (Not used)
solenoid operation signal pressure release
solenoid.
(HPFM_A) Horizontal transport Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 8 PCU
motor control signal horizontal transport
motor.
(HPFM_B) Horizontal transport Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 10 PCU
motor.
/HPFM_CNT Horizontal transport Controls the horizontal Current: Current: CN10 4 PCU
motor set current select transport motor set Large Small
control signal current select.
(HPFM_XA) Horizontal transport Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 6 PCU
motor.
(HPFM_XB) Horizontal transport Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 12 PCU
motor.
HUD_M Temperature humidity Detects the humidity of – – CN7 11 PCU
sensor humidity the temperature and
detection signal humidity sensor.
/HV_CLK# MC high voltage PWB Basic clock of the MC – – CN4 21 PCU
clock signal high voltage PWB
/HV_DATA# Data signal to the MC Data to the MC high – – CN4 23 PCU
high voltage PWB voltage PWB
/HV_LD1# MC high voltage PWB MC high voltage PWB – – CN4 19 PCU
data load signal data revision
HV_REM# High voltage operation Controls the high voltage – Enable CN4, 17, 5 PCU
enable signal operation enable. CN15
JOBEND_INT LSU job end signal The LSU notifies the job – Job end CN1 10 PCU
end.
LSU_RST LSU reset signal The PCU resets the Reset – CN1 15 PCU
LSU.
/LSUSS_B LSU shutter solenoid Controls the LSU shutter Open Close CN6 6 PCU
operation signal solenoid.
MC_BK_ERR MC_BK output trouble MC_BK output trouble – Trouble CN4 16 PCU
signal
MC_CL_ERR MC_CL output trouble MC_CL output trouble – Trouble CN4 15 PCU
signal
/MFPC_RES Reset signal to MFPC Reset to MFPC – - CN1 27 PCU (Not used)
MHPS Scanner home position Detects the scanner – Home CN17 1 SCNcnt
sensor [Transmission home position. position
type]
MIM_* Scanner motor [Stepping Scanner (reading) – – CN2 1, 2, 3, SCNcnt
motor] section 4
MPFD Manual feed paper entry Detects paper entry in Pass – CN7 10 PCU
detection signal the manual paper feed.
/MPFS Manual feed pickup Controls the manual Paper feed – CN7 23 PCU
solenoid operation signal paper feed pickup
solenoid.

"L" "H" No. name
/MPGS Manual feed gate Controls the manual Operating – CN7 19 PCU
solenoid operation signal paper feed gate
solenoid.
/MPUC Manual paper feed Controls the manual Transport – CN7 21 PCU
clutch operation signal paper feed clutch.
MPWD Manual paper feed width Detects the manual – – CN7 13 PCU Analog
detection signal paper feed width.
nBD LSU synchronization Detects synchronization Detection – CN1 2 LSU-
detection signal in the main scanning CNT
(BD signal) direction of the LSU.
nPOLY_CK Polygon motor clock Controls the speed of – – CN2 5 LSU-
signal the polygon motor. CNT
nPOLY_LOCK Polygon motor lock Detects the polygon – Lock CN2 4 LSU- Pulse (duty)
signal motor lock. detection CNT drive
nPOLY_START Polygon motor ON Drives the polygon Drive Stop CN2 3 LSU-
signal motor of the LSU unit. CNT
OCSW Original cover SW Detects open/close of Close Open CN5 3 SCNcnt
[Transmission type] the document cover
(document size
detection trigger).
/OSM_A Shifter motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN17 3 PCU
signal shifter motor.
/OSM_B Shifter motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN17 6 PCU
/OSM_XA Shifter motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN17 1 PCU
/OSM_XB Shifter motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN17 4 PCU
/OZFM_CNT Ozone fan rotation Controls the ozone fan – – CN5 23 PCU
speed control signal rotating speed.
OZFM_LD Ozone fan operation Controls the ozone fan Normal Lock CN5 25 PCU
signal operation.
OZFM_V Ozone fan lock detection Detects the ozone fan Stop Operating CN5 19 PCU
signal lock.
PCS_CL CMY process control CMY process control – – CN5 9 PCU Analog
output signal output
PCS_REQ SCU communication SCU communication – – CN18 26 PCU (Not used)
(output) signal (output)
PCSFM1_LD Toner cooling fan 1 lock Detects the toner cooling Normal Lock CN16 15 PCU
detection signal fan 1 lock.
PCSFM1_V# Toner cooling fan 1 Controls the toner Stop Operating CN16 1 PCU
operation signal cooling fan 1 operation.
PCSFM2_LD Toner cooling fan 2 lock Detects the toner cooling Normal Lock CN16 17 PCU
detection signal fan 2 lock.
PCSFM2_V# Toner cooling fan 2 Controls the toner Stop Operating CN16 3 PCU
/PCSS Process control shutter Controls the process Open Close CN5 17 PCU
solenoid operation signal control shutter solenoid.
PCU_DSR Serial communication Transmission control – – CN1 19 PCU
control signal signal
PCU_DTR Serial communication Reception control signal – – CN1 21 PCU
control signal
PCU_RES PCU reset signal The controller resets the Reset – CN1 25 PCU
PCU.
PCU_RxD Serial communication Reception data – – CN1 22 PCU
receive data signal
PCU_TxD Serial communication Transmission data – – CN1 24 PCU
send data signal
(PFM_A) PS front motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 18 PCU
signal PS front motor.
(PFM_B) PS front motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 20 PCU
/PFM_CNT PS front motor set Controls the PS front Current: Current: CN10 14 PCU
signal
(PFM_XA) PS front motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 16 PCU
(PFM_XB) PS front motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 22 PCU
POD1 Fusing rear detection Fusing rear detection Pass – CN17 13 PCU
signal
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the paper exit. Pass – CN17 11 PCU
signal

"L" "H" No. name
POD3 Right tray paper exit Detects the right tray Pass – CN7 12 PCU
detection signal paper exit.
/POF Power OFF status signal Power OFF status Power OFF Power ON CN1 17 PCU
/POFM_CNT Paper exit cooling fan 1, Controls the rotation – – CN17 7 PCU
2 rotation speed control speed of the paper exit
signal cooling fans 1 and 2.
POFM_LD1 Paper exit cooling fan 1 Detects the paper exit Normal Lock CN17 10 PCU
lock detection signal cooling fan 1 lock.
POFM_LD2 Paper exit cooling fan 2 Detects the paper exit Normal Lock CN17 9 PCU
lock detection signal cooling fan 2 lock.
POFM_V Paper exit cooling fan 1, Controls the paper exit Stop Operating CN17 8 PCU
2 operation signal cooling fans 1 and 2
operations.
(POM_A) Paper exit motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 15 PCU
signal paper exit motor.
(POM_B) Paper exit motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 17 PCU
(POM_XA) Paper exit motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 13 PCU
(POM_XB) Paper exit motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 19 PCU
/POMCNT Paper exit motor set Controls the paper exit Current: Current: CN10 11 PCU
signal
PPD1 Resist front transport Detects resist front Pass – CN5 13 PCU
detection signal. transport.
PPD2 Resist transport Detects resist transport. Pass – CN5 14 PCU
detection signal
/PRM_A Fusing pressure release Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN16 24 PCU
motor control signal fusing pressure release
motor.
/PRM_B Fusing pressure release Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN16 26 PCU
motor.
/PRM_XA Fusing pressure release Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN16 28 PCU
motor.
/PRM_XB Fusing pressure release Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN16 30 PCU
motor.
/PRTPD Right paper exit tray Detects paper presence Paper – CN7 2 PCU
paper presence in the right paper exit presence
detection signal tray.
/PRTPDout Right paper exit tray Detects paper presence Paper – CN1 6 PCU MFPC
paper presence in the right paper exit presence
detection signal (to tray.
MFPC) (to MFPC)
PSFM_LD Power cooling fan lock Detects the power Normal Lock CN5 24 PCU
detection signal cooling fan lock.
PSFM_V Power cooling fan Controls the power Stop Operating CN5 20 PCU
PSFM2_LD Power cooling fan 2 lock Detects the power Normal Lock CN5 28 PCU
detection signal cooling fan 2 lock.
PSFM2_V Power cooling fan 2 Controls the power Stop Operating CN5 32 PCU
/PTC_CLK Clock signal for PTC AC Controls the PTC AC – – CN15 9 PCU
output.
PTC_ERR PTC output trouble PTC output trouble – Trouble CN15 7 PCU
signal
PTC_HEAT PTC heater control Controls the PTC heater. – Heater ON CN20 23 PCU
signal
RCFM_LD Rear cooling fan lock Detects the rear cooling Normal Lock CN16 25 PCU
detection signal fan lock.
RCFM_V# Rear cooling fan Controls the rear cooling Stop Operating CN16 21 PCU
operation signal fan operation.
REGS_F Registration F side light Controls light emitting on – – CN5 5 PCU Analog
emitting control signal the registration F side.
REGS_F_LED# BK process control BK process control – – CN5 7 PCU Analog
output F side signal output F side
REGS_R Registration R side light Controls light emitting on – – CN5 6 PCU Analog
emitting control signal the registration R side.
REGS_R_LED# BK process control R BK process control – – CN5 8 PCU Analog
side signal output R side
RES_DSK Reset signal Reset control – – CN8 14 PCU DESK

"L" "H" No. name
RES_INS Reset signal Reset control – – CN8 7 PCU Inserter
RES_LCC Reset signal Reset control – – CN8 20 PCU LCC
ROCD DSPF lower door open/ Detects open/close of Open Close CN1 18 DSPFcnt
close detection the lower door.
(RRM_A) Resist motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 25 PCU
signal resist motor.
(RRM_B) Resist motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 27 PCU
/RRM_CNT Resist motor set current Controls the resist motor Current: Current: CN10 21 PCU
select control signal set current select. Large Small
(RRM_XA) Resist motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 23 PCU
(RRM_XB) Resist motor control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 29 PCU
RSV_DAT Serial communication Reception data – – CN1 9 PCU
receive data signal
RxD_DSK Serial I/F data Serial I/F data (Send) – – CN8 11 PCU DESK
RxD_INS Serial I/F data Serial I/F data (Send) – – CN8 4 PCU Inserter
RxD_LCC Serial I/F data Serial I/F data (Send) – – CN8 17 PCU LCC
SC_ACK SCU communication SCU communication – – CN18 25 PCU (Not used)
(input) signal (input)
SCK Serial communication LSU serial – – CN1 14 PCU
clock communication clock
(SELIN1) Multiplexer control signal Controls the multiplexer – – CN7 3 PCU Right door
1 output condition.
2 output condition.
3 output condition.
SHPOS Shifter home position Detects the shifter home – Home CN17 14 PCU
detection signal position.
SIN3 Multiplexer output signal Multiplexer output – – CN7 4 PCU
SOCD DSPF open/close Detects open/close of Close Open CN1 13 DSPFcnt
detection signal the DSPF unit.
SPFM* Transport motor Drives the transport – – CN16 3, 4, 5, SCNcnt RSPF
motor. 6, 7, 23 installation
model
SPM* Paper feed reverse Drives the paper feed – – CN16 8, 9, SCNcnt RSPF
motor reverse motor. 10, 11, installation
12 model
SPPD1 Document detection Detects paper pass. Detection – CN16 1 SCNcnt RSPF
sensor installation
model
SPPD2 DSPF document pass Detects paper pass. Detects – CN1 9 DSPFcnt
detection 2 paper pass.
sensor installation
model
sensor installation
model
sensor installation
model
SPRS Pressure release Controls the pressure OFF ON CN16 13 SCNcnt RSPF
solenoid release solenoid. installation
model
SPWS Document width sensor Detects document width. – – CN16 17 SCNcnt RSPF
installation
model, Analog
signal
SRRC PS clutch Controls the PS clutch. OFF ON CN16 15 SCNcnt RSPF
installation
model
SRVC Reverse clutch Controls the reverse OFF ON CN16 16 SCNcnt RSPF
clutch. installation
model

"L" "H" No. name
STMPS Stamp solenoid Controls the stamp – Stamping CN16 14 SCNcnt RSPF
solenoid. installation
model
/TC_CLK# TC high voltage PWB Basic clock of the TC – – CN15 8 PCU
clock signal high voltage PWB
/TC_DATA# Data signal to the TC Data to the TC high – – CN15 6 PCU
high voltage PWB voltage PWB
/TC_LD# TC high voltage PWB TC high voltage PWB – – CN15 10 PCU
data load signal data revision
TCS_C Toner control C voltage Toner control C voltage – – CN11 27 PCU Analog
signal
TCS_K Toner control BK voltage Toner control BK voltage – – CN11 7 PCU Analog
signal
TCS_M Toner control M voltage Toner control M voltage – – CN11 8 PCU Analog
signal
TCS_Y Toner control Y voltage Toner control Y voltage – – CN11 28 PCU Analog
signal
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the paper exit Full – CN17 12 PCU
signal full.
TH_EX1_IN Fusing section EX1 Fusing section EX1 – – CN18 10 PCU Analog
thermistor voltage signal thermistor voltage
TH_LM_IN Fusing section LM Fusing section LM – – CN18 9 PCU Analog
TH_M Temperature humidity Detects the temperature – – CN7 9 PCU
sensor temperature of the temperature
detection signal humidity sensor.
TH_UM1_IN Fusing section UM1 Fusing section UM1 – – CN18 8 PCU Analog
(detection) (detection)
TH_UM2_IN Fusing section UM1 Fusing section UM1 – – CN18 5 PCU (Not used)
(detection) (detection)
TH_UMCS_IN Fusing section UM1 Fusing section UM1 – – CN18 1 PCU Analog
(compensation) (compensation)
TH_US_IN Fusing section US Fusing section US – – CN18 4 PCU Analog
TH1_LSU LSU section temperature Detects the temperature – – CN1 7 PCU Analog
detection in the LSU section.
/TNM_BK_A Toner motor BK control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN14 19 PCU
signal toner motor BK.
/TNM_BK_B Toner motor BK control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN14 15 PCU
/TNM_BK_XA Toner motor BK control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN14 17 PCU
/TNM_BK_XB Toner motor BK control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN14 13 PCU
/TNM_C_A Toner motor C control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN14 20 PCU
signal toner motor C.
/TNM_C_B Toner motor C control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN14 16 PCU
/TNM_C_XA Toner motor C control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN14 18 PCU
/TNM_C_XB Toner motor C control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN14 14 PCU
/TNM_M_A Toner motor M control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN14 6 PCU
signal toner motor M.
/TNM_M_B Toner motor M control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN14 10 PCU
/TNM_M_XA Toner motor M control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN14 8 PCU
/TNM_M_XB Toner motor M control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN14 12 PCU
/TNM_Y_A Toner motor Y control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN14 5 PCU
signal toner motor Y.
/TNM_Y_B Toner motor Y control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN14 9 PCU
/TNM_Y_XA Toner motor Y control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN14 7 PCU
/TNM_Y_XB Toner motor Y control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN14 11 PCU
TRANS_DAT Serial communication Transmission data – – CN1 11 PCU
send data signal

"L" "H" No. name
TRANS_RST LSU communication The PCU resets LSU Reset – CN1 16 PCU
reset signal communication.
/TRC_DSK Paper transport timing Controls the paper Transport – CN8 15 PCU DESK
signal transport timing.
/TRC_LCC Paper transport timing Controls the paper Transport – CN8 22 PCU LCC
signal transport timing.
TSG_BK Toner density BK control Toner density BK control – – CN11 9 PCU Analog
voltage signal voltage
TSG_C Toner density C control Toner density C control – – CN11 29 PCU Analog
TSG_M Toner density M control Toner density M control – – CN11 10 PCU Analog
TSG_Y Toner density Y control Toner density Y control – – CN11 30 PCU Analog
TxD_DSK Serial I/F data Serial I/F data (send) – – CN8 10 PCU DESK
TxD_INS Serial I/F data Serial I/F data (send) – – CN8 3 PCU Inserter
TxD_LCC Serial I/F data Serial I/F data (send) – – CN8 16 PCU LCC
(WEB_M1) Web motor control signal Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN18 15 PCU
web motor.
(WEB_M2) Web motor control signal Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN18 16 PCU
web motor.
WEBD Web end detection Detects the web end. – END CN18 13 PCU
signal
/WH_PR Dehumidifier heater Controls the Heater OFF – CN4 7 PCU
relay operation signal dehumidifier heater
relay.
(WTNM_1) Waste toner motor Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN16 11 PCU
control signal waste toner motor.
(WTNM_2) Waste toner motor Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN16 13 PCU
control signal waste toner motor.

MX-5141N
[15] TOOL LIST Service Manual
Name Part code Note

Color copy test chart UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11
SIT chart UKOG-0280FCZZ/UKOG-0280FCZ1
Gray test chart UKOG-0162FCZZ
Kynar powder UKOG-0123FCZZ For transfer belt
Grease (HANARL FL-955R) UKOG-0299FCZZ
Conduction grease (FLOIL GE-676) UKOG-0012QSZZ Other shaft
Grease (FLOIL G-313S) UKOG-0307FCZZ
Grease (JFE552) UKOG-0235FCZZ
Stearic acid powder UKOG-0312FCZZ OPC drum
Grease (FLOIL GP-501MR) UKOG-0013QSZZ RSPF paper feed roller shaft
Grease (MOLYKOTE X5-6020) UKOG-0158FCZZ
Grease (MOLYKOTE BR-2 Plus) UKOG-0097FCZZ
MX-5141N TOOL LIST 15 – 1

LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
a
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm Sn-In-Ag-Bi i
Sn-Cu-Ni n
Sn-Ag-Sb s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommended.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting-point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT © XXXX
solder is about 220°C, which BYSHARP
is about CORPORATION
40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
#/092)'(4 © "9 3(!20 #/20/2!4)/.
!LL RIGHTS RESERVED
0RODUCED IN *APAN FOR ELECTRONIC $ISTRIBUTION
.O PART OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE REPRODUCED
STORED IN A RETRIEVAL SYSTEM OR TRANSMITTED
IN ANY FORM OR BY ANY MEANS
ELECTRONIC MECHANICAL PHOTOCOPYING RECORDING OR OTHERWISE
WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE PUBLISHER
4RADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
v -ICROSOFT¤ 7INDOWS¤ 7INDOWS¤ 7INDOWS¤ -E 7INDOWS .4¤
7INDOWS¤ 7INDOWS¤ 80 7INDOWS¤ 6ISTA 7INDOWS¤
7INDOWS¤ 3ERVER 7INDOWS¤ 3ERVER AND )NTERNET %XPLORER¤
ARE REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OR TRADEMARKS OF -ICROSOFT #ORPORATION IN THE 53!
AND OTHER COUNTRIES
v 0OST3CRIPT IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF !DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED
v -ACINTOSH -AC /3 !PPLE4ALK %THER4ALK ,ASER 7RITER AND 3AFARI ARE REGISTERED
TRADEMARKS OR TRADEMARKS OF !PPLE #OMPUTER )NC
v )"- 0#!4 AND 0OWER 0# ARE TRADEMARKS OF )NTERNATIONAL "USINESS -ACHINES
#ORPORATION
v !CROBAT¤ 2EADER #OPYRIGHT¤ !DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED !LL RIGHTS
RESERVED !DOBE THE !DOBE LOGO !CROBAT AND THE !CROBAT LOGO ARE TRADEMARKS OF
!DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED
v 0#, IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF THE (EWLETT 0ACKARD #OMPANY
v 3HARPDESK IS A TRADEMARK OF 3HARP #ORPORATION
v !LL OTHER TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHTS ARE THE PROPERTY OF THEIR RESPECTIVE OWNERS
SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions CS Promotion
Center II
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
First Edition 2013 May
Latest Edition 2014 June

Sharp MX 5141n SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sharp MX 5141n SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sharp MX 5141n SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

3 ‘14/Jun

DIGITAL FULL COLOR

NOTE FOR SERVICING

This document has been published to be used

2. Warning for servicing

MX-5141N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

6) Place of much dust

7) Place near a wall

8) Unstable or irregular surface

MX-5141N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

Tapping screw (for plastic)

MX-5141N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

MX-PNX5A/B/C/D MX-FNX9 MX-PNX1A/B/C/D

MX-PUX1 MX-PF10 MX-FX11 AR-SU1 MX-FWX1 MX-EB11 MX-FR42

MX-FR42U MX-EC50 MX-EB12 N MX-USX1 MX-USX5 MX-US10 MX-US50

MX-USA0 MX-UN01A MX-UN05A MX-UN10A MX-UN50A MX-UN1HA MX-AM10

MX-AMX1 MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-KB11 N

MX-5141N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

*1: No support in some region

MX-5141N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

STD: Standard equipment

MX-5141N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 3

Paper feed section Main unit Drawer Multi

I. Operation panel Compliant regulation IEEE802.11 n/g/b

J. Controller board 2. Copy functions

SD Compact MFP PWB HDD*1

*1: HDD capacity depends on procurement and sourcing status.

Memory area Boot/Program area

Main power SW Sub power SW

*1: Result may change depending on conditions.

M. Wireless LAN specification

Compliant regulation IEEE802.11 n/g/b

PDL (Command) Installed font Option font

D.Address registration 20%

1. Supply system table

C. Europe/East Europe/Russia/Australia/New Zealand/Korea

MX-5141N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

2. Maintenance parts list

MX-5141N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 2

MX-5141N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 3

MX-5141N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 4

However, when the copy/print quantity is large and the developer/

Maximum printable quantity

MX-5141N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 5

Standard environmental Temperature 20 - 25 °C

MX-5141N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 6

Output tray Finisher*2

Main power switch

Finisher (large stacker)*2 Saddle finisher*2

MX-5141N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 1

No. Name function/Operation

C.Internal operation parts

MX-5141N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 2

When the fax expansion kit is installed

No. Name function/Operation

MX-5141N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 3

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-5141N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 4

Finisher (large stacker)2 Saddle finisher2

Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the developing roller main pole $7'(9(92B/B.

7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller $7'(9(92B/B<

. & 0 < (;(&87(

2-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 0+95,'6(77,1$1'287387

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B0

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B0

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B0